SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL BY FRANK W. MACEY ARCHITECT E. & F. N. SPON, LIMITED, 125 STRAND SPON & CHAMBERLAIN, 12 CORTLANDT STREET 1898 PREFACE THIS Work is published in the hope that it may be found useful as a Reference Book for Architects. FKANK W. MACEY, ARCHITECT. 1 LOMBARD COURT, GrRACECHURCH STREET, E.G. January 1898. -85370 Errata. Page 48, line 3 from top, read 1 part fine shingle. 55, line 9 from foot, read 1 to 4 parts, t 96, line 17 from top, read 1 part sand instead of 6 parts ballast and sand 345, clause 55, the side note omitted should be Iron gates. 502, line 16 from top, read 1 part. CONTENTS. PAGE EXPLANATORY NOTES . . V ... . v 1 SPECIFICATION OF WORKS AND GENERAL CON- DITIONS . 4 PRELIMINARY ITEMS (INCLUDING SHORING AND HOUSE BREAKER) 5 DRAINAGE (INCLUDING RAIN-WATER WELL AND REPORTS) . 21 EXCAVATOR (INCLUDING CONCRETE FLOORS, ROOFS, STAIRS AND WALLS) ..... . . . . 39 PAVIOR . ."';., . , ; . J| 51 BRICKLAYER (INCLUDING FLINTWORK, RIVER AND OTHER WALLING, SPRING WELLS, STORAGE TANKS, FOUNTAINS, FILTERS, TERRA COTTA AND FAIENCE) . . ; . 60 MASON . . .. . . . ; . , ,. 103 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER (INCLUDING FENCING AND PILING) . . . .- . . . 136 SMITH AND FOUNDER (INCLUDING HEATING, FIRE HYDRANTS, STABLE AND Cow HOUSE FITTINGS) . .329 SLATER (INCLUDING SLATE MASON) . . . .384 TILER .390 STONE TILER 394 SHINGLER 395 Vlll CONTENTS. THATCHER PLUMBER (INCLUDING HOT WATER) . ZINCWORKER COPPERSMITH PLASTERER GASFITTER BELLHANGER GLAZIER ........ PAINTER . ,.... PAPERHANGER GENERAL REPAIRS AND ALTERATIONS VENTILATION ROAD-MAKING ELECTRIC LIGHTING FORM OF TENDER INDEX PAGE 396 397 434 438 441 458 465 467 476 489 492 495 497 511 527 529 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL EXPLANATORY KOTES. BY carefully perusing these few preliminary remarks, much assistance will be obtained in digesting the contents of this work, and in following the method upon which it is compiled. This work is intended to comprise as far as possible a "Model Specification," divided into "Model Clauses," which may be applied generally to the various details of recognised work, without referring specially to any one class of building; but ecclesiastical work in its special requirements is not intended to come within its scope. Many of the " Clauses " readily explain themselves, but where the description is somewhat involved, an explanation is given as a footnote under the clause in question. The clauses are set in from the margin, the notes preceding and following them being written across the page. The sketches are net drawn to scale, the object being merely to make the descriptions more intelligible. The " Clauses " describe the usual methods of executing work, the sizes given being those mostly employed in practice for good class work. The items in brackets as well as many of the footnotes, show various alternate ways of executing similar work. With regard to the scantlings for roof timbers, floor joists, girders and similar constructional parts, which vary in their dimensions to an almost unlimited extent according to the loads supported and distances spanned, one definite example only is given, which with the requisite modifications, may be applied to any work in question. A specification should not supersede the particulars shown upon the drawings, but explain more fully in detail their purport. A clear and full specification, but at the same time concise and to the point, will obviate many mistakes arising in a building when in course of erection. If full and many detail drawings be supplied, a specification may be much curtailed. Plans should have every important measurement figured upon them, the thickness of walls and concrete, the height and sizes of rooms, doors, windows, openings and any other important part. But if the plans be not drawn in sufficient detail, or be to too small a scale, then the specifi- cation may describe these particulars, which would otherwise be shown upon the drawings. B 2 EXPLANATORY NOTES. A specification should be illustrated by rough marginal sketches to any portion of the work where they would assist the description. A complete specification may be described as being comprised of three separate parts : 1. The General Conditions. 2. The Specification proper. 3. The Form of Contract. The " Specification proper " is that part which relates to the descrip- tion and the dimensions of the actual work. The " General Conditions " and the " .Form of Contract " should only embrace the terms upon which a contract is given. As these terms may be so varied in their requirements and of such extensive range, it is thought that the purport of this work will be carried out without further reference to them. The " Specification proper " then, should embody every item of work which may in any way affect the Estimate. It is for this reason that, under the heading " Preliminary Items " commencing on page 5, certain clauses will be found which generally appear in the majority of specifi- cations under the " General Conditions." In a specification, the description of a building is taken under separate " Headings " or " Trades," commencing with the " Preliminary Items " which do not actually come under any one trade, but in their effect often refer to all. Then the trades embracing the structure are taken, such as " Excavator," " Bricklayer," " Mason," " Carpenter," " Slater " ; following on with the trades referring to the interior fittings and requirements, and finally with the glazing, painting and decoration. It is best to describe under each trade, as far as possible, the work referring to each separate story by itself under that trade, from founda- tions to roof. In some trades the work may.be described mainly from the roof downwards, as in Plumber. It will both shorten and simplify a specification if certain complete items of work be described in their entirety, without separating the description under the individual trades to which they should more properly come. Thus, a stone staircase, being described under Mason, may include in the description the hand- rail, the balusters, and even the painting. In a lead-lined cistern, the bearers, the casing, and the lead work may be described under the one trade, as in Plumber. Many other items will suggest themselves, which will be simplified by being treated in a similar manner. Each trade is started with a "Preamble" or "General Clauses," which apply generally to all the work under that trade, the actual work following on in detail. Each distinct clause under each separate trade should bear a descrip- tive marginal title and a number, so that any clause may be referred to from any one part of the specification to another. This will also be found useful when calling the contractor's attention to any one special part of the specification. In all trades specify distinctly the class of materials and the labour to be expended ; thus, in " Carpenter and Joiner " state if the work be in deal, oak or other wood ; and whether wrought, framed or circular. In " Mason " give the labour and the class of stone as Bath, York or other stone and state, whether dragged, rubbed, tooled or otherwise worked. EXPLANATORY NOTES. 3 In commencing a specification give a short description of the nature of the work, see clause No. 1 under " Preliminary Items." It will assist the contractor in forming his estimate. Before designing or describing a building, acquaintance should be made with the requirements of any Local Acts and Bye-laws referring to buildings. Test holes must be dug to ascertain the nature of the strata upon which a building is to be erected, before the foundation can be properly described. To save much repetition in this work, many cross references are given, which refer to other clauses under the various trades ; and for the sake of brevity, when several trades are included under one heading, the first of those trades only is mentioDed in a reference : thus, when a reference is given to a clause under the heading of " Carpenter, Joiner, and Ironmonger," the trade " Carpenter " only is mentioned. As an additional facility for easy reference to the clauses, numbers in brackets are placed at the head of the various pages, showing at a glance the numbers of the clauses embraced by those pages. B 2 SPECIFICATION OF WORKS to be done for . John Smith, Esq., of Woodside Lodge, Grange Road, Bedford, in pulling down the EXISTING BUILDINGS known as No. 3 EASTLEIGH ROAD, CROYDON, erecting entirely NEW BUILDINGS upon the site, together with various OUTHOUSES, PAVINGS and FENCING ; and making certain ALTERATIONS and REPAIRS to the adjoining premises, under the superintendence of MR. RALPH ROBINSON, Architect, 26 Plaistow Buildings, January 1897. London, N.W. The following is a list of the signed contract drawings : - No. 1. Ground plan, basement and cellars. No. 2. First and second floor plans. No. 3. Roof plan. No. 4. Elevations. No. 5. Sections and details. The word " Employer " shall mean Mr. John Smith, of Woodside Lodge, Grange Road, Bedford. The word " Builder " or " Contractor " shall mean Messrs. Leon Brothers, of Thames Works, South Street, London. The word " Architect " shall mean Mr. Ralph Robinson, of 26 Plaistow Buildings, London, N.W. ; and it shall be he who is referred to, when no name is specifically mentioned. Note Fill in the correct date, the description of the work, and the list of drawings, together with the correct names and addresses of the employer, builder and architect. GENERAL CONDITIONS. Here may follow the general legal clauses and conditions referred to under the Explanatory Notes. A " Form of Tender " will be found on the last page of the book. (6) PRELIMINARY ITEMS. THE Preliminary Items apply generally to the various trades. When a new building has to be erected upon the site covered by an existing building, it is sometimes customary to engage a separate contractor, known in the trade as a " House Breaker," to pull down and remove the existing building ; selling to him at the same time the old material. According to the value of the old material, there may be a credit due from the House Breaker to the Employer, or vice versa. A description of the work when let separately in this way will be found under clause No. 80. Nature of work. (1) The work consists mainly in clearing the site of all existing structures, and erecting a new building, together with outhouses and stables, and laying various new pavings and drainage. Give a short general description of the work comprised in the specification, it will assist a contractor in grasping quickly the re- quirements. locality. (2) The site is situated (e.g.) within three miles of the St. Neots Eailway Station on the Great Northern Railway, and the approach is mostly uphill. State the nearest railway station if the work be in the country, as cartage may have to be taken into account. Visit site, (3) The contractor is to visit the site and make himself thoroughly acquainted with the nature and re- quirements of the case, so that no item may be omitted from his estimate, although not specifically mentioned in detail. Dimensions not (4) Where the scantlings or dimensions of work are shown. neither specified, nor shown on the drawings, they will be settled by the architect. Head conditions. (5) The contractor is to read through the conditions of contract, and allow a price in his estimate for any item he may deem necessary. Special work. (6) The contractor is to allow for any additional expense to which he may be put owing to the special nature of the work, the mode of execution, and the time of completion. PRELIMINARY ITEMS. (7) Estimate in (7) The estimate for this work is to be made up in several amounts. ( e g) t ^ ree separa t e amounts. The several and indi- vidual works to be included under each of these amounts are specified under three separate headings, as sub-speci- fications. The general conditions of contract, prelimi- nary items, general clauses, and the general clauses and descriptions of work and compositions of materials mentioned under any trade, are to be taken as referring equally to each of these separate sub-specifications. The estimate is to include for all work done previously to signing the contract. This clause saves repeating many general items and descriptions when the nature of the work is similar, but under separate and distinct headings. Date of (8) The building is to be completely finished, fit for completion. occupation by (say) the first day of January 1898, or such other time as the architect may allow in writing, owing to any special circumstances occurring. If the works be not completed by that date, or such other date as permitted by the architect, then the contractor is to pay and allow the employer the sum of (say) 5 per day as agreed and liquidated damages, for every day during which the work remains uncompleted. Delay con- sequent upon strikes only excepted, and in such case the architect is to determine such extension of time. Note. Fill in the correct date of completion and the amount of damages. Sometimes specific dates are mentioned for different portions of the work; such as the foundations to be in by a stated time, the joists to each floor to be on by other stated periods, and the roof covered in by a further date. Damages vary in amount according to the im- portance of the work. Payment. (9) Payment will be made at the rate of 80 per cent, upon the value of the work executed and fixed in position, upon the certificate of the architect until the completion of the work ; when an additional 15 per cent, will be paid, and the remaining 5 per cent, will be paid at the expiration of six months after the date of the architect's certificate that the whole work has been completed. According to the nature of the work the percentage of the payments may vary, as also the period in which the balance is held in hand. Keep in repair. (10) The work is to be kept in repair for a period of six months after the date of the architect's certificate of completion ; and any damage, defects, stains or imperfections of whatever description that may arise during that period, owing to carelessness, defective workmanship or materials, is to be made good at the contractor's expense. (15) PKELIMINAKY ITEMS. 7 Usually the time varies for keeping the work in repair from three to twelve months. Insurance. (11) Insure the building in an approved office at builder's risk, against fire to the amount of (say) 3000, until the building is roofed in, when the insurance is to be increased to the full amount of the contract, and kept insured in that sum until the architect's certificate of" completion has been received. The policy is to be deposited with the architect, and taken out in the joint names of the contractor and the employer. Note. Fill in the correct amount of insurance. If the work consist only of additions to an old building already insured to an amount which would cover the cost of the new erection, then the insurance company will only require that an extra building risk insurance be taken out upon the amouut already insured. Acts. (12) The work is to be done in conformity with the London Building Act, 1894, Amendments and Bye- Laws, and in conformity with any Local Acts and Bye-Laws, to the satisfaction of the London County Council, the District Surveyor, or any Local Surveyor to an Authority. If the work be not within the area of the county of London, then it will only require to be done to the satisfaction of the County Council and any local Acts or Authorities to such other district. Notices and fees. (13) Give notice to the County Council, the district surveyor, the parish, local or other authorities arid officers, as well as to the gas, water and electric current supply companies. Obtain all licences and consents, and pay all their fees. The area of the building, together with the number of floors in height, should be mentioned for the contractor's guidance in estimating, if the building be situate within the county of London area ; the fees to the district surveyors being thereby governed. Taskwork. (14) No part of the work to be let as task work, or sub-let to other persons, unless upon the written authority of the architect. When work is sub-let by a contractor, it is often scamped by the sub-contractor, and it is very difficult for the client to obtain redress. Copy of plans, (15) The contractor shall, at his own expense, make copies of all drawings, specifications and details required for the work. Due facilities will be afforded for this purpose. This clause is required when the architect, for some special reason, does not supply the contractor with copies of plans. .8 PRELIMINARY ITEMS. (16) Foreman and (16) An approved and competent foreman is to be copies of plans. ^ e p^ always on the works while in progress, and he is to keep copies of all drawings, detail drawings, specifi- cations, letters and other instructions at the works. It will be found to be a great convenience, when superintending the works, to be able to refer to these documents. Materials, labour, (17) Provide all materials, carriage, cartage, hoisting, labour, plant, tackle, tools, machinery, engines, mortar mills, wheel-barrows, mortar-boards, tarpaulins, tem- plates and staging. Erect good and sufficient scaffold- ing, with braces, struts, boards, planks, ledgers, putlogs, cords and ladders. Include for men's lodgings, travel- ling expenses, and all things necessary for the due, proper and complete execution of the works. Eemove all surplus material and plant as and when the archi- tect may direct. Men's lodgings and travelling expenses are only required when a town contractor is employed to do work in the country. Quality of (18) The materials and workmanship to be of the besfc ( l ualitv ancl execution. The word " best " is to be understood as meaning that there is no superior article in the market and no better class of workmanship. Materials referred (19) Any material or composition of materials de- scr ibed under one trade and only referred to under another trade, is to be similar in quality and com- position. This will save describing similar materials more than once. Measure materials (20) The composition of materials to be measured in boxes. separately in boxes of selected sizes, then mixed dry, and water added afterwards. storage (21) The method of bringing all materials on the of materials. ground, and the position in which they are to be stacked, shall be decided by the architect ; and suit the convenience of the employer. The employer may wish to carry on his trade during the execution of the work. Framing. (22) The framing and putting together of all work, such as carpenters, joiners, masons, bricklayers and other trades, to be approved by the architect before being executed. There is always a right and a wrong way of jointing work together. (30) PREL1MINAEY ITEMS. Attend upon all trades. Details. (23) Full sized details with detailed instructions will be supplied the contractor for all and every part of the work ; the contractor is to apply for and obtain these particulars before putting the work in hand. stock mouldings. (24) No stock mouldings or other stock articles will be used. This clause would be used only when the entire building is erected to special details, and must be modified accordingly. (25) Attend upon, cut away for, and make good after all trades, in and by all trades, including forming and cutting all holes and chases, cutting away for and making good after plumber, gas-fitter, hot- water engineer, sanitary engineer and electrical engineer. These trades may be let to separate contractors, when the provisional amounts allowed for them will be deducted in full. It may be beneficial to the work to let these trades separately. Temporary sheds. (26) Erect temporary sheds for the men to work under, and for the protection of materials, and remove when directed by the architect. Latrine. (27) Provide a temporary latrine for use of work- men ; keep it clean, empty when required, disinfect, and remove completely when directed by the architect. Clerk of works' (28) Provide a temporary timber-framed office for the use of Clerk of Works, (say) 12 feet square, made with studding, external weather boarding and internal match boarding, with felt filled in between, and properly secured, lighted, ventilated, floored and roofed, and supplied with approved grate and chimney. Allow for firing, attendance, and a suitable desk with two drawers, locks and keys, stool, hat-pegs, lavatory, and dry earth urinal and closet, and remove when directed by the architect ; and allow (say) 3 for other office instruments and requirements. A Clerk of Works is not always required for a building. (29) Provide for all lights, beacons, guards and barriers, also for day and night watchmen ; and allow for any other precautions for the prevention of acci- dents and losses. lights and watchmen. A night watchman is only occasionally required. Coke and braziers. (30) Provide coke, firing and braziers in every room to assist in the drying out of the building, for a period of two months' time of 24 hours per day. But care is to be taken not to damage the work. When work is in a great hurrv this is sometimes essential. 10 PRELIMINARY ITEMS. (31) Smell of paint (31) Provide water and pans filled with cut hay, to assist in taking off the smell of paint. This may be necessary for a quick occupation of the premises. Overtime. (32) Provide for candles, lights, and men working overtime if found necessary, so as to complete the contract by the time stated. Architect's tests. (33) The architect shall have liberty, to make all tests necessary to satisfy himself, that the materials and workmanship of every kind are in accordance with the specification. All labour and materials, together with a set of scales and weights and other appliances for this purpose, are to be supplied and allowed for by the contractor as part of the works ; such as for removing, weighing, repairing and making good after the architect may have broken, cut into or damaged, when testing at any time the materials, work or other parts of the building. If there be a question as to the weight of glass, lead or other mate- rials, this clause will be -found useful. Hydraulic tests. (34) Attend upon and make all hydraulic tests, and such other tests as the Surveyor to the Board of Trade may from time to time require. This is a very special item, and would refer more to engineers' work under the Board of Trade. Analyst's fees. (35) Allow the p.c. sum of (say) 10 for analyst's fees, for testing the quality of the cement, paint or other material. The contractor is to add to this amount for his own profit, and the supply and carriage of samples required by the analyst. Protect work from (36) Cover up and protect from injury, all stone, injury. brick, tile, terra-cotta and other work, including all wood and ornamental work. Put tile pieces to stone steps and stairs, and wood pieces to wood stairs. Box up hand- rails and newels. Case up all reveals and mouldings. Cover up walls. (37) Cover up walling and other work during night- time, frost or inclement weather, with straw (or felt) and wood planks laid on top. Make good all injury from whatever cause to whatever part, more especially after injury from frost to the pointing of brick, stone or other work. Tarpaulin roof. (38) Cover over the old building when the roof is removed, with a tarpaulin and skeleton scaffold-framed temporary roof to protect the walls from wet, with (42) PEELIMINARY ITEMS. II side sail cloths and fixings as a precaution against dust to adjoining owners ; and remove when directed by the architect. Often requisite when parts of an old building are rebuilt or a new story added. If the sides of any rooms be exposed, clause No. 39 would be modified to the building in question. Board up adjoining (39) Board up, canvas and line with stout lining owner's rooms. p a p er ove r the exposed sides of rooms to adjoining owner's premises ; and keep out the weather. Remove boarding when directed by the architect. This is necessary when party walls are removed, and sometimes when additions are made to an existing building. Hoarding. (40) Provide, erect and maintain a suitable and sufficient hoarding (say) 8 ft. high, with requisite gantry, fans, cart and wicket gates, locks, fastenings and three keys, one for use of architect, together with a bell and letter box. Form plank footways, post and rail fence, to the satisfaction of vestry or local authorities. The hoarding and fencing to run for one length of (say) 50 ft., with two return ends of (say) 5 ft. each. Remove when directed by the architect. Note. The hoarding is not to be let to an advertising contractor ; but the employer reserves to himself the right of so doing. Note. Fill in correct lengths of hoarding and footways. Hoarding is mostly required in towns and cities ; the height will vary according to local requirements. Fence in site. (41) Enclose the site with an approved temporary post and rail fence, with gates and fastenings, as a pre- caution against workmen trespassing upon the adjoining properties ; and remove when directed by the architect. Necessary in some parts of suburban towns, or country. Shoring. (42) Shore up to the satisfaction of the parish autho- rities and the architect, all party and other walls, floors, roofs, partitions and other works where required to any part, either of the building on the site, or those belonging to adjoining owners, and remove all such shorings as and when directed by the architect. The shoring to consist of all requisite dogs, hoop iron, hooks, rakers, sole pieces, wall pieces, braces, struts, needles, cleats, wedges and posts. The shores to be of fir timber ; the wall pieces and braces of deal ; the needles, cleats, wedges and sole pieces of oak. This is a general clause, but if it be necessary to describe the shoring in < detail, which is the correct way, the following notes will assist in specifying the various parts to each set of shores. Raking shores may be at angles of 60 to 75 with the building, 12 PRELIMINARY ITEMS. (42) but 40 is the best angle if obtainable 12 ft. to 15 ft. apart. Each set of shores may be Walls 15 ft. to 30 ft. high require 2 raking shores in each set. 30 ft. 40 ft, 3 40 ft. and upwards 4 The sizes of the rakers to Walls 15 ft. to 20 ft. high may be 4 in. x 4 in. or 5 in. x 5 in. 20 ft. 30 ft. 30 ft. 35 ft. 35 ft. 40 ft. 40 ft. 50 ft. 50 ft. and upwards 9 in. x 4J in. 6 in. x 6 in. 7 in. x 7 in. 6 in. x 12 in. 8 in. x 8 in. 9 in. x 9 in. 12 in. x 9 in. The sole piece should not be quite at right angles to the shores. The top needle should be at least 2 ft. down from the top of wall. The braces may be 1 ft. x 6 in. (to -9 in.) timbers, and placed just below the needles. The wall piece should be 3 in. thick by a similar width as the shores. Here are three sketches of raking shores : ore or Wall Jbifct, CltaK footing tfpfj< When the top raker cannot be obtained in one length, the lower part of it may be at a different angle to the top or " rider " part, the joint being wedged with oak. Here is a sketch of a flying shore : Flying shores may be spaced from 10 ft. to 15 ft. apart, with spans up to 33 ft., and placed three-fourths up the height of wall. If the span be greater, then pitch pine must be used for the horizontal strut, as it is difficult to get Dantzic fir in greater lengths than about 33 ft. Flying shores are em- ployed for supporting a wall when there is a wall opposite from which to shore. Flying shores 15 ft. span require 6 in. X 4 in. principal struts, with 4 in. x 4 in. rankers. (47) PRELIMINARY ITEMS. Flying shores 15 ft. to 33 ft. span require 6 in. x 6 in. to 9 in. x 9 in. principal struts, with 6 in. x 4 in. to 9 in. x4J in. rakers. Here is a sketch of needle shoring supporting a wall while being underpinned. The needles may be about 12 in. square fir tim- bers, with similar posts and sole pieces. Distance of needles apart, from 5 ft. to 7 ft. Boiled iron joists may be employed in place of fir needles. ?ote piece Faculties to other contractors. (43) The contractor is to give every facility and assistance to other tradesmen employed on the premises, and is to allow them the use of his plant and scaffolding ; but the contractor is to be responsible for the manage- ment of the work, and his work fitting in with the other tradesmen's work. This clause applies when some of the trades are let to separate con- tractors. Carrying on employer's business. (44) The contractor is to give every facility to the employer for carrying on his business upon the pre- mises during the alterations, and the contractor is to interfere with it as little as possible. Such as with shops, hotels and other business premises. Workmen not to (45) The workmen are not to wander about the gar- ^ en ' or a ^ ou ^ the nouse i n anv part, except where abso- lutely necessary for the alterations ; and the contractor is to make special provision to enforce this rule. Inventory. (46) Allow for an auctioneer's fee for taking an in- ventory with the employer's representative of the furni- ture and fittings in the house at the time of signing the contract, and for adjusting the statement upon the contractor giving up the works. Any article found damaged or missing shall be renewed or reinstated at the contractor's expense. The contractor is to store up in the building the furniture and fittings mentioned in the inventory, and cover up and protect them from damage and damp. In additions and alterations to premises, it may be convenient to the employer not to'warehouse the furniture. Take down old buildings. (47) Take down the whole of the old buildings, sheds and erections, together with all fence, party and other walls, take up all pavings and other obstacles found on the site and clear away : but certain of the old buildings are to be left standing until the architect orders their removal. This clause applies when an old building is entirely or partly removed. PRELIMINARY ITEMS. (48) Make good new work to match old. Old foundations. (48) Grub up all old foundations to existing build- ings ; fill in all excavations with dry brick rubbish, well rammed to receive concrete, so as to get a firm bed. Any old coins, money or articles having a monetary value, other than building materials, to be delivered up to, and become the property of the employer. This clause applies where new foundations come upon the site of the old foundations removed. (49) Take down partitions, walls, floors, roofs ; and take out windows and doors where required for purpose of alteration. Cut down all openings for new doors ; and make good to old portions all walls, ceilings, cornices, plaster, floors, skirtings and all finishings ; and decorate to match existing work. This clause refers to buildings only partly removed. (50) Cut, tooth and bond all new work to old. Level, sweep clean, prepare and wet the surfaces of old walls before building new work upon them. Level the face of old walls, and cut off all projections before building against them. This clause refers to buildings only partly removed. Old bricks reused. (51) Clean, sort and stack old sound bricks ; these may be reused in the foundations and internal walls, if approved by the architect. This clause refers to buildings wholly or partly removed. (52) All stone sills and thresholds, all sashes, doors and any other old materials may be reused ; if dressed up, repaired, made out and approved by the architect. Sort and stack all these sound old materials. When the contractor is allowed to use in all suitable old material. Cut, tooth and bond, and prepare surface of old i walls for new. Old materials reused. Clear away. New building set back from adjoining old buildings. (53) Clear away all old materials, dirt, rubbish and superfluous matter and materials as they accumulate. (54) Where the party walls of adjoining premises are laid bare owing to the new building being set back (or removed altogether), these walls must be made good as required, and rendered over in Portland cement f in. thick ; and all other parts made good to the satisfaction of the adjoining owners and architect. Also alter and rebuild the front party garden walls and railings. The sketch will show when this clause is required. The walls may perhaps only require pointing in cement if fairly good. (62) PRELIMINARY ITEMS. Adjoining owners. (55) Make good to the adjoining owners' buildings, sheds or structures to their respective satisfaction. Parish property. (56) Alter, relay and make good the parish pave- ment, road metalling, kerbing, channelling or other work disturbed, to the satisfaction of vestry or local authori- ties. Lay all new pavements, metalling, kerbing, chan- nelling and work, so as to make out up to the new building line as set back ; or pay the parish authorities for doing this work. Where parish property is disturbed ; or buildings set back, as shown by the sketch under clause No. 54. Make good gravel paths and grass. (57) Make good the gravel to paths and yards where disturbed, and spread clean binding gravel over where damaged by cart or other traffic. All turf to be relaid, and beds replanted where damaged in any way. Alter the paths, lawns and garden beds to suit extension of building. When private grounds are disturbed. Leaks and damp. Water-tight. Ballast. Accounts in small items. Priced bill of quantities. (58) Search with the employer's representative during storms of rain, for any leaks to the roofs, or any other parts of the building, repair and remedy any such defects if found, which may probably be a cause of future dampness. (59) Leave the premises water-tight at completion, and free from damp in every part. (60) Any ballast or sand found on the site during the excavations, may be used if approved by the architect ; the value of such being determined by the architect and deducted from the contract amount. But no ballast or sand is to be excavated on the site, other than that necessary for the excavations of the building. (61) In case of variations or extra work, the contrac- tor is to render his account, in small and separate items, each referring to the special part of the work to which they severally apply. (62) Before signing the contract, the contractor is to deposit with the architect a fully-priced copy of the bill of quantities, and all extras and omissions of similar work and description shall be valued at the prices therein set forth ; but any item of extra work which does not exactly agree with the items in the bill of quantities shall be valued at a price analogous thereto, at the architect's valuation. The bill of quantities is to form the " basis of the contract." 1 6' PRELIMINAEY ITEMS. (63) When a bill of quantities is to form the " basis of the contract," it means that if the quantities be short, then the contractor is to be allowed the deficiency when settling up his account ; but if, on the other hand, they be too full, then the difference will be deducted. When a bill of quantities does not form the " basis of the contract," but has merely been supplied upon which the contractor may form his estimate, then the following additional sentence should be added to the above clause, and the sentence in that clause " the bill of quantities is to form the basis of the contract," be omitted. The contractor is to satisfy himself, that there has been a sufficient amount taken in the bill of quantities, for everything necessary to carry out the contract in accordance with the specification, the drawings, the dimensions and the architect's requirements. A bill of quantities does not often form the basis of the contract ; neither is a bill of quantities always supplied. Schedule. (63) The contractor is to fill up the schedule of work and materials at the end of the specification, with the same prices upon which his tender is based ; and all extras and omissions shall be valued at the prices therein set forth ; and any item of extra work which does not exactly agree with the description in the schedule, shall be valued at a price analogous thereto, at the architect's valuation. The contractor is required to show his papers and calculations upon which he based his tender. When a contractor takes out his own quantities, and no bill of quantities has been supplied, this clause should be inserted. Eeturn specifica- (64) The specification, together with the schedule tion. fully priced out, is to be returned to the architect on the day of sending in the tender ; or the deposit of 3 3s. will be forfeited, and the tender will not be considered. A deposit from the contractor is often required to show his " bona fide," and of course returned upon receipt of the tender and speci- fication. Prime costs. (65) All prime cost or p.c. amounts shall mean, the actual and net value of the article in question paid by the contractor to any tradesman selected by the architect, after the trade or any other discount has been deducted, except cash discount. The contractor is to add to the prime cost or p.c. amounts, for labour, carriage, fixing and his own profit ; and is to produce the vouchers and receipted bills showing the amounts paid for the articles specified. A prime cost or p.c, amount relates to the price of the article delivered in London. Should a prime cost article, owing to the nature of the material of which it is formed, require (71) PRELIMINARY ITEMS. 17 painting or decorating to match the other work, then the contractor is also to allow an amount in his estimate as will compensate him for this additional expense. The contractor will not be allowed any extra amount for fixing an article which may differ from that ordinarily used. Provisional (66) Provide the sum of (say) 100 for additional amounts. work, to be used in part or whole if required ; and de- ducted in part or whole if not used. It is to be under- stood that in adjusting a provisional sum, no allowance will be made the contractor for use of his scaffolding or plant. The contractor will be allowed 10 per csnt. profit out of provisional sums other than prime cost or p.c. amounts ; but should the nature of the work to which a provisional sum refers, require painting and decorating to match the other work, then the con- tractor is to allow such extra amount in his estimate on to the provisional sums mentioned, as will compen- sate him for this additional expense. Thus, suppose a provisional sum refers to the handrail and balusters of a staircase, then under this clause the painting and polishing is not to be taken into account when settling an amount for this work. Extras may vary from 2J per cent, to 10 per cent, of the total esti- mate. Fill in what you consider sufficient to cover. lithography. (67) Allow the sura of (say) 5 for lithography, which is to be paid by the contractor upon signing the contract. The amount will be obtained from the lithographer. Quantity (68) Allow an amount of 2 per cent, upon the total surveyor's fees. estimate for the Quantity Surveyor's fees ; such amount is to be paid by the contractor to the Quantity Surveyor upon the amount of the architects' certificates, but half of the total amount is to be paid out of the first cer- tificate. Quantity surveyor- fees vary according to the class of work, from 1 J to 2 J per cent. It is better to let the client pay the fees direct. Scrub floors. (69) Twice scrub all floors and clean all pavings at Clean ouuinde'r completion. Before the boarded floors are laid, clear floors. out all rubbish, shavings and dirt, both from ground and upper floors. iean windows. (70) Clean all windows inside and out at comple- tion. Xcave premises (71) Leave the whole of the premises clean, perfect and underfaced at completion. c 18 PRELIMINARY ITEMS. (72) Ferrying. (72) The Committee will employ their own boatmen to ferry the men across to and from the work, from and to the shore twice (or three times) daily at meal times. The work may be on an island, or under the management of a committee. Vaccination. (73) The contractor, and all workmen employed by him on the buildings, must be re-vaccinated at the con- tractors' expense, before entering upon the works and after the contract is signed. In small-pox hospitals' work. The vaccination is generally paid for by the Managers of the hospital. Boiler work under (74) Perform all the work required in the construc- Board of Trade. tion and nt ting of the boiler, in conformity with the Board of Trade regulations ; and in such a manner that the boiler, when fixed and finished, will pass the Board of Trade survey. This clause modified would apply to any work under the Board of Trade. Credit old (75) The contractor is required to show what material. amount he will allow as a credit for the old materials, whether reusable or not. (See clauses Nos. 51 and 52.) Similar work (76) The contractor is to state for what additional eX materiaIs tW amounts he will execute the main staircase in " oak " in lieu of " deal " ; as also the stone facings and ashlar work in " Portland " stone in lieu of " Bath " stone. This clause should more properly come under the trades to which it would severally apply. A separate amount may also be required for covering the flats with lead instead of zinc; or building the brickwork entirely in cement- mortar instead of lime mortar, or for any other alternate requirements. (77)- (78)- (79)- HOUSE BREAKER. See remarks preceding clause No. 1, referring to a " House Breaker." (80) Specification of work to be done in shoring, and pulling down and clearing away from the site, the existing buildings known as (give the name and situa- (80) PRELIMINARY ITEMS. 19 tion of property), for (give the name and address of the employer), under the superintendence and to the satis- faction of (give the name and address of the architect). Hoarding. Provide and erect a suitable and sufficient hoarding (say) 8 ft. high, well and securely fixed together, with cart and wicket gates, locks, fastenings and three keys, one being for use of architect. The hoarding to run for one length of (say) 50 ft., with two return ends of (say) 5 ft. Eefix the name-plate of the occupier. Note. The hoarding is not to be let to an advertising contractor ; but the contractor to whom the contract is given for rebuilding the premises is to have the use, wear and tear of the hoarding for a period of (say) twelve months, free of charge. Eemove hoarding within (say) twelve months, at such time as the architect shall direct. Clause No. 40 would, under these circumstances, be modified when inserting it in the contract for the rebuilding. Pull down and p u ll down, and cart away from the site, the whole of the existing buildings, erections, walls, floors, roofs, back additions, sheds, pavings, vaults and fittings, to the level of the ground underneath the lowermost floor. Also see clause No. 47. State if any of the old walls or other parts are to remain. Grub up. Grub up all foundations, search for and grub up all drains, cesspools, foul earth and offensive matter, and remove from the site. Also see clause No. 48. A " House Breaker " will not always under- take to do the work mentioned in this latter paragraph. Fittings. The employer reserves to himself certain fittings, as hereinafter scheduled. The contractor is to store such fittings on the premises where directed, and put a pro- tection over same. (Then give the list of fittings to be kept.) Sometimes fittings are valuable, and the employer may desire to retain certain of them. Shore up. Shore up the adjoining premises with shores of such size and construction as shall be directed by the architect, the following being a list of the shores : (say) four raking shores to the west party wall, one shore being placed in the street ; and (say) two flying shores between the back walls. The contractor to whom the contract is given for rebuilding the premises is to have the use, wear and tear of this shoring for a period of (say) twelve months, free of charge. Eemove shoring within (say) twelve months, at such time as the architect shall direct. c 2 20 PRELIMINARY ITEMS. (80) If it be required to describe the shoring in more detail, see clause No. 42, with notes. State if the hoarding and shoring is to become the property of the employer ; and in the contract for rebuilding, mention the fact that it is there, and that the contractor is to allow for it. Notices. Give notice to District Surveyor or Parish Authorities and pay their fees ; and execute the pulling down, the shoring and hoarding to their requirements and satis- faction. Eead clauses Nos. 2, 3, 17, 38 and 39, which, when modified, may per- haps be necessary to include, especially clauses Nos. 38 and 39. Damages. It is to be distinctly understood that time is the essence of this contract, and the contractor agrees to pay and allow the employer the sum of (say) 2 per day after the (fill in date of completion of work), for every day during which this contract has not been fulfilled, in addition to a sum of (say) 20, to be paid by the contractor to the employer for the old material. The contractor takes upon himself the responsibility of all damage which may happen to the adjoining owner's premises, owing to the pulling down of these premises ; and hereby agrees to make good such damage, and indemnifies the employer from any claim which he may sustain on that account. Neither is the contractor to have any claim against the employer, should he not receive back the same amount of hoarding or shoring as he fixed. Agreement. I am willing to perform, free of charge, the afore- mentioned work upon the terms, conditions and stipu- lations herein mentioned; and I further agree to pay the employer the sum of (say) 20 in purchase of the old material upon his acceptance of this contract. (Signature of " House Breaker.") Address. Date. A "House Breaker" will generally allow something for the old mate- rials, but, if they be of little value, he may remove the old buildings free of charge ; or, on the other hand, he may require the employer to pay him a small amount. When there is no payment to be made to the " House Breaker," there may be a question as to his carrying out his contract in its entirety. It is well under these circumstances to require him to deposit an amount with the architect, as a security against this contingency. Or a clause may be inserted in the contract stating that, should he not complete his contract to the satisfaction of the architect with regard to the amount of work to be done, then he agrees to pay all costs which may be incurred by the employer in calling in some other person to complete the work in question. (3) 21 DEAINAGE. IT is not proposed in this work to treat upon the disposal of sewage, the construction of sewers, or the sewerage of towns, as these subjects come more within the scope of the engineer. Brick barrel drains. HOUSE DRAINAGE. (1) State the size, if built in mortar (or cement), and if rendered inside in cement. Brick barrel drains are never now used for house sewerage, may be used for water courses if desired. Brick barrel drains are built : 9 in. diam. with half a brick ring, 12 in. 15 in. They 18 in. or a one-brick ring. Generally and Testing. (2) Immediately the concrete foundations to the walls are formed, the drainage is to be laid, and pro- tected during the progress of the building from falling materials. It is not to be covered up until the archi- tect shall have inspected, tested and passed the work as satisfactory, as shown by his written authority. The drains in the ground will be tested by filling each separate length of piping with water, before they are encased in the concrete (if they are to be encased in concrete), the joints being left perfectly free all round, and unless the pipes hold water without any loss, they are to be taken up and relaid. The drains are not to be walked upon until they are encased with concrete (or covered over with earth 2 ft. deep). (3) The pipes to be laid to true gradients from point to point, with a fall of at least 1 ft. in 40 ft., and not more than 1 ft. in 30 ft. Bends to have a fall of 3 in. in their length. The arrows on the plan show the direction of the falls. When a gradient of 1 in 40 cannot be obtained, a flushing cistern must be provided ; see clause No. 47, with notes. Gradient. 22 DRAINAGE. (4) Trenching out (4) Trench out ground for pipes to true hanging ^ nes (g rac ^ ents X an( * ram tne bottom to form a solid and even bearing. Part fill in and ram, and part cart away. Perform any tunnelling for pipes. It is sometimes cheaper and safer to tunnel than to excavate. Excavations to (5) Excavate ground for the several manholes, turn- manholes and j n g an( j inspection chambers, gullies and traps ; part fill in and ram, and part cart away. Planking, (6) Perform all requisite planking, strutting and staging to sides -* free from water. - , \ / J. JL O> strutting and staging to sides of excavations, and keep excavations staging. lime. (7) See Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 4 to 6, which would apply here. Lime is seldom used in drainage work. Cement. . (8) See Excavator, clause No. 23, which would apply here. Sand. (9) See Excavator, clause No. 24, which would apply here. Ballast. (10) See Excavator, clause No. 25. Lime mortar. (11) See Bricklayer, clause No. 9. Lime mortar is seldom used in drainage work. Cement mortar. (12) See Bricklayer, clause No. 14. Bricks and (13) See Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 3 and 17, modified. brickwork. Lime concrete. (14) See Excavator, clauses Nos. 28 to 30. Lime concrete is seldom used in drainage work. Cement concrete. (15) See Excavator, clauses Nos. 27, 31 and 32. Labours. (16) Perform all holes, chases, sinkings, cutting, underpinning, sailing courses, and other labours. Arches. (17) Turn arches over drain pipes where passing through or under walls. See Bricklayer, clause No. 41. Dimension of (18) The sizes of the pipes specified, signifies the pipes. internal diameters. Stoneware pipes to have a thick- ness of at least one-twelfth their internal diameter. Salt glazed stoneware drain pipes are made 2 in., 3 in., 4 in., 6 in. (19) DEAINAGE. 2 3 9 in., 12 in,, 15 in. and 18 in. internal diameters in 2 ft. lengths ; the 12 in., 15 in. and 18 in. pipes being also made in 2 ft. 6 in. lengths ; the sockets are additional to the length of the pipe in each case. Internal diam. in inches. 2 in. 3 4 6 9 12 15 18 Thickness in inches. Length of Socket in inches. in. Total Length of Pipe in feet. 2 ft. 1J in. 2 l'i * 4-g jj 2 I 1 *< )) * >j 2 If 2 2 2 2 and 2 ft. 8 2 21 9 91 p ^2" ?> 2 ?> 2 8- 8, m, Pipes may also be obtained 21 in., 24 in. and 30 in. diameter, in 2J ft, and 3 ft. lengths, but these sizes are more required for town sewerage. Stoneware drain pipes and jointing. Cement joints. (19) The drain pipes to be equal to Doulton's "tested," salt glazed inside and out, hard, sound, stoneware, whole-socketed pipes ; circular in cross sec- tion, perfectly straight, free from flaws and projections, and matched before laying in trenches. Put all bends, tapers, junctions, Y's and other connections. Square junctions only to be used where specially described. The pipes to be jointed together in neat Portland cement. First wipe out clean, all dirt from the spigot and socket of each pipe, then fill in the space between with neat Portland cement ; wipe clean the inside with a damp cloth, and draw a close-fitting pad through each pipe as it is laid. Form round each joint on the outside, a band of neat Portland cement 1-J in. thick by 3 in. wide. This is the usual method of jointing stoneware pipes, but the ring of cement round the joints on the outside of the pipes is not always done. or, Stamford's patent joints. The stoneware pipes to have Stamford's patent joints. First wipe out clean, all dirt from the spigot and socket of each pipe, then apply hot with a brush, a preparation of 2|- (to 3) parts of Kussian tallow to 1 part of resin (or hot boiled oil) to the joints, and set the pipes in place with a twist ; wipe the inside clean with a dry cloth, and draw a close fitting pad through each pipe as it is laid. Form round each joint on the outside, a band of neat Portland cement 1 in. thick by 3 in. wide. This form of joint is considered very satisfactory ; the pipes can be tested a few hours after being laid. DKAINAGE. Acid pipes. (20) (20) The pipes to be Doulton's glazed acid pipes, nted with sulphur and clay dust. v^ u jointed This class of pipe may be used in chemical works. State if a ring of cement is formed round the outside of joints, as in clause No. 19. Encase pipes in concrete. (21) All drain pipes to be encased in cement con- crete 4 in. thick, a space being dished out at every joint for the sockets, so that the pipes may have a firm bearing throughout their whole length. Encasing drain pipes in concrete makes by far the best work, as it prevents the pipes sagging and the joints becoming broken. But frequently, when the drains are outside a building, they are- merely laid on a bed of concrete 4 in. to 6 in. thick, by 8 in. wider than the external diameter of the pipes. Drain pipes are also laid with the concrete formed up to two- thirds the height of the pipes ; but inside a building they should always be encased in concrete. Bed feet of vertical pipes in concrete. (22) The bend at the foot of all soil, rain-water, ventilating and other vertical pipes, to be bedded in solid concrete. Open channels. (23) The open channels (or half-pipes) passing through the manholes, to be special white glazed stone- ware pipes set in concrete, with the sides formed up vertically in concrete 5 in. above the lip of pipes, and the benches rising to the sides of manholes at an angle of 30, and then rendered over in neat cement, with the arris slightly taken off. The half -pipe channels to have a fall of 3 in. in their several lengths. See sketches under clause No. 37, for channels and benches. The channels or half-pipes in the manholes may be formed up entirely in the concrete, and rendered over in neat cement ; and perhaps this is almost the better way, as the cement can be more easily manipulated to the necessary curves required for the cleaner flow of the sewage. In this case the beds of the channels would all intersect. Iron drain pipes. (24) The iron drain pipes to be laid in 9 ft. lengths and coated inside and out with Dr. Angus Smith's solution (or painted inside with two coats of oil paint), with all projections on the interior of the pipes carefully clipped off and filed down. (26) DRAINAGE. Pipes 4 in. diameter to weigh 54 Ibs. per yard. 5 in. 72 Ibs. 6 in. 91 Ibs. The pipes to be jointed, by inserting in the socket of each pipe a ring of tarred yarn (oakum), leaving 1 J in. space in depth, which is to be run in with lead and caulked up with proper caulking tools. Iron drain pipes are made 1J in., 2 in., 2i in., 3 in., 3 J in., 4 in., 4J in., 5 in., 6 in., 7 in., 8 in., 9 in., 10 in. and 12 in. diameters ; with similar bends, junctions and tapers to stoneware pipes. They are made in 9 ft., 6 ft. and 3 ft. lengths, and in addition the depth of the socket to a 4 in. pipe is 4 in. ; to a 5 in. pipe 4J in. ; and to a 6 in. pipe 4J in. The diameter of the socket to a 4 in. pipe is 5J in. ; to a 5 in. pipe 6^ in.,* and to a 6 in. pipe 7j in. In loose or marshy ground, and soils subject to river floods, iron pipes will be found beneficial, as the jointing will be more secure and the joints less in number. To gain a firm bedding, the joint ends of each length of pipe should be placed upon concrete piers about 18 in. to 2 ft. square, taken down if possible to the solid strata. Iron pipes may also be laid on a bed or encased in concrete, as clause No 21. Dr. Angus Smith's solution is a preparation of tar. Pipes 5 in. diameter are suitable for the majority of main drains to buildings, with 4 in. branches. Iron drain pipes may, in certain positions, be laid along the walls of a building, or in trenches similar to hot-water heating pipes ; see Bricklayer, clause No. 36. (25) The specified sizes of manholes and chambers refer to inside dimensions. Execute the brickwork to manholes and chambers with stock bricks (blue gault or local bricks), laid in cement mortar on footings and 6 in. (to 9 in.) cement concrete foundations. The concrete to project 4 in. on either side beyond the lowest course of footings. Point the brickwork on both sides with a flush stuck joint as the work proceeds. In best work manholes are often faced inside with white glazed bricks ; or they may be rendered over in cement. Gullies. (26) The gullies to be in Doulton's salt-glazed stoneware (No. 13 pattern), 8 in. square on top, with 4 in. outlet, and 4 in. inlet lugs as required, and bedded in concrete 4 in. thick. Each gully to have a 9 in. x 9 in. x i in. (or f in.) cast-iron grid,, let into an 18 in. x 18 in. x 4 in. cut, rebated, rubbed (or tooled) and dished hard York stone kerb. If possible, a gully trap should always have a sink waste discharg- ing into it, so that the water in the trap will not be liable to evaporate in dry weather. When a gully is some distance from a manhole, it may have a cleaning branch with cap, and a small iron plate on top let into a rebated York stone. Brickwork to manholes and chambers. 26 DRAINAGE. (27) Treatment of (27) Paint all ironwork to manhole covers, steps ironwork. an( j gratings three times in oil. or, All ironwork to manhole covers, steps and gratings to be made rustless by Professor Barff s process. or, All ironwork to manhole covers, steps and gratings to be galvanised. Professor Barff s process of making iron rustless is considered very efficient. It consists in covering the surfaces with a magnetic oxide. The following clauses, Nos. 28 to 35, would only be necessary when laying new drainage to an old building. Grub up and fill (28) Search for and trace out all old brick and other ** existing drains, traps, cesspools, rat runs, and offensive earth and matter ; grub up and cart away as it accu- mulates. The architect may require any part of the premises to be excavated for this purpose. After dis- infecting, fill up the excavations with clean earth (brick rubbish or concrete). Care to be taken, when excavating, not to undermine or affect the stability of the building. Take out old (29) Take out all existing closets, lavatories, sinks, fittings. baths, cisterns, pipes and other fittings. Take up pavings (30) Take up all pavings, floors, joists, concrete and and floors. other work necessary for laying the new drains. Disconnect (31) Disconnect existing drain from main sewer at ^ e J unct i n f premises with the parish property, and seal up in cement concrete. Sometimes the existing connection with the sewer is reused in the new work ; if that be the case, state so. Clean and flush (32) The existing drains that remain are to be out old drains. c ] eane d out and flushed with lime water. When a portion of the existing drains are to remain. Belay floors and (33) Ptelay all disturbed tile, asphalte, stone and pavings, and cement pavings, wood floors, floor joists and concrete, make good other ^ , r ' '.., work. an( i make out with new. For a fuller description of cement floors, yards and areas, see Pavior, clauses Nos. 7 to 9 ; asphalt floors, see Pavior, clause No. 7 ; tile and brick floors, yards and areas, see Pavior, clauses Nos. 2, 3 and 7 to 9 ; wood block floors, see Pavior, clause No. 4 ; stone paving to areas, see Mason, clause No. 41 ; stone paving to rooms and passages, see Mason, clauses Nos. 42 to 44 and 46; wood flooring to rooms, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 58 to 71. (35) DRAINAGE. Belay turf and gravel. (34) Eelay all turf and gravel, and make good all beds disturbed. Clause No. 57 under "Preliminary Items" may be modified and inserted here. Make good paint, (35) All paint, paper, colouring, whitewash, skirtings paper and other and other work injured or disturbed, to be made good. works, Clauses Nos. 35 to 48 refer more especially to the plan and section below. 28 DRAINAGE. (36) Disconnecting manhole A. Connect with (36) Give notice to parish authorities, and pay sewer. their charges for connecting with the parish sewer and inserting a well-balanced galvanised iron flap block for a 6 in. drain, and carrying a 6 in. stoneware drain. encased in concrete to the boundary of the property, and making good the road metalling, channelling, kerb- ing and footpath. Continue the 6 in. stoneware drain encased in con- crete from the parish connection to manhole A, with a Winser access pipe at the boundary for testing this length of piping, and seal up. (37) Build manhole A 3 ft. 6 in. x 2 ft. 6 in., in 9 in. brickwork in cement, on footings and concrete, line inside with white glazed bricks, second quality, and flat joint point. Put a Field's (or Broad's) 6 in. glazed stoneware syphon intercepting trap, having a 4 in. cleaning branch and cap. Bed in the concrete one 6 in. half-pipe 3 ft. long, and two 4 in. half-pipe bends ; form up the sides and benches in concrete, and render over in neat cement with the arrises slightly taken off. Sometimes a 4 in. syphon trap is used with a 4 in. cleaning branch and cap, but having a 6 in. outlet to sewer. In this case a 4 in. to 6 in. taper half-pipe must be used, connecting the 4 in. trap to the 6 in. main drain coming into the manhole. Take a 6 in. air inlet pipe in concrete, carried up 4 ft. in area wall, and finish with 12 in. x 12 in. cast-iron grid (or finish with a mica flap). Oversail for, and cover manhole with a 24 in. x 18 in. Purnell's (or other) heavy cast-iron cover and frame, with india-rubber seating and gun-metal lock and key, and let into a 12 in. x 5 in. (or 4 in.) cut, rebated, tooled (or rubbed) hard York stone kerb, and supported on two 3 in. x 3 in. x f in. T-iron bearers. Build into walls four heavy cast-iron steps (usually fixed about every 12 in. down). A mica flap is of little practical use. If an inner cover be also re- quired, describe a 2J in. tooled hard York inner stone cover, bedded in mortar on over-sailing courses, with a 4 in. diameter drop ring, and fill in space above with sand. When a manhole is very shallow, iron steps are not necessary. The class of bricks, and form of open channels in manholes, will be found in clauses Nos. 25 and 23, and Air inlet, the treatment of the ironwork in clause No. 27. In iron drainage, an inner manhole cover is manufactured by the (44) DRAINAGE. 29 North British Plumbing Company, called their "lock lever manhole inner cover " : this is decidedly an improvement to the present system, of having a large cubical space in the manholes. By this^ means the pipes are shut clown close on the top, but accessible at any time. ^These covers are made in two forms, either with the pipes and bends in the manhole all cast in one with the cover to fit ; or else as a close-fitting iron cover by itself, suitable for covering over the ordinary stoneware half-pipes in the manhole. Manhole B, (38) Build manhole B 3 ft. x 2 ft. 6 in., in a pre- cisely similar manner in every way to manhole A ; but omit the syphon trap and air inlet. Manhole C. Cleaning Chamber D. (39) Build manhole C 3 ft. x 2 ft. 6 in., in a pre- cisely similar manner in every way as chamber B, but with a 6 in. to 4 in. taper half- pipe instead of being straight. (40) Build chamber D 2 ft. x 2 ft. at head of drain, in a precisely similar manner to manhole C, but omit the half-pipes. Insert a 4 in. cleaning branch and cap. 6 in. main drain. . (41) Connect manhole A to B and B to C, with 6 in. stoneware pipes encased in concrete. The class of pipes and description of concrete will be found in clauses Nos. 18 to 22 and 24. 4 in. branch drains. (42) Connect manhole C to D with 4 in. stoneware pipes encased in concrete, and from manholes A, B, C and D to the various connections of w.c.'s, gullies, soil, flushing, ventilating and other pipes. Gullies. (43) Put three of Doulton's (No. 13 pattern) gullies in areas and one in washhouse under pump, bed in concrete, and finish with stone kerbs and iron grids, and connect to sink, lavatory, bath and rain-water pipes. The full description of gullies will be found in clause No. 26, and the treatment of the ironwork in clause No. 27. Grease trap. (44) Put outside to scullery sink a Winser's 12 in, patent flushing gully, with a stone kerb and grid similar to other gullies. (Let the flushing tank dis- charge into this gully, or else put another flush tank especially for it ; see clause No. 47. All grease traps for the collection of grease are objectionable. If a chamber for the collection of grease be required, the description may run : Tlnn The grease-trap chamber to be 2 ft. 6 in. x 2 ft., built DRAINAGE. (45) Shoes to rain- water pipes. and paved in 9 in. glazed brickwork in cement, on footings and concrete, and flush joint pointed. Put a 3 in. stoneware pipe inlet bend from sink (or inlet bends if more than one sink), and a 4 in. outlet bend to drain, with kerb and manhole cover similar to chamber A. The inlet and outlet bends to be kept up 12 in. from bottom of chamber. Insert a rubbed Port- land (or York) stone tablet in wall of building over grease- trap chamber, with the incised lettering, " Clean out every month." This form of grease trap is only for the collection of grease, and will not require to be flushed out, but must be cleaned out by hand. When the grease trap for a large establishment is at the head of a long drain, this collecting chamber is almost absolutely necessary ; but if it be near the main sewer, then a Winser's flushing grease-trap gully is suitable. In a small establishment a flushing grease-trap gully is quite suitable, whatever its position. (45) The rain-water pipe in house, entering the gully in area, is to have a Hellyer's patent stoneware shoe at the foot bedded in concrete, with a 9 in. x 9 in. X J in. close plate iron cover, let into an 18 in. x 18 in. X 4 in. rubbed (or tooled), cut and rebated stone kerb. This form of shoe is required for cleaning purposes, when the rain- water pipe is some distance from a gully. If the rain-water pipe be in the open, but still some distance from a gully, the shoe may then have an open grid. (46) Carry up from highest point of drain an 8 Ib. 10 Ib.) per foot 4 in. diameter drawn lead venti- lating pipe, with astragal band joints, and a brass sole piece and 4 in. brass screw cap at foot. Continue pipe up 5 ft. above parapet, stayed to roof with a f in. iron rod, and finished with an expanded pierced lead head, and copper wire rose on top. or, Finished with 3 ft. of copper pipe, with an expanded pierced copper head, and copper wire rose on top. An iron pipe is frequently used for ventilating purposes ; but, in time, the iron rusts and chokes the bend at the foot. Ventilating pipe. Flushing tank. (47) Put at head of drain 3 ft. tibove paving level, on 9 in. x 3 in. wrought deal bearers with 9-in. brick bearers under, a Field's patent 40 (50 or 60) gallon galvanised iron automatic flushing tank with syphon, and a 4-in. stoneware pipe encased in concrete to drain. Enclose tank with 1 in. wrought deal grooved and tongued casing, with lid, hinges and padlock, and pack round with hair felt 2 in. thick (or silicate cotton). Lay on (50) DRAINAGE. JL in. lead supply with stop-cock, and ^ in. plug bib- cock discharging over tank with screw nozzle and cap having a pin-hole -^ in. diameter bored in it. A flushing tank is not absolutely necessary if the fall of drain be good, and there be plenty of water passing down it ; but in cases where a drain has a fall of only 1 in 60, it may be said to be almost essential. Silt well. (48) Form a silt well in small area, 12 in. square, 2 ft. deep, with a gravel base ; concrete (or brick in cement) sides, and 9 in. x 9 in. x i in. iron grid on top, let into an 18 in. x 18 in. x 4 in. (or 5 in.) rubbed (or tooled), cut, rebated, sunk, and dished hard York kerb. A silt well is simply a soakage pit for rain water, and may be used in small areas, when the expense would be great to connect a gully with the main drain. In an impervious strata it is not much good, unless it be made large enough to hold the rainfall taken by the area, until it has time to evaporate. Ham-water drains. (49) See clause No. 52. All rain-water pipes, sink, lavatory and bath wastes, and overflow pipes from wells, must discharge into a gully before being connected with the sewage drains. Cesspool. It (50) In the drainage of a country house where there is no public sewer, a cesspool may be provided ; the description would run : Build in 9 -in. brickwork a circular cesspool in cement mortar, 5 ft. internal diameter, 8 ft. deep below the inlet, on footings and 6 in. cement concrete. Puddle round the outside with clay puddle 9 in. (to 12 in.) thick. Eender the whole of the inside of cesspool in cement and sand in equal proportions f in. thick, and finish in neat cement f in. thick, with the angle at the bottom eased off. See Excavator, clause No. 7, for excavation. Dome over the top, and put an iron ring round the access hole, with an 18-in. diameter iron manhole cover let into a 3 ft. X 3 ft. X 4 in. cut, tooled, hard York stone kerb. Take a 6 in. (or 4 in.) stoneware ventilating pipe encased in concrete to the foot of the tree near ; and carry up for 50 ft. carefully secured to the trunk, a 6 in. (or 4 in.) heavy galvanised (or otherwise treated) cast- iron pipe (or 6 in. or 4 in. diameter 10 Ib. per super, foot drawn lead pipe) with galvanised iron (or lead) hood. Build in 9 in. X 4J in. galvanised iron manhole steps every 12 in. down. Connect to cesspool with a 6 in. to 4 in. taper pipe, and take a 4 in. stoneware overflow pipe encased in concrete to a distance of 20 yards (more or less), discharging into the ditch near, and finish with a galvanised iron movable grid. Allow the p.c. sum of 4 for a chain pump. DRAINAGE. (50) A pump may be useful when the liquids are required for garden purposes : the solids will have to be removed periodically. This class of pump is different from that which raises water from a well. Build in ground 12 in. down in concrete near cesspool, a 24 in. x 9 in. x 4 in. rubbed hard York stone tablet, with the incised lettering " Clean out every year." The bottom of cesspool may be formed with an invert. The description of house drainage will remain precisely the same when discharging into a cesspool, as when dis- charging into a public sewer. In districts of chalk formation, cesspools are often formed without walls, they being merely cut out of the chalk, and domed over on the top in brickwork in cement, with the manhole cover, kerb, ventilating and overflow pipes, similar to cess- pools built in brickwork. The liquids percolate away into the fissures of the chalk, and oftentimes much of the solids. In very loose and porous ground, when there is no chance of contaminating any water supply, cesspools may be " steined in," either in ^ brick or 1 brick thick, that is, built dry without mortar or cement, so that the liquids may percolate away. The top would be domed over in the usual way. In this class of cesspool, the bottom and for about 20 in. upward may be built and lined in cement, the remainder being steined in dry. This will allow solids to accumulate for some time, while the liquids are free to filter away. Cesspools for the reception of sewage are generally built circular up to about 15 ft. deep, either dry or in cement mortar (or lime mortar), in half a brick thick when of the following internal diameters : 2 ft. 3 in., 2 ft. 9 in., 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in., 3 ft. 9 in., 4 ft., 4 ft. 6 in., 5 ft., 5 ft. 6 in. and 6 ft. With internal diameters of 8 ft., 8 ft. 6 in., 9 ft., 9 ft. 6 in., 10 ft., 10 ft. 6 in., 11 ft., 11 ft. 6 in. and 12 ft., they require to be one brick thick. To find the cubical capacity of a circular cesspool, multiply the internal diameter in feet by itself, and then by '7854, this will give the superficial area in feet ; then multiply this result by the depth of cesspool in feet, this will give the cubical contents in feet ; then multiply this result by 6*25 (being the number of gallons to a cubic foot), which will give the number of gallons the cesspool will contain ; thus, take a cesspool 5 ft. diameter by 10 ft. deep 5*0 diameter in feet. 5 diameter in feet. 25-0 7854 19-6350 10- 196-3500 6-25 superficial area in feet. depth in feet. cubical area in feet. number of gallons per cubic foot. 1227-187500 gallons, say 1227 gallons cubical- .contents. (52) DRAINAGE. 33 paths. Cesspools may be built with cement concrete 7 in. to 12 in. thick, and rendered on the inside in cement. -Drains to garden (51) These may be described in a similar way to sewage drains, more especially in regard to clauses Nos. 2 to 19, 21, 24, 27, 34, 41, 42 and 48. Stoneware piping 4 in. diameter will generally be sufficient. It is not essential either to bed or encase the pipes in concrete. The fall may be 1 in 60. The garden gullies for col- lecting the water may be Dean's 9 in. stoneware gullies (or other make), with galvanised iron containers and 9 in. x 9 in. iron grids, let into 18 in. X 18 in. x 4 in. cut, tooled (or rubbed), rebated, sunk and dished, hard York stone kerbs. The water may even- tually be conducted to some ditch, or else into the house drains, by discharging into a gully as in clause No. 43. Also see notes to clause No. 49. Dean's gullies are made in 6 in., 9 in., 12 in., 15 in. and 18 in. sizes. The iron containers are to catch the solids washed off the paths. Garden gullies may be placed 15 ft. to 20 ft. apart. When a grass lawn is on an impervious soil, it should be drained with open-jointed pipes about 10 ft. apart leading into the path gullies, and the trench filled in above with broken brick or loose stones. Otherwise the lawn will remain damp for some time after rain. In a pervious soil these drains are not necessary. Bain-water drains. ,/ Rwrr // stiect Ca (52) When there is a separate system of rain-water drains, the pipes would be described in a similar way /nMMtfun e^ to sewage drains, more especially in regard to clauses Nos. 2 to 19, 21, 24, 27, 34, 41, 42 and 48. Stoneware pipes 4 in. diameter will generally be sufficient. It is not essential either to bed or encase the pipes in concrete. The fall may be 1 ft. in 60 ft. De- scribe at the foot of each rain-water pipe a 6 in. stoneware shoe (without trap), with 4 in. outlet, 4 in. inlet lug and 9 in. x 9 in. x J in. iron cover plate, let into an 18 in. X 18 in. x 4 in. rubbed (or tooled), cut and rebated hard York stone kerb. Instead of stoneware shoes, small half-brick in cement catch pits may be built, about 12 in. x 12 in. x 18 in. deep, with inlet and outlet holes, and lined inside in cement, with the iron cover and stone kerbs on top (see smaller sketch). 34 DRAINAGE. (53) Rain- water well. Inspection caps may be put in places for cleaning, with a small stone on top. The pipes may eventually either be taken to a ditch or to a rain-water well or tank ; as in clause No. 53, with notes. If taken into the sewage drain, they must discharge into a gully before being connected, as in clause No. 43. Also see notes to clause No. 49. (53) Build a 9 in. brick circular rain-water well in cement mortar, 8 ft. internal diameter, 10 ft. deep below inlet, on footings and 6 in. cement concrete. Puddle round the outside with clay puddle 9 in. (to 12 in.) thick. Eender the whole of the inside in cement and sand in equal proportions f in. thick, and finish in neat Portland cement 3 in. thick, with the angle at the o * O bottom eased off'. Dome over the top, and put an iron ring round the access hole, with an 18-in. diameter iron manhole cover, let into a 3 ft. X 3 ft. x 4 in. cut, tooled hard York stone kerb. Form inlet catch pit 12 in. square, lined in cement, and supplied with a movable brass (or gun-metal) strainer inside, with a 12 in. x 12 in. X i in. iron cover let into a 20 in. x 20 in. x4 in. cut, rebated, tooled hard York kerb on top. Build in 9 in. x4J in. galvanised iron manhole steps every 12 in. down. Connect to well with a 6 in. to 4 in. (or 9 in. to 6 in.) taper pipe, and take a 4 in. (or 6 in.) stoneware overflow pipe (in or on concrete) to a distance of 20 yards (more or less), discharging into the ditch near, and finished at outlet with a movable iron grid. For excavation see Excavator, clause No. 7. If the overflow pipe go into the sewage drain, it must be trapped with a gully, as in clause No. 43 (and see notes to clause No. 49), before being connected. The bottom of well may be formed with an invert. A ventilating pipe may be described, similar to that mentioned in clause No. 50, referring to a cesspool, but taken up only a few feet in height. The size of the well will be regulated by the quantity of water to be stored. Allow the p.c. sum of 4 for a pump, and fix in wash- house. Take an 1J in. (or 2 in.) lead suction pipe bedded in concrete in the ground, down to within 12 in. of the bottom of well ; stopped at the end, but pierced 12 in. up. For gully under pump see clause No. 43. See Plumber, notes preceding clause No. 21, and clause No. 57 in Plumber. Circular rain-water wells may be built up to about 30 ft. deep, with the same diameters, and thicknesses of brickwork as described to a cess- pool. See notes to clause No. 50. Concrete 7 in. to 12 in. thick, rendered on the inside in cement, may be used instead of brickwork. In country districts, where there is no public water supply, storage tanks should be made sufficiently large for a sixteen weeks' supply. (54) DRAINAGE. 35 The mean rainfall over England is about 31 in. in London 25 in. ,, Manchester 38 in. Plymouth 46 in. Liverpool 28 in. The greatest rainfall is in October and the least in April. See Plumber, notes preceding clause No. 21. For estimating the available amount of rainfall, see Bricklayer, notes preceding clause No. 114. For fresh- water wells, see Bricklayer, clause No. 111. Eain-water tanks of shapes other than circular would be built in a similar way as described to clause No. 112 in Bricklayer. Stable drains. (54) The drainage of stables is regulated by the paving; see Pavior, clause No. 12. If underground drains be used, the description would be similar to house drains ; see clauses Nos. 2 to 19, 21 to 27, 36 to 50 and 52 ; and if in alterations, see clauses Nos. 28 to 35. The best method is to take a line of drains underneath the horse pots, with a cleaning cap and ventilating pipe at the top end ; the bottom end being allowed to discharge over a large ordinary gully, as in clauses Nos. 26 and 43, with an inner movable grating to catch the straw. This gully would discharge into a disconnecting manhole, as clause No. 37, and from thence to the main sewer or cesspool. It is better to keep stable drains entirely separate from the house drains. When stables have iron surface gutter drains only, they should eventually discharge outside with a flap, over a similar gully as that just described. The gully in the stable yard should be large, with an inner grating, and a heavy hinged grating on the top. I) 2 DRAINAGE. (55) Agricultural (55) Agricultural drain pipes are made circular in section, and (gf=\^ shape from 1 in. to 6 in. in dia- meter. They are merely used for draining the stagnant subsoil water. The joints may either be open or the upper half cemented. The circular and shaped pipes ara made without sockets, in 12 in. lengths; the circular pipes are also made with sockets in 2 ft. lengths, similar to ordinary drain pipes. The description may run thus : Trench out ground, and lay 3 in. (or 4 in.) diameter 12 in. long earthenware subsoil drains 3 ft. deep (the depth varies from 2 ft. 6 in. to 4 ft. 6 in., according to the nature of the soil) every 15 ft. apart, in parallel lines (the distance apart varies from 15 ft. to 66 ft., according to the nature of the soil) to the falls of the ground. Connect these parallel drains with a 6 in. (or 9 in.) main drain with socketed joints and junctions, and discharge into the ditch near, and finish with a movable iron grid. If the moving surface water is to be carried away, the drain may be laid only about 12 in. to 18 in. deep. State if socketed pipes be used everywhere, and if the upper half be jointed in cement or clay. Subsoil drains may be laid : In tenacious clay, with the drains 15 ft. apart at a depth of 2 ft. 6 in. In soft clay In clayey loam ,, In friable loam In light loam In sandy soil In gravelly soil In loose gravelly sand 21 ft. 22ft. 30 ft. 36 ft. 45ft. 55 ft. 66 ft. 2 ft. 9 in. 3 ft. in. 3 ft. 3 in. 3 ft. 9 in. 4 ft. in. 4 ft. 3 in. 4 ft. 6 in. (56) (57) (58) (59) <60) DRAINAGE. 37 REPORT ON THE SANITARY CONDITION OF A HOUSE. A report is merely a short description of a building, referring mostly to the defects. It is not a specification from which the suggested remedies ' may be carried out. If the defects mentioned in a report be underlined, or written in italics, it will both shorten the report and make it more clear. To W. Smith, Esq. .Report. 3rd January, 1897. (60) In accordance with your instructions, I have visited No. 13 Talbot Road, Whitworth, and made a detailed examination both of the aspect, the structure and the sanitary arrangements. Note. Fill in the correct name, date and locality. Those portions of the report which I consider un- satisfactory are written in italics. ASPECT. Taking the points of the compass : The front of the house faces due south ; the rooms would be hot in summer, and at times subject to much wet. The rooms at the back, facing towards the north, will be somewhat cold in winter but cool in summer. With respect to the kitchen offices, all of which face towards the north, this aspect will be an advantage. The rooms facing towards the east will be fairly warm in the morning and cool in the evening. The rooms facing west will be fairly cool in the morning and warm in the evening. The rooms generally are small. The middle room west has no direct communication ivith the external air, the casement windows opening into the conservatory. Two of the top-floor bedrooms have no fireplaces. The position of the house is good, being situated on the slope of a hill. The roadway in front has a good gradient, and the houses opposite are a suitable distance, off, and not of too great a height to impede the light and air from that direction. Round the other sides of the house there is a free supply of air and light, with the exception of the west side, where there are several tall trees. There are two railway stations near, and about five minutes' walk is a cemetery and a factory. The surrounding country consists mainly of woods, and consequently there may be a considerable amount of wet. The soil is clay, and would be some- what damp and retentive. STRUCTURE. The structure is fairly well built ; the Avails are of brick and although somewhat thin, are about the usual thickness for this class of property ; otherwise the house appears dry. The slating and 38 DRAINAGE. (60) leadwork to the roof are in good condition, but the timbers are of light scantlings. The floors are strongly framed. There is no concrete under the ground floor joists, but the floor is well ventilated. The joinery work is fairly good, but the ironmongery is poor. The plaster- ing, painting and decorating arc in a lad state of repair. Eefer to any other main defects that may be noticed when making the survey. DRAINS. The drainage is very defective. The pipes are of edrihemcare jointed with clay, and laid under the building. Many of the joints being open, the sewage has found its way through and saturated the ground around. There is no air inlet or siphon-trap at the lower end of drain before it enters the public sewer. A vitiated air-pipe exhaust is provided at the upper end, but of insufficient size, and the joints are mostly open, allowing the sewage air to find its way through the windows into the rooms near. The rain-water pipes do not discharge over open gullies, and the sink wastes discharge direct into the drain ; but have a small lead trap under the sinks. The bath is of zinc and has no safe underneath, the waste discharging into the soil pipe. There is no hot- water circulation. The best w.c. is of the old pan closet container class, and the servants' w.c. is the old long hopper', both of these closets are of the worst kind. The soil pipe is ventilated, but with too small a pipe. The cistern in the roof is open and without casing or safe. It supplies the closets, baths and sinks, all from the one pipe, without any disconnection whatever. The dustbin is in brick, just under the kitchen- window, and in a very bad state of repair. 1'ALF EOBINSON, Architect. (4) 39 EXCAVATOE. Clause No. 1 in Carpenter may perhaps preferably be inserted here. The depth and width of the foundations to a building are governed by the nature of the soil upon which it stands ; but the wider a foundation the better, in order that the soil may not be unduly loaded, and the weight of the structure more evenly distributed. A foundation need not necessarily be deep if the soil be firm ; and in some cases where the soil is soft, the less the natural surface is disturbed, the sounder will the building remain. In made soils the foundations had better be taken right down to the natural soil ; but in waterlogged soils, peaty and similar natural soils,, it may be advantageous to form a plateau or table of concrete over the entire surface of the building site some 2 ft. to 4 ft. in depth, upon which the building may be erected without dis- turbing the surface in any way ; otherwise a system of piling may have to be adopted, see clause No. 10. In clay soils the foundation must be taken down at least 4 ft. below the surface ; as clay when sub- ject to the action of the weather is liable to crack, and cause the building to settle unequally. For the same reason foundations upon chalk must be treated in the same way. A concrete foundation under a building is only absolutely required when the building is erected upon naturally soft soils ; " made soils " ; waterlogged and peaty soils ; or quicksand (see notes to clause No. 32). For safe loads on various soils, see Bricklayer, notes preceding clause No. 115. strata. (i) The excavation consists of a clay stratum, inter- spersed lightly with rock for a distance of some 4 ft.,, below which is a stratum of a more rocky nature. State the nature of ground for excavation, such as clay, gravel, chalk, sand or rock ; the above clause being an example only. Trial pits will have to be dug to ascertain this. Surface turf. (2) Carefully remove the turf, preserve and stack for re-use by employer. This clause would refer more especially to a virgin soil. Surface earth. (3) Eemove the surface earth to an average depth of (say) 15 in. over the whole site of building, wheel and deposit where directed within 20 yards run (or cart away). State if the surface excavation be more or less than 15 in., and if the run be more or less than 20 yards. Vegetable soil. (4) Separate the vegetable soil and deposit in a heap where directed. Sometimes required for garden purposes. EXCAVATOK. (5) Basement and (5) Excavate the ground for basement and cellars to an average depth of (say) 9 ft. below turf level, wheel and deposit where directed within 20 yards run ; (or cart away) but part return, fill in and ram. The depth of basements may be more or less than 9 ft. If the exca- vation be in a confined area, such as house or shop property situated in a city, the description would run : Excavate the ground for cellars and basement to an average depth of (say) 9 ft. ; basket, and cart away; including grubbing up any old foundations or other obstacles on the site. "Boiler house, areas, &c. (6) Excavate the ground for boiler house, areas and other parts, to the extent shown on plans ; and deposit where directed within 20 yards run ; (or cart away) but part return, fill in and ram. See remarks as to clause No. 3. Well (or cesspool.) (7) Excavate for well (or cesspool), and deposit where directed within 20 yards run (or cart away), but part return, fill in and ram. See Bricklayer, clause No. Ill, and Drainage, clause No. 53, for the construction of wells ; and Drainage, clause No. 50, for cesspools. Very little, if any, of well or cesspool excavation is returned and filled in, as they are invariably cut the exact size required. (8) Excavate the ground required for underpinning to walls, and deposit where directed within 20 yards run (or cart away) ; including all shoring, needles and strutting. The excavation to be done in short lengths at a time, not more than 4 ft. "See remarks as to clav.se No. 3. Excavation for underpinning. Excavation to (9) Excavate the ground to trenches, for footings, foundations, piers, and concrete, to the several depths and extents shown upon the plans ; and deposit where directed within 20 yards run (or cart away) ; but part return, fill in and ram. See remarks to clause No. 3. Quicksand excavation. ile round the area to be excavated, and excavate down to the solid gravel bed some (say) 10 ft. deep, and fill up the space with cement concrete to the level of the footings for the foundations. The sand may be used by the con- tractor by allowing a credit at the architect's valuation. For a fuller de- scription of piles, see Carpenter, clause No. 341 ; and if creosoted, see Carpenter, clause No. 26. w (18) EXCAVATOR. 41 If there be a quicksand formation on the site, this will be found one of the best methods to overcome the difficulty ; but give the area to be excavated with the depth. Piles, spaced at various distances apart, are also driven through a quicksand until they reach the solid bottom ; then a concrete bed or layer is formed over them, upon which the building is erected (see Carpenter, clause No. 341), as the expense may be too great or perhaps impossible to excavate some quicksands. Garden walls and (n) Excavate for front, return and other garden walls, piers and covered way; and deposit where directed within 20 yards run (or cart away) ; but part return, fill in and ram. See remarks to clause ISTo. 3. See Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 98, 99 and 105 to 107, referring to garden walls, in which the excavation is taken in the general description, which perhaps is better. Level - (12) Well pun, consolidate and level the ground to bottom of trenches, excavations, and over the entire site of building, so as to procure a firm and solid foundation for walls, concrete and pavings. level lawn. (13) Take up the turf to lawn in front garden, level, relay and beat down; sow with Carter's seeds, and trim the borders. More in a gardener's way, but sometimes done by a contractor. Xevel up old (14) Level over the ground where existing out- buildings are taken down, and fill up any excavations caused by their removal. This clause may refer to any parts of the site not rebuilt upon, but from which existing buildings have been removed. Tlank, strut and (15) Perform as required all planking, strutting and staging to all excavations for trenches, piers, con- crete, basements, cellars, areas and other parts. *j vations (ig) Any water that may accumulate in the trenches or excavations during the progress of the work, either from rain, springs, floods or other causes ; to be baled or pumped out, or otherwise removed from the site, and the excavations kept free. Jill in and ram, (17) Fill in, and ram the ground round the footings and walls. or, Fill in, and ram with hard dry brick rubbish round footings and walls, some 6 in. (to 9 in.) wide. Brici rubbish (is) Lay over the whole site of buildings between concrete^ 6 the walls > hard dl T brick rubbish 6 in. (or 9 in.) deep ; level up and well ram to receive the concrete. 42 EXCAVATOR. (19) Do not fail to specify the surface excavations of sufficient depth to allow for the brick rubbish filling under the concrete. Brick rubbish laid under surface concrete keeps the concrete dryer than if laid direct upon the ground, if a damp soil ; but with chalk, rock or gravel, brick rubbish is not required. Fill up in brick (^) Fill U P ^ n nar d dry brick rubbish, well ram rubbish. and level up to receive concrete to within 8 in. of finished surface of vestibule (or other parts). In special places it may require some ~ considerable filling up, owing to the excavations ; or owing to the finished level of these places being at a higher level than the general finished level. Lime for concrete. (20) The lime to be freshly burnt, ground grey chalk (" stone ") lime from Dorking, Hailing or Maid- stone, and free from fatness. or, The lime to be freshly burnt, ground blue lias lime, from Barrow, Rugby or Whitby. All these are hydraulic limes, though somewhat poor, but mostly in use in the London markets ; Barrow being about the best. Some blue lias lime is eminently hydraulic. Hydraulic lime (21) The lime to be finely ground, specially powerful and carefully prepared, from Halkin Moun- tain or Aberthaw. These are especially powerful hydraulic limes. The best lime concrete should be composed with a powerful hydraulic lime ; and powerful hydraulic limes only should be used in wet situations. Selenitic lime or (22) To be selenitic lime (or cement), used and C concret f e. r mixed in accordance with the Selenitic Lime and Cement Company's instructions. This also may be used in wet situations for concrete, and is very strong. Portland cement (23) The cement to be Portland cement from the banks of the Thames or Medway, finely ground, and weighing not less than 112 Ibs. per imperial striked bushel or more than 120 Ibs. ; and when shaken through a sieve having 2500 meshes (perforations) to the square inch, shall not reject more than 15 per cent., and shall be capable of sustaining a tensile strain of 350 Ibs. per sq. in. after seven days' immersion. The cement to be laid out in a dry place, not more than 18 in. in depth, some three weeks before using - f and well turned over three times during that period. Laying the cement out will cool it. If a more stringent clause referring to Portland cement be required, the following description may be used : (26) EXCAVATOR. 43 The briquettes to be made in moulds of brass or gun-metal, and laid upon a glass or metal bed. The sectional area of the briquettes at point of fracture to be 1 in. square, and the average tensile strength of five briquettes to be taken. The five briquettes to be made all from one gauging and placed in a tank of water twenty-four hours after gauging ; remaining in for seven days, and tested immediately upon being taken out. The cement to be gauged with 18 per cent, of clean water, and the weight applied for testing to be at the rate of 100 Ibs. per 15 seconds. Fracture to take place at about 300 Ibs. per sq. in. Weight of cement to be not less than 112 Ibs. or more than 120 Ibs. per striked imperial bushel. The cement, when shaken through a copper sieve having 2500 meshes to the square inch, is not to reject more than 15 per cent, by weight. The imperial bushel to be lightly filled, and the top taken off level. Sand in concrete. (24) The sand to be clean sharp Thames grit from above bridge, washed and screened, free from salt and other impurities. or, The sand to be clean sharp inland river grit, free from impurities, washed and screened. or, The sand to be clean sharp pit sand, washed and screened, and free from loam, peaty matter or other impurities. Where dryness in concrete is essential, sea sand should not be used ; and w T hen a building is to be erected near the sea coast, a clause should clearly state this, otherwise the contractor may use sea sand in the work. This would equally apply to the sand for mortar or plaster. Also see notes to clause No. 8 in Bricklayer. Ballast for (25) The ballast to be Thames ballast, from above bridge (or inland river, or pit ballast), free from salt, loam and other impurities. That for the concrete foundations to pass a 2 in. ring, and for surface con- crete, pavings and concrete flooring a 1 in. ring. Ballast may also be of broken brick, burnt clay, flint, coke, chalk, earthenware, slag, gasworks breeze or other hard material; but sea shingle should never be used when dryness is essential. Ballast must not be of too smooth a material, and should be fairly porous. From 1J in. to 2J in. rings are employed for gauging the ballast. Wft ter. (26) Provide clean, fresh river (or spring) water for the works, with all requisite storage tanks, cocks and temporary plumbing, and remove when directed. Sea water is not to be used. 44 EXCAVATOK. (27) Sea water will not harm concrete, in fact, it adds to its strength ; but .should only be used in such places where dryness is not essential. Cement concrete (27) Cement concrete to be composed of 5 parts or oundations. ballast, 2 of sand and 1 of Portland cement, measured in boxes, mixed dry, turned over some three or four times, then water added, and turned over again until the whole is incorporated. If the interstices be not filled up, more sand and cement to be added. The proportions of ballast, sand and cement vary according to the nature of the concrete required. Here are a few proportions used : For concrete walling, 1 cement to 6, 7 or 8 ballast and sand. For roofs and floors, 1 cement to 5 or 6 balla,st and sand (and a small pro- portion of gypsum where liable to be affected by heat). For concrete under water 1 cement to 4 or 6 of gravel and sand. lime concrete. (28) Lime concrete to be composed of 5 parts ballast, 1 sand and 1 blue lias lime (or other lime), measured in boxes, mixed dry, and water added after. If the interstices be not filled up, more sand and lime to be added. The proportions of ballast, sand and lime vary, and may be 5 parts ballast, 2 sand, 1 lime. State the kind of lime, if other than blue lias is required. See clause No. 20. Special hydraulic lime concrete. Selenitic lime or cement concrete. method of mixing and laying concrete. Concrete foundations. (29) This description would be similar to the pre- ceding clause, the lime being one of those mentioned in clause No. 21. (30) To be used and mixed in accordance with the Selenitic Lime and Cement Company's printed in- structions. (31) The specified proportions of ballast, sand and cement (or lime) are to be mixed on a clean stone or wood floor, after being carefully measured out in mea- sures of approved dimensions, which are to be kept for this purpose on the works. The materials are to be turned over three times in a dry state, and then wetted through a coarse watering rose whilst being turned back the fourth time, and finally turned over once more and immediately deposited in the trenches, in layers not exceeding 12 in. in depth. Each layer to be well rammed and the top surface swept clean, picked over and sprinkled with water before a further layer is deposited ; each layer being allowed to set separately. (32) Form cement (or lime) concrete foundations under all walls to the several depths shown, and pro- jecting 4 in. (or 6 in.) on either side beyond lowest course of footings ; the whole to be well rammed (or worked in with a spade) and levelled up for brickwork. (39) EXCAVATOK. 45 If the ground be hard gravel, chalk, rock, or similar compact sub- stance, concrete is not absolutely necessary. Gravel, compact dry sand, chalk and rock make good foundations ; as also clay, when free from water and the action of the weather. Concrete (33) The underpinning to the walls of adjoining underpinning. owners' premises to be carefully done in short lengths- at a time, in hot Portland cement (or hot grey chalk lime) concrete. Hot cement and hot lime are when they are imperfectly slaked or cooled, and consequently expand in the setting. See Bricklayer, clause- No. 34, for brickwork in underpinning. Boiler (34) Lay cement concrete foundations under boiler (say) 2 ft, deep, and projecting 3 ft. all round beyond the area of boiler. Heavy weights should have a solid foundation prepared for them. The depth of the concrete will vary from a few inches to very many feet, according to the nature of the foundation and the weight to be supported. Concrete under (35) Lay cement concrete foundations under large V weight s 7 chimney shaft, in four layers, each layer being 12 in. thick. When one layer is nearly set hard, large rough ballast or stones from 4 in. to 8 in. diameter are to be thrown over the surface, and partly worked in so as to form a key for the next layer. Brush over each layer with a coarse broom, pick over, and well sprinkle with water before a next layer of concrete is formed. Concrete is sometimes laid in this way in very heavy work. See notes to clause No. 34. Concrete between (36) Fill in the spandrils between the arches with arches. cement concrete. Such as, in an arched viaduct or other arched work. Surface concrete. (37) Lay over the whole site of building between the walls, cement (or lime) concrete 6 in. (or 9 in.) thick, worked in with a spade and levelled up. There are other kinds of concrete, such as tar concrete, iron concrete- and lead concrete, but these are only very occasionally used. Ashes. (38) Lay over all concrete surfaces under boarded floors, smith's ashes 2 in. (to 6 in.) thick. This keeps the growth of fungi away. Clay puddle. (39) The outside of all walls, tanks, cesspools and arches, or other brickwork in contact with the soil, is> to be puddled round with well kneaded clay puddle 9 in. thick. This will keep water from percolating through the brickwork. The puddle may be from 6 in. to 12 in. thick. 46 EXCAVATOR. (40) FIREPROOF FLOORS, STAIRS AND ROOFS. (Clauses Nos. 40 to 46.) staging. (40) Erect, case, and afterwards remove planking, staging and props (or centres) to concrete floors and roofs. The planking to be kept J in. below the iron joists, and fitted close together. (See Carpenter, clause No. 34.) See Carpenter, notes preceding clause No. 46, for weights on floors ; and in addition allow for the weight of the iron joists, the concrete or brick filling, and the paving or flooring above. Purbeck paving . . . 2J- in. thick weighs about 34 Ibs. per ft. super. Granite . . . 3 in. 42 Ibs. Yictoria stone paving . 2 in. 25^ Ibs. York 2 in. 26 Ibs. York 2* in. 32J Ibs. York 3 in. 39 Ibs. One ton of York paving 2 J in. thick will cover about 70 super, feet, 3 in. ,, 08 Asphalt paving . . . . 1 in. thick weighs about 12 J Ibs. per ft. super. Cement and sand paving 1 in. 10 ibs. Wood block (fir) 2 in. 6J Ibs. Cement concrete weighs from about . 137 to 142 Ibs. per cubic ft. Lhne concrete weighs about 120 Ibs. Ordinary brickwork in mortar weighs about . 110 Ibs. Ordinary brickwork in cement weighs about . 112 Ibs. Coke breeze and cement 6 in. thick, with iron joists, weighs about 70 Ibs. per ft. super. Brick, plaster and wrought iron resist fire, as also concrete when mixed with cement and breeze (or gypsum) ; but stone and cast iron do not. There are various ways of constructing fireproof floors, those most com- monly in use being formed with concrete placed ?f :*'* I i between iron joists, supported while it sets with * * ' '" staging from below. Also brick arches with brick springers may be turned between the iron joists, supported on centres while setting ; and a tension rod gn the joists and arches every now and then to take the thrust of the last arches, the spandrils being filled in with concrete. The arches may be from 4 ft. to 12 ft. span, with a least rise of one-tenth the span for mills, and one-eighth for warehouses. There are several patents for fireproof floors. Timber joists placed close together and plastered beneath, make a fireproof floor. (42) EXCAVATOR. 47 Concrete fireproof floors, with deal flooring over. (41) Form all floors, landings and passages upon staging with cement concrete 6 in. thick (or other depth), composed of 1 part Portland cement, 5 (or 4) parts ballast to pass a 1 in. (or 1 in.) dia- meter ring, 1 part sand, and 1 part coke breeze (slag or gypsum), mixed together dry and water added after, and well worked in between the iron (or steel) joists with a shovel. When the staging is removed, fill in the under side of joists with line concrete (or cement). The iron joists to be spaced 2 ft. 6 in. apart. Then give the sizes of the joists, which would vary ac- cording to the span : see Smith, clause No. 15. (If the span be considerable, heavier cross joists or girders may be required to support the iron joists carrying the concrete ; these may be cased round with cement.) The fir joists carrying the flooring to be 4J- in. (or 5 in.) X 2 J- in., spiked to 4 in. x 4 in. splayed fir plates bedded in the concrete 2 in. down ; two plates being cut out of a 7 in. x 4 in. deal. or, The fir joists may be 4J in. (or 5 in.) x 2 J in., bedded in the concrete 1J in. (or 2 in.) down (either parallel with, or crossing the iron joists ; and without plates). Concrete 5 in. thick will carry ordinary loads of private houses up to about 4 ft. span. The iron joists are usually placed from 2 ft. 6 in. to 3 ft. apart. The under side of concrete floor may be rendered over in gauged plaster or cement: see Plasterer, clauses ISTos. 27 and 51. If the concrete floor is to be paved over in cement, asphalt or wood blocks, then the concrete should be some 3 in. thicker than the full depth of the iron joists ; this will allow the concrete to be f in. below the iron joists and 2 in. above ; thus forming a key for the rendering beneath and the paving above. If asphalt or wood block paving be required, the concrete must be first rendered over f in. (or 1 in.) thick, so as to form a smooth surface upon which to lay the asphalt or wood blocks. If stone paving be required, then the concrete need only be about 1 in. above the iron joists; the stone paving being laid in mortar and grouted in cement. See Pavior, clauses Nos. 2, 4, 7 and 8, and Mason, clauses Nos. 42 to 44, 65, 66, 76 and 77, for various kinds of paving ; and Carpenter, clauses Nos. 58 to 71, for flooring. See Pavior, clause No. 3, for concrete floors laid to existing timber floors. When a wooden staircase has concrete landings, a wooden nosing must be described as a finish, similar to ordinary wooden staircases, but screwed down into plugs in the concrete. Concrete fireproof stairs. (42) The staircases from ground to second floor, to- gether with the quarter and half space landings, to be EXCAVATOR. (43) formed in situ, upon wrought timber frames and props, with concrete composed of 1 part Portland cement, 4 parts fine shingle (or granite chippings) passing a | in. ring, and 1 part coke breeze (slag or gypsum). The surfaces to be worked up smooth with a trowel, the arrises taken off J in., and holes formed for balusters. Form the steps with 11 in. treads, 6J in. rise, 6 in. into walls, and 3 ft. 6 in. projection. Eender and set the soffits in cement. (See Plasterer, clauses Nos. 27 and 51.) State if returned moulded nosings are to be worked on. The steps may be built with iron carriages : see Smith, clause No. 13 ; Carpenter, notes to clause No. 221 ; and Mason, notes to clause No. 64 When the steps are more than 4 ft. wide, they should be provided with two (or more) iron carriages. Describe the balusters and handrail, as in Mason, clause No. 64. Concrete steps may be cast in blocks and fixed like ordinary stone steps, as in Mason, clauses Nos. 64, 67 to 75 and 7& to 80. Arched fireproof floors. (43) Form all floors, landings and passages with brick arches on centres in cement half a brick thick., with brick springing pieces against joists, and fill in above with cement concrete. Take f in. (or 1 in.) dia- meter tie rods through ail the joists every 6 ft. (to 10 ft.) apart, with nuts, heads and large washers. For l*ry*r pa** Half-brick arches will do up to 4 ft. span, and one-brick arches up to 12 ft. span. Then describe the iron joists, fir joists, the paving or floorway ; see clause No. 41, with notes. The under side of arches may be rendered over in cement, or pointed. Sometimes the arches are in glazed bricks. The objection to arches in a fireproof floor is that if one arch fails the others are likely to give way. Tile fireproof floor. (44) Form floor on centres with flat tiles as arches : the lowermost course being laid dry on the center! ng r and then flushed up in cement, and the three other courses laid in cement. Fill in above with cement con- crete. Take in. diameter tie rods through all the joists- every 6 ft. apart, with nuts, heads and large washers. Then describe the iron joists, fir joists, the paving or flooring ; see clause No. 41, with notes. The under side of arches may be rendered over in cement. This form of floor is very suitable for the top of hot closets, and drying-horse chambers in laundries. It may be fixed up to 6 ft. span. (45) The iron joists, arches and concrete would be tlie same as iu floors ( see clauses Nos - 40, 41 and 43), but state the concrete is to be formed up to a fall of 2 in. in 10 ft., with a gutter and outlet formed at one side. Render over in cement 1J in. thick finished, a trowelled face, in neat cement | in. thick in the one operation, and with angle fillets against walls.. Concrete flats (47) EXCAVATOR. 49 It is somewhat difficult to get concrete paved with cement -to keep out wet when subject to the weather. It is better to cover the flat over with asphalt, when the description would run as clause No. 46. The weights to be considered in a concrete roof are the iron joists, the concrete, the paving on top, as well as wind and snow, and any other weight likely to be put upon it ; see notes to clause No. 40, and notes preceding clause No. 74 in Carpenter. In concrete floors or roofs to outside terraces, gangways and other similar positions, which may be finally paved with a pervious material, such as stone chippings, gravel, or loose tar paving, then the concrete should be asphalted over ^ in. (or J in.) thick, to keep the wet from percolating below; or the surface may be spread over with a com- position of pitch and tar about J in. thick. Concrete flats covered with asphalt. (46) Cover the roof flat with J in. (or 1 in.) Val-de- Travers mastic asphalt, laid to falls in two thicknesses in 3 ft. widths breaking joint, with 6 in. X J in. asphalt skirting and angle fillet against the walls ; form gutter and outlet. Form the concrete under (say) 9 in. thick, render up level 1 in. thick in cement, and allow to dry before the asphalt is applied. Describe the iron joists ; see clause No. 41. Outside corridors and terraces would be formed in the same way. See Pavior, notes under clause No. 7, for asphalts. The pitch may be 2 in. in 10 ft., but not more than one-tenth the span where there is much sun. Concrete and asphalt flats may be formed to existing timber flats, if the joists be strong enough, by spiking the joists with 2 J in. x 2 in. deal fillets, and then laying 1 in. rough boarding between, and filling in over with concrete, cement and asphalt, in the same way as described in the abovo clause ; but this class of concrete roof will not be fire-proof. Concrete walls to buildings. (47) The walls to be built with concrete, composed of 1 part Portland cement, 1 part sand, and 6 parts ballast to pass a 1 J in. diameter ring. Form the concrete walls between strong timber fram- ing, with rough boarding wrought on the one side where against the external face of walls. The concrete to be laid in parallel courses, not more than 15 in. deep at a time, the upper surface being left rough to form a key for each successive layer. Beniove timber work when directed. (Give the thickness of the walls to the several floors.) See Carpenter, clause No. 34, for timber work. A 12 in. concrete wall is equal in strength to a 1 brick wall; therefore, taking the various thicknesses of brick walls mentioned under clause No. 17 in Bricklayer, the sizes of the walls, if in concrete, may be calculated accordingly ; but a partition concrete wall should not be less than 6 in. thick. In the county of London, concrete walls have to be about the same thicknesses as those given for walls under clause E 5O EXCAVATOK. (48) No. 17 in Bricklayer. If the external surface of the walls be rendered over in cement, which is necessary for a neat finish, the timber boarding will not require to be wrought on the one side. For the cement rendering, the window dressings, sills and cornices, see Plasterer, clauses Nos. 68 to 71. The London Building Act, 1894, requires that concrete walls to buildings situate in the county of London area, should be composed of 1 part Portland cement, 2 parts sand, and 3 parts ballast to pass a 2 in. diameter ring. Concrete walls communicate sound. Flues in concrete walls should be lined with stoneware flue pipes. Concrete river (48) See Bricklayer, clause No. 110. walling. (1) PAVIOB. Cuttings. (1) PAVING tiles to be neatly cut to the irregular angles and curves, immersed in water, jointed and bedded in neat cement J in. (to f in.) thick, and when set, washed over in cold water and soft soap, and wiped off dry with a cloth several times during the first few weeks after laying. Stains can be removed from tiles by using muriatic acid diluted with water, applied with pumice-stone and wiped off with a cloth. Outhouses, sheds, cellars and similar situations, may be paved with hard grey stocks, malm paviors or Staffordshire blue bricks, either laid flat or on edge, in straight courses or herring-bone, in sand or mortar, on 4 in. (or 6 in.) lime (or cement) concrete, or laid dry and grouted in cement (or lime) mortar. The sand or mortar bedding enables the bricks to be worked in level. These bricks measure about 8f in. x 4J in. x 2f in. Outside lobbies and best inside passages may be paved with Suffolk whites (about 8J in. X 4^ in. X 2f in.) in any of the ways just mentioned ; but in these positions they are seldom bedded on sand. Sculleries, larders, passages and such like may be paved with blue Staffordshire or Broseley paving bricks (9 in. x 4J in. x 2 in.), laid in cement on concrete bed. Blue Staffordshire chequered bricks (9 in, x 4J in. X 2 in. and 12 in. x 6 in. x 2 J in.) laid in cement on concrete bed, may be used in yards. Dutch clinker blue paving bricks (6J- in. x 3 in. x 1J in.) ; blue Stafford- shire stable bricks (9 in. x 4J in. x 2J- in.), either plain or chamfered ; and Adamantine clinkers paving bricks (6 in. x 2 J in. X 1 J in.) (yellow in tint), either plain or chamfered, are all used for stables and pavings. Staffordshire blue or red paving tiles (6 in. x 6 in. x 1 in., 9 in. x 9 in. X 1 in., 10 in. x 10 in. x 1 in. and 12 in. X 12 in. x 1J in.) are made in squares, hexagons and octagons, and when used for floor pavings are -called " quarries." They are generally found in old buildings. Broseley red or Staffordshire blue (10 in. x 5 in. x 1 in.) wire cut paving bricks are suitable for passages and larders. Encaustic tiles are made in various colours in 6 in. X 6 in., 4 in. x 4J in., 4 in. x 4 in., 3 in. x 3 in. and 2J- in. x 2J- in. squares and other shapes, and mostly used for paving halls and passages, and sometimes on walls. They may also be had in other sizes. Majolica tiles are made in various colours with a glazed surface, either plain or raised, and are only suitable for vertical positions ; they are made in the same sizes as encaustic tiles. Tessene are very small encaustic tiles in various colours, and used for pavings to halls and passages. The word is also applied to small marble cubes. E 2 PAVIOK. (2) In all tile pavings a very level surface is required, and the concrete must be floated over f in. (to 1 in.) thick to an even face, and the tiles jointed and bedded in cement about J in. to f in. thick (so as to work them in evenly), and when set, washed perfectly clean in cold water and soft soap, and wiped dry several times for the first few weeks. This will much improve the colour. In external pavings, in stables, wash-houses and similar places, they must be laid to falls. Vestibule mat space and mat. (2) Pave vestibule with polished Roman (or Vene- tian) marble mosaic filling and border in cement, of the p.c. sum, (say) 8, laid upon a f in. (or 1 in.) cement mortar floated face ; form a 3 ft. x 2 ft. 6 in. sinking for mat 2 in. deep, with a 4 in. x 3 in. x i in. L iron frame, and provide a door mat, (say) p.c. 15s. (An L iron should also be put where tiles or mosaic joint against a boarded floor.) For concrete, see Excavator, clause No. 37. The frame for mat may be of rubbed slate (say) ^^ l 3 in. x 2 in., or in J in. thick flat iron plate from 2 in. to 4 in. deep. Also see Carpenter, clause No. 64. Marble mosaic pavements are formed with small pieces of coloured marbles, from -J in. to 1 in. square, and % in. to 1 in. thick, in various shapes. They are generally set out to the required designs on prepared paper, and then laid in sections in position, rubbed down, polished and oiled in. Granito is also formed of coloured marbles in very small pieces, and thrown in without regard to design, then rubbed down, polished and oiled in. Mosaic and granito are largely used for corridors, passages and pavements or, Pave the vestibule, hall, and ground floor passages with encaustic tile paving and border, (say) p.c. 15s. per yard, laid in cement on a J in. (or 1 in.) cement mortar floated face. For concrete, see Excavator, clause No. 37. Ceramic pavement consists of small tiles in various colours, and of similar sizes to marble mosaic. It is laid in the same way, but does not require rubbing down or polishing, as the tiles are too hard. See notes under clause No. 1 for other kinds of paving. Mosaic or tile paving to an existing boarded floor. (3) Take up boarding, adze off the edges of timbers, and fillet the joists half way down with 2 in. x 1 in. fillets (or angle fillets out of 2 in. x2 in.); lay |- in. rough boarding between joists, and fill in with fine cement concrete, finished in cement mortar f in. (or 1 in.) thick, and lay in cement tile paving, (say) p.c. 10. per yard, level with the existing floor. The front step to be rebated out to receive the tiling. (6) PAVIOR. 53 If the joists be sufficiently strong, they may be reduced in depth to give a better key for the work. Marble mosaic, granito and ceramic pavements may be laid in the same way. If existing steps have to be covered with tiles, an 1 in. (or 1J in.) slate nosing about 2 J in. (or 3 in.) wide will be required to each step, screwed on with brass or gun-metal screws every 12 in. apart. For marble-lined steps see Mason, clause No. 128. (4) Lay these floors with 12 in. x 3 in. x If in. cut and grooved, solid, wrought all-round deal wood block flooring, in squares (or herring-bone), with margins round all rooms and passages two (or one) blocks wide, on a | in. or (1 in.) cement mortar floated face. The blocks to be dipped half-way up in hot liquid tar and pitch composition in the proportion of 2 to 1 when being laid, and when set, traversed and smoothed over. (If the blocks are too thin or too long they are liable to work up.) Jill For concrete, see Excavator, clause No. 37. Asphalt may also be laid on the cement face about \ in. to f in. thick, as a precaution against damp. These floors should more properly be described under Carpenter; see Carpenter, clauses No. 68 and 69. Wood block flooring may also be 1 in., \\ in. 1J in., 2 in. and 2J in. thick, according to the traffic, and in blocks up to 18 in. long, and in any kind of wood, such as oak, teak and pitch pine. There are various patents for this kind of flooring, as White's, Lowe's, Ward's and the Westminster Flooring Company. Cement hearths. (5) The front and back hearths to basement and attic floor to be worked up with a steel trowel in 1 in. cement, in the proportion of 1 Portland cement to 1 of sand, and finished in f in. neat cement. Also see Bricklayer, clause No. 42. Eed Broseley wire-cut paving bricks (10 in. x 5 in. x lin.) are also suitable for hearths in these positions. Tile hearths and (6) Allow the p.c. sum of 1 to each of the ground floor tile hearths ; and the p.c. sum of 15s. each for the first floor tile hearths, and lay in cement on a cement floated bed f in. thick. Tile hearths may be in either plain glazed, or painted tiles, according to position. Polished marble J in. to 1-J- in. thick is also used for hearths in Sicilian, vein or black marble ; see Mason, clause No. 122. Hearth kerbs. Allow the p.c. sum of 2 for each of the ground floor marble hearth kerbs, and 1 10s. for each of the first floor marble hearth kerbs. The kerbs to be set in cement 1 in. below floor level, dowelled at angles and to chimney-pieces. (See Mason, clause No. 123.) 54 PAVIOR. (7) Kerbs may also be in stone, enamelled slate, or glazed brick ware, and .TO, ._.__. in many sections; the round section is the best, as it ^ ^ ^ ^ shows damage the least. Scullery, larder, (7^ Pave scullery, larder, pantry, wash-house and Pa and'prs a sages. US passages adjoining, with cement paving 11 in. (or 1 in.) thick, in the proportion of 1 Portland cement to 1 sand, and when nearly set, float over with a steel float in neat Portland cement -| in. thick ; and before finally setting, water is to be flooded over about 2 in. deep. For concrete, see Excavator, clause No. 37. Cement paving hardens better under water. or, Pave the scullery, larder, pantry, washhouse and passages with 6 in. x 6 in. x 1 in. black and red Staf- fordshire quarries in cement, laid diagonally on a J in. (or 1 in.) cement floated face. For concrete, see Excavator, clause No. 37. See notes under clause No. 1 for other kinds of suitable paving. or, Pave the scullery and wash-house with Seyssel patent mastic asphalt f in. (or 1 in.) thick, laid in 3 ft. widths at a time, and rubbed to a true surface; with a 6 in. x in. asphalt skirting jointed to the paving with an asphalt angle fillet, the whole being laid on a 6 in. cement (or lime) concrete foundation floated up level in fine stuff f in. thick, and allowed to dry before the asphalt is applied. See Excavator, notes to clause No. 41, for asphalt paving to fire-proof floors. Mastic asphalt as paving, over J- in. thick, is usually laid in two thicknesses, and sometimes when only J in. thick ; see clause No. 46. State if any channels are to be formed to take off the water, or if the paving is to be laid to falls. Asphalt used in ordinary flooring may be laid J in., J in., f in., and 1 in. thick. Where subject to heavy wear, it may be 1 in. to 1 in. thick. As a road paving and on footpaths, 1 J in., 1-J in., to 2 in. thick, see " Koad-making," clauses Nos. 33 and 34. Where laid as a water- proof covering to arches, -| in. is sufficient, see Bricklayer, clause No. 43. As a damp-proof course to horizontal walls, in., |- in., in., and in. thick, see Bricklayer, clause No. 62. As a damp-proof course to vertical walls, in. to 1 in. thick, see Bricklayer, notes to clause No. 1. As a roof covering, and to outside terraces and corridors, it may be in. to. 1 in. thick, see Excavator, clause No. 46. Asphalt is generally made in three qualities : " Fine," being suitable for magazine paving ; " Fine gritted," for flats, arches and lining tanks ; " Coarse gritted," as flooring, and as a paving to courts, roads, pavements and other places subject to great wear. Asphalt is both fire and water-proof. It may be laid either in a (9) PAVIOB. 55 mastic state, or as powder compressed with hot iron rammers. The mastic state is suitable for walls, arches, floors, roofs, and linings to tanks. The powdered state is only suitable for floors, roads, pavements, horizontal surfaces, and positions subject to much traffic. . There are various manufacturers of asphalt, such as the Val de Travers Co. ; this asphalt is very suitable for roads and pavements ; see Eoad-making, clauses Nos. 33 and 34. It is laid either in a mastic or dry state, in the same thicknesses as Seyssel. Cellars. (8) Pave the boiler-house, the coal, wood and other cellars, with ! in. (or 1^ in.) cement paving, in the proportion of 1 Portland cement to 1 of sand, finished with a steel float in one operation. The work is not required to be so nicely finished in rough situations. For concrete, see Excavator, clause No. 37. or, Pave the boiler-house, the coal, wood and other cellars, with hard stock paving bricks on edge, in lime (or cement) mortar, upon a sand bedding spread over the concrete. For concrete, see Excavator, clause No. 37. See notes under clause No. 1 for other kinds of paving. Yard and areas. (9) Excavate ground to an average depth of 18 in. r (more or less) and cart away (or wheel and deposit a stated distance). Fill in with 9 in. brick rubbish well rammed, and a 4 in. (or 6 in.) cement concrete bed on top, and pave the yard and areas with cement concrete paving 2 in. thick, laid to falls of 2 in. in 10 ft., floated with a steel float and worked to a smooth surface. The concrete paving to be composed of 1 part Portland cement to 4 parts of shingle the size of horse beans, and fined up on top in neat cement f in. thick in the one operation. It is always well in cement paving to finish it in the one operation, especially when it is outside, otherwise it is sure to work up. The excavation, brick rubbish and rough concrete bed may be described in Excavator. State if any channels are to be formed. Crushed granite and Portland cement in the proportion of 4 to 1 make a capital pavement. or, Pave the yard with blue Staffordshire bricks, laid in cement to falls on a f in. cement floated face (or sand bed). For concrete, see Excavator, clause No. 37. See notes under clause No. 1 for other kinds of paving. York paving. g ee Mason/ clauses Nos. 41 to 45 ; and under Koad- making, clause No. 6. Victoria stone paving. Marble paving. PAYIOE. See under Eoad-making, clause No. 7. See Mason, clause No. 118. (10) Pavings to street See under Eoad-making, clauses Nos. 6, 8 to 17 P aths ' and 34. Entrance to (10) See clause No. 11, referring to the paving of carriage gates. en t ra nces to stable yards. PAYING TO STABLE BUILDINGS. (Clauses Nos. 11 to 13.) stable yard. (H) Pave the stable yard with 3 in. x 7 in. X 10 in. Aberdeen granite setts, in parallel courses touching one another, laid to falls of f in. to the foot, on a sand (or fine shingle) bed 1 in. (to 1J in.) thick, with a foundation of 6 in. cement con- crete under. Grout in cement mortar, well ram, and top dress with sand (or fine shingle). Each of the setts to be fairly well dressed and squared. Form the mitres in two courses wide, and the channels in three courses wide, with falls to gully. Pave the entrance from roadway with setts on concrete in a similar way ; with 12 in. x 6 in. Aber- deen granite kerbing and corners to each side, laid flat (or on edge) in lengths of not less than 3 ft., with the top and front surfaces finely dressed (axed or drafted), and the back edge and ends squared and dressed (or drafted) 1 in. down ; and jointed in cement. The kerb corners to be worked to a circular sweep 18 in. external radius (or other sweep). For paving setts, see Eoad-making, clause No. 30. For granite kerb, see Eoad-making, clause No. 4. Eowley Hall, 3 in. x 6 in. x 9 in. paving setts are very suitable for stable yards, as also Kentish Eag paving setts. With great care, a carriage and pair can turn round in a space of 1 6 ft. square ; but 20 ft. square is a more useful area of space. A large one-horse van will require 20 ft. square to turn round. Aberdeen or Guernsey granite setts in 4 in. cubes may be used for stable yards. In some parts, flint boulders are used as paving to yards, with brick bands to tie them together ; they require a very great fall to keep tolerably clean. (12) PAVIOR, 57 Paving inside stables. (12) Stables may be paved in two ways, according as to whether there be surface or underground drains. J * > I & -=X There is not much objection to underground drains in a stable, if a straight run can be obtained, with access at both ends. The description of the paving in this latter case would run : Pave the loose box, sick box, stalls and cleaning- room, with 6 in. x 2 J in. x If in. yellow-tinted Adaman- tine clinkers, chamfered on two edges only, laid in in. neat cement to falls to horse-pots of 1J in. in 6 ft., on a f in. floated bed composed of 1 part Portland cement to 1 part sand, with a 6 in. cement concrete foundation under. Grout over in neat cement well brushed in, and clean off. (Or the cement may be thrown on dry, brushed in, flooded over with water and cleaned off.) - The passage to be formed with similar clinkers cham- fered on four edges, and laid level in herring-bone fashion, with a border of two (or three) lines of bricks round. The usual size of loose boxes is 12 ft. x 12 ft. ; sometimes they are made 10 ft. X 8 ft., 10 ft. x 12 ft., and 12 ft. x 14 ft. The usual size of stalls is 9 ft. X 6 ft, ; they may be made 9 ft. 6 in. x 6 ft. and 10 ft. X 6 ft. The passage in front should not be less than 6 ft., but 7 ft. is a very good width, and no stable should be less than 16 ft. to 18 ft. wide in all. The height of a stable should not be less than 10 ft. or more than 12 ft. The fall of the paving in stalls and loose boxes should only be just sufficient for the urine to run off, as it is harmful to horses to stand much out of the level. If there be no underground drains, but iron surface gutters be used, then the description of the paving would remain exactly the same ; except it would be described as laid to falls to the iron surface gutters, instead of to the horse-pots. By using clinkers chamfered on two edges only, for stalls and loose boxes, it allows the urine to run freely to the horse-pots or iron surface drains, without being impeded by any cross chamfers. In a passage, the clinkers are chamfered on four edges merely for appear^ ance, there being no urine passing over it. But it will assist in the cleansing of a passage if it be laid to a slight fall to some point. 58 PAVIOR. (13) Unchamfered 6 in. x 2J in. X 1J in. yellow-tinted Adamantine clinkers, and Dutch blue clinkers 6 in. X 3 in. x 1 J in., are also used for stalls, loose boxes and passages, but they afford no foothold for the horses. They may be used in coach-houses and like positions if desired. The St. Pancras Iron Company make a grooved (with either one or three grooves) brick which is very suitable for stables. The three-groove bricks have a groove and tongue at ends for bonding. Messrs. Wilkinson make a granite concrete paving, laid in situ as ordinary concrete, with or without grooves, but having no joints. Messrs. Walker, of Leeds, make a concrete and slag paving, laid in situ, either plain or grooved, and having no joints. The harness room may be paved with wood block flooring, as clause No. 4. Coach-house. (13) A coach-house may be paved with cement laid to a fall of 2 in. in 10 ft. on a bed of concrete, similar to clauses No. 7 or 9. or, in plain unchamfered Adamantine clinkers, as in notes to clause No. 12 ; on concrete, as in clause No. 37 in Excavator. or, in Dutch blue clinkers, as in notes to clause No. 12, on concrete, as clause No. 37 in Excavator. or, in blue Staffordshire paving bricks, 9 in. X 4 J in. X 2 in. (or 12 in. x 6 in. X 2 in.) ; on concrete, as clause No. 3T in Excavator. or, in hard paviors, 9 in. x 4J in. x 3 in., either flat or on edge and on concrete, see clause No. 8. The following particulars referring to the areas which various carriages- occupy, will be found useful in settling the size of a coach-house. The distance carriages should be placed apart in a coach-house, is from 15 in. to 18 in. or 20 in., in order that there may be room to get round. Large Landau, 12 ft. 4 in. long, 5 ft. 7 in. wide, 6 ft. 9 in. high and with shafts turned up 9 ft. 5 in. high. Brougham, 11 ft. 3 in. long, 5 ft. 6 in. wide, 6 ft. 1 in. high, and with shafts turned up 9 ft. 5 in. high. Victoria, 11 ft. long, 5 ft. 6 in. wide, 6 ft. 5 in. high, and with shafts turned up 9 ft. 5 in. high. A four-wheel dog-cart, 7 ft. 9 in. to 8 ft. long, 5 ft. to 5 ft. 3 in. wide, 5 ft. 9 in. to 6 ft. high, and with shafts turned up about 9 ft. 5 in. high. A two-wheel dog cart, 11 ft. 8 in. to 12 ft. long, 5 ft. 4 in. to 5 ft. 6 in. wide, 5 ft. 11 in. to 6 ft. 2 in. high, the shafts being fixed. (13) PAVIOR. 59 A four-wheel pony carriage, 9 ft. 8 in. long, 4 ft. 6 in. wide, 5 ft. 11 in. high, and with shafts turned up about 7 ft. 6 in. high. A four-wheel Bath chair for a pony, 7 ft. 9 in. long, 3 ft. 6 in. wide,, 6 ft. 2 in. high, and with shafts turned up about 7 ft. 3 in. high. The sliafts to all kinds of carriages may either be turned up or taken off, except in the case of a two-wheel dog cart, when they are- generally fixed. The various lengths given for the carriages are with, the shafts taken off. Business vans and carts are made in many sizes. 6o (1) BEICKLAYEE. For concrete walls to buildings, see Excavator, clause No. 47. For concrete river walling, see clause No. 110. For the thicknesses of hollow walls, see notes to clause No. 17. It is preferable to build all external brick walls hollow ; but should solid brick walls be required, then the following clause, No. 1, would be omitted. Hollow walls. (1) All external walls to be built hollow, with a 2 in. cavity between the outer and inner casings, and tied together with heavy galvanised cast-iron wall ties about 8J in. x 2 J in. x f in. ^<^^3 shape ; spaced 3 ft. apart alternately to every third course of brickwork. The mortar droppings to be carefully gathered up on wood laths (or lead pipe covered with hay bands) placed in the cavity. Immediately under the eaves course there are to be placed 9 in. x 3 in. (or 9 in. x 6 in.) perforated air-bricks (or galvanised iron gratings) spaced every 10 ft. apart ; and similar air bricks at the base of the walls for ventilating the cavities. The lintels over door and window frames, where fixed in hollow walls, are to be protected with 4 Ib. lead coverings, built into the inner and outer casings to form a gutter, and projecting beyond the lintels on either side 4 in. ; and turned down to throw off any accumu- lating water. Should the lintels not run through the cavity, then this lead covering would equally be required over the door and window heads. Hollow walls prevent heat, cold and wet penetrating into the interior of a building. They are most essential in wet aspects and near the sea ; but in these situations, walls, instead of being hollow, are sometimes battened out on the inner side with 2 in. X by f in. fir battens every 12 in. apart, to which the lathing and plastering is attached. In hollow walls it is better to make the outer casing the lesser thickness, so that the inner casing may be of sufficient strength and thickness for bedding the joists and roof timbers upon. Thus a 9 in. wall would have both the outer and inner casings J brick thick. In a 14 in. wall there would be a ^ brick outer, and a 1 brick inner casing. In an 18 in. wall, perhaps the outer and inner casings might each be 1 brick thick. The last two or three courses of brickwork at the top, immediately under the eaves or parapet, are sometimes built solid right through for strength ; if it be so required, then state it. In a fairly solid hollow stone wall the outer casing has necessarily to (3) BRICKLAYER. 6l be thick, as stonework should not be worked to so small a thickness as brickwork ; then a \ brick wall may be used as an inner casing, with a similar 2^ in. cavity, and ventilating gratings as before ; the joists and roof timber must go through the cavity and bear on the solid outer stone wall, unless the inner casing be made sufficiently strong to take them. Wall-ties or cramps are also made in wrought iron, about 8 in. x | in. x in. Bonding bricks made by Messrs. fy Jennings and others may also be used, and spaced every 2 ft. 6 in. apart alternately in every fourth course of brick- ynw/ys work. Sometimes ordinary bricks dipped in boiling tar are used. Hollow walls may be built with an 1 in. (or f in.) space between, with the iron or brick ties as before, and the cavity filled in with liquid asphalt; but the brickwork must be fairly dry before the asphalt is applied, and the joints left open, so that it may tie in. The iron or brick ties in this case are not always used. Cover up walling. (2) See clause No. 37, under Preliminary Items. Class of brick. (3) All bricks, whether as rubbers, facings or in backings, to be good, hard, sound, square, and well burnt, even and uniform in shape and colour, free from cracks, stones, flaws, and other defects ; giving a clear ring when struck, and equal to samples to be deposited with and approved by the architect. No soft or place bricks to be used ; bats only to be used where required for bond. All bricks to be well wetted with clean water through a hose before being laid. All headers to be unbroken. In some situations where exposed to much wet, bricks are boiled in tar for twelve hours before being laid ; but of course the work comes out black. They are chiefly used in cottages. The various colours in bricks are obtained by the admixture of chalk, iron, silica, alkalies and other substances with clay. Kiln-burnt are better than clamp-burnt bricks. Ordinary building bricks in the London market measure about 8 j in. X 4J in. x 2f in. ; but in different parts of the country they vary in size. Rubbers, enamelled bricks, and many facing bricks, are somewhat larger than London stocks. Eubbers are soft bricks, and can be moulded or carved after having been burnt, but do not stand the weather so well as bricks moulded and carved before burning. Grizzle and Place bricks are imperfectly burnt. The ordinary best building bricks used in and around London are called Stocks, and of a yellow tint, but they vary much in their quality ; there are many local-made country bricks, which are superior in every way. Malms are the best class of Stocks ; of a yellowish tint, and used for facings and arches. Suffolk Whites are a whitish tint, also used for facings. 62 BRICKLAYER. (4) Fareham Reds are used as red facings. There are many other good Ted facing bricks. Staffordshire and Broseley blue are very hard and strong, and suitable for pavings, copings or any heavy work, or in damp situations. The paving bricks being chamfered or grooved as a foothold. Salted bricks and enamelled (glazed) bricks are used where any special sanitary requirements are essential ; the white enamelled bricks #re also suitable in dark situations for reflecting light. Ordinary brickwork in mortar and cement weighs 110 and 112 Ibs. respectively per cubic foot, but fire-brick and similar class of brick weighs considerably more. The safe load on brickwork in cement is 5 J tons per super, foot, but if in mortar then 3^ tons. The safe load on brick pillars is one-tenth to one-eighth the breaking weight. Brick pillars should not exceed in height twelve times their least thickness. Lime - (4) The lime to be freshly burnt white chalk lime, from Dorking, Merstham or Maidstone. This is a " fat " lime (that is, calcined from pure carbonate of lime), and only used for temporary buildings or in very poor work. It does not harden well and soon perishes. Hydraulic limes contain a propor- tion of clay. or, The lime to be freshly burnt hard grey chalk (stone) lime, from Hailing, Dorking or Maidstone. This lime is somewhat poor in hydraulicity, but is commonly used. or, The lime to be freshly burnt blue lias lime, from Barrow, Rugby or Whitby. Blue lias lime is a more hydraulic lime in its properties, but expensive. Hydraulic lime. (5) -The lime to be freshly burnt, specially power- ful, and carefully prepared, from Halkin Mountain or Aberthaw. These are powerful hydraulic limes, suitable for all positions ; especially foundations and damp situations. Mortar made from hydraulic limes should be used at once, as it soon sets. Mortar made with fat limes may be used some time after. Lime for mortar is usually obtained in lumps ; then slaked with water (not air) and screened ; but it may be used already ground, if fresh. Selenitic lime or (6) See clause No. 22, under Excavator, cement. Portland cement. (7)_See clause No. 23, under Excavator, which would apply here. Sand. (8) See clause No. 24, under Excavator, which would apply here. Sand is not always washed, if clean ; but when used with Portland cement it should be specially washed. Broken brick and similar sub- stances, finely ground in a pug or mortar mill, may be substituted for sand. (13) BRICKLAYER. 63 lime mortar. (9) To be composed of freshly burnt, slaked, and screened, grey chalk (stone) lime, and clean, sharp, pit (or fresh-water river) sand, in the proportion of 1 part lime to 3 (or 2) parts sand ; measured in boxes, mixed dry on a wood (stone or brick) floor, and water added afterwards, until all parts are completely incorporated and brought to a proper consistency. And made only in sufficient quantities proportionate to the demand, and prepared on the premises. State if any other lime be used, and in the same proportion, see notes under clauses No. 4 and 5 ; or if broken brick rubbish be used in lieu of sand, see clause No. 8. In foundations and similar positions, the proportions may be 1 part lime to 2 (or 1) parts sand. Gauged lime (10) The description would be similar to the mortar. preceding clause No. 9, but in these proportions : 1 part lime, 1 part Portland cement, to 4 (or 6) parts sand. When a building has to be run up quickly, gauged mortar will take less time to dry out, in addition to adding to the strength of the work. Hair mortar. (11) The description would be similar to clause No. 9, and in these proportions : 1 part lime to 3 parts sand, and 1 Ib. clean, well-beaten bullocks' hair to 2 cubic feet of lime. Hair mortar in brickwork is only used for screeding in door and window frames. Blue (or black) (12) To be composed of 3 parts blacksmith's ashes, sifted fine, to 1 part blue lias lime. or, Two parts blacksmith's ashes, sifted fine, to 3 parts slaked grey chalk lime, and 4 parts sand. The mortar to be darkened with iron- founder's sand (mineral or vegetable black). or, Two parts sifted cupola or forge coal ashes, to 1 part slaked stone lime. or, Four parts blacksmith's ashes, sifted fine, to 1 part Portland cement. Blue mortar is mostly used for pointing brickwork and masonry, or bedding slates. It is very strong. Selenitic lime or (13) To be used and mixed in accordance with the lenient mortar. p r i nte d instructions of the Selenitic Lime and Cement Company. 64 BRICKLAYER. (14) Cement mortar. (14) Cement mortar (unless specified to be neat) to be composed of 1 part Portland cement to 2 (or 3) parts sand, and no cement that has once set to be used. The ingredients to be measured in boxes, mixed dry, and water added afterwards. In all works requiring great strength, cement mortar should be used ; as also in all positions subject to wet, such as foundations. When the work practically always stands in water, the proportion may be 1 cement to 1 sand. Putty. (15) To be composed of pure lime and clean fresh water. This is used for white tuck pointing and bedding gauged brickwork. Limewhite. (16) To be composed of lime, Eussian tallow and clean water. Brickwork. (17) Build the several walls, chimney stacks, breasts and piers upon proper footings with best London stocks (or approved local bricks) carried up in English (or Flemish) bond in lime (or cement or gauged) mortar, according to the several heights, thicknesses and dimen- sions shown or figured upon the drawings, and plumbed perpendicular. Each course to be well flushed up with mortar (every fourth course is sometimes grouted in liquid mortar, but this does not make such good work). No four courses of brickwork to rise more than 1 in. higher in mortar than the bricks when laid dry (or state that the joints of brickwork are to be f in. thick). Carry up the walls evenly and at regular stages, and no one part is to be raised more than 4 ft. above any other part at any time. Perform all beam filling. (The thicknesses of the various walls may be stated.) English bond is preferable for all walls, but is not so ornamental as Flemish bond. The London Building Act, 1894, requires that the walls of buildings, when built of brick, stone, or blocks of other hard incombustible material, and situate within the county of London area, shall be at least of certain thicknesses for their several heights and lengths, according as to whether the building in question comes under what is termed in that Act as belonging to : " The Warehouse Class." " The Public Building Class." " Buildings other than those of the Warehouse Class or Public Building Class " (practically speaking, " Domestic Buildings "). These various stated thicknesses may also be taken as a guide for the thicknesses of brick, stone and similar walls to buildings not situated within the London area ; but at the same time reference should be made to the requirements of any local Acts referring to such other districts. Under the London Building Act : A "Public Building" may be taken as referring to any building where the general public meet for any purpose, such as (17) BKICKLAYEK. 65 churches, schools, halls and such like. It also includes hotels, lodging-houses and similar buildings when their cubical contents exceed 250,000 cub. ft., or when they have sleeping accommoda- tion for more than 100 persons. The thicknesses of walls to buildings of this class are not given in the London Building Act, but it states they have to be made of sufficient thickness as may be required by the District Surveyor. A " Building of the Warehouse Class " may be taken as re- ferring to warehouses, factories and similar buildings ; and to any other building when the cubical content exceeds 150,000 cub. ft., which does not come under the heading of " Public Buildings " or " Domestic Buildings." A building coming under the description of those not belonging to the " Warehouse Class," nor " Public Building Class," may be taken as referring to shops, offices and private houses ; as also to hotels, lodging-houses and similar buildings, so long as their cubical contents do not exceed 250,000 cub. ft., nor have sleeping accommodation for more than 100 persons. The thicknesses of what are termed " Cross Walls " in the London Building Act, may be two-thirds the thickness of external and party walls, but never less than 8J- in. thick. Partitions may be less in thickness. In hollow walls either the outer or the inner casing must be of the thickness required for external and party walls, but the other casing may be of any thickness. When walls are built of incombustible material which is not laid in horizontal beds or courses, the London Building Act requires that the walls shall be one-third greater in thickness than the thicknesses given for walls referred to in that Act as being laid in horizontal beds. Here, then, are the thicknesses of external and party walls to build- ings coming under the " Warehouse Class," and laid in horizontal beds, Eead paragraph (&) first, which shows what governs the intermediate thickness of a wall between the base and the top. (a) If a wall does not exceed 25 ft. in height, it shall be 13 in. thick at the base, whatever its length. (b) If a wall exceeds 25 ft. but does not exceed 30 ft. in height, and does not exceed 45 ft. in length, it shall be 13 in. thick at its base. But if the wall exceeds 45 ft. in length, then it shall be 17^- in. thick at its base. (c) If a wall exceeds 30 ft. but does not exceed 40 ft. in height, and does not exceed 35 ft. in length, it shall be 13 in. thick at its base. If the wall exceeds 35 ft. but does not exceed 45 ft. in length, it shall be 17^- in. thick at its base. But if the wall exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be 21^- in. thick at its base. (d) If a wall exceeds 40 ft. but does not exceed 50 ft. in height, and does not exceed 30 ft. in length, it shall be 17^- in. thick at its base. If the wall exceeds 30 ft. but does not exceed 45 ft. in length, it shall be 21 J in. thick at its base. But if the "wall exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be 26 in. thick at its base. (e) If a wall exceeds 50 ft. but does not exceed 60 ft. in height, and does not exceed 45 ft. in length, it shall be 21^ in. thick at its base. F 66 BRICKLAYER. (17) But if the wall exceed 45 ft. in length, it shall be 26 in. thick at its base. (/) If a wall exceeds 60 ft. but does not exceed 70 ft. in height, and does not exceed 45 ft. in length, it shall be 21 in. thick at its base. But if the wall exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be increased in thickness from the base to within 16 ft. from the top, by 4^ in. (g) If a wall exceeds 70 ft., but does not exceed 80 ft. in height, and does not exceed 45 ft. in length, it shall be 21^ in. thick at its base. But if the wall exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be increased in thickness from the base to within 16 ft. from the top, by 4^ in. (h) If a wall exceeds 80 ft. but does not exceed 90 ft. in height, and does not exceed 45 ft. in length, it shall be 26 in. thick at its base. But if the wall exceeds 45 ft. length, it shall be increased in thickness from the base to within 1 6 ft. from the top, by 4^- in. (i) If a wall exceeds 90 ft. but does not exceed 100 ft. in height, and does not exceed 45 ft. in length, it shall be 26 in. thick at its base. But if the wall exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be increased in thickness from the base to within 16 ft. from the top, by 4J in. (j) If a wall exceeds 100 ft. but does not exceed 120 ft. in height, and does not exceed 45 ft. in length, it shall be 31 in. thick at its base. But if the wall exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be increased in thickness from the base to within 16 ft. from the top, by 4^- in. (Jc) A wall shall be 13^ in. thick for 16 ft. down from the top, and the intermediate parts between the base and 16 ft. from the top, shall not be of less thickness than would be the case if the wall were built solid throughout the space between straight lines drawn on each side of the wall, and joining the thickness at the base to the thickness at 16 ft. below the top. Nevertheless in walls not exceeding 30 ft. in height, the walls of the topmost story may be 9 in. thick (provided that the story does not exceed 10 ft. in height). Here, then, are the thicknesses of external and party walls to buildings which are not of the " Warehouse Class," nor " Public Building Class," but which might be termed the " Domestic Building Class." The thicknesses of the intermediate parts of a wall between the base and the top are given under this class of building. (/) If a wall does not exceed 25 ft. in height or 30 ft. in length, and does not comprise more than two stories, it shall be 8J in. thick for its whole height. But if the wall exceeds 30 ft. in length, but does not exceed 25 ft. in height, or comprises more than two stories, it shall be 13 in. thick below the topmost story, and 8J in. for the rest of its height. (m) If a wall exceeds 25 ft. but does not exceed 40 ft. in height, or 35 ft. in length, it shall be 13 in. thick below the topmost story, and 8J in. thick for the rest of its height. But if the wall exceeds 35 ft. in length and 25 ft. in height, but does not exceed 40 ft. in height, it shall be 17 J in. thick for the height of one story, then 13 in. thick for the rest of its height below the topmost story, and 8J inches thick for the rest of its height. (n) If a wall exceeds 40 ft. but does not exceed 50 ft. in height or 30 ft. in length, it shall be 17 J inches thick {or the height of one story, then 13 in. thick for the rest of its height below the topmost story, and 8J inches thick for the rest of its height. If the wall exceeds 40 ft. but does not exceed 50 ft. in height, and exceeds 30 ft. in length but does not exceed 45 ft. in length, it shall be 17J in. (18) BKICKLAYER. 67 thick for the height of two stories, then 13 in. thick for the rest of its height. If the wall exceeds 40 ft. but does not exceed 50 ft. in height, and exceeds 45 feet in length, it shall be 21 J in. thick for the height of one story, then 17 J in. thick for the height of the next story, and then 13 in. thick for the rest of its height. (0) If a wall exceeds 50 ft. but does not exceed 60 ft. in height, or 45 ft. in length, it shall be 17J in. thick for the height of two stories, and 13 in. thick for the rest of its height. If the wall exceeds 50 ft. but does not exceed 60 ft. in height, but exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be 21Jin. thick for the height of one story, then 17^ in. thick for the height of the next two stories, and then 13 in. thick for the rest of its height. (p) If a wall exceeds 60 ft. but does not exceed 70 ft. in height, or 45 ft. in length, it shall be 21 J in. thick for the height of one story, then 17J in. thick for the height of the next two stories, and then 13 in. thick for the rest of its height. If the wall exceed 60 ft. but does not exceed 70 ft. in height, but exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be increased in thickness in each of the stories below the uppermost two stories by 4J in. (q) If a wall exceeds 70 ft. but does not exceed 80 ft. in height, or 45 ft. in length, it shall be 21 J in. thick for the height of one story, then 17J in. thick for the height of the next three stories, and 13 in. thick for the rest of its height. If the wall exceeds 70 ft. but does not exceed 80 ft. in height, but exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be increased in thickness in each of the stories below the uppermost two stories by 4J in. (r) If a wall exceeds 80 ft. but does not exceed 90 ft. in height, or 45 ft. in length, it shall be 26 in. thick for the height of one story, then 21 J in. thick for the height of the next story, then 17 J in. thick . for the next three stories, and then 13 in. thick for the rest of its height. If the wall exceeds 80 ft. but does not exceed 90 ft. in height, but exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be increased in thickness in each of the stories below the uppermost two stories by 4J in. (s) If a wall exceeds 90 ft. but does net exceed 100 ft. in height, or 45 ft. in length, it shall be 26 in. thick for the height of one story, then 21J in. thick for the height of the next two stories, then 17 J in. thick for the height of the next three stories, and then 13 in. thick for the rest of its height. If the wall exceeds 90 ft. but does not exceed 100 ft. in height, but exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be increased in thickness in each of the stories below the uppermost two stories by 4J in. (t) If a wall exceeds 100 ft. but does not exceed 120 ft. in height, or 45 ft. in length, it shall be 30 in. thick for the height of one story, then 26 in. thick for the height of the next two stories, then 21^ in. thick for the height of the next two stories, then 17 J in. thick for the height of the next three stories, and then 13 in. thick for the rest of its height. If the wall exceeds 100 ft. but does not exceed 1 20 ft. in height, but exceeds 45 ft. in length, it shall be increased in thickness in each of the stories below the uppermost two stories by 4J in. (u) No story enclosed with walls less than 13 in. thick, shall be more than 10 ft. in height (between floor and ceiling or tie of roof.) Cuttings. (18) Perform all rough and fair cuttings to skew- backs, cambers, birds'-mouths, squint quoins, ramps, splays, chamfers, chases or other cuttings. F 2 68 BRICKLAYER. (19) Oversail. (19) Oversail for plates, chimney-breasts, stacks, cornices and other parts. (See clause No. 46.) When a breast or other projection has no wall immediately under, a tooled York stone corbel may be fixed, in addition to the sailing out ; see Mason, clause No. 32. Bed plates, stone and other work. (20) Bed in mortar all plates, lintels, terra-cotta, stone and other work ; make good after Mason and pin up tight. See Mason, clause No. 17. Generally build in. Cut, tooth and bond, and prepare surface of old walls for new. (21) Build in all templates, corbels, brackets and other work; cut all holes for pipes, and generally attend upon, cut away for, and make good after all other trades. (See Mason, clause No. 17.) See clause No. 50 in Preliminary Items, which may be inserted here. Bed and point frames. (22) Bed and point in cement all door and window frames. State if screeded in lime and hair mortar instead. Clause No. 11 describes the mortar to be used in the screedin in of frames. Bed sills. Wedge and point to flashings. Fender walls. (23) Bed stone sills and thresholds hollow, and point up. (See Mason, clause No. 18.) (24) Eake out joints of brickwork to flashings, wedge up with lead (or oak) wedges, and point in cement. (25) The fender walls to ground floor fireplaces and hot plate, to be built with proper footings, and carried up 15 in. high one brick thick, in cement mortar. Fill in the space for front and back hearths in cement concrete, and level up ready for the stone hearths. For hearths, see Mason, clauses Nos. 51, 94 and 122 ; Pavior, clauses Nos. 5 and 6 ; and Bricklayer, clause No. 42. Cellar and boiler- (26) Build cellar and boiler-house walls in cement mortar to ground damp course level. Sleeper walls or (27) Build 9 in. " honeycomb " (or " pigeon hole ") pier8 ' sleeper wails with footings, every 5 ft. apart in cement mortar, to carry ground floor joists. EJEJC.X or, Sleeper walls to be built 9 in. thick with footings, in 4 ft. lengths, with 9 in. spaces between. (33) BRICKLAYER. 69 or, Build 14 in. square brick piers with footings, 'every 5 ft. apart in cement mortar, to carry ground floor joists. The wood plates must be strong in this case to carry the joists. All piers should be built in cement mortar, whether to carry small or great weights. Sleeper walls for (28) Build "honeycomb" (or "pigeon hole") sleeper walls in cement mortar half a brick thick on footings, every 3 ft. apart, to receive stone paving in areas and scullery. Stone paving may not be laid direct on the concrete. For paving, see Mason, clauses Nos. 41 to 44, 85 to 87, and 118. Footings in (29) All footings and walls up to damp course level to be built in cement mortar ; as also to garden and fence walls. It is better work to do so, although often built in lime mortar. Footings to garden fence walls are seldom built in cement mortar. Parapets. (30) All parapet walls to be built 12 in. down in cement mortar. For various forms of brick coping to parapet walls, see notes to clause No. 98. Eaves. (31) All walls under eaves to be built in cement mortar 12 in. down. Sleeper walls to (32) Build two (or more) 4J in. sleeper walls in scullery sink, cement mortar to carry sink, finished with a neat struck joint. For sinks, see clause No. 91; Carpenter, clause No. 288; Mason, clauses Nos. 55 and 97 ; Plumber, clause No. 33 ; and Slater, clause No. 21. In best work these walls may be built in glazed brickwork 9 in. thick, with bull-nose edges. Sinks are also carried on galvanised iron or slate brackets. Circular (33) Build all circular brickwork in cement mortar. brickwork. State if it be all in headers. Circular work under 25 ft. radius does not look well if built in ordinary stretcher and header work. If the radius be very small, the joints will be very large on the external curve, unless the bricks be cut to the radius. Arches to openings in circular brickwork should be well tied into the back of the wall, or they are liable to fall out. 70 BRICKLAYER. (34) Underpinning. (34) The underpinning to (say) south and west walls to be built in hot cement (or hot lime) mortar, in lengths not exceeding 3 ft. at a time. The excavat- ing, concrete and shoring to be executed in short lengths also. See Excavator, clause No. 33, for concrete underpinning. Access holes. (35) Leave holes in cross walls under ground floor for access to heating pipes, and form a door opening in main wall, with York sill, brick arch, 2 in. deal four- panel door and frame, shoes and fastenings. This clause will only apply where heating, or other pipes, run through inaccessible positions under ground floors. Piers for heating (36) Build 14 in. square brick piers on footings plpes * in cement mortar, for supporting heating pipes under floors, with 2 in. tooled York stones on top. (See Mason, clause No. 38.) When pipes are in channels, describe the concrete bottom 6 in. thick,, with half-brick in cement sides on footings, and stone coverings; see Mason, clauses Nos. 35 and 36. If the channels be deep, the sides will require to be one brick thick. Chases for pipes. (37) Form chases for hot- water, cold-water, heating and other pipes. Cores for columns. (38) The brick cores for the diminished columns (when cemented over), to be built in cement mortar ; and rough cut to the section, the joints being raked out as the work proceeds. For cement face, see Plasterer, clause No. 71. Bough arches. (39) Form rough relieving arches, in two half-brick rings in cement mortar, over all internal openings, springing from the ends of lintels. Turn counter- arches where necessary. These arches are also formed in roughly axed arches, but are not so strong. Inverts. (40) Turn rough inverts, in two half-brick rings in cement mortar, under all door, window and other openings on ground floor. Invert arches are not much used in ordinary work ; as, unless very well done, they do' more harm than good ; they are employed to distribute the weight more equally on the foundation. (43) BRICKLAYER. A special clause for a circular arch with invert . in an old wall. or, Cut out for, and insert a red brick circular arch with invert in two half-brick rings in cement mortar, to a 3 ft. opening in the 14 in. gable wall (say) 25 ft. from ground, including the scaffolding, the centre, and all cutting, facing, pointing and making good to work round and about same, inside and out. Drain arches. Trimmer arches. (41) Turn rough arches in one half-brick ring in cement mortar, over drain pipes passing through or under walls. (See Drainage, clause No. 17.) (42) Turn half-brick coach-headed trimmer arches in cement mortar, against 4 in. x 2 in. feather-edge springers, to all fireplace openings above ground floor level, 18 in. longer than their respective openings and 18 in. wider ; level up the top sides in cement concrete to receive hearths, and leave centering in to receive lathing under. or, level up the top sides in cement concrete, composed of 1 part broken brick (or ballast) to a f in. gauge, and 1 part Portland cement, floated and trowelled over f in. thick in neat cement as hearths, and leave center- ing in to receive lathing under. See notes to clause No. 25 for other various forms of hearths. Cellar arches, vaults or groinings. PLAN (43) Turn rough arches over cellars in cement mortar, in two (or three) half-brick rings ; form the external cambered walls one brick thick, and flat joint, point the inner sides and faces as the work proceeds. Lay J in. hot mastic asphalt over top of arches up to kerb- line, and against the walls, w r here earth abuts at back. For slate creasing, see Mason, clause No. 50. The cellars might be formed with axed cambered arches one brick thick ; and the outer faces may be cemented over to keep out the wet, see Plasterer clause No. 64 ; or slates and cement may be used, see Slater, clause No. 14. Small areas covered with pavement lights, may either have the back wall battered or cambered ; all the walls being built in cement and lined on the outer side with any of the methods just described; the inner sides may be built in glazed brick or lined in tiles ; see clauses Nos. 84 and 89a. BRICKLAYER. (44) Smoke flues. (44) Carry up a separate smoke flue to each fire- place and copper, as straight as possible, with easy bends ; turn and gather the necks over openings quickly, and form the pockets to sketch; parget the whole length of flues with cow dung mortar, composed of 1 part cow dung to 4 parts hair mortar, and core before setting the stoves. Kitchen flue to be 14 in. x 9 in. ; boiler flue 18 in. x 14 in. (or other size) ; all other flues 9 in. X 9 in. In all bends at a less angle than 45, double soot doors and frames are to be placed for sweeping. Eender in plaster all flues and chimney breasts in roof portions. (See Plasterer, clause No. 47.) The brickwork round flues is generally 4J in. thick, but 9 in. is better. An arch similar to that in clause No. 78, may be required to carry a flue where it crosses a void externally, with a stone coping on top. The divisions dividing flues are called " withes," they are generally 4J in. thick. For hair mortar see clause No. 11. Flue pipes. (44a) Instead of pargeting flues, they may be lined with fire-clay flue pipes, either oblong or cylin- drical, socketed or plain. State which. Fire-clay flue pipes are made, 6 in., 8 in., 9 in., 10 in. and 12 in. diameters, or 16 in. X 10 in., 14 in. x 9 in., 12 in. x 9 in. and 10 in. x 6 in. oblongs, and generally in 2 ft. lengths. They form excellent flues, and in some positions where space is an object they are invaluable. See Smith, notes preceding clause No. 81, and clause No. 85 in Smith, as referring to flues. Chimney slacks (45) Build the whole of the shafts where they appear above the roof in cement mortar. Finish the tops with projecting courses in red brick, and put to each flue a terra- cotta chimney pot, p.c. 3s. 6d. each, bed and flaunch round in cement, and run cement filleting round top of sailing courses. Form the plinths with 2| in. splay. and pots. Plain chimney pots are made in 2 ft., 2 ft. 6 in., 3 ft., 4 ft., 5 ft. and 6 ft. heights ; those from 4 ft. high are generally called " tall boys." Chimney pots may be very elaborate in design, and may be obtained in the same heights as ordinary pots. Describe any other dressings to the chimney stacks, such as panels, pilasters, arches. State if they are to be built angle wise, if octagonal, and if with bases tumbled in. See Smith, clause No. 23, for iron ties to chimney stacks. BRICKLAYER. 73 (46) Where the chimney stacks diminish from the base upwards, they are to be " tumbled " in with red brick in cement mortar. Sometimes external chimney stacks require oversailing. See clause No. 19, Small boiler shaft. (47) Build boiler shaft in lime mortar for some 20 ft. above the fire level, and the remainder in cement mortar ; and point the inside with a careful flush joint. Line shaft 10 ft. up in fire-brick. Finish the top with oversailing courses in cement mortar with weather filletings ; and a York stone chamfered capping 9 in. deep, cramped together with slate. Boiler flues should not be pargeted. Cement mortar will not stand the direct action of great heat : either fire-clay or lime mortar must be used. For tall chimney shafts see clause No. 115. Buttresses. (48) The buttresses to be built up with the walls, and the splayed surfaces tumbled in with red brick in cement mortar. Buttresses are built to take the thrust of an arch or some cross wall. In old work, they are used to strengthen or prop up a wall liable to fall out. They are sometimes merely ornamental. Dry areas. (49) Form a dry area 12 in. wide all round building where the ground abuts, with 9-in. brick walls in cement mortar, and built down to the level of the concrete under the main footings. Bender the out- side in cement and sand 1 in. thick. Cover the top with a 2-in. tooled (or rubbed) hard York stone in lime mortar, tilted (or weathered) a little above earth level, made movable, and pinned into wall. The channel or floor to be formed in cement concrete rendered up to falls, and provided with 9 in. x 6 in. cast-iron air gratings for ventilation every 10 ft. apart. 74 BKICKLAYER. (50) The stone top may rest on a brick projection. It may also be laid just beneath the earth covering, and may also be formed of stout slates. See Mason, clause No. 34. Fireplace arches. (50) Turn 9 in. cambered arches in cement mortar to all fireplace and range openings, upon 3 in. (or 2 J in.) x J in. (or f in.) wrought-iron cambered chimney bars, with ends caulked and turned up and down, and built 9 in. into piers on either side. In some large range openings it is frequently impossible to get an arch over, when in that case the iron chimney bar may be a small wrought- iron rolled joist; see Smith, clause No. 63. A fireplace arch usually springs 3 ft. 3 in. up from the floor. In ranges it varies considerably. Arches for flues (51) Turn 9 in. internal rough arches in cement over voids. mortar to carry flues, where they come over voids. Soot door openings. (52) Form arched opening for soot doors to flue of boiler shaft, with a stone sill, ready to receive soot door frames. Form openings for soot doors to other flues. It is only large openings that require arches and sills. Set stoves. (53) g e t all stoves and ranges solid in fire-brick and fire-clay, and point up in cement. If not built up solid, soot will accumulate at back of stoves. When a new stove is put into an old opening, it is impossible with some stoves to build them up solid without disturbing the chimney-piece ; in that case they may be filled in with fine cement concrete, thrown in by hand through the register opening ; see Smith, clause No. 82. Pire-brick round (54) The kitchen and scullery ranges and hot plates ranges. ^ ^ j^y^ r0 und with fire-brick sides in fire-clay. It is always well to build with fire-brick around any position where there may be exceptional heat. Copper. (55) Build copper in scullery with 9 in. fire-brick sides in fire-clay on footings and 9 in. concrete bed, with rounded corner and proper flue and ashpit. Put a heavy cast-iron furnace door and frame, with furnace bars and damper, and two cast-iron double soot doors in frames. Set in brickwork a strong made riveted heavy metal copper pan 2 ft. diameter, holding 40 gallons, and weighing not less than 1J Ibs. per gallon ; (or a galvanised iron pan) with a 1 in. stout copper riveted (58) BRICKLAYEK. 75 outlet arm and gun-metal cock, p.c. 12s. Eender the outside and top in cement and sand 1 in. thick, finished a trowelled face, with the top edges slightly chamfered (or rounded) off. Form a 7 in. x f in. cement skirting round two sides, with circular corners. The copper lid to be circular, in elm (or beech), wrought and rebated together in two 1 in. (or f in.), thicknesses, with joints crossing, and nailed with copper nails 6 in. apart, well clenched. The handle to be out of 2 in. X 1 J in. elm, sunk and rounded at top, and fixed with four copper (or brass) screws 2J in. long, and the whole put together with white lead. The lid may be dowelled together, and pinned with oak pins. For portable copper, see Smith, clause No. 68 ; and Carpenter, clause No. 280. Outlet ventilating flues. I i 1 L-< '_ _ _ r r A'/r. (56) Form outlet ventilating flues to each room 9 in. X 4J in. (or 9 in. x 9 in.), carried along the inside of wall for a distance of 4 ft. ; and up by the side of the smoke flues ; parget and core same, and provide on the inside with mica flaps (or hit- and-miss gratings), p.c. 10s. each ; and finish at the top of stack with iron grating 9 in. x 9 in., one on either side, and with similar pots to match the smoke flues pots, but filled up solid in brickwork in cement. These pots are only required for uniformity. Air inlets. (57)- Form (say) twelve air-inlet flues 9 in. x4J in. to coils ; and finish externally under window sills with 9 in. x 9 in. brass (or iron) hit- and-miss gratings. Eender the flues smooth in cement. also, Form (say) twelve air-inlet flues 9 in. x 4 J in. on the slant for the " Tobins " tubes, with 9 in. X 6 in. perforated iron gratings on the out- side. Eender the flues smooth in cement. A sum may be here provided for the Tobins tubes ; otherwise describe them ; see Carpenter, clause, No. 312. Airbricks. (53) Build in where directed for ventilation to floors, and put (say) twenty 9 in. x 6 in. terra-cotta (or iron) air bricks; form flues for same, and render in cement. See Smith, clause No. 40. Air bricks are only used for ground floors; unless the upper floors have a free passage for air, such as in double floors. 7 6 BRICKLAYER. (59) Openings to rain- water heads. (59) Form (say) six outlets from gutters to rain- water heads, with arches turned over in a half-brick ring, and the openings rendered out in cement All holes. Coal shoot. This is when the gutter outlet itself discharges through a brick wall ; see Plumber, clause No. 9. (60) Form all other holes, with arches if required, for any purpose. (61) Form coal shoot with brickwork in cement mortar, and fill in opening with a 14 in. diameter per- forated iron coal plate and fastening, let into a 6 in. rubbed York stone curb 3 ft. square, fixed J in. above ground (or paving), level with the arrises taken off. (See Smith, clause No. 65.) In coal cellars under the street paving the shoot is formed vertically in the arch of the cellar, and the stone kerb to the coal plate must be kept level. One ton of coal occupies from 39 to 48 cub. ft. Damp coarse. (62) Lay over the surface of all walls the full thick- ness of same, and 3 in. above the ground level a con- tinuous course of Seyssel mastic asphalt J in. (I in., f in. or f in.) thick, applied hot, and well sanded over before cooling. or, Lay over the surface of all walls, the full thickness of same, Jennings' (or Doultori's), 2} in. (or 1 J in.) improved glazed stoneware damp course, with tongue and groove joints and proper angle pieces, and bedded and jointed in cement mortar. or, Lay over the surface of all walls, the full thickness of same, a double course of stout Welsh slates (about J in. thick each), well lapped at joints, and bedded and jointed in neat cement $ in. thick ; the course of brick- work above and below being built in cement mortar. Sheet lead and asphalted felt are also used as a damp course. Damp course to parapets. (63) Lay over all brick parapet walls and gables just below coping, the full width of walls, Seyssel mastic asphalt -in. thick, applied hot, and well sanded before cooling. (66) BRICKLAYER. 77 or, Lay over all parapet walls and gables just below coping, a double course of stout Welsh slates (about in. thick each) well lapped at joints, and bedded and jointed in neat cement | in. thick. This upper damp course is a precaution against wet penetrating the walls from the top. Half-brick walls. (64) Build all half-brick walls in cement mortar, and where supported on the floors, lay 4 J in. X 3 in. sills and heads ; the heads being level with the flooring above, and stiffened between the joists with fir blocks. Brick-nogged partition. (65) Build in cement mortar half-brick nogged par- tition, with 4J in. X f in. (J in., 1J. in. or 2 in.) hori- zontal nogging pieces every 3 ft. high, 4J- in. x 3 in. quarters every 3 ft. apart, and 4J in. x 3 in. sill and head pieces. Brick-nogged partitions may be built with the bricks laid on edge, but they are seldom used now either way, as the timber rots and is a source of weakness. See Carpenter, clause No. 138. Hoop iron. (66) Build in one row of Tyerman's patent gal- vanised hoop-iron bond 1 in. x yV in. (or galvanised hoop-iron bond 1J in. x^g in., or 1 in. Xy 1 ^ in.), in all walls to every half brick in thickness; commencing 2 ft. 6 in. above the ground line, and continuing every 5 ft. (or 6 ft.) above, the joints and angles to be well hooked together, and the whole to be well tarred and sanded. The courses of brickwork taking the bond to be built in cement mortar. Hoop iron is made in the following thicknesses (gauges) and widths : B. W. CI. 21 thick by f in. wide. 20 fin. 19 Jin. 18 1 in. 17 11 in. 16 (fa in.) li in. 15 If in. 15 li in. 14 If in. 13 2 in. 13 2Jin. 12 ' 2i in. 11 (Jin.) 2f in. and 3 in. wide. Up to 1 J in. wide it is used for floor tongues ; above that for walls only. 78 BRICKLAYER. (67) Bull nose. (67) The angles to piers, and reveals of doors in yards and cellars, to be built in blue brick bull nose quoins. Wherever there is any rough usage, bull nose angles should always be specified, especially in outbuildings and stables; they may be in red brick, or other kind. Brick sills may be in blue bull nose, or red or blue chamfered bricks : see Carpenter, notes on clause No. 144. External facings (68) Face all external walls and chimney stacks and pointing to f ^ n Building, w j tn approved picked best selected main walls. . . . ., .' . . , r . r , *, , ~ ~. ,, bright stock facing bricks (or washed malms, or Suffolk red or white, or Luton plum colour, or red Fareham, or any other approved local red or other colour facing bricks) ; all headers to be whole bricks. Point, with a weather joint as the work proceeds, in bright washed sand and lime, slightly coloured with (ochre) pigment, r ' rake out joints afterwards when striking scaffold, and tuck point in fine stuff, or, rake out joints afterwards when striking scaffold, and point a weather joint in cement, or, rake out joints afterwards when striking scaffold, and point in blue ash mortar a flat joint. A weather joint is the best form of joint for withstanding the weather. Yacings to other Face the external walls and chimney stacks of *****' remaining parts and outbuildings, in picked bright stocks, finished a weather -joint as the work proceeds. Old walls (69) Erect scaffold, rake out joints of brickwork, "pointed. fiU up, stain, and tuck point in fine stuff. It may be weather pointed in cement, instead of being tuck pointed. Dressings. (70) The window and door dressings, bands, plinths, eaves, and the oversaving courses to chimney stacks, to be in red Fareham (or other) bricks. This is a general covering clause, but the following clauses, Nbs. 71 to 74, give the dressings more in detail. Plinth. (71) The plinth course to be 15 in. high, projecting 2J in. from face of .main walls, and formed in red Fareham (or other) bricks, finished off on top with a blue Staffordshire (or other) brick splay. (76) BRICKLAYER. 79 strings and (72) The strings, mouldings, pilasters, cornices and pilasters. sills, to be cut, rubbed and moulded in red Fareham rubbers, set in fine putty ; and projections weathered off in cement. Give the sizes of the various parts, together with any carving or sinkings. State if they are to be in ordinary moulded brick instead of being cut and rubbed. Sheet lead weatherings are sometimes put to strings instead of cement, see Plumber, clause No. 66. Eaves course. (73) Finish the eaves course with red Fareham bricks, in three projections of 1 in. each, carried up under the eaves. (74) The reveals of windows and doors, the quoins of building and bands, to be in squared and rubbed red brick rubbers, set in fine putty ; the window and door dressings being stop moulded. Reveals and quoins. The arches would also require moulding to be in uniformity. If the bands project, give the projection, and describe a cement weather fillet on top. State the width of quoins and dressings. Window and door openings may have moulded rubbed brick architraves. Frieze. (75) The ornamental carved frieze to be in squared and rubbed red brick rubbers, set in shellac ; and the carving carefully executed. Or give a price for the carving, either as an inclusive sum or price per foot run (or super.). State if there be carving to any other part. Brick cornice. (76) Form the cornice in cut, rubbed and moulded red brick rubbers, with dentil course, and cement weather fillet on top. Also see notes to clause No. 72. For brick coping see notes to clause No. 9&. Sheet-lead weathering is sometimes put to cornices instead of cement, see Plumber, clause No. 66. 8o B1UCKLAYER. (77) Gauged arches. (77) Turn over all external openings in red Fareham rubbers (or T.L.B. bricks, malms, or Suffolk whites), cut and gauged straight arches 12 in. deep, correctly rubbed and set in fine putty, and backed up in cement ; with a J in. camber underneath. Cambers to straight arches should be from J in. to J in. per foot span, otherwise they will appear to drop in the centre. If there be stone keys, they might be described here with the arches ; or if there be brick labels, describe them as " cut, moulded and mitred labels 3 in. deep, with cement fillet on top." The labels may be in stone. Half-brick ring arches. (78) The external arches of outbuildings to be in two half-brick (stock or other kind) rings, in cement mortar (or in axed stocks or other kind). See notes to clause No. 44 for arches to carry flues over great voids, which may perhaps require three half-brick rings. Niches. (79) The niches to be built in cut and rubbed red brick Fareham (or other) rubbers set in shellac, and half domed at top. The sills may be in stone or rubbed brickwork to match. ;other arches. (80) Turn external axed red brick cambered (segmental, semicircular or elliptical) arches 14 in. (or 9 in.) deep, with a 2 in. rise to all other window and door openings, in cement mortar. or, in three (or two) half-brick rings, in cement mortar. Arch to pig tub. (81) Form opening in scullery wall near pig tub, with brick arch and stone sill, 1 J in. one-panelled door with 4 in. butts and fastenings, and 1J in. rebated and beaded linings, head and window board. This opening is sometimes put in a scullery wall, for the servants to throw the bits through into the pig tub outside. Internal facings. (82) Face the inside of scullery, w.c,, and basement passages with picked stocks, finished with a neat struck trowelled flat joint as the work proceeds. If any other parts are not plastered, then describe the facings in a similar manner. Cellars. (83) Face the cellars with hard blue Staffordshire (or ordinary stock) bricks, with joints struck fair as the work proceeds. (84) Face the areas with best (or seconds) white glazed (enamelled) bricks, finished a weather joint. Glazed brick facings to areas (in dark places). Also see clause No. 89a for tiling to areas. (89) BRICKLAYER. 8 1 Glazed brick (85) Face the best w.c. and lavatory on ground facmgs to ^ ^ bath-room on first floor, with cream (or white) lavatory, w.c. and > . .,11 i i , i -i bath-room. glazed enamelled bricks, with coloured skirting, dado and frieze band ; finished a ruled joint in Parian. See also clause No. 89a for other tiling. W.c.'s in any position may be faced with glazed work. Pointing to (86) Bake out the joints to glazed brickwork (enamelled), and point in Parian (or coloured Parian) a ruled joint. When a wall is faced with white enamelled bricks, a little yellow or pink tinting to the pointing adds much to the effect. Glazed brick (87) Face kitchen walls 3 ft. high in salt glazed brickwork pointed in cement, and above in white enamelled bricks pointed in tinted Parian. Enamelled bricks may be used in any position where light or great cleanliness is desirable. Wall tiling. (88) Line the walls of lavatory with f-inch best white (or cream) glazed tiles in 6-in. squares, set in neat Portland cement on a backing of Portland cement and sand, with a 3-in. ornamental dado border, and a dark skirting 12 in. deep ; and point in tinted Parian. Tiles 6 in. x 3 in. x f in. are also much used. In old plastered walls the plastering must be hacked off and the walls rendered over in cement and sand before the tiling is fixed. See also clause No. 89a and notes. A little washed sand is sometimes added to the cement for setting wall tiles. Internal glazed (89) Face all walls internally in first quality brickwork glazed brickwork, with joints J in. (to J in.) thick, and generally. all headers unbroken. The dado to be 3 ft. high, in salt glazed (or dipped salt glazed a superior finish) bricks pointed a flush joint in tinted mortar; with a flush moulded brick dado rail 3 in. deep. The skirting to be pointed 12 in. up a flush joint in cement. The filling to be in white enamelled (glazed) bricks, pointed a flush joint in tinted Parian, with a 6-in. tinted frieze band above. If there be a wood skirting or cornice, state that the brickwork at the back of skirtings and cornices may be in plain stock bricks. All angles and arrises to projections, piers, openings, window reveals, sills and heads, door jambs and heads, and arches, to be in glazed bull-nosed bricks. Turn white enamelled brick segmental (semicircular or elliptical) arches over all openings and windows, in two (or more) half-brick rings, with bull-nose arrises. Cut the mitres to the bull-nose bricks only three parts \\\\1 II //// down th e depth of the lowermost horizontal brick N\\\\U///// springers. Turn white enamelled brick, cut and gauged, straight arches 12 in. deep over all door heads, with G 82 BRICKLAYER. (89a) bull-nose arrises, and the mitres formed in the same way as to windows. Form the window sills in white enamelled bull-nose bricks, with the mitres formed the same way as to window arches. Glazed brickwork is mostly used in hospitals, sanatoriums, and other positions where light and great cleanliness are required. For wood cornices and skirtings, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 206, 210 and 192 to 198. For plaster cornices and skirting, see Plasterer, clauses Nos. 9, 29 to 34, 37, 40, 52 and 53. When the soffit of a straight glazed arch shows, the bricks will have to be made specially. If the door heads are curved, of course the arches would follow the sweep, and may be in half-brick rings. The arches to openings and windows with curved heads may be cut and gauged. fo fo Windows If the window heads be straight, the arches should be cut and gauged straight arches. In this class of work the door frames may be solid, finishing flush an y| on the one side, and no architraves or linings will be required. The window frames may be built in the walls without linings, archi- traves or window boards ; but if the frames show on the inside, a small deal moulding, say 1 in. X 1 J in., may be described round as a finish; see Carpenter, notes to clause No. 144. Enamelled bricks may either be white or almost any tint. Salt glazed bricks are always a brown shade. Enamelled bricks are commonly called glazed bricks. Glazed brickwork externally would be described similar to interior work, but the pointing should be a weather joint, either in mortar or cement, and the window sills might be in stone. See clauses Nos. 84 to 87, for glazed brickwork in certain positions. (8 9 a) Old walls may either be faced with glazed bricks, or where space is an object, then with Hall's patent hanging tiles, thus : Eake out joints of brickwork, render over in cement and sand, and line walls with Hall's patent hanging tiles (state tint) set in cement, and pointed in tinted Parian. Give the position of the work, and describe any cornices or skirtings, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 206, 210, and 192 to 198 ; and Plasterer, clauses Nos. 9, 29 to 34, 37, 40, 52 and 53. Hall's hanging tiles. (95) BRICKLAYER. 83 Hall's tiles are made 9 in. x 3 in. X about f in. thick, and including the nick about 1J in. thick. These tiles may be nailed on to battens where necessary. For other wall tiling see clause No. 88. Old walls to external areas or similar positions may be lined with 9 in. x 3 in. x 1 in. (or 6 in. x 3 in. x 1 in.) white glazed tiles, set in cement and pointed a weather joint. When internal walls are tiled, and the window, door and other openings have no wood linings, state that all angles are to be finished with glazed angle beads. The frames may be grooved to receive the tiles. Internal tiling to walls may be very varied in design, and the skirting, dado band, frieze, cornice, panel or other mouldings may be raised from the general face. It is better in this case to state an inclusive sum. Internal arches. (90) Turn over the internal openings in scullery, w.c., passages, and positions where not plastered, rough relieving arches in two half-brick rings in cement. Scullery sink. (91) The sink to be p.c. 15s., 3 ft. x 2 ft., in dished glazed stoneware, 6 in. deep inside, rounded corners, and with hole cut and rebated for a 3 in. grating, and one (or two) edge cut and pinned into wall in cement. Also made 20 in. x 15 in. x 5 in. deep ; 24 in. x 16 in. x 5 in. deep ; 30 in. X 18 in. x 5 in. deep ; and in buff glazed ware, 24 in. x 17 in. x 3J in. deep ; 30 in. x 19 in. x 4 in. deep ; 36 in. x 22 in. x 4J in. deep ; 42 in. X 24 in. x 5 in. deep ; and in angular sinks, 24 in. x 3 in. deep ; and 28 in. x 3J in. deep. The bearers may be here described, see clause No. 32. Sinks are sometimes cut and dished out of a single stone, but they get very greasy and dirty. See notes to clause No. 32 fcfr other kinds of sinks. Cement fillets. (92) Bun cement filletings along all gables, chimney stacks, and where roofs abut against walls. The cement filleting to be composed of equal t proportions of cement and sand, mixed with cast-iron nails and tarred twine. Commoner filleting is done in mortar ; but in either case it is only used in inferior work, as it takes the place of lead flashings. In pantiled roofs cement filleting is usually employed. Limewhiting. (93) Twice limewhite walls of areas, scullery and passages ; and walls and roof timbers of outhouses. also, Twice limewhite walls and ceilings of boiler-house and cellars. See clause No. 16, and Plasterer, clauses Nos. 15 and 62. Old walls (94) Broom down, wash and twice limewhite walls. re-Umewhited. (S ^ te ' w here.) See notes to preceding clause. Colouring. (95) Twice colour walls of scullery, larder and passages (or other walls). This should more properly come under Painter. See Plasterer, clauses Nos. 17 and 61. ^ o G A BRICKLAYER. (96) Putlog holes. Window to servants' w.c. (96) Carefully stop up all putlog holes, and match the mortar and bricks. (97) The servants' w.c. in yard to have a 2 ft. X 1 ft. 6 in. cast-iron perforated grating built in the brickwork, with stone sill and brick arch. BRICK BOUNDARY WALLS. (Clauses Nos. 98 and 99). For flint boundary walling, see clauses Nos. 105 to 107 ; and rubble stone walling, see Mason, clause No. 109. For timber fencing, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 325 to 329. (98) Excavate ground to the extent shown upon drawings ; level up and prepare trenches to receive concrete, part fill in and ram, and spread superfluous earth. Lay cement (or lime) concrete under walls 6 in. thick, 3 in. wider each way than lowest footing. Excavate and concrete. Walls. Plinth. Coping. Damp course. Piers. Enclose (say) the north, south and east sides of the property, with boundary fence walls, piers and footings, built in 9 in. brickwork in picked stocks, carried up in Flemish bond in lime mortar 7 ft. high above ground line ; and finish a weather joint as the work proceeds. (See note to, and clause No. 29.) The plinths to be formed on both sides of walling with a 2 in. projection, in chamfered blue Stafforshire bricks. Cope walls with blue Staffordshire, twice-throated, saddle-back brick coping 12 in. (or 13 in.) wide, bedded and jointed in cement, with returned angle pieces at angles and ends. Lay a damp course 3 in. above ground line, the full thickness of walls and piers, composed of a double course of Welsh slates, lapped at joints, and bedded in neat cement. The piers to be 18 in. square, every 10 ft. apart, carried up two-thirds the height of walls ; and finished off at top with two 2J in. chamfered blue Staffordshire brick splays. (98) BRICKLAYER Oate. Tablets. p u t three 18 in. x 9 in. x 6 in. rubbed Portland stone tablets, built into the piers in cement, marked in sunk Roman letters, "THIS WALL is THE PROPERTY OF THE GRANGE " (or other property). Form a gateway in walling, with a 9 in. x 3 in. tooled York threshold, and two 4 in. x 3 in. wrought deal (or oak), rebated, once beaded and chamfered (or neither) door-posts, slightly weathered at top, with cast-iron shoes dowelled into stone ; and 1^ in. x J in. wrought- iron ties 18 in. long, ends turned up and down, built into walls and screwed to posts every 2 ft. apart ; and put an 1 in. diameter bar iron segmental- head piece, with ends flattened and carried 18 in. down door-posts and screwed with four screws to each post. Hang on 4 in. wrought butts (or 18 in. cross-garnet hinges) an 1J in. (or 1J in.) wrought deal ledged, braced and framed door 3 ft. wide, covered with 1 in. (or f in.) match boarding (or V-jointed boarding) and supplied with a Norfolk thumb-latch, a padlock and two keys. The iron bar head piece is not absolutely necessary when the gate- posts are secured into the walls with the iron ties. When oak posts are used some 6 in. square, the brickwork is not necessarily revealed out to receive them, they being buried in the ground some two or three feet, the butt ends being charred (or tarred) and surrounded with con- crete, and the heads splayed off to a point. An oak fillet about 2 in. (or 1 J in.) x 1 in. is spiked on to the posts to form the gate rebate. The iron ties and gate head may either be used or not. Gates may also be fixed without posts, jJL^JjPI by simply forming a rebate in the brick- work to receive them ; the hinges in this case have to be either pivot or cup and ball hinges, the jaws being buried in* the brickwork on stone templates (" hinge stones ") and the lock fixing in the same way into a "lock stone." A plinth is not always put to this class of boundary walling. It is better to put a damp course; although not always done, as it keeps the wall dry, and is useful in case outbuildings are erected at a future date butting against it. The coping may be simply brick on edge in cement ; or brick on edge with a double course of plain tile creasing in cement, and cement weather fillets. In either of these two cases, state that the angles and ends of walling are to have wrought-iron ties 18 in. long, with ends turned up and down 3 in., and built in so as to keep the end brick of coping from falling off. Parapet walls to buildings may be coped in a similar manner. Walls may also be coped in stone, the width and thick- ness depending upon the thickness of the walls. See Mason, clause No. 49. 86 BRICKLAYEE. (99) Front garden and boundary dwarf walls and gates. Piers may also be " tumbled in " towards the top, instead of using chamfered bricks. When a garden wall is higher upon one side than the other, the lower part may be built in cement ; and loose stones (or rubble) some 9 in. to 12 in. thick, filled in up to the level of the higher ground line ; as also under the concrete bed; this will allow water to find its way to the lower ground without bursting out the wall. See notes on retaining walls preceding clause No. 109, for weeping drains to walls. (99) Describe, as in clause No. 98, the excavating, concrete, damp course, brickwork, piers, plinth and coping, and continue on thus : Kun an ornamental wrought (or cast) iron railing 18 in. (or other) high along the top, of the p.c. value of (say) 25s. per yard run ; the feet being leaded into the coping. Put two ornamental gas standards and lamps p.c. (say) 6 each, and lay on J in. gas tubing to each pier in 1 in. rough deal tarred trough filled with pitch, and continue pipes up to lamps. Allow p.c. (say) 5 for a wrought (or cast) iron I gate and hinges, with copper ward three-bolt lock, the lower hinge being fixed into an 18 in. x 4 in. rubbed York threshold. The coping should more properly be in stone for a wall of this de- scription ; the plinth also may be in stone ; see Mason, clause No. 49, with notes. FLINT BUBBLE WORK. (Clauses Nos. 100 to 107). 3?lint masonry weighs about 148 Ibs. per cubic foot. Buildings may be constructed either with solid flint or solid boulder walls, and require to be of some considerable thickness to support the floors above. It is better to build the walls with a backing of brickwork, and then face the outside in flints or boulders. In both cases all angles and openings must have brick (or stone) quoins; and brick (or stone) bands (lacing courses) are re- quired every now and then to assist in holding the walls together. The facings may be formed of boulders or knapped boulders, built either random or in rough parallel courses ; or with flints built in random courses. Chimney stacks are built in solid brickwork, unless they be made large enough to allow for flint or boulder facings. (102) BEICKLAYER. Solid flint walls (100) The walls to be built throughout their entire to buildings. thickness in random coursed flints, 2 ft. thick on ground floor and 18 in. thick on the first floor, in lime mortar composed of two parts sea sand grit to 1 part hydraulic lime ; each course being well flushed up, and the flints showing some 5 in. (6 in., 7 in. or 8 in.) across on face. Sweep out joints, and point up in mortar (or cement). External angles, and the dressings to door and window opening?, to be carried out in red brick quoins 14 in. and 9 in. wide respectively, with cut and gauged red brick arches 12 in. deep ; and two (or more) red brick bands (lacing courses) 6 in. (or 9 in.) deep, carried round and built in the full thickness of all walls, and weather joint pointed in mortar (or cement). Internal brickwork to quoins and bands may be in a good common brick. Quoins and dressings may be in any other kind of brick or stone. State if a brick or stone plinth is required, and whether the walls are to be faced with " white flints," and if cement tuck pointed. Flint walls are seldom built in parallel courses, the flints being so irregular in shape. If pit sand be used, gauge it with lime and cement. Ordinary flints have in parts a yellowish deposit on them; "white flints" a whitish chalky deposit, the latter requiring some selection. The difference in colour being caused by the strata from which they are obtained. Describe the chimney stacks, parapets and other brick or stonework, see Bricklayer and Mason generally. Solid boulder walls (101) The description of walls, dressings and point- to buildings. v U .1 ,1 i ^r -i ing would remain exactly the same as clause No. 100 ; 1 but boulders may be built either random or in parallel courses. Give the size of boulders to show on face, as 2 in., 3 in., 4 in. or 5 in. Boulders are flints obtained from the sea shore, being rounder and less irregular than flints, owing to the action of the water. Knapped boulders are never used in solid boulder work. Boulder walls are generally built in parallel courses, and tuck pointed in cement. Tlint-faced walls to buildings. (102) Describe the brick backing 9 in. or 14 in. thick. Face the walls externally 6 in. thick with flints built random, in lime mortar composed of 2 parts sea sand grit to 1 part hydraulic lime; sweep out joints and point up in mortar (or cement), the flints showing some 6 in. (5 in., 7 in. or 8 in.) across on face. 88 BRICKLAYER. (103) Then describe the brick or stone quoins, the dressings, arches and bands, as in solid flint walling, see clause No. 100 ; state if faced in " white flints " or tuck pointed. Boulder-faced (103) The description for the backings, facings and dressings would be the same as to flint-faced walls, see clause No. 102 ; but state if built random or in parallel courses, with the class of pointing, and the size of boulders to show on face. Knapped boulder- faced walls to buildings. (104) The description would be the same as in boulder-faced walls, see clause No. 103 ; but state it is to be " knapped boulder work." Give the class of point- ing, and size of boulders to show on face. Knapped boulder work is generally built random. Knapped boulders are boulders split in half, and would show on face from 3 in. to 8 in. across ; the flat side being placed to the weather. Flint; Boundary (105) Excavate ground to extent shown upon drawings, and roughly level up to receive walling ; part fill in and ram, and spread surplus earth. Build the boundary walling round the property, on a footing course of large flints 12 in. deep, 18 in. wide, and carried up 5 ft. above ground line with a 14 in. base at the foot tapered off to 9 in. at the top, built random in lime mortar composed of 2 parts sea sand grit to 1 part of hydraulic lime ; the flints showing some 5 in. across on face. Sweep out joints and point up in mortar (or cement). Cope the top with red brick semicircular coping bricks 9 in. wide in cement mortar, with solid brick angle pieces, and iron holdfasts at ends. Eun a red brick band (lacing course) three bricks deep along the whole length of walling the full thick- ness, two-thirds up from ground level. Finish the angles, gate piers, and extremities of walling, with red brick quoins 14 in. and 9 in. wide respectively, finished a weather joint. (108) BRICKLAYER. 8 9 Flint walling is found chiefly in chalk districts, flints being obtained from the chalk; state if built in "white flints" and if tuck pointed. The excavating need only go down as far as the solid chalk. In thin boundary walling a brick band course adds materially to its strength, but is seldom put in thick boundary walling. The higher the walling the thicker it must be made. The coping may be brick saddle-back, or plain brick on edge, see clause No. 98. Describe any gates, see clause No. 98. For other kinds of boundary walling, see clauses Nos. 98, 99, 106 and 107, and Mason; clause No. 109. Boulder bound walling. (106) Excavate ground to extent shown upon drawings, and roughly level up to receive walling ; part fill in and ram, and spread surplus earth. Build the boundary walling round the property, on a footing course of large boulders 12 in. deep 18 in. wide, and carry up 5 ft. high above ground line with a 14 in. base at the foot tapering off to 9 in. at the top, and built in parallel courses (or random) in lime mortar composed of 2 parts sea sand grit to 1 part hydraulic lime, the boulders showing some 3 in. across on face. Eake (or sweep) out joints, and tuck point in mortar (or cement). Cope the top with red brick semicircular coping bricks 9 in. wide in cement mortar, with solid angle pieces, and iron holdfasts at ends. Kun a red brick band (lacing course) three bricks deep along the whole length of walling the full thickness, two-thirds up from ground line. Finish the angles, gate piers and extremities of walling with red brick quoins 14 in. and 9 in. wide respectively, pointed a weather joint. In this class of walling a band course adds materially to the strength, but is seldom put in thick walling. The higher the walling the thicker must it be made. The pointing need not be tuck pointing. Describe any gates, see clause No. 98. For .other kinds of coping, see clause No. 98 ; and for other kinds of boundary walling, see clauses Nos. 98, 99, 105 and 107, and Mason, clause No. 109. Knapped boulder boundary walling. (107) Knapped boulder walling is built in precisely ^ Q game way ag Boulder walling; and generally in random courses, see clause No. 106 ; but state the boulders are to be " knapped " on the face with the size they are to show. For gates and copings, see clause No. 98. For other kinds of boundary walling, see clauses Nos. 98, 99, 105 and 106, and Mason, clause No. 109. Casing in old building with brickwork. (108) Excavate for footings and concrete, part fill in and ram, and part cart away. Lay cement concrete 12 in. deep, 6 in. wider than lowest footing of new work. Cut out a horizontal course from the old brickwork, half a brick deep every 2 ft. 6 in. apart, and encase all 90 BRICKLAYER. (109) external walls, chimney stacks and projections in red (or other) facing bricks one brick thick; with stock brick backing on footings (or red-brick facing bricks half a brick thick) built in lime (or cement) mortar, finished a weathered joint as the work proceeds, toothed into the old work, and grouted in. The reveals of doors and windows, and any old projections, to be cut away for the new facings. Then describe the damp course, see clauses Nos. 62 and 63 ; the air bricks, see clause No. 58 ; the arches, see clauses Nos. 77 to 81 ; the dressings, see clauses Nos. 70 to 76 ; and the hoop iron, see clause No. 66. For facing bricks, see Bricklayer, clause No. 68. Galvanised iron wall ties may be used instead of cutting out the old brickwork and toothing in the new. The old window sills and door thresholds should be removed, and new ones put to the increased width. All rain-water, soil or other pipes must be altered, lengthened and refixed. The eaves and guttering to roofs may have to be altered to an in- creased width; parapets reformed, and recoped in stone, or brick on edge ; chimney stacks redressed, with projections, filleting and flaunching to pots ; and, in fact, any old work which would be altered or disturbed, must be renewed and made good. The old reveals to doors and windows may be left flush with the new work, without cut- ting away. The old arches in any case might remain, with the new arches set in front. See Mason, clause No. 106, for ashlar facings to old work. RETAINING WALLS. (Clauses Nos. 109 and 110.) For campsheeting, see Carpenter, clause No. 340. Retaining walls are required to resist the pressure of earth or water, and may be in brick, concrete or stone. The natural slope with a horizontal line of : Gravel, is about 40, and a cubic foot weighs from 112 to 120 Ibs. Shingle, 39, 88 to 105 Ibs. Sand, 22 to 38, and a cub. ft. of pit sand weighs from 95 to 100 Ibs. A cub. ft. of river sand weighs from 102 to 117 or 120 Ibs. wet sand 150 to 170 Ibs. Loose earth, is about 28, and a cub. ft. weighs from 90 to 125 Ibs. Close earth, 50. Well drained clay, is about 45, and a cubic foot weighs 120 Ibs. Wet clay, 16. Rubble, 45, 140 Ibs. Chalk, 80, 150 Ibs. (109) BKICKLAYER. Mud and sludge weigh from 105 to 110 Ibs. per cub. ft., and in calculating the pressure, these may be taken to act against a wall in the same way as water. . For weight of brickwork, see notes to clause No. 3. concrete, No. 40 under Excavator. stone, No. 1 Mason. water, see notes preceding clause No. 21 Plumber. With retaining walls against earth, allow for weeping drains being put from 10 ft. to 40 ft. apart, so that any water at the back of the wall may find its way out ; otherwise, unless the wall be built of sufficient strength to resist the pressure of the earth and water combined, the wall will be liable to be thrown over. In river and sea walls, these weeping drains should be provided with galvanised iron flap blocks on the water side. The backs of retaining walls against earth may be filled in with dry rubble, some 12 in. to 18 in, thick, and an open pipe drain taken along the bottom to carry away the water ; as with weeping drains the water running down the walls are liable to be disfigured. The following are a few rough rules for the thickness at the base of retaining walls against earth. Practice shows the most suitable batter to be 1 in 6, or 2 in. to the foot ; hence the centre of gravity is thrown well back, and it requires great leverage before the wall is thrown over. Walls may also be battered 1 in 4, 5, 8 or 12. The thickness of the base should be from one-quarter to one-third the height. The thickness at the top being the difference between the thickness at the base and the batter, thus : Take a wall 18 ft. high, the base (at one-quarter the height) would be 4 ft. 6 in. wide, the batter (at 1 in 6) would be 3 ft. ; hence giving the thickness of wall at top as 18 in. The back of the wall should be in steps, parallel with, and at right angles to the batter. The footings should be of sufficient width, that the soil may not be unduly loaded. For safe load on soils see notes preceding clause No. 115. 9 2 BRICKLAYER. (109) Srcr/o/ If the foundation be bad, it must either be entirely excavated out and filled in with concrete, or the wall must be built upon piles. Eetaining walls may be built with piers and arches, battered on face. The rigidity of retaining walls is only as weight for weight. In walls to resist the pressure of water, as in a reservoir, with nothing to counteract the pressure on the other side, the thickness of the base may roughly be taken as three-quarters the height ; the thickness at the middle one-half the height, and at the top one-eighth the height. A brick retaining (109) -Describe the excavation and filling in at earth back > see Causes Nos. 9, 10, 12, 16 and 17 under Ex- cavator ; and the concrete as clauses Nos. 27, 32 and 35 in Excavator. Describe the brickwork in cement or lime mortar, and state the kind of bricks and pointing ; see Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 3, 17 and 68. Cope wall, with blue Staffordshire bull-nose bricks in cement (state width) laid to a weather. When Cope wall, with tooled (or rubbed) weathered bull nose hard York (or other) stone 6 in. (to 9 in.) thick (give width), in lengths of not less than 5 ft., laid and jointed in^ cement, and cramped with copper cramps 9 in. long, 1 in. wide, f in. metal, filled in with cement above (or slate cramps 7 in. x 2 in. x 2 in.). Leave holes for, and build in after wall has set, 4 in. (3 in. or 6 in.) glazed stoneware pipe weeping drains every 10 ft. apart. eeping drains are not required, state : Fill in at back of wall the whole height with stone rubble 12 in. (to 18 in.) thick, before filling in the earth. Take a 4 in. (or 6 in.) open-jointed glazed stoneware (or agricultural) pipe drain along the back of wall, and discharge into ditch (or other suitable position), with a galvanised iron movable grid. It will also be an advantage to put the rubble backing, even when weeping drains are provided. In a river wall, state : The weeping drains are to have galvanised iron flap blocks on the river face. If the wall be in concrete, see the following clause, No. 110, and if in stone, see Mason, notes preceding clause No. 104, which give some of the various forms of stone walling. If land ties be required to brick or stone walling, see clause No. 110. (110) BRICKLAYER. 93 A concrete river or sea wall. (110) Describe the excavating and filling in at back, see Excavator, clauses Nos. 9, 10, 12, 16 and 17. The trenches to be pumped dry when laying the concrete. The concrete wall to be formed between strong timber framings and rough horizontal boarding, wrought on the one side where against the river face of wall. Eemove framings and boarding when directed. Build the wall in cement concrete composed of 1 part Portland cement, 7 (or 6) parts Thames ballast (or other equally good ballast) to pass a 1 \ in. diameter ring, and 1 part sand. The concrete to be laid in stepped horizontal courses, not more than 18 in. (or 12 in.) deep at a time, until set, when another layer may be formed. The face of the wall showing to the river for 2 in. back to be finished as the work proceeds with fine concrete, composed of 4 parts of fine shingle to pass a J in. diameter ring, to 1 part Portland cement, and well incorporated with the other work. The 2 in. fine concrete face merely gives the wall a clean finish, but a river wall must never be rendered over separately, as it is certain to come off. Also see Excavator, clause No. 35, for heavy concrete work. For a description of Portland cement, sand, ballast and water, see Excavator, clauses Nos. 23, 24, 25 and 26 ; and for the method of mixing them together, see Excavator, clauses Nos. 31 and 27. Building the wall in steps allows it to be bonded together. Concrete walls may be the same sizes and sections as brick or stone walls, see notes preceding clause No. 109. The foundation must be taken down below to the solid river bed. Form the top of wall to a weather, with a bull nose angle. (Brick or stone coping may be used, see clause No. 109.) Build in after the work has set, 4 in. (or 6 in.) diameter glazed stoneware weeping drains every 20 ft. (30 ft. or 40 ft.) apart, having galvanised iron flap blocks on the river side. To give additional strength to a retaining wall, land ties may be employed thus : Place inland, 40 ft. away from the centre of wall and every 30 ft. apart, land ties formed of Baltic fir (or pitch pine) timber piles, 14 in. square and 20 ft. long, driven to a batter of 1 in 12, pointed and shod with cast-iron pointed pile shoes, each having a bearing surface 5 in. square, 8J- in. deep along the central axis, and weighing 28 Ibs., and fixed to each pile with four 2 in. X i in. wrought-iron straps 21 in. long, each strap having four in. diameter countersunk holes drilled through, and 94 BRICKLAYER. (Ill) spiked to the piles with wrought-iron spikes 6 in. long. The upper ends of piles to be ringed round with If in. (or 2 in.) x i in. (or f in.) wrought-iron rings for driving. Each pile to have a 12 in. x 6 in. horizontal cross timber attached, 12 ft. long, with a 1J in. wrought-iron tie rod passing through the pile and cross timber, and screwed at the end with a nut and washer, with the other end of rod built into wall and connected to a f in. wrought- iron plate 12 in. square, with a similar screwed end and nut. If fender piles be required, see Carpenter, clause No. 342. If piles are to be creosoted, see Carpenter, clause No. 26. Instead of timber piles, the rods may have plates at both ends, one end being built in the wall, and the land end built into a block of concrete, 6 ft. X 6 ft. x 6 ft. '^*%M'& i-foj : &*; v g' : 4&$ River walls may be built in stone, or faced ^^^^^Jlr^^^ff^ with stone, or built or faced with blue Staf- ^^^%^^^^ fordshire bricks in cement ; the description = ' being somewhat similar to clause No. 109. The base of river walls may be protected from being undermined, with 12 in. x 6 in. fir timber sheet piling. State if creosoted, see Carpenter, clause No. 26. The Thames Conservancy require certain river walls to be 5 ft. 6 in. above Trinity high- water mark. Describe any stone balustrading, or iron railing, sometimes required in certain positions. The feet of the rail- IQQ] FQQ| Hj fl^ ing standards must be firmly / \ 3JE built into the walling. Fresh-water well supplied from a spring. DO |QO f i (111) A well supplied from a natural spring has to be " steined " round in brickwork from the top down- wards, until the spring is reached, the brickwork in the meantime being supported on timber kerbs every few feet apart. Excavate ground and cart away. Stein in dry half (or one) brick thick, a circular drinking water well 5 ft. internal diameter (say) 50 ft. deep from ground line, supported on double rim bolted elm (or alder) curbs, every 8 ft. apart. The first 10 ft. down of brickwork to be built in cement mortar, and lined on the outside with fine cement concrete 4 in. thick. Dome over the top one brick thick in cement mortar, with an iron ring round access hole, and 18 in. diameter manhole cover over, let into a 3 ft. x 3 ft. X 4 in. cut, tooled, hard York stone kerb. Fill in the ground around top. Allow the p.c. sum of (say) 10 for a pump, and take (112) BRICKLAYER. 95 an 1 in. (or 2 in.) lead suction pipe down to within 12 in. of bottom of well, stopped at end but pierced 12 in. up. See Plumber, clause No. 57 for notes on pumps, as also notes preceding clause No. 21 in Plumber. Wells from 2 ft. 3 in. to 6 ft. internal diameters, require half-brick rings ; and from 6 ft. 6 in. to 12 ft. diameters one brick rings. The depth of well varies according to where the spring is tapped. The top portion being built in cement and surrounded with concrete, prevents any surface water finding its way into the well. For rain-water wells, see Drainage, clause No. 53, and also see Excavator, clause No. 7. To obtain a greater amount of storage, headings may be cut at the bottom of the well, and arched over. (112) In country houses where there is no water company's supply, fresh-water storage tanks may be provided, both for domestic and fire purposes. Underground fresh- water storage tanks (or reservoirs) to country house supplied from springs. An underground storage tank can only be supplied with fresh water from springs situated at a higher level than the tank itself; and of course the stored water is practically useless for fire purposes unless the tank be placed at a higher level than the top of the building to be protected, so that the necessary pressure may be obtained for the fire hydrants. For fire hydrants, see Smith, clause 108. For the same reason the storage cisterns in the house can only be supplied automatically when the storage tank is at a higher level than the house. When there is not a spring available at the necessary height to supply the storage tank, water may be thrown up into the tank by a hydraulic ram, see Plumber, clause No. 58. Storage tanks may be built square, circular, or any other form which may be found necessary owing to the shape of the ground. The foundations should be in concrete, some 12 in. to 24 in. thick, according to the nature of the soil, and formed as a plateau, upon which the walls of the tanks may be built, and the water rest on a firm bed. The walls may be built in cement in ordinary stocks, or blue bricks, or else formed in concrete. The roof may be arched over in brickwork, or formed with concrete and iron joists. Here is a description of a brick tank with a concrete roof: 9 6 BRICKLAYER. (112) Excavate ground, part fill in and ram, and part deposit on site (or cart away). Form a level plateau foun- dation over the whole area of tank 12 in. wider each way than lowest footing, in cement concrete 12 in. thick in two layers, composed of 1 part Portland cement to 6 parts ballast and sand to pass a 1 in. diameter ring. Build the walls, piers and arches in stock brickwork, in cement mortar composed of 1 part Portland cement to 6 parts ballast and sand. Eake out the joints as the work proceeds, and hack the brickwork over on the inside, to form a key for the cement rendering. Form roof with 8 in. x 4 in. (or other size) rolled iron (or steel) joists spaced every 2 ft. 6 in. apart, on 9 in. X 3 in. tooled hard York templates running the whole length of walls in lengths of not less than 5 ft. (see Excavator, clause No. 41, for ironwork to concrete floors). Fill in between the joists with cement concrete 12 in. deep, composed of 1 part Portland cement to 6 parts ballast to pass a 1 in. diameter ring (coke breeze should not be mixed with concrete where subject to wet) and 1 part sand. Weather off the top from the centre to the sides, to falls of 2 in. in 10 ft., and render over in. thick with 3 parts Portland cement to 1 of sand. Form access hole to tank in roof with brick in cement (or concrete) sides; and finish with an 18 in. x 24 in. galvanised iron manhole cover, lock and key, with 3 in. X 3 in. X J in. T-iron supports, and let into a 3 ft. X 3 ft. 6 in. X 4 in. rubbed, cut and rebated hard York kerb. Put a movable galvanised iron ladder 18 in. wide, reaching to bottom of tank, with eye fixing at top. Spread earth over top of tank (say) 3 ft. deep. Kender the outside of walls J in. thick in cement and sand in equal proportions. Eender the inside of walls, arches, soffits, and under- side of concrete roof, in. thick with Portland cement and sand in equal proportions, with the angles thickened out ; and before it is quite dry, finish with neat Port- land cement f in. thick, trowelled over until all the water is worked up to the face. (112) BRICKLAYER. 97 Form the floor to falls, with channel to cleaning out pipe, in fine concrete 2 in. thick, composed of 1 part Portland cement to 4 parts fine shingle (or granite chippiiigs) with the angles thickened out; and finish with neat Portland cement f in. thick, in the same way as to the walls. Fill in at the back of walls with rubble stone 12 in. (or 18 in.) thick ; and take a 4 in. glazed stoneware open-jointed (or agricultural) pipe drain beneath, brought round to the lowest point and discharging into ditch near (or other position), with iron grid at end. Put 9 in. glazed stoneware air pipes every 10 ft. apart on two sides at top of tank, with bends, and finish off with fine perforated galvanised iron gratings. Tap spring on hill, and bring down 1 in. galvanised iron tubing to tank, and finish with 1 in. ball-cock, copper ball and stem, and one full-way brass stop-cock. Take a 2 in. galvanised iron overflow pipe, and dis- charge out into the open, with brass flap on end. Take from tank, about 6 in. above bottom, with large pierced movable rose cap outlet, an 1 in. (or 1 in.) galvanised service pipe to cistern in house as rising main, with a full-way stop-cock in small iron chamber just outside tank. Take a 3 in. cast-iron cleaning-out pipe, leaded at joints, and with a screw-down valve, in a small cham- ber near tank with iron cover, and carry the pipe into ditch near with a galvanised iron rose on end. See notes on retaining walls to clauses Nos. 109 and 110 for thickness of walls ; and note that the walls must be made sufficiently strong to resist the greater pressure, whether of the water or of the soil. Storage tanks should be sufficiently large for a 16 weeks' supply. For concrete walls, see clause No. 110, and clause No. 47 under Exca- vator. The outside may be puddled round in clay, some 9 in. to 12 in. thick, instead of cementing over. The inside may have a separate half- brick lining in glazed brickwork in neat cement, and grouted in neat cement between the lining and the walls some f in. or 1 in. thick, instead of the cement rendering. The inside may also be lined round with mastic asphalt J in. or 1 in. thick, with a fillet at angles, instead of the cement rendering ; the joints of the brickwork being raked out as the work proceeds, and the brickwork roughed over to form a key. The tank should be cleaned out periodi- cally. The bottom and sides of a tank may be formed in concrete about 12 in. thick (and lined in cement), when the sides take the natural slope of the soil. For a rain-water storage well or tank, see Drainage, clause No. 53. A concrete or brick reservoir will not hold water unless it be finished on the inside in neat cement, except it be in glazed bricks with neat cement joints. F BRICKLAYER. (113) Fountain and (113) The floor, walls and cement lining to the tank of a fountain would be formed in a somewhat similar way as to a reservoir, see clause No. 112. Then describe the moulded stone kerb, or balustrading round, with the stone centre ornament, and any steps down to the water, with the sizes of the various 'parts. The supply pipe may be in. or 1 in., in galvan- ised iron for small garden fountains, with stop-cock to control it, and gun-metal nozzle jet at outgo. The height to which the water will play is governed by the pressure or height above of the water supplying it. De- scribe, say a 3-in. overflow pipe, and a 2-in. (or 3-in.) cleaning- out pipe with stop-cock, and continue the pipe on into a ditch near, with grid on end, in a somewhat similar manner to the overflow and cleaning-out pipe to a cistern ; see Plumber, clause No. 30. A concrete or brick tank will not hold water unless the inside be finished in neat cement, in the same way as to a reservoir, see clause No. 112. The plan of a fountain tank may be of various designs, and should not be very deep, unless protected with a balustrading round. To keep the water fresh it must be constantly changed. FILTER. Distillation is the only absolute way of purifying water." Boiling will practically purify water, but causes it to taste flat ; but there is one species of bacteria which it does not kill, and certain chemicals found in some waters it will not dissolve. Boiled water may be filtered to render it more palatable. Hard water is made softer by boiling. To filter water on a large scale, first collect the water into a settling reservoir, where the bulky substances may subside ; then filter through beds of sand and gravel, with a pipe below from which the filtered water may be drawn off. Not more than a 2 ft. depth of water should be filtered at a time, or from 70 to 75 gallons to each square foot in area per twenty- four hours. In country districts where there is no public water supply, the rain water from the roofs may be collected and filtered for drinking purposes. In estimating the quantity of rain water falling on a roof, take the flat area of the roof (and not the slopes) and allow 16 in. in depth, as the average available rainfall per annum. As rain water attacks lead, the cistern and pipes should not be made (115) BRICKLAYER 99 Small rain water filter for drinking purposes to a country house. jraae imi of this metal when the water is required for drinking purposes. See Drainage, notes to clause No. 53, for amount of storage supply required in country districts. (114) Build filter with brick in cement on footings, and cement concrete, with a centre division having a perforation kept 2 in. above bottom of filter. Bender the whole of the inside in cement and sand J in. thick, in equal proportions, and finish in neat Portland cement in. thick. Cover the top over with two 3 in. tooled (or rubbed) hard York stones, jointed and bedded in mortar. Connect the rain-water pipes from roof into one end of filter, with a 4 in. stoneware pipe, and take a similar stoneware outgo pipe at opposite end, but at a lower level, and connect to storage well (or storage cistern). Fill up the intake chamber of filter to within 3 in. of under side of inlet, with coarse gravel to pass a f in. ring ; and the other chamber half-way up, with gravel to pass a J in. ring ; the remainder, to within 3 in. of under side of outgo pipe, being filled in with gravel and sand to pass an j- in. ring. Take a 4 in. overflow pipe and discharge into the open. The filter should be cleaned out at least every three months, and fresh clean filtering material put in. For a small eight-room house, the size of the chambers may be each 18 in. square by 15 in. to 18 in. deep below outgo. For a twelve-room house, the chambers may be about 2 ft. square by 18 in. to 24 in. deep. A draw-off cock to the filter may be found useful for emptying. For a storage well, see Drainage, clause No. 53 ; and for a storage reservoir, see Bricklayer, clause No. 112. In larger filters, the filtering material at the top of the intake chamber may be of gravel to pass an 1 J- in. ring for half the depth down, then to pass an 1 in. ring for the remainder ; and in the outgo chamber the gravel at the bottom to pass an 1J in. ring for half the height up, and then with gravel to pass a J in. ring for a quarter more, and fine shingle and sand to pass a J in. ring for the remainder. TALL CHIMNEY SHAFTS. Tall chimney shafts may be on plan in the shape of a square, circle, octagon or hexagon. A square shaft offers the most resistance to the wind. A circular shaft offers one-half that of the square. An octagonal shaft offers three-fifths that of the square. A hexagonal shaft offers three-quarters that of the square. H 2 100 BRICKLAYER. (115) The diameter at the base of a square shaft should be one-tenth the height. The diameter at the base of a circular shaft should be one-twelfth the height. The diameter at the base of an octagonal or hexagonal shaft should be one-eleventh the height. The shaft should batter or taper 3 in. to the foot (or 2 in. in 10 ft., or 1 in 48). The diameter at the top may be one-fifth to one-third less than that of the base. The thickness of brickwork to a shaft may be : 1 brick for the first 20 ft. to 25 ft. down from the top. li for the next 25 ft. to 30 ft. below. 2 bricks for a further 30 ft. below. 2J 30ft. If the diameter at the top exceeds 4 ft. 6 in., the brickwork should be 1J brick thick for the first 25 ft. down. Roughly, it may be taken that after 50 ft. down from the top, the shaft should have half a brick addi- tional thickness for each 25 ft. below. The London Building Act requires that a tall chimney shaft shall be 1 brick thick for the first 20 ft. down from the top, with half a brick additional thickness for each 20 ft. below ; and that the base, if square, should be one-tenth the height ; if circular or other shape, one-twelfth the height ; and the taper (batter) towards the top 2 J in. in 10 ft. Tall chimney shafts should stand clear of any buildings. The fire- brick lining round the inside at the base must be built quite indepen- dently from the shaft. The size of the foundation depends upon the weight of the shaft to be carried by the natural soil ; but the larger the foundation the better. A safe load on a hard rocky foundation may be 9 tons per square foot. A safe load on a fairly hard rocky foundation may be 3 tons per square foot. A safe load on a soft rocky foundation may be 1 8 tons per square foot. Firm earth, hard clay, gravel and sand, may be loaded from 1 to 1J tons per square foot. The word " rock " is a term applied to all earths. The shaft itself will bear a safe load of 4 to 6 tons per square foot of sectional area, if built in good stock bricks. The cap at the top of shaft may be finished in iron, brick, stone or terra-cotta, and should slant upwards ; and any projection must not overhang further than the base ; in fact, it is better to let a cornice balance itself. The shaft should be built in lime mortar, with all headers or radial bricks, if circular ; other shapes may have three or four courses of stretchers to one course of headers. Stone shafts and cement mortar are both affected by fire, and therefore unsuitable. Here is a description : Tall chimney (115) Describe the excavation and filling in, see Excavator, clauses Nos. 9, 10, 12, 16 and 17 ; and the (115) BEICKLAYEE. 101 cement concrete, as in Excavator, clauses Nos. 27, 32 and 35. Build the shaft in all headers with stock bricks, in lime mortar composed of 1 part well slaked grey lime, 2 parts sand, and J part smith's ashes ; flush up joints, weather- joint point the outside, and flat-joint point the inside, as the work proceeds. Build in one row of 1 J- in. x T T g in. galvanised hoop-iron bond to each half brick thickness every 3 ft. up. Form the cap, in 15 in. X 9 in. splayed tooled hard York stone set in cement,' in three stones, cramped at joints with slate (or copper) cramps and cement plugs. Build the cornice in brickwork (or stone) in cement, and weathered off on the top in cement (or weathered only if in stone). The plinth or base moulding to be in tooled (or rubbed) hard York stone (state size) in cement. Line the inside of shaft (say) 20 ft. up with fire-brick lining half a brick (or one brick) thick, set in fire-clay. Affix to shaft a lightning conductor, formed of 1 in. xj in. solid copper tape in one continuous length, without joints, and insulated, and secured with copper eyes 3 ft. apart, so as to firmly hold but not to pinch the tape. Finish the upper end of tape with a band of copper carried round the cap of shaft, and terminate with stout sharp' copper points 12 in. long, spaced at intervals of 2 ft. (or 3 ft.) apart. Encase the lower end of tape for 8 ft. (to 10 ft.) above ground line and for 4 ft. (to 6 ft.) below in a painted galvanised iron pipe, and continued on for some 10 ft. (to 15 ft.) away from the stack ; and finish with a 3 ft. X 3 ft. X J in. copper plate buried in a bed of moist powdered coke 3 ft. X 5 ft. X 6 ft. (An arch of copper may be placed over the top of shaft instead of "the copper points.) If the foundation be bad for a great depth, the shaft is sometimes built upon piles, see Carpenter, clause No. 341. See clause No. 47 for small boiler shafts. See notes preceding and following clause No. 2 in Coppersmith, with reference to lightning conductors. 102 BRICKLAYER, (116) Slate weathering. (116) When a small set-back occurs on the outer face of a brick wall, it may be weathered off with a slate weathering similar to that described in Mason under clause No. 50. (117)- (118)- (119)- * TERRA-COTTA. Terra-cotta facing to brick building. (120) Face building with yellow (or red) tinted terra-cotta ashlar 6 in. thick, with a bonder block going through the thickness of the wall to every square yard, r-r r r T7 laid in lime mortar, and weather-joint pointed (or \\ ^ / / / pointed up in blue mortar). Windows and doors to have moulded enriched jambs, the heads to be joggled together. Then describe any sills, cornices or other dressings. Fill in the hollows of the terra-cotta blocks with fine Portland cement concrete. The work to be carefully modelled, and to come out sharp, and without casts or twists. When terra-cotta is in large pieces, the blocks are formed hollow, with cross divisions for strength. The hollows in the blocks are sometimes filled in with Eoman cement concrete, or breeze and Portland cement concrete. See sketch to clause No. 121 for another form of joggle joint. Faience facing to brick building. FAIENCE. (121) Faience is made in blocks similar to terra- cotta, and fixed in the same way. The surface resembles the enamelled face on glazed brickwork, and may be obtained in many tints. The description would be similar to that for terra-cotta, see clause No. 120. See sketch to clause No. 120 for another form of joggle joint. (2) IO MASON. FOR the thickness of stone walls, see Bricklayer, notes to clause No. 17. For Slate Mason, see Slater, commencing at clause No. 15. stone generally. (1) The stone to be obtained from the best quarries, and the most durable bed of its class ; free from vents, beds, sand holes, red streaks, and all other imperfec- tions ; and set on its natural or quarry bed in fine mortar (or cement) after wetting. Each stone to hold its full size, sawn (or drafted) square to the back ; jointed, and where required back jointed, and finished with a finely rubbed (or dragged) face when not described as rough or tooled. Point and clean down at completion. Cornices with undercut mouldings built with stratified stone, to be laid with the bed vertical. Moderately hard stones, such as Portland or York, are " rubbed " to produce a fine face. Softer stones, such as Bath, are " dragged " to produce a fine face. A rough but fairly even face on hard stones is obtained by tooling. Boasted work is tooling at an angle. Stone sawn square at the back is ob- tained by sawing. Stone drafted square at the back is worked square roughly with a tool. Granite weighs from 163 to 167 Ibs. per cub. foot. York stone" 156 ,,-157 Portland stone 145 ,,151 Bath 123 Mansfield 147 149 Flint masonry 148 Kubble stone 140 Victoria stone (artificial) 144 Granite will take a safe load of 65 tons per super, ft. Portland stone 26 Bath 8 Rubble masonry 2 The safe load on stone pillars should not exceed one-tenth to one- eighth the breaking weight. Stone pillars should not exceed in height twelve times their least thickness. Joints and pointing. (2) The joints generally to be where shown upon the drawings. Joints to " ashlar " work to be \ in. (to ^ in.) thick, set in lime (or white lead) putty for in. back from the front edge, and neatly pointed up as the work pro- ceeds. 104 MASON. (3) Joints to coursed and un coursed squared rubble masonry to be | in. (to y\ in.) thick, raked out and pointed up afterwards in blue ash (cement or lime) mortar (or rilled up in cement and tuck pointed in lime mortar). " Coursed random rubble," and " uncoursed random rubble " joints, to be raked out, filled up in cement, and tuck joint pointed in cement. (In poorer class work the joints are not tuck pointed.) For the various forms of ashlar and rubble masonry, see notes pre- ceding clause No. 104. Labours and connections. (3) Perform all mitres, irregular mitres, stopped ends, ends on splay, returned and mitred ends, moulded, rebated, sunk, weathered and throated work, grooves, holes, dishings, joints, and requisite jobbing. Provide all slate and copper dowels, copper and iron cramps, sulphur and lead, and run in. Dowelled joints may be formed, either with square, round or dove- tailed holes, secured together with slate or metal dowels of similar shapes. A joggle joint is similar to a dowel, but worked on the solid stone. It is somewhat weak. A grooved and tongued joint, some- times called a joggle joint, is mostly used for jointing landings. A grooved and tongued joint may be formed with a metal tongue let into grooves in the stone. Cramps are either in galvanised iron, copper or bronze, run in with lead or sulphur. Lead or cement plugs are formed by filling in the holes with lead or cement. They are much used in arch stones. (20) MASON. 105 Sand. Lime. Cement. Lime moitar. Cement mortar. Blue mortar. Gauged mortar. Selenitic lime or cement mortar. Putty. Injury to stones. Case up projections. Mouldings. Carving and Sculpture. Build and bed in stones. Bed sills and thresholds. Mortise thresholds. (4) See Excavator, clause No. 24. (5) See Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 4, 5 and 6. (6) See Excavator, clause No. 23. (7) See Bricklayer, clause No. 9. (8) See Bricklayer, clause No. 14. (9) See Bricklayer, clause No. 12. (10) See Bricklayer, clause No. 10. (11) See Bricklayer, clause No. 13. (12) See Bricklayer, clause No. 15. (13) Any stone which may be injured during the erection of the building is to be removed, and replaced with new at the contractor's expense. (14) Case up all projections and mouldings, and protect until completion of work. Leave arrises sharp. (15) The mouldings to be worked to true iron (or zinc) moulds (templates). (16) The carving, sculpture and enrichments to caps, mouldings and friezes, to be executed in an artistic manner. All carving, sculpture and enrich- ments to be set up in the model, and approved by the architect, before being executed in the stone. (17) See Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 20 and 21. (18) See Bricklayer, clause No. 23. (19) Mortise thresholds for dowels (or stubs of shoes) of door frames, and run in with cement (or lead). See Carpenter, clause No. 38, and Smith, clause No. 64. York stone. (20) The rubbed York stone to be completed on the premises. York stone is a sandstone, and most suitable for rough usage. Here are three kinds of York stone : " Hard York," suitable for sills, thresholds, copings, pavings, landings,, templates, corbels, steps, hearths and street paving. " Eobin Hood York," suitable for better class sills, thresholds, copings, pavings, terraces, stairs, landings and hearths. "Scotgate Ash York," suitable for heavy work, such as beds to engines and iron columns. 106 MASON. (21) Silex stone. (21) This is a Yorkshire stone, being very hard, and most suitable for stairs and pavings subject to great wear. Forest of Dean (22) To be the blue stone, stone. Suitable for the same positions as York stone ; it much resembles Robin Hood York stone. It is a sandstone. Mansfield stone. (23) It is a sandstone, and obtained either "red" or " white," and may be used as ashlar and in similar positions. Bed Corseniil (24) It is a sandstone, and very similar to Mans- field stone, and suitable for the same positions. Portland stone. (25) To be obtained from the " Whitbed " series. Portland stone is a limestone. That obtained from the Whitbed series is suitable for ashlar, stairs, sills, thresholds, copings, hearths, landings, terraces, and in paving where not subject to great wear. The "true Roach bed " of Portland stone is suitable for engineering work. Bath stone. (26) State the quarry. Bath stone is a limestone. Here are two kinds of Bath stone : Corsham Down and Monks Park ; both being suitable for ashlar and carving, but not for positions subject to wear, such as pavings and steps. Bath stone may be greatly preserved by coating the exterior faces with two coats of " fluate " : a chemical composition supplied by the Bath Stone Firms Company. Caen stone. (27) It is a limestone, and most suitable for fine internal carving. Kentish rag. (28) It is a limestone, used for ashlar and paving setts. Marble. (29) State the kind., see clauses Nos. 117 to 128. It is a limestone. Granite. (30) State the kind, see clauses Nos. 110 to 116. Used chiefly in engineering works, ashlar, steps, paving setts, and in polished columns and pilasters. Victoria stone. (31) See Road-making, clause No. 7. It may be used in any position to which York stone is applied. It is an artificial stone. YORKSHIRE STONE. (Clauses Nos. 32 to 74.) See Clause No. 20, which may perhaps be inserted here. Corbelling. (32) Corbel out in 3 in. (or 4 in.) tooled " hard York " to chimney breasts on first and second floors ; and to other projections (give size of corbels and positions). (35) MASON. 107 See Bricklayer, clause No. 19, for sketch and notes. Angle and square fireplaces are carried upon corbels when there is no support beneath. Wall plate corbels. Corbel out for wall plates, with Gin. (or 9 in.) X 14 in. X 3 in. (or 4 in.) tooled hard York corbels, every 3 ft. apart, rounded one edge. For iron corbels, see Smith, clause No. 26. Corbel to bay. The projecting bay window on first floor to be carried on a 4 in. tooled hard York landing, 8 ft. X 5 ft. in one piece, cut and pinned into wall in cement. Give the correct position and size of landing. Describe the brackets, see Smith, clause No. 35. When a landing is in two or more pieces, state it is to be jointed together, with a 2 in. x J in. (or -| in.) copper (or bronze) tongue, in a grooved joint in cement. Or it may be grooved and tongued in the stone, see note to clause No. 3. Core to cornice. (33) Block out cornice with a 3 in. (or 4in.)x 24. in. rough 'York core, in lengths of not less than 5ft. Cores to cornices are mostly used in external cement cornices. The width varies according to the projection of the cornice. See Plasterer, clause No. 70. stone covering to (34)_See Bricklayer, clause No. 49. dry areas. State if tooled (or rubbed) on face and edge. If it be below the ground it may be in rough York or slates. stone covering to (35) Cover the heating-pipes in ground with 2i in. pipe channels. rQugh j^ y^ ( ^ yQ j)* See Bricklayer, clause No. 36, for brickwork and sketch. io8 MASON. (36) Stone kerbs to pipe or other channels. (36) The pipe channels in basement to have 9 in. X 3 in. (or 4 in.) tooled (or rubbed) hard York kerbs, in lengths of not less than 5 ft., rebated for grating, and set and jointed in cement. For iron grating, see Smith, clause No. 61 ; and Bricklayer, clause No. 36, for brickwork. Coal plate kerb. (37) See Bricklayer, clause No. 61. Templates. (38) Bed all tie-beams and purlins to roofs ; girders to floors, flats and partitions ; girders and bressummers to openings ; iron joists to concrete floors ; and iron and wood lintels ; on tooled hard York templates 3 in. (or 4 in.) thick in cement, with asphalted felt (or 4 Ib. lead) seating. Where templates show, they are to be rubbed on face. For sizes of templates to tie-beams and purlins to roofs, see Carpenter, clause No. 75. For sizes of templates of girders to floors, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 53, 55 and 56. For sizes of templates of girders to flats, see Carpenter, clause No. 124. For sizes of templates of girders to par- titions, see Carpenter, clause No, 136. For sizes of templates of girders and bressummers to openings, see Smith, clauses Nos. 11 to 14 and 18, and Carpenter, clause No. 44. For sizes of templates of iron joists to concrete floors, see Smith, clause No. 15. For sizes of templates to iron and wood lintels, see Smith, clause No. 17, and Carpenter, clause No. 43. Templates to piers to pipes. Bed 2 in. tooled hard York stone templates in cement, on piers to receive heating pipes. See Bricklayer, clause No. 36, for piers and sketch. Cover stones, (39) Put 3 in. (2J in. or 4 in.) tooled hard York cover stones in cement, on top of girders and wood bressummers over openings, in lengths of not less than 5 ft., by the full thickness of the wall above, and cramped at joints with 8 in. galvanised iron (or copper) cramps. In riveted girders the rivet heads are to be packed up flush in neat cement to receive the cover .stones. (42) MASON. 109 For cover stones to wood bressummers, see Carpenter, clause No. 44. For cover stones to iron girders, see Smith, clause No. 11. For cover stones to riveted iron girders, see Smith, clause No. 11. For cover stones to iron lintels, see Smith, clause No. 17. Bases to iron (40) The bases under the iron columns to be in Scotgate Ash York stone, 2 ft. 6 in. x 2 ft. 6 in. x 1 ft. 6 in. (or other size) rubbed on top face and sides, tooled on bed and set in cement on the concrete piers ; and drilled for 1 in. (or 1|- in.) diameter holding down bolts, four to each base. (See Smith, clauses Nos. 36 to 39.) Stone to engine beds would be of a similar description, but 6 in., 9 in. or 12 in. thick. . paving. (4i) Pave areas with 2J in. tooled (or rubbed) and jointed hard York stone, laid to falls in straight parallel courses, breaking joint, and bedded in mortar on 4 in. (or 6 in.) cement (or lime) concrete ; and jointed up in cement. Each 100 super, ft. is nob to be composed of more than 14 stones. For York paving to footpaths, see clauses Nos. 6 and 2 under Road- making. Eobin Hood York paving may be used in the best class work. If the paving be bedded directly on the ground, then see clause No. 6 under Road-making. York paving may also be in 2 in., 3 in., 4 in., 5 in. and 6 in. thick- nesses. Areas may also be laid as in clause No. 42 ; and see Bricklayer, clause No. 28, for the brickwork. The work mentioned in clauses Nos. 41 to 45 may also be done in rubbed Portland stone, 1J in., 2 in., 2^ in. and 3 in. thick, see clause No. 25, and under E-oad-making, clause No. 12 ; and if in Bath stone then 3 in. thick, see clause No. 26, and under Road-making, clause No. 8. If in Caithness nagging, see Road-making, clause No. 9. If in slate nagging, see Road-making, clause No. 10. If in Silex stone paving, see clause No. 21, and under Road-making, clause No. 13. If in Forest of Dean stone, see clause No. 22. If in Victoria stone (artificial), see Road-making, clause No. 7. Paving to (42) Cover passages, cellars, scullery, kitchen and offices in basement, with 2J in. (or 3 in.) tooled (or rubbed) and jointed hard York stone, laid in straight parallel courses breaking joint, bedded in mortar on the brick sleeper walls, and pointed up in cement. Not more than fourteen stones to be laid in every 100 super, feet. no MASON. (43) Sleeper walls keep the paving dry, see Bricklayer, clause No. 28, for brickwork and sketch. If laid on concrete bed without sleeper walls, see clause No. 41. Eobin Hood York paving may be used in best class work. For other kinds of stone paving in these positions, see notes to clause No. 41. Paving as border to kitchen. (43) Lay 2J in. rubbed (or tooled) and jointed hard York stone border, 2 ft. 6 in. (or 3 ft.) wide round kitchen, bedded in mortar, and jointed in cement on the sleeper walls ; the paving to be continued under hot plate and cupboard. Not more than fourteen stones to be laid to each 100 super, feet. See Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 28 and 25 for brickwork to carry paving. Eobin Hood York paving may be used in the best class work. For other kinds of stone paving in this position, see notes to clause No. 41. York stone to a terrace or colonnade. (44) Eobin Hood stone, either sawn or rubbed, is best in these positions. Describe similar to clause No. 41, but state the size of stones, as in 4 ft., 5 ft. or 5 ft. 6 in. lengths, and in 2 ft. 6 in. or 3 ft. widths. With paving in these positions, state that the edges are to be chiselled off and rubbed down after the paving has set. Sawn one side ordinary hard York stone is very suitable, and may be roughly rubbed over when set, with the edges chiselled off and rubbed down. State if laid on concrete, as clause No. 41 ; if laid on sleeper walls, as clause No. 42, and Bricklayer, clause No. 28 ; if laid on the ground, see clause No. 6 under Eoad-making. For other kinds of paving in these positions, see notes to clause No. 41. Footpath paving. (45) gee Eoad-making, clauses No. 6 to 10, 12 to 14, 16, and 17. Belay old paving. (45) See Eoad-making, clause No. 15. Thresholds. (47) p u t in one length each, to all external door and cellar openings, 3 in. rubbed (or tooled), weathered and back-jointed hard York thresholds, 1J in. wider than the full thickness of the walls, and kept \ in. (to 1J in.) above floor level, and mortised for dowels (or stubs of door shoes). In positions subject to heavy weights thresholds should be thicker, up to 6 in. (or 9 in.). Thresholds may be in Eobin Hood York stone for better work, as also in Portland stone, Caithness stone, and Silex stone. Victoria stone is very suitable for thresholds. (50) MASON. I I I Sills. (48) Put in one length each, to all windows, 8 in. X 3 in. (or 9 in. X 3 in.), rubbed, sunk, weathered and throated hard York sills, 4 in. longer than openings, with stopped ends, and grooved for 1^- in. x J in. iron tongues, and with the stools worked on for mullions and reveals. If sills are jointed between the openings the weather is sure to find its way in. Sills may be in Eobin Hood York or other stones, as men- tioned in clause No. 47, and in such sizes to suit the class of work. See Plasterer, clause No. 73, for external cement sills, and Bricklayer, notes to clause No. 67, for brick sills. Coping. (49) Put 13 in. x 3 in. weathered (or saddle-back), twice (or once) throated, hard York coping to all parapet walls, in lengths not less than 5 ft. each, with returned angle stones ; and the whole bedded and jointed in cement and cramped together with copper cramps 9 in. long. Finish the gables with solid apex stones, kneelers and bonders. Coping may be in Robin Hood York, or other stones as mentioned in clause No. 47. York coping is also cut in 12 in. x 2 in., 12 in. x 2 J in., 12 in. x 3 in. and 18 in. x 3 in. sizes. Practically the coping should project not less than 2 in. on either side of the walling under. Portland stone coping is cut in 12 in.x2Jin., 16 in. x 2 J in. and 20 in. x 3 in. sizes, but of course it may be had in any size to suit the work. For brick coping see Bricklayer, notes to and clause No. 98. Kerbs to area walls. (50) Cope area walls in lengths of not less than 5 ft. ; with 9 in. X 6 in. tooled (or rubbed) hard York stone, chamfered 1 in. down on two edges (or rounded on top face) slate (or copper) do welled at joints ; ends built 6 in. into walls ; bedded and jointed in cement, and mortise holes cut for iron railings. Similar York spurs, projecting out 12 in., to be placed every 10 ft. apart, on tooled (or rubbed) rounded York corbels built 9 in. into walls. Put 4 in. x J in. sawn (or rubbed) slate creasing (weathering) under kerb in cement. I 12 MASON. (51) Double tile creasing in cement, with cement filleting, may also be used. The spurs support the stiffeners to the legs of the railing standards, should there be a long length of unsupported railing. York kerbs may be in Kobin Hood stone, and are cut in 5 in. X 6 in., 6 in. x 6 in., 7 in. x 6 in. and 8 in. x 6 in. sizes. Portland stone kerbs are cut in 6 in. x 6 in., 7 in. x 6 in. and 8 in. x 6 in. sizes, rounded or chamfered on top. For kerbs to pavement lights, see Glazier, clause No. 18. For kerbs to area gratings, see Smith, clause No. 45. When kerbs are flush with the street "paving, in positions subject to great traffic, ordinary hard stones will soon wear ; in these cases granite should be used. Hearths. (51) p u t to all fireplace openings 2% in. (2 in. or 1J in.) rubbed hard York front and back hearths in cement ; back jointed and notched to chimney-pieces. The front hearth, to be 18 in. longer than the fireplace opening, and 18 in. in width, and bedded in cement concrete. (See Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 25 and 42, for the concrete.) Hearths may also be in Eobin Hood York. Kubbed Portland stone hearths may be used in the best work, 1J in., 2 in. and 2^ in. thick. Hearths may be in polished marble, J in., 1 in., 1 in. and 1 in. thick. State the kind of marble, such as Sicilian, vein, statuary or black, see clause No. 122, and in Pavior, clause No. 6. For cement hearths, see Pavior, clause No. 5, and Bricklayer, clause No. 42. For tile and brick hearths, see Pavior, clauses Nos. 6 and 5 respectively. Kerb fenders to fireplaces. (52) Put to all fireplaces in basement and kitchen offices, 4 in. x 3 in. rounded rubbed hard York kerbs in cement, slate (or copper) do welled at joints. The under- side to be set 1 in. below the flooring level. Hearth kerbs may also be in Eobin Hood York. Kerbs may also be in Portland stone or enamelled slate. In the best rooms glazed brickware or marble kerbs may be used, see Pavior, clause No. 6, and Mason, clause No. 123, respectively. Fender kerbs to other floors. Plain stone chimney jambs. State the kind of material and size, as clause No. 52, and describe the positions. (53) The kitchen and scullery ranges to have 8 in. X 1 J in. (or 9 in. x 2 in.) stop chamfered rubbed York jambs, bases and friezes, 9 in. X 1 in. (or 14 in. X 2 in.) twice chamfered rubbed York shelves, pinned and copper cramped into walls, fixed in cement and made good to plastering. (58) MASON. Channel stones. For chimney-pieces to other fireplaces, see clause No. 124; Carpenter, clause No. 215 ; Smith, clause No. 74 ; and Slater, clause No. 18. (54) When a channel stone is required to take off the water from paving, it may be described as : 10 in. x3J in. tooled (or rubbed) hard York, in lengths of not less than 5 ft., with a channel sinking 6 in.xlj in. Channelling may also be in Eobin Hood York or Portland stone. Channel stones are also cut 12 in. x 3J in. and 14 in. x 3J in., each having a 6 in. x li in. sinking. (55) -To be 3 ft. x 2 ft. in rubbed (or tooled) hard York, 6 in. (or 8 in.) thick, rounded corners, 3J in. (or 5 in.) sinking, hole cut and rebated for waste, and one (or two) edge cut and pinned into wall in cement. For other kinds of sinks, see clause No. 97; Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 32 and 91 ; Plumber, clause No. 33 ; Carpenter, clause No. 288 and Slater, clause No. 21. (56) To be 12 in. deep by 1J in. wider each way than door frame, in tooled (or rubbed) hard York, chamfered all round, and mortised for dowels. Scullery sinks in stone. Bases to door frames. ffl See Carpenter, notes to clause No. 38. Bases to wood posts. Gully stones, manhole stones and other stonework connected with drainage. Balcony. These would be similar, either flush all round with the posts, or slightly larger and chamfered. (57) See Drainage, clauses Nos. 26, 30, 33, 37 to 40, 43 to 45, 48, and 50 to 54. (58) To be in Portland stone 4 in. (5 in. or 6 in.) thick, rubbed all round, weathered in. on top face, cut and pinned 6 in. into wall in cement, and projecting out 3 ft. (to 4 ft. 6 in.), joggle jointed together in lengths of not less than 5 ft., and supported on cut, moulded and rubbed Portland stone brackets 8 in. wide, 12 in. deep, cut and pinned in cement 18 in. into wall, and placed at 2 ft. 6 in. centres. Form holes for railing. It may be in York stone or any other hard stone. The brackets may also be in slate or in iron, see Smith, clause No. 35. See notes to clause Ho. 6 tor joggle joints. State if landing is moulded on edge, if brackets are carved. For railing, see Smith, clause No. 47. MASON. (59) Lock and hinge stones. (59) To be in sawn hard York, 6 in, (to 9 in.) deep, the full size of piers, rubbed (or tooled) on the outer faces, sunk for ironwork and rebated for door. Also see Carpenter, clause No. 266. Soft stones should never be used in these positions. Gate piers. (60) State the class of stone, if dragged or rubbed (see notes to clause No. 1). Give the sizes of the various parts. The cap should be in a single stone. If there be a lamp, it may be described with the piers, see Bricklayer, clause No. 99, and state that the piers are drilled through for the tubing. For the spurs and threshold, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 266 and 269. Describe any lettering on piers, if incised or raised. Stonework specially to stables. Repairs to solid stone steps. (61) For thresholds and stone blocks to coach- house doors, see Carpenter, notes to clause No. 270, which may be described with the doors. Also see Carpenter, clause No. 271. For thresholds to the stable doors, see Carpenter, clause No. 272 ; they should not be raised more than 3 in. above the outside paving, otherwise the horses may stumble; they are better almost flush. For thresholds to loft doors, see thres- holds in clause No. 47, to which they would be similar, from 3 in. to 5 in thick. (62) Sink down over the worn part of treads 2J in. (to 3 in.) deep, and piece out with 2J in. (or 3 in.) rubbed similar stone set in cement with the nosing moulded to match (or the arris taken off). or, Chisel the treads 1 in. down, wedge-shaped at ends, and fill up in neat Portland cement, with the moulding work on (or the arris taken off). If the steps be formed with treads and risers similar to notes in clause No. 71, they may either be cemented out as just described, or else pieced (64) MASON. out with stone the full thickness of the treads, so long that the piecings out are supported from beneath ; otherwise entirely new treads should be put. (63) Back staircase (clauses Nos. 64 to 66). STONE STAIRCASES. (Clauses Nos. 64 to 74.) See Carpenter, notes preceding clause No. 217, and notes to clause No. 221 in Carpenter. (64) The back staircase from basement to second floor to be formed with 1 2 in. x 6 in. rubbed on all sides and one end, solid hard York stone hanging steps, projecting 3 ft. 6 in. out from the walls, with the arris taken off in., and cut and pinned in cement as the work proceeds 6 in. into walls, bedded together in cement, and two holes mortised out on each step for balusters, and at 5 in. apart on landings. The curtail step to be 14 in. x 7 in., with a scroll end, and bedded 1 in. below the floor level. The winders, quarter and half-space landings to be 6 in. thick, cut and pinned 6 in. in cement into walls ; the landings being joggled -L together in cement (or jointed together with a 2 in. X i in. bronze, gun-metal or copper tongue, let into grooves in the stones in cement). The thresholds to the door openings on the landings to be 2J in. (or 3 in.) &&% rubbed hard York, and back jointed. Landings are 3 in., 4 in., 5 in. and 6 in. thick, and when employed thinner than the steps themselves they must be made out the necessary depth with a riser piece to the top step. Stone stairs are often built in after the walls are up ; in that case, state that holes are to be left in the walls, into which the steps and landings can be pinned. If the half landings cover a large space, the stone landings forming them must be supported at the outer edge on an iron joist. Or the landings may be formed up with iron joists and concrete, see Excavator, clause No. 41, and I then covered over with 2 J in. (or 3 in.) rubbed 'jj^^tj^S nar ^ York jointed paving breaking joint, laid and fe^y^v^iffii jointed in cement and moulded on the outer edge. The apron linings may be in plaster or boarding. I 2 T n6 MASON. (64) Handrail and balusters. Put a 3 in. x 2 J in. moulded mahogany continuous handrail, with all wreaths, twists and handrail screws, fitted into wall at top end, finished with a scroll turn at newel end ; and rebated out on the under side to receive a in. x -fg in. wrought-iron core screwed in with countersunk screws ; and also screwed to the in. wrought-iron square bar balusters, let into mortises in the steps and landings with lead. Each tread to have two balusters, and on the landings spaced 5 in. apart. Put a cast-iron p.c. 15 s. ornamental newel to curtail step, State if iron stiffeners to handrail are required, see Carpenter, notes to clause No. 220. State if a pair of brass stair eyes be provided to each tread, p.c. 6d. to Is. per pair, and let in with lead. If a handrail is required also on the wall side, describe as clause No. 218 in Carpenter. These stairs may be in Eobin Hood York stone or Portland stone, and where great traffic, then Silex stone is suitable, see clause No. 21. It is better to build hanging steps 9 in. into walls ; but if "] steps are built in between two walls, then 4^ in. on either side will be sufficient. When steps are too long to be in one stone, they should be do welled or joggled together, but of course hanging steps can only be in one stone. Solid steps may be rebated together or rebated and splayed together ; this prevents the stones slipping on their bed. If hanging steps are required more than about 5 ft. long, they must be supported at the outer end on a rolled iron joist, bent at the angles, and pinned into walls on stone tem- plates. The iron joists may be mitred together at the angles with fish plates on either side, bolted through ; see Smith, clause No. 12. When space is limited, the balusters may be kept outside the steps and mortised into the ends, and run in with lead. Balusters may be in plain or twisted wrought iron, or in orna- mental cast or wrought iron. (69) MASON. 117 Halls, landings and passages to stairs. Stone gallery. (65) See clause No. 42 and notes to clause No. 64. (66) A stone gallery would be constructed in a similar way to a balcony in clause No. 58 ; or it may be formed with iron and concrete, with stone paving on top, see notes to clause No. 64. Describe the handrail and balusters as clause No. 64. State if with circular angles to landing. The handrail would be continuous in either case. Principal stairs, (67) See clauses Nos. 75 to 77, which may also be in York stone. Circular stone (68) The steps, landings, passages, gallery, hand- staircases with ra ^ g an( j b a ;L us t;ers may be described as in clauses Nos. 64 to 66. State that the steps are all winders. Circular stairs (69) Circular staircases in very limited positions ma ^ be described thus :- The staircase to be formed of rubbed hard York stone solid winders 6 in. thick, with the arris taken off in., cut and pinned 6 in. into walls in cement as the work proceeds, and bedded together in cement, the centre newel being formed 5 in. (to 9 in.) diameter in the solid out of each step. The handrail to be 2 in. diameter barrel iron, screwed together with flush joints, with cast-iron bracket sup- ports every 4 ft. apart, screwed to handrail and built into walls. The ends to be turned into wall (or finished with monkey- tail ends). The landing at the top would have the solid newel piece worked on. Other landings and the passages would be similar, as in clauses Nos. 64 and 65. No balusters would be required. This form of staircase should not be less in width than 18 in. to 21 in. clear from the newel to the wall. Eobin Hood York stone may be used. n8 MASON. (70) Circular stairs with hollow newel. (70) Circular staircases with a hollow newel would be described similar to clauses Nos. 64, 65 and 68. The newel might be in cut and rubbed brickwork (or in tooled or rubbed stone), built in cement. The handrail might be similar to clause No. 69, or as the wall hand- rail in Clause No. 218 under Carpenter. Ordinary basement stairs to ground floor. (71) : May be similar to clause No. 64, and handrail may be in iron, as clause No. 69. the Brick walls may be built under these stairs, instead of pinning the steps into the walls. Basement stairs may also be formed of 12 in. (or 13 in.) X 3 in. (or 2 J in.) tooled (or rubbed) hard York treads, with the arris taken off J in., and built into walls 4 in. on either side, with 2 in. tooled (or rubbed) risers jointed in cement. The treads and risers may be dowelled together with four J in. dia- meter copper dowels to each tread. If this form of staircase be sup- ported from the one wall only, an iron joist may be placed under the outer extremity, see notes to clause No. 64, but the lowermost step should be a solid stone. See Smith, clause No. 12, for iron carriage. Area steps. (72) May be either solid, as clause No. 71, or else formed with treads and risers, as in clause No. 71. In either case state that the treads are to be weathered J in. (to i in.) Garden and outside terrace steps and landings. (73) May be in tooled (or rubbed) solid hard York stone, either as clause No. 64, or formed with treads and risers, as clause No. 71 ; but state that the steps <75) MASON. 119 (or treads) are to be weathered J- in. (to J in.), and the landings J in. (to J in.) to the foot. State if with moulded nosings, and if the steps and landings are in one length. These may also be in Eobin Hood York or Portland stone. The brick carriage walls may be described with the steps. Describe the stone balustrading as clause No. 104; if iron balustrad- ing or railings, then see Smith, clause No. 46, and state that the steps .and landings are to be mortised out to receive the balusters. Steps to front entrance door. (74) See clause No. 80, with notes. PORTLAND STONE. (Clauses Nos. 75 to 103a.) See clause No. 25 for class of stone. Principal staircase. (Clauses Nos. 75 to 77.) STONE STAIRCASES. (Clauses Nos. 75 to 80.) See Carpenter, notes preceding clause No. 217, and notes to clause No. 221 in Carpenter. (75) The principal staircase, from ground to second floor, to be formed with 14 in. x 7 in. rubbed on all sides and one end solid Portland stone hanging spandril steps, projecting 4 ft. 6 in. out from walls, with moulded nosings, returned and mitred at ends, rebated, splayed and bedded together in cement, cut and pinned in cement as the work proceeds 9 in. into walls, and two holes mortised out in each step for balusters, and at 5 in. apart on landings. The curtail step bo be 16 in. X 7 in., with a scroll end, bedded 1 in. below floor level. The winders, quarter and half-space landings to be 7 in. thick, cut and pinned in cement 9 in. into walls, the landings being joggled together in cement (or jointed together with 2 in. x J in. bronze, gun-metal or copper tongues let in grooves in the stones in cement.) The thresholds to door openings on the landings, to be 2J in. (or 3 in.) thick in rubbed Portland stone, and back- jointed. If the half-space landings cover a large area, they may be treated in the same way as mentioned in the notes to clause No. 64. Also see the other notes to clause No. 64, which equally apply here. Then describe the handrail and balusters similar to clause No. 64. u \ -'\ 1 1 l__ 1 1 -j-l 2 JL Pi 120 MASON. (76) If this class of staircase have a stone balustrade at the outer edge, supported on walls, arches or columns, then describe the balustrade as clause No. 104. See clause No. 64 for stair eyes. Halls, landings and passages to stairs. Stone gallery. Circular stairs. Terrace and outside garden steps. Front door entrance steps, moulded nosings. (76) See clause No. 42, and notes to clause No. 64. (77)_See clause No. 66. (78) See clauses Nos. 68 to 70. (79) See clause No. 73. (80) The three steps to front entrance door to be out of 16 in. x 7 in., 16 in. x 7 in. and 28 in. X 7 in. solid rubbed Portland stone, weathered J in. 011 top, worked circular on front face, with moulded nosing on edge, and set in cement on concrete foundations. A flight of steps to an entrance door may either be solid or formed with treads and risers ; the description would be similar to clauses Nos. 64 or 71, and state if the nosings are to be moulded.. The arch carrying the steps may also be de- scribed thus : Turn arch 9 in. deep in cement over area to receive front entrance steps, and build up solid. Describe the stone or cement balustrade as clause No. 104, or Plasterer, clause No. 70, re- spectively ; or railings, as Smith, clause No. 46. Stone tablets. (81) See Bricklayer, clause No. 98 ; these may also be in York stone. The following clauses, Xos. 82 to 103a may be in Portland stone if desired, the descriptions being similar to York stone, but in every case the stone would be rubbed, except in the case of clause No. 82, when it might be sawn. Corbels to walls, plates and bays. Covering to dry areas. Kerbs to pipe channels. Area paving. Paving to passages and rooms. Paving to terraces and colonnades, Street paving. (82) See clause No. 32. (83) See clause No. 34. (84) See clause No. 36. (85) See clause No. 41. (86) See clauses Nos. 42 and 43. (87) See clause No. 44. (88) See clause No. 45. (104) Belay old paving. Thresholds. Sills. Coping. Area kerbs. Hearths and kerbs. Chimney-piecas. Channel stones, Scullery sinks. Bases to door frames. Gully stones. Balcony. Lock and hinge stones. Gate piers. Ashlar. Repairs to stone steps. MASON. I 2 1 (89) See clause No. 46. (90) See clause No. 47. (91) See clause No. 48. (92) See clause No. 49 ; and Bricklayer, notes to- and clause No. 98. (93) See clause No. 50. (94) See clauses Nos. 51 and 52, with notes for the various kinds. (95) See clause No. 53, with notes for various kinds. (96) See clause No. 54. (97) See clause No. 55, with notes for various kinds. In Portland stone, sinks are made 6 in., 7 in, and 8 in. thick, with 3J in., 4 in. and 5 in. sinkings. (98) See clause No. 56. (99) See clause No. 57. (100) See clause No. 58. (101) See clause No. 59. (102) See clause No. 60. (103) Portland stone ashlar and dressings would be described similar to Bath stone, but rubbed (not dragged), see clauses Nos. 104 to 107, and notes to clause No. 1. (103a) See clause No. 62. BATH STONE. (Clauses Nos. 104 to 107.) See clause No. 26, which may perhaps be inserted here. Stone buildings may be built or faced in stone, worked either as "Ashlar" or "Bubble work." " Ashlar " work is formed with stones worked square and true, and may be built either as " Coursed Ashlar," " Kandom Ashlar," or " Ham- mer-dressed Ashlar." Soft and moderately soft and hard stones, such as Bath and Portland, are suitable for this class of work. 122 MASON. (104) In " Coursed Ashlar " the stones are all the same height, in regular courses. This is the best form of ashlar work. .*4A r jt In " Eandom Ashlar " the stones are all sizes and heights, in irregular courses. This is an inferior form of ashlar. In " Hammer-dressed Ashlar " the beds and joints of the stones are only roughly dressed. It is the roughest form of ashlar, and takes a place between " ashlar proper " and rubble work. Eubble work is formed with stones rough on face, with the joints and beds either roughly jointed or else unjointed. In coursed rubble work, such as " Eegular Coursed Eubble," " Irregular Coursed Eubble " and "Square Uncoursed Eubble," the stones are rough on face and roughly jointed. In random rubble, such as " Coursed Eandom Eubble " and "Uncoursed Eandom Eubble," the stones are rough on face and unjointed. Eubble walling is usually built with the harder class of stones, such as Kentish rag and similar stone. J_~ "\ "\, h In " Regular Coursed Eubble " the stones are rough on face, roughly squared, and in irregular lengths and heights, but each course is one level height from 4 in. to 8 in. deep. It may also be laid in 1J in. to 3 in. courses, but when in these sizes generally two or three such courses range together, with a deeper course above and below. In "Irregular Coursed Rubble" the stones are rough on face, roughly squared, and built in courses 10 in. to 14 in. high, each course consisting of irregular sized stones, either two or three stones deep. MASON. 12 In " Squared Uncoursed Bubble " the stones are rough on face, roughly squared, and built without courses. In " Coursed Bandom Bubble " the stones are irregular in shape and rough on face, but built in rough courses 12 in. to 14 in. high. This class of walling is usually built in very hard stones. In " Uncoursed Bandom Bubble " the stones are irregular in shape, rough on face, and not built in courses, This is the weakest form of all rubble walling, and is usually built in very hard stones. Coursed and uncoursed rubble walls should be one-third thicker than brick walls, but in random rubble walls they should be at least one-half greater. Stones which are too hard to square up can only be built in " Coursed Bandom Bubble " or " Bandom Bubble." ASHLAR-FACED BUILDING IN BATH STONE. Ashlar work built solid is very expensive, and therefore buildings are often faced with ashlar dressed stone, and backed up with brickwork or rubble stone. Ashlar-faced Bath stone building. (Glauses Nos> 104 and 105.) (104) The Bath stone to be from the Corsham Down Quarry, finished with a finely dragged face. The stonework to be laid with joints ^ in. (to J- in.) thick, and bedded } in. from face in lime (or stone dust) putty, neatly pointed up. (See clause No. 2 for various joints. Cement should never come near the external face of Bath stone, as i\ stains the work. 124 MASOX. (104) Case the external walls of build- ing in coursed (or random) Bath stone ashlar 6 in. (to 4 in.) thick, in courses 12 in. (4 in. to 14 in.) high, built in lime mortar, with a bonder stone about 2 ft. superficial area to every superficial yard, going right through to the inner face of the walls. Bond stones may be 3 ft. to 5 ft. apart in each course. State if the ashlar is to be in rusticated courses, either channelled, chamfered or moulded ; see Plasterer, clause No. 70. Quoins. The quoin stones to be laid showing alternately on face 9 in. and 15 in. (or 12 in. and 18 in.) long, and worked out of stones 9 in. (or 12 in.) thick, with chamfered (or moulded) edges (or plain raised blocks). Plinth. lfi=rl| The plinth to be in stones 15 in. deep, 9 in. (or 7 in.) thick, in lengths of not less than 5 ft., projecting 3 in. from main face of walls, and moulded (or twice splayed) on top edge, with bonder stones every 7 ft. apart, going right through to the inner face of the walls. It is better to let the plinth be in stones solid throughout the thickness of the wall along its length, instead of only occasionally putting bonder stones. string course. First floor string course to be 7 in. deep, with a 6 in. moulded, weathered and throated projection, in lengths of not less than 5 ft., and going right through to inner face of walls. The necking course to be 3 in. deep, 9 in. wide, with a 3 in. moulded and weathered projection. (104) MASON. 125 Frieze, $ be similar to the ashlar work, 6 in. (or 4 in.) thick, in stones 21 in. high, and jointed up to the brick- work at the back with neat cement. State if there be any carving, and allow for the stones to be the extra thickness of the projection of the carving. State if there be an incised inscription in the frieze, giving the size of the letters and the sinking. Cornice, To be formed up in two thicknesses of stone, in lengths of not less than 5 ft., and cramped at joints with galvanised iron cramps 12 in. long, the lower bed being 10 in. deep, 5 in. moulded projection, and bedded right through the thickness of the walls. The upper bed to be 10 in. deep, with a 15 in. weathered, moulded, sunk and throated projection, and bedded 15 in. on walls. State if there be a dentil course, or any carving to mouldings. When a cornice has a considerable projection, both beds may go through the thickness of the walls, and in addition holding-down irons 4 ft. long, 3 in, wide X J in. metal may be placed every 5 ft. apart, with the lower ends turned into walls 6 in., and the upper ends turned down into the cornice an additional 2 in. or 3 in. See Smith, clause- No. 20. State if a raglet is necessary in the cornice, or base to balustrade, for turning in the lead flashing of gutter. Balustrade Give depth, width and length of stones to moulded bases, with iron cramps similar to cornice. State width, thickness and length of stones to once (or twice) weathered, moulded and twice throated capping, with copper cramps 8 in. long filled up in sulphur (cement or stone-dust mortar). Give height and thickness of the sunk pedestals (dies), and state that the half balusters are to be worked on solid. Give height, size and distance apart of turned moulded balusters (or moulded square balusters), and state every seventh baluster is to be dowelled to base and capping with 1 in. slate square dowels. 126 MASON. (104) Window and door dressings, mullions and stools. Give size of the moulded jambs and heads (lintels), as window A on sketch, page 124, every fourth stone being a bonder to the inner face of walls and rebated out to receive frames. If with pilasters on the jambs, frieze and pediment mouldings, give sizes of each. or, Give size of the projecting part moulded, and part splayed plain jambs ; voussoirs to arches ; key stones and imposts, as window B .on sketch, page 124, every fourth stone being a bonder to the inner face of walls and rebated out to receive frames. or, The windows and doors may be as C on sketch, page 124, in rusticated work, either chamfered, channelled or moulded, with similar voussoirs ; and state every fourth stone is to be a bonder to inner face of wall and rebated, out to receive frames. Give size of mullions (see I) on sketch, p. 124), and 1 state if moulded or otherwise, and if rebated to receive frames. Describe the weathered, throated, grooved and moulded sills, returned and mitred ends, with stools for mullions and jambs worked on. When the stone mullions and jambs show fair on the inner face of the wall, and are glazed with lead lights either with or without iron frames, state they are grooved or rebated out to receive the glazing or iron frames. Chimney stacks. Describe the ashlar, the base, necking, cornice, and blocking course. State the blocking course is to be cramped together with copper cramps or slate dowels. The "withes" between the flues should not be less than 6 in. thick when in stonework. Generally, give the correct sizes of all projections,, together with the- width and height of the stones. (106) MASON, Entrance loggia. (105) Describe the columns, bases, caps, pilasters, entablature, balustradiug, string course, plinth course,, cornice and blocking, with all necessary dowels and cramps, as in clause No. 104. The diminished shafts; to columns and pilasters to be worked in (say) three stones each, with the apophyges worked on the shafts. (The apophyges are the small curves joining the narrow fillets between the base and the necking, and unless they be worked on the shaft the effect is unsatisfactory ; but of course it is more expensive to do so, as the shaft has to be sunk the amount of the projection, of the fillets.) The beds of columns are sometimes bedded upon 4 Ib. lead seating^ kept | in. in from the face, or they may be bedded on pine, pitch pine or oak seatings in. thick, in a similar way. See Plumber, clause No. 20, for lead seatings. Bath stone columns are generally bedded only in stone- dust mortar. When walls are built throughout their thickness in ashlar work instead of only facing with ashlar, the description would remain the same as clauses Nos. 104 and 105, except that no mention would be made of bonder stones, as the whole of the stonework would be bonded together as walling. Ashlar facing to an old building. (106) Sometimes an existing building is cased in with ashlar work. In this case the stability of the building does not depend upon the ashlar work ; it may therefore be thinner than ordinary ashlar facing, say 3 in. to 4 in. thick, and bonded into the walls every now and then, say another 4 in. or 5 in. The ashlar may also be tied into the wall with cramps. To put a stone cornice, it would be necessary to take down the old parapet, so that the cornice might be fairly bedded on the walls, and then the parapet rebuilt. The reveals to doors and windows would require cutting away to allow for the ashlar facing ; see sketch. See Bricklayer, clause No. 108, for other items connected with casing in existing buildings with ashlar. 128 MASON. (107) Brick building (107) State the class of stone, and if " dragged " or " Cubbed/' see notes to clause No. 1. Give the size of the angle quoins, as 12 in. X 6 in. or 18 in. X 9 in. Describe the plinth, the string course, neck- ing, cornice and coping, somewhat as in clauss No. 104. The plinth in this case would be perhaps only 6 in. to 9 in. deep, bedded 4J- in. in the walls, with a 2J in. to 3 in. projection. There would be no bonder stones except perhaps to the plinth and strings. Window and door dressings and mullions. The windows and doors to be dressed with plain reveal and jamb stones, each stone 12 in. high, 6 in. thick, by 6 in. and 10 in. wide alternately, every fourth stone being a bonder to the inner face of the wall, and rebated out to receive the frames. The mullions to be 9 in. wide, 6 in. thick. Stone reveals to windows, and jambs to doors are seldom less than 6 in. thick. lintels. The lintels to be 12 in. deep, 6 in. thick. State if reveals, jambs and lintels are stop chamfered or stop moulded. sills. The sills to be 12 in. x 4 in. sunk, weathered, grooved, moulded and throated, with returned and moulded ends, and stools worked on solid to receive the reveals and mullions. Arches are often thrown over the stone lintels to take the weight of the work above. To prevent stone lintels cracking, it is a good plan to form them with a flush key stone, and when rubbed down it will scarcely be noticeable. Quoins, window and door dressings, strings, plinths and cornices, should be worked to the exact depth of the courses of brickwork, so that they may bond in. Chimney stacks. Describe the quoins, the mouldings and other dress- ings to the chimney stacks, as in clause No. 104. (109) MASON. 129 Kentish rag rubble U a bulding (1Q8) See clause No. 28. Face tlie external walls with "rough (or close) picked " Kentish rag rubble stone ashlar 6 in. (to 8 in.) thick in lime mortar, with one bonder stone going right through to the inner face of the walls to every superficial yard. Lay the stones in "Regular Coursed Rubble," in courses 7 in., 8 in. 'and 9 in. deep (or in " Irregular Coursed .Rubble " or " Squared Uncoursed Rubble ") and point up in blue ash mortar. The arrises at the angles to be drafted 1 in. wide. The arches to be formed with voussoirs 9 in. (to 12 in.) deep. Describe the Bath or other stone dressings as clause No. 107. See notes preceding clause No. 104 for the various classes of walling. If the quoins and angles are dressed in Bath or similar stone, the angles of the Kentish rag will not require drafting. If the walls be built in solid Kentish rag stone throughout, the inner lining may be in Hassock that is an inferior class of Kentish rag. There are many other similar kinds of stones, which would be described in a similar way to Kentish rag faced walls. Stone which is too hard to square up may be built either as ashlar facing with a brick backing, or as solid walling ; but it can only be built as " Random Rubble," or " Coursed Random Rubble," see notes preceding clause No. 104 relating to this. The dressings and quoins may in this case be in brick or worked stone. (109) May be built in Kentish rag (or similar Qr in mortar in . Fence or boundary le walling. Uncoursed Random Rubble, Coursed Random Rubble, Squared Uncoursed Rubble, Irregular Coursed Rubble, or Regular Coursed Rubble. See notes preceding clause No. 104, relating to rubble walling. If the walling surround a building, it should be built in mortar, and pointed up either in blue or ordinary mortar (or cement), with the coping roughly worked (or tooled) and set in cement. If round a field it may be built dry When the fence walls are built dry, the coping is often built in cement or mortar. 1 3 o MASON. (109) Eubble fence walling should be at least 18 in. to 20 in. thick, or one-third to one-half thicker than that required for brick walling. Stone used in fence walling which is too hard to square up, can only be built either as " uncoursed random rubble " or " coursed random rubble," see notes preceding clause No. 104 relat- ing to this. It should diminish from the base to the top, and be finished with a similar rough stone coping. If the wall be built in mortar, the coping should be in cement; but the walling may be pointed up in mortar or cement, or else tuck pointed in cement. Here is a description : Build the fence walls around the building in " un- coursed random rubble " (or " coursed random rubble ") Malvern Hill stone (a very hard stone, it can only be laid as random rubble) 6 ft. high above the ground and 2 ft. below, diminishing from 2 ft. thick at the base to 16 in. at the top, set in mortar, and finished off with a similar rough stone coping laid and weathered off in cement. Bake out the joints, fill up in cement, and tuck point in cement. Put Bath stone (or other stone or blue brick) angle quoins, 18 in. and 9 in. wide alternately, with similar rebated jamb stones to gate opening, and a 4 in. tooled (or rubbed) hard York threshold. Describe the gate as clause No. 98 in Bricklayer ; and the lock and hinge stones as in clause No. 59. For other boundary walling see Bricklayer, clauses No. 98, 99, and 105 to 107. GRANITE. (Clauses No. 110 to 116.) See clause No. 30. Granite may be roughly axed, finely axed, sparrow picked, or polished on face. State which, and give the class, such as red or grey granite, and where obtained. Generally. (HO) The granite is to be specially selected, so that no stone shall show black or foreign spots, or other blemishes. (112) MASON. Granite faced building. (Clauses (111) Case the external walls of building on ground floor from plinth to string course, in finely axed red' Nos/liTtolia.) (or grey) Aberdeen granite coursed ashlar 9 in. thick, in courses 12 in. (to 18 in.) high, built, n cement mortar, and neatly pointed up, with a bonder stone -. about 2 ft. superficial area to every square yard, going right through to, the inner face of the walls. Plinth. The plinth to be in stones 15 in. high, 12 in. thick, in lengths of not less than 5 ft. projecting out 4 in. from main face of walls and moulded on top edge, with bonder stones every 7 ft. apart going through to the inner face of walls. The plinth may be solid throughout, see notes to clause No. 104. Cornice or string course. The string course (or cornice) to be 10 in. deep, with a 12 in. moulded, weathered, sunk and throated projec- tion, in lengths cf not less than 5 ft., and bedding right through to the inner face of walls. Arches. Form the arches to door and windows with voussoirs ; the door jambs and arches being moulded 6 in. girth. Every fourth scone in the reveals of windows and jambs of doors to be a bonder, going right through to the inner face of the walls, rebated out to receive the frames. Window sills. The window sills to be 14 in. x 6 in., sunk, weathered, moulded, grooved and throated, with returned and mitred ends, and stools worked on solid to receive reveals. Columns to entrance loggia. (112) The columns, pilasters, caps and bases to entrance loggia to be in polished red (or grey) Aberdeen granite, with the caps and bases moulded, the shafts being in one (two or more) stones, bedded on 4 Ib. lead seating, and tapering up from one-third the height, with the apophyges worked on and joints neatly pointed up. (See Plumber, clause No. 20, for lead seating.) (See clause No. 105 as to the apophyges and bedding of columns.) K 2 132 MASON. (113) Pilasters to shop fronts are often faced up in polished granite, instead of being solid. Entrance steps. (113) The entrance door steps to be in solid 15 in. X 6 in. Aberdeen granite, each in one 9 ft. length, weathered J in., finely axed on top, front face and ends ; back-jointed and set in cement, and mortise holes cut for balustrade. Describe the balustrade as clause No. 46 in Smith. Granite paving. (114) See clause No. 14 under Eoad-making. Granite pitching. (H5)_s e e clauses Nos, 30 and 31 under Eoad- making ; and Pavior, clauses Nos, 10 and 11. Spurs to gate. (116) See Carpenter, clause No. 266. Kentish Eag spurs are often used in place of granite, and are very suitable. MARBLE. (Clauses Nos. 117 to 128.) In all cases state the class of marble, such as .Sienna, Eouge Eoyal, Sicilian, Dove, Statuary or Black. See clause No. 29. Marble 1 in. thick weighs about 14*33 Ibs. per ft. super. Portland cement will stain delicate white marble if used in the setting. Stone dust and lime may be used outside, and plaster of Paris inside. The polishing on marble does not stand the weather well in this country. Marble Mosaic (117) See Pavior, clauses Nos. 2 and 3 ; and notes to vestibule. Marble paving to halls and passages. (118) Pave the halls and passages on ground floor with 1 in. (or f in.) alternate Sicilian and black marble tiles, sawn and jointed in 12 in. squares and half squares, with black and Sicilian marble border lines 6 in. and 4 in. wide, and lay in stone dust and lime mortar i or cement) on a bed of 6 in. Portland cement concrete, floated up with a f in. cement and sand face. The Sicilian marble tiles to be sanded, and the black marble tiles to be sanded and gritted and cleaned off. (122) MASON. 133 Marble tiles are made in 6 in. to 18 in. squares. Marble paving may be laid in large slabs 1 in., 1 in., 1 in. to 2 in. thick, either on concrete or on sleeper walls. See Bricklayer, clause No. 28, for sleeper walls. Marble wall lining. (119) Line walls of hall with 1 in. sawn, jointed and polished Devonshire (or other) marble slabs, set in plaster of Paris, and cramped to walls with copper cramps, the dado and frieze being in different coloured marbles. Describe the skirting, such as 12 in. X 1 J- in. moulded, twice sunk and polished ; the dado rail as 4 in. x 3 in. moulded and polished ; the frieze rail as 4 in. X 3 in. moulded and polished ; and the cornice as 8 in. X 6 in., moulded, sunk and polished. Marble wall linings may be | in., 1 in., 1 in., 1J in., If in., 2 in., 2J in., 3 in., 4 in., 5 in. and 6 in. thick. The walls must be rendered over in cement or plaster to form a backing. Marble columns. (120) Give the diameter, state if the shafts are in one or more stones, with the apophyges worked on. Mention the polishing, and any carving or other labours, and the class of marble. (See clause No. 105 as to the apophyges.) Marble staircase, (121) State the class of marble, such as Sicilian or vein, and state it is to be polished. The description of the steps and other parts would be somewhat similar to clauses Nos. 75 to 77. For marble-lined steps see clause No. 128. Marble hearths. (122) The front and back hearths to the three re- ception rooms to be 1J in. (1J- in., 1 in. or f in.) polished Sicilian marble, set in stone dust and lime (or cement), back-jointed, notched to chimney-pieces, and bedded on concrete floated up with a f in. face in Portland cement and sand. The front hearths to be 18 in. longer than the fireplace openings, and 18 in. in width. 134 MASON. (123) See notes to clause No. 51 ; and notes to clause No. 6 under Pavior. Frequently the back hearth is in polished black marble, with a front hearth of a different kind. For other kinds of hearths see notes to clause No. 51. Marble kerbs. (123) See Pavior, clause No. 6. Put 4J in. x 3 J in. rounded polished Sicilian marble kerbs to the hearths of the three reception rooms, copper dowelled together at joints and to chimney-piece, and set in stone dust and lime (or cement) with the under side kept 1 in. below flooring level. For other hearth kerbs, see clause No. 52 and notes. Boxed marble (124) Allow a p.c. sum for these, and state they chimney-pieces. are to ^ get ^ n p} aster O f p ar i s> with copper cramps pinned into walls, and the plastering made good round, and the boxings filled up solid in brickwork. Marble chimney-pieces may be described in detail, giving the sizes of the jambs, frieze and mantel-shelf, and stating the labours, mouldings, carving, and that the whole is to be blocked out and set together in plaster of Paris, and copper cramped to walls. The jambs and frieze are usually J in., 1 in. or 1| in. thick ; and the mantel-shelf 1 J in., 1 in., or 2 in. thick. Here are a few sketches showing their construction : The mouldings on the mantel-shelf should be thus , and not thus ^HS , as ornaments are more apt to slide off. The width of shelf may be from about 12 in. to 18 in. The kind of stove governs the distance of the jambs apart, and the height up of the frieze. For sizes of ordinary stoves, see Smith, clause No. 81. For other chimney-pieces, see clause No. 53 ; Smith, clause No. 74; Carpenter, clause No. 215 ; and Slater, clause No. 18. For marble slips to stoves, see Carpenter, clause No. 215. Filling the boxings up solid prevents any smoke discolouring the marble ; it is also a preventive against fire, and should be done in every case of boxed chimney-pieces. Clean old chimney-pieces. Lavatory top. (125) Pickle and clean old marble chimney pieces. (126) See Plumber, clause No. 36. 128) Coil case tops. Marble-lined steps. MASON. 135 (127) -See Smith, clause No. 106. (128) Cover existing steps to entrance with 1J- in (or H in.) polished sawn Sicilian (or other) marble treads and 1 in. similar risers, set in stone dust and lime. The landing to be finished in one slab n. (or 1J in.) thick. State if with moulded nosings. For tile-lined steps, see Pavior, notes to clause No. 3. 156 (1) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. IN parts, much of the joinery work is described in more detail than is customary, in order to -make the work the more clear. Always state if work is wrought, framed, moulded, or double quirk (staff) beaded, and if circular. A staff bead requires two labours to mould it, an ordinary bead only one. All glass panels where subject to jars should be bedded in wash- leather as well as in putty. Scaffolding. (l) The scaffolding to be erected in accordance with the architect's instructions, and removed when desired. This clause should more properly come under Excavator, as the work is done by scaffolders, and not by skilled mechanics ; see notes preceding clause No. 1 in Excavator. Timber generally. (2) All timber to be the best of its kind, perfectly dry, thoroughly well seasoned, sawn die square, free from sap, shakes, cracks, waney edges, loose and dead knots, or knots over 1J- in. diameter, and any other defect. Cut timber into scantling lengths immediately after signing the contract. Timber may be seasoned either by stacking in the open air under cover, or by immersing in water ; the former method being preferable. The safe load to put on timber pillars and story posts should not exceed one-fifth the breaking weight for dead loads, or one-tenth for live loads. Timber for joinery work is sometimes required to be dried in a drying chamber, then framed and fitted together and dried again ; and then squared, shot and glued up. Guarantee as to (3) The timber for joiner's work to be obtained quality. from an approved London (or other port) merchant, who will give a guarantee as to its having been in stock four years, and that it will not shrink when fixed. The contractor is to obtain this guarantee in such form as the architect shall require, but this guarantee will not relieve the contractor of his liability in any way for the quality of the material. The timber for the joinery must be specially selected, and free from knots over in. diameter. Shrinkage of (4) If the joints of any joiners' work should give joinery, Qr O p en j n fo e least before the payment of the final balance, such defective joinery is to be taken down, (6) CARPENTEE, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 137 refitted and redecorated ; or new joinery put in place, as the case may be, and any work disturbed around must be made good at the contractor's expense. Timber may be divided into two classes, " soft " and " hard." Soft woods include firs and pines. Hard woods include oak, elm, teak and other hard woods. " Fir " (whether red or yellow, which is the same), is generally under- stood to be timber from the Baltic ports. Pine is understood as timber of a somewhat similar nature, obtained both from the Baltic ports and North America. Spruce (or white fir) is understood as timber obtained either from Norway or America. A log is the tree itself roughly shorn of its branches. Balk timber, is a roughly squared log. "Planks" are timbers 11 in. wide by 2 in. to 6 in. thick, and up to about 21 ft. long; but they are seldom obtained more than 4 in. thick. " Deals " are timbers 9 in. wide by 2 in. to 4 in. thick, and up to about 21 ft. long. " Battens " are timbers 7 in. wide by 2 in. to 4 in. thick, and up to about 21 ft. long. The market sizes of fir timbers are 11 in. x 4 in., 11 in. x 3 in., 11 in. x2 in., 9 in. x4 in., 9 in. x 3 in., 9 in. x2J in., 9 in. x 2 in., 7 in. X 4 in., 7 in. x 3 in., 7 in. X 2 J in., 7 in. X 2 in., and their halves in depth by the same widths. If larger scantlings be required, they must be cut specially out of balk timber. American spruce (white fir), is imported in 1-2 in. X 4 in. and 12 in. X 3 in. sizes, but it is an inferior timber to that from the Baltic. Timber generally will stand either a dry or thoroughly wet place ; but soon perishes if subject to both alternately. Creosoting timber under this latter condition will about double its life, see Clause No. 26. Dry rot occurs in timbers through want of ventilation, especially in warm moist places. Varnished or (5) Woodwork to receive enamel paint is to be sname ed work. fi n i s } iec [ w ith a glass-papered surface, so that the plane marks do not show. That to receive varnish to be finished straight from the tool. This clause may, perhaps, come under Painter. See clause No. 1 in Painter. Enamelled woodwork is paint work very carefully executed and var- nished over ; and unless the woodwork be very finely glass-papered, every small irregularity will show. It is specially noticeable when paint work is finished a white enamel. Sizes of wrought (6) Unwrought timbers when fixed, to hold the M1 dimension specified. In timber wrought both sides, a bare J in. less than the specified thickness will be allowed; thus, stuff specified as 1 in. thick is to hold full J in. 138 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (7) Exposed faces. In timber wrought only one side, f in. less than the specified thickness will be allowed ; thus, stuff specified as 1 in. thick is to hold f G in. All exposed faces to be wrought, except where otherwise described. Meaning of word " framed." Joints and angles. Stacking joinery. (7) The word " framed " as applied to woodwork, is to be understood as including all the best known methods of joining woodwork together, by mortise, tenon, dovetail, or other method. In jointing elliptical, segmental or circular work together, oak keys, wedges, pins or hand rail screws are to be included in addition. All joints and angles of joinery to be glued and cross tongued with hard wood tongues. Joinery work over 9 in. wide to be panelled. (8) All framing and panelling to be roughly framed together, and stacked for three months before glueing up. Bed window frames. (9) All window frames to be bedded on the stone, brick or terra-cotta sills in white lead < in. thick. The timber sills to project 3 in. longer each way beyond the frames, and painted three oils on the under side. This clause may come immediately before the description of windows ; see clause No. 140. Build in frames. Secure door frames. Secure window frames. (10) Door and window frames to be built in as the work proceeds. Door frames to be secured every 2 ft. apart with 1J in. Xf\ in. wrought-iron ties 18 in. long, tarred and sanded (or galvanised), turned up and screwed to the frames at one end, and turned down 3 in. into the brick or stone work at the other end. Frames to solid casements and to hung sashes when built in reveals, to be secured every 2 ft. apart with 1^ in. x -jJg in. hoop iron 2 ft. long, tarred and sanded (or galvanised), turned up and spiked to the frames at one end, and turned down 3 in. into the brick or stone work at the other end. But where built in a chase these ties are not to be supplied. Thus, in glazed brickwork, the wood linings to windows not being necessarily provided, the iron ties assist in keeping the frames in place when built in reveals. See Bricklayer, notes to clause No. 89, for glazed brick reveals. (15) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 139 Horns. The liorns to door and casement frames to be left on 3 in. (to 6 in.) wider each way. Door The paragraphs in this clause may come immediately before the de- scription of windows and doors respectively ; see clauses Nos. 140 and 237. Floors. (11) If the joints of the floor boards open ^ in. before the payment of final balance, the flooring is to be taken up and relaid at the contractor's expense. Protect floors. All timber floors, whether wood block or otherwise, to be protected during 'the work with sawdust 1J in. thick, and the floors left clean from stain. The paragraphs in this clause may come immediately before the descriptions of flooring ; see clause No. 58. Skirtings. (12) All skirtings to be rebated to floors. This clause may come immediately before the description of skirt- ings ; see clause No. 192. It is only in first-class work that skirtings are rebated to the floors. Distances of main (13) No joists, rafters or quarters to be more than timbers apart. 13 ^ from centre to ^^ They are often placed 12 in. apart, but of course 12 in. or 13 in. centres makes stronger work. Fir. (14) Constructional timbers to be of sound, hearty crown yellow (red) Memel, Dantzic, Riga or Swedish fir. Memel and Dantzic fir comes from Prussia, and Riga fir from Russia. They are all suitable timbers for constructional work, though now very scarce in the market, but are generally used in church roofing. Swedish red timber is now mostly used for constructional timbers in ordinary building work. Pitch pine is much used for heavy timbers. American, Swedish or Scotch fir is not to be used. The word Swedish in this latter paragraph would be omitted if Swedish timber be permissible. In these days much of the fir used does come from Sweden and Norway, but it is not equal to that from Russian or Prussian ports. Deal for exterior (15) Deals for external joiners' work and backings to framings to be best yellow (red) Christiania, Archangel, Onega or St. Petersburg. Archangel red deal is now much used in all joinery work. There is very little Christiania in the market. 140 CAEPENTEK, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (16) Deal for internal Deals for internal joinery to be best white Christiania joinery. Qr W ^ Q Archanel. The white deal makes cleaner work, but the red is more lasting. Archangel white is now mostly used, there being very little Christiania white in the market. St. Petersburg, Onega and Archangel deal come from Eussia, and are all most suitable for joinery ; but perhaps Onega deals are the best. Christiania deal comes from Norway, and is also suitable for all joinery, but is now very scarce in the market. The white Christiania should only be used for internal work, as also the white Archangel. Swedish deal is not used in the best work ; but the Swedish, Gene and Stockholm deal, both yellow and white, are much used for floors. White deal should only be used where there is no question of dampness. First class joinery is often done entirely in American pine. Deals for flooring. (16) Deal for floors to be yellow Archangel (or Gefle), cut down in narrow widths upon importation. or, in poor class work, Deal floors to be " Swedish" imported " white." Yellow deal is always superior to white v Best white Christiania or Archangel deal is sometimes used in upper floors, as it makes very clean work. Spruce. (17) The spruce (white fir) to be from Norway or America, Spruce is suitable for dressers, table tops and shelves. It is also used for constructional timber in poor class work. * e - (18) The pine to be first quality dry Montmorency brand, or The pine is to be first quality yellow (white) North American pine. Pine is very free from knots, and can be obtained in greater widths than deal. It is very suitable for wide panels, makes clean mouldings and does not shrink. White and yellow pine is exactly the same wood. Quebec and Oregon pine is mostly used. Canadian red pine is not so good as the North American pine. Bass wood (white American wood) is also very suitable for panels and mouldings. It has a greenish tint, and is generally used for the casings to the wiring for electric light. Oak timbers. (19) The oak in sills, joists, posts and other construc- tional work to be English, Suffolk or Monmouthshire growth. (24) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 141 English oak in large timbers is suitable for any heavy work, but not for joinery as it is liable to split. Oak framings and The oak for flooring, panelling and joinery work to flooring. j^ Austrian Trieste (or Hungarian Fiume) (or Eussian Riga) (or Dantzic Crown Memel), and prepared for French polishing. Riga oak is very scarce. American oak is rather poor, but used in flooring. Oak corrodes ironwork. Wainscot oak is obtained from Riga or Memel, and owing to its beautiful figure is most suitable for joinery work ; but it is now somewhat scarce in the market, the Austrian Trieste and Hungarian Fiume oak having almost entirely taken its place. Teak for joinery. (20) The teak to be from Moulmein (or Joliore), and prepared for French polishing. Teak comes from India, and is used both for constructional work and joinery. It does not corrode iron. Teak from Moulmein is most suitable for joinery, and from Johore for constructional work. Mahogany. (21) The mahogany to be Honduras (or Spanish), of selected figure, and prepared for French polishing. Honduras mahogany conies from Central America, and is suitable for any joinery work ; it is not liable to shrink, but does not stand the weather well. 4 Spanish mahogany comes from the West Indies, and, owing to its beautiful figure, is chiefly used for panelling and veneers. Walnut. (22) The walnut to be American black Virginia. Walnut wood comes from America, and, owing to its beautiful figure, is used chiefly in joinery and veneers. Pitch pine for (23) The pitch pine to be American, of selected figure, clean, free from knots or coarse grain, secretly nailed, and prepared for polishing. Pitch pine is used mostly for piles, flooring and panelling ; it is very liable to shrink, but has a fine figure. It is also now much used in the constructional timbers of a building, it being imported in the same sizes as fir, which see in the notes to clause No. 4. Pitch pine is not so suitable to take a tensional as a compressive stress. In cheaper work, oak, mahogany, walnut and pitch pine are var- nished instead of polished. (24) The elm to be English. Elm is suitable for piles, but seldom used in joinery. 142 CAEPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (25) Greenheart. (25) The greenheart to be from British Guiana. Greenheart is the strongest timber used, and most suitable for piles ; it stands salt water -well. Creosoting. (26) The Baltic fir timber when described to be creosoted, to be impregnated with 6 Ib. (to 8 Ib.) of creosote oil per cubic foot of timber. Creosoting preserves the life of timber, and when timber is subject to alternate wet and dry situations it about doubles its life. Soft woods will take as much as 10 Ib. of creosote per cub. ft., and hard woods not much more than 3 Ib. per cub. ft. One gallon of creosote weighs 10 Ib. Piles, and wood paving to roads are often creosoted for preservation. Paint and tar will preserve timber, providing it be dry when the paint or tar is applied. Timber such as ends of posts buried in the ground, may be charred ; and in fact timber or joinery in any position subject to damp may be charred over. Glue. ,(27) The glue for outside work to be marine inside work Russian. Ironmongery. (28) The ironmongery to be of the best finish and strongest description, and fixed with screws. Door furniture and brass work to be fixed with brass (or copper) screws ; and nickel furniture with nickel screws. The brass (or nickel) plates to window fur- niture to be let in flush with the woodwork. Iron furniture to doors and windows, except hinges, to be japanned, unless otherwise described. Door furniture to consist of two roses, two drop escutcheons, two large and two small finger plates. Brass roses to be 2 in. diameter. Porcelain roses to be 2 J in. diameter. Iron butts to be of wrought iron. Roses to doors may be elliptical shape, about 2 in. X 1 J in. Spherical roses are frequently only 1-J in. diameter. Cast-iron butts are used in inferior work. It is almost better to put a separate p.c. amount for the ironmongery to each separate door, window or other fitment requiring ironmongery ; the fittings can then be selected, and there will be no question of the contractor putting inferior fittings, which is often the case when no amount is specified. Case np work. (29) See clause No. 36 under Preliminary Items. Fixings and (30) Supply all necessary backings, grounds, fillets, fi * S moulds, templates, beads, pallets,- wood bricks, slips, furrings,. finishings and fixings. Pallets and . wood bricks to be every 2 ft. apart. (38) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 143 Wood bricks are liable to shrink and get loose ; wood pallets are preferable. In place of wood bricks, joinery may be fixed to concrete bricks (blocks) composed of 4 to 6 parts coarse breeze from gas-works (avoiding Canel coke) to 1 part Portland cement. Concrete lintels may be made in the same way, in the proportions of 4 to 7 parts breeze to 1 cement. See clause No. 43 for wood lintels. Attend upon other trades. Centering. Springers. (31) See clause No. 25 under Preliminary Items. (32) Supply, fix, ease and afterwards remove the centering and turning pieces to arches, vaults, trimmers and groining. (33) Put 4 in. x 2 in. deal feather-edge springers to hearth trimmers. This clause may come under floors, preceding clause No. 46. staging to (34) Erect, ease and afterwards remove staging o^and^aS. and Pinking to concrete floors, roofs and walls. The outside planking to concrete walls to be planed on the one side. See Excavator, clauses Nos. 40 and 47 ; and Bricklayer, clause No. 110. Bore joists for ventilation. (35) Certain joists to the upper floors to be bored f OT ^ c i rcu i a ti on of air, in such positions as the architect shall direct. This clause may come under floors, preceding clause No. 46. Also see notes to clause No. 53 for ventilation to upper floors. Cutting joists for pipes. (36) See clause No. 1 under Gasfitter. This clause may come under floors, preceding clause No. 46. Ends of timbers. Shoes. (37) The ends of all joists and timbers to be tarred where buried in brick or stone work. (38) All solid door frames to be shod with cast- iron moulded shoes f in. (or ^ in.) metal, 4 in. deep on face, screwed to frames, and with the tenons mortised into thresholds. 144 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (39) or, All solid door frames to be dowelled to stone thresholds, with 1 in. square solid copper (slate or iron) dowels 4 in. long. See Mason, clause No. 19 ; and Smith, clause No. 64. Door frames are sometimes fixed with dowels on stone seatings, especially when the door is not carried down to the ground, as is often the case with school closets; see Mason, clause No. 56. ]> i.i - Bracketing. (39) Bracket out for cornices and girders. This clause modified may come under clause No. 9 in Plasterer. Pipes in ground. (40) All gas and water pipes buried in the ground to be laid in 1 in. rough deal tarred troughs, filled with liquid pitch (or asphalt). Also see Plumber, clause No. 23 ; and clause No. 5 in Gasfitter. Case in pipes. (41) All gas, and hot and cold water service pipes where exposed to draughts or in cold situations, to be bound round with hair felt and canvas, and where pipes pass through staircases or principal rooms, they are, in addition, to be cased in with 1 in. wrought pine hinged flaps, in rebated and beaded frames, with brass hinges and fastenings. See also clauses Nos. 23 and- 63 in Plumber ; and clause No. 1 in Gasfitter. Waste pipes would not necessarily require felting round or casing in. Old doors and sashes reused, (42) The old doors, windows, linings and finishings may be re-used if approved by the architect ; but should they not be of sufficient size to fill the new openings, then new joinery and glass must be provided. In any case, the ironmongery must be entirely new, to match the other new work. This clause applies when old joinery is allowed to be reused ; also see clause No. 52 under Preliminary Items. (45) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 145 Lintels. (43) Put fir lintels over all internal openings to doors, windows and similar openings, the full width of the internal parts of the walls, each lintel is to have a depth of 1 in. (or 1^ in.) for every foot width of span, and the ends to rest 9 in. on either side of openings ; but no lintels to be less than 3 in. deep. (They may have stone templates ; see Mason, clause No. 38.) Lintels should always have arches over them to take the weight above ; see Bricklayer, clause No. 39, unless they are to act as bressummers, when in that case they must be strong enough in themselves to carry the weight above. See notes to clause No. 30 for concrete lintels. Bressummer. (44) The bressummer over bay window opening to consist of (say) four timbers, each 11 in. x 3 in., placed J in. apart with wood slips, and bolted together with ^ in. (or in.) diameter wrought-iron bolts, heads, nuts and washers. The ends of bressummer to be cased in cast- iron shoes f in. metal, 10 in. long, and to rest 9 in. on walls, with 14 in. x 18 in. X 3 in. tooled York templates under, and a 14 in. x 3 in. tooled York cover stone above. Spike on to one side of bressummer, a 2 J in. x 2 in. rough deal fillet to receive the ends of joists. The safe load on timber bressummers should not exceed th the breaking weight. The J in. space between the timbers is for ventilation. Eolled iron joists have almost entirely taken the place of wood bressummers. The scantlings will, of course, vary in size, according to the span of opening. For iron flitch bressummers, see notes to and clause No. 124 ; and Smith, clause No. 18. (45) Form the cradling ov.er shop front, with JH 4J in. X 3 in. studs, heads, sills and braces, having a i in. (or in.) wrought- iron bolt, with nuts, heads and washers at each stud. Also see under clause No. 315 for cradling to shop front. The sizes of timber for cradling will vary according to the span ; the sketch will show where cradling to 'a shop front is required. Cradling may be required in other positions across any opening. 146 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (45a) Story posts. i =^= i --=-- ==, *> w\A (45 a) Story posts are used for supporting bres- summers to shop fronts, and in similar positions ; but cast-iron stanchions have taken their place in most cases. Timber story posts should be either square or circular in section, and not more than twenty dia- meters high. The safe load should not exceed -fa the breaking weight. Rectangular posts are a waste of material, as the strength of the whole is that of its weakest part. The sketch shows a scarf to resist compression. FLOOR TIMBERS, (Clauses ISTos. 46 to 57.) A crowd of people weigh from 841bs. to 110 or 120 Ibs. per super, ft. Horses weigh from 11 cwt. to 18 cwt. each. Hay weighs from 5 Ibs. to 8 Ibs. per cubic ft. Straw weighs from 3J Ibs. to 5J Ibs. per cubic ft. A truss of hay contains from 7 ft. to 11 cubic ft., and measures about 3 ft. X 21 in. X 26 in. A truss of straw contains about 11 cubic ft., and measures about 6 ft. 6 in. x 18 in. X 18 in. Coal weighs from 50 Ibs. to 58 Ibs. per cubic ft., and 1 ton of coal weighs 20 cwt. One cwt. of oats occupies 3 * 64 cubic ft. of space. One cwt. of barley occupies 2*38 cubic ft. of space. One cwt. of wheat occupies 2-20 cubic ft. of space. Offices and dwelling house floors should be constructed to carry a load of 1J cwt. to 1J cwt. per super, ft. Public buildings, lecture halls and schools should be constructed to carry a load of 1 cwt. to 2 cwt. per super, ft. Warehouses, factories and mills should be constructed to carry a load of 2 cwt. to 5 cwt. per super, ft., according to their respective require- ments. In addition to these several loads, the weight of the floor timbers must be added. As a crowd of men weigh from 84 to 120 Ibs. per super, ft., floors to lecture halls and public buildings are constructed to carry that load as a moving load, or from 1 to 2 cwt. per superficial ft. A moving load is generally taken as twice that of a stationary load ; hence the strength of any bridge or gangway crossing an opening should be based upon that calculation. (46) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 147 In exit passages it is sufficient to allow 1 ft. in width for every 50 persons accommodated; thus, in a hall holding 1000 persons, the exit passage should not be less than 10 ft. wide ; and if a slope be absolutely necessary in the passage, it should not exceed 2 in. fall in a foot length. The London County Council require that staircases and passages to buildings where the general public meet, shall be 3 ft. 6 in. wide when the building accommodates up to 200 persons ; when over 200' and up to 400 persons, then not less than 4 ft. 6 in. wide ; when over 400* persons, then 6 in. more in width for every additional 100 persons up to a maximum width of 9 ft., but which in all cases must be divided with a handrail when over 6 ft. wide. The ends of joists, girders, and in fact all beams, should have a circulation of air around them ; they may also have the ends charred or tarred. The following are the weights of some of the chief building timbers : Fir (Baltic) weighs per cubic ft. about 34 to 40 Ibs. Pine (American) 32 34 Elm (English) ' 34' 39 Mahogany (Honduras) 35 Oak (English) 48 58 Pitch pine 41 58 Teak 41 60 Green heart 58 72 When, for some reason, joists narrow in depth are laid directly upon paving, they must be securely fixed to it, otherwise they are liable to spring. , Broadly speaking, there are three methods of constructing timber floors : First, " single-joisted floors " (" single floors "), these are mostly used in basements, and also in ground and upper floors when the spans do not exceed more than from 18 to 20 ft. Secondly, " double floors," these are used in floors of larger spans than 18 to 20 ft. Thirdly, " framed floors," these are used in floors of considerable spans. The sizes of joists and timbers suitable for " single," " double " and " framed floors " for the various spans required, may be obtained from Tredgold's Carpentry, or any of the architects' pocket books. The uppermost timbers of all floors are called " bridging joists." Pugging. (46) p u g all floors (except, perhaps, those on ground level) with coarse stuff plaster 3 in. deep, laid on f in. (or 1 in.) rough deal boarding, with 1 in. X 1^ in. fillets (or angle fillets two out of 2 x 1J in.) spiked to joists. Floors are pugged to deaden sound. The pugging may be in silicate cotton, as in clause No. 57 ; or dry pit sand may be employed, but sea L 2 148 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (47) sand must never be used. Any of the three classes B of floors mentioned may be pugged. Inodorous felt ^ may be tacked over the joists to deaden sound, instead of the ordinary pugging. See clauses Nos. 13, 33, and 35 to 37, which may, perhaps, prefer- ably be inserted here. For timber suitable for floor joists, see clauses Nos. 14 and 19. Trimmers. (47) Trim for hearths, landings, trap doors and other openings in floors, with trimmers and trimming joists, 1 in. thicker than the joists they support. The joists are not to be tenoned into the trimmers, but slightly housed in, and supported on 2J in. X 2 in. deal fillets spiked to the trimmers ; and the joists, the trimmers and fillets spiked to one another. Fireplace trimmers taking a bearing on the walls and running parallel with chimney breasts, to be secured with two % in. diameter wrought-iron bolts, nuts, heads, and 4m.x4:ii\.x% in. washers ; the bolts being carried through the trimmer arches and buried in the walls. Mortising and tenoning trimmers and joists together weakens the timbers considerably, but on the other hand, the timbers would depend upon the iron spikes for their support. Joists should be thin and deep for strength, and when plastered on the under side must not be more than 2J in. thick, unless the edges be taken off, otherwise there will be insufficient key for the plastering. Distance of joists apart. (48) Bridging and ceiling joists to be spaced at 1'2 in. (13 in. or 14 in.) centres (or not more than 12 in. apart). Also see clause No. 13. strutting. (49) Herring-bone strutting to be 2J in. (or 3 in.) X 1J in. (or 2 in.), spiked down the full depth of the joists, and spaced every 6 ft. (or 7 ft.) apart. (52) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 149 or, The solid bridging to be 2 in. (or 3 in.) thick, by the full depth of the joists, and spaced every 6 ft. (or 7 ft.) apart. Solid bridging stiffens a floor more than herring-bone strutting, but at the same time adds to its weight. State if ceiling joists are to be strutted ; see notes to clause No. 91. Else in floors. (50) Floors to be laid with a rise of Jin. in the centre in a 20 ft. span, both on the upper and the under side. This will allow the floor to " sag " into a horizontal position. Plates. (51) Wall and pole plates to be halved and dove- tailed together at ends, and scarfed at joints. It is very customary now to employ hoop iron from 1J in. to 3 in. wide to bed joists upon, instead of wood plates. For the gauges of hoop iron see Bricklayer, clause No. 66. The following clauses, Nos. 52 and 53, refer to " siugle-joisted floors." Basement or (52) The basement (or ground floor) joists to be in jolstTon sleeper 5 in ' X 2 in .' ( Or 3 in '> En g lish Oak ( Or fir >' with 4 in ' ( OT walls. 4J in) x 3 in. oak wall and sleeper plates. (For sketches of sleeper walls see Bricklayer, clause No. 27.) These are the usual sizes for joists in these positions, as sleeper walls are generally placed about 5 ft. or 6 ft. apart. Oak should always be used where the floors are near the ground, and the timber may in addition be charred. No strutting is required with floors supported on sleeper walls. State if 1J in. to 3 in. hoop iron, as wall or sleeper plates, be employed in lieu of oak ; for gauges of hoop iron see Bricklayer, clause No. 66. A billiard room may be arranged in any part of a building, so long that it can be lighted from a lantern light immediately over the billiard table ; the vertical lights preferably only being glazed. If the skylight portion of the lantern be glazed, passing clouds are apt to throw a shadow on the table. If a lantern light cannot be obtained, then the room may be lighted from windows placed in the walls on two opposite sides of the room, the sills of the windows being not less than 4 ft. up above the floor level. The legs of the table should have a solid bearing, either directly upon the ground, or upon beams or girders about 11 in. wide if the billiard room be above the ground level. These beams or girders may run CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (53) from wall to wall right across the room, both the long and short way of the table, in case it requires shifting at any time. The clear space around the table in every direction, free from all projections, is usually 6 ft. ; but if more space can be obtained the better, although the game can be played with a space of only 5 ft. 6 in. In confined situ- ations, sometimes 5 ft. and even only 4 ft. 6 in. can be obtained, but 5 ft. 6 in. should be a least width for any com- fort in playing. 6.0 >| Any seats, lounges or di- vans should be raised up above the general level of the floor, in order to give a better view of the game to onlookers. Of course the seats and lounges should have an addi- tional space allowed them be- ^^^^^ ""^ yond the size of the room necessary for play. "When two or more tables are arranged in one room, 5 ft. will be sufficient for the space between the tables ; often it is considerably less. The pockets do not project beyond the edge of a table. A full-size billiard table is 5 ft, 10J in. x 11 ft. 9 in. clear of the cushions, and about 6 ft. 7J in. x 12 ft. 6 in. over all. It has eight legs, spaced apart as shown on ^ sketch. ^ A three-quarter size billiard table is 4 ft. 10 J in. X 9 ft. 9 in. clear of the cushions, and about 5 ft. 7^ in. x 10 ft. 6 in. over all. It has six legs. Billiard tables are also made in about 9 ft., 8 ft., 7 ft. and 6 ft. inside lengths, by proportionate widths. The height of a billiard table is 3 ft. to 2 ft. 10 in. from the floor to the top of the cushion. A billiard room should be lofty, a fair height being 14 ft., and efficient ventilation should be provided, both as regards inlets and out- lets. For play at night-time, a six-arm pendant is required. For lantern lights and finishings, see clauses Nos. 124 to 129, especially clause No. 127 with notes. For other forms of skylights, see clauses Nos. 130 to 134a. For gas, see Gasfitter, clause No. 8. For cigar light, see Gasfitter, clause No. 8. For air inlets and air outlets, see the article on Ventilation. fc-3.8| 1st and 2nd floor joists. (53) The first and second floor joists to be in fir timber, with 9 in. X 3 in. joists (or other size according to span). (53) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 151 4 in. (or 4J in.) X 3 in. wall plates (invariably cut these sizes. For hoop iron wall plates, see notes to clause No. 51.) 2 in. (or 3 in.) solid bridging, the full depth of joists, and spaced every 6 ft. (or 7 ft.) apart. or, 2J in. x 1J in. herring-bone strutting, spiked the full depth of joists every 6 ft. (or 7 ft.) apart. Put |- in. wrought-iron tension rods, with nuts, heads and 4 in. x 4 in. x J in. washers, every 10 ft. apart, carried through all the joists. Bridging joists should rest 4^ in. on the walls. Bridging joists to upper floors may be ventilated by notching out as shown on sketch. See clause No. 35 for boring joists for ventilation. Tension rods secure all the joists together, but are not always provided. In " single floors," the ceilings are apt to crack, when the joists exceed 10 ft. span, but the damage may be minimised by constructing the floors in the following manner : The first and second floor joists to be 9 in. x 3 in. in fir timber, with every fourth (3rd or 5th) joist 11 in. X 3 in. (or other sizes according to the spans). 4 in. (or 4^ in.) X 3 in. wall plates (for hoop iron wall plates see notes to clause No. 51). 2 in. (or 3 in.) solid bridging, the full depth of the smaller joists, and spaced every 6 ft. (or 7 ft.) apart. or, 2J in. x 1 in. herring-bone strutting, spiked the full depth of the smaller joists, and spaced every 6 ft. (or 7 ft.) apart. Put | in. wrought-iron tension rods, with nuts, heads, and 4 in. X 4 in. X J in. washers, every 10 ft. apart, carried through all the joists. 4 in. x 2 in. ceiling joists, notched on to every fifth (3rd or 4th) joist. Ceiling joists do not require strutting. A "single floor" may be constructed over a large room in this wise : 152 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (54) The floor to reception room (or other large room) to be formed with two 12 in. x 6 in. rolled iron (or steel) joists, resting on 2 ft. 6 in. x 9 in. X 3 in. tooled York templates, with 3 in. X 2 in. fir fillets bolted on each side of the joists with \ in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers every 4 ft. apart. The bridging joists to be 9 in. x 3 in. with 9 in. X 2 in. (or 3 in.) solid bridgings spaced every 6 ft. (or 7 ft.) apart, and 2 in. solid bridging blocks placed between the bridging joists on each side of the iron (or steel) joists, where the bridging joists fit against them. Wall plates to be 4 in. (or 4 in.) X 3 in. (for hoop iron as wall plates see notes to clause No. 51). Bracket round the girders for plastering (or for deal casing). Fill in the correct sizes of the iron and timber joists, according to the spans and loads. The stone templates, wood fillets, plates and iron bolts would remain practically the same in any case. Ceiling joists may be provided to this floor, in the same way as in the preceding example, by making every fourth (3rd or 5th) bridging joist deeper. A double floor. t II 5 - -t, f '> 14 ', r Mi J (54)- (55) The first and second floors to be constructed in fir timber with : 9 in. X 3 in. bridging joists, notched on to the bind- ing joists. 12 in. X 9 in. binding joists, spaced 6 ft. apart with 12 in. x4J in. binding joists against the walls ; the ends being cased in cast-iron shoes, 9 in. long, \ in. metal, and fixed on 2 ft. 6 in. X 9 in. x 3 in. tooled York templates. 4 in. X 2 in. ceiling joists, notched to the binding joists (fill in the correct size of the binding joists according to the span). If the bridging joists are built into the walls, the walls will be the better tied together. Binding joists should rest 9 in. on the walls, and are generally spaced 6 ft. apart. No solid bridging or herring-bone strutting is absolutely required in this class of floor, the binders practically acting in their place. The half binding joists against the walls may be omitted, and in that case, the bridging and ceiling joists would both require 4 in. (or 4J in.) x 3 in. fir wall plates (or else hoop iron as wall plates, as in r notes to clause No. 51). When a first-class ceiling is required, a " double floor " is abso- lutely necessary, even if the span be small. (57) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 153 Framed floors. (56) The first and second floors to be constructed in fir timber with : 9 in. x 3 in. bridging joists, notched on to the binding joists. 12 in. by 9 in. binding joists, spaced 6 ft. apart, with 12 in. x 4^ in. binding joists against the walls, the ends resting on the walls being cased in cast-iron shoes 9 in. long, \ in. metal, on 2 ft. 6 in. x 9 in. X 3 in. tooled York templates, and the ends sup- ported by the girders being fixed to \ in. metal cast-iron stirrups, bolted to the girders with J in. bolts, nuts and heads. 18 in. x 12 in. girders, spaced every 10 ft. apart, the ends being cased in cast-iron shoes 12 in. long, | in. metal, and resting on 3 ft. X 12 in. x 6 in, tooled York templates. 4 in. x 2 in. ceiling joists, notched to the binders. No solid bridging or herring-bone strutting is absolutely required in this class of floor, the binders practically acting in their place. The binding joists against the walls may be omitted, and in this case 4 in. (or 4J in.) x 3 in. wall plates must be taken, both to the bridging and ceiling joists (or the hoop iron wall plates, as in notes to clause No. 51). Girders should rest 12 in. on the walls, and are generally spaced 10 ft. apart, and where the span exceeds about 22 ft. they should be trussed. " Framed floors," as described in this clause, are now almost out of date ; iron and steel having taken its place. Fill in the correct sizes of the girders. Fire- and sound- proof timber floors. (57) All floors (whether "single," "double" or " framed ") above those on the ground level to be treated in the following manner ; both as a preventive of sound and as a precaution against fire : Cover over on the under side of floor (or ceiling) joists with galvanised iron wire netting f in. (or ^ in.) mesh, fixed to the joists , with wire (J hooks, and fill in above 1 in. (or 1^ in.) deep, with English made silicate cotton (or 1 in. or 1^ in. English made silicate felt), and then spike 2 in. x 1 in. fir battens along the under side of joists for the plaster. Fix to the upper part of joists \\ in. x 1 in. fillets (or angle fillets, two out of 2 in. X 1J in.), and lay J in. (or 1 in.) rough deal boarding between, kept 1 in. (or 1 in.) below the under side of floor boards, and fill up level to the top of joists with 1 in. (or 1 \ in.) silicate cotton (or silicate felt). Treating a floor in this manner will, of course, not make it abso- lutely fire-proof, it merely being employed as a preventive. The lower layer of silicate cotton (or silicate felt) acts as a fire- and sound-proof material from the room below, and the upper layer is a fire- and sound-proof material from the room above. The battens on the under side of the joists are required for obtaining a better key for the plastering. Sound boarding is a name given to the rough boarding between the joists. For concrete fire-proof floors see clauses Nos. 40, 41, 43 and 44 under Excavator. 154 CAKPENTEK, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (58) FLOORING. (Clauses Nos. 58 to 73.) Generally. (58) All floorboards to be in long lengths, and first temporarily fixed in position for six (or nine) months ; then taken up, reshot, relaid and joints smoothed over. In all cases hard wood flooring is to be side nailed, and then traversed, smoothed and scraped over. Wood block flooring to be traversed and smoothed over. Clauses Nos. 11, 16, 19 and 23 may perhaps be inserted here. See clause No. 4 under Pavior, for wood block flooring. Mitred borders. (59) Put 1 in. (f in., 11 in. or 1J in.) X 4 in. glued and mitred borders to hearths, landings, trap doors, lifts, and around other openings, and where flooring finishes against other material. Spaces between openings. Iron tongues. (60) The flooring to spaces between door and other openings to be fixed on 3 in. X 2 in. bearers, 12 in. apart. (61) Iron tongues to floorings to be kept down two- thirds the thickness of the boards. Hoop iron tongued 1 in. deal flooring should have 1 in. galvanised iron tongues, No. 18 gauge. Hoop iron tongued 11 in. deal flooring should have 1J in. galvanised iron tongues, No. 17 gauge. Hoop iron tongued 1 J in. deal flooring should have 1J in. galvanised iron tongues, No. 16 gauge. Hoop iron tongued 2 in. deal flooring should have If in. galvanised iron tongues, No. 15 gauge. Hoop iron tongued 2 in. or 3 in. deal flooring should have 1J in. galvanised iron tongues, No. 15 gauge. Iron tongues when not galvanised, may be either plain, or else payed over with two coats of red lead. See Bricklayer, notes to clause, No. 66, for other sizes of hoop iron. Flooring is seldom thicker than 1 J in. Nails. (62) J in. deal flooring to be fixed with nails weighing 10 Ibs. per 1000. I in. deal flooring to be fixed with nails weighing 12 Ibs. per 1000. II in. deal flooring to be fixed with nails weighing 18 Ibs. per 1000. 1 in. deal flooring to be fixed with nails weighing 25 Ibs. per 1000. (63) CAKPENTEK, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 2 in. deal flooring to be fixed with nails weighing 32 Ibs. per 1000. 2J in. deal flooring to be fixed with nails weighing 40 Ibs. per 1000. 3 in. deal flooring to be fixed with nails 80 Ibs. per 1000. weighing weighing 1 in. oak flooring to be laid with nails 20 Ibs. per 1000. 1J in. oak flooring to be laid with nails 28 Ibs. per 1000. 1 j- in. oak flooring to be laid with nails weighing 36 Ibs. per 1000. 2 in. oak flooring to be laid with nails weighing 50 Ibs. per 1000. 2J in. oak flooring to be laid with nails weighing 70 Ibs. per 1000. 3 in. oak flooring to be laid down with nails 90 Ibs. per 1000. weighing weighing Flooring to servants' offices 1 ffi (6&) Cover the floors and passages to servants' offices and7t a h n er S ordinar S y with plain jointed 1 in. (or 1J in.) wrought yellow Gefle floors. deal in batten widths, laid folding, straight-jointed and with square (splayed or tongued) headings breaking joint. or, With rebated (fillister ed) 1 in. (or 1^ in.) wrought yellow Gefle deal in batten widths, laid straight-jointed, with square (or splayed) headings breaking joint. or, With grooved and tongued 1 in. (or 1 in.) wrought yellow Gefle deal in batten widths, laid straight-jointed, with square (or splayed) headings breaking joint. These three descriptions a.re the commonest kinds of flooring suitable for private houses ; the first being that mostly used for servants' offices, basement, ground and upper floors. The upper floors are sometimes laid in " Swedish imported white deal," see clause No. 16. Straight-jointed flooring is when the boards are all cut to one parallel width ; when they are in various widths they are broken jointed, see sketch. The disadvantage of a plain joint to flooring, such as that described in the first paragraph, is that the shrinkage of the joints allows dirt and dust to accumulate on the ceiling below. See clause No. 16 for other kinds of deal for flooring. '56 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (64) A square heading is thus, A splayed heading thus, And a tongued heading thus. Ceiling joists immediately under the roof may be boarded over to form a store space for boxes, in : | in., 1 in. or 1^ in. rough spruce deal, edges shot, in batten (deal or plank) widths, plain jointed, laid folding, with straight (or broken) joints and square headings. J in., 1 in. or 1J in. rough white deal, edges shot, in batten (deal or plank) widths, plain jointed, laid folding, vrith straight (or broken) joints and square headings. |- in., 1 in. or 1^ in. rough yellow deal, edges shot, in batten (deal or plank) widths, plain jointed, laid folding, with straight (or broken) joints and square headings. or, The flooring in this position may be in plain flooring, as described in the first paragraph under this clause. Ground and upper floors. (64) Cover the floors of best rooms oh ground floor (state which rooms) and all the rooms on first and second floors, together with all passages and landings, with ploughed and tongued 1J in. (or 1 in.) wrought yellow Gefle deal in batten widths, laid straight jointed, with squared (splayed or tongued) headings breaking joint, and 1J in. No. 17 gauge galvanised hoop iron tongues (or 1 in. No. 18 gauge for 1 in. flooring). Cut down joists in vestibule 2 in., and form a 3 ft. X 2 ft. 6 in. boarded mat space with a 3 in. X 2 in. mitred border round, and provide a door mat (say) p.c. 15s. See clause No. 16 for other kinds of deal for flooring. See clause No. 61 for iron tongues. This class of flooring is suitable for ordinary good work. It may also be laid with 1 in. X fg in. cross-tongued oak in lieu of iron. See Pavior, clause No. 2, for a mat space in a paved vestibule. (66) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 157 | Best reception (65) Cover the floors of (say) dining and drawing rooms. rooms, with 1^ in. wrought yellow Archangel deal in half batten (3J- in.) widths (or in 4J in. or 5J in. widths), laid straight jointed, with square (splayed, dowelled or tongued) headings break- ing joint, and dowelled together at joints with 1^ in. x^ in. oak dowels, 12 in. apart, and side nailed to joists with French nails. or, Cover the floors of (say) dining and drawing rooms with rebated, grooved and tongued 1 \ in. wrought yellow Archangel deal in half batten widths, laid straight jointed, with square (or splayed) headings breaking joint, and side nailed to joists with French nails. Dowelled floors, and rebated, grooved and tongued floors, are used in the very best work. In hard woods, such as oak, pitch pine and teak, they may be as little as 1 in. thick, but hard wood floors are generally laid upon a counter floor, as in clause 'No. 67. 3J in. widths are half battens ; see notes under clause No. 4 for the size of battens. 4^ in. widths are half deals ; see notes under clause No. 4 for the size of deals. 5 J- in. widths are half planks ; see notes under clause No. 4 for the size of planks. The smaller the width of flooring, the less will be the shrinkage, especially in pitch pine. A description for the class of joint, as sketch, would be the same as the second paragraph under this clause, except it may be described as " rebated," skew grooved and tongued. White deal is never laid with these special joints, but always with a plain joint. Warehouse and (66) Cover the warehouse and shop floors with re- bated and filleted 1 J in. wrought yellow Gefle deal in batten widths, laid straight jointed on 1 in. x f in. deal (or 1 in. X ^ in. oak), cross tongued fillets, with square (splayed or filleted) headings breaking joint. Flooring 1 in. thick is too thin for this class of joint ; 1 J in. and 2 in. being often used. Warehouses, shops, public bars and places subject to much wear, should never have flooring less than 11 in. thick, 1J. in. being preferable as a least thickness. Warehouse floors may also be laid as clause No. 63 ; or else in rough deal, with edges shot in a similar way to clause No. 63 ; they are also laid as clause No. 64, modified to 1J in., 1J in. or 2 in. thicknesses. Shops, public bars and such places may also be laid as clauses Nos. 63 or 64, modified to 1^ in., 1J- in. or 2 in. thicknesses. It is a good plan to raise the flooring at the back of counters to shops and public bars, as it gives the attendants more command. 158 CARPENTEK, JOINER AND IRONMONGER, (67) Reception room double flooring. (67) Cover the floors of (say) dining, drawing and dancing rooms with plain-jointed 1 in. (or 1 in.) wrought (or rough with edges shot) yellow Gefle deal counter flooring, in batten (or half batten) widths, laid folding, with straight joints, and square (or splayed) headings breaking joint. Lay the upper flooring with rebated, grooved and tongued (or rebated, skew grooved and tongued) 1 in> (or 1 in.) wrought Austrian Trieste oak (or Hungarian Fiume oak, or Russian Riga oak,orDantzic Crown Memel oak, or wainscot oak, or Moulmein teak, or American pitch pine), in 4J in. (3 in., 3 in., 4 in., 5 in. or 5^ in.) widths, laid straight jointed, with square (or splayed) headings breaking joint, and side nailed to the counter flooring with French nails. Traverse, smooth and scrape over at completion, and French (or wax) polish. The upper flooring is to be scribed up against the skirting. An oak floor looks better if laid the long way of the room. Only when floors are polished they require to be scraped over. Floors for dancing are only wax polished. The upper flooring may be dowelled as in clause No. 65, instead of being rebated, grooved and tongued. One inch counter flooring is the least thickness suitable for taking the nails of the upper flooring. Hard wood upper flooring may be laid J in. thick if it be plain jointed as in the first paragraph of clause No. 63, but in any case it should be side nailed to the counter flooring. The deal counter flooring should in this case be either as the second or third paragraphs under clause No. 63, or as clause No. 64, or as the second paragraph under clause No. 65, or as clause No. 66, so as to prevent any dirt finding its way through to the ceiling below. Where space is an object hard wood flooring may be laid immediately on the joists without the counter flooring, but it does not make so eood a floor. Wood block floors. Wood block floor laid on an existing floor. JtBroivn baber (68) See notes to, and clause No. 4 under Pavior, which should perhaps more properly come here. (69) Plane over the joints of the existing flooring in warehouse to an even face, and glue down thick brown paper over the whole surface. Lay 12 in. x 3 in. x 1| in. (or 2 in.) cut and skew grooved, solid, wrought all round, yellow Gefle deal wood block flooring, in squares (or herring-bone), with a margin round, two (or one) blocks wide. The blocks to be dipped half-way up in hot liquid tar and pitch composition, in the proportion of two parts tar to one of pitch, and when set, traversed and smoothed over. (If wood blocks are laid in longer lengths than 12 in. they are liable to work up ; 9 in. is about the best length. In like manner, if they be too thin they are also liable to spring.) (73) CAEPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. See notes under clause No. 4 in Pavior. 159 Parquet flooring. (70) Level down, plane over and cover (say) draw- ing room floor with veneered oak parquetry to pattern i in. (or J in.) thick, with an 18 in. border round, and canvassed over on the back, of the p.c. value 2s. (or other price) per foot super., and the whole laid in prepared glue, French nailed, cleaned off, and French (or wax) polished. The flooring under the parquetry must be perfectly dry and seasoned, otherwise, owing to any shrinkage in the flooring, the parquetry is liable to crack. Veneered parquet flooring must be laid on a perfectly level counter (under) flooring. If the floor be out of level, the boards must be taken up, and the joists furred up to a level, and the boards relaid and planed over. Parquet floors may be in any hard wood, and to any design. They are generally in hard woods. Sometimes deal floors are laid with a parquet border only, the floor- ing then immediately under the parquetry must either be rebated out to take the extra thickness of the parquet, or else a lesser thickness of floorboard must be used under the border. Give the width of border. The deal flooring under parquetry may be of any of the descriptions mentioned in clauses Nos. 63 to 66. See notes to clause No. 67, on polishing. Solid Parquetry. (71) Solid parquet flooring is generally 1 in. thick, and may be either in soft or hard woods. It is laid to a pattern in precisely the same way as clause No. 70, and may be so described. Carpet steps. (72) Put to all doorways, the full size of opening, J in. pitch pine (or oak) carpet steps, bevelled and rounded off on both edges. Matting. (73) Lay bordered cocoa matting to passages (or aisles) 36 in. wide, with ends carefully leaded and riveted on with copper rivets. THR 160 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (74) EOOFS, FLATS, DOMES AND SKYLIGHTS. (Clauses Nos. 74 to 134A.) The following list gives the weights of various roof coverings : Large slates weigh about 900 to 1100 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Ordinary slates weigh about 550 to 700 Ibs. per square (100 super. ft.). Small slates weigh about 450 to 600 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Stone tiles weigh about 2380 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Plain tiles, including laths and absorbed rain, weigh about 1800 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Pan tiles, including laths and absorbed rain, weigh about 1200 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Straw thatch, with battens, weighs about 650 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Milled sheet lead, including laps, weighs about 550 to 850 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Zinc, 14 to 16 gauge, weighs about 150 to 175 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft). Corrugated iron, 16 B.W.G., weighs about 350 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Sheet iron, 16 B.W.G., weighs about 250 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Copper weighs about 80 to 120 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Asphalted felt weighs about 30 to 40 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Boarding,! in. thick weighs about 350 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). For weights of various timber see notes preceding clause No. 46. In addition to these weights, the pressure of the wind and the weight of snow has to be considered, which may be taken at from 2500 to 5000 Ibs. per square for wind, according to the pitch of roof, and 500 Ibs. per square for snow. The pitch for roofs will be found under the several materials suitable for roof coverings ; see Slater, clauses Nos. 4 and 5 ; Tiler, clauses Nos. 1, 2 and 11 ; Thatcher, clauses Nos. 1 and 2 ; Stone Tiler, clauses Nos. 1 and 2 ; Shingler, clause No. 1 ; Plumber, clause No. 7 ; Zinc Worker, clauses Nos. 1 and 2 ; Coppersmith, clause No. 1 ; and Smith, clauses Nos. 32 and 33. A King Post roof is suitable for spans from 18 ft. to 30 ft. A Queen Post ., 30 ft. to 45 ft. A Queen & Princess roof 45 ft. to 60 ft. straps. (74) The straps to be of wrought forged iron, dipped in linseed oil whilst hot, and painted two coats in oil colour when fixed. The holes for bolts to be drilled (or punched) out. Also see clause No. 75 ; and Smith, clauses Nos. 7 and 19, for straps. (75) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 161 Boofing spikes, 5 in. long, weigh about 10 Ibs. per 100 6 in. 20 Ibs. 7 iii. 30 Ibs. 8 in. ,. 45 Ibs. 9 in. 60 Ibs. See clauses JSTos. 13 and 37, which may perhaps be inserted here. The sizes of the scantlings, suitable for different spans of the various classes of roof trusses, may be obtained from ' Tredgold's Carpentry/ or any of the Architects' memorandum books. Eoof trusses, of whatever description, are generally placed 10 ft. apart. Purlins may be notched out on the upper side, but not on the under side ; they should be placed not more than 8 ft. apart. Tie beams should be supported every 12 to 14 ft. in their length, either by a king post, queen posts or princesses. KIXG POST Ptoor. (Suitable for spans up to 30 ft.) (Clauses Nos. 74 to 99.) The following example is for a king post roof truss, 30 ft. span, covered with slates. If tiles or stone tiles be used, the common rafters and purlins should be made one-third and one-half stronger respectively. Xing post truss (75) The main roof to be composed of (say) eight whole trusses placed 10 ft. apart, and (say) two half trusses, each being of the following scantlings, and the whole notched, framed, spiked and strapped to- 162 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (75) Tie beams 12 in. x 6 in. having a rise of J in. at the centre, with ends cased in cast-iron shoes 10 in. long, J in. metal, resting 9 in. on walls at either end, with tarred felt (or 4 Ib. lead) seat- ings, on 2 ft. 6 in. x 3 in. x 12 in. tooled York templates. King posts out of 6 in. x 5 in. Principal rafters 6 in. x 4 in. Struts (braces) 4J in. X 3 in. Purlins 9 in. x 6 in. scarfed (or butted with oak keys and wedges) at joints, fixed 6 in. in at wall ends on 9 in. x 9 in. X 3 in. tooled York tem- plates, with 4 in. x 4 in. struts at the junction of purlins with hips. Cleats 6 in. x 4 in. x 2 ft. in. long. Eidges 11 in. x H in. (or 2 in.) scarfed at joints (state if twice splayed on top for roll). Hip rafters 11 in. x 2 in. (state if twice splayed on top for roll). Valley rafters 11 in. x 2 in. (state if bird's-mouthed out). Pole plates 6 in. x 3 in. (varies in height according to position in which it is placed) and 4 in. (or 4 in.) x 3 in. wall plates in long lengths, scarfed at joints, and halved and dovetailed at angles. Tie plates 6 in. x 3 in. in long lengths, scarfed at joints. Common and jack rafters 4J in. x 2 in. (or 2J in.) with cut wrought ends at overhanging eaves, and wrought splocket (cock) pieces, each 2 ft. long out of 6 in. X 2 in. (or 2J in.). Trim for skylights, dormers, chimney stacks, trap doors and ven- tilators. Dragon pieces and angle brace ties 4 J in. x 4 in. Straps 1J in. (or 2 in.) X ^ in. (or l in.) wrought forged iron, placed on both sides of the timbers, with J in. bolts, nuts, heads, washers, jibs and cotters. (See Smith, clauses Nos. 7 and 19.) It is a great assistance to the rigidity of roof trusses to tie them to- gether with a horizontal tie plate, say 6 in. X 3 in., running along the tie beams next the king posts, but when ceiling joists are notched to the tie beams this tie plate is not required. (79) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. I6 3 The scantlings given are the least sizes suitable for this roof truss, but a neater and stronger truss is obtained by making the king post, the principal rafters, and the struts (braces), the same thickness as the tie beam, the straps will then all fix level. At the same time, it is perhaps somewhat a waste of material. If trusses be placed more than 10 ft. apart, the timbers must be made of larger scantlings. . i - | If a cross wall run up to the slating so as r>l" """! I " = ^ catcn the purlins, a truss at that point will ^rruf* I not be required. Half trusses. (76) The tie beams to the half trusses to be secured to the tie beams of the whole trusses with J in. wrought-iron angle plates, 6 in. wide, with J in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers (or else fixed into cast-iron shoes bolted on). Wall gutters. (77) The gutters against walls to be not less than 9 in. (or 12 in.) in width in the narrowest part, and formed with 1 in. (or 11 in.) rough deal gutter board- ing, and framed bearers on fillet pieces plugged to walls, and laid to falls of 2 in. in 8 feet, with 2 in. (or 1J in.) 4 cross rebated drips, 1 in. splayed (feather-edged) flashing boards, and 1 in. angle tilting fillets. Form small gutters round the skylights, chimney stacks, dormers and trap doors in a similar manner. Cesspools. (78) To be 1J in. wrought deal dovetailed cesspools 9 in. x 9 in. x 9 in. (or 12 in. x 12 in. X 12 in.) in the clear, with perforation for outlet pipe, and 1J in. angle tilting fillets. Box gutter and cesspools. (79) The box gutter to be 12 in. (to 18 in.) wide, with kerbs (gutter plates) 3 in. thick, and formed with similar gutter boarding, bearers, drips, cess- pools and tilting fillets as to the wall gutters (See clause No. 77.) M 2 CAEPENTEE, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (80) Secret gntters. (80) Form secret gutters 2 in. wide on fillet pieces at mitres of roof planes with hips, and against walls, chimney stacks, skylights, dormers and trap doors 3 in. wide, and with tilting fillets. Also see clause No. 11 under Plumber, are required, as the slates mitre up close. In secret gutters no hip rolls Valley boards. (81) To be 1 in. (or f in.) rough deal valley boards, splayed together, with 1 J in. angle tilting fillet at the junction. Tilting fillets. (82) Put 4 in. x 1J in. splayed angle tilting fillets to all eaves, valleys, and to all parts where slates abut against walls, chimney stacks, dormers, skylights and trap doors. Hip and ridge rolls. (83) To be 2 in. X 2 in. rounded deal (state if bird's- mouthed). For greater effect, the hip and ridge rolls are some- times made larger, as 3 in. x 3 in. or 4 in. X 4 in., and kept up with a furring piece placed on top of the ridge. Hoof boarding, felt and battens. (84) Cover roofs with 1 in. (or J in.) rough deal boarding, edges shot, laid with horizontal joints (or diagonal), with asphalted roofing felt over J in. thick, properly passed, lapped and tacked on every 3 in. apart with J in. clout nails, 5 Ibs. per 1000 (or 1 in. copper nails). Lay 2 \ in. X f in. horizontal fir battens for slates having a 3 in. lap, spiked on to 2 J in. X in. fir battening running from ridge to eaves, spaced 12 in. apart, spiked through to the boarding. (87) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 165 Also see clauses Nos. 5, 6 and 8 under Slater, with notes. The boarding may be iron-tongued, see clause No. 61. If roof timbers are to showinside a building, then state they are to be wrought all round. They may also be stop chamfered. The boarding also would be wrought one side, either with V- jointed, grooved and tongued joints, or matched and beaded joints. For tile battens see Tiler, clause No. 2 ; stone tile battens, see Stone Tiler, clause No. 1 ; and thatch battens, see Thatcher, clause No. 1. Fascia (eaves board). (85) To be 1| in. wrought deal beaded fascia, screwed on to end of rafters. Eaves soffit. (86) The eaves soffit to be filled in with 1J in. moulded panelling fixed to bearers, with a small moulding against wall and fascia. The eaves soffit may be in plain wrought V-jointed boarding, or else it may be lathed and plastered with a moulding against wall, and a groove in the fascia board. See Plasterer, clause No. 65. Barge board and moulding'. (87) To be 9 in. x 1^ in. (or 2 in.) wrought all round, with cut shaped ends, staff beaded (chamfered or moulded) on edge, screwed to rafters, and finished with a 2 J- in. x 1J- in. moulding under slating. The rafters, purlins, wall plates and boarding to be wrought where exposed to view. The barges may be formed with solid moulded panelled framing say 2 in. (2J in. or 3 in.) thick, secured to the roof timbers with 2 in. x f in. wrought-iron angle straps every 3 ft. apart the full depth of barge, screwed on with 2J in. (or 3 in.) coach-headed screws, and running along the i66 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (88) roof timbers so as to catch three rafters, clipped down to the third rafter, and bolted through with f in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers, and screwed on to the upper face of each rafter with 3 in. screws. State if barges be cut to an orna- mental shape, and if perforated. State if the wall plates be supported on stone corbels and wrought framed timber brackets, giving the size of the corbels and timbers. Finial pendant. (88) The finial to be 4 in. X 4 in., wrought and stop chamfered, with turned head and console. The finials may be panelled and ornamental. Snow boards. (89) Put snow boards to all gutters where up to 3 ft. in width, in separate 6 ft. (4 ft. or 5 ft.) lengths, formed with 3 in. (or 4 in.) x 1 in. (or in.) wrought fir laths spaced J in. (or 1 in.) apart, and fixed to three 4 in. (3 in. or 5 in.) X 2 in. wrought cut bearers to each 6 ft. length, and painted four coats in oil paint. Snow boards prevent the melting snow finding its way into the roof, and allow the water to run away freely along the gutter. For snow guards to eaves of roofs, see Smith, clause No. 30, with tu. (92) CARPENTER, JOINER AN.D IRONMONGER. I6 7 Duck (cat or roof) ladders. (90) There are to be two movable roof ladders, formed of 1J in. boarding 9 in. wide, with 2J in. X 1J in. fillets spiked on every 12 in. apart, and painted four coats in oil colour. iioof ladders are useful for getting from one pitched roof to another. They may be in rod iron, with a fixing to the roof, but are not so easy to climb, although more durable. For step ladders to trap doors, see clause No. 276a. Ceiling joists to roof. (91) Notch and spike to tie beams 5 in. X 2 in. ceiling joists with 4 in. (or 4J in.) X 3 in. wall plates, and lay 1 in. (or J in.) rough deal boarding on top over the entire surface. /iff any iny puce This boarding keeps the dirt away from the plaster ceiling, and adds to the warmth of the rooms below. The ceiling joists may run parallel with the tie beam from wall to wall if made strong enough, either with or without a hanging piece. If the roof space is to serve as a box room, or store, then the joists, strutting and flooring would be the same as to floors, see notes and clauses Nos. 46 to 51, 53, 55 to 57, and 58 to 64 ; and see notes preceding clause No. 46. The ceiling joists may also be fixed between the tie beams, notched to 2^ in. x 2 in. fillets spiked on. If under these circumstances they are to serve as floor joists, then the tie beams must be sufficiently strong to carry this extra .weight ; the tie beams practically acting as girders. When ceiling joists are of some con- siderable span, they are the better for being strutted between ; see clause No. 49. r~i 1 *7le beam- j t Ceiling /an tf 7'ntss Truss The tie beam to be in one timber, bolted to the feet of principal rafters, and to the feet of struts with a filling-in block between. The principal rafters to be each in two timbers, bolted to the ends of the tie beam and to the heads of struts, with a filling-in block between, and spiked to the ridge with a filling-in collar piece, bolted through. The struts to be each in one timber, bolted to the principal rafters, and to the tie beam, with the filling-in blocks between. The king post to be in one timber, bolted to the ridge, and to a horizontal tie plate fixed to the tie beams with a strap iron. The purlins, common rafters, ridge and other roof timbers and finishings would be as in an ordinary framed roof; see clauses Nos. 75 to 99. Give the sizes of the timbers according to the spans. (101) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 171 Queen post truss, 40 feet span. QUEEN POST KOOF. (Suitable for Spans from 30 ft. to 45 ft.) (Clause No. 101). (101) Describe in a similar manner as to a king post truss, mentioned in clauses Nos. 74 to 76. the following items : The number of trusses and half trusses ; there would be two half trusses at each end. The tie beams, prin- cipal rafters, struts, purlins, cleats, ridge, hip rafters, valley rafters, pole and wall plates, common and jack rafters, dragon pieces and angle brace ties, and straps, with the addition of, Queen posts out of 6 in. x 4 in. Straining beam 7 in. x 6 in., with 18 in. X 6 in. x 4 in. cleats under (and perhaps above). Straining sill 5 in. x 4 in. Two tie plates 6 in. x 3 in. in long lengths, scarfed at joints. Then follow on with, as in clauses Nos. 77 to 99, the gutters, cesspools, box gutters, secret gutters, valley boards, tilting fillets, hip and ridge rolls, roof boarding, fascia, eaves soffit, barge boards, finials, snow boards, roof ladders, ceiling joists, trap door, dormer access to roof, dormer windows, bays, fleche, turret, bell cot and louvres. A horizontal tie, say 6 in. x 3 in., may be placed, along the top of the straining beams, with vertical timbers, say 7 in. X 2 in., every 5 ft. apart, to help support the ridge. If a room be required in the roof, and the tie beam carry the joists, then it must be made sufficiently strong to carry this extra weight ; in fact it acts as a girder under these conditions. 172 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (102) If the tie beam cannot be obtained sufficiently long in one length for the span, state it is to be scarfed together and wedged up tight with oak wedges, ond secured with J in. wrought-iron fish plates, 3 ft. long by the width of the beam, and bolted on with four J in. bolts, nuts and heads. This form of scarfing will hold together without bolts or fish plates. When no bolts or fish plates are used, the length of the scarf should be twelve times the depth of the timber with fir timber, and six times the depth with oak timber. When the scarf depends on bolts without fish plates, it should be six times the depth of the timber with fir timber, and three times the depth with oak timber. When bolts and fish plates are combined, the scarf should be four times tjie depth of the timber with fir timber, and twice the depth with oak timber. When a lantern is required to a roof, a queen post truss forms the best method of support. If the span be small, say up to 30 ft. (which is usually spanned by a king post truss), it will nevertheless be found better to use a queen post truss ; the top purlins forming a support to the lantern kerb. In these small spans the struts may be omitted, and if necessary the tie beam may be kept up somewhat. To reduce the height of the lantern kerb, the common rafters may be placed with the upper sides flush with the principal rafter of the truss, and sup- ported by purlins bearing on the tie beams. For lantern lights see clause No. 129. Queen and ^ (102) Suitable for roofs from 45 ft. to 60 ft. span. But this class of roof truss in timber is seldom used now, iron having taken its place. Describe in a similar manner all the timbers as in a queen post truss ; see clause No. 101, with the addition of, Princess posts out of 7 in. x 3 in. The straining sill goes between the princess posts as well as the queens. If two struts be inserted between the queen posts, _ the straining sill piece would not be required. See " remarks as to scarfing tie beams, under clause No. 101. (105) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 173 Koofs of greater spans may be formed as sketch. Practically it has a king post truss at top, with a queen and princess truss beneath. See remarks as to scarfing tie beams under clause No. 101. But this class of roof truss in timber is seldom now used, iron having taken its place. Composite roofs. (103) Suitable for spans from 65 ft. to 90 ft.. See remarks as to scarfing under clause No. 101. But this class of roof truss in timber is seldom, if ever, now used, iron having taken its place. Suitable for spans from 70 ft. to 85 ft. This class of roof is practically a queen post truss, with three king post trusses above. See remarks as to scarf- ing tie beams under clause No. 101. But the lower part of this roof truss in timber is seldom, if ever, now used, iron having taken its place. Iron and timber roofs. (104) These roofs are formed both with timber and iron. The ironwork may consist of wrought-iron king bolts, cast-iron shoes for feet of rafters and struts, and cast-iron sockets to receive the heads of rafters and king bolts. There are many ways of constructing roofs with timber and iron . Roof with flat top. (105) When a flat top is required to a roof it may be formed as sketch ; the sizes of timbers being the same as for a queen post truss, see clause No. 101, with the addition of the flat joists on .top. The purlins might be omitted, and the common rafters laid across from truss to truss. For the flat timbers, see clauses Nos. 113 to 123. CAKPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (106) Mansard or curb roof. (106) The sketch will show how this form of roof may be described ; the upper part being a king post truss, supported on posts having a fixing on a girder. See clauses Nos. 74 to 99 for items under a king post truss. The use of this form of roof is for obtaining attics in the roof. It is best to get the contour of roof within a semicircle, divided into five parts. The girder must be strong enough to take the weight of the roof and the floor, and the posts and struts strong enough to take the weight and thrust of the roof. The outermost timbers would be ordinary rafters. Lean-to roof. (107) This form of roof may be used for spans up to 8 ft., such as to small outbuildings and w.c.'s. The timbers generally to be described are : The rafters, 4 in. X 2J in. Wall plates, 4 in. x 3 in. Tilting fillets see clause No. 82 ; and splockets, see clause No. 75. Fascia, see clause No. 85. Roof boarding, see clause No. 84. Eaves soffit, see clause No. 86, And an 1 in. X 7 in. beaded verge board. If this roof be cut up with hips, valleys, gutters, or in other ways, then see clauses Nos. 75, 77 to 81, 83, 89, 92 to 96 and 99, for other items which may be required. The upper wall plate may be fixed to the face of the wall on cast-iron corbels ; see Smith, clause No. 26, for corbels. Ceiling joists may be required; see clause No. 91. A purlin and strut may be neces- sary to support the rafters if the span be much greater ; see clause No. 75 for purlins and struts. (110) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 175 Lean-to roofs may be of some considerable span if framed up in a similar way to a king or queen post roof truss, as in clauses Nos. 75 and 101 respectively. Rafter and ridge (108) This form of roof may be used up to 12 ft. span with : Eafters 4 in. x2^ in. Eidge 7 in. x 1J in. Wall plates 4 in. x 3 in. Also see clauses Nbs. 75, 77 to 89, and 91 to 99, for any other parts to the roof which may be required, such as tilting fillets, splockets, boarding, fascia, eaves soffits and other items. Plain rafter and ridge roof with tie pie^e-?. '*'<>. * (109) Suitable for spans up to 18 ft., with :- Eafters 5^ in. x 2^ in. Eidge 8 in. x 1 J in. Wall plates 4 in. X 3 in. Tie pieces 9 in. x 2 in. See clauses Nos. 75, 77 to 89, and 91 to 99, for any other parts to the roof which may be required, such as tilting fillets, splockets, boarding, fascia, eaves soffits, and other items. A collar tie will strengthen this form of roof, and \ perhaps it is necessary for spans over 14 ft., when of course the scantlings of the various timbers would be reduced. Collar beam roof. fS-O (110) Suitable for spans up to 18 ft., with Eafters 4 in. x 2^ in. Eidge 7 in. X H in. Collars 5 J in. x 2 in. Wall plates 4 in. x 3 in. Purlins 5 in. x 3 in. See clauses Nos. 75, 77 to 89, and 91 to 99, for any parts to the roof which may be required, such as tilting fillets, splockets, boarding, fascia, 176 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (Ill) eaves soffits and other items. This form of roof is used in small attics and other places, to give additional room below, without increasing the height ot" the walls. The following sketch shows a class of roof which may be employed for spans up to 25 ft., when this shape of roof is required to show in the room below, and at the same time dispensing with cross ties and ridge piece. It may be constructed with the principals halved and bolted together at the junctions of the timbers, with the addition of wrought angle brackets screwed on to the under side of the timbers, as well as with straps on each face bolted through. The vertical timbers should be of some length. Circular ribs, either plain or moulded, may be added. If the principals are to show, then they should be wrought and moulded or chamfered on the under side. Valley roof. (HI) Suitable for span up to 18 ft. ; see clauses Nos. 75, 77 to 89, and 91 to 99, for the various parts to the roof which may be required, and in addition de- scribe the kerb (gutter) plates of such scantling according to the length. The rafters may be 4J in. X 2J in., and the wall plates 4 in. x 3 in. Purlin roof. (112) In a range of buildings intersected frequently with cross walls going up to the slating, the roof may be constructed without any cross timbers, the rafters being supported by the purlins. The timbers required mainly would be : The rafters. Eidge. Wall plates. Purlins. See clauses Nos. 75, 77 to 89, and 91 to' 99 for any other parts to the roof which may be required, such as tilting fillets, splockets, boarding, fascia, eaves soffits and other items. If the cross walls be some distance apart, say over 10 ft., then the purlins should be trussed to prevent them sagging, with wrought-iron rods and cast- iron hangers and shoes. The depth of the trussing should be one-eighth of the length. CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 177 DOMES AND CUPOLAS. (Clause No. 112a.) Large domes are usually now constructed in iron. The base of a dome or cupola may be a circle, an ellipse or a polygon. The ribs may be solid, or in thicknesses built up together; the latter being the stronger, and either with or without cross ties. In domes without horizontal ties, each rib may be formed of two or more thick- nesses of timber of the following sizes, the ribs being placed about 2 ft. apart at the base. Philibert de 1'Orme gives that : For spans 24 ft. clear, the ribs may be formed of two 8 in. X 1 in. timbers. For spans 36 ft. clear, the ribs may be formed of two 10 in. x 1J in. timbers. For spans 60 ft. clear, the ribs may be formed of two 13 in. X 2 in. timbers. For spans 90 ft. clear, the ribs may be formed of two 13 in. X 2J in. timbers. For spans 108 ft. clear, the ribs may be formed of two 13 in. x3 in. timbers. Timber framed dome. (112a) For a dome 24 ft. internal diameter, with a circular base and without cross ties, the description may run : The dome to be formed with ribs spaced 2 ft. apart at the base, each rib being composed of two (or three) 8 in. x 1 in. planks, in three (or four) feet lengths breaking joint, and cut to the shape of the dome, and bolted together every 1 ft. apart with f in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers, and secured at the base to a 9 in. x 6 in. sole piece (kerb), halved and bolted at joints with f in. (or J. in.) bolts, nuts, heads and washers (or secured to a sole piece composed of two 9 in. x3 in. timbers breaking joint, bolted together with J in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers). The rafters between the ribs to be cut out of 6 in. x 2J in. and spiked on. The head piece to be 12 in. x 5 in., formed up in three depths, breaking joint, and bolted together with J in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers. Then describe the boarding and the rolls for lead, the lantern ; and the finishing to the under side of the dome, which may be in plaster, or in boarding, either plain or panelled. N 178 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. An iron band or chain may be put round the sole piece. Every alternate rib may stop short of the apex of the dome, should they be too confined at that point. In a dome with cross ties, the ribs may be of less size, and framed somewhat on the principle of a roof truss or the centre to an arch. In this case the interior of the dome should not show from below. Ornamental shaped roofs. (112b) The construction of these forms of roofs would be similar to ordinary roofs ; the shaped portion being formed with filling-out pieces, secured to the rafters. If the roof be hollow shaped on the outer side, the rafters might be cut to the curve. These roofs are generally found in small shelters and summer houses. FLATS. (Clauses Nos. 113 to 128.) The construction of roof flats is similar to that of floors ; see clauses Nos. 46 to 51, 53 and 55 to 57 ; but the scantlings would be modified according to the weights on flats. The weights to be considered in constructing a roof flat, are the flat timbers, see notes preceding clause No. 46 ; the boarding, and the covering which may be in lead, zinc or copper ; and snow, see notes preceding clause No. 74 ; and the pressure of the wind, which on a flat may be taken at about 500 Ibs. per square (100 super, ft.). Hoof flat covered with lead (clauses Nos. 113 to 123). at>e* (113) Form flat over back addition with : Joists 7 in. x 2 \ in. (size varies as to span), furred up with 2J in. stuff to falls of 2 in. in 8 feet (or 10 ft.), with the ends of tarings (or joists) at wall and gutter eaves taken off some 4 in. (or 6 in.) back by 1 in. deep. Put 2 in. (or 1 J in.) cross rebated drips every 8 ft. (or 10 ft.) apart. Wall plates 4 in. (or 4J in.) x 3 in. in long lengths, scarfed at joints, and halved and dovetailed at angles. Gutter plates (kerbs) 9 in. x 3 in. (varies as to span and load). 1 J in. (or 1 in.) x 9 in (12 in., 15 in. or 18 in.) gutter boards and framed bearers, with 2 in. (or 1 in.) cross rebated drips every 10 ft. apart, and 1^ in. angle fillets along the angles. If a box gutter project into a room, it may be lined round on the under side, with 1 in. wrought, grooved and beaded linings, with perhaps a small moulding against the wall and ceiling as a finish. An 1 in. (or | in.) splayed flashing board may be taken in the gutter against the wall to dress the lead over. Herring-bone (I23a) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 179 strutting is not often put to flat joists, the boarding above forming a tie. Pugging and felt will add to the warmth and coolness of the room below. Cesspools. (114) See clause No. 78. Boarding. (115) Cover flat with 1 in. (or f in.) rough boarding, edges shot, laid with horizontal joints (or diagonally). The boarding may be iron tongued, see clause No. 61. Felt (H6) Lay over the flat and gutter boarding under the rolls best asphalted roofing felt about ^ in. thick, properly passed, lapped and tacked on every 3 in. apart with 1J in. clout nails 5 Ib. per 1000 (or 1 in. copper nails). Felt may also be put under zinc and copper covered flats. See notes to clause No. 8 under Slater, for other kinds of felt. Tilting fillets. (117) Put 1 in. (or 2 in.) angle tilting fillets against junctions of flat with walls, skylights and trap doors. Trap door. (118) See clauses Nos. 92 and 93. Bolls. (119) To be 2 in. x 2 in. rounded deal, spaced 2 ft. 6 in. centres. Also see clause No. 4 under Plumber, for rolls ; and clauses Nos. 1 and 4 under Zincworker, and clause No. 1 under Coppersmith. Fascia. (120) 1 in. (or 11 in.) x 7 in. (or 9 in.) wrought deal beaded fascia screwed to ends of joists. Pugging. (i2l)_See clause No. 46 if required, strutting. (122) See clause No. 49 if required. -Ceiling joists. (123) See clauses Nos. 53, 55 and 56 if required. SmaU lean-to flat. (123a) In a small flat like that over an outside w.c., the timbers required would be : Joists cut to falls, see clause No. 113. Wall plates, see clause No. 113. Tilting fillets against walls, see clause No. 117. Fascia round two sides, see clause No. 120. Boarding, see clause No. 115. Felt and pugging, see clauses Nos. 116 and 121 respectively. Eolls, see clause No. 119. For any other items which might bs required, see clauses Nos 113 114, 118 and 122. K 2 i8o CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (124) Flat with lantern (124) Each of the two main girders carrying the lantern light to be formed of two Ilin.x4in. fir timbers, with an 11 in. x J in. wrought-iron flitch plate between, bolted through every 2 ft. apart at alternate heights with J in. (or | in.) bolts, nuts,, heads, and 4 in. X 4 in. x J in. wrought-iron washers placed on the face of the timbers. The girders to rest 9 in. on walls at each end, with 2 ft. 6 in. X 9 in. X 3 in. tooled York templates under. Each of the two cross girders between the two main girders to be one 11 in. x4 in. fir timber,, secured to the main girders with 11 in. x 5 in. X f in. wrought-iron angle plates on each side, and bolted through with four J in. (or f in.) bolts, nuts, heads, and 4 in. x 4 in. X J in. wrought-iron washers to each angle plate. An 1 in. diameter bolt with nuts, heads and washers may in addition run along the side of each of the cross girders tieing the main girders together. Then describe the joists, the furring, the drips, wall plates, gutter plates, gutters and drips, cesspools, board- ing, felt, tilting fillets, trap door, rolls, fascia, pugging,, strutting, and ceiling joists, as in clauses Nos. 113 to 123. The girders vary in scantling according to the loads and spans. The main girders may be of rolled iron (or steel) joists instead of flitch plates, and to which the cross girders would be bolted in the same way. Lantern kerb. (125) To be 3 in. thick, standing up 4 in. above level of flat at highest point, grooved all round for water bar, and dovetailed at angles. If for some cause the lantern kerb be very deep, it would be a waste of material to form it up off the girders in solid timber. It may then take the form of simple cradling, with 3 in. X 3 in. heads, sills and angle posts, dovetailed together with 3 in. X 2 in. studs every 2 ft. apart. Linings. (126) Line round the kerb framing with 1 in. (or 1 in.) deal moulded panelled framed apron linings, tongued at angles, beaded (or moulded) on edge, with a 3 in. x 2 in. capping (sill) moulding and 2 in. x 1 J in. necking moulding planted round, and a 2 in. X 1^ in. soffit moulding on narrow splayed grounds. (127) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 181 The linings may also be 1 in. wrought deal grooved and tongued, matched and beaded boarding, with staff bead on in. soffit moulding on narrow splayed edge, and 2 J in. X grounds. or 1 in. wrought deal beaded, grooved and cross-tongued boarding, with rounded edge and grooved for plaster. or 1 in. wrought deal beaded, sunk, grooved and cross- tongued boarding, with rounded edge and grooved for plaster. or 1 in. (or 1 J in.) wrought deal sunk and moulded panelled framing, tongued at angles, beaded (or moulded) on edge, and with a 2 J in. X 1J in. soffit moulding on narrow splayed grounds. The capping (sill) moulding would be required in each case. lantern. (127) The lantern to be framed with : J in. x 4J in. wrought, twice rebated, twice beaded, (or twice chamfered or neither) and twice (or once) staff beaded angle posts. in. x 3 in. twice rebated, twice beaded (or twice chamfered or neither) and twice staff beaded intermediate posts. in. x 4 in. splayed, rebated, beaded (or cham- fered or neither) and staff beaded head, with a 3 in. x 1 J in. moulding round planted on. Jfead 182 CARPENTER, JOINEll AND IRONMONGER. (127) Si/I If the skylight glass be kept some J in. (J in. to J in.) clear of the head, a condensation gutter will not be required. If the angle posts are out of 6 in. x 6 in., the look of the lantern on the inside will be much improved, and in this case it would be three times staff beaded instead of twice. 7 in. X 3 in. (or 3J in.) twice sunk, twice weathered, throated, grooved and staff beaded oak sill, se- cured with handrail screws at angles, with an 1 J in. X J in. galvanised iron water bar bedded in white lead, and 2J in. x 2 in. sill moulding round planted on. Fill in the lantern framing with 2 in. (If in. or 1 J in.) moulded sashes, rebated all round for glass. Each sash to be hung at top (or sides) on one pair of 3 in. brass (or wrought-iron) butts, and glazed with 21 oz. fluted sheet glass in putty, and sprigged. The vertical lights to skylights are frequently glazed with leaded glass, similar to clauses Nos. 10 and 11 in Glazier. State if sashes are hung on centres, see notes to clause No. 170 ; or if sashes are in small squares, also see notes to clause No. 170. Gear. Allow the p.c. sum of 5 for opening and shutting gear to sashes. It is usual to open and shut the vertical lights of lanterns with some special gearing, so that all the lights on each side can be opened at one time. If the sashes are provided with lines, cleats, pulleys and fastenings,, see notes to clause No. 170. For blind, see Carpenter, clause No. 163, with notes, and for gas, see Gasfitter, notes to clause No. 8. Skylight. The skylight framing to be formed with 3 in. x 2 in. twice rebated and twice moulded (or twice chamfered), bars, with 2 in. X 2 in. rounded (or twice splayed) cap- ping on top, screwed with brass (or iron) rose-headed screws ; 4 in. x 2 in. similar hips, and 7 in. x 2J in. twice grooved, rounded (or twice splayed) and twice moulded ridge. Glaze skylight with Hartley's J in. (fa in. or \ in.) rolled, close-ribbed plate in putty, the sheets to lap at joints J in. (to 1 in.), and be cut a segmental shape, and clipped together with copper (or zinc) clips in. (or f in.) wide screwed to head. The glass eaves to overhang the lantern head 2 in., and kept up J in. clear of the lantern head. (127) CAKPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 183 The hips may be formed similar to the ridge. For iron skylights see Smith, clause No. 28. See clause No. 4 under Glazier for another method of glazing sky- lights. If a skylight be glazed with clear sheet, it is always well to glaze the eaves portion with Hartley's J- in. rolled plate for about 12 in. to 18 in. up, as the eaves are always liable to cra^k through icicles clinging to them during frosty weather. In this method of skylight framing to a lantern, the bars act as rafters. If the span be great, then either the bars must be stronger or else purlins will be required, which may be in small T iron (or timber) connected to strong hip rafters, and perhaps iron rod ties also may be necessary. The skylight framing, if of considerable span, may be supported on a king post con- struction. If three or more of the bars meet at the junction of the hips with the ridge, a 3 in. X 3 in. wrought, turned, finial stop will be required, otherwise there is nothing for the bars to frame into. Here are a few further details of lantern lights : A condensation gutter is required at A, which may be formed in the moulding and lined with 4 Ib. lead, with outlet holes bored through the sill, and short lengths of J in. lead pipe. wiffi JLantern with flat h/atn 6ar-s . en, tofo.. ' - The side lights of lanterns may be to similar details as casement lights, see clause No. 170, with notes. 1 84 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (127) If there be only a skylight and no vertical side lights, then the description of the skylight would be similar to the " skylight " paragraph of this clause ; and the kerb would be described as 3 in. thick, in splayed rough deal ; the apron linings would be similar to those in clause No. 126. The kerb, if deep, would be framed up as in notes to clause No. 125. Skylights may also be formed with framing instead of merely with . n n bars, when the description would run : SSlTT I ^1 fp The skylight to be formed with 2 in. (If in. or IJin.) framing, having: 4Jin. (to 6 in.) moulded (or chamfered) ridge rails and hip styles grooved for glass, and rebated into the ridge and hips. 6 in. throated bottom rail, kept in. clear of the glass. 1J in. (or 2 in.) twice rebated and twice moulded (or twice chamfered) bars. 6 in. x 2 J in. twice grooved, rounded and twice moulded ridge and hips. Glaze skylight with Hartley's in. (-f^ in. or i in.) rolled, close-ribbed plate in putty, the sheets to lap at joints in. (to 1 in.), and be cut a segmental shape, and clipped to- gether with copper (or zinc) clips ^ in. (or f in.) wide screwed to head. The eaves to overhang the bottom rail 2 in. Instead of grooving the hip and ridge and rebating the framing into them, a small wrought angle fillet may be spiked on to catch the framing ; and the hips and ridge dressed over with 5 Ib. lead screwed on with copper screws and lead dots to cover the heads. The bars and framing may be square on the under side. The glazing may bed down on to the bottom rail, which may also be splayed, and with this form of skylight framing a condensation gutter is necessary. It may either be formed in the lantern head (or kerb), or out of the moulding- planted round the head (or kerb), with J in. outlet holes every 2 ft. apart bored through the head (or kerb) to the outside. The gutter and outlet holes may be lined with lead. (130) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 185 Skylight guards and ventilator. (128) See Smith, clauses Nos. 31 and 28 respec- If a lantern have a flat on top, it will the more readily take a ventilator. Lanterns over (129) Lantern lights to king and queen post roofs ing o* 611 P st are framed up in a similar manner to clause No. 127, or as mentioned in the notes. If only a skylight be required, then also see notes under clause No. 127 ; the kerb piece might be wrought, or else finished with linings as in clause No. 126. Also see notes referring to lanterns under clause No. 101. Skylights in roof planes. (130) Also see clause No. 93. It is somewhat difficult to keep the weather out of a skylight when it is hinged for ventilation. It is a better plan to put a small vertical light to open, with a fixed skylight over. Here are a few details of this form of skylight ; they are especially useful over larders and w.c/s when ordinary windows cannot be obtained. When over larders, perforated zinc may be described over the sash portion, see clause No. 153. r - r ~l i i 1 i i [L _ p : ._. tin j: i 1 1 4 1 J r B i86 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (131) Large fixed skylights in roof planes may be formed with rafter bars, as in clause No. 127 and notes. Skylights against walls. (131) Here are a few details : The framing would be similar to the notes in clause No. 127, or it might be formed with bars somewhat similar to the skylight paragraph in clause No. 127. Iron skylight. (132) See Smith, clause No. 28. Ceiling lights to Skylights. (133) Form ceiling light with a 2 in. (or 1J in.) moulded deal sash in small squares, rebated out for glass, and glazed with 16 oz. muffled sheet (or other- obscured or clear glass) in putty. Rebate out the sash on the outer edges, and fix to fillets spiked to kerb of skylight. Provision should be made for cleaning the ceiling light, either by hinging it to the kerb and fastening it with bolts, or else by access from the out- side. Elliptical sky- lights. (134) These would be constructed with straight bars similar to an ordinary skylight. See the skylight paragraph in clause No. 127. The kerb would have to be built up similar to the kerb of a dome, see clause No. 112a. (135) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. I8 7 Skylights over staircases. (134a) Lantern lights and skylights are especially useful over staircases, and, according to the requirements of the case, may be similar to clauses Nos. 125 to 134. In principal staircases a double skylight may be em- ployed, the outer framing being in wood or iron, similar to the clauses just mentioned ; and the inner light being either as in clause No. 134, or else, if in iron,, then similar to clause No. 28 in Smith, and clause- Xo. 15 under Glazier. QUARTERED PARTITIONS. (Clauses Nos. 135 to 137.) It is better to let quartered partitions have a direct bearing on the walls, and not rest upon the floor joists ; but in ordinary work of small spans it is usual to let the partitions rest upon the floors, and in this- case braces are not absolutely necessary. Floor joists should not have a bearing upon partitions unless they be specially framed to receive them. Where a quartered partition joins brickwork the plastering usually cracks, owing to the shrinkage of the timber and the settlement of the walls. If the studs be over 2 in. wide, the edges should be taken off to give a better key for the plastering. Nails from which to hang pictures can only be securely driven into quartered par- titions where the studs and nogging pieces occur. Quartered (135) The framed quartered partitions on the first an( * secon -d floors to be mortised and tenoned together,. 4.V in. (or 4 in.) x 4 in. (or 3 in.) heads and sills bearing 4^ in on walls, with 4J in. (or 4 in.) X 4 in. (or 3 in.) wall posts, door posts and door heads ; the wall posts to- have the arrises taken off J in. (or | in.) (as a better key for the plastering). 4J- in. (or 4 in.) x 3 in. braces. 4-J- in. (or 4 in.) x 2 in. studs (quarters) and puncheons, placed at 12 in. centres. in. (or 4 in.) x 1 J in. nogging pieces every 3 ft. (or 4 ft.) apart, the first row being placed 12 in. down from the ceiling 2 in. thick, so as to form a solid rail into which nails may be driven for hanging pictures. If partitions run parallel with and between the floor joists, then bridging pieces must be mentioned as : 4 in. x 3 in. bridging pieces every 2ft. apart, fixed between the joists on 3 in. X 2 in. fillets. i88 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (136) Partitions supporting their own weight only, may be constructed with: 4 in. x 3 in. heads, posts, sills and braces for a bearing up to 25 ft. 4 in. (or 5 in.) x 3 J in. heads, posts, sills and braces for a bearing up to 30 ft. 6 in. x 4 in. heads, posts, sills and braces for a bearing up to 40 ft. The studs (quarters) and nogging pieces would remain the same widths in any case, namely 2 in. and 1 in. respectively. In large partitions it is better to frame (truss) them either as a king or queen post construction similar to a roof, especially when they take the bearing of the floor above ; thus the sill takes the place of the tie beam, the braces that of the principal rafters, and the centre posts or door posts that of the king or queen posts. The weights to be considered would be the floor above, if it bear on the partition ; together with the weight of the partition itself. Dwelling house floors may be taken at about 140 Ibs. to 200 Ibs. per ft. super., and see notes preceding clause No. 46 for weights on floors. Quartered partitions may be taken at about 15 Ibs. to 20 Ibs. per ft. super. Trussed quartered partitions. (136) The framed quartered partitions on the first and second floors to be mortised and tenoned together, having : 9 in. x 4J in. sills, with ends cased in cast- iron shoes f in. metal 9 in. long, and bearing 9 in. on walls at both ends, upon 3 ft. x 9 in. x 3 in. tooled York templates. 6 in. X 4 in. braces. 4J in. x 4 in. heads, bearing 4J in. on walls at each end. 5 in. X 4J in. queens and 4J in. X 4J in. wall posts (or king and wall posts), with arrises taken off f- in. (or 1 in.). 4 in. x 4J in. door heads. 44 in. X 2 in. studs (quarters) and puncheons placed at 12 in. centres. 4;^- in. X 1 J in. nogging pieces every 3 ft. (or 4 ft.) apart, the first row being placed 12 in. down from the ceiling 2 in. thick, so as to form a solid rail into which nails may be driven for hanging pictures. Allow J cwt. per square of partitioning of wrought (139) CARPENTER, JOINER, AND IRONMONGER. 189 forged strap iron, bolts, nuts, heads, washers,, plates and hanging straps (or these may be described in detail). See Smith, clause No. 19, with notes, for sizes of straps to partitions. When a partition is somewhat high, an intertie must be mentioned. Here are two sketches of these partitions : Sound-proof quartered par- titions. Silicate, (137) Describe the framing as clauses Nos. 135 or 136, and go on : Cover the partitions on both sides with hair felt, " No. 5," f in. thick, 48 oz. per sheet, fill in between the studs and felting with silicate cotton (loose hair, felt or sawdust), and batten out the studs on both sides with J in. (or 1 in.) x 2 in. (or 2^ in. ) fir battens to receive the plastering. Hair felt is made in five thicknesses, in lengths up to 60 ft. by 3 ft. wide, and in sheets 20 in. wide by 34 in. long. No. 1 size is J in. thick, weighing 16 oz. per sheet. 2 | in. ,, 24 oz. 3 , in. ,, 32 oz. , n. in. in. 40 oz. 48 oz. When the stud framing is over 2 in. wide, battens may be nailed on to- receive the plaster, instead of chamfering the angles- as mentioned in notes preceding clause 135. Brick-nogged (138) See Bricklayer, clause No. 65. If the walls partitions. are ^ ^ Q battened for wood panelling, see clause No. 189 ; but if battened for plastering, then as clause No. 48 in Plasterer. Paint frames. WINDOWS, SHUTTERS AND BLINDS. (Clauses Nos, 139 to 178.) (139) Before fixing any windows in position, paint three times in oil colour those parts, both of solid and cased frames, where buried in the walls. CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (140) Bed sills. (140) See clause No. 9, which may perhaps be inserted here ; as also parts of clause No. 10. Weigh sashes. (141) The sashes for cased window frames to be carefully weighed after glazing, and the weights sup- plied, to evenly balance them when hung. Lead weights require less space than iron, lead being the heavier metal. Window sills. (142) Sills to solid and cased frames to be in English oak. Window backs. (143) Window backs to be canvassed over at back and painted three oils, the brickwork being also roughly rendered. See Plasterer, clause No. 54. Window sills should not be fixed at too great a height from the floor, otherwise it is impossible to see out of the windows when sitting near ; 2 ft. 6 in. from the floor to the top of sill should be the maximum, but the lower the better. CASED FRAMES WITH SASHES. (Clauses Nos. 144 to 160 arid 177.) Simple cased frames in a 9 in. wall. (144) Fill in each window opening to basement and servants' offices with wrought deal cased frames having :- 1 in. grooved outside linings. 1 in. twice grooved inside linings, with 1 in. (or 1 j in.) x f in. inside bead planted on. 1 ,in. twice rebated and grooved pulley styles, with pocket pieces for access to weights, and f in. (or in.) parting beads. 2 in. twice rebated head linings, blocked out, and with bead planted on | in. rebated back linings. J in. parting slips (or 16 guage zinc). 3 in. twice sunk, twice weathered and check throated oak sill, grooved for iron tongue and window nosing (or window board), with bead 1J in. deep planted on for ventilation, and 1^ in. X ^ in. (or 1 in. X in.) galvanised iron water tongue bedded in white lead. (144) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 11 in. (or 1J in.) rounded (or moulded) window nosing, rebated to oak sill, with returned and mitred ends, and 2 in. x 1 J in. returned and mitred moulding under, on narrow splayed grounds. 2 J in. (or 3 in.) x 1 J in. moulded architrave, mitred at angles, on narrow splayed grounds. Fill in each frame with If in. (1J- in. or 2 in.) ovolo (lamb's tongue or otherwise), moulded, double hung deal sashes, rebated for glass, with splayed bottom rail, splayed (or rebated) meeting rails, and two moulded horns on each sash. Hang sashes with Austin's patent extra fine twine (flax) lines (or copper wire) over 3 in. brass-faced axle pulleys having 2 in. brass wheels, and balance with round cast-iron (or lead) weights ; and provide with a 3 in. patent brass spring sash fastener, p.c. 2s. 3c., two brass sash lifts (state if flush) p.c. Is. Qd. per pair, and two brass pull-down sash handles, p.c. 3s. per pair. Glaze sashes with 26 oz. clear sheet glass, bedded in putty and sprigged. A deep bead is placed on the oak sill, to allow the lower sash to be raised so that air may pass through the meeting rails without the window being actually open. See clause No. 160 for windows to floors above. The inside linings may be splayed off to form a key for the plaster, instead of having the narrow splayed grounds at the back of the architrave. Sometimes wrought moulded frame grounds are fixed to the inside lining. The moulding under the window nosing is not always provided. State if sashes, frames and architraves have segmental (semicircular or elliptical) heads, or if to similar sweeps on plan ; also state if sashes be divided into small squares with moulded bars. See notes to clause No. 170 for size of bars. In a 9 in. wall, with sashes 2 in. thick (or more), the back lining would slightly show out from the face of the plaster ; in that case a small filling-in piece would be required round the frame. The parting bead may be put to the head lining, which would be grooved out to receive it. CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (144) In inferior work the back lining consists of narrow strips of wood merely nailed across, and only some f in. thick, but it is very poor work, although often done even in better class work. If a window opening have a brick sill, an iron tongue cannot be fixed in it, and water is liable to penetrate beneath the oak sill of the frame and cause dampness. A remedy for this is to put a piece of 4 Ib. (5 Ib. or 6 Ib.) lead flashing, worked into a groove in the oak sill, and projecting slightly over the brick sill. When a bay window is formed with cased frames showing entirely to the weather, without brick or stone piers, the window may be framed up as sketch. A staff* bead may be worked on the angles. Mention the 1 in. wrought beaded (or moulded) fascia, witli any necking or cornice mouldings planted on. The sill may be moulded. The lintels, flat joists, plates, rafters, board- ing and covering may be described here. If the bay be slated or tiled, the cornice moulding might be an iron gutter. When frames are built in walls, finished on the inner side either in plain or glazed brickwork instead of plaster- ing, the linings may be omitted altogether, but a small moulding should be described round the inner side of the frames as a finish, see Bricklayer, notes to clause No. 89. A window board may or may Pl ar1 , in . not be required. The elbows, head and sills may have cement linings worked into a groove in the frame, with the arris taken off, see Plasterer, clause No. 50. A deal window board may be provided instead of being a cement sill lining. (145) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 193 When sashes are required to be double glazed for warmth, the outer thickness of glass may be sprigged and puttied, and the inner thickness bedded in putty and fixed with im|;jj| ^3 loose beads, with a slight space left in between the W&vm i!" two sheets of glass from in. to 1 in., according to the thickness of the sash. Sash bars to this class of glazing must be of some width, to which the loose bead may be fixed, but if the bars be required some- what thin, then a rebated moulding may be fixed instead of the loose beads. Also see notes to clause No. 170 for size of bars. To existing ' Larder windows. W.C. windows. ^ Simple cased frames with elbow and soffit linings in 14 in. (or L thicker) walls. windows, as a precaution against cold, casements either with or without frames may be placed on the outer side. The sketches will show two methods. The casements may be similar to any of those shown in clause No. 170. If the outer casements be re- quired without a separate frame, state that the hinges are to be secured to wood blocks fixed in the outer reveals. In outer case- ments with frames, the timber frame need only be of sufficient thickness to take the screws of the hinges. See clause No. 153. See clause No. 154. (145) Fill in each window opening to basement and servants' offices with wrought deal cased frames having : 1 in. grooved outside linings. 1 in. twice grooved inside linings, with 1 in. (or \\ in.) x | in. inside bead planted on. 1 in. twice rebated and grooved pulley styles, with pocket pieces for access to weights, and | in. (or J in.) parting beads. 2 in. twice rebated head lining, blocked out and with bead planted on. | in. rebated back linings. J in. parting slips (or 16 gauge zinc slips). 3 in. twice sunk, twice weathered and check throated oak sill, grooved for iron tongue and window nosing (or window board), with bead 1J in. deep planted on for ventilation, and \\ in. x T 3 g in. (or \\ in. xi in.) galvanised iron water tongue bedded* in white lead. 194 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (145) li in. (or 1 in.) rounded (or moulded) window board on bearers, rebated to oak sill, with re- turned and mitred ends, and 2 in. x 1|- in. re- turned and mitred moulding under, on narrow splayed grounds. lin. wrought deal, twice rebated, square (or splayed) elbows and soffit lining, tongued at angles, on backings, with an extra groove formed round the inside lining of frame to receive the elbows and soffit, and the soffit lining kept sufficiently high to receive a roller blind. 4 in. x } in. (or 1 in.) grooved, splayed, beaded (or moulded) grounds, with 2J in. ( or 3 in.) X 1 J in. moulded architrave, mitred at angles. Then describe the sashes, glass and ironmongery, as in clause No. 144. The architraves may be to any other size. See notes on architraves under clause No. 244. The parting bead may be put to the head lining, which would be grooved out to receive it. The linings to larders, pantries, and windows in similar positions, may be rebated, grooved and rounded, instead of being pro- vided with grounds and architraves. State if the head lining, architrave and grounds are to be to segmental (semicircular or elliptical) sweeps to follow any similar sweeps of the heads to sashes and frames. State if windows are to similar sweeps as plan. If circular-headed windows have square head linings, spandril pieces must be mentioned. State if sashes are divided into small squares with moulded bars. The class of windows mentioned in clauses Nos. 144 and 145 are suitable for all ordinary positions in any ordinary building. If panelled elbows, soffit or window back be required to this class of window, see clause No. 146 and notes. (146) CAEPENTEE, JOINEE AND lEONMONGrEE. 195 Cased window frames are often specified with a very short description, as in the following manner : Fill in window openings in basement and servants' offices with deal cased frames, oak sunk, weathered and throated sills, 2 in. ovolo moulded sashes and so on, without mentioning the particular sizes and labours to each part ; but it is the wrong way to describe work in so rough a manner, unless full-size details be provided, when of course the description may be curtailed. Cased frames for the best class of work with panelled linings. (146) Fill in each window opening on ground and first floor with wrought deal cased frames having : 1^ in. grooved and moulded outside linings. 1 in. twice grooved inside linings, with 1 in. X 1 in. inside moulded beading planted on. 1J in. twice rebated and grooved pulley styles, with pocket pieces for access to weights, and f in. moulded parting beads (the pulley styles and beads are sometimes in oak, walnut or mahogany when the sashes are in a similar wood ; the bead is then fixed with brass socket screws). 2 in. twice rebated, grooved and moulded head lin- ing (state if splayed), blocked out, and with a | in. moulded parting bead, and inside moulded beading planted on. in. rebated back linings, in. parting slips (or 16 gauge zinc slips). in. twice sunk, twice weathered, and twice check throated oak sill, grooved for iron tongue and window board (or window nosing), with a checked out moulded bead 2 in. deep planted on for ventilation, and 1 in. x i in. gal- vanised iron water tongue bedded in white lead. Here is an alternative method of forming the oak sill. 196 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (146) The frames are to project sufficiently beyond the out- side reveals to take an 1J in. x 1 in. moulded deal (or oak) guard bead planted round the frame, and the oak sills to be sufficiently wide to stop this moulding. Fill in each frame with 2 in. (or 2^ in.) moulded double hung deal (oak, walnut or mahogany) sashes rebated for plate glass, with movable moulded beads and brass cups and screws, throated and splayed bottom rail, splayed (or rebated) meeting rails, with two moulded horns on each sash. Hang sashes with Austin's patent extra fine plaited twine (hemp) line (or copper wire), over 3 in. brass-faced axle pulleys having 2 in. brass wheels, and balance with cast lead weights, and provide with one 3 in. patent brass spring sash fastener, p.c. 3s., two brass flush sash lifts, p.c. 2s. per pair, and two brass pull-down sash handles, p.c. 3s. per pair. Glaze sashes with J in, full (or thin) British polished plate glass, bedded in putty and wash leather. The inside bead may be rebated on to the pulley style. State if sashes and frames are segmental (semicircular or elliptical) headed, and if sashes are divided into small squares with moulded bars. --=- ^jnner dead Put 1J in. wrought deal, twice rebated, three (or more) panels high, moulded square (or splayed) elbows, and similar one-panel square (or splayed) soffit lining, tongued at angles, on skeleton framed dove-tailed backings, an extra groove being formed round the inside lining of frame to receive the panelling, and the soffit lining kept sufficiently high to receive a roller blind. 4 J in. X 1 in. wrought deal, grooved, sunk, beaded, (or moulded) splayed grounds, with 3J in. x If in. moulded architrave, mitred at angles, with solid shaped plinth stops at foot the height of skirting. \\ in. (or 1 J in.) moulded deal window nosing, re- bated to oak sill, and with an 1 J in. X 1 in. mould- ing under. 1J in. wrought deal three (more or less) panel moulded window back on backings, splayed to elbows, canvassed over at back and painted three times in oil colour. Put 7 in. X 3 in. moulded deal skirting on grounds, returning round the elbows, and finished with returned and mitred ends. See Plasterer, clause No. 54, for rough rendering to brickwork at back of linings and window backs. (147) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. I 9 7 State if linings, window back or other parts be in oak, walnut or mahogany. If the elbows be carried down only as far as the sill and not to the floor level, then no window back will necessarily be required ; and instead of the window nosing, a window board on bearers would be described as rebated to the sill and elbows, with a small moulding under ; and the architrave would not then necessarily have plinth stops. But if under these circumstances a window back be required, then the architrave must be taken down to the floor. The skirting round the window back is not always put. State if soffit linings, architrave and grounds are to be to segmental (semicircular or elliptical) sweeps, to follow any similar sweeps of the heads of sashes and frames. State if windows are to circular sweeps on plan. The architraves may be to any other size ; see notes on architraves under clause No. 244. Panelled elbows, soffit linings and window backs would be equally applicable to a window of the description under clause No. 145 if the wall be thick. They need not necessarily be moulded, but simply square-panelled, and in that case 1 in. stuff would be sufficient ; or if moulded, then bead butt or bead flush panels might be provided in these positions. Windows with boxing shutters. (147) Describe the frame, the sashes, glass and iron- mongery, either as in clauses Nos. 144 or 146, and then follow on with : The shutters and .back flaps to be 1 in. wrought deal, moulded and bead flush (or moulded and bead butt) three-panel high (more or less) framings, rebated and beaded together, and hung in one height, on one and a half pair of wrought-iron flap and back flap hinges, and provided with two 1| in. diameter brass shutter knobs, and a shutter bar, p.c. 4s. The soffit lining to be 1 in. wrought deal, moulded and square one-panel framing, rebated to a groove in window frame, tongued at angles, and fixed sufficiently high to allow for a roller blind. Form the splayed boxings with 1 in. wrought deal, moulded two-panel high back linings with backings, rebated to groove in frame, and grooved to a J in. rebated return lining, 198 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (147) with a | in. beaded head and sill lining, with stops fixed on for shutters. The window back to be 1J in. wrought deal, three (more or less) panel moulded framing on backings, canvassed at back and painted three times in oil colour, and grooved to 1J in. one-panel high moulded and rebated elbow linings below the shutters. Take 7 in. x j in. moulded deal skirting on grounds round window back and elbows, and finish with returned and mitred ends. Put li in. (or 1J in.) rounded (or moulded) window nosing, rebated to groove in sill, and with an 1 J in. X 1 in. moulding under. The architrave to be 4.J in. X 1 J in. grooved, sunk, quirk beaded and moulded, mitred at angles and fixed to 1 in. splayed grounds, and finished with solid shaped plinth stops at foot the height of skirting. State if shutters are hinged in two heights, with bead joint on one edge. Shutter and back flap hinges may also be in brass or nickel plated. Shutter knobs may be in brass, iron, glass, china or wood ; or flush shutter handles may be used instead. Shutter bars may be in iron, brass, nickel plated or of some patent kind. The soffit lining to shutters is sometimes splayed to match the splayed boxings. The back flaps are sometimes in bead butt or bead flush panelling, and if small in width, say up to 7 in. wide, then without panels at all; but they should then be clamped. The front flap is generally in moulded panelling, unless it be very narrow. In high-class work, both shutters and back flaps may be moulded on both sides, they then require to be 1J in. thick. The elbow lining below the shutter need not be panelled if very narrow. The back lining of boxings may be in plain wrought deal without panelling ; and when space is a great object, the brickwork may be plastered over to form the back lining, dispensing with the wood lining. The small side return linings to the boxings are not always provided, and in that case the back linings of boxings are rebated to the grounds of the architrave. (148) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER, 199 According to the thickness of a wall, and the space to be obtained for the shutters, so is the number of the back flaps regu- lated. In a thin wall they must either fold back flat against the surface with a knuckle joint, or else the boxings must come out into the room con- siderably. The description would be modified accordingly. If it be desired not to show the interior of the boxings when the shutters are closed against the window, a shutter nap must be provided of a similar description to the shutters, but this is only required in very good work. hinye, When the heads are segmental or elliptical, it is somewhat difficult to cover the entire height of the window with shutters, the boxings necessarily being the least height of the window, and the shutters can only be of the same height. But by keeping the architraves up as much as possible, the shutters can be made to cover the window space in very flat segmental or elliptical heads ; other- wise lifting shutters must be adopted, or else the soffit lining and architrave must be square. Windows with lifting sliding shutters. sfyli (148) Describe the sashes, frames, glass and iron- mongery, similar to clauses Nos. 144 or 146, and follow on with : The boxings for lifting shutters to be formed with : 1 in. grooved outer linings, with 1 in. X f in. bead planted on. 1 in. twice grooved inner linings, with 1 in. X f in. bead planted on. li in. twice rebated and grooved pulley styles, with pocket pieces for access to weights, and J in. parting beads. 2 in. twice rebated and grooved head linings, blocked out, and with J in. parting bead and 1 in. x f in. beads planted on. 3 in. rebated back lining. i in. parting slips (or 16 gauge zinc parting slips). 3 in. X 1 J in. moulded architrave mitred at angles, on narrow splayed grounds, with solid shaped plinth stop at foot the height of skirting. 200 CARPBNTBB, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (148) t in. wrought deal three-panel (more or less) moulded, rebated and beaded movable window 1 >ack, secured to boxings with four brass flush bolts for access to shutters ; with 7 in. x in. moulded skirting at bottom and an 1 J in. flap at top, re- bated to an 1 J in. X 1 J in. twice rebated horizontal piece fixed to a groove in the oak sill of window frame. The flap to be hinged to the window back with one pair of 2 in. brass butts, and provided with two 1J in. diameter flush rings and plates. The brickwork at back of shutters to be rendered over in. thick with Port- land cement. The lifting shutters to be 1 in. (or 1^ in.) moulded and bead flush, three-panel (more or less) framings to each leaf, and hung with patent hemp (or twine) lines (or copper wire) over brass-faced axle pulleys having 2 in. brass wheels, and with cast lead (or iron) weights to evenly balance the shutters. Put two brass flush rings to each shutter for lifting, and two brass flush bolts for fixing. The space into which the shutters drop should be ventilated with an air brick at the bottom, to prevent them twisting ; this will also act as an air inlet to the room, which may be utilised by opening the small shutter flap. See Smith, clause No. 40, and Bricklayer, clause Xo. 57, for air bricks and flues. Lifting shutters are especially useful when the windows are semi- circular, segmental or elliptical headed ; they also have the advantage, when being opened, of not interfering with the drapery of the windows, as is sometimes the case with boxing shutters. If sufficient depth cannot be obtained under the window for lifting shutters to drop into, then shutters sliding horizontally may be used, but they are rather apt to get out of order. Here are some sketches showing how they would be formed. The description would be similar to ordinary boxing shutters, but at the same time mentioning wheels in lieu of hinges. The runners may pre- (149) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 2OI ferably be in oak. Instead of wheels, small pieces of lignum vitse (a very hard wood) may be fixed to the bottom rail of shutters, thus doing away with the noise occasioned by wheels. See clause No. 287, refer- ring to sliding cupboard fronts. Secfion of Single Shutfer Section o/ Douttte A/iuffer Windows with outside shutters. (149) Describe the frames, sashes, glass, iron- mongery and finishings similar to clauses Nos. 144, 145 or 146, according to the requirements of the case, and continue on with : The"outside shutters to be 1J in. (or 1 J in.) two panels high, moulded and bead butt fram- ings, with rebated and beaded meeting styles. Hang each shutter with one pair of 4J in. wrought- iron Parliament hinges to a 2 in. X 1 in. beaded fillet piece rebated to a groove formed in the outside lining of sash frame, the shutters to fold back flush with the outside face of wall, and secured when open by two wrought-iron shutter turns, and when shut with two 6 in. brass (or iron) barrel (or flush) bolts. Parliament hinges are made to open 3J in., 4 in., 4J in., 5 in. and 6 in. Small wood blocks may be fixed to receive the hinges in lieu of a continuous outside fillet ; or else the hinges may be fixed on to the outside lining of sash frame, when, in this case, the outside lining of frame should be at least 1J in. thick. This class of shutter is mostly found in the cottage class of building. 2O2 CAKPENTEE, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (149) Louvred or Venetian shutters are found in the better class of building, and may be hinged in exactly the same way, or else made to slide horizontally. The advantage of louvred shutters being, they allow the air to pass when closed. The description might run thus : Each window to the front of house to each story to be provided with wrought deal louvred sliding shutters formed with : 2 in. (2J in. or 3 in) x If in. (or 2 in.) beaded styles, grooved for louvres. 2 in. (2^ in. or 3 in.) x 2 in. (or 3 in.) beaded and splayed top rail. 2 in. (2J- in. or 3 in.) x 3 in. (or 3J in.) beaded and splayed bottom rail with small brass wheels. f in. twice splayed louvres, placed at an angle of 30 (or 45) 1 in. apart, and notched and housed into the styles. The runner (bottom guide) at foot to be in oak 1-i in. thick, perforated every 9 in. apart with J in. diameter holes to allow water to escape, and rebated to a 2 in. x | in. grooved oak bead at front and ends and screwed to a 2 in. X J in. oak bead at back (or else to a 2 in. X i in. brass or gun-metal bar at back) and secured at each end to wall with two wrought- iron bracket supports, |- in. metal 2 in. wide (or else small shaped brackets), screwed to the oak and built 9 in. into the wall. The top guide to be 2 in. thick, splayed and rebated with a f in. X | in. bead at front and ends, and a 2 in. X J in. bead at back (or 2 in. x in. gun-metal or brass bar screwed on at back), and secured to wall in a similar way as the bottom guide. Flash over on top of guide with 4 Ib. lead, wedged 1 in. into wall. For effect, this class of shutter may be kept up clear of the arch. When closed, the shutter should be slightly wider than the reveal opening. No bolts are absolutely required for fastening, as the shutters keep in place themselves. The meeting styles may be rebated and beaded. The top and bottom .guides may be connected together with upright pieces at each end, thus forming a frame. If the shutters be hinged, the top and bottom guides are not required, but the fastenings and hinges would be similar as to outside panelled shutters, and the meeting styles would be rebated and beaded. I Venetian cased frames. (150) The description of frames, sashes, glass linings, shutters and ironmongery, might be similar to (151) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 203 any of the clauses Nos. 144 to 148, with the addition of the centre mullion, which might be described as formed with : 1 in. grooved (or grooved and twice moulded) outside lining. 1J in. twice grooved and tongued centre guide, with | in. (or f in.) parting beads (or moulded parting beads) and 1 in. (or 1 J in.) X f in. (or 1 in.) inside beads (or moulded inside beads) planted on. The sketches above show two sets of sashes ; state that each sash is to be hung from the one side by a series of pulley wheels placed in the head of the frame, attaching the lines of each sash to one weight, and that the cased frames are to be made sufficiently large to take these large single weights. State if there be two mullions, and in this case there would be three sets of sashes ; the two side sets would open in the same way as a two- light window, and the centre -set might have fixed sashes ; but if desired this also may be made to hang in a similar way, by carrying the lines across the heads of the side sashes. There would then have to be a double boxing at one side to receive these weights, as shown in the sketch. Cas f. d . frames y 1 ^ (1^1) When two or more cased frames are near rtone 6 together, divided by narrow outside mullions, and there mullions. is not sufficient width for them each to have entirely separate frames, then the windows may be all framed together as one frame ; the description would remain exactly the same as with other cased frames, see clauses 204 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (152) Double sets of cased frames. Nos. 144 to 148 ; but those portions of the frames behind the mullions would require a centre lining ^ in. thick housed into grooves in the outside and inside linings of the frames. (152) The description might be similar to any of the clauses Nos. 144 to 151, with these modifications : 1J in. (or 1 in.) twice rebated and four times grooved pulley styles, with pocket pieces for access to weights, and three f in. parting beads (or moulded parting beads). f in. centre lining, housed into pulley style. 2 in. twice rebated and three times grooved head lining, blocked out, and with f in. part- ing beads (or moulded parting beads), and inside beading (or moulded inside beading) planted on. 3J in. (or 4 in.) thrice sunk, thrice weathered and twice check throated oak sill, grooved for iron tongue and window board (or window nosing), with bead 2 in. deep planted on for ventilation, and 1 in. xi in. galvanised iron water tongue bedded in white lead. When Venetian blinds are required to fall between two sets of double sashes, the sketches will show the method of framing; see notes to clause No. 177 for air inlets. For solid frames with casements under similar conditions, see clause No. 172. For cased frames in- side with solid frames outside and Venetian blinds between, see clause No. 177. For Venetian blinds, see clause No. 161. (156) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 205 Meat and game (153) When the shelving comes across the windows, larder windows hwg sashes become necessary, as casements would with louvres and o ,- , J ' ,, , , . zinc or wire not open internally on account of the shelving, nor ex- netting, ternally on account of the perforated zinc work. Describe the sashes and frames, similar to clause No. 144 or 145, and continue on with: cover the outside of windows with No. 16 gauge finely perforated zinc, copper nailed to frame. Galvanised iron, or copper fly wire netting may also be used. Larders should face the north or east ; if facing the south or west, a louvred shutter outside becomes necessary to keep out the rays of the sun. It may be described as : Fix to the outside of each of the larder windows a louvred shutter, formed with 2 in. (or 1 J in.) X 3 in. (or 2 J in.) wrought deal beaded frame grooved for louvres, 3 in. (or 2 in.) X 3 in. beaded weathered oak sill, f in. twice splayed louvres placed 1 in. apart at an angle of 30 (or 45) and notched and housed into frame. See notes to clause No. 145, referring to larder windows. (154) May be similar to clauses Nos. 144 or 145 ; but should be glazed with 21 oz. fluted sheet glass (or other kind of obscured glass). (155) These may either be cased frames and sashes, as clauses Nos. 144 or 145, or solid frames and casements, as clauses Nos. 170 or 171. (156) To be formed in wrought mahogany (or deal), with : 1J in. (or 1J in.) moulded sash, glazed with 15 oz. fluted sheet glass in putty (or wash-leather and loose beads), and hung with hemp cords, lead (iron or gun-metal) weights, round brass-faced axle pulleys having 1 J in. wheels, and supplied with two 6 in. brass bolts, and one brass flush sash lift. 1J in. rebated pulley styles and head, with 2J- in. X 1 in. grooved and moulded architrave. 1 in. (or 1-J in.) grooved and beaded linings, with a similar architrave on the outside on narrow splayed grounds. 1 in. moulded (or rounded) grooved window board with 1 J in. x J in. rounded gun-metal bar, and a 2J in. x 1 in. moulding under on each side on narrow splayed grounds. W.C. windows. Dormer windows. Inquiry or pay window. 206 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (157) The weights may fall into a boxing similar to a window boxing. The shutter may be a moulded panel instead of glazed. Blind box. (157) When a blind box is required to take a Venetian blind, it may be described as : 1 in. (or 1 in.) wrought deal rebated top, with small moulding planted round. 1 in. (or 1| in.) wrought deal, grooved and beaded (or staff beaded) front, with 1 in. (or 1J in.) cut shaped brackets at ends, secured to wall with iron holdfasts screwed on. A Venetian blind to a window 10 ft. high will draw up into a space of about 12 in. deep. The brackets may be in iron or brass, the ends of blind box would then require to be similar to the fronts. When the blind box is outside, the top may be covered with 5 Ib. lead wedged into wall. If the window be of some considerable height, and the blind box consequently of some depth, the front may then be panelled out, and would be described as 1J in. (or 1J in.) three (or other) panel moulded and square framing, grooved and beaded (and :with plain return end pieces if there are metal brackets under). Eepairs to sashes and frames (or casements). Glass screens to windows. (158) Cut out decayed and damaged portions of sa shes (or casements), frames, sills and linings ; and . ) 4: . . , XT -i piece out with new. Put new parting beads. Nail up the loose inside beads. Hack out defective putty and reputty. Eeglaze where cracked or broken glass with new. Put all new ironmongery (or relacquer iron- mongery). (159) Similar to clause No. 165, but glazed with anv -^-^ o f O i 3scure( j j fluted or leaded. glass, instead of the wire blind mentioned in that clause. First and second floor cased frames, sashes, linings and shutters. (160) These may be similar to any of the clauses Nos. 144 to 152, 154, 157 and 159. If the building have additional stories, then the descriptions of the windows would also be similar. (166) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 207 Venetian blinds. BLINDS. (Clauses Nos. 161 to 167.) (161) Put to all windows, inside Venetian blinds having 2 \ in. (or 2 J in.) X -^ in. wrought pine laths with 2J in. (or 2 \ in.) x \ in. top and bottom laths finished sizes, rounded on edges, painted three coats in oil colour and once varnished, and supplied with best cords, tapes (ladders), webbing, and brass (or nickel) fastenings. The blinds to be screwed up with 3 in. screws. \Lath quark The laths may be plain varnished, or painted only. See notes to clause No. 157 for least space into which Venetian blinds will draw up. Repairs to (162) Take down all Venetian blinds, repair, re- tape, re-cord, and paint laths two coats in oil colour, once varnish, and refix (or else paint only and refix, or varnish only and refix). Other inside blinds. (163) May be in white linen, with wood rollers, hemp cords, turned wood acorn tassels 2 in. long, and brass fastenings. or, . in white, buff, brown, blue, green or striped union Holland, with similar rollers, cords and fastenings. If blinds have self-acting spiral spring rollers, the fastenings will not be required. Blinds under lantern lights may be in the various colours of Holland, and require lines, pulleys, cleats, guide- wires (or guide- rods), with spring rollers. The blinds may be painted three coats in oil colour to exclude more light. Blinds for conservatories may be in duck material. Shop blinds. Wire blinds. (164) See clause No. 315. (165) Put to ground-floor windows, painted wire blinds in French polished mahogany frames 1 in. (or 1 J in.) thick, with brass bolts, stubs and plates. (Give the height, and state if fixed between the inside beads of frame or to the sashes themselves). Revolving shutters. (166) See clause No. 315 with notes. 208 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (167) Eevolving shutters may be used to divide large rooms, or as a sub- stitute for doors, or for the ordinary window shutters. In all cases the gearing must be accessible for oiling and repairs. studs, *Aors,an*i 6olts. Repairs to shutters?* (167) Take down revolving shutters, fittings and & ear ' repaid oil g ear with neat's-foot (or olive) oil, and refix. (168) (169)- SOLID CASEMENT FRAMES, WITH CASEMENTS. Solid casements. Frames in good class work with casements hung to open outwards. (Clauses Nos. 170 to 178.) (170) Fill in each window opening on ground and first floor with solid wrought deal framing, having : 4 in. X 3 in. (3J in. or 4 in.) moulded and quirk beaded (or twice moulded), twice re- bated and twice water-hollowed frame, with 4J- in, X 3 in. (3 J in. or 4 in.) moulded and quirk beaded (or twice moulded) and once rebated head, and grooved all round for linings, with an 1 J in. X 1 in. oak (or deal) guard moulding planted round on the out- side. 4 in. X 3 in. four times rebated, twice moulded and twice quirk beaded (or four times moulded), and four times water-hol- lowed mullions. 4 J in. X 3 in. (or 3 J in.) sunk weathered, twice throated, rebated and twice moulded, and twice quirk beaded (or four times moulded) transome. 6 in. X 3 in. (or 3J in.) quirk beaded (or moulded), twice sunk, twice weathered, water-hollowed and check throated oak sill with rounded stop, and grooved for iron tongue and window board (or window nosing), and with an 1 J in. X ^ in. (or 1 J in. X i in.) galvanised iron water tongue bedded in white lead. (170) CAKPENTEK, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 209 Fill in with 2 in. (or 2} in.) moulded casements, rebated all round for glass, with loose beads, brass cups and screws, and having twice rebated hanging styles, splayed, throated and hollow grooved bottom rail 4 in. deep, with T 3 6 in. brass (or gun-metal) water bar screwed on, rebated and beaded meeting styles (or beaded and hook-jointed meeting styles), with moulded deal (or metal) stop screwed on. Glaze with 32 oz. sheet (or other) glass in putty. Hang each casement on one pair 3^ in. brass butts, with gun-metal washers, and provide each leaf with two 6 in. brass barrel bolts and one brass casement stay, p.c. 3s., and one brass casement fastener, p.c. 2s. 6d. to each single or folding casement. Fill in fanlight openings with similar framings and glass, each light being hung from the top on one pair 3J in. brass butts, with gun- metal washers, and provided with two brass fanlight stays, p.c. 2s. each, and orie brass fanlight fastener p.c. 2s. 6d. Then describe the linings, shutters, boxings, archi- traves, window backs, boards or nosings, and other finish- ings similar as in cased frames, see clauses Nos. 144 to 149. For outside linings see notes to clause No. 323. Should the weather find its way through the joint of the transome with the top rail of a casement, a small metal bar screwed on the transome will prevent it. State if frames and casements be to a circular sweep on plan ; if with segmental (semicircular or elliptical) heads put together with oak keys 'and wedges or pins (or with handrail screws). The glazing may be puttied and sprigged in the ordinary way, instead of being fixed with loose beads and brass cups and screws. State if*casements and fanlights be in small squares, giving the size of the bars ; such as 2 in. x 1^ in. (for 2 in. sashes), twice moulded and twice rebated bars. If loose beads be required, then the bars should be wider, say 2 in. X 1J in. If double glazing be required, see notes to clause No. 144. Mf'-i The fanlights may also be hung on butts, either at the side or on the bottom rail. They may also be hung on brass (or gun - metal) centres with movable beads, lines, cleats and pulleys, but when on centres it is difficult to keep out the weather. The beads may be rebated both to the sash and the frame. A brass espagnolette bolt fastener may be fixed on either one p I fotatn beads 2IO CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (171) of the folding casements instead of employing the small barrel bolts and casement fastener, when the casement would be grooved out to receive it. Messrs. Archibald Smith and Stevens make an excellent "* Mr casement bolt and fastener in one, the casements also in this case being grooved out to receive it. Here are some further details of casements with solid frames for high- class work : Frame Jfead ti>i/~/i faritigkt hinged at side or toft. Here are some further details suitable for solid frames and casements in simpler work : Various tSecf~io/i-s of *Sill liniu g s , shutters, boxings and finishings, see clauses Nos. 144 to 148. Solid frames and (174) These may be similar to clauses Nos. 170 or casements^W.C. m . the fanlight should open i nwarc l s f or pr i va cy, and the casements be glazed with 21 oz. fluted sheet or other obscured glass. Louvred windows with wood (or glass) louvres. (175) This class of unglazed window is mostly used in outside w.c.'s, giving ventilation and light at the same time. The description may run : Fill in window openings to outside w.c.'s with 4 in. X 3 in. wrought solid beaded frames, grooved for louvres. 4J in. X 3 in. weathered, beaded and grooved oak sill, with 1| in. x i in. galvanised iron water bar. bedded in white lead. 1 J in. X 1 in. beading as architrave, planted round frame on the inside. J in. deal twice splayed louvres, placed 2 in. apart at an angle of 30, notched and housed into frame. If the louvres be in J- in. Hartley's rolled plate glass, they should be made movable in case of breakages, and the grooves for the movable glass louvres would stop short of the outside edge of the frame, to form the stop for the louvres. For louvred windows to farm buildings, see clause No. 178. Outside casements fixed to existing windows. (176) See notes to clause No. 144. Outside casements can only be fixed in front of solid casement frames when the existing casements open inwards, unless the outer casements can be opened from the outside. (178) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 213 Cased and solid (177) The sketches will show how these windows ^witrveTetiaf' ma y be ^rmed. That part which is a cased frame, blinds between. together with its finishings, might be described some- 2) 'tin cf down, what similar to clauses Nos. 144 to 148, with an increased width to the sill, and the addition of an 1^ in. twice rebated centre lining, and \\ in. head boxing forming the space for the Venetian blinds. The solid frames might be similar to clause No. 170. With all double sets of cased frames, double sets of solid casements frames, or combined sets of cased frames and solid casement frames, air may be introduced between the outer and the inner lights by a flue, say 9 in. X4J in., rendered in cement and finished externally with a 9 in. X 6 in. or 9 in. x 9 in. cast-iron grating, and internally at the oak sill level with a 12 in. (or 18 in.)x4 in. hit-and-miss brass grating. For Venetian blinds see clause JSTo. 161. G witn louvres to farm buildings. (178) The sketches show how these may be framed. C-- I* re k fatten. Tran \some 214 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (179) The descriptions may run : Each of the windows in cow-house to be formed with : 4 in. (or 4^ in.) x 3 in. solid wrought deal frames, heads, transomes and mullions, part chamfered (or beaded) and part rebated for glass, with 2 in. x 2J in. twice chamfered louvre bars. 4 in. (or 4 in.) X 3 in. oak weathered sill, grooved for and with an 1 J in. x i in. galvanised iron tongue bedded in white lead. 2 in. sliding louvre framing, the bottom rail being splayed, and the framing sliding between oak buttons screwed to the sill and mullions and provided with an oak rose handle. Glaze the upper part with in. Hartley's rolled plate in putty and sprigged. The glazing may be fixed with loose beads. A stop bead may be placed round the frame on the inside. The sliding louvres are often employed in farm buildings without the glazed upper portion. BATTENING AND BRACKETING. (Clauses Nos. 179 to 191.) Battening for slated roofs. (179) See Slater, clauses Nos. 5, 6 and 12, with the notes to clause No. 6 in Slater. Battening for stone-tiled roofs. (180) See in Stone Tiler, the notes to clause No. 6 ; and for the oak laths clause No. 1 in Stone Tiler. Battening for tiled roofs. (181) See Tiler, clauses Nos. 2 and 3, with the notes to clause No. 2 in Tiler. Battening to tiled or slated walls. (182) See Tiler, clause No. 10 ; and Slater, clause No. 13. Battening for thatch. (183) See Thatcher, clause No. 1. Battening on walls for plaster (or cement), internal and external. (184) See Plasterer, clauses Nos. 48 and 65, with the notes to clauses Nos. 66 to 68 and 70 in Plasterer. Battening on quartered partitions and bricknogged partitions for fplaster (or cement). (185) See clauses No?. 137 and 138. (192) Battening (brandering) to ceiling joists for plaster. CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (186) See Plasterer, clause No. 28. 215 Battening on beams for plaster. (187) See Plasterer, clause No. 10. Battening on walls for wood panelling. (188) To be J in. (to 1J in.) thick by 2 in. (to 2J in, or 3 in.) wide fir battens, spaced 2 ft. 6 in. (to 3 ft.) apart, plugged to walls, and where against flues secured with wall hooks. Also see clauses Nos. 205 and 206. Battening on quartered partitions and bricknogged partitions for wood panelling. (189) Same as clause No. 188. Also see clauses Nos. 138, 205 and 206. Battening to ceiling joists for wood panelling. (190) Same as clause No. 188 if required, but secured to ceiling joists. Also see clause No. 208. Brackets for cornices and coves. (191) See Plasterer, clauses Nos. 9 and 32. SKIRTINGS. (Clauses Nos. 192 to 201.) Clause No. 12 may perhaps preferably be inserted here. Generally. (192) Grounds to be dovetailed at angles and plugged to walls. Skirtings to be tongued and mitred at angles, tongued together at heading joints, housed into architraves, and returned and mitred at ends. Note The walls at back of skirtings are to be plastered (or cemented) flush with the grounds (see Plasterer, clauses Nos. 41 and 45). When there is double flooring, the upper one being in a hard wood such as oak, then state that the skirting is to go behind the oak floor, and that the oak floor is to be scribed up to it ; see clause No. 67. 216 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (193) When space is an object, wood skirtings may be flush with the plastering, fixed to plugs in the walls. Attics. (193) Eun 7 in. X 1 in. wrought deal square (or moulded) skirting round all rooms and passages, fixed to one double splayed narrow ground and one plain narrow ground (plain fillet). The lower ground may be splayed. State if the skirtings to passages are to correspond with the wall strings of staircases ; see clauses Nos. 217 and 218. Second floor skirtings. (194) Eun 9 in. x 1 J in. wrought deal moulded skirt- ing round all rooms and passages, fixed to one double splayed narrow ground and one plain narrow ground (plain fillet). See remarks to clause No. 193. First floor skirtings. in. wrought deal moulded and (195) R U11 9 in. x sunk skirting round all rooms and passages, grooved and rebated (or housed) to floors, and fixed to one double splayed and one plain narrow framed grounds, with dovetailed backings every 15 in. apart. See remarks to clause No. 193. (200) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 21 Ground floor skirtings. (196) Eun wrought deal moulded and twice sunk skirting round all rooms, halls and passages 12 in. high, formed up in three pieces, 1J in., li in. and 1 in. thick respectively, grooved and rebated together and to floors (or housed to floors), and fixed to one double splayed and one plain narrow framed grounds, with dovetailed backings and filling out blocks every 15 in. apart. See remarks to clause No. 193. State if skirtings are in a hard wood, such as oak, with deal grounds, backings and blocks ; and that the skirtings are French polished. Basement (197) Eun 7 in. x 1 in. wrought deal square skirting skirtings. round all rooms and passages to boarded floors, fixed to one double splayed and one plain narrow ground. See remarks to c^use No. 193. Angle skirtings. (198) Eun round all rooms and passages having wood block floors, wrought deal angle skirtings out of 2J in. x 2^ in. stuff, with the edges taken off J in., mitred at angles, returned and mitred at ends, screwed to floors, and with narrow splayed grounds against walls. This form of skirting is more especially useful when the walls are not plastered ; and of course grounds would not then be required. It is also suitable for warehouses. Skirting fillets. (199) Eun 2 in. x J in. rounded deal skirting fillets to all rooms on second and attic (or other) floors, where skirting has shrunk away from the flooring, and paint the skirting and fillets three oils. The space caused by the shrinkage may also be made out with fillets fitted in between, and painted over. Bed boards. T^Tl (200) Eun 4 in. x 2 in. wrought deal chamfered bed boards round first and second floor rooms on two (or more) sides. 2l8 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (201) These bed boards prevent the walls being damaged through the beds being placed too near. Cement skirting. (201) See clauses Nos. 52 and 53, under Plasterer. f r ( 202 ) See Electric Lighting, clause Xo. 17. (203) Chair or dado rail. (204) Pun round dining room walls, 3 ft. from floor level, a 3 in. x 1^ in. moulded deal chair (dado) rail, on double splayed narrow grounds (or double grooved narrow grounds), plugged to walls, with all mitres, irregular mitres, stopped and fitted ends, and ends on splay. A chair rail is to prevent the backs of chairs damaging the plaster ; it may be put in any similar position where there is likely to be rough usage, such as in servants' quarters and schools. A chair rail is not often more than 5 in. deep. State if in oak or other hard wood, and whether carved or with dentil ornaments. Dado. (205) Form round walls of billiard room and dining room an 1J in. (or 1 in.) deal moulded one (or more) panel high dado, measuring 2 ft. in the clear between the skirting and surbase moulding, tongued and grooved at angles, and screwed to plugs in the walls (or screwed to 2 in. x f in. horizontal battens plugged to walls, the plastering being filled in between the battens at the back of the dado). Plaster the walls where the dado comes against flues. Then describe the surbaso moulding (dado rail) as clause No. 204, and the skirting as clauses Nos. 196, 195 or 194. (206) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 219 State if dado be in irregular panels ; if with carving to mouldings in panels ; if in oak or other hard wood; if prepared for varnishing or polishing, which might be cle- -scribed with it. Dados may be formed with 1 in. (or 1J in.) plain wrought deal, grooved, cross-tongued and keyed boarding, with keys 3 ft. apart ; and either plugged to walls or fixed to battens (see sketch). Dados may also be formed with 1 in. (or 1 in.) wrought - Kt y deal, V-jointed, grooved and tongued (or matched and beaded) boarding in 4 in. to 6 in. widths, and either plugged to walls or fixed to battens. Wall panelling. LJU (206) The walls and partitions of billiard room between the surbase moulding and frieze necking to be covered with 1 in. (or 1J in.) wrought deal three-panel high moulded framing, grooved and rebated together at angles, and screwed to 2 in. x f in. horizontal fir battens every 3 ft. (or 2 ft. 6 in.) apart, plugged to walls. Then describe the dado as clause No. 205, the surbase moulding as clause No. 204, and the skirting as clauses Nos. 196, 195 or 194. The frieze to be formed in 1J in. (or 1J in.) wrought deal one-panel high moulded framing, with 2 in. x 1 in. necking moulding, and cornice moulding out of 5 in. x 1J in. on brackets secured to a fillet plugged to walls, with all mitres, irregular mitres, stopped ends and ends on splay. Plaster the walls where the framing comes against flues. State if walls are to be plastered behind the framing between the battens ; but it is better to allow the air to circulate around the back. The cornice may be built up if very large. State if there be any carving to mouldings of panels or cornice ; if there be any dentils ; if the work be in oak or other hard wood ; if prepared for varnish- ing or polishing, which might be described with it. 220 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (207) 3 D OOP D C The " filling " may be in 1 in. (or 1 J) V-jointed, grooved and tongued (or matched and beaded) boarding in 4 in. to 6 in. widths (prepared for varnishing, if varnished) ; and the frieze might be a plain horizontal board. In walls with panelling and pilasters, the description of the wall panelling, dado, cornice and other mouldings would remain similar to the description in this clause ; then de- scribe the pilasters, either straight or di- minished, as 1 in., li in. or 1 J in. moulded panelled fronts, tongued and mitred at angles to plain sides, glued and blocked together, and rebated to grooves in the panelling. Then describe the bases, caps, necking and any other work, such as dentils, carved mould- ings, flutes to pilasters, or carved caps. The pilasters may be tongued and grooved together. A cheaper way of forming wall and dado panelling is by tonguing and grooving the boarding to- gether, and covering the joints with raised mouldings. If this form of framing be in oak or other hard wood, 1 in. thickness will do. Square columns. (207) Here are a few details of square wood columns; the description would be somewhat similar to pilasters, as in clause No. 206, the thickness of the framing being about the same. State if with diminished shafts or with carved caps. (209) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 221 Circular columns. Here are a few details of circular wood columns'; they would be described as being turned and built up. The thickness of the framing would vary according to the number of pieces of which it is formed. State if with diminished shafts or with carved caps. When strength is required, an iron column may be placed down the centre, either of a square or circular built up wood column. Ceiling panelling. (208) Fir up ceiling joists level, and line the ceiling of billiard room with 1 in. (or 1J in.) deal, moulded, square panelling screwed to the joists, with circular panels around the ceiling light. The fining up may take the form of battening, see clause No. 190. State if in irregular panels, if circular or polygon shaped, if in oak or other hard wood, and if with carved mouldings. State if prepared for varnishing or polishing, which might be described with it. Then describe the cornice, as in clause No. 206. Ceilings may be lined with panelled framing formed with raised mouldings similar to that described to walls, as in the notes under clause No. 206. Ceiling ribs. (209) Panel out the plaster ceiling with 2 in. X 3 in. deal moulded ribs, screwed through to joists, with all mitres and intersections. State if in oak or other hard wood ; if in irregular panels ; if circular or polygon shaped ; if with carved mouldings ; and if with ornamental carved bosses at the intersections. The painting, varnishing or polishing may be described here. Then describe the cornice, as in clauses Nos. 206 or 210. Sometimes the joists are moulded in the solid, with cross timbers forming the panels. The panels may be filled in with lath and plaster on fillets, or wood panelling on fillets. 222 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (210) Plain deal cornices (210) Run round servants' rooms in basement, deal cornices out of 5 in. x 1^ in., screwed to the ceiling joists above and to brackets secured to narrow splayed grounds in the walls. Form all mitres, irregular mitres, stopped ends and ends on splay. The cornice, if deep, may be built up as in the notes to clause No. LM (211) Form round walls of reception rooms 3 in. x 1J- in. moulded and grooved deal picture rails, screwed to double splayed narrow grounds plugged to walls. Picture rails take the place of picture rods, but are continued entirely round the room. Plaque and plate rails may be as sketch. length of Picture rods. (212) Put to each separate eng o wang n dining room, drawing room and billiard room, 1 in. brass-cased picture rods, with cone-shaped ends, slip joints, driving (or plate) brackets, and sliding eye- hooks. Put similar J- in. brass -cased rods and fittings to first floor three best bedrooms. Put similar in. brass-cased rods and fittings to other first floor bedrooms. Put similar f in. iron picture rods and fittings to servants' rooms in basement, and paint two oils. Iron and brass-cased picture rods are made \ in., f in., f in., |- in. and 1 in. diameters. Portiere rods.; (213) Allow the sum of 1 for brass portiere rods to each of the three reception room doors. Curtain rods. (214) May either be cased in brass or else of some hard wood from 2 in. to 3J in. diameter, with orna- mental ends, rings and brackets. (216) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 223 Wood chimney- pieces and overmantels. (215) Allow a p.c. sum for each, and state they are to be fixed to the brickwork with cramps or wall hooks, and supplied with f in. (or 1 in.) x 3 in. polished marble slips round the opening. The marble slips are a protection to the wood against the heat from the stove. State the class of marble. For other chimney-pieces see Mason, clauses Nos. 53 and 124 ; Smith, clause No. 74 ; and Slater, clause No. 18. V-jointed or matched and beaded boarding to stable walls and ceilings. (216) Line round walls of harness room with 1 in. (or 1 in.) wrought deal, V-jointed, grooved and tongued (or matched and beaded) boarding in 7 in. (or less) widths, secured to 2J in. x { in. fir battens spaced 2 ft. 6 in. apart, plugged to walls, and finished with a 7 in. x 1 J in. plain deal (or 9 in. X 1^ in. moulded) skirting on grounds. . Line ceiling of stables and harness room with similar boarding, spiked to joists, and finished with an 1 in. staff bead against walls. Stop up nail holes, stain, twice size and twice varnish. V-jointed or matched and beaded boarding to any other position would be described similarly. Boarding to stall and loose box divisions. See Smith, clause No. 109. STAIRCASES IN WOOD. (Clauses Nos. 217 to 228 and 231.) Stairs should not have a less width than 9 in. between the nosings, or more than a rise of 7 in. The wider the tread the less should be the rise, and the greater the rise the less the tread. Approximately speak- ing, the width of a tread multiplied by the rise should equal from about 60 in. to 66 in. A very useful width of tread is 11 in., with a rise of 6 in. An ordinary staircase should not be less than 3 ft. in breadth ; 3 ft. 6 in. to 4 ft. is preferable, and 5 ft. makes a very good staircase. According to the requirements of the situation, they may be made as much as from 10 ft. to 12 ft. in breadth, and even greater (see notes pre- ceding clause No. 46 with reference to the widths of passages and stair- cases requisite for the number of persons to be accommodated. Winders are bad in any case, but if absolutely necessary, then they 224 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (217) should be at least 9 in. in width at about 10 in. away from the handrail. A landing space should be provided to about every fourteen steps. There should never be less than two steps in any one position, one step alone being somewhat dangerous. The height of the top of the handrail immediately above the risers is usually about 2 ft. 7J in., but 2 ft. 5 in. is better. On landings the handrail may be 3 ft. high. Care must be taken that there is sufficient head room when one flight of stairs comes over another. A rough rule may be taken as 7 ft. or 7 ft. 6 in. between the levels of the treads. The commonest class of staircase is a " dog- legged " staircase ; the better class is that with a " well-hole." A dog-legged staircase does not allow the light from a skylight to penetrate below, but in a staircase with a "well" this advantage is obtained. In all staircases let there be abun- dance of light. Borrowed lights to a staircase may be found useful either for lighting the staircase itself or the passages adjoining. Dog-legged staircase. (217) The servants' staircase from basement to top floor to be 3 ft. clear breadth between the strings, and formed with : 1J in. wrought deal, twice grooved treads, 9 in. wide between the nosings, with rounded (or moulded) nosings, and housed into wall and outer strings. 1 in. wrought deal, twice rebated risers, glued and blocked to treads, housed into wall and outer strings, and bracketed to carriages. The winders to be formed in a similar manner to the treads and risers, with strong bearers plugged (217) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 225 into walls, and two dovetailed cross bearers to each tread. 1 J in. wrought deal beaded (or moulded) wall strings plugged to walls, with ramps, heading joints, ton- gued and mitred angles, fitted ends and returned and beaded (or moulded) ends, and carried round the landings as a skirting fixed on grounds. 1J in. wrought deal rebated and beaded close outer strings, standing 3 in. above the nosing line of treads, housed into newels, prepared for plas- tering, and finished with a twice beaded capping on top. 7 in. X 3 in. rough fir carriages framed into trimmers, two carriages being supplied to each flight. (The size varies as to length of flight.) The newels to be turned out of 4 in. X 4 in. wrought deal, with turned ball tops and consoles, and framed to trimmers and strings. 3 in. x 2^ in. moulded deal (or mahogany) hand- rail, fitted together in long lengths with hand- rail screws, ramped, kneed, and housed into newels and wall (and French polished if in mahogany). The handrail is to be placed 2 ft. 7J in. above the nosings at riser line, and at 3 ft. on landings. 1 in. (or \\ in.) deal square bar (or 1J in. turned) balusters every 4 in. apart, housed into handrails, strings and landings. 1 in. (or | in.) rebated and beaded apron linings, with 4 in. x 1 in. grooved, rounded (or moulded) nosings tongued to landings. (State if the aprons are splayed so as to give more head room.) The quarter space landing to be in IJin. glued and tongued boarding, with strong joists plugged into walls. Then describe the half space and other landings, with their joists and flooring. See remarks upon stair-eyes and carriages in the notes under clause No. 218. The outer strings may be rebated, sunk and beaded, with a moulded capping on top ; as also with a moulding planted on the face. A " well-hole " staircase may have " close " outer strings with newels, instead of " cut " outer strings, as described under clause No. 218. In very poor work the handrails are simply housed into the newels, without ramps or knees, see sketch on next page ; but in any case Q CAEPENTEB, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (218) they should be ramped, as it prevents the hand being jammed in between the rail and the newel. The hand- rail may be finished with mitred newel caps, instead of housing into the newels. State if swan necks are required. Principal staircase with " well-hole " and newels (clauses Nos. 218 to 221). (218) The principal staircase from hall on ground floor to second floor to be 3 ft. 6 in. clear breadth be- tween the wall strings and handrail, and formed with : 1 in. (or 1 J) in. wrought deal twice grooved treads, 11 in. wide between the nosings, with moulded nosings and a small moulding under; cut and mitred return nosings with moulding under at outer ends, and treads housed into wall strings. 1 in. (or 1J in.) wrought deal risers, rebated to treads, glued and blocked together, bracketed to carriages, housed into wall strings, and cut and mitred to outer strings. The winders to be formed up in a similar manner to the treads and risers, on strong fir bearers plugged into walls, with two dovetailed cross bearers to each tread. Form two (or one) solid moulded curtail steps, with veneered risers and scroll ends. If in. (or 2 in.) solid wrought deal rebated, sunk, moulded, beaded, cut and mitred outer strings, housed into newels and prepared for plastering. If in. (1J in. or 2 in.) moulded wall strings, plugged to walls, with all ramps, heading joints, fitted ends, returned and moulded ends and tongued and mitred angles, and carried round the landings as a skirting fixed on grounds. 7 in. X 4 in. rough fir carriages, framed into trim- mers, two carriages being supplied to each flight. (The size varies as to length of flight.) 5 in. X 5 in. turned newels, moulded on corners, with turned ball tops and consoles, and framed to trimmers. Take f in. gas barrel up the centres, and finish with gas standards p.c. (say) 1 10s. each. (218) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 227 3 in. X 2^ in. French polished moulded mahogany handrails, fitted together in long lengths with handrail screws, ramped and kneed, and housed into newels. The handrail to be placed 2 ft. 5 in. (or 2 ft. 7J in.) above level of nosings at riser line, and at 3 ft. on landings. Kun a 2 in. diam. French polished mop-stick mahogany handrail along the wall side of stair- case, with all ramps, handrail screws and turned ends, and secured with cast-iron (or brass) brackets built into walls and screwed to hand- rail. 1 J in. (2 in. or 1 J in.) turned deal balusters, moulded at corners, dovetailed into treads and landings, and housed into handrails. Each tread to have two balusters, curtails one (or more), and on landings spaced at 4 in. apart. (If there be no newels, then the winders would each require one or more balusters.) The quarter space landings to be in 1^ in. (or 1J in.) glued and tongued boarding, with strong joists plugged into walls. Then describe the half space landings and other landings, with their joists and flooring. 1^ in. rebated, sunk, moulded and beaded apron linings, with 4 in. x 1 J in. (or 1^ in.) grooved, moulded nosings with moulding under, and tongued to landings. (State if the aprons are splayed so as to give more head room.) State if a pair of brass stair-eyes are to be provided to each tread, at p.c. 6^. to Is. per pair. The size of the carriages may be made the same as bridging joists of similar spans, and may be placed from 12 in. to 18 in. apart. Quarter space landings may be strengthened with two small rolled iron joists built in the walls, see sketch. For a continuous outer string and handrail, see notes under clause No. 220. If the soffits be boarded instead of plastered, see clause No. 219. 228 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (219) Soffits. Spandril framing. (219) The soffits to be 1J in. deal moulded and square-panelled framing, screwed to carriages and strings, and finished with a small moulding against the walls and the outer strings. or, The soffit to be 1J in. y-jointed, grooved and tongued deal boarding, finished with a small moulding against the walls and outer strings. (If varnished, then it should be secret nailed.) (220) The spandril to stairs on ground floor to be in 1J in. (or If in.) deal moulded and square framing, the upper panels being glazed with 21 oz. clear (or fluted) sheet glass in putty and loose beads. Form in framing a four- panel moulded and square door, hung on 4 in. butts in beaded frame, with cham- fered stops ; and fitted with lock and furniture, p.c. 10s. The upper panels of door to be glazed to match, and in addition bedded in wash-leather. (Also see clause No. 231.) Glass panels to doors should always be bedded in wash-leather and putty, on account of the jarring. State if treads, risers, strings, landings, newels, balusters, handrails, soffits and spandrils, be in oak, teak, pitch pine, or other hard wood ; and if French polished or varnished, If the staircase have a continuous outer string and handrail, with a newel only at the start ; then the outer string would be described as : 2 in. (If in. or 2J in.) solid wrought deal, rebated, sunk, moulded, beaded, cut and mitred continuous- outer string, fitted with a flat iron bar (core) on the under side, and with wreaths glued up in thicknesses (and veneered if in hard woods), and fitted to newel and apron linings, and prepared for plastering. The handrail to this form of staircase would be described as: 3 in. X 2J in. moulded mahogany continuous hand- rail, with all wreaths, twists and handrail screws, ramped into newel, and fitted into wall at top. Care to be taken not to cripple the wreaths. The balusters and other parts would remain the same as in clause No. 218, but state there is to be a turned iron baluster with foot piece, screwed with counter- sunk screws to every seventh tread, and every 8 ft. apart on landings, and decorated to match the other work. Jron ba?i (221) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 229 A continuous handrail may be strengthened with an iron core, as mentioned in, the notes under clause No. 221. Staircases with very narrow " wells " require iron stiffeners to steady the handrail, if con- tinuous ; see Smith, clause No. 52 ; and notes to the following clause, No. 221. Gallery. (221) When a principal staircase does not go up to the top floor, sometimes a gallery is provided round on the top floor. Describe the apron linings, nosings, newels, balusters and handrail, as in clauses Nos. 218 or 220 ; and the joists and landings in a similar way as to floors. In a staircase with a "well," a skylight is both useful and ornamental, see clause No. 134a. Handrails should be quite smooth for the hand to travel over, and any arrises should be below the touch of the fingers. A good section may be as sketch ; this gives a comfortable handrail to catch hold of, with either plain or elaborate mouldings below. State if handrails are finished with a scroll end or with a mitred cap. If iron balusters be used, the handrail will require to be grooved, and an iron core -^ in. thick by the width of balusters, screwed on to the under side of the handrail, and to the top of the balusters. Handrail joints in best work may be mortised and tenoned together, as well as being fitted with handrail screws. If handrails are set out geometrically correct, they will sometimes look distorted ; it is better to vary the height slightly in order to get a good line. When space is an object, the balusters may be fixed outside the nosings of the treads and landings. Treads and risers may be framed together, as sketches ; the moulding under the nosing may be housed in or tongued on. 230 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (221) Nosings are usually rounded on the upper side, but in hard woods they may be moulded on the upper side. Wall strings may be in one, two or more pieces, with grounds and backings. Outer strings are generally moulded and sunk in the one piece, and may have, in addition, mouldings planted on along the face. A moulding may be de- scribed to the under side of strings in best work, whether the soffit lining be in plaster or wood. State if the spandril ends of steps have cut and ornamental brackets (about i in. thick) mitred on, or if with panelled or carved brackets planted on. Instead of newels being in the solid they may be framed up and glued and blocked together, with panels, carving, and mouldings ; they may have an additional fixing to the floor with bolts, nuts, heads and washers. When stairs are very broad and of small rise, a great strain is put upon the wood carriages ; it is better to carry the stairs with rolled iron (or steel) joist carriages, secured to the trimmers with angle plates, or built into the walls. Cast-iron canti- lever brackets may also be required in some positions, being built in the wall and catching up the carriages. Hanging rods to the strings may also be required as supports. See Smith, clauses Nos. 35 and 12, for canti- levers and carriages respectively. Staircases entirely in hard wood such as oak. (222) The description might remain the same as clauses Nos. 218 to 221, but state: The work to be secretly screwed together, glued and French polished. (226) CAKPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 2 3 I The wood soffits to be fixed to the strings and carriages with wood buttons. The landings to be glued and tongued together. The returned and mitred nosings to treads to be tongued on. Iron carriages, brackets and hanging rods are especially useful in hard wood staircases, owing to their great weight ; see notes to clause No. 221. Circular staircase. (223) The treads, risers and wall strings may be described similar to a dog-legged staircase, see clause No. 217 ; but state the treads and risers are housed into a central deal newel 6 in. (to 9 in.) diameter, either in the solid or built up. Eough fir bearers are required instead of carriages for the soffit plastering. The handrail would be against the wall, and may either be in wood, as described to the wall handrail in clause No. 218 ; or in iron, see Smith, clause No. 50. In circular staircases care must be taken that there is sufficient head room. Staircase with semicircular turns. (224) This may be described similar to clause No. 218. The outer string and handrail would be con- tinuous ; see notes to clause No. 220. There would be either one or two balusters to each of the winders. Serving stairs. (225) This may be a " dog-legged" staircase, as clause No. 217; or a "well" staircase, as clause No. 218, but simplified. Benew nosings to old stairs. (226) Cut away the whole of the wood nosings to existing staircase, and renew in deal (or other wood) to match. Where there is great traffic on a staircase there are various methods of protecting the wood stairs, such as with part metal stairs, either fixed on or let 'in flush, as with " Mason's " patent treads. Brass or 232 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (227) iron chequered nosings may also be used ; or a plain strip of similar metals about 2J in. x J in., which does not return round the nosing, may be employed. They should always be screwed on. Temporary stairs. (227) Temporary stairs may be formed with rough cut wall and outer strings, with rough treads and risers spiked on. Warehouse stairs. (228) These should be made as simple as possible ; the treads are generally in some hard wood, such as oak or teak. A very good plan is to form the stair- case in the usual way, but with the treads 1J in. to 2 in. thick, rebated 'out some 6 in. to 8 in. in width by the whole length, and filled in flush with 1 in. boarding with the grain uppermost. There are patent kinds of wood stairs suitable for heavy traffic, such as " Hawksley's." (229) Spandril framing. (230) (231) Also see clause No. 220. Enclose staircase on ground floor with If in. (1 in. or 2 in.) moulded and square spandril framing, three panels high, let into plastering on the one edge. Form in framing a four-panel, moulded and square door, hung on 4 in. wrought butts, and provided with a 6 in. brass mortise lock and brass furni- ture, p.c. Ws. Put 1 J in. X J in. door stop, and 2J in. moulded architrave on the one side. The upper panels to have diminished styles and rails, rebated out for glass, and glazed with 21 oz. clear fluted sheet in putty with loose beads, the upper panels to door being glazed and bedded in wash leather and putty. Panelled partition (232) The partition across the servants' hall to be framing. formed with If in. (or 2 in.) wrought deal square- panelled framing, three panels high, secured to floor and ceiling between 1 J in. X 2 in. chamfered wrought deal fillets, and the wall edges being let into the plastering. Form in partition a four-panel door hung on 4 in. wrought butts, in rebated and beaded frame, and provided with brass mortise lock and brass furniture, p.c. 10s. Various Dtfails cfDoor af A A (233) CARPENTEE, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 233 The rebate for the door may be formed with fillets, otherwise the door will have to be of a less thickness than the framing, unless it be rebated out. State if panels are moulded, if there be a cornice as clause No. 210, or skirting as clause No. 197. State if upper panels are glazed with 21 oz. fluted sheet, 21 oz. clear sheet, or Hartley's | in. ribbed plate glass, fixed with loose beads in putty, and if with diminished styles and rails. In very high partition framing, it may be necessary to form it with wrought deal 4 in. x 2 in. studs and hori- zontal pieces, 4 in. x 3 in. heads, sills, quarters and end posts. The panels may be formed with 1J in. square (or moulded) panelled framing (or 1J in. glazed panelled lights) secured between beaded fillets. Glass may be placed be- tween the beaded fillets without separate framing. The timber framing may also be twice rebated and four times beaded, with the panelling filled in between. Sliding partitions would be formed similar to sliding doors, see clause No. 250. Partitions folding back would be similar to folding doors, see clause No. 249, and provided with 2 J in. X i in, brass or iron runners fixed to floor with counter-sunk screws, upon which would run small wheels fixed to each leaf of the partition. Various Sec ft on J A ~B . // // // Dwarf partitions. (233) The dwarf partition across office to be formed in wrought framed Honduras mahogany (oak, deal or other wood), and French polished, with : 2 in. (or If in.) moulded both sides, two- panels high framing, tongued on to cap- ping, with end styles let into plaster. Form in framing a 2 in. (or If in.) four- panel, moulded both sides door, tongued ibr capping, with rounded styles working in a hollow groove in framing, and hung on Messrs. Archibald Smith and Stevens patent brass-cased steel spring hinges, p.c. 20s., and provide with two brass handles, p.c. 12s. each (or two 10 in. x3 in. x^-in. brass finger plates), one 6 in. brass barrel bolt, and two brass spring door stops. 3 in. (or 3 J in.) x 2 in. moulded grooved capping. The framing to be secured to floor, and stiffened even 7 4 ft. apart with 1 J in. X in. wrought-iron (or brass) angle brackets, having 18 in. arms sunk in flush, and screwed with counter-sunk screws every 3 in. apart. : State if top panels to framing and door have diminished styles and 234 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (234) rails, and if glazed with 21 oz. fluted sheet (leaded or other) glass in putty, with loose beads and brass cups and screws. If the door is to swing only one way, it may be hung on 3 in. brass or wrought-iron butts against a small fillet stop, or the styles of door and framing may be rebated together. \-j//M& If there be an angle to the framing, it should be grooved and rebated together, and finished with a double quirked bead. Dinner lift framing and lift. DD o (234) Describe as 1J in. (or If in.) square (or moulded) panelled framing, staff beaded at angles, with doors hung folding in beaded frame against fillets on 2J in. brass butts, and furnished with brass spring catches (or bolts), and 1 in. diameter brass rose handles, Board round the inside of lift " well " where against brickwork with J in. (or 1 in.) deal matched and beaded boarding on backings. Lift. Allow the p.c. sum of (say) 10 for lift. The cost of a lift will vary according to the height it has to travel, in addition to its size. " Single " dinner lifts may be had in the following and other sizes : Load to be Raised. Width Inside Cage. Depth Inside Cage. Height Inside Cage. Clear Size of "Well" for Working. Ibs. ft. in. ft. in. ft. in. ft. in. ft. in. 30 1 4 1 4 2 1 10 X 1 9 56 2 1 1 6 2 6 2 8 X 1 11 84 22 1 6 2 9 2 9 X 1 11 112 2 3 1 9 2 9 2 10 X 2 3 Allow sufficient space above the lift for the gear. The bottom of cage should rise 2 ft. 9 in. above the floor level. The lift should be fitted with one or two movable shelves. A very useful size for a dinner lift to a fairly large house is one which will raise a 56 Ib. load. In small houses, one to raise a 30 Ib. load will be sufficient. " Double " dinner lifts are more suitable for hotels and restaurants. Lift flaps. If for a dinner lift, then see clause No. 305. (235) CAKPENTEE, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 235 Hand power box (or luggage) lift. These lifts are made in proportionate sizes to raise loads of 1J, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10 cwts. A box lift suitable for raising the ordinary luggage of a private house will be sufficient if it raise 1^ cwt. to 2 cwts. The largest trunk in use is not more than about 3 ft. X 2 ft. X 2 ft. 6 in., therefore a box lift large enough to take a trunk of this size with the trunk standing on end would require the cage to be 2 ft. 8 in. x 2 ft. 6 in. X 4 ft. 6 in. inside sizes, or over all 2 ft. 10 in. x 2 ft. 8 in. X 4 ft. 7 in. The sketch will show the least size required for a " well " to this size lift. If space be so limited that there is not room for the three guides, then the two guides only may be fixed on the one side, allowing only 1 in. play on the opposite side; but, of course, three guides are preferable for easy and quiet working. If the lift be outside in the open, then the guides should be in wrought iron, and an iron hood placed over the gear at the top for protection from the weather. In the lift framing enclosing a luggage or coal lift, describe a sill- piece to the door openings in 4 in. x 2 J in. oak, rounded on edge and placed 2 ft. 6 in. up. When the luggage lift is outside, ordinary doors may be placed in the opening in the walls for access to the lift. These openings must be protected up to about 2 ft. 6 in. from the floor levels with a strong iron railing with oak capping piece on top. When a lift travels up the " well " of a staircase, it may be necessary to put a protection to the sides of the " well" round the guides, formed of wire netting. The framing to a passenger lift may be very elaborate and partly glazed, with ordinary size doors for access. There are many other forms of lifts for various purposes. Lifts may be worked by hydraulic pressure obtained either from street mains, or from a tank placed above the lift in the roof of a building. Special mains are laid in London and some of the other large cities for the purpose of providing a high -pressure service for hydraulic lifts up to about 700 Ibs. per square in., and occasionally as much as 1000 Ibs. per square in. All heavy weights are generally raised by hydraulic pressure. When a lift is worked with a ram, suitable provision must be made in the ground for its reception. Vestibule framing. (235) The vestibule framing to be formed with : - 4 J- in. x 3 in., four times moulded (or four times, beaded) and twice rebated deal posts and tran- some, the heads and posts against walls being twice moulded (or twice beaded), once rebated and twice grooved for linings (or plaster). Tongue on to transonic an 1J in. X 1 J in. mould- ing on both sides. Put 1 in. wrought, twice 236 CARPENTER, JOIXEK AXJ) HinXMOXGEK. (236) rebated linings, 1 in. beaded grooved and splayed grounds, and 3 in. x 2 in. moulded architraves. Fill in side lights with '2 in., moulded both sides (or bolection moulded, or raised bolection moulded), panelled framing, with diminished rails and styles, and upper panels prepared for glass with loose beads, and glaze with in. polished British plate glass in wash leather and putty. Hang fold- ing similar glazed door framings, with rebated and beaded meeting styles, on 5 in. wrought- iron (or brass) butts, and provide with mortise lock and furniture, p.c. 10s., two brass bolts 18 in. long, and two brass spring door stops. Fill in fanlights with 2 in. moulded framings (state if in small squares), glazed to match doors. The glazing may be in lead lights, see Glazier, clause No. 10. State if framing is in Spanish mahogany, oak, or other hard wood, and describe the polishing. Vestibule framing may be formed with pilasters, arches, caps and bases, similar to wall panelling, see notes to clause No. 20G. The framing might also be similar to partition framing, see clauses Nos. 232 and 233. Cloak rails. Internal lobby framing. Put on two sides of vestibule lobby a :6 in. x li in. (or 1J in.) wrought, moulded (or beaded) all round, French polished mahogany cloak rail, on narrow double splayed deal grounds, and provided with brass (or japanned malleable cast iron) hat and coat hooks every 9 in. (or 12 in.) apart. (236) The lobby framing to be French polished, and formed in wrought framed Honduras mahogany (oak, deal or other wood) with : 2 in. (or 2 in.) moulded both sides two (or more) panel high framing, rebated and grooved together, with wall edges let into plaster, staff beaded at angles, and finished with a 3 in. x 2 in. moulded capping. Hang folding, 2 in. (or 2J in.) moulded both sides, three-panel doors, with diminished and rounded styles and diminished top rail, and upper panels prepared for glass, with loose beads, brass cups and screws, and glazed with in. best British polished plate glass in wash leather and putty. The doors to swing in a hollow groove in the framing, on Messrs. Archibald Smith and Stevens' (or Adams') patent brass-cased, steel spring hinges, p.c. 30s. a pair, and be provided with four brass handles, p.c. 12s. each, two 12 in. and two 18 in. brass barrel (tower or (237) CARPENTEB, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 237 flush) bolts, and two brass spring door stops , p.c. 4s. each. The soffit to be 2 in. (or 2 in.) five-panel, moulded and square framing, flush on top, grooved all round, and finished with a 2 J in. x 1J in. moulded cornice on the inside. State if panels are bolection moulded. Instead of handles, brass finger or door plates about 10 in. X 3 in. X J- in. metal may be supplied. DOORS AND GATES, (Clauses Nos. 237 to 277.) For open carriage and field gates, see clauses Nos. 330 and 331 re- spectively. Generally to all doors. (237) All doors to be knocked together and stacked in the dry three (or six) months before glueing up, and when hung to be sufficiently short of the flooring to clear the carpets. (See clause No. 139, referring to the painting of window frames, which may be modified to doors and inserted here.) Solid door frames to have horns 3 in. (to 6 in.) wide left on the heads. (For shoes see clause No. 38, which may perhaps be inserted here, as also portions of clause No. 10.) See clauses Nos. 10 and 38 for sketches of horns and shoes respectively. Golid frames. Panels. Panelled doors up to 3 ft. wide to have 9 in. lock and bottom rails, 4J- in. top (and frieze) rails, styles and muntings. Panelled doors over 3 ft. wide to have 11 in. lock and bottom rails, 5J-in. top (and frieze) rails, styles and muntings. The panels to doors in principal rooms, and all panels over 11 in. wide, to be in pine, none being less than in. thick, and housed or rebated into grooves in the framing. (The usual height to the top of lock rail is 3 ft. 1 in.) These are the general sizes of framings to doors. There is no frieze rail to a four-panel door. When panelled doors are very thick, the panels are sometimes formed with two separate thicknesses having a space between; but this is governed mainly by the depths of the mould- ings in the panels. CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (238) Generally to linings. (238) Jamb and head linings to be panelled when the width of the lining clear of the rebates exceeds 8 in. The panels to linings of principal rooms, and all panels over 11 in. wide, to be in pine, none being less than | in. thick, and housed or rebated into grooves in the framing. Thus, linings to walls up to one brick thick would not require panels. Four-panel doors are usually made 2 ft. 10 in. wide by 6 ft. 10 in. high. 3ft. Oin. 7ft. Oin. 3 ft. 6 in. 7 ft. 6 in. Doors over 3 ft. 6 in. wide may be hung in two halves, or else made to slide. When a large opening is required, sliding doors are best, as hung doors, when open, take up too much room space. Sliding doors may be made any width from 5 ft. to 12 ft. ; a very fair width of opening is 8 ft. It will make a specification more clear to describe, first, any specially framed doors to each separate floor ; and then to describe all the remain- ing doors on each separate floor in the one description. The iron- mongery should be taken to each door as it is mentioned. It is better to put a p.c. amount to each door for the door furniture and locks. Doors are divided into two classes, " ledged " and " panelled " ; ledged doors being used more especially for outside offices, stables, farm build- ings and small gates ; and panelled doors for internal work, entrance doors and main entrance gates. Here are a few of the names of different kinds of mouldings as applied to panelled work, which may be varied in many ways : Square-framed, plain panels. Square-framed, plain panels one side, and bead butt (or bead flush) other side. Square-framed, plain panels one side, and moulded other side. Square-framed, moulded panels both sides. Square-framed, plain panels one side, and bo- lection moulded other side, rebated on. Bolection mouldings are usually rebated on to the door framing, but at the same time the effect is not so pleasing as when simply placed within the lines of the framing, as by the former method the lines of the mouldings throw out the lines of the framing. (241) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 239 Square-framed, moulded panels one side, and bolection moulded other side (or rebated on). JL_ Li Square-framed, plain panels one side, and solid moulded other side. Square-framed, solid moulded panels both sides. Locks and furniture. Finger plates. Square-framed, moulded and flat panels one side, bolection moulded and raised splayed panels other side, with an inner bead (or moulding) worked (or planted) on the panel. (239) In a p.c. amount referring to a lock and furniture, the contractor is to allow in his estimate as for fixing a mortise lock, two handles, two escutcheons with eye plates, and two short and two long finger plates to each door. (240) Allow the p.c. sum of (say) 10 for finger plates, to be fixed where directed. A lock and furniture is usually taken as referring to the lock (either rim or mortise), the two handles and the two escutcheons with eye plates ; but by putting a p.c. amount it saves much description, and the class . of article can be selected afterwards, either in brass, iron, china, wood, glass or other material. Internal basement and kitchen office doors. DD Plain jamb linings. PANELLED DOORS. (Clauses Nos. 241 to 262.) (241) Each of the (say) seven doors to be 2 in. (If in. or IJ^ in.) wrought deal, square-framed, four- panel framing, hung on one pair 4 in. wrought-iron butts, and provided with a 6 in. (or 7 in.) rim (or mortise) lock and furniture, p.c. 6s. (to 10s.), with 1 J in. (or 1^ in.) wrought deal, twice rebated jamb and head linings, tongued at angles and fixed on backings, with 3 in. X 1J in. moulded architraves planted on both sides of linings, mitred at angles, and with narrow splayed grounds and plinth stops. 240 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. Plinth stops are seldom put in servants' offices. (241) In very thin walls or partitions the linings are sometimes only once rebated. In any case, the linings may be twice beaded (or twice moulded) if desired. The rebates to the jamb linings may be formed by planting on a fillet stop. In walls over one brick thick the linings may be panelled, when the description would run as : Panelled jamb linings. 1J in. (or 1 J in.) wrought deal, square-framed, two- panel high jambs and one-panel head, twice rebated linings, tongued at angles, and fixed to dovetailed backings, with 3 in. x 2 in. moulded architraves planted on both sides of linings, mitred at angles, and with narrow splayed grounds and plinth stops. The linings may be twice beaded (or twice moulded) if desired. This class of door and lining is suitable for all servants' offices, bed- rooms, and any ordinary plain work. See notes under clause No. 244, referring to the panelling of jamb linings. Wrought and cast iron butts are made from 2 in., 2J in., 3 in., 3 J in., 4 in., 5 in. to 6 in. long. Cast-iron butts are used in inferior work. Broad butts are made 2 in. X 3 in., 3 in. X 3 in., 3 in. X 3 J in., 3J in. x 3 J in., 4 in. X 4 in., 4 in. X 4^ in., and used in positions where the thick- ness of material is insufficient to get a firm fixing for the screws. The lower panels of any doors in dark situations may be glazed with | in. rough plate (or other) glass. This will give some light as a guide for the feet. Internal cellar door and linings. (242) Describe similar to kitchen doors and linings, as clause No. 241 ; but the architraves are sometimes placed only on the passage side. Internal servants' W.C. doors and linings. (243) Describe similar to kitchen doors and linings, as clause No. 241, and state that each door is to be hung on one pair 4 in. wrought-iron butts, and provided with a 6 in. brass (or iron) barrel bolt, a rim (or mortise) lock and furniture, p.c. 6s. , and one 4 ft. steel rod spring, p.c. 2s. (244) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 241 Brass or iron handles may be supplied to w.c. doors in lieu of a lock. Springs to w.c. doors are useful in keeping them closed ; they may be had with brass casings for better class work. Steel rod door springs are made 3 ft., 3 ft. 6 in., 4 ft., 4 ft. 6 in., 5 ft. and 5 ft. 6 in. long ; these are fixed vertically to the hanging style and the door frame, see sketch. Brass door springs are made in various shapes, and of a p.c. value from about 3s. to 6s. la a Internal ground floor and similar doors. Plain jamb linings. Panelled jamb linings. (244) Each of the (say) ten doors to be 2 in. (If in. or 2J in.) wrought deal, square-framed, four-panel, moulded both sides framing, hung on one pair 4 in. brass (or iron) butts, and provided with mortise lock and furniture, p.c. 10s. with 1^ in. (or 1J in.) wrought deal, twice rebated and twice beaded (or twice moulded) jamb and head linings, tongued at angles, and fixed on backings, with 4J in. x | in. (or 1 in.) wrought, sunk and beaded (or moulded) framed grounds on splayed backings, and 3 in. X 2 in. moulded architraves placed on both sides of linings, mitred at angles, and with plinth stops. or, 1J in. (or 1J in.) wrought deal, twice rebated and twice beaded (or twice moulded) square-framed, moulded two-panel high jambs, and one-panel head lining, tongued at angles, and fixed to dovetailed skeleton framed backings, with 4J in. x f in. (or 1 in.) wrought, sunk and beaded (or moulded) framed grounds on splayed backings, and 3 in. X 2 in. moulded architraves planted on both sides of linings, mitred at angles, and with plinth stops. Ordinary four-panel doors are made 1J in., If in., 2 in., 2J in. and 2 J in. thick, according to their position and size : If in. being the least desirable thickness for fairly good class work. State if doors have more or less than four panels ; and in that case, the jamb lining if panelled should correspond in the heights of the panels to those in the doors. State if doors have irregular panels, and if doors be segmental (semicircular or elliptical) headed, and whether the head linings are to be square or to follow the sweep of the door heads. State if doors are to a circular sweep on plan. Moulded doors may be moulded on one side only ; moulded on both sides; or moulded one side and bolection moulded the other side; or 242 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (244) bolection moulded both sides. If bolection moulded, state whether the mouldings be rebated on to the framing. State if doors are to have moulded raised panels on one or both sides, with an inner bead or moulding either worked or planted on the panels ; or whether with moulded splayed raised panels on one or both sides, with inner bead or moulding worked or planted on the panels. Jamb linings can only be moulded on the one side, and the panelling, together with the rails, should correspond with the heights of the door panels, but the styles may be less in width than the door styles. Architraves may be very elaborate, and of some considerable width, and either built up in sections or formed out of the solid ; state clearly which way. Pil- asters may be required on either side of the architraves ; these may be specified as f in. (1 in. or 1J in.) thick on splayed grounds, with cap, necking, base, dado and skirting mould- ings planted on. The architrave should pro- ject sufficiently to allow these mouldings to butt up against it, without their projecting beyond it. The lock and frieze rails may have mouldings planted on ; state if dentils or carved mouldings are required. Doors are also hung with brass butts and screws, either with or without steel (or gun- metal) washers (joints) ; or on brass rising butts with double steel (or gun-metal) joints. Brass and iron butts can be obtained in 1 J in., 2 in., 2 J in., 3 in., 3 J in., 4 in., 4^ in. and 5 in. sizes. When a door is hung on rising butts, state that the top rail of door is to be splayed off. State if doors, owing to their weight, are each to be hung with 1J pairs of butts, but only one pair of rising butts should be fixed on one door. Hard wood doors require very strong butts. Brass butts for high class work should be described as polished. Butts with steel washers are not suitable for out- side work, the washers should then be in gun- metal. Projecting butts allow a door to open well back. State if internal doors are to be provided with india-rubber door stops. Overdoors. (245) These may be varied in design, and either plain or elaborate. A p.c. sum may be allowed, or else they may be described in detail. State whether in hard wood, and if French or wax polished, and give a sketch in the margin. (250) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 243 Best w.c. doors (246) Describe similar to ground floor doors and and linings. linings, see clause No. 244, but in addition state they are to be provided with a 6 in. brass barrel bolt, a brass-cased steel spring, p.c. 3s. 6d.., a patent indicator tablet showing " engaged " and " vacant," p.c. 6s. (this may be either in nickel or brass), and a brass coat hook. (247) Describe similar to ground floor doors and linings. See clauses Nos. 244 and 246. A glazed fanlight may be fixed over any doors, to give ventilation to the rooms, and light to the passage ; see Glazier, clause No. 9, with sketch. First floor doors and lining's. Top floor doors and linings. Folding doors and linings. (248) May be similar to basement doors and linings. See clauses Nos. 241 and 243. (249) Describe each door in a similar way to clause No. 244, but state the doors are to be hung folding, Folding doors in taw leaves Internal sliding doors hung at top. (fi with rebated and beaded meeting styles, and provided with two 12 in. (or 18 in.) brass barrel (or flush) bolts (in addition to the other furniture). If the door opening be wide, perhaps three or more leaves (doors) may be required, then describe in a similar way as clause No. 244 ; but mention the number of leaves, the rebated and beaded styles, the bolts, and the back flap (or other) hinges to the centre leaves (in addition to the ordinary furniture). (250) The sliding doors between reception rooms to be 2 in. (If in., 2J in. or 2 in.) wrought deal, square-framed, four-panel, moulded both sides framings, with oak spurs 2ft. high, 4 in. broadband 1 in. wider than the thickness of the doors, screwed on to the outer styles, and running between fillets 2 in. deep placed in the wall space as guides. Each door to be hung from the top on two 4 in. diameter cast turned gun-metal (or iron) bushed wheels, fixed with bolts, heads and nuts to 2 in. X J in. wrought-iron straps screwed to the door styles 15 in. down with counter- sunk screws every 3 in. apart. The hanging . bar to be 3 in. X J in. R 2 244 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (251) wrought iron, planed " round " (or double bevelled) on the top edge, and supported by three cast (or wrought) iron hangers screwed to the lintels. The meeting styles to be provided with a brass (or gun-metal) hollow rebated and tongued joint screwed on, having two brass pull flush ring handles in it. Put four brass flush handles p.c. ?s. 6d. per pair flush with the styles. Then describe the linings and architraves as clause No. 244; but state the linings are to be made movable, and fixed with brass cups and screws for access to gearing. Sliding doors may run with wheels along a metal runner screwed to the floor, but they do not work smoothly, as the top 1ILJLJE 77 'WJfOwi^' ra ^ s nave to run between a groove as a guide, and consequently there is much friction. The metal rail also, when standing above the floor, is apt to trip one up, and if placed flush with the floor the grooves get filled up with dirt. Flush bolts may be provided to the door, as also a " hook " lock ; but in sliding doors opening up two rooms, neither bolts nor locks are abso- lutely necessary. If the doors be fairly thick, as 2 in. (2J in. or 2J in.), then the joint in the meeting styles may be formed in the framing instead of being a metal joint. By forming the hangers as sketch, a very small gap shows in the head linings when the doors are open. Messrs. Hatfield's patent roller wheels may be employed for doors sliding either at the top or bottom, see clause No. 269. Baize doors. (251) The door to study (or private office) to be If in. (1J in. or 2 in.) solid wrought deal, four-panel, square-framed panel- ling, with If in. (1 in. or 2 in.) solid wrought deal, flush both sides panels, covered over on both sides and edges with strong super- fine green (red or blue) baize on a backing of thick brown paper, with a groove and slip joint on hanging style, and copper tacked on top and bottom rails. Form imitation panels on both sides, with brass- headed nails every 1 in. apart (or with brass beads). If the door be very large it may have six or more panels. The imitation panels formed with the brass nails or brass beads are not often desired. Baize doors may be fixed in addition to an ordinary (254) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 245 door in any position to exclude sound. They are sometimes used in w.c's. When the panels are only flush one side the baize is only put on the one side. A cheaper class of baize door may be formed with a skeleton frame, rilled in with solid, tongued and grooved boarding, and then covered with baize. Jib door. (252) This class of door is used when it is not required to show in the room as a door. It is formed with flush panels one side similar to a baize door, see clause No. 251 ; and may either be square or moulded the other side. State it is to be papered over on the flush side to match the walls of the room, with the dado, skirting or other mouldings planted on to carry round the other work. The archi- trave and linings would only show on the one side. (253) The description would be the same as to ground floor doors, see clause No. 244 ; but owing to the weight of hard wood doors, deep and strong hinges must be used, say 5 in. or 6 in. deep. It is better to hang hard wood doors on a pair and a half of butts that is three butts to each door ; see notes under clauses Nos. 241 and 244 referring to hinges. State whether door and linings are French or wax polished. See notes under clause No. 255, referring to solid frames for heavy internal doors. Doors and linings in oak or other ornamental woods. Veneered doors (254) The dining room doors to be veneered on the one (or both) side and edges in wainscot oak (mahogany, walnut, or other fancy wood), with solid wainscot (or other fancy wood), mouldings round the panels, the whole being French (or wax) polished. State if the linings are to be veneered to match, with solid fancy wood mouldings in the panels ; and whether the architraves also are to be in the solid fancy wood. It is always best to veneer on a " hard " wood such as mahogany. If deal be veneered upon it should not be less than 2 in. thick, and per- fectly seasoned and dry, otherwise the veneer will split. The actual description of the door and linings would be similar to other ordinary doors, as clause No. 244 ; but if an old door be veneered upon, then it must be " planed up smooth, square and level." 246 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (255) External entrance door. (255) To be 2 in. (If in. 2 in. or 2 in.) wrought deal, square-framed, four-panel (more or less), moulded both sides framing, the lower horizontal mouldings to panels on the outer side being weathered off. Screw on to bottom rail a 3 in. x 2 in. deal moulded and throated weather stop. Provide door with a brass mortise lock and furniture, p.c. 12s. ; one brass night latch and two keys, p.c. 8s. ; two 12 in. (or other size) brass (or bright iron) barrel bolts ; one 9 in. brass (or japanned iron) door guard and chain, p.c. 2s. Qd. ; one brass cased steel door stop catch, p.c. 3s. (state if a brass and india-rubber buffer be required instead of the door catch, and allow a p.c. sum) ; one brass knocker and plate screwed through door with nuts and washers, p.c. 12s. ; one brass (or iron) door knob bolted through door with nut and washer, p.c. 5s. ; and a brass letter plate, p.c. 12s., with perforation in door. Hang door on 1^ pairs 5 in. wrought-iron (or brass) butts to a 4 J in. X 3 in. solid wrought deal, rebated and twice beaded (or twice moulded) frame, grooved all round for linings, and with cast-iron shoes let into threshold. The transome to be 4J in. x 3 in. twice rebated and four times beaded (or four times moulded), with a small moulding tongued on the outer side. Put 1 in. (or 1J in.) wrought deal, twice rebated, splayed (or square) jamb and head linings, tongued at angles and fixed to backings ; with f in. (or 1 in.) x 4J in. wrought deal, sunk, grooved, beaded (or moulded), framed and splayed grounds; and 3 in. x 2 in. moulded archi- traves mitred at angles, with narrow splayed grounds and plinth stops. Kun round the outside of frame a 2 in. x 1J in. deal (or oak) guard moulding. Fill in fanlight opening with a 2 in. (If in. or 2^ in.) moulded deal sash having movable beads and brass cups and screws, and glazed in putty with \ in. British polished plate (or other) glass. Hang fanlight on one pair of 3 in. wrought-iron (or brass) butts to open inwards, and provide with two brass quadrant stays and a small brass spring fanlight catch. For mat space see clause No. 64 ; and Pavior, clause No. 2. For front door bell see Bell Hanger, clauses Nos. 6, 9 or 10. Jf the wall be thick the jamb linings may be ^ panelled similar to internal door linings, as in clauses Nos. 241 or 244. (255) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 247 If external linings and architraves be required, they would be described similar to the internal architraves and linings either as plain or panelled ; a groove being formed on the outer side of frame to receive them. If fanlights are to open with any special gear, state the kind and name of manufacturer, such as "Adams' patent fanlight opener, p.c. 30s." Or they may open with hemp line,*, brass (or iron) cleats and pulleys. Solid door frames are usually 4 in. x 3 in., 4^ in. x 3 in., 4 in. X 4 in. 4J in. X 4 in., 4J in. X 4J in., 5 in. x 4 in., 5 in. x 4J in. and 6 in. x 4J in. A " proper door frame " signifies a " wrought, rebated and twice beaded frame " only ; but the term is now almost obsolete. The distinct labours should be accurately mentioned. State if the door head be segmental ; and if it be of very small rise it can be cut out of the solid. The fanlight also should be described as segmental headed to match. If the door head be to a quick seg- inental rise, or semicircular, or elliptical, then, and in each case, state it is to be put together in two (or three) separate pieces, connected together with oak keys and wedges (or with handrail screws). Door heads to circular sweeps may also be formed in two or three separate thicknesses, secured together with oak pins. State if the head linings be square, or if they are to follow the sweep of the door head. ^ Mention if door panels be bolection moulded either on one or both sides, and if the mouldings be rebated on to framing. The bolts may be either barrel, tower or flush, and are made of almost any length ; the upper bolt is generally required to be the longer, so that it may be within reach. Bolts are generally made from 9 in. to 30 in. long. Door chains are made 4 in., 6 in., 8 in. and 10 in. long. A spring door catch will keep the door open, or a cabin hook and eye may be used instead. Cabin hooks are made up to about 18 in. long. The guard moulding is not always put round the door frame, it being merely ornamental. in. x | in. wrought-iron bar may be grooved into the stone An threshold for the door to shut against, the bottom rail being rebated out to receive it. It assists in keeping out the wet, but must not be allowed to stand up too high, otherwise people will trip over it. In lieu of the deal weather stop, a J in. (or f in.) cast brass (iron or gun- metal) shaped weather stop may be screwed on _ to the bottom rail of door with countersunk brass screws every 9 in. apart. Knockers and letter plates are also made in iron and gun-metal, and vary in price from 3s. to 1 10s. *B 4 24-8 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (255) Solid frames are usually required for outside doors only, but if an internal door be extraordinarily heavy, or if from any other cause a solid frame be required internally, then the sketch will show how this may be I .'; ^w\\\SS> framed together. External entrance doors may be provided with an overhanging door head or canopy, formed either with plain or moulded panelled framing but flush on the upper side, with a moulding round the eaves as a finish. The brackets would be cut, shaped and moulded, and supported on moulded stone corbels, all of which should be well tailed into the wall. The head should be covered with 6 Ib. lead, copper nailed at the edges, and with 5 Ib. lead flashing against the wall. Letter box. be % in. dovetailed and beaded oak (or j in. box, 12 in. (to 24 in.) x 8 in. (to 12 in.) x 6 in. (to 8 in.) in the clear, with f in. oak (or 1 in. deal) one (or two) panel door hung on one pair of 2 in. brass butts, and supplied with a brass lock and two keys, and glazed (or partly glazed) with 21 oz. sheet glass, and supported on one (or two) small cut 1^ in. oak (or 1J in. deal) bracket secured to door with small brass plates. or, The letter box may be in galvanised iron wire- work, p.c. 8s. The top and bottom of letter box may or may not project slightly beyond the front and sides, and may either be rounded or moulded on edge. The top is sometimes made to slant. Double-margined external door. (256) The description would remain the same as in clause No. 255, except that it should be described as a " double-margined door," with a bead | worked on both sides of munting; the * munting being twice the width of the outer styles and in one piece. (258) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 249 Entrance door partly glazed. Shutter. (257) To be 2 in. (Ij in., 2 in. or 2J in.) wrought deal, square-framed, three-panel (more or less), moulded both sides framing, with moulded diminished styles and top rail, and loose inner beads fixed with brass cups and screws. Glaze top panel with J in. British polished plate (or other) glass in wash leather and putty. The horizontal moulding of bottom panels on the outer side to be weathered off, and a 3 in. x 2 in. moulded and throated deal weather stop screwed on to the bottom rail (or a metal weather stop as mentioned in the notes under clause No. 255). Put an 1 in. (or 1J in.) bead butt (or flush) both sides, two-panelled, square-framed, movable shutter, with two brass stubs and plates, and a 3 in. brass thumb screw. If glazed with leaded lights, see Glazier, clause No. 10 and notes to same. The upper panel may be in the form of a sash, as in clause No. 258, and hinged for ventilation and provided with fastenings. If an iron grille be required instead of a shutter, allow a p.c. amount, and state it is to be either screwed on, or made movable with stubs, plates and bolts ; see Smith, clause No. 58. Then describe the frame, the linings, furniture and fanlight somewhat as in clause No. 255. State if the centre panel be divided into marginal lights, and give the size of the bars, such as 1 in. or IJ in. wide, and if provided with movable beads. For mat space see clause No. 64 ; and Pavior, clause No. 2. For front door bell, see Bell Hanger, clauses Nos. 6, 9 or 10. Doors fitted with a sash. JIUerrtafc Man (258) The top panel of an external door may be filled in with a glazed moulded sash with loose beads, and the edges of the sash on the inside beaded (or moulded) round. The door framing forming this panel is de- scribed as having a skeleton-framed top panel (there being no panels in it as with an ordinary door) with loose beads planted on the outer edge to form a rebate. The skeleton framing may be rebated out to receive the sash, with a bead or moulding on the outer edge. If the sash be the same or about the same thickness as the door, it is preferable to rebate it out. A shutter may be provided to the sash, as in clause No. 257. For mat space, see clause No. 64 ; and Pavior, clause No. 2. 250 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (259) External^ (259) To be 2 in. (or If in.) wrought deal, square- tradesman's framed, bead flush (or bead butt) and square four (more entrance door. _ 1 .. _ . or less) panelled framing. Then describe the frame, the linings, the furniture and the fanlight somewhat as in clause No. 255. This class of door may be moulded and square, or square both sides ; or the upper panels may be glazed, as in clause No. 257. ,.A shutter may be provided as in clause No. 257. ~ 'For mat space, see clause No. 64 ; and Pavior, clause No. 2. door bell, see Bellhanger, clauses Nos. 6, 9 or 10. (260) These doors are either hung in one or two halves (folding), and may be described similar to clauses Nos. 257 or 258. When hung in two halves, instead of an outer bead being worked on the meeting style, either a metal or a wood weather stop may be screwed on, to assist in keeping out the weather. The meeting styles may have a hooked and beaded joint, instead of a rebated and beaded joint, as well as having the weather stop. French casement doors. Casement doors are usually employed as an exit into the open from a living room. They may be in one, two or three panels, the upper panel being in glass. State if there be a fanlight, as in clause No. 255. Shop or other (261) To be 2 in. (2 in. or 2J in.) wrought deal external doors in (mahogany or oak), square-framed, three (more or less) panel moulded framings, hung folding in two halves, with rebated and beaded (or moulded) meet- ing styles, the lower panel being bolection moulded on both sides, the upper panels having rebated moulded diminished styles and top rails prepared for glass, with movable moulded beads, brass cups, and screws. Glaze the upper panels with ^ in. best British polished plate glass in putty and wash leather. Hang each leaf on 1J pairs 5 in. brass (or wrought- iron) butts with gun-metal washers, and provide doors with four brass handles, p.c. 12s. each ; one mortise lock and furniture, p.c. 10s ; two 12 in. and two 18 in. brass barrel (tower or flush) bolts ; two brass spring door stops, p.c. 3s. each ; one brass letter plate, p.c. 10s., with perforation through door ; and a mov- able oak letter-box, 18 in, x 8 in. X 6 in. in clear, with glazed door, brass hinges, lock and two keys (or movable galvanised iron wire letter-box with lock and two keys). (262) CAKPENTEE, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 251 With shop doors the letter-box is removed during the day. External doors, such as those to Public Houses and similar positions, which are subject to rough usage, often have the bottom rails protected with a brass casing let in flush and screwed on. The frame to be 4 \ in. x 4 in. wrought deal (mahogany or oak), rebated and twice beaded (or twice moulded), grooved all round for linings, with cast-iron shoes let into threshold, and a 4J in. x 3 in. twice rebated and four times beaded (or four times moulded) transome, with small moulding tongued on the outer side. Then describe the splayed linings, the architrave and fanlight, similar ,to clause No. 255. State if French or wax polished. Eising butts are seldom used to this class of door. When both leaves of a folding door are required to open simul- taneously, the hinges must be described as " sympathetic " hinges, p.c. 60s., 'instead of the usual butt hinges. The least width suitable for folding shop doors is 3 ft. 6 in., but 4 ft. and even 5 ft. is often used. For mat space, see clause No. 64 ; and Pavior, clause No. 2. For bell, see Bell Hanger, notes to clause No. 9. Shop or other doors to swing both ways. (262) To be 2 in. (2| in. or 2J in.) wrought deal (mahogany or oak), square-framed, three (more or less) panel moulded framings with rounded styles, hung folding in two halves to swing both ways, the lower panels being bolection moulded both sides, and the upper panels having rebated moulded dimin- ished styles and top rails, pre- pared for glass, with movable moulded beads, brass cups and screws. Glaze doors with ^ in. best British polished plate glass in putty and wash-leather. Each _ leaf is to be hung to swing on Messrs. Arch. Smith and Stevens' (or Adams') patent brass-cased steel spring hinges, p.c. 30s. a pair ; and provided with two brass handles, p.c. 12s. each ; one brass padlock, chain and staple, p.c. 15s., with the staples bolted through the door with nuts ; two 12 in. and two 18 in. brass barrel (tower or flush) bolts; two brass spring door stops, p.c. 3s. each; one brass letter plate, p.c. 10s., with perforation through door, and a movable oak letter-box, 18 in. X 8 in. x G in. 2 5 2 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (263) in clear, with glazed door, brass hinges, lock and two keys (or movable galvanised iron wire letter-box with lock and two keys). The frame to be 4J in. x 4 in. wrought deal (mahogany or oak), rebated for fanlight, hollow rebated for doors, twice beaded (or twice moulded), and grooved all round for linings ; with cast-iron shoes let into threshold, and a 4J in. x 3 in. rebated, weathered, throated and four times beaded (or four times moulded) transome, with small moulding tongued on the outer side. Then describe the splayed linings, the architrave and fanlight, similar to clause No. 255. See notes to clause No. 261 for metal plates to bottom rails of doors. For mat space, see clause No. 64 ; and Pavior, clause No. 2. Swing doors cannot be rebated into the framing at the head. For bell, see Bell Hanger, notes to clause No. 9. Coal cellar and other outside ledged cellar doors. LEDGED DOORS AND GATES. (Clauses Nos. 263 to 273a.) (263) Each outside cellar door to be formed with : 1 in. (or I in.) grooved and tongued, wrought both sides boarding in 7 in. widths, beaded one side (commonly called matched and beaded boarding), and nailed (or screwed) to an 1 in. (or \\ in.) x 4J in. wrought splayed top ledge, and 1 in. (or 1 \ in.) X 7 in. wrought splayed middle and bottom ledges, and hung on 16 in. (or 18 in.) cross garnett (or strap) hinges to a 4 J in. X 3 in. wrought deal rebated door frame, notched out for ledges, and with cast-iron shoes let into stone threshold ; and provided with a 12 in. iron Norfolk thumb latch, and oak stock lock, p.c. 7s. The boarding may also be the ordinary grooved and tongued V-jointed boarding ; or in either case the tongues may be separate, when the boarding would be twice grooved, and should not be less than 1 in. thick. (265) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 253 This is the commonest kind of door, and mostly used in outhouses and outside cellars. Cross garnett hinges are made 6 in., 8 in., 10 in., 12 in., 14 in., 16 in. and 18 in. long. State if doors are to have padlocks instead of oak stock locks. Ledged and braced doors. (264) Each outside cellar door to be formed with : 1 in. grooved and tongued, wrought both sides boarding in 7 in. widths, beaded one side (commonly called matched and beaded boarding), screwed to 1 in. (or 1 J in.) X 4^ in. wrought braces, 1 in. (or 1 J in.) X 4J in. wrought splayed top ledge, and 1 in. (or 1 \ in.) x 7 in. (or 9 in.) wrought splayed middle and bottom ledges, and hung on 16 in. (or 18 in.) cross garnett (or strap) hinges to a 4J in. x 3 in. wrought deal, rebated, once- chamfered door frame, notched out for ledges, with cast-iron shoes let into stone threshold ; and provided with a 12 in. iron Norfolk thumb latch, and 8 in. oak stock lock (or padlock), p.c. 7s. The boarding may also be as the alternative ways mentioned in the notes to clause No. 263. This is a better class of door than that in clause No. 263, and is suitable for outside w.c's and outside cellars, and in similar positions. If this class of door be used in an outside w.c., it may be specified to be hung 3 in. (or 6 in.) clear of the threshold and door head for ventilation. A bolt and spring should be pro- vided in lieu of a lock. Framed and braced doors. (265) Each outside cellar door to be framed with : 2 in. x 4 J in. wrought deal, grooved and beaded styles and top rail, 2 in. X 9 in. similar but splayed bottom rail, 1 in. x 9 in. splayed middle (lock) rail, and 1 in. X 4^ in. braces. Fill in with 1 in. wrought, grooved and tongued boarding in 5 in. (or 7 in.) widths, beaded one side (commonly called matched and beaded board- ing), and hang on 4 in. wrought butts to a 4 J in. X 3 in. wrought deal, rebated and beaded door frame, with cast-iron shoes let into stone threshold ; and provide with a 12 in. iron Norfolk thumb latch, and 8 in. oak stock lock, p.c. 7s. 254 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (266) State if the boarding be filled in diagonally. The boarding may also be as the alternative ways mentioned in the notes to clause No. 263. This is the best class of ledged door, and suitable for servants' outside w.c/s, outside cellars, and in similar positions. These doors are also made with the top and bottom rails and styles If in. thick, with 1 in. lock rail and braces and f in. boarding ; or if with 1 in. boarding, then with | in. lock rail and braces. The braces and lock rail are less in thickness than the other part of the framing, because of the boarding going right over them from the top to the bottom rail. The -boarding sometimes goes over the bottom rail as well, when of course the bottom rail would be of less thickness. In a 2 in. door, when the braces and lock rail are only f in. thick, then the boarding may be 1| in. thick. The boarding may either be beaded or V-jointed on both sides if 1 in. or 1| in. thick. It can only be beaded or V-jointed one side if in f stuff. If beaded or V-jointed both sides, the description of the boarding would be : 1 in. (or 1 in.) wrought deal, twice grooved board- ing, beaded (or V-jointed) on both sides, fixed together with loose cross tongues. The tongues may also be formed on the boarding, when either beaded or V-jointed on both sides. The framing may be stop chamfered on the one side. The hinges may be strap or pivot hinges. This class of door is also used for stables, coach houses, cart, carriage and garden gates; but see clauses Nos. 266 to 272 for gates and doors in these positions. Cart gates hung (266) To be 2 J in. wrought deal, grooved and to brick or stone V-jointed framings, stop chamfered on the inner side, with 9 in. (or 11 in.) X 2 in. splayed bottom rails, 9 in. (or 11 in.) X 1J in. splayed lock rails, 5in.xliin. splayed frieze rails and braces, 6 in. x2Jin. top ; rail (266) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 255 double rebated (or tongued) for capping, 5 J in x 2-J in. outer styles, and 6 in. X 2J in. rebated and beaded meeting styles. Fill in with 1 in. deal, wrought, twice grooved and V-jointed both sides, oak tongued boarding in 4J in. (or 5 J- in.) widths. The capping to be 4 in. x 3 in. deal, wrought, grooved, twice moulded, twice weathered (saddle-back) and twice throated, with wrought-iron cresting 3 in. deep, p.c. 3s. per foot run, screwed on with countersunk screws. Hang each gate on one 3 ft. 6 in. and one 3 ft. Col- linge's patent cup and ball hinges, fixed with Jin. bolts, nuts, heads and washers, the longer hinge being fixed to the top rail. The hinges to have long jaws, let into 6 in. rubbed York hinge stones the full size of the piers, with 1 in. diameter wrought-iron bolts taken down the piers connecting the hinge stones together, and secured to 9 in. x 9 in. X J in. wrought-iron plates, nuts and heads. Fasten gates with a Collinge's patent double lock vertical stay, p.c. 30s., and one cast-iron fall-down stop, let into a granite block bedded in concrete. Form a wicket, showing flush on the Ww//K*a*"( outside, with similar framing and board- ing, the framing being 4J- in. wide and rebated to the main framing, and hung on 4J in. wrought-iron (or brass) butts, and provided with mortise lock and two keys, p.c. 8s. ; two 4 in. dia- meter flush ring handles ; one bullet catch ; and two 6 in. barrel bolts. If, instead of the wicket, a side entrance gate be required, it might be made 4 ft. or 3 ft. 6 in. wide, and formed and hung in the same way as the cart gates, but provided with a lock. If the boarding to the gates be 1J in. instead of 1 in. thick, then the lock and frieze rails and braces would be in. less in thickness. Put two of Homer's wrought-iron ball catches, let into concrete, and with striking plates fixed on gates. Bed in concrete two granite spur blocks out of 12 in. diameter one way, 8 in. through the other way and 3 ft. deep, and rounded off on top. The gates may be 3 in. thick, according to the width of the opening, 2J in. being sufficient up to 9 ft. wide, and 3 in. from 6 ft. to 12 ft. or 13 ft. wide. A stone threshold, either York or granite, some 9 in. to 12 in. deep, bedded on concrete, may be described between the piers ; or else granite setts may be employed, see Pavior, clause No. 10. Cart gates should not be less than 8 ft. wide clear of the spurs, 9 ft. and 9 ft. 6 in. being preferable. Carriage gates may be made as wide as 13 ft. or 14 ft., the width 2 5 6 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (267) being governed by the class of house and accessibility from the road. Thus, in a very narrow road a carriage has to drive in on the ske.w, and cannot obtain an entrance directly opposite the gates. But when there is plenty of road space, gates 10 ft. wide will be ample. The height of gates may be made any height required, according to the circumstances of the case and the privacy required. Perhaps 6 ft. 6 in. should be a least height for the ordinary amount of privacy required. The length of the hinges depends upon the width of the gates. Instead of Collinge's patent vertical gate stay, a wrought deal gate bar, about 4 in. X 4 in., is sometimes used for cart gates, with 3 in. X i in. wrought-iron strap staples at either end fixed to deal blocks ; and a 3 in. X in. wrought-iroii hinged strap locking staple, with eye- plate and padlock at the centre, all being fixed with countersunk screws. Or the gates may be fixed similar to coach house doors, see clause No. 270. or, An 1 in. iron bar rod may be provided, hooking into an eye on the gate at the one end, and fixed to an eye and plate at the other end, screwed to a deal or oak post let into the ground and bedded in concrete. A lock and bolt would be re- quired to the gate in this case. or, If the gate be not very high, a padlock with hasp and staples and two brass bolts may be supplied. Homer's ball catch may be screwed to 8 in. x 8 in. wrought posts, shaped off at the top and let into the ground some 2 ft. and bedded in concrete, instead of the catches being bedded directly in the concrete without posts. ! J Collinge's cup and ball hinges are made in 1 ft. 6 in., 1 ft. : L - J ; 9 in., 2 ft., 2 ft. 3 in., 2 ft. 6 in., 2 ft. 9 in., 3 ft, 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in., 4 ft., 4 ft. 6 in., 5 ft., 5 ft. 6 in. and 6 ft. lengths. The upper hinge should be about three-fourths the width of gate. (267) Plant a 3 in. x 1 in. wrought, chamfered oak fillet stop on to each of the 10 in. X 10 in. wrought all round deal (or oak) posts, having the sharp arrises slightly taken off, and carried down 6 ft. below the ground line, the tops being shaped to receive the lamps, and the feet each framed with two 11 in. x4in. (or 12 in. X 6 in.) sole pieces, secured together with two dog irons 18 in. long ; four 4J in. X 4 in. struts bolted to sole pieces with f in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers, and fitting against 12 in. X 9 in..x 3 in. chocks spiked on to ends of sole pieces. Take a 9 in. X 4 in. (or 12 in. X 6 in.) sill piece connecting the two posts together, and fitted at each end between two 12 in. x 9 in. x 3 in. chocks spiked to posts. Put on the outside two 7 in. x 5 in. Cart gates in a fence. (267) CAEPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 257 -- _ \ ' - - - ' "X ^ '' \ 4 - - - _ ' > - < - ' * ' t**r 1 1 ' "** 1 ' i Outer /ace \ [ \ yy*** \ English oak spurs, cut out of a natural bend in the wood with the grain hori- zontal, and frame into posts and bed 2 ft. down in the ground in concrete. Take two | in. wrought- iron tie rods through posts, with nuts, heads and washers, and secure to 9 in. x 6 in. x 3 ft. deal blocks, bedded 3 ft. down in the ground in concrete. The gates to be 2J in. (or 3 in.) wrought deal, grooved and V-jointed framings,, stop chamfered on the inner side, with 11 in. X2J- in. (or 3 in.) splayed bottom rails, 11 in. x li in. (or If in.) splayed lock rails, 5J in. X 1J in. (or If in.) splayed frieze rails, 6 in. x 2 in. (or 3 in.) top rails, double rebated for capping, 5J in. x2J in. (or 3 in.) outer styles, 5i in. x li in. (or If in.) braces, and 5 in. x2J in. (or 3 in.) rebated and beaded meeting styles. Fill in with 1 in. wrought deal, twice grooved and V-jointed both sides, oak tongued board- ing in oi in. widths. The capping to be 4 in. (or 4J in.) x 3 in. deal, wrought, grooved, twice moulded, twice weathered and twice throated, with wrought-iron cresting 4 in. deep, p.c. 3s. 6d. per fool run, screwed on with countersunk screws. Hang each gate on one 5 ft. and one 3 ft. 6 in. Collinge's patent cup and ball hinges, fixed with J in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers, the longer hinge being fixed to the top rail, and the sockec plates screwed to gate posts. Then describe the gate stay, the fall- down gate stop, the wicket, the catches, the threshold, or paving setts, as in clause No. 266. The gate bar may or may not be used. 258 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (268) All woodwork buried in the ground is to be charred (or tarred), and cased all round in a solid block of concrete. Sometimes the gate posts are surrounded with chalk instead ot concrete. Lay on J in. galvanised wrought-iron gas barrel up the side of each gate post, and bored through 18 in. down from the top. Allow the p.c. sum of 8 for two gate lamps, and fix to posts with coach-headed screws. If a side entrance gate be required in lieu of the wicket, it might be 4 ft. or 3 ft. 6 in. wide, and formed in the same way as the cart gates, but provided with a lock. It may be hung on Collinge's hinges, strap hinges, or else on one and a half pair of 4 in. wrought-iron butts. Wrought-iron forged strap pivot hinges may be used, say J in. metal 3 in. wide, diminishing to 2 in. x f in. metal at the further end, and secured with J in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers every 10 in. (to 12 in.) apart ; the pivots being carefully formed, and the pivot plates secured with four (or three) ^ in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers carried through the posts. Two struts and one sole piece only may be provided to each of the gate posts, instead of the four and two respectively. Sometimes the sole piece parallel with the gate runs through from post to post similar to the sill piece, and connected to the sill-piece at the centre with a 6 in. X 4 in. vertical strut. For widths and heights of gates, see notes to clause No. 266. Hinged carriage gates. (268) These may be similar to clauses Nos. 266 or 267, and fixed either to piers or posts ; but no gate bar should be put to carriage gates. State if the top rails be " shaped" out, giving the size out of which they are cut. If the gates be very wide, a munting may be described at the centre. DDOO DDDD Panelled carriage gates may be described in a similar way to a panelled door, see clause No. 244. State if with raised panels or bolection moulded. (269) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 259 In either case the fastenings, hinges, stops and other furniture and finishings, and threshold or paving would be similar as to cart gates, see clauses Nos. 266 and 267. State if the bottom moulding of panels is splayed off as in clause No. 255. - For bell, see Bell Hanger, clauses Nos. 6, 9 or 10. Sliding carriage gates. DDDD (269) The description of the framing might be the same as in clauses Nos. 244 and 268 ; but the furniture would be as follows : Each gate to be provided with one pair of " Hatfield's " patent gun-metal bushed wheels, 6 in. diameter, with plates let into bottom rail, and sliding on a | in. metal cast-iron rounded run- ner 4 in. wide, with the guide standing up f in., and let into a 12 in. X 9 in. rubbed hard York sill, and secured with screws into leaded, dovetailed holes. The sill to be bedded on con- crete 2 ft. wide, 18 in. deep. The meeting styles to have a gun- metal tongue and groove joint, and provided with two flush ring handles, a brass hook lock and two keys, p.c. 12s., and four brass flush handles, p.c. 3s. each, let in flush with the styles. The outer styles to be provided with two brass pull handles, p.c. 3s. each, two brass plates with india-rubber buffers riveted on. Put two wrought-iron door stops fixed to the ends of stone sill. The frieze rail to be provided on both sides with 1 in. diameter brass rollers every 18 in. apart, standing out from the face of the framing J in., and each pier to have two 6 in. x 6 in. oak guide blocks carried through the centre the full width of the piers, to take the friction of the rollers. Describe a wicket, and its ironmongery if required. The piers must be made sufficiently wide and strong to keep the gates in position when closed, as there is no gear at the top to steady them. The gates must be made the full width of the piers, in addition to the width of the opening. If the gates slide along the inner side of a wall, the rollers would be fixed in the top rail, and a channel iron with oak block provided to form the guide ; but the top rails of gate could not in this case be cut **=* to an ornamental shape. s 2 260 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (269a) ga P te^and ri fie g id (269a) See clauses Nos. 330 and 331 respectively. gates. Coach house doors (270) The coach house doors to be 2J in. wrought wa ' deal, grooved and V-jointed framings, stop chamfered on the inner side, with 9 in. (or 11 in.) x 2 J in. twice splayed bottom rails, 9 in. (or 11 in.)xl in. splayed lock rails, 5J in. X 1 J in. splayed frieze rails, 5J in. x 2 J in. top rails and styles, 6" in. x 2 J in. rebated and beaded meeting styles, and 5J in. x 1 J in. braces. Fill in with 1 in. deal, wrought, twice grooved and V-jointed both sides, oak tongued boarding in 4 in. widths, rebated and throated on bottom edge. Hang each leaf with one 3 ft. 6 in. and one 3 ft. Oollinge's patent cup and ball hinges, fixed with J in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers ; the longer hinge being fixed to the top rail, and the socket plates screwed to the door frames with coach-headed (or countersunk) screws. The frames to be 5 in. (or 7 in.) X 4 in. wrought, beaded and rebated oak (or deal), with cast-iron shoes let into threshold, and secured to centre piers of brickwork with J in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers every 2 ft. apart, and to the side piers of brickwork with 2 in. x in. wrought-iron ties 18 in. long every 2 ft. apart, with the wall ends turned up and down, and the other ends screwed to the door frames. Supply each pair of doors with a 2J- in. (or 3 in.) X J in. wrought-iron hinged swivel bar with knuckle joint, hasp, staple, eye plate and padlock, p.c. ;">*. ; two 12 in. and two 36 in. 1 in. x|in. monkey-tail (271) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER, 26l bolts with floor sockets, and four pointed (or forked) door checks with plates screwed on with countersunk screws. If 1J in. boarding be required to the doors, then the lock and middle rails and braces would be li in. thick. State if frames and doors have segmental, semicircular, or elliptical heads, and that the door heads are put together with oak keys and wedges (or handrail screws) or with oak pins, as in the notes to clause No. 255. If square headed, a bressummer or rolled iron joist, with stone templates and cover stone, must be taken. The clear width of opening for coach house doors should not be less than 6 ft. for ordinary carriages, 6 ft. 6 in. and even 7 ft. 6 in. being preferable. Carriages are not often more than 5 ft. 6 in. wide. The height of a carriage does not exceed 6 ft., the doors may therefore be 7 ft. as a least height. The door frames may rest upon York stone blocks the full width oV the wall by about 21 in. wide and 18 in. deep ; and a ^ or ^ threshold may be placed in between the open- ings some 7 in. thick, kept up in. above the yard and chamfered off; see Mason, clause No. 61. Two of Horner's wrought-iron ball catches may be provided for each pair of doors instead of the four forked door stops ; see clause No. 266. Barrel bolts are perhaps preferable to square bolts, as square bolts set very hard and it is difficult to use them, especially if the doors twist slightly. Horizontal wood door bars are not now much used for coach house doors. Coach house doors in a thin wall. LL (271) When the brick or stone piers are not suffi- ciently strong for building in the frame, then the coach house doors may be hung to a wrought deal beaded frame and head some 9 in. wide X 4J- in. thick, with the horns projecting some 6 in. to 9 in. in length, and bearing on 3 in. x 9 in. x 9 in. York templates, and the feet cased in cast-iron shoes let into the stone threshold, the posts being secured to the brickwork every two feet apart with wrought-iron ties 18 in. long, with the wall ends turned up and down, and the other ends screwed to the door frames. A 2 J in. X in. (or 1 in.) wrought deal fillet must be planted round the frame and head as a door stop ; or the frame may be rebated out. There would be the ordinary bressummer or rolled iron joist, with stone templates and cover stone over to carry the weight of the brickwork above. 262 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (272) The description of the doors would remain the same as clause No. 270. _ ' External stable door. When light cannot be obtained elsewhere in a coach house, it is neces- sary to put fanlights over the doors, which may be described as ordinary fan- light sashes with strong bars, see clause No. 25f ; but if there be not suffi- cient height for this, then the top panels of the doors may be glazed with rough plate \ in. thick fixed into rebates with loose beads. When space is very limited, it may be necessary to construct the hanging posts for coach house doors in iron. The posts (or stan- chions) and head may be of rolled iron joists, fitted with twice rebated and twice beaded oak or deal posts and head facing pieces 5 in. thick by the width of the stanchion, and bolted through witli \ in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers every 2 ft. apart. The iron stanchions and head are bolted to- gether with J in. iron angle plates ; and the feet may be bedded on a 6 in. York stone base surrounded in con- crete. Instead of rolled iron joist stanchions, they may be the usual cast-iron stanchions with the head and bottom plates cast on ; see clause No. 37, under Smith. (272) Each external stable door to be 2J in. wrought deal, grooved and V-jointed framings in two heights, stop chamfered on the inner side, the lower half having 9 in. (or 11 iri.)x2J in. twice splayed bottom rail, 7 in. x 2J in. hook re- bated, splayed and throated top rail, 5J in. X 2 \ in. styles, and one 5 \ in. x 1 \ in. brace. The upper half of door to have 7 in. x 2J in. twice splayed, rebated and hollow-grooved bottom rail, the styles, top rail and braces being similar to the style and braces of the lower half of door. Fill in with 1 in. deal, wrought, twice grooved and V-jointed both sides, oak tongued (272) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER, 263 boarding in 4J in. widths, rebated and throated on the bottom edges. Hang each half with two 2 ft. 6 in. .floors aye/i Collinge's patent cup and ball hinges, fixed with \ in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers, the socket plates being screwed to door frame, with coach-headed (or counter- sunk) screws. The transome to be twice rebated and four times beaded, and the frame once rebated and twice beaded in 5 in. X 4 in. wrought oak (or deal), with cast-iron shoes let into threshold and secured to brick- work with 2 in. x i in. wrought-iron ties 18 in. long every 2 ft. apart, with wall ends turned up and down, and the other ends screwed to the door frame. Put to each door five 6 in. brass barrel bolts, two brass spring ball catches, one brass flush ring handle, p.c. 3s., and two brass door catches (or cabin hooks and eyes). Fill in each fanlight with a 2 in. moulded deal sash with movable beads, and hang on one pair 3J in. brass butts, and provide with brass spring catch and two brass fanlight stays, and glaze with 26 oz. sheet glass in putty. The stone thresholds may be similar as in the notes to clause No. 270 ; and see " Mason " clause Kb. 61. Ironwork should not be used for door or window furniture in stables, as it soon corrodes and gets out of order. Brass or gun-metal should be used. Stable doors should not be less than 3 ft. 6 in. clear opening, 3 ft. 9 in. and 4 ft. being preferable, by about 7 ft. 9 in. high. By arranging the bolts as shown on the sketch, it will be seen that either the upper or lower half of the door can be opened singly, or the two halves together. By merely pushing the doors the ball catches keep the two doors shut when the bolts are not shot, the flush ring handle in this case being provided merely ibr pulling the doors open, and not acting as a latch. If brass latches and locks are required in lieu of the ball catches, allow a p.c. sum. For sizes of stall and loose box divisions, and fittings to stables, see Smith, notes preceding clause No. 109, and Smith, clauses ISTos. 109 to 111. 264 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. Loft door. (273) Loft doors should be from 3 ft. 6 in. to 4 ft. wide, and hung folding ; and may be described similar to coach house doors, see clause No. 270. The doors may be 2J in. thick, the frame 5 in. X 4 in., with shoes and wrought-iron wall ties ; and the hinges either Collinge's or 4 in. wrought butts. Two or four brass (or iron) bolts, two brass handles, and two wrought-iron handles 12 in. long screwed to door frame, should be provided. Fix to wall a small crane for hoisting corn and hay, p.c. 3. If there are no windows in the loft, the doors may be partly glazed. For stone threshold, see clause No. 61 in Mason. A movable guard is often placed in front of loft doors to prevent the coachman's children falling out, and may be described as 3 J in. x 2 in. wrought deal skeleton framing, with styles rounded at top, and 1 J in. X 2 in. vertical bars spaced 2 in. (to 3 in.) apart ; and made mov- able to slide between the door frame and 2 in. X 1 J in. rounded fillets secured to plugs in the wall. Cow house doors. (273a) Doors to openings where beasts pass through, or where it is necessary to take barrows, should not be less than 4 ft. wide in the clear. Doors to cow houses and like positions should be described in two halves, similar to stable doors, see clause No. 272. Ledged and braced doors are often used in these positions, see clause No. 264, but with ironmongery somewhat similar to clause No. 272. For sizes of cow stalls, divisions, and other farm requirements, see Smith, clause No. 112. Louvred doors. (274) Louvred doors are generally required for ventilation in various places, and may be described as : 2 in. (2^ in. or 2J in.) wrought deal, beaded, skeleton framing, grooved for louvres ; having 4J in. (or 5J in.) styles and top rail, 9 in. (or 11 in.) splayed bottom rail, and f in. splayed and beaded louvres placed 1 in. apart at an angle of 45 and projecting J in. out beyond the face of framing, and housed into styles. Hang each door on one pair 4 in. wrought-iron butts, to a 4 in. x 3 in. beaded and rebated frame with iron shoes and wall ties, and finished with a 1J in. x 1 in. bead moulding round as architrave, and provided with oak stock lock and key, p.c. 8s. (276a) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 265 Repairs to old doors and frames. Trap door in floor. (275) Cut out decayed and perished portions of doors, frames, linings and mouldings, and piece out with new. Put entirely new ironmongery. (276) Trim joists with trimmers 4 in. wide, for a trap-door opening 4 ft. x 2 i't. 6 in. ; line round with 1^ in. wrought deal rounded cross-tongued linings grooved for plaster, and finished with a 3J in. x 1-i in. mitred floor border. The trap door to be hung folding, with splayed meeting joint, on 18 in. wrought-iron strap hinges, and framed together with 4^ in. X 1 J in. (2 in. or 2J in.) wrought deal ledges, and 1 J in. (2 in. or 2J in.) wrought deal, grooved and tongued flush boarding, and provided with two 2 in. diameter wrought-iron flush rings bolted through, and a 2 in. x 2 in. movable tee-iron centre bar support. The boarding may be V-jointed, or matched and beaded on the under side. The flaps may show panels on the under side, either plain or moulded. The hinges may be ordinary wrought-iron butts. The linings may be sunk and beaded, or even panelled. Trap door in ceiling to roof, with step ladder. (2 76 a) Trim joists with trimmers 3 in. thick, for a trap-door opening into roof, 2 ft. 6 in. X 2 ft. 6 in. Put an lj in. wrought deal one-panel square door, hung with 3 J in. wrought-iron butts to ! in. (or 1 in.) wrought deal beaded linings grooved for plaster, and provided with a 3 in. brass cabin hook and eye for fastening on the under side, and a 6 in. iron cabin hook and eye for securing on the roof side when open. The door may be moulded on the under side. The linings may be similar to those mentioned to a trap door in clause No. 276. For trap doors in roofs, see clauses Nos. 92 and 93. step ladder, The step ladder to trap door in ceiling to be 15 in. wide, and formed with 1 J in. wrought beaded strings, and lj in. wrought rounded treads housed and dove- tailed through. Fix to strings of ladder and to lining of trap door wrought-iron hooks and eyes ; and provide with lines, cleats, pulleys and fastenings for raising ladder when out of use (or else provide brackets on wall upon which to hang the ladder). or, Provide a light wrought-iron step ladder to trap door in ceiling, formed with 1J in. X f in. strings and -J in. barrel rungs, hinged with hooks and eyes, and provide with lines, cleats, pulleys and fastenings for raising ladder when out of use (or else provide brackets on wall upon which to hang the ladder). 266 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (276b) For access to the rooms in roof "of small property, where the landing- space is cramped, a flight of stairs is made somewhat similar to a step ladder, which may be raised and lowered at will by balance weights. Cellar flaps. (276b) Cellar flaps may be formed in a similar way to a trap door in a floor, with the boarding and ledges 1J in. (or 2 in.) thick, and either in deal, oak or teak. The frame (kerb) should be in oak or teak about 6 in. x4 in., rebated and notched out to receive the flaps, and two iron or brass barrel bolts (or padlock) pro- vided on the under side for fixing, as well as the flush rings for opening. An iron grating may be required for ventilation, say 9 in. X 9 in. or 12 in. X 12 in., and screwed in. Allow the p.c. sum of 3 for two movable safety guards, to be fixed in position when the flaps are open, for the protection of passers-by. Cellar flaps may be glazed like pavement lights, or may be entirely in iron. State if a step ladder is required, either in iron or wood. Sometimes steps in brick or stone are provided from the cellar flap level to the cellar. Strtet kerb Loop-hole frame, door and flap. (277) A loop-hole frame is a name given to a door in a warehouse or factory, through which goods are hauled up to the various floors. The door and frame might be described similar to clause No. 273, and in addition state : The sill to be in oak, 5 in. X 12 in., weathered on top. Form flap with a 3 ft. projection and rounded nosing in oak (or deal) 3 in. (or 2J in.) thick, framed together, and filled in with similar boarding in 7-in. widths, grooved and tongued together with 1 J in. x \ in. galva- nised iron tongues, and hung on one pair of 3 in. x f in. wrought-iron strap hinges with knuckle joints. Each hinge to be bolted to the sill with two j in. (or f in.) bolts, nuts, heads and washers, and one 3 in. coach screw ; and bolted to the flap with five J in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers. The outer end of hinges to have forged eyes, and slung from door posts with forged wrought-iron link chains to carry 3 (more or less) cwts., and secured to door frame with eyes and plates bolted through. Screw on to the side of door frame two wrought-iron handles 12 in. long ; and two wrought- iron hooks for looping chain to when flap is drawn up. For crane, see Smith, clause No. 73. The door frame must be well secured to the walls or to a story post. (278) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 267 Bath enclosure in mahogany. BATH CASING AND BATH ROOM FITTINGS. (Clauses Nos. 278 to 280.) (278) The bath framing to be in well selected, clean, wrought Honduras mahogany, French polished and formed with : J in. (or 1 in.) framed top, on deal bearers, per- forated for tapered bath with thumb moulding on inner edge and semicircular end, rebated on the under side to receive top edge of bath, grooved for riser, rounded on the outer edge with a small moulding under, and bedded on to bath in cement. Screw on the under side of top at each end a 2 in. X j\ in. wrought strap iron. (This strap iron assists in holding the top framing together.) The front (riser) beneath to be fixed to fillets and formed with 1J in. (or 1^ in.) five (or other) panel moulded (or square) framing rebated to top, with hinged door for access to valves, hung on 2 in. brass butts, and provided with a 2 in. turnbuckle on plate, and 1^ in. diameter brass rose knob. Run a 4J in. X f in. square skirt- ing round top, dove-tailed at angles, with quadrant ends, and secured to narrow double splayed deal grounds (the skirting may be rebated to a groove in the bath top). The top and riser to be made movable with brass flush bolts (or brass cups and screws). . The least length and width of a bath top should not be less than 12 in. and 8 in. more respectively than the size of the bath. For sizes of baths, see Plumber, clauses Nos. 37 to 46. step to bath. Form step 1 J- in. (or \\ in.) thick in Honduras mahogany, with rounded nosing, rebated to a groove in bath riser, and with an 1 in. mahogany riser rebated to a groove in tread ; glued, blocked and bracketed together, and perforated to shape, so as to give a view of the bath safe ; and made movable with brass flush bolts (or brass cups and screws). A step is not required if the top of the bath is not more than about 21 in. from the floor. In this case the bath riser might be perforated to give a view of the safe, or a 6 in. x f in. skirting might be fixed as a finish. 268 CARPENTER; JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (278) Bath flap. The flap to be 1 in. (1 in.) thick, tongued and grooved, mortise and mitre clamped Honduras ma- hogany, rounded on three edges, and hung with one and a half pairs of 3 in. brass butts on 1^ in. (or 1 in.) x 3J in. beaded mahogany fillet piece, and provided with a 2 in. brass cabin hook and eye, and a 2 in. brass flush ring. Back and elbows. Instead of a skirting there may be an 1 J in. (or 1 in.) six (or other) panel moulded (or square) mahogany back and elbows 15 in. (to 18 in.) high, rebated to grooves in the bath top and capping, rebated and grooved at angles, staff beaded at ends, and with a moulded (or beaded) capping 3 in. girth, returned and mitred at ends, and secured to double splayed narrow deal backings. If heating pipes or a coil be placed inside the bath casing in order to keep the bath warm, then state that one (or more) of the panels in the bath riser are to be rilled in with brass or iron perforated gratings for ventilation. Care should be taken in bedding the bath top on to the bath in cement, so that no draught may be felt at the joint. Bath framings may be formed in a similar way in pitch pine or other hard wood, deal or pine, and French polished. In very plain work the fronts or risers are formed of matched and beaded boarding. Bath cradle. Encase the copper (iron, steel or zinc) bath with a strong- framed, rough deal dovetailed cradle. All metal baths, except cast-iron baths, require cradles, see Plumber, clause No. 42. Fire-clay baths do not require cradles. Towel roUer. To be an 1 in. cased brass rod with ornamental brass brackets secured to wall. (It may be as in clause No. 288.) Bath ran. TO be a 4J in. x 1 in. wrought mahogany (or deal) rail 5 ft. long, moulded (or beaded) on all edges, screwed to plugs in wall, varnished (or French polished), and pro- vided with brass cloak hooks every 9 in. apart {or japanned malleable iron cloak hooks). (See sketch to clause No. 235). Salt water or brine copper. See clause No. 280. (281) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 269 Bath rim. (279) Baths (usually cast iron) that have no top or casing round may be provided with an li in. (or 1 J in.) X 6 in. (or 4 in.) wrought, framed, French polished Honduras mahogany top, perforated for tapered bath, with thumb moulding on inner edge, and semicircular at end, rebated on the under side to receive top edge of bath, rounded on the outer edges, with rounded corners, and strapped together at each end on the under side with an 1J in. x ^ in. wrought-iron strap, screwed on, and the rim secured to bath with brass clips. The rim may be in pitch pine or other hard wood, deal or pine, and French polished. Salt water or brine copper. (280) It is very useful for heating brine or salt water, to fix an ordinary portable copper in a bath room, with a short length of iron flue pipe and 1 in. brass draw-off cock, see Smith, clause No. 68. From 20 to 25 gallons would be a fair size copper. Allow a p.c. sum. The hearth and cheeks to the fireplace opening might be tiled similar to a dog grate, or else built in glazed brickwork, see Smith, clause No. 85 ; Pavior, clause No. 6 ; and Mason, clause No. 122. Lavatory enclosure. (281) Enclose underneath lavatory with 1^ in. (or 1 in.) wrought, French polished, Honduras mahogany, one-panel moulded (or square) door, hung with 2^ in. brass butts in 1^ in. (or 1 in.) beaded mahogany frame on fillets, rebated, grooved and staff beaded at angles, and provided with a 2 in. brass turnbuckle on plate, and 1J in. diameter brass knob. Kun a small ma- hogany moulding under lavatory as a finish, and put one in. wrought mahogany shelf on bearers inside. Pletrts State if it be a circular front to an angle lavatory. Towel roller and g ee under clause No. 278. Fix on door a brass coat coat hook. 270 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (282) Mahogany W.C. framing. W.C. CASING AND OTHER FITTINGS. (Clauses Nos. 282 to 285.) (282) The framing to w.c. on ground and first floor to be in well selected, clean, wrought Honduras mahogany, French polished, and formed with : 1 in. riser rebated to groove in seat. 1 in. seat, thumb moulded on front edge in beaded frame, with hole cut, dished and thumb moulded for pan, and hole cut and beaded for handle. 1 in. mortise and mitre clamped flap, with rounded (or moulded) nosing, tongued on to groove in front edge, and hung on 2J in. brass butts in beaded frame, and finished with a similar moulded nosing. |- in. (or J in.) square skirting 3J in. high, dovetailed at angles, with bull-nosed ends, and secured to double splayed narrow deal grounds. (The skirting may be rebated to a groove in flap frame.) The whole of the mahogany framing to be put together with brass flush bolts (or brass cups and screws) for removing easily and secured to deal dovetailed legs and bearers plugged to walls. Paint the under side of seat with two coats of silicate paint or Brunswick black. flap -i* it fa rou.ndea^ This is an ordinary description of a w.c. framing. For a more costly framing see clause No. 283. Closet framings may be in any hard wood. The riser -may be hinged in a beaded frame on 2 in. brass butts, and provided with two brass flush bolts ; or it may be rebated and grooved together in a beaded frame, when no fastenings would be necessary. The least width of a w.c. seat is 1 ft. 10 in., but 2 ft. and 2 ft. 3 in. is better ; the length may be from 3 ft. to 4 ft. Here is a sketch of an angle closet, showing the least size required. Closet seats should not be fixed more than 15 in. from the ground (or step) for adults. For children they may be fixed as low as from 9 in. to 12 in. To obtain these low heights either the apparatus must be kept down or else a step provided. step to closet. See Plumber, notes to clause No. 51, referring to a step. If a step be required, describe it similar to a bath step, as under clause No. 278. (283) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 271 Towel roller and coat hook. Paper box. See under clause JSTo. 278. Fix on door a brass coat hook. Each w.c. to have a J in. wrought Honduras ma- hogany dovetailed square (or quadrant) shaped, French "polished paper box, rounded on top and bottom edges, with hole cut in front with rounded edges, and fixed to walls with brass eyes and hooks. A paper box may also be formed in the seat of the closet in cedar wood, with beaded mahogany flap, hung on 2 in. brass butts, and pro- vided with an 1J in. brass ring. Often a metal roller with paper wound round is used instead of a paper box. Candle bracket. Each w.c. to have a French polished Honduras ma- hogany candle bracket, formed with J in. moulded shelf and 5 in. cut bracket, and fixed to wall with brass plates, eyes and screws. Pot cupboard. Y/.'ff/'fil To be in clean Honduras mahogany, French polished, with 1 in. quadrant-shaped, one-panel, moulded (or square) circular door, hung on 2 J in. brass butts in 1 in. beaded frame, rebated to an \\ in. moulded and grooved top, and provided with a 2 in. brass turnbuckle on plate and \\ in. brass knob, and fixed together on deal fillets, wrought mahogany shelf on bearers inside. Put one 3 in. Mahogany w.c. framing for high class work. (283) The framing to w.c. on ground and first floor to be in well selected, clean Honduras mahogany, French polished, arid formed with : li in. (or 1 in.) one-panel, moulded (or square) riser, rebated to groove in seat. 1 in. mortise and mitre clamped seat, thumb moulded on front edge, grooved for riser, and hung 011 one pair 3 in. brass butts, in beaded frame, with cut, dished, thumb-moulded hole for pan, and hole cut and beaded for handle. 1 in. mortise and mitre clamped flap, with moulded (or rounded) nosing tongued on to groove in front edge, and hung with 3 in. brass butts in beaded frame, and finished with a similar moulded nosing. li in. (or 1 in.) four (or other) panel, moulded (or square) back and elbows 1 ft. 3 in. high, with staff bead at ends, rebated and grooved at angles, 272 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (284) and rebated to a moulded (or beaded) grooved capping 3 in. girth on top, and fixed to double splayed, narrow deal framed grounds. (The elbows and back may be rebated to a groove in flap frame.) The whole of the mahogany framing to be put together with brass flush bolts (or brass cups and screws), for removing sasily, and secured to deal dovetailed legs and bearers plugged to walls. Paint the under side of seat with two coats of silicate paint, or Brunswick black. The riser may either be hinged or work in a groove, see notes under clause No. 282. For step to closet, paper box, candle bracket, pot cupboard, towel roller and coat hook, see under clause No. 282. Closet seat and flap without riser. (284) Wash-out closets similar to clause No. 52 in Plumber are seldom cased in with woodwork, merely being supplied with a seat and flap, which is generally sold with the closet, and may either be in mahogany or white wood. A description might run : Form closet seat with 1J in. (1 in. or 1J in.) shaped and French polished Honduras mahogany, rounded on the outer edge, with hole cut, dished and thumb moulded for pan, and hinged on 2J in. brass butts to beaded fillet piece 6 in. wide, on wrought deal cham- fered bearer plugged to wall. Paint the under side with two coats of silicate paint or Brunswick black. Form flap in similar shaped, French polished ma- hogany, 1 in. thick, rounded on edge, and hung on 2J in. brass butts to beaded fillet piece 4 in. wide, with 4 in. x ^ in. mahogany skirting rounded at ends, and screwed to wall with brnss cups and screws. (The skirting may be rebated to a groove in the fillet piece.) The description in white wood or deal would be similar, and might either be left in the plain wood or French polished. For paper box, candle bracket, pot cupboard, towel roller and coat hook, see under clause No. 282. Servants' w.c's. Jrtktcji (285) These maybe in plain (or varnished) deal or white wood, and described similar as under clauses Nos. 282 or 284. Closets for workmen may merely have a wood seat with a small angle fillet skirting round, and the closet pan built in solid in brickwork. A small L iron may (286) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 273 be screwed on to the under side of seat, and clipping on to the brickwork so as to keep the top course of bricks in place. For trough closets or latrines, see Plumber, clause No. 54. HOUSEMAID'S SINK AND OTHER FITTINGS. Housemaid's sink. (286) The housemaid's sink to be fixed on 3 in. X 3 in. wrought framed deal dovetailed legs and bearers, pinned into walls, and formed with : 1J in. wrought deal, glued and dovetailed sink framing 2 ft. X 1 ft. 6 in. X 12 in. in the clear, with 1 in. dovetailed (or grooved and rebated) bottom sharply dished out to the centre outlet, with an 1^ in. X 1 J in. rounded oak nosing piece screwed on front edge, and the sink prepared for lead. 1J in. wrought fluted deal drainage board on wrought deal chamfered bearers, with a ^ in. X 2 in. rounded oak raised fillet on front edge, 7 in. X J in. chamfered deal dovetailed skirting on grounds with rounded ends, and an 1 in. X 1 in. angle fillet round three sides, and the whole prepared for lead. The flap to be 1^ in. skeleton framed wrought oak with 1J in. bars spaced J in. apart, and hinged on 2J in. brass butts. The front of sink to be left entirely open. The oak flap is to stand cans or jugs upon, and prevents the bottoms getting wet when being filled with water. The draining board is not always covered with lead. If doors are required in front of the sink, see under clause No. 287. The woodwork to sinks may be described with the leadwork, see clause No. 32 under Plumber. The tops of housemaids' sinks are fixed 3 ft. up from the floor. Towel roller. See under clause No. 288. Cupboard with broom rack inside. See under clause No. 293 for the cupboard, which would only require one shelf at top ; and under clause No. 288 for the broom rack. Shelves. See under clause No. 288. 274 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (287) BUTLER'S PANTRY SINK AND OTHER FITTINGS. Butler's pantry sink (cased in). (287) To be fixed on 3 in. by 3 in. wrought framed deal dovetailed legs and bearers, pinned into wall, and formed with: 1 in. wrought deal, glued, dovetailed sink framing 2 ft. X 1 ft. 6 in. x 1 ft. 3 in. in the clear, with 1^ in. dovetailed (or grooved and rebated) bottom sharply dished out to the centre outlet, with a 2J in. x 1^ in. oak rounded nosing piece screwed on front edge, and the sink prepared for lead. 1 in. (or li in.) wrought deal, mortise and mitre clamped flap, hung on 2J in. brass butts in 1 in. (or 1^ in.) wrought, beaded frame, rounded on front edge, with 5 in. x in. deal dovetailed square skirting on grounds with rounded ends. Enclose sink with 1 in. wrought deal, one-panel square-framed doors, with rebated and beaded meeting styles, and hung folding on 3 in. brass butts in 1 in. beaded frame with fillet stops, and provided with a 3 in. brass neck bolt, a 2 in. brass turnbuckle on plate, and two 1J in. brass knobs. The draining boards to be movable, and formed out of 1 J in. fluted deal, with 2 in. x J in. rounded oak raised fillet on three sides, and prepared for lead. See Clause No. 32 in Plumber for leadwork. The tops of butler's sinks are fixed 3 ft. up from the floor. In large establishments butlers require two sinks placed close together, one 2 ft. X 18 in. X 15 in. and one 18 in. X 18 in. x 15 in. Bntler's pantry sink (not cased in). The description may be exactly similar to a house- maid's sink, see under clause No. 286 (and covered with lead), but without the oak flap, the sink being 2 ft. X 18 in. X 15 in. in the clear, and 3 ft. up from the floor. Or the sink may have a plain 1 in. (or 1 in.) wrought deal top (without lead covering) rounded on outer edge and round the sink opening, with a 1 in. (or 1J in.) rounded oak nosing piece screwed on front edge of sink, and a 5 in. x f in. chamfered dovetailed skirting on grounds with rounded ends; and supplied with a movable fluted draining board, as previously mentioned under this clause. (287) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. For leadwork see Plumber clause No. 32. 275 Towel roller. See under clause No. 288. Table. Give size, such as 3 ft. 6 in. X 6 ft. to 8 ft. long, with the number of legs. The top may be in 1 J in. to 2 in. deal. Describe similar to the table under clause No. 288, and instead of the stay rail at the feet describe a 2 in. X 2 in. skeleton- framed tray rack with bars spaced 6 in. apart. If no drawers be required, the side framing would be similar to the end framing, but shaped out to give more room. Table flap. If required, see under clause No. 288. State the size. Bottle rack. g e e under clause No. 289. ' Shelves. See under clause No. 288. Tray rack. To be formed with f in. wrought mahogany back, ends, bottom and front framing, rebated and grooved together, with rounded nosing at front edge, and beaded on back and end edges, and screwed to narrow double splayed deal grounds. Put a 3 in. X 1 J- in. mahogany rail in front, rounded on top edge. China cupboards. The upper range of cupboards to be in wrought framed deal 18 in. clear depth, and formed with : 1 in. beaded front framing, edges let into plaster, and 4 in. x IJin. moulded cornice on top. in. one-panel square (or moulded and square) doors, hung folding against a fillet stop on 3 in. brass butts, with rebated and beaded meeting styles, and provided with one small brass cup- board lock, one 4 in. brass neck bolt, and two l^in. brass handles to each pair of doors. li in. (or 1J in.) rebated, beaded, grooved and cross - tongued bottom shelf. Two 1 in. grooved and cross-tongued middle shelves. lin. grooved and cross-tongued solid divisions between each set of doors. T 2 2 7 6 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (287) 1 in. grooved, tongued, matched and beaded backs and sides from floor to ceiling, plugged to walls, (or else fixed separately to backs of cupboards). Put one row of IJin. and 1 in. cup and jug hooks, spaced alternately every 6 in. and 4 in. apart, at the back of each tier of shelf divisions. The lower range of cupboards at either end of framing to be 2 ft. 3 in. clear depth, with similar cupboards, ironmongery, divisions and one shelf, but with no cup or jug hooks ; and formed with : 1J in. rebated, beaded, grooved and cross-tongued bottom, on cross bearers spaced every 2 ft. 6 in. apart, with a 3 J in. x 1 in. moulded skirting in front. IJin. (or IJin.) grooved and cross-tongued top, moulded on front edge. The centre part to be filled in with four tiers of drawers, having 1 in. twice beaded (or plain), solid divisions between each drawer. The drawers to be formed with 1 in. fronts, f in. sides, backs and bottoms, dovetailed, ploughed and rebated together, and with oak (or deal) runner slides ; and each drawer provided with two 3 in. brass drop drawer handles, and one small brass drawer lock. If the top cupboard fronts be made with sliding doors, the description of the cupboard would remain the same, except the fronts, which would be described as : 1^ in. square (or moulded and square), one- panel doors to slide on lignum vitae blocks (or brass wheels) between | in. X J in. oak (or deal) beaded guide fillets nailed and housed to 4 in. X 1J in. framing, the bottom runner being in 1^ in. wrought, grooved and beaded oak. Provide doors with small brass cupboard locks, 4 in. brass neck bolts,, and a brass flush handle to each door. The bottom cupboards may either have hinged or sliding doors. SCULLERY SINKS AND OTHER FITTINGS. Lead-lined scullery (288) In large establishments three sinks are Binks * required, and may be described thus : The three sinks to be 2 ft., 2 ft. and 18 in. long <288) CAKPENTEK, JOINEE, AND IKONMONGER. 277 respectively, by 12 in. (to 14 in.) deep and 18 in. wide in the clear, prepared for lead, and formed with : 1^ in. wrought deal, glued dovetailed framing IP one piece, with two 1^ in. centre divisions, 1^ in X 1 J in. rounded oak nosing piece to front edge and centre divisions screwed on, 1 J- in. dove- tailed (or grooved and rebated) bottom, sharply dished out to the centre outlets, and fixed on white glazed bull-nosed brick bearers in cement. 1J in. wrought fluted deal draining boards on wrought chamfered bearers, with J- in. X 2 in. raised rounded oak fillet on front edge, 7 in. X f in. deal, dovetailed, cham- fered skirting on grounds with rounded ends, and 1 in. x 1 in. angle fillets round three sides, and the whole prepared for lead. See clause No. 33 in Plumber for lead work. If the draining boards are not covered with lead, then they may be described as li in. fluted, hard wood draining boards on chamfered wrought deal bearers, with f in. flutings stopped at top ends, and with a 2 J in. x f in. raised oak fillet on outer edge, and 7 in. X J in. wrought deal, square, dovetailed skirting on grounds with rounded ends. A single lead-lined scullery sink, which is all that is necessary in a small establishment, would be described in a similar manner, modified to the one sink. The tops of scullery sinks should be fixed 3 ft. up from the floor. Foot board. Put on floor in front of scullery sinks a movable foot board 2 ft. wide, 7 ft. (or other) long, formed with a 2^ in. X lt^ in. wrought deal battens cham- L. fered on edges, spaced f in. apart, and screwed to 3 in. X 2 in. wrought deal, cut cross bearers every 2 ft. apart, the end bearers being placed 1 in. back from the ends of the battens. The foot board is to prevent the scullery "maids standing on a'cold floor, and to keep them out of the wet. 2 7 8 CAEPENTEE, JOINEE AND IRONMONGER. (288) Towel roller. To be in wrought deal (or oak), with a 2 in. (or 2 J in.) diameter pin, 15 in. (or 18 in.) clear length, let into 1J in. (or 2 in.) cut brackets, screwed and framed into a 7 in. X 22 in. (or 26 in.) x li in. (or 1J in.) thick, chamfered wrought back board screwed to plugs in the wall (and perhaps varnished). See under clause No. 293. Only one shelf is re- quired, as brooms may be placed in this cupboard. Put along one wall (or more) an 11 in. X 1 in. wrought deal shelf with rounded corners, and edges slightly taken off, and screwed to cast-iron brackets every 4 ft. apart, screwed to plugs in the wall (and perhaps also to a 3 in. X 1^ in. wrought chamfered bearer). Broom rack. The broom rack to be made to take .two brooms, and formed with four 1J in. oak turned pins spaced 2 in. and 10 in. apart respectively, and screwed into an 1^ in. X 7 in. X 33 in. wrought, chamfered back board screwed to plugs in the wall (and perhaps varnished). Dresser with vegetable bins. Describe in a somewhat similar manner to the dresser in clause No. 293, and in addition, state that the vegetable bins are to be formed with 1 in. wrought deal, grooved and tongued boarding, lined round on the sides, bottoms and edges with tin (or 14 gauge zinc), soldered together, and close copper-nailed on edges. Vegetable bins are for placing vegetables in temporarily, for use as required. It is generally in large establishments only they are required. Plate rack. apart Form plate rack in ash (or deal) in three^ tiers, about 5 ft. (3 or 4 ft.) long!; with 2 in. X 2 in. wrought t dovetailed framing w T ith edges slightly taken off, and f in. apd ^ in. diameter bar divisions, and secure the framing to wall with cast-iron brackets and strong holdfasts. af>arf tt'ofart The plate rack should be over the sink. (288) CAEPENTEE, JOINEE AND IEONMONGEE. 279 Working table. To be in wrought framed deal, with the arrises slightly taken off: The table top to be 6 ft. X 4 ft., formed of 2 in. wrought, grooved and cross- tongued birch (elm or deal) rounded at corners, oak buttoned to framing, and bolted together with three J- in. diameter wrought-iron bolts, with countersunk nuts and heads. 1^ in. (or 2 in.) X 4 in. skeleton deal framing round drawer fronts, housed into legs, 1 J in. skeleton-framed deal bearers (ledges) between drawers, with oak (or deal) runner slides. 1^ in. (or 1^ in.) X 7 in. (or 9 in.) deal end fram- ings, rebated to groove in table top and housed into legs, with oak (or deal) runner slides re- bated to groove in end framings. Four 4 in. X 4 in. (or 5 in. x 5 in.) deal tapered (or turned) legs, secured together at the feet with 3 in. X 2 in. wrought, rounded deal stay rails, housed into legs. The two drawers to be 4 in. (to 6 in.) deep on face, the full width of table, pulling through from either side, and formed with 1 in. fronts, | in. backs, sides, bottoms and centre divisions, dovetailed, ploughed, rebated and blocked together, with four (two each end) 2J in. diameter oak (or deal) turned knobs to each drawer, secured with buttons on the inside (or four 4 in. brass drop handles). The top of table to stand 3 ft. up from the floor. tSecfion shewing drawers Drawer Knot Jfanttte The 3 in. x 2 in. stay rail at the feet is not always put. By making the drawers to run right through the table, they can the more easily be opened should they get fixed. State if drawer locks are required. Table legs should be placed about every 4 ft. apart. There is sufficient room for servants sitting both sides of a table 3 ft. 6 in. wide when taking their meals. When sitting only one side, 2 ft. 6 in. width will be ample ; the height should not exceed 2 ft. 6 in. Kitchen tables in large estab- lishments are required from 8 to 10 ft. long by about 4 to 5 ft. wide, and should stand 3 ft. up from the floor. In small establishments they may be 6 ft. x 3 ft. Chopping block. Supply one 18 in. X 27 in. wrought birch chopping block, 2 in. (or 3 in.) thick, with edges slightly taken off, and with f in. X f in. iron tongues let in at ends an( ^ screwe d on w ith countersunk screws. 280 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (289) Table flap. To be 2 ft. wide, 6 ft. long, in 1 J in. (or 1J in.) wrought deal, grooved, cross-tonsfued, mortise and mitre clamped boarding, with edges slightly chamfered off, and rounded corners, and hinged on one and a half pairs 3 in. wrought-iron (or brass) butts to an li in. (or 1 J in.) X 4^ in. wrought fillet piece with knuckle joint, secured to a 3 in. X 2 in. wrought chamfered bearer plugged to wall, and with a 4J in. x f in. chamfered skirting on top rounded at ends. Put two (or three) 3 in. X 2 in. wrought framed (and stop chamfered) angle brackets, to swing on centres between the fillet piece and a 4 in. x 2 in. chamfered foot piece, and supplied with 3 in. brass cabin hooks and eyes. The flap to be fixed 3 ft. up from the floor. The angle brackets may be fixed at the feet into 9 in. x 3 in. X 3 in. wrought, chamfered deal blocks plugged into walls, in- stead of into the foot piece. Angle brackets are required about every 3 ft. apart. Another method of fixing the angle brackets is described in clause No. 305. Dispenser's sink. DISPENSER'S SINK AND OTHER FITTINGS. (289) See Plumber, clause No. 35. The description of the woodwork would be similar to a scullery sink, as in clause No. 288. It is generally made 2 ft. X 15 in. x 12 in. deep. The top of a dispenser's sink should be fixed 3 ft. up from the floor. Bottle rack. o o o o o o o o o o o To be in 1 in. (1 in. or 1 J in.) wrought mahogany, with holes drilled for eleven (or other) bottles, and secured to wall with wrought chamfered ma- hogany bearers (or iron brackets) plugged into wall. The bottle rack should be fixed over the sink. Shelves. \ Towel roller. Draw-off sink on Landing'. See under clause No. 288 ; and Plumber, clause No. 35. See under clause No. 288. (290) See Plumber, clause No. 34. (292) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 28l Top to washing troughs. WASHING TROUGHS AND OTHER FITTINGS. (291) To be a 2 in. wrought framed pine top, grooved for skirting, with chamfered openings for troughs and rounded on front edge, and fixed on wrought deal chamfered bearers. Put 6 in. X 1 in. wrought deal, rebated and dovetailed skirting on grounds with rounded ends. For sizes of washing troughs in wood and other materials, see Plumber, clause No. 35 A. They may be fixed 2 ft. 5 in. up from the floor. Foot board, See under clause No. 288. Towel roller.! See under clause No. 288. Shelves.] See under clause No. 288. [Broom rack. See under clause No. 288. Slop sink top. SLOP SINK AND OTHER FITTINGS. (292) -Form slop sink top with 1J- in. wrought deal, glued, tongued and grooved boarding, dished out to falls to the centre, with a 2 in. X f in. raised oak beading on front edge. Cut hole for sink thumb moulded on edge, and fix top on wrought deal chamfered bearers ; put 7 in. X | in. chamfered dovetailed deal skirting on grounds with rounded ends, and 1 in. X 1 in. angle fillet piece, and prepare for lead. Sic/3 sink, For leadwork, see Plumber, clause No. 55. A slop sink top should be fixed 2 ft. up from the floor. 282 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (293) Shelves. See under clause No. 288. Towel roller. See under clause No. 288. Broom rack. See under clause No. 288. Cupboard. See under clause Xo. 293. Only one shelf is re- quired, as brooms are placed below. KITCHEN FITTINGS. Dresser (with (293) To be in wrought yellow deal, about 10 ft. lek> lon S b J 8ft - high, framed and glued together, and secured to plugs in the wall. , t-taff -t'enlrf vrrtip, (For outside gratings, see breakfast gauze in movable frame at with brass handle below. Bricklayer, clause No. 57.) Here are the positions of the tubes : Four positions each in dining room, room, billiard room and kitchen. Two positions in each other ground floor room. Two positions in each first floor bedroom. One position in each second and third floor bedroom, bathroom and w.c.'s. State any other positions. The wire gauze frame is to prevent articles falling down the tubes. If the tubes be somewhat wide, state that the framing is in moulded panels. The angles may be finished with a staff bead. If there be a dado, the tubes should follow somewhat the same design. Sheet gauze may also be used as a filtering medium instead of the cotton-wool bag. The tubes may be lined with thin sheet zinc, say No. 12 gauge, soldered at angles. An 1 in. (or 1J in.) rounded (or moulded) deal flap hinged on 2 in. brass butts may be placed on the top of the tube in lieu of the flap and brass handle. State if tubes are quadrant shaped. See notes on " Ventilation " for sizes of inlet tubes. Coil casing. (313) When heating coils are placed behind the window backs, the framing may be described as : \\ in. (or 1^ in.) wrought deal, moulded and square three (or more) panel grooved and rebated framing, staff beaded at angles, rebated to window board with a small moulding under, and the room skirting following round. The whole to be made movable for access to coils, with brass flush bolts. Perforate the window board, and fix a fine cast-iron (or brass) J in. grating, rebated and screwed in. (For outside grating as air in- lets to coils, see Bricklayer, clause No. 57.) The panels to the window back may be filled in with perforated gratings. See Smith, under clause No. 106, for iron coil cases. Index board. (314) In large offices an index or address board is often required, giving the names of the various firms situated in the building. It may be in plain deal painted, or in oak or mahogany French polished, and either with or without glass fronts. Allow a p.c. sum, or describe the parts fully. 294 CAKPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (315) SHOP FRONT AND SHUTTERS. (Clauses Nos. 315 to 317.) Shop front framing. (315) Form the stall-board with 2 in. moulded (or solid moulded) and square one panel high rebated wrought deal fram- ing six or other panels long, tongued and mitred at angle, with 4 in. x 3 in. rebated and moulded capping (nosing), and 1J in. X 9 in. moulded skirting on backings, kept in. above paving, with a f- in. x 3 in. rubbed slate raising piece. Form the show-board framing with 4 in. x 4 in. heads, sills and end posts, 4 in. X 2 J in. quarters every 2 ft. 6 in. apart, 4 in. x 3 in. braces and 4 in. x 2 J in. joists every 12 in. apart, and lay 1 in. wrought deal, rebated, grooved and iron-tongued floor- ing over with grooved and rounded nosing on front edge, and a small moulding under, 1J in. moulded and square, one panel high, rebated riser four (or (315) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER 295 other) panels long, with 7 in. x 1 in. moulded skirting, Form in riser, in beaded frames, two similar framed doors for access under show-board, and hang on 3 in. iron (or brass) butts, and provide each door with an 1 J in. brass rose handle with turnbuckle on plate. The window framing to be in wrought Honduras mahogany (or deal), prepared for plate glass, with 1 in. Xjin. loose beads and brass cups and screws and French polished, and having : 4 in. x 3 in. rebated and beaded (or moulded) frame grooved for linings. 4 in. x 3 in. twice rebated, twice beaded (or twice moulded) transome and mullions, with transome grooved for a small moulding rebated on. 4 in. X 3 in. rebated, beaded (or moulded), twice grooved and weathered sill. 'Run round framing an 1 in. x i in. (or 1 J in. x f in.) guard bead. (A guard bead is not absolutely required when a good joint can be made between the shop sash frame and the adjoining work.) Glaze windows with \ in. British polished plate glass bedded in putty and wash-leather. Fill in fanlights with 1J in. (or 2 in.) moulded sashes with loose beads and brass cups and screws, and glazed with similar plate (or other) glass, and hung on 3 in. brass butts, and provided with brass quadrant stays and brass spring catches. For glass also see Glazier, clause No. 11. For movable iron grille to shop front and movable grille gates to lobby, see Smith, clauses Nos. 59 and 60 respectively. These grille pro- tections are usually put when no shop shutters are provided. For shop doors see clauses Nos. 261 and 262. Lobby soffit. The lobby soffit to be 1 J in. (or 2 in.) moulded and square panelled framing, with a small moulding round as cornice. The soffit is sometimes lined with f in. silvered plate glass in a French polished mahogany frame, with loose beads and brass cups and screws. The lobby paving might be laid as in Pavior, clauses Nos. 2 or 3, and in addition describe a 3 in. x 2 in. rubbed slate nosing-piece with the arris taken off and screwed down with brass or gun-metal screws every 12 in. apart. Linings. Then describe the soffit and elbow linings and archi- trave in deal, similar to clauses Nos. 145 or 146. Entablature. 1 in. (or 1 in. wrought Honduras mahogany, tongued (or rebated) and grooved, beaded (or moulded) fascia f 296 CARPENTEE, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (315) fixed loose with brass cups and screws for access to shutter gearing, and secured to deal cradling formed with 4 in. x 3 in. head, sill, end posts, braces and inter- mediate posts placed every 2 ft. 6 in. apart, secured together with J in, (or f in.) wrought-iron bolts, heads, nuts and washers (also see clause No. 45). Print fascia in gold Eoraan letters 9 in, (or ether size) deep (give the name of firm). The fascia should always be in mahogany ; being deep, it will not be so liable to twist or. split as if in deal. In streets up to 30 ft. wide, the London Building Act allows any part of a shop front to project 5 in. beyond the main building line, so long as it does not encroach upon the public way; but the cornice may p roject 13 in. and overhang the public way. In streets over 30 ft, wide, the shop front in like manner may project 10 in. and the cornice 18 in. The necking, cornice mouldings, soffit, dentils and top to be in deal, grooved and rebated together, with brackets, backings, bearers and stiffeners in wood and iron, so as to make the cornice a firm piece of framed work. Blind box and 1 J i n , wrought deal, weathered, grooved, rebated sun- blind box framing, with small moulding on top edge, and opening formed in front face for blindo The sun-blind to be of best striped linen tick sun- blind material, to fall out the full length of shop front in two (one or more) widths, with moulded yellow pine blind board (front), spring rollers, gear, wrought gal- vanised iron blind arm rods and standards, and provided with a 6 ft. long-arm, with brass (or steel) hook. Put a lap spring roller, with blind strip to cover the joint between the two widths of blinds, and with side blind pieces at the ends. The sun-blind may be fixed under the entablature if so desired. Leadwork and Cover top of cornice and blind box, and form gutter at E.W.P. back with 5 Ib. lead copper-nailed 1 in. apart, with 5 Ib. lead flashing wedged and pointed up in cement. Take 3 in. rain-water pipe, with copper rose at outgo, down to pavement, and continue on to street gutter with a cast- iron pavement surface gutter, level with the pavement, or else carry down to a drain gulley. (315) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 297 Revolving shutters with wicket. The shutters to be convex pine wood lath, self-acting, revolving shutters, connected together with superfine straining webbing and hardened steel (or copper) bands, to fall in three (one or two) widths down iron grooves, on steel spiral springs and gear in iron (or tin) barrel cases, firmly secured behind the fascia (or under the bressummer) with brackets, fastenings and guide rollers. Provide two movable wrought deal pilasters 4J in. wide with iron grooves, iron heads, stub shoes and plates, and provide one 6 ft. long-arm with brass (or steel) hook. Form hinged wicket door in lobby portion of shutter, with lock and fastenings. The shuttering to be painted one coat in oil-colour before leaving the maker's, and three coats afterwards where towards the weather. Here is a detail of a movable pilaster. State if the wicket door is to be provided in addition with an iron grille door with hinges and fastenings. It is sometimes required for ventilation in butchers' and similar trades. Also mention if the upper part of shutter is to be partly open for ventilation. Eevolving shutters are also made in flat iron laths. steel laths. j curvilinear iron laths, steel laths. corrugated steel. When made in these materials, they should not be in greater single widths than 6 ft. The wood laths may be iron hinged for greater strength. 298 CAKPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (315) Pine wood laths may also be varnished; and in various other woods, such as oak and mahogany, either varnished or French polished. Messrs. Clark, Bunnett & Co., Messrs. Francis & Co., and others, are makers of revolving shutters. If the revolving shutters to the lobby space do not come down to the ground, a movable piece of stall-board framing must be described to the lobby, and provided with fixing bolts. When the fascia is close up against the wall of a building, the revolv- ing shutters may be coiled up under the bressummer or girder carrying the wall. Eevolving shutters of the following heights will coil up into the following diameters ; the shutter space should be made somewhat larger for clearing and easy working say, about 2 in. all round : Height of Shutter in Feet. 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 24 30 Diameter of Coil^in Inches. Wood. Iron. Steel. 877 9 71 10 8J 8 H g Hi 10 9i 12 101 12i Hi 10 13 11J 12 11| 12i 12J 12 13 13i 13 13* 16 14 134 16i 141 17 14| 14 18 15| 15 22 20 17 14 144 15 Notice board. Put two enamelled iron (or opaque glass) movable tablets 15 in. x 9 in., in gun-metal frames, fixed to pilasters with ornamental brackets and heads, and printed, " We close at 6 o'clock " (or other form of notice). (315) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 299 When the show-board is of low height, such as in a draper's establish- ment, the stall-board may be a 2J in. (or 3 in.) wrought deal timber, with a moulded capping and no skirting. The show-board would be fixed on joists laid on the ground floor joists, with the flooring over and a plain rebated riser at back. When the show-board is high, such as in a baker's or jeweller's establishment, the stall- board panelling may be glazed with f in. Hartley's ribbed, or plain, cast plate glass, to let in light to a cellar below, or small glazed hinged sashes with fasten- ings may be provided, for ventilation and light. Also see Glazier, clause No. 18, for reflecting stall - board lights. The show - board may be sloped on the un- der side, and lined with 1 in. wrought, grooved and tongued boarding, with staff bead on edge to the ceilirjg below. Instead of 4 in. x 3 in. mullions, 1 J.in. (to 2 in.) X 3 in. twice rebated and moulded vertical bars, with loose beads and brass cups and screws, may be provided. Instead of using the fanlights for ventilation, J in. perforated cast- iron ventilators may be fixed in the fanlight framing, with 1 in. deal flaps on the inside, hinged on 2 in. brass (or iron) butts, and provided with spring catches. The stall-board may have hit-and-miss iron (or brass) gratings for ventila- tion, with similar gratings placed in the show-board. When the pilasters at the sides of a shop are framed up in deal, they may be described somewhat similar to notes under clause No. 206, and mention the carved ornamental brackets above. 300 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (316) Brass sash bars. (316) When the shop front is formed with brass sash bars, describe them thus : The shop front to be formed with head, sill, mullioiis and sash bar framing in moulded polished brass ^ in. thick, with wood cores and bead fillets screwed on, and with iron ver- tical stiffeners (standards) at back. The stall-board name-plate to be in moulded polished brass 15 in. (or other) girth, -% in. thick, on deal core, with orna- mental (or plain) mitred caps (shields) at angles, with the name of the firm engraved and enamelled black, and the whole made movable with brass stubs and plates. The size of the sash bars varies according to the height of the shop front The name-plate may vary in girth. The thickness of metal may be described in B.W.G-. sizes. The iron vertical stiffeners (standards) are only required for strength when the sash bar framing is very light. Lifting (movable) shop shutters.; t in 3 D D c 3 D D D D D D D D D D D D < IC=IC=) DD (317) The shutters to be 1J in. (1 in. or 1J in.) bead butt (or bead flush) and square wrought deal three-panel high framings in 14 in. widths, beaded and rebated (or tongued, beaded and grooved) together, having 3J in. styles, middle and frieze rails and 4J in. top and bottom rails. Each shutter to have two iron stubs and plates on bottom rail, with corresponding plates screwed to stall board ; the last shutter being provided with a brass (or iron) flush shutter lift. The shuttering to fit at top into an oak (or deal) groove under the fascia, and pro- vided with a If in. x i in. wrought-iron shutter bar with plates and fastenings, and a padlock, p.c. 5s., to lock on the inside. Each shutter to be numbered at the back. When the shutters go round the angle of a shop _ j front, the shutter bar must have a knuckle joint at J JT point A. ^ (317) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 301 O State if the top panels of shutters have perforated holes drilled for ventilation, if filled in with J in. perforated cast-iron grating, or if a peep-hole is cut in the middle panel of one or more of the shutters. CZD If half or three-quarter shuttering be required describe in a similar manner, with the addition of a Z\ in. X 3 in. wrought deal weathered, beaded and grooved horizontal fixing bar, shaped at one end with a -fy in. wrought- iron plate iron tenon fitting into a J in. wrought-iron socket plate secured to the one pilaster; the other end of bar to be cased round with a j 3 ^ in. wrought- iron plate fitting into a J in. wrought- iron socket support secured to the other pilaster, and provided with a wrought- iron rose-headed pin with eye-hole, and a padlock, p.c. 5s. When half or three-quarter shuttering goes round an angle shop front, an angle fixing post will be necessary at the angu , The groove in the fixing bar may be formed with a 3 J in. x T 3 ^ in. plate screwed on at the back of a 3 J in. x 2 \ in. deal fixing bar with screws every 3 in. apart. PUBLIC BAR COUNTER AND FITTINGS. mull Inside View cf Ccunlcr 302 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (318) Counter top. Counter front. Sub or under counter. Shelves, divisions and fitments. Oil and varnish. (318) 1J in. (or 1J in.) wrought Honduras ma- hogany, 17 in. total (15 in. to 18 in.) width, moulded on the one edge, with an extra moulding 1J in. (to 1J in.) thick screwed on underneath. Form flap 1 ft. 9 in. long, hung on brass counter flap hinges and provided with two 6 in. brass bolts and fillet stops. li in. (or 1J in.) Honduras mahogany moulded and square framed panelling, with 1 in. similar (or framed) pilasters, 1^ in. x lj in. capping moulding, 1 in. x J in. necking moulding and 7 in. X in. moulded skirting. The front to slant 5 in. out of the vertical, and the whole to be made movable with brass cups and screws (or flush bolts), for access to the pipes at the back, and secured to framed grounds, backings, blocks, bearers and other fixings. Leave a 2 j in. space at the back for access to the pipes, with a in. wrought deal grooved and tongued back casing. The counter front imme- diately below the counter flap to be formed with a door, hung on 3 in. brass butts, and provided with a brass catch and two 6 in. brass bolts. 1^ in. wrought deal, covered with polished pewter weighing 3 J Ibs. per foot super, turned up 4 in. (to 7 in.) at back with a moulded bead edging, pewter cheeks, drips and burnt joints. 1 in. wrought deal shelves, divisions, standards, fittings, cupboards, drawers, till drawer, and raised plinth board on bearers ; with brass handles, locks and hinges to cupboards, and brass lock to drawer till. Oil in the counter top, twice varnish the counter front as well as the moulded edge to counter top ; stain, size and twice varnish the edges of all fittings beneath counter at back, as well as the drawers, till, and cup- board fronts. The counter front may be formed to various designs. The simplest form of counter front may be framed up with 1 in. wrought V-jointed (or matched and beaded) grooved and tongued boarding, with moulded skirting, twice varnished (or painted). Allow a p.c. sum or fully describe them. These are for obscuring the view across from one counter to another. Put one (or more) 11 in. sunk circular pewter basin with brass plug, chain and union and f in. electro- plated cock with boss, and take 1 in. lead waste-pipe to gulley in basement. Lay on f in. lead water supply with stop-cock. Put one (or more) seven-pull town made quadrant action beer engine witfi J pint pumps, 12 in-.- ebony Counter screens. Olass and hand basin. Beer engine. (320) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 303 pull handles, electro-plated german silver mounting and spouts, indiarubber seatings, improved bar grating, and one tapping- cock and ceiling union to each pull; and lay on -f s in. lead pipe to casks in cellar. Spirit taps. One (or more) shaped mahogany tap rail, with six town made electro-plated german silver spirit-taps and bosses, one diamond top spirit drainer 24 in. X 6 in, flush under spirit taps, and two sunk pewter funnel stands, metal rims. Lay on T 7 ^ in. tin pipes from spirit- tap to spirit store, and case in for access to pipes with movable casing. Samples of all beer engines, taps and fittings to be of the latest improvements, and submitted and approved by the architect. Spirit-taps are placed 5 in. centres, beer engine spouts 6J in. centres. In alterations state that a temporary serving bar and fittings is to be provided. For tin pipe, see Zincworker, clause No. 9. If the counter top is to be covered with pewter, see Zincworker, clause No. 10. As to the number of engines, taps and other fittings and fitments under the counter, the employer must state his requirements. It is a good plan to raise the floor at the back of the counter, as it gives the attendants more command. Shop counter. (319) Shop counters would be constructed some- what in a similar way as under clause No. 318, but the counter tops would be wider, say up to 3 ft. The fittings under the counter would be arranged to suit the requirements of the various trades. Confectioners sometimes cover the counter tops with polished marble 1J in. thick, rounded or moulded on front edge. Drying ground (320) Excavate ground over the whole area of and clothes posts. drying groun( i (state depth) and cart away. Spread 4 in. (6 in. or 3 in.) coarse ] p| ballast to pass a 2 in. ring, well ram, water and roll with a 4 cwt. hand roller, and finish with 2 in. (or 3 in.) good binding gravel and hoggin, watered and rolled as before. Form gangways between each line of posts 2 ft. (or 2 ft. 6 in.) wide on a 4 in. cement concrete foundation with 7 in. X 1 in. rough boarded edging on both sides ; fill in on top with tar paving 3 in. thick to falls, composed of gravel (or limestone clippings) screened through sieves Path a o n a a a Elevation of Ctottics Posts 304 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. having li in. and in. meshes, and mixed in the pro- portion of one ton gravel (or stone clippings), 12 gallons gas tar, J cwt. pitch and 2 gallons creosote. The larger stones to be placed at the bottom and worked up with the finer stones at the top. Dress over with fine grit (or stone dust), and roll with a 10 cwt. hand roller, See notes to, and clauses Nos. 2 and 3 under Koad-making. Put twelve wrought deal clothes posts (say 20 ft, apart) 8 ft. high, 4 in. square at the feet, tapering to 3^ in. square at the top and rounded off, with gun- metal eyes fixed 9 in. down. The posts to be movable and fixed into heavy cast-iron sockets 2 ft. deep with lids,- painted 3 oils and bedded in concrete 6 in. all round. Provide best hemp clothes line to each range of posts, secured at the ends to brass (or iron) cleats fixed to 5 in. X 5 in. wrought oak dwarf posts 2 ft. long, let into ground and surrounded with concrete 6 in. thick. Trellis (lattice) work. Heads (321) Trellis-work is mainly used for training up creepers and roses. Cover the south and west sides of house from ground to first floor level with wrought trellis-work formed of 1 in. x i in. (or 1 in. x i in.) laths 2 in. (to 4 in.) apart, nailed at laps, and fitted into If in. X 1 \ in. wrought grooved sills and side pieces with If in. x 1J in. grooved and weathered (or twice weathered) heads and If in. X If in. twice grooved intermediate posts. Fix to walls with wall hooks, and paint the whole three coats in oil colour. Cili Intermediate Tott The laths may also be fixed on the face of the framings which would not then be grooved. If the laths be some 6 in. to 9 in. apart they may be out of 2 in. x | in. (or 1 in.) stuff, the framing being correspondingly stronger. Trellis-work is also used in the upper parts of side screen gates and porch framings; the laths rnay [be placed from 1 in. to 6 in. apart. (322) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 305 jl 1 1 1 1 u When trellis work is fixed on top of a garden wall, take 4J in. x4 in. (or 5 J in. x 4 in.) wrought posts every 8 ft. to 10 ft. apart, with the feet charred (or tarred) and bedded 3 ft. in the ground, and secured to the wall with in. bolts, nuts, heads and washers every 3 ft. apart, and screwed to the trellis framing. WEATHER BOARDING TO SHEDS AND COTTAGES. Weather (feather) edged) boarding to sheds. (Clauses Nos. 322 and 323.) (322) The framing to outhouse wooden sheds may be put together in a similar way to quartered parti- tions, see clauses Nos. 135 and 136. The sill may be in oak, and the whole fixed on a brick and concrete foundation with a damp course. Cover the outside of shed with sawn fir weather (feather edged) boarding laid horizontally in 7 in. widths, | in. average thick- ness ; four boards being cut out of a 7 in.x3 in. deal, lapped 1J in. (or 1 J in.) at joints, butted at angles, and spiked to framing with l^in. cut nails, and scribed to gables. Finish the angles with a 5 in. x 1^ in. (or 1J in.) sawn vertical piece. or, Cover the outside of shed with sawn fir rebated weather (feather edged) boarding laid horizontally in 7 in. widths, f in. average thickness ; four boards being cut out of a 7 in. x 3 in. deal ; lapped 1 in. (or 1J in.) at joints, butted at angles, spiked to framing with l^in. cut nails and scribed to gables. Finish the angles with a 5 in. x 1J- in. (or 1J in.) sawn vertical piece. Describe any doors as clauses Nos. 263 to 265, and any windows as clause No 170 modified as simply as possible, to very few labours. State in either case if edges of boarding are shot. x ' T IVERSITT ;o6 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (322) Cover roof with similar horizontal weather (feather edged) boarding laid to a pitch of not less than 26 '30' (about i the span) (or 45, about J- the span). The roof timbers would be similar to ordinary roof framings, see clauses ISTos. 74 to 76, 100, 101, 107 to 110, and 112 ; and if barge boards or ven- tilators are required, see clauses Nos. 87 and 99 respectively. Finish the ridge (hips and valleys are never formed in this class of roof) with a fir ridge piece having 6 in. (or 8 in.) wings cut out of the solid. Pay over the boarding externally to the sides and roofs (and perhaps internally) with two (or three) coats of tar mixed in the proportion of 1 gallon tar to 1 pint petroleum oil. The roof may be covered with ordinary boarding and felt thus : Cover the roof with 1 in. (J in., 1J in., 1J in., or 2 in.) rough boarding laid horizontally with edges shot (or grooved and tongued), and lay asphalted roofing felt about J in. thick stretched tight, lapped 2 in. (or 3 in.) at joints, and fixed with 1J in. iron clout nails 5 (or 6) Ibs. per 1000 dipped in oil ; and pay over the whole with one coat of hot coal tar and lime composition, in the proportion of 3 parts coal tar to 1 slaked lime, arid then sprinkle over with fine sand. The pitch to a roof covered with felt may be at an angle of 3 '50', or span. Zinc or copper nails may also be used for fixing the felt. hen felt is painted, first limewhite over one coat, then paint one coat in oil (no turps), then sprinkle fine white silver sand, and then paint four or five coats in oil. Weather boarding to buildings is generally used in outside sheds and farm buildings. It is sometimes in oak. Weather (feather (323) In small cottages and similar class of build- ^fo^ottag^ in ' s > either a P rfcion or the whole of the external walls is sometimes covered with weather boarding. De- scribe the wall framing, the weather board- ing and tarring similar to clause No. 322 ; and state that the angles are butted up against a 3 in. (or 4 in.) X lj in. (or 1 J in.) wrought deal angle fillet (and perhaps staff- beaded on edge). (325) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 307 State if the weather boarding is wrought on the weather side and painted, which is often the case. Wrought weather boarding may also be beaded or splayed on edge. Various fcrms cf Weaf/ier foartte Weather boarding may be fixed against brick walls, W/////////////'///'/ spiked to 4J in. x 3 in. studs every 3 ft, apart. WMM^ Windows with solid frames are generally used in this class of work, . See clause No. 170 for and may be fixed the window frames, which should be modified as simply as possible, with few labours. Describe the projecting sills in oak or deal (not stone) with a moulding beneath. Describe the \\ in. external wrought rebated and beaded (or moulded) linings to the reveals and heads of windows-, or an architrave moulding ; and an \\ in. wrought weathering piece with small cut brackets over the window heads. In this class of work the door may have a timber framed projecting head, as in the notes to clause No. 255,' page 248. (324)- FENCING AND GATES. (Clauses Nos. 325 to 331.) For brick boundary walling see Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 98 and 99. For flint boundary walling see Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 105 to 107. For rubble stone boundary walling see Mason, clause No. 109. Oak post and pale fencing (close fencing). (325) Fence round estate with: 4J in. x ^ in. cleft oak pales 6 ft. high in one height, overlapping 1 in., and nailed to the arris rails with rose-headed nails. 6 in. x 6 in. angle and 6 in. x 4 in. intermediate sawn (or wrought) oak posts 9 ft. high, 9 ft, apart (or centres), weathered on top, with the butt ends charred (or tarred), and let 3 ft. into ground, and surrounded with cement concrete 9 in. (to 12 in.) thick. x 2 3 o8 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (325) <*w / J "c st- . . 00 r .0 ^ c re. n ft / V/ it ,A '. \ 1 W Side fo Road 6 in. x 6 in. sawn (or wrought) oak spurs framed into posts, with the butt ends charred (or tarred), and let into ground 2 ft. 6 in., and sur- rounded with con- crete 9 in. thick. Three sawn (or wrought) oak arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in., housed into posts and pinned with f in. diameter tapered oak treenails (pins) finished flush each side. 11 in. x 1J in. sawn (or wrought) oak gravel plank housed into posts, with a 4 in. x 3 in. sawn (or wrought) oak stiffener at the centre between each post, and oak pinned into arris rail, and the butt end charred (or tarred), and let 18 in. into the ground. Ptan Cart gates. If cart gates are required they may either be in deal or oak similar to clause No. 267 ; or they may be framed up in deal or oak in a similar way as the same clause, but covered on the outside with cleft oak pales to match the fencing. (In this latter case the styles, rails and braces would all be the same thickness.) Side gates. If side gates about 3 ft. 6 in. (3 ft. or 4 ft.) wide be required in several positions, they may also either be in deal or oak similar to clause No. 267 ; or they may be framed up in deal or oak in a similar way as the same clause, and covered on the outside with cleft oak pales to match the fencing. In this latter case also the styles, rails and braces would all be the same thickness. For open-framed wicket gates, see clause No. 330. Carriage gates. For carriage entrance gates, see clauses Nos. 267 to 269 or 330. (325) Excavating. CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 309 Level the ground for fencing, excavate for posts, spurs, stiffeners and concrete, and fill in and ram. State if the fencing be finished with a 3 in. x 1J in. oak saddle back (or 3 in. x 3 in. moulded) capping, with 2 J in. x 2 in. oak counter rail housed into posts (or running across the posts), and if studded with galvanised iron tenter hooks. flr, This class of fencing is suitable as an enclosure for parks or good class property. It is a general custom in fixing all classes of fencing of whatever description to show the fair side to your neighbour or the public highway. State if the oak pales are cut to alternate heights, either in one, two or three pales in width, and if with the capping and counter rail on top. The posts may be semicircular on top. The gravel plank may be fixed at the ends to 3 in. x 2 in. oak fillets spiked to the posts, instead of being housed into the posts. A gravel plank is not always put. 'lilef Fencing Gravel Plartk Cleft oak pales are usually cut : 3 ft. high, with 5 in. x 4 in. posts 9 ft. apart (or centres) 5 ft. high, and require two arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in. 3 ft. 6 in. high, with 5 in. x 4 in. posts 9 ft. apart (or centres) 6 ft. high, and require two arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in. 4 ft. high, with 5 in. x 4 in. posts 9 ft. apart (or centres) 7 ft. high, and require two arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in. 4 ft. 6 in. high, with 6 in. x 4 in. posts 9 ft. apart (or centres) 7 ft. high, and require two (or three) arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in. 5 ft. high, with 6 in. X 4 in. posts 9 ft. apart (or centres) 8 ft. high, and require three arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in. 5 ft. 6 in. high, with 6 in. x 4 in. posts 9 ft. apart (or centres) 8 ft. 6 in. high, and require three arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in. 6 ft. high, with 6 in. x 4 in. posts 9 ft. apart (or centres) 9 ft. high, and require three arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in. 6 ft. 6 in. high, with 6 in. x 4 in. posts 9 ft. apart (or centres) 9 ft. 6 in. high, and require three (or four) arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in. 7 ft. high, with 6 in. x 4 in. posts 9 ft. apart (or centres) 10 ft. high, and require three (or four) arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in. 7 ft. 6 in. high, with 6 in. x 6 in. posts 9 ft. apart (or centres) 10 ft. 6 in. high, and require three (or four) arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in. 8 ft. high, with 6 in. x 6 in. posts 9 ft. apart (or centres) 11 ft. high, and require four (or five) arris rails each out of 4 in. x 4 in. 3io CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (325) Instead of oak pales being cleft, they may be sawn, 4 in. x | in. either feather edged or square. | Oak gravel planks are cut 1J in. thick by 6 in., 7 in., 9 in. and 11 in. deep. Oak arris rails are cut out of 3 in. x 3 in., 4 in. x 4 in. and 5 in. x 5 in. Arris rails may also be in ash or fir. For square cut rails see notes under clause No. 326. Oak posts are cut 5 in. X 4 in., 6 in. x 4 in. and 6 in. x 6 in. Posts in ash or fir are cut 5 in. x 4 in., 6 in. X 4 in. and 6 in. x 5 in. Oak treenails (pins) are cut from |- in. to | in. diameter by 3 in. to 6 in. long. By surrounding the butt ends of the posts in concrete the fencing"] is made stiffer. Dwarf oak pale fencing is frequently fixed on a dwarf brick wall, with the oak posts going right down into the ground. The brick wall may either be coped with brick in cement or double splayed coping bricks. a s t=L When the fence is high, say for 7 ft. to 8 ft., instead of the spur the posts may have framed stiffeners formed with : Posts 6 in. x 6 in. Sole pieces 6 in. x 3 in. Struts 4J in. x 3 in. Braces 4J in. x 1J in. Cleats 4J in. x li in. Chocks 4J in. x 9 in. x 3 in. H ft a '" M-deatjfAli* ' II ciX-iV- ^ f-i ! _- -v- .!_l--.l i J ^-'! ^1 (326) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. Fir weather boarded fencing (close fencing). d^ (326) Fence round estate with : Sawn fir weather (feather edged) boarding in 6 ft. heights, 7 in. widths, f in. average thickness ; four boards being cut out of a 7 in. X 3 in. deal, lapped 1 in. at joints, and spiked to each arris rail with, two 2J in. cut nails. 6 in:x6 in. sawn oak angle and 6 in. x 4 in. intermediate posts 9 ft. high, 9 ft. (or 10 ft.) apart (or centres), weathered on top, with the butt ends charred (or tarred), and let 3 ft. into ground and surrounded with cement concrete 9 in. (or 12 in.) thick. 6 in. X 6 in. sawn oak spurs framed into posts, with the butt ends charred (or tarred) and let into ground 2 ft. 6 in. and surrounded with concrete 9 in. thick. Three sawn oak arris rails each of 4 in. x 4 in., housed into posts and pinned with f in. diameter tapered oak treenails (pins) finished flush each side. afiart Cart gates. For cart gates see clause No. 325 ; but in lieu of the oak pales fir weather boarding would be fixed. side gates. For side gates see clause No. 325 ; but in lieu of the oak pales fir weather boarding would be'jfixed. Carriage gates. For carriage entrance gates see clause No. 325. Tarring. p av over all fir and oak parts of fencing on both sides with two coats of tar, mixed in the ^proportion of 1 gallon tar to 1 pint petroleum oil. Excavating. Level ground for fencing, excavate for posts, spurs and concrete, and fill in and ram. This class of fencing is suitable for a cheaper class property. The weather boarding may be of the same thick- ness and width, but rebated out. The posts may be in oak 5 in. x 4 in., 6 in. x 4 in., and 6 in. x 6 in. ; or in ash or fir 5 in. x 4 in., 6 in. x 4 in. and 6 in. X 5 in. 312 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (327) The arris rails may be out of 3 in. x 3 in., 4 in. x 4 in. and 5 in. x 5 in. oak, ash, or fir, the same number being required as with oak pale fencing, see in the notes to clause No. 325. The rails may also be cut square, say 4J in. x 3 in., 5 in. x 2 in., or 6 in. x 2 in. Fir weather boarding is usually cut in 3 ft., 3 ft. 6 in., 4 ft., 4 ft. 6 in., 5 ft., 5 ft. 6 in. 6 ft., 6 ft. 6 in., 7 ft., 7 ft. 6 in. and 8 ft. heights. The whole of the fencing may also be entirely in fir or larch ; or, with larch posts and arris rails, and fir weather boarding ; or, with larch posfs, and fir arris rails and weather boarding. State if oak, ash, fir or larch gravel planks, stiffeners, capping and counter rail be required, and if the capping be studded with galvanised iron tenter hooks ; if the weather boarding be cut to alternate heights; and if posts be semicircular on top or pointed, see notes to clause No. 325. For dwarf fencing and very high fencing, see notes to clause No. 325. Post and rail fencing with \ palisades (open fencing). (327) Fence round Restate with : 3 in. (3J in. or 4 in.) x 1 in. (1 J in. or 1 \ in.) wrought fir palisades 4 ft. high, pointed (or rounded) at top, spaced 2J in. (3 in. or 4 in.) apart and nailed to each arris rail. 9'-Oan__ CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (328) Post and rail fencing. - Kail B Four Tarring. Excavating. Field gates. (328) Fence round field with : 6 in. x 6 in. hewn oak posts 7 ft. long, 9 ft, centres, pierced for rails, and with the butt ends charred (or tarred), and let 3 ft. into ground cleft oak rails, each having ten (nine or eight) square inches in section, with the ends halved through posts. One (or two) 3J- in. x 1 J in. oak picket piece (stiffener or H r? stump) between each post spiked to each rail, pointed and charred at the foot, and driven 15 in. into the ground. State if fencing is tarred, as in clause No. 326. Excavate for posts, fill in and ram. For field gates see clause No. 331. 9-O"c*enfr-*s Either four, three, or two rails are usually fixed to this class of fencing, the posts generally being all the same height. Two oak picket pieces may be fixed for additional strength. Post and rail fencing may be wholly in oak, larch, or fir. or, Oak posts, larch rails and picket pieces. or, Oak posts, fir rails and picket pieces. The rails may be sawn. The posts may be half round, and bound round the top in hoop irrm iron A post and wire fence similar to sketch is often used in railway work. Eough timber spurs may be put to both these classes of fenc- ing to act as stiffeners. Either of these forms of fen- cing are usually placed round fields and woods to prevent cattle straying. (330) Hurdles. CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 3*5 (329) Fence round field with greenwood hurdles, each being 6 ft. long, 3 ft. high, with the end postu pointed at feet, and bound round in galvan- ised hoop-iron at the top, and with four (or five) rails, two laces and a picket piece, and the hurdles secured together with galvanised iron wire. For iron hurdles, see Smith, clause No. 113. Open framed carriage (park) and wicket gates. (330) Open carriage gates are made to many designs, here is a description : The carriage gate to be 10 ft. (9 ft. 6 in. or 9 ft.) long, 4 ft. 4 in. (4 ft. 6 in., 4 ft. 9 in. or 4 ft.) high , framed up in wrought solid English oak, stop chamfered (or moulded) on edges, oiled and twice varnished, and pinned together with f in. oak treenails. The ironwork to be painted black three coats in oil colour. The top rail to be cut out of 6 in. x 3J in. (or 4 in.) with shaped cut bracket at hanging style (heel), and tapered off to 4 in. x 3 J in. at fixing style (head), and slightly rounded off (weathered or moulded) on the top edge. 4 in. x3Jin. (or 4 in.) hanging style (heel), shaped on top, and hung to hinge post with patent adjustable hinges, p.c. 30s. 3J in. x 3J in. (or 4 in.) fixing style (head), shaped on top, and provided with latch and striking plate, p.c. Ss. 4 in. x 3 J in. (or 4 in.) middle and bottom rails slightly weathered. 3 J in. x 3 J in. (or 4 in.) braces and vertical inter- mediate ties (posts). Fill in the bottom panels with 1 J in. x 1 J in. ver- tical bars at 3 in. centres. 9 in. x 9 in. falling (fixing) and hanging posts, stop chamfered on edges with ornamental shaped heads, and with the butt ends charred (or tarred), and fixed in the ground 3 ft. 6 in., and sur- rounded with concrete 9 in. wide. State if a malleable-iron cresting riveted to a wrought-iron bar be required on the top rail. The gate posts may also be 10 in. X 9 in., 10 in. x 10 in. and 12 in. X 12 in. CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (330) Collinge's cup and ball hinges or wrought strap-iron pivot hinges may be used about 3 ft. 6 in. long, secured with bolts, nuts and heads. State if gate is in yellow pine and painted 4 oils white, with the iron- work black. Sometimes 1 in. wrought-iron horizontal bars and vertical rods are fixed with nuts, heads and washers, to give additional rigidity to the gate. Open carriage entrance gates may also be hung in two halves, of various widths and heights. The gates may be hung close to the posts, similar to the wicket gate described below. Wicket gate. 10 '!, 9-6 or 9 O These may also be in various designs, here is a descrip- tion : To be 3 ft. 6 in. (or 3 ft. 9 in.) wide by the same height as the carriage gates, and framed up in solid wrought English oak, stop chamfered (or moulded) on edges, oiled and twice varnished. The ironwork to be painted black three times in oil colour. 5 in. x 3J in. (or 4 in.) top rail, slightly rounded (weathered or moulded) on the top edge. 5 in. x 3J in. (or 4 in.) hanging and fixing styles with shaped ornamental heads, and hung to posts on 2 in. xj in. wrought- iron strap and pivot hinges 18 in. long, with bolts, nuts and heads, and provided with a latch and striking plate, p.c. 8s. 5 in. x 3J in. (or 4 in.) middle and 6 in. X 3J in. (or 4 in.) bottom rails slightly weathered. 3 in. x 3J in. (or 4 in.) braces and vertical ties (posts). Fill in panels at bottom with 1 \ x 1J in. vertical bars at 3 in. centres. 6 in. x 6 in. falling (fixing) and hanging posts, stop chamfered on edges with ornamental heads, and with the butt ends charred (or tarred), and fixed in the ground 3 ft., and surrounded with con- crete 9 in. thick. Fix on each post a 2 in. X 1 in. fillet stop rounded off on top. State if iron cresting be required on the top rail. The gate posts may also be of the same sections as the carriage gate posts. State if gates are in yellow pine, and painted four oils white, with the ironwork black. The wicket may be hung in the same way as the carriage gate, when (331) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 317 the width between the posts would be about 7 in. more than the width of the gate, and the fillet stops would not then be required. Five-barred field (or farm) gate. (331) To be framed together in sawn (or wrought) solid English oak 10 ft. (9 ft. 6 in. or <) ft.) long, 3 ft. 10 in. high, oiled over, and pinned together with | in. oak treenails, and with the ironwork painted black in three coats oil colour. ^n &t 81'.. \. f o | < l tfTtf) fringe The top rail (beam or back) to be out of 6 in. x 3 in. with shaped cut bracket at hanging style, and tapering off to 3 in. x 2 \ in. (or 3 in.) at fixing style (head), and slightly rounded off (or weathered) on top. 5 in. (or 4J in.) x 3 in. hanging style (hinge tree, 318 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (332) arrow or heel) shaped on top, and hung to hinge post with 2 in. X i in. wrought-iron strap and pivot hinges 2 ft. 6 in. long secured with J in. bolts, nuts and heads, and provided with a field latch, p.c. 6s. The pivots to be secured to the post with nuts and washers. 3 in. X 2J in. (or 3 in.) fixing style (head), rounded on top. Five 3J in. x 1 in. (or 3 in. x f in.) sawn bars (slits), tapering off' to 3 in. X 1 in. (or f in.) and slightly rounded on top edge, with a 4 in. (or 3J in.) x 1 in. similar lace (brace) and two (or three) jacks (uprights or downrights), secured together with in. galvanised iron rose-headed rivets. 9 in. x 9 in. falling (fixing) and hanging posts, rounded on top, and with the butt ends charred (or tarred), and fixed in the ground 3 ft., and surrounded with concrete 9 in. thick. Sometimes cleft oak bars are used. State if in yellow pine, and painted four times oil colour, finished white, with the ironwork black. The lower hinge should project out slightly more than the upper hinge; the gate will then close automatically. The lace should ter- minate at the upper end about 4 ft. away from the heel. A bridle gate to match a field gate would be formed in exactly the same way, but 4 ft. wide, and without the jacks. Field gates often have only four bars. A heave gate is a movable palisade gate with an additional movable top bar, which all lift away from mortises in the gate posts ; they are about 10 ft. long x 3 ft. 10 in. high. Field or farm gates are often called barred gates, but a barred gate correctly speaking merely consists of loose movable bars fixed into two posts. (332) HALF-TlMBER WORK. Half-timber work to buildings is generally framed, either in fir, pitch- pine, or oak, backed with brickwork, and cemented over on the outer face between the timbers. The timbers may either be oiled, painted, or tarred, and the cement work either coloured or painted. The overhanging stories in half-timber work are supported upon the floor joists which project out for that purpose. The timbers are spaced apart entirely to suit the design, and should not be less than 4 in. thick. The brick backing should be at least 9 in. thick. External framing (333) The timber framing to be in sawn solid oak, wrought and oiled over on the faces exposed to the weather, skew-grooved and weathered to receive 1 in. external stucco (cement or pebble dash), grooved for (333) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 319 mouldings, rebated for door and window frames and angle posts, mortised -and tenoned together, and pinned at each joint with one (or two) 1 in. diam. oak tree- nail (pin) projecting | in. (or J in.) out from the face of the framing with the head rimmed off J in. The ground floor framing to be (say) 7 ft. total height, consisting of : Two 9 in. (7 in. or 11 in.) X 4 in. timbers as sill-piece, projecting 1 \ in. beyond the face of the brickwork and boldly moulded on the bottom edge, splayed for stucco and rebated in parts for 20 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER, (333) window frames. The two timbers to be secured together with 8 in. coach screws every 3 ft. apart. The sill piece may be in one 9 in. (7 in. or 11 in.) x 5 in. timber. 6 in. (or 7 in.)x4 in. twice skew-grooved inter- mediate (studs or quarters) posts, rebated in parts for window and door frames. The external angle (corner) posts to be formed of one 9 in. (7 in. or 11 in.) x 4 in., and one 6 in. 4 or 8 in.) x 4 in. timbers, rebated and grooved together and secured with 8 in. coach screws every 2 ft. apart, and boldly stop moulded on the angle. The external angle post may be one 9 in. x 9 in. (7 in. x 7 in. or 11 in. x 11 in.) timber. The internal angle posts to be formed of two 9 in. (7 in. or 11 in.) x4 in. timbers, skew-grooved for stucco, and rebated together. The curved braces to be 4 in. thick, showing 8 in. (7in., 9 in., or 11 in.) to the weather, and skew- grooved and weathered for stucco. (Describe any straight braces.) Angle posts to doors to be 9 in. (7 in. or 11 in.) x 4 in. skew-grooved for stucco, rebated for door frames, and boldly stop moulded on the angle. If the doors be recessed, the angle posts to door frames might be worked similar to the sketches. If the door frames be on the exterior of the framing, the angle posts would not be moulded on the arris, but rebated out ; with perhaps a moulding planted on to cover the joint. In like manner a moulding might be placed round the window frames to cover the joint with the framing. The head piece to be a 9 in. (7 in. or 11 in.) x 4 in. timber, skew-grooved for stucco, rebated for window and door frames, and secured to the brick backing with 2 in. x i in. wrought-iron angle straps every 5 ft. apart, screwed on to the head with two 3 in. screws each and clipped 18 in. down the inner face of the walls. (333) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 321 1J in. (or 1^ in.) solid moulded soffit panelling (state width of panels) with a moulding out of 6 in. X 3 in. planted against the ground floor head piece and a small moulding against the first floor sill piece. Then describe any timber brackets to support the overhanging first floor story. The first floor framing to be (say) 8 ft. total height, projecting (say) 2 ft. 6 in. out beyond the framing below, and consisting of : Two 9 in. (or 11 in.)x4 in. (or 3 in.) timbers as sill piece, boldly moulded on the one (or two) edge, splayed for stucco, and grooved for the weather moulding, and secured together with 8 in. (or 7 in.) coach screws every 3 ft. apart. The inner piece of sill to be mortised out for the tenons of floor joists, and secured to every third floor joist with 2 in. X in. wrought-iron angle brackets, having 9 in. and 18 in. arms, and screwed with 5 in. and 4 in. coach screws to the framing and the joists respectively, every 4 in. apart. Eebate on to the sill piece a weathered and moulded weathering out of 5 in. x 3^ in. The inner piece of sill is not absolutely necessary, but it allows the outer sill piece to be lower down for effect. In any case a rough timber plate will be required along the tops of the joists, to receive the first floor brickwork if over 4J in. thick. 7 in. (9 in. or 11 in.) X 4 in. nogging piece (intertie), skewed grooved and splayed for stucco, and rebated for window sills. Then describe the external and internal angle posts, the intermediate posts, head piece and braces similar to the ground floor timber. The cut and shaped ornamental head pieces below the first floor window sills to be 4 in. thick, 12 in. deep, skewed grooved for stucco and housed into framing. Eun 9 in. (or 11 in.) x 1^ in. (or 1 J in.) moulded and splayed fascia board along the head piece, cut in between the rafters. If any of the framing be circular on plan, the sill and head piece must be put together with handrail screws at the joints, or if in two or three thicknesses in depth, then bolted together. The timbers may be 5 in. thick, or any other size, but timbers over 4 in. thick have to be cut out of balk ; see notes to clause No. 4 for sizes of market timbers. Y 322 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (333) If the framing be in fir timber, it may either be painted or tarred over. Half-timber framing- may be constructed without the brick backing, tne timbers in that case should be some- . what thicker. The plastering on the inner side may be secured to laths and battens, or to laths only. The outer stucco or cement work is secured to ~^JJa.th. and rylct si~er laths, secured to fillets, spiked to the framing. Then describe any barges with pendants, brackets, eaves soffits, eaves boards and cut wrought ends to rafters ; see clauses Nos. 87, 88, 86, 85 and 75 re- spectively. For solid casement windows, see clauses Nos. 170, 171, 173 and 174; and for the glazing, which is often in leaded lights, see Glazier, clause No. 10 and notes. The window sills should be moulded. The sketches show further details of windows. For external doors suitable to this class of work, see clause No. 265. The outside of the doors may be studded with J- in. square headed wrought or cast- iroii nails, placed 4 in., 5 in. or 6 in. apart, along the rails, styles and braces, either in one or two rows. For overhanging door heads see notes to clause No. 255, page 248. The cement, stucco, or pebble dash face between the timbers would be similar to clauses Nos. 68 and 65 to 67 in Plasterer. Of course, Portland cement facing makes the best work, as in Plasterer, clause No. 68. Treenails are cut from f in. to f in. diameter by 3 in. to 6 in. long, and tapered ; they are sometimes required 1 in., 11 in. and 1J in. diameters. Sham half- timber work to existing buildings is formed with framing 1J in. (1 in. or 2 in.) thick, mortised and tenoned together and' plugged to walls, with the stucco facing filled i n between. It is sometimes called slab work. Oak treenails may be em- ployed to pin the joints together. (334)- Cold store (refrigerator). (335) In large establishments an ordinary box re- frigerator is not sufficiently large for the requirements of the house. In this case a separate " cold store room " that is, a large refrigerator becomes necessary. It may be formed in the following manner, and placed in a larder or in a separate chamber by itself. (335) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 3*3 The sides, bottom and top of cold store to be formed with 4 in. x 2 in. fir stud framing placed every 15 in. (to 18 in.) apart, with 4 in. x 4 in. heads, sills and angle posts. Cover both sides of framing with 1 in. wrought one side grooved and tongued V-jointed deal boarding in 3^ in. widths. Fill in between the boarding to all parts with silicate cotton (slag wool) tightly packed. Bearer ^m^W^ m ^ 7^VVW\\V\\\\Vv.V\\.WA\\<\V 1 * h - V >?c-i, General, Detail of The access door to be 3 ft. X 6 ft. 6 in., formed with 4 in. x 3 in. solid framing, packed in with silicate cotton between two thicknesses of similar 1 in. board- ing. The top and bottom rails and styles to be bevelled off and grooved out to fit into a 6*in.x4in. similar double rebated, bevelled and grooved frame, having a J in. indiarubber stop planted all round. Hang door on one pair of 18 in. galvanised iron cup and ball (or strap and pivot) hinges, and allow the p.c. sum of 20s. for a galvanised iron lever fastening, so as to draw the door up tight against the indiarubber stop on the frame. Form the ice chamber part of the cold store with similar stud framing and boarding, with bearers and leg Y 2 324 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (335) supports, but without the silicate cotton packing ; four 12 in. x6 in. holes being left in along one side in the boarding at the bottom, and at the top on the other side. Line the floor and sides with 14 (or 15) gauge sheet zinc, soldered at joints and nailed in parts with zinc nails. Put 2J in. X 1 J in. wrought fir battens against the vertical sides of ice chamber as a protection to the zinc lining, and screw on with 2J in. screws every 12 in. apart. The bearers upon which the ice rests to be in 4 in. X 2J in. wrought fir placed 2 in. apart, made movable and resting on bearers at either end, with securing blocks at the ends between the spaces. The gutter beneath the floor of the ice chamber which takes away the melted ice water, to be formed with 1 in. boarding lined with zinc, with an 1 J in. pipe and trap at one end, discharging out into the gully (or channel) near on the outer side of the cold store com- partment. The door to the ice chamber to be 2 ft. 8 in. x 2 ft. 3 in., formed in a similar way to the access door, and pro- vided with similar ironmongery ; and in addition the sill is to be protected with a 2 in. X J in. wrought-iron bar on the inside. The door in the external wall may be an ordi- nary door and frame, with cement or deal jamb linings. The window to be 2 ft. x 1 ft., formed with two thicknesses of in. British polished plate glass, bedded in putty in a 6 in. X 3 in. solid wrought four times re- bated deal frame (and perhaps provided on the outside with an ordinary window, and an 1J in. hinged shutter with fastenings). For meat hooks and hangers, see clause No. 298. The cold store to be supported upon 7 in. x 3 in. fir joists (bearers) placed 2 ft. apart, twice tarred all over, and with an 1 in. rough deal floor on top covered with hair felt 1 in. thick. Paint the boarding on the inside and outside in four coats oil colour (or in Chaiiton enamel paint ; or size and twice varnish). The inside of cold store is not necessarily painted or varnished. The trap in the waste pipe is to prevent warm air finding its way up the pipe into the ice chamber. The iron bar placed on the sill of the door to the ice chamber is merely to prevent the sill being damaged when throwing in the ice. The arrows on the sketch show the direction the cooled air takes. The colder air descending from the top drives the warmer air up through the ice chamber, whence it is cooled down again and descends in like manner. As cold descends, the main point in a cold store is to insulate the floor from the ground in such a manner that the escape of cold may be minimised. This is the reason of the tarred bearers and felt seating upon which the cold store rests, the floor being the chief point where any escape takes place. (340) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 325 A " cold store " may be placed in an ordinary larder, or in a special chamber for its reception in the coolest part of the house, the walls of which should, if possible, be hollow and the roof double. The sketch shows a fair size cold store suitable for a large private establishment, which will take a couple of small beasts, such as sheep, in addition to the ordinary game, poultry and joints. If more or larger beasts have to be accommodated, the store must be proportionately larger. If the store be required to take only game, poultry and joints, then a clear area of about 36 super, ft. by 7 ft. high will be sufficient. In this latter case the ice chamber itself may be a galvanised iron box supported on girders (beams) placed near the ceiling of the cold store, but sufficiently clear to allow for getting in the ice. It must be pro- vided with a trap and waste pipe, and a door for access. Condensation will form on the under side of this ice tank, and consequently drops of water will fall on the floor of the store. If this be found objectionable, a zinc-lined wood tray may be placed under the ice tank, with a trap and waste pipe to the out- side. The side, top and bottom of the cold store itself would be formed similar to the previous description. It is somewhat difficult to get a cold chamber to register a temperature below 43 Fahr. One ton of ice will be about sufficient to 400 cub. ft. of cold store room to obtain this degree of cold. A ton of ice thrown in loosely will occupy about 40 cub. ft. of space. (336) (337)- (338) (339) CAMPSHEETING AND PILING. (Clauses Nos. 340 to 342.) For river walling, see Bricklayer, clause No. 110, and notes preceding clause No. 109 in Bricklayer. Campsheeting to a (340) Cut down the trees from the river bank, grub up the roots and bushes, part excavate bank, part fill in at back of sheeting, and part cart away (or deposit on site, state where). The campsheeting to the river bank for a distance of (say) 100 ft., with a return piece of (say) 20 ft., to consist of: 8 in. x 6 in. angle and 6 in. x 6 in. intermediate sawn 326 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (340) skeefinq English oak main piles, spaced 6 ft. apart in 8 ft. (more or less, according to requirements) average lengths, pointed at feet and shod with cast-iron pointed shoes, having a bearing surface of 3 in. square, with a depth of 6 in. along the central axis, weighing 14 Ibs., and fixed to each pile with four \\ in. x f in. wruught-iron straps 18 in. long, each strap being fixed with three wrought-iron spikes 4 in. long. The piles to be driven into the solid ground 2 ft. 6 in. below the river bed, with a monkey weighing 1 cwt., having a 12 ft. fall. The top ends of piles to be sawn off and tenoned into the capping piece. Tie in the piles with | in. wrought- iron tie rods about 12 ft. long, attached with nuts, heads and large washers to 5 in. x 5 in. (or 6 in x 6 in.) Dantzic fir land piles 5 ft. long, let into the ground, and well rammed round and filled in after the tie rods are fixed. Fill in between the main piles with two 5 in. x 4 in. Dantzic fir \\-alings spiked on, and drive at the back 2 in. (or 3 in.) close jointed fir planking (sheeting) in 4 ft. (or other) average lengths, wrought on the edges, skew pointed at feet, sawn off at. top, and spiked to walings. Eun 9 in. X 4 in. (or 3 in.) Dantzic fir capping piece along the top, mortised into the tenons of the piles, and secured to the piles with 2 in. x f\ in. wrought-iron straps, 3 ft. 6 in. long, spiked on with 5 in. spikes, every f> in. apart. Twice tar over the faces of all timbers with Stock- holm tar. Allow the p.c. sum of 1 per yard run for a guard railing, with standards. State if drop rings be required to any of the piles, secured on with bolts, eyes, nuts and washers, to which boats may be moored. The timbers may be creosoted, see clause No. 26. The sheeting may be birdsmouthed together. ^^//////////////^^^^ Campsheeting to a river bank is to protect the bank from the swirl of the river. Sometimes sheeting is placed on the face ^NY/^w^i^gg^ O f the piling as well as at the back, so as to ^// K L///^xw/// s B^ present an even surface, and prevent boats catching under the walings. The timbers may be in pitch pine. See notes to clause No. 342 as to timbers rotting, subject to tides. Sheet piling may also be constructed as sketch. See notes to clause No. 342 on weight of monkey. (342) CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. 327 Piling for (341) The concrete foundations to be carried upon piles in the following manner :- Drive into ground every 2 ft. apart Dantzic (Baltic) fir timber piles, 12 in. square in 20 ft. (or other) average lengths, until they will drive no further ; shoe at the feet with cast-iron pointed pile shoes, each having a bearing surface of 4 in. square, 8 in. deep along the central axis, weighing 25 Ibs., and fixed to each pile Dn n n n w ^ n ^ our ^ * n * x ^ * n * wrou g n ^~i ro11 straps, M I J II 21 in. long, each strap having four 1 in. V V V V diameter countersunk holes drilled through and spiked to piles with wrought-iron spikes 5 in. long. The upper ends of piles to be ringed round with If in. X J- in. wrought-iron rings for driving. Saw off the tops and lay two thicknesses of 3 in, (or 2J in.) fir planking as a foundation bed for the concrete. n n n n a anna a a n a a n a a n If piles are creosoted, see clause No. 26. In any position where it is too expensive to excavate bad foundations, such as quicksands and boggy soils, this form of piling may be employed. See Excavator, clause No. 10, for piling round a space which is exca- vated out afterwards. See Bricklayer, clause No. 110, and notes for land piles and sheet piling to river walls. See Bricklayer, clause No. 115, for piling to chimney shafts. The piles may be in oak or pitch pine. See notes to clause No. 342 on weight of monkey. Piling in front of river walls (fender piles). <> (342) Fender piles may be driven about every 6 to 10 feet apart in front of river walls to protect them from barges. The description of the piles would be similar to clause No. 341, and in addition state that the tops are to be capped in cast iron J in. (to f in.) metal, screwed on with two screws on each face, through countersunk holes. Tie in each pile to the river wall- ing with in. wrought-iron bolts, nuts, heads and large washers, placed every 5 ft. apart, and provide each pile with a 4 in. diameter wrought-iron drop ring, J in. metal, fixed to the pile with a bolt, nut, eye and washer. CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER. (342) If piles are creosoted, see clause No. 26 ; they may be in oak or pitch pine. That part of a pile which is subject alternately to wet and dry is soon liable to rot. It is essential in this case to either creosote or tar the timbers. Sometimes an 1 in. (to 1J in.) wrought-iron bar is fixed to the piles for attaching the ropes of barges to in lieu of the drop rings. When fender piles are renewed to an wall, they are fixed with lewis bolts. existing bolt Piles 10 in. to 14 in. square require for driving a monkey weighing from 12 cwt. to 18 cwt., according to the circumstances of the case. In like manner, sheet piles 9 in. X 3 in. require a monkey weighing from 5 cwt. to 8 cwt. (4) 329 SMITH AND FOUNDEB. WROUGHT iron (that is, almost pure iron) contains from about *15 to 25 per cent, of carbon. Steel contains from about '12 to 1'5 (or 1*8) per cent, of carbon. Cast iron contains from about 2 to 6 per cent, of carbon. \ Cast iron is mostly employed for columns, stanchions and cantilevers. Wrought iron is mostly used for girders and roofs. Steel may employed in all situations. Malleable cast iron contains less carbon than ordinary cast iron, and thereby giving it a toughness. It is very suitable for small castings. Wrought iron 1 in. thick weighs about 40 '32 Ibs. per foot super. Cast iron 37 ' 50 Steel 40-8 Wrought iron in plates, bars, tees and angles. (1) The wrought iron in plates, bars, tees and angles to be of Best Best South Staffordshire (or other quality approved by the architect) iron, free from cracks, blisters, flaws and other imperfections ; with the edges sound and true ; and equal to a tensile stress of 20 tons per square inch of section, with a reduction of area at fracture of not less than 10 (or 20) per cent. Specimens of the wrought iron intended to be used, will be taken by the architect, and sent for testing either to Kirkaldy's works, or the London University, and either of their reports will be taken as correct ; all expenses incurred in so doing to be borne by the contractor. Portions of the iron may also be taken by the archi- tect from the work when fixed and subjected to similar tests, the expense being borne by the contractor. Rolled iron joists. (2) The rolled iron joists to be of English manufac- ture. All iron joists and girders to be set with a camber of 1 in. (to 2 in.) in 40 feet. Planing to plates and bars. Wrought iron in (3) The plates and bars to be truly straight, and bent to the exact forms required, and the ends planed so as to form true joints. (4) The rivets, bolts, nuts and straps to be best Lowmoor (or S.C. crown) iron. 330 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (5) Rivet iron especially. Blvet iron to be equal to a tensile stress of 22 tons per square inch of section, with a reduction of area at fracture of not less than 20 per cent. Eivet and bolt holes. The rivet and bolt holes to be drilled (or rimed) out to the exact diameters required, and burrs cleaned off; and set out to exactly correspond with the opposite holes in other parts to which the rivets and bolts have to be connected, and countersunk where required, the countersinking being concentric. Biveting. Bolts, nuts and washers. The rivets to be firmly driven so as to completely fill the holes, and the heads neatly finished off. (5) The bolts to be screwed to Whitworth's threads the exact diameters required, arid projecting two full threads beyond the nuts, and supplied with hexagon heads and perfectly fitting hexagon nuts, and with washers where required. Bolts are made f in., i in., f in., J in., 1 in., diameters. n. in. and 2 in. Forged work. (0) The smith's work to be forged clean from the anvil, with flatters, swayes and rounding tools, and neatly chamfered off on the edges, or evenly diminished, as the case may be. All welds, turns, or setts to be sound. Dip straps and (7) The straps and bolts to roofs, bressummers, ^Sl. n partitions and girders to be heated to a blue heat, and struck over with linseed oil. Also see Carpenter, clause No. 74. 8teel> (8) The steel to be capable of standing a tensile stress of 30 tons per square inch of section, with 20 per cent, elongation in a length of 8 inches. Steel is 30 to 40 per cent, stronger than iron. Cast iron. (9) The cast iron to be from the best quality tough grey pigs. The castings to be sharp and of the exact form required, and shaped to fit the parts truly, and holding full dimensions, and to be entirely free from air holes, scoriae, core nails, flaws, and defects of every kind, and to be painted one coat in oil colour before leaving the foundry. (11) vSMITH AND FOUNDER. 331 Holes to be drilled in the hollow columns for testing the thickness of the metal, at the contractor's expense, and filled up afterwards. Salt water or sea sand is not to be used in the castings. Planing to columns and stanchions. (10) The heads and bases of all columns and stan- chions to be planed perfectly level. Boiled wrought- iron (or steel) joists and girders over openings. (11) Carry the wall above opening on ground floor upon two 12 in.xG in. (or other size) rolled iron (or steel) joists, bearing 9 in. (or 12 in.J on waUs at either end, with 4 Ib. lead (or felt) seatings and 18 in. X 18 in. x 3 in. (2J in. or 4 in.) tooled hard York templates under, and 18 in. X 3 in. (2J in. or 4 in.) tooled hard York cover stones in cement above in lengths of not less than 5 i'eet, and cramped a-fc joints with 8 in. gal- vanised iron (or copper) cramps. Tie in the iron joists to the floor joists every 5 feet apart, with' 3 in. X J in. bar irons 6 ft. long, sunk into the cover stones and turned down in. at either end to catch the iron and wood joists respectively, and screwed on to each of the floor joists with 3 in. countersunk screws. The ends of the joists to be free at the ends to allow for expansion of, say J in. to every 10 ft. span. Paint. the joists one coat in oil colour before fixing, and two coats after fixing. When two or more single rolled iron or steel joists are placed side by side, they may be secured together with in. bolts, nuts and heads with j in. metal, cast iron (or plain barrel tubing) spacing pieces placed between the joists. The iron tie bars are not always absolutely required, but if the floor joists run at right angles to the iron joists, they then become more necessary, and would only require to be turned down at the one end. For cover stones, see Mason, clause No. 39 ; and Plumber, clause No. 20, for the lead seating. Eolled iron or steel joists may be used from 3 in. up to 12 in. or 14 in. deep ; beyond that depth built up riveted girders are better. Where the ends of girders come over a door, window, or other opening within a short distance of the head, it is essential to put an iron lintel under to receive them, see clause No. 17. Tln j , safe load on wrought-iron girders should not exceed one-fourth the breaking weight. Wrought-iron girders may take a safe load of 5 tons per sq. in. tensile, 4 tons compressive and 4 tons shearing stress. Steel girders will take a safe load of 7 tons per sq. in. tensile, 7 tons compressive, and 5J tons shearing stress. 332 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (1-2) If a riveted wrought-iron (or steel) plate girder be used, give the thick- ness and depth of the web, the size and thickness of the angle irons, flanges, stiffeners and packing pieces, and state that they are to be riveted together with rivets 3 in. (4 in. to 6 in.) apart. Then describe the seatings, templates, cover stone, tying-in irons and painting ; but state that the rivet heads are to be packed up flush with neat cement, to take the cover stones ; see Mason, clause No. 39. If a riveted wrought-iron (or steel) flange girder be used, give the sizes of all its parts, such as web, angle irons, T-iron stif- feners, gusset pieces, flanges and cover plates; then describe the Beatings, templates, cover stone, tying-in irons and painting, and state that the rivet heads are to be packed up flush in neat cement to take the cover stone ; see Mason, clause No. 39. Gusset pieces are vertical plates placed between the flanges at right angles to the web. These two classes of plate girders may be used up to 50 feet span ; the depth of web may be from a -f^th to l^th or j-^th the span, but if less, the girder is liable to deflect, T ^th the span being the usual depth. The width of flange is generally from ^th to ^th the span. If a riveted wrought-iron (or steel) box girder be used, give the sizes of all its parts, such as the webs, angle irons, T-iron stiffeners, packing pieces, flanges and cover plates. Then describe the seatings, templates, cover stone, tying-in irons, painting; arid the cement packing, as in Mason, clause No. 39. If a riveted wrought-iron lattice or warren girder be used, give the sizes of all its parts, with the seatings, tem- 'plates, cover stone, tying-in irons, painting ; and cement packing, as in Mason, clause No. 39. Rolled iron or steel joists as carriages to stairs. (12) The wood (or stone) principal staircase to have two 8 in. X 4 in. (or other size) rolled iron (or steel) joist carriages to each flight, bent at angles (or mitred together at angles with planed joints, and secured with | in. (or J in.) wrought-iroii fish plates, covering the joints for 6 in. each way, and bolted together with four J in. bolts, nuts and heads), and built into walls 9 in. on 18 in. x 9 in. X 3 in. tooled hard York templates, with 4 Ib. lead (or felt) seatings. For sketches and positions of carriages, see ^Carpenter, notes to clause No. 221, Mason, notes to clauses Nos. 64 and 71 ; and for the lead seat- ings, see Plumber, clause No. 20. If the span for the iron carriages be great, and the lequired depth of the joists cannot be obtained on account of head room, then hanging rods may be employed to support the wood stairs from the strings, by (17) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 333 slinging the rods up to some support above. The rods might be 1 in., 1J in., or 1J in. diameter, with nuts, heads arid washers. Boiled iron or steel joists as carriages to concrete stairs. (13) See preceding clause, No. 12, and notes to clause No. 42, under Excavator. Rolled iron or steel joists to landings. (14) The landing on (say) second floor to be sup- ported at the nosing upon a 10 in. x 5 in. (or other size) rolled iron (or steel) joist, built 9 in. at either end into walls on 18 in. x 12 in. x 3 in. tooled hard York tem- plates, with 4 Ib. lead (or felt) seatings. For sketch of this landing joist see Mason, notes to clause No. 64 ; and for the lead seating, see Plumber, clause No. 20. Rolled iron or steel joists to fire- proof floors, flats or terraces. (15) The ironwork to the concrete floors to be com- posed of 8 in. x 4 in. (or other size) rolled iron (or steel) joists placed 2 ft. 6 in. apart, bearing on walls 6 in. (or 9 in.) at either end on 9 in. (or 12 in.) x 3 in. (or 2J in.) tooled hard York stone templates running along the whole length of the walls. (Describe the size of the joists according to the various spans, together with any cross girders supporting the joists ; see clauses Nos. 41, 45 and 46, under Excavator). For sketches of fireproof floors, see Excavator, clauses Nos. 41 to 46. The joists may be placed more than 2 ft. 6 in. apart, if smaller joists or y-irons are placed in between at about 2 ft. 6 in. apart. State if any iron lintels are required over openings, to carry the ends of the joists ; see clause No. 17. Rolled iron or steel joists to wood floors. ' (16) See the example given in the notes to clause No. 53 in Carpenter ; and see Plumber, clause No. 20, for the lead seatings. Iron lintels. (17) The external lintels to windows to be 5 in. x 4J in. (or other size) rolled iron (or steel) joists, bearing 9 in. on walls at either end on 12 in. X 9 in. x 3 in, tooled hard York templates, with 6 in. X 3 in. tooled hard York cover stones on top in cement. The internal lintels carrying the floor joists to be 8 in. X 4 in. (or other size) rolled iron (or steel) joists with stone tem- plates (but perhaps no cover stones). Iron lintels are often required in warehouses or factories to take the weight of the floors ; they are also useful over window or other open- ings which may be of too great a span for an arch to carry. 334 SMITH AKD FOUNDER. (IS] Wrought-iron or steel flitch plates and bolts. (18) See'notes to, and clause No. 124 in Carpenter. Wood bressummers, as mentioned in Carpenter, clause No. 44, often have an iron or steel flitch plate between them for strength, when sup- porting walls or floors above. A rolled iron or steel joist may be employed between the timbers of the bressummer in lieu of the flitch plate. The safe load on flitch bressummers should not exceed ith the breaking weight. The flitch plate should be from -j^th to -j^th the thickness of the bressummer. strap iron and (19) Allow ^ cwt. per square to wood studded b0lt p 3 a t rtitions and Partitions ; and cwt. to each roof truss, of fixed wrought forged strap iron, bolts, nuts, heads, washers, plates, hanging straps, or rods. Also see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 74 and 136 respectively, for straps to roofs and partitions. Straps to roofs and partitions are generally 1 in. X f 6 - in., 1 J in. X -f s in., or 2 in. x f in. Holding down irons to cornice. (20) See Mason, notes to clause No. 104. Iron tie rods to hearths and floors. (21) See Carpenter, clauses Nos. 47 and 53, Excavator, clauses Nos. 43 and 44. and Iron tie rods to walls. (22) When the walls of a building run up to some height without being tied in by the floor joists, it is well to tie them in to the floor joists, either with similar straps as described in clause No. 11, but built into the walls ; or else with similar straps going right through the wall, but formed at the wall ends into a circular rod with screwed threads, and secured on the outside with nuts to a 1 in. metal cast-iron plate 9 in. (to 12 in.) diameter (or else to a wrought S-i ron > 3 in. x J in. metal, about 2 ft. long, 12 in. wide). (27) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 335 Iron ties to chimney stacks. (23) When a chimney stack is insecure, a band of 3 x J in. wrought iron is generally placed round the stack, secured together with a bolt, nut and head ; and from which an 1 in. (or 1| in.) iron rod with flattened ends is attached and taken and secured to the roof timbers with a bolt, nut and head with washers. Of course, it is the better plan to rebuild the stack securely. Iron chimney (24) See Bricklayer, clause No. 50. bars. Hoop iron. Iron corbels. (25) See Bricklayer, clause No. 66, and Carpenter, clause No. 61. (26) Carry the wall plates on cast-iron corbels every 3 ft. apart, f in. metal, 4 in. wide on face, and built 9 in. into walls. In London and certain other districts, timber joists are not allowed to be bedded in party walls within a certain distance from the centre ; in such cases iron or stone corbels become necessary. For stone corbels, see Mason, clause No. 32. Iron roofs. (27) Iron roofs are constructed mainly upon the same principles as timber roofs. The sizes of the various parts can be obtained from any of the architects" pocket books. Here are some of the forms mostly used : Suitable for spans up to 20 ft. Suitable for spans up to 30 ft. Suitable for spans up to 40 ft. Suitable for spans up to 40 ft. 336 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (28) For greater spans the construction becomes more elaborate. The tie bolts A are of circular rod iron, fitting into cast-iron chairs. The king and queen bolts B are of circular rod iron, fitting into cast- iron head pieces. The principal rafters C, and straining piece D, are of T-iron, fitting into the head piece, and chairs. The struts E are of angle iron, T-iron, or of double T-iron. The purlins may be in L-iron support- ing timber purlins, or the purlins may be in timber, secured to the principal rafters with cast-iron shoes. The purlins, when placed near together, may take the place of the common rafters, which in some cases may be found advantageous. The ridge and common rafters are of timber. The coverings and other parts to the roofs may be similar to those used for timber roofs. Arched roofs up to 20 ft. span may be formed with corrugated iron sheeting riveted together, and se- cured to angle irons at the springing, and with tie rods 12 ft. apart to take the thrust. Up to 30 ft. span they may be formed in a similar way with f in. diameter king bolts 6 ft. apart, J in. diameter tie rods, 1 in. x li x f L or T-iron ridge ties, and 2 J in. x 2 in. x f L-irons at eaves. Iron domes and skylights. i* 'S'0" (28) Small domed skylights are formed with bent wrought T-iron, or bent moulded wrought bar iron, riveted to a sole and crown piece. The description for a dome 10 ft. or 15 ft. span might run : Form dome skylight over principal staircase with 2 in. x 1J in. wrought-iron moulded bars placed 18 in. (to 2 ft.) apart at the springing, riveted to a half bar sole piece at the foot, and to a moulded L-shaped bar crown piece at the top. Allow the p.c. sum of 8 for a ventilating sun burner. See clause No. 69 for painting to iron bars when for glazed lights. Also see notes to clause No. 15 in Glazier for the glazing, and various forms of iron dome skylights. The ventilating shaft may be formed in No. 16 B.W.G. galvanised sheet iron 18 in. to 2 ft. 6 in. diameter, with the hood covering over bolted on, and provided with a flap inside the shaft, worked with gearing from the landing below. (31) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 337 Another form of iron skylight, with partly straight partly bent bars. Lean-to. (29) A "lean-to" iron skylight may be formed, with similar T-iron or moulded bars, as in clause No. 28, and riveted to a T or L-iron piece at the eaves, and to an L-iron or moulded bar at the top. A span iron skylight might have a T-iron or a plain bar iron ridge, with an L or T-iron piece at the eaves. For painting to glazed iron lights, see clause No. 69. For skylights in wood, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 124 to 127, 129 to 131, 134 and 134a. Snow guards. (30) Fix to eaves of roof where overhanging the conservatory (or skylights), movable, strong, galvanised iron wire netted work snow guards, 9 in. high, fitted into eyes formed in in. rod iron standards, placed every 5 feet apart, and secured to roof with | in. iron rod stays. Snow guards are a protection against snow falling from the roof, and damaging any glass below. The snow guards (or boards) may be in 7 in. X 1 in. (or 1 in.) wrought deal, secured with ^ in. bolts, nuts and heads, to 2 in. X f in. strap irons, spaced every 3 ft. to 4 ft. 6 in. apart, secured to the roof with 3 in. brass screws. For skylight guards, see clause No. 31. For snow boards to roof gutters, see Carpenter, clause No. 89. Skylight guards (shields). (31) Cover the top surface of the skylights with strong galvanised iron wire netting, bound to rod iron framing, and made movable. These guards are placed over skylights where they are liable to damage from snow falling from the roof, or from falling articles. For snow guards, see clause No. 30. For snow boards to roof gutters, see Carpenter, clause No. 89. 338 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (32) Galvanised corrugated iron roofing. (32) Cover the outbuildings with galvanised corru- gated iron sheets having 5 in. (or 3 in.) flutes, No. 16 B.W.G., the flutes running parallel with the pitch of the roof. Each sheet to break joint and overlap another 6 in. in the horizontal joint, and the full width of one corrugation in the vertical joint. The vertical joints to be riveted together with | in. x j^ in. diameter galvanised iron cone- headed rivets and washers 6 in. apart, and the horizontal joints to be double riveted together with similar rivets and washers 6 in. apart, and the sheeting screwed to the timber framing with 2 in. X -fa in. diameter gal- vanised iron cone-headed screws 6 in. apart. Finish the ridge with galvanised iron ridge capping 15 in. (or 18 in.) girth, screwed on to the ridge with similar cone-headed screws and washers. If to a " lean-to " roof, then describe a flashing piece. The roof timbers to which the sheeting is attached are placed 6 ft. apart. It makes a very neat finish to bend the sheets over the ridge. About 3 Ibs. of rivets are required per square of roofing. Corrugated iron sheets are mide in the following thicknesses, in sizes 5 ft. to 8 ft. long by 2 ft. 3 in. and 2 ft. 9 in, out to out wide, with 3 in. and 5 in. corrugations, and thus reducing the sheets when laid to 2 ft. and 2 ft. 6 in. net widths. No. 16 B.W.G, (about 17 18 19 in. thick). (about 5*5 in. thick). 20 21 22 23 24 ,, 26 Nos. 16, 17, 18 and 19 B.W.G. are generally made with 5 in. flutes, and Nos. 20 to 26 B.W.G. with 3 in. flutes. No. 16 B.W.G. is used in good class work ; Nos. 17 to 19 B.W.G. in ordinary work ; and Nos. 20 to 26 for poorer work. Corrugated iron is mostly used in movable buildings and temporary structures. The " pitch " of a corrugated iron roof may be as low as 4, or one- twenty-ninth of the span. In an arched roof the description would remain the same as to a pitched roof, but instead of securing the sheets to the timber framings (there being none), state that the eaves are to be secured with j- in. x I in. (or 1 in.) galvanised iron bolts, heads, nuts and washers every 6 in. apart to the eaves gutters, or to the L-iron angle plates. S3e sketches in notes to clause No. 27. (35) Sheet-iron roofing. SMITH AND FOUNDER. 339 (33) Plain sheet iron is not much- used as a roof covering. It is laid with the horizontal joints lapping, and the vertical joints are dressed 7zm over wood rolls and screwed down. The pitch may be as little as 4. Sheet iron is made in thicknesses from 12 B.W.G. to 28 B.W.G. Cast-iron girder. (34) Cast-iron girders are seldom now used. The best section is as shown in sketch, having the bottom flange six times the area of the top flange (sometimes made as little as only three or four times the area). The web should diminish from the thickness of the bottom flange to that of the top flange. The depth is usually one-twelfth to one-tenth of the span. Gusset pieces or stiffeners are placed every 4 ft. to 5 ft. apart. Give the sizes of all the parts. Describe the stone template and cover stones as in clause No. 11. The iron should be painted one coat before it leaves the foundry. The width of the bottom or tension flange may be one-half to two- thirds the depth of the girder, and the thickness from one-sixth to one- eighth of the width. Cast-iron girders will take a safe working stress of 8 tons per square inch in compression, 1^ tons in tension, and 2 tons shearing. The safe load on cast-iron girders should not exceed one-fifth to one- sixth the breaking weight. There should be no sudden changes in thickness of the metal ; thus, metal 1 in. thick meeting metal 2 in. thick should be eased towards it gradually. The ends of cast-iron girders should be left free. The bottom flange is in tension and the upper flange in compression. Cast-iron cantilevers (or brackets.) Outsets (35) A cast-iron cantilever should have the same proportions as a cast-iron girder, but the wider flange is placed at the top, as with a cantilever the top flange is in tension and the bottom flange in compression. A description may run : The stone landing carrying bay window on first floor to be supported upon two cast-iron cantilevers (give the sizes of the parts or the weights), cut and pinned into wall in cement on 4 in. x 9 in. X 18 in. tooled hard York templates. (See Mason, under clause No. 32, for the landing.) The ironwork is to be painted one coat in oil colour before it leaves the foundry. State if a small rolled iron joist be placed under the front edge of the landing and bolted at the ends to the cantilevers with angle plates. Cantilevers to stairs. The staircase to be supported on cast-iron cantilevers every 5 "ft. apart (give the sizes of the parts or the z 2 340 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (36) weight) with the ends cut and pinned into walls on stone templates. For sketch and positions where these cantilevers are required, see Carpenter, notes to clause No. 221. Cast-iron columns. (36) Each of the three (more or less) hollow columns on ground floor to be in cast iron \\ in. (or other thick- ness) metal, 8 in. (or other size) external diameter at the base, tapering to 7 inches (or other size) external diameter at the top, with 13 in. X 13 in. x lj in. (or other size) planed top plate, and 18 in. x 18 in. x 1 J in. (or other size) planed bottom plate cast on the shaft, with four 1 in. (or other size) projecting lugs to both positions. Where the shaft meets the top and bottom plates it is to be eased out in the metal. Bed the bottom plate in neat cement (or on 10 Ib. lead seating) into a (say) 2 ft. 6 in. x 2 ft. 6 in. x 1 ft. 6 in. Scotgate Ash tooled (or rubbed) stone base, secured with four 1J in. (or 1J in.) diameter holding down bolts (or Lewis bolts), nuts and heads, and 4 in. X 4 in. X f in. wrought- iron washers on the underside. (Also see Mason, clause No. 40, for stone base.) The top plate to be bolted to the girder with four j in. (or other size) bolts, heads and nuts. The ironwork round the bolt holes to be slightly raised as a seating for the bolts. Paint the columns one coat in oil colour before they leave the foundry. For lead seating, see Plumber, clause No. 20. State if the caps and bases are moulded, also if there be iron standards r | (stiffen ers) cast on at the /ink heads to receive the bases IRrir of any columns above. JJgL The safe load on cast- iron columns is one-tenth *f*nc*fi not J} aje Carttowku^AGp the breaking weight, but if the metal; be extremely good then one-sixth is -safe. The height should not exceed 25 to 30 times the least diameter, but 20 times the diameter makes a very stiff column. The thickness of metal should not be less than one-twelfth to one- sixteenth the external diameter, but nothing less than } in. metal should be used. A long solid square cast-iron column is 60 per cent, stronger than a solid circular column, when the side of the square column is the same as the diameter of the circular column. J5a.se The strengths of long solid square, circular and triangular columns are relatively in the propor- tions of 110, 100 and 93 respectively. (37) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 341 Cast-iron stanchion. (37) Cast-iron stanchions should always have equal sides thus ; the side A must equal the side B. - A The safe load to put on cast-iron stanchions is one- tenth the breaking weight, but if the metal be extremely good then one-sixth is safe. The thickness of the metal to the arms should be one-sixth to one-eighth the width. The height should not exceed from 25 to 30 diameters, but 20 diameters in height makes a very stiff stanchion. The strongest form of cast-iron stanchion is f"^"H section, which is almost equal to a circular column | J of equal area of metal. An H stanchion is only 75 per cent, as strong as a circular column of equal area of metal. O The arms of cast-iron stanchions should be streng- thened with angle fillets, and the metal round the bolt- holes should be raised up as a seating for the bolts. Stiffeners are placed about every 3 feet apart up the stanchion. The description of a cast-iron stanchion would be somewhat similar to that of a cast-iron column, see clause No. 36. Give the thickness and width of the arms, the size and thickness of the iron base, the bolts, and the stone base ; the thickness of the stiffeners, the size and thickness of the top plate or cap, and the bolts ; also the thickness of the standards on top of the cap to take the base of the stanchion above, should a girder run in between. Mention the planing to the base and the cap, and the painting to the stanchion before it leaves the foundry. jltternatoStanchecn 342 SMITH AND FOUNDER. Here are some other forms of cast-iron stan- chions. Cast-iron stanchions section are a waste of material, as the strength of the whole is that of its weakest part. Cast-iron or wrought-iron columns, and stanchions, may be filled round in fine concrete or plaster as a pro- tection against fire. Wrought-iron columns and stanchions. (38) Here are some forms of wrought-iron columns and stanchions. IHOOH Steel columns and stanchions. Air bricks. The height in proportion to the diameter should be the same as if in cast iron, see clauses Nos. 36 and 37. (39) May be formed in the same way as in cast or wrought iron, see clauses Nos. 36 to 38. (40) Put where directed for ventilation under floors (say) twenty 9 in. X 6 in. cast-iron air bricks, form flues to same, and render in cement. See Bricklayer, clause No. 58. Describe any other air bricks for air inlets or air exhausts to rooms, see Carpenter, clause No. 148, and Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 56 and 57. Cast-iron air bricks are made 9 in. X 3 in., 9 in. X 6 in., 9 in. X 9 in., 9 in. x 12 in., 12 in. x 12 in. and 18 in. X 12 in., and may be placed about 10 ft. apart for ventilation under floor. Eaves gutter. (41) Eoofs and flats to have 5 in. X 4 in. heavy cast-iron (or galvanised cast-iron) ogee (or moulded) eaves gutters, painted three times in oil colour inside and out, with cast nozzles, cast stopped ends, cast angles and other pieces, bolted (or riveted) together (or bolted or riveted together with clips), in red-lead cement, screwed to fascia (or feet of rafters), to falls. Put galvanised-iron (or copper) wire roses over outlets. State if half-round gutters or ornamental moulded gutters be re- quired; if with cresting, or with "lion head" or other ornaments every 3 ft. apart. (43) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 343 The gutters may also be fixed on brackets every 3 ft. apart, secured to walls, or screwed to fascias. State if gutters are screwed to feet of rafters, bedded on brickwork and blocked up to falls. Half-round eaves gutters are made 3 in., 3J in., 4 in., 4J in., 5 in. and 6 in. wide and other sizes, and fixed on hooks or brackets secured to walls or fascia. Moulded eaves gutters are made in 3 in. X 3J- in., 4 in. x 4J in., 5 in. X 4 in., 5 in. x 6 in. and other sizes. Square eaves gutters are made in 6 in. X 3 in., 5 in. X 4 in., 6 in. X 4 in, 6J in. X 6 in. and 9 in. X 6 in. and other sizes, and are useful for fixing flush with the face of boundary or other walls. Iron box-gutters are used in roofs, in various sizes, bolted together in a similar way to eaves gutters. Bain water piping. fiend (42) Carry down from eaves gutters to gullies below six (more or less) 3 in. (or 4 in.) diameter heavy cast-iron (or galvanised cast-iron) rain-water pipes, with socket joints and ears cast on, plugged and secured to walls with rose- headed galvanised-iron nails, and jointed with gaskin (yarn) and red lead cement (or with Spence's metal). Put all swan-necks, offsets, elbows, plinth-bends, shoes, branches and other connections. The pipes to be kept; 1 in. clear from the walls with small pieces of gas tubing (or Gregson's patent may be used). Put ornamental rain-water heads to the valleys and box-gutters, p.c. 15s. each, with galvanised-iron wire (or copper) gratings on top. Eain-water pipes should be as straight and free as possible. State if ornamental rain-water pipes be required ; if of square section ; if fixed with loose ornamental bands instead of ears. When rain-water piping runs almost horizontally along a wall, a cap should be described to the elbows for cleaning. Circular rain-water pipes are made 2 in., 2J in., 3 in., 3J in., 4 in., 4J in. and 5 in. diameters, and other sizes. Square rain-water pipes are made 3 in. x 2 J in., 3 J in. X 2 J in., 4 in. X 2 in., 4 in. x 3 in., 4 in. x 4 in., 5 in. X 4 in., 6 in. x 4 in. and other sizes. For a rain-water pipe discharging over a rain-water butt or galvanised iron cistern, see Plumber, Clause No. 62. When rain water is collected into a rain-water well or tank, see Drainage, Clause No. 53 ; if through a filter, see Bricklayer, Clause No. 114. Bailing and gate in a garden wall. (43) See Bricklayer, Clause No. 99. 344 SMITH AND FOUNDEK. (44) Area vertical (44) These may be in wrought or cast iron (wrought ra ngs. iron being preferable), plain or ornamental. Either give a p.c. sum, or describe fully the rails, bars and standards ; and state the vertical bars or standards are to be let into the stone kerb and run in with lead, and that the horizontal rails are to be cut and pinned into walls. Mention the foot stays or spurs. For sketches and stone kerb, see Mason, Clause No. 50. Area gratings. (45) May be in wrought or cast iron (wrought iron being preferable). State size of bars and frame, and that the ends are let into the stone kerb and walls. The kerbs to be 9 in. x 4 in. (or 5 in.) tooled (or rubbed) hard York, in lengths of not less than 5 ft., set and jointed in cement, dowelled at joints, and ends let 6 in. into walls, with 4 in. x J in. sawn (or rubbed) slate creasing under. Also see Mason, Clause No. 50. Plain railing to (46) Form railing with 1 in. wrought square bar gardwTsteps. balusters 5 in. apart, let into mortises in stone and run in with lead, with a 2 J in. x J in. round wrought-iron handrail bent to sweep, fitted into walls, and finished with monkey-tail ends (or turned round to form a newel end). These may also be in ornamental wrought or cast iron. For sketches, see Mason, Clauses Nos. 73 and 80. Balcony railing. (47) Might be similar to Clause No. 44, but gene- rally less in height than area railings. Balconettes to (48) Put to all windows facing street, cast-iron windows. balconettes, p.c. 25s. each, let into mortises in the stone sills and run in with lead, and ends fixed into walls. iron balusters to (4Q)_See Clause No. 64 in Mason, and notes to landing". same J a l so see Mason, Clauses Nos. 66, 68 and 75. Ir0n "Ss rail to (50) See Clauses Nos. 69 to 71 in Mason. Core to handrail. (5i)_s e e Clause No. 64 in Mason. Ir h n SIS t0 (52) The handrail to be stiffened at the turns with \ in. diameter rod iron screwed to handrail or balusters. See notes to Clause No. 220 in Carpenter. Core to string. (53) See notes to Clause No. 220 in Carpenter. (59) Guard bars to windows. SMITH AND FOUNDER. 345 (54) Fit basement (or other) windows with wrought- iron framed guard bars, composed of in. diameter round iron bars, placed at 5 in. centres, pointed and filed at top, and framed to a 1 J in. X f in. top and bottom rail built into reveals. The vertical bars may pass through the bottom rail and be let into mortises in the window sills, and run in with lead. (55) Allow a p.c. sum, whether in wrought or cast- iron ; describe the lock and fastenings. For hinge stones, see clause No. 59 in Mason. The sketch shows a simple method of hanging a moderately heavy iron gate to a brick wall, the bottom of gate being hinged on a pivot, and the top being secured with a loose iron clip, bolted through. It will be seen that the gate can be easily removed at any time by merely unbolting the top clip. Gate bar head. (56) See under clause No. 98 in Bricklayer. Bostwick gate. Closed Ofien, (57) Allow a p.c. sum. These gates fold back into a very narrow compass, and in some positions are very useful. Grilles to doors or windows. (58) Allow a p.c. sum. State if in wrought or cast iron, and if fixed; or if made movable, with stubs, plates and bolts. Movable grille to shop fronts. (59) The shop front to have a movable wrought- iron grille composed of in. diameter round iron rods, 3 ft. 6 in. high, at 3 in. centres, with filed forged points at top, and passing through two 1 in. x J in. (or f in.) horizontal bars, shouldered and riveted to similar vertical end pieces, and provided with gudgeons, eyes and staples, and a padlock p.c. 5s. Paint the work four oils. 346 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (60) Movable grille gates to shop lobby. (60) To be in wrought iron, riveted and welded together, and formed with 1^ in. x f in. hanging styles, IJin. x in. braces, top, middle and bottom rails, and meeting styles ; the meeting styles being formed with a rebate. The long vertical bars to be T 7 g in. (to | in.) round iron 6 ft. high, with orna- mental forged heads, the small vertical bars to be | in. round (or square) twisted iron 3 ft. 6 in. high, with forged pointed heads. Hang gates with small pivots, with eye plates secured to shop front, and supply with a f in. rod iron movable stay, one 9 in. bolt with floor socket, and one padlock p.c. 5s. with staples. Paint gates four oils. Grating to heating pipes. (61) The gratings over the heating pipes in trench to be (say) 2 ft. 6 in. wide, in perforated cast iron, | in. metal, in lengths of 6 ft., with f in. square perforations, f in. bars, and 1 in. outer framing, and supported on cast-iron bearers. For the stone kerb, see Mason, clause No. 36, and for the brickwork, see Bricklayer, clause No. 36. The width of grating varies according to the depth of the pipes from the surface, and the number of pipes in the trench. Arch har. (62) With arches having insufficient abutments a relieving iron arch bar may become necessary; describe it as being (say) J in. (or f in.) wrought flat bar iron arch bar, the full width of arch, with ends turned up, and bolted together through the arch with f in. wrought- iron bolts, nuts and heads. If the arch be very wide, two or more separate arch bars and bolts, placed side by side, may be required. Range bearing bars. (63) May be in T-iron, |-|-i ron > or flat bar iron, placed above the kitchen ranges to take the brickwork above. State size according to the weight to be sup- ported, and bed on 3 in. rubbed (or tooled) York stone templates. Also see Bricklayer, notes to clause No. 50. Door shoes. (64) See Carpenter, clause No. 38, and Mason, clause No. 19. (69) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 347 Cast-iron door shoes to weigh about 7 Ib. (to 10 Ib.) each, and to be drilled, and fixed with countersunk screws to feet of frames ; the tenons to be 1 in. (to 2 in.) square X 1J (to 2 in.) deep. For sketches of door shoes, see Carpenter, clause No. 38, and Mason, clause No. 19. Coal plate. (65) See Bricklayer, clause No. 61, Scraper. Dust bin. Coal plates are made 12 in., 14 in., 16 in., 18 in. and 21 in. diameters, and may be either in solid iron plates, ventilating plates, illuminating plates, or ventilating and illuminating plates combined, and provided with chain, hooks and staple fastenings. They are made in sections suitable for fixing in stone, asphalt, or cement. (66) Put two scrapers p.c. 10s. each, and fix in bed of concrete (or in a recess formed in wall with arched head). (67) Allow the p.c. sum of 2 for a galvanised iron riveted circular dust bin, with outlet slide and hinged lid (or movable lid). Fix on 3 in. x 3 in. wrought deal framed bearers and legs, standing 12 in. high. Dust bins are made in various sizes, and may be square. The old- fashioned brick and timber dust bin is rarely now used owing to its being unsanitary. Portable washing (68) To be a 20-gallon cast-iron portable copper, in copper. cast-iron frame on wheels, with galvanised iron boiler (pan), and with iron flue taken into chimney flue. Also see Carpenter, clause No. 280. Portable washing coppers are made to hold 6, 10, 15, 20, 40 and 50 gallons, and may have copper boilers. For coppers set in brickwork, see Bricklayer, clause No. 55. Iron windows. (69) For factory work they may be formed with say 2 in. x 1 in. moulded and rebated wrought (or cast) iron bars, mitred (or bossed) at intersections, with lugs 4 in. long, every .2 ft. apart, attached to frame for building into walls. Hang one of the squares in frame on gun-metal centres, and provide with Leggot's patent silent casement opener, and endless cord, p.c. 7s. 6d. Glaze the lights with 21 oz. sheets (or Hartley's in. plate) glass in putty, and secure with iron pins (or screws). Coat over the ironwork before glazing with two coats resin mixed with 1 part tallow; and after glazing, paint over with three coats oil paint. .SMITH AND FOUNDER. ,(70) Wrought-iron casements. ~Tlu HEATING. (Clauses Nos. 106 and 107.) In addition to warming rooms by the various stoves mentioned under clauses >Tos. 81 to 89a, buildings may also be heated by hot water pipes, steam pipes and hot air ; the heating by hot water pipes being that mostly employed. Heating by steam in certain positions is considered dangerous, and being little used in domestic buildings will not be further mentioned. Heating with hot air is done by drawing cold air around a special stove, such as Constantino's Convoluted Stove, and conducting the heated air through flues and shafts to the various positions required. As it is little used for ordinary purposes the details will not be further described. It is chiefly employed in Turkish baths. Heating with hot water may be done by either of the two methods, known as the " high pressure system " or the " low pressure system." The high pressure system consists of a coil of small hermetically sealed wrought-iron pipes, some If in. external diameter, | in. bore, which are placed in a furnace, and from which similar pipes are taken to the various positions required. Owing to the pipes attaining a tem- perature of some 400 Fahr. it is considered somewhat dangerous in certain places, and will not be further mentioned. The low pressure system consists of pipes some 2 in., 3 in. and 4 in. diameters, connected to a boiler, the temperature in them being raised to not more than 200 Fahr. ; 180 to 185 Fahr, is considered a good working temperature, as the water should never be allowed to boil (boiling point is 212 Fahr.). Pipes 4 in. diameter require more fuel, and take longer to heat than 3 in. or 2 in. pipes, but they retain the heat for a greater length of time. The temperature of a room should be from 60 to 62 Fahr., and the humidity range between 73 and 75 per cent. Some hospitals and horticultural buildings require more heat. In heating ordinary domestic buildings up to 50 to 65 Fahr., allow from 8 to 12 ft. run of 4 in. pipe per 1000 cubic ft. of space ; but if with 2 in. pipes, then allow double that quantity. With 3 in. pipes, allow one-third more in length than for 4 in. pipes. Warehouses and public halls require about 6 ft. to 7 ft. run of 4 in. pipe per 1000 cubic ft. of space ; schools about 7 ft. or 8 ft. ; horticultural buildings about 35 ft. to 50 ft. ; and hot air chambers and drying stoves about 230 ft. to 250 ft. ; the last named positions acquiring a temperature of some 120 to 130 Fahr. In each case, to attain a like result, double the quantity of 2 in. pipe is required, or one-third more than the 4 in. pipe if 3 in. pipes be employed. When pipes are buried in the ground allow one- third more of piping for loss of heat. The heating surface, that is the area of metal, of a 4 in. pipe is twice that of 'a 2 in. pipe, but the volume of water is four times as great. Heating pipes must never rise and fall alternately ; the flow pipe should continue to rise from the boiler to the highest point to be served, and the return pipe always fall to the boiler. Pipes should not be laid with a less rise than 4 in. in 100 feet, but preferably 8 in. should be the minimum, but the quicker the rise the better the circulation. (106) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 359 One square foot in area of boiler surface upon which the fire directly plays will heat nominally 50 ft. run of 4 in. pipe (about 27 gallons), or 200 ft. of 2 in. pipe, or 80 ft. of 3 in. pipe ; but in practice it is better to take one-fourth less than these lengths for a satisfactory result ; but one square foot in area of boiler surface where next the flues will only heat one-third to one-fourth these amounts. Boilers should be set on their beds with a rise in their length from the front to the back of in. to 1 in. to the foot. The flues around the boiler are generally 5 in. wide, and should also rise f in. to 1 in. to the foot in the direction the flame is to take. The flue around the back of the boiler, where it is sometimes difficult to sweep, should be 9 in. wide. The flow pipe should be taken from the back of the boiler at the top, and the return pipe or return pipes brought down to the bottom at the front. A boiler may have one flow with one return, or one flow with two returns. If more than one flow be required they should each be branched out of the one flow from the boiler, and not connected sepa- rately with the boiler. See sketches below : The most suitable forms of fixed boilers are those known as the saddle boiler, the Chatsworth boiler, and the Trentham Cornish boiler. See sketches below. Paddle There are many other various kinds of boilers, both fixed and independent, which are suitable in certain positions. Here are a few further notes upon boilers and their fixing : The sketches show the details of the setting of a saddle boiler. The flame travels from the fire at A along the flues B to the front of the 360 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (106) boiler, and returns to the back of the boiler along ths flue C into the main shaft at D. Wherever the boiler touches or the flame passes, the flues must be built in firebrick 4J in. thick, set in fireclay ; the top may be formed in fire-lumps 4 in. thick, supported at the centre on fire- bricks if the lumps be not long enough to carry right across the head of the boiler ; or else upon T-irons as shown in the sketches below of a Chatsworth boiler setting. Above the fire-lumps the top is filled in with about 6 in. of ordinary sand, unless the top be required for stacking the firing tools upon, when it may be finished in ordinary brickwork. A saddle boiler may be arched over on top instead of being covered with fire4umps. The two cocks shown on the plan are for cleaning purposes, and emptying the boiler. Manholes are not always put to heating boilers, as there is very little liability to furring up, owing to the water being seldom changed ; but where the water is extremely hard, perhaps manholes, or mudholes as they are called, are absolutely necessary. Fire-bars should not be more than in. or m n in. apart, the best shape being that shown in sketch, called the fish- belly section. There should be order that they may be plenty of soot doors to the boiler flues, thoroughly cleaned out in every part. The furnace front may either be hinged or sliding, preferably sliding. Saddle boilers are made from 18 in. long, and increasing in length by every 6 in., up to 5 ft. long. When the main flue shaft D has to be carried along almost horizon- tally before it ascends vertically the area of the horizontal flue should be twice the area of the vertical flue. The area of the vertical flue varies according to the size of the boiler. When the boiler brickwork stands quite separate from the adjoining walls, the brickwork, exclusive of the half firebrick lining, should be at least 9 in. thick, preferably 14 in. thick, and it should be tied in across the width of the boiler at the top and bottom with iron rods connected to vertical irons in one or two places, otherwise the heat is liable to bulge the work out. Here are some sketches of the setting of a Chatsworth boiler : Taking the two right-hand sections, the flame travels from the fire at A, along the flue B formed in the boiler to the front, and returns to the back of the boiler along the flue C to the main shaft at D. <106) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 361 The left-hand section shows an alternate way of arranging the flues, the flame travelling over the fire A, through the flue B to the front, and -entirely round the boiler through the flues C to the front again, and back -along the flue E to the main shaft at D. The other remarks mentioned about the setting of a saddle boiler would equally apply to a Chatsworth boiler. Chatsworth boilers are made from 2 ft. long, and increasing in length by every 6 in., up to 7 ft. long. Here are some sketches of the setting of a Trentham boiler : The flame passes from the fire at A over the bridge to the back of the boiler, returning to the front along the flue B, and back along the flue C to the main shaft at D. The core under the bridge is made in sand, and is only removed when cleaning out the space at the back of the bridge. If the core be not replaced, the proper amount of heat will not be obtained from the boiler, as the draught will be liable to go past the fire bars and into the flues direct. The same remarks as to the setting of a saddle boiler equally apply to a Trentham boiler, but only one 'emptying-out cock is required in a Trentham boiler. Trentham boilers are made from 3 ft. long, and increasing in length by every 6 in., up to 6 ft. long, and from 7 ft. long by every ] 2 in up to 12 ft. long. The metal of boilers may be -fg in., f in. or J in. thick. The least working space in front of a boiler should be sufficient for raking out the fire with raking tools. The floor above a boiler should be fireproof, as in Excavator, clause No. 41. A drain must be provided in a boiler- house, if possible, for emptying out the boiler into. In places where a boiler is little used, cast iron will stand better than wrought iron. When boilers are not at work the dampers should be closed. In heating by this low pressure system, the coils may either be branched off the main flow pipe, or, and by far the better plan when there are many coils to heat, by taking them off from several return pipes. This main flow pipe is usually 3 in. or 4 in. diameter, and the return pipes are each 2 in. diameter, and in some cases 1 J in. and 1 in. Here is a description of warming an ordinary building by the low pressure system, having one flow pipe and several return pipes. 362 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (106) Boiler and main flow. (106) Allow the sum of 30 for a welded wrought- iron saddle (or Chatsworth) boiler (or riveted steel plate Trentham boiler), with damper, fire doors, dead plate, soot doors, fire-bars, fire bricks, two 1 in. emptying pipes with cocks, stoking tools, and setting the boiler in firebrick and forming the flues. Take a 3 in. (or 4 in.) cast- iron main flow pipe, from top end at back of boiler, with a brass cased thermometer fixed in it, and connect to a 2 ft. X 2 ft. X 10 in. x | in. plate wrought-iron welded connect- ing tank, on fir bearers in roof, having a 14 in. diameter manhole bolted on, a brass air-cock, and an 1 in. wrought- iron exhaust pipe turned over supply cistern. r/////W/W/W//foww A 4 in. main flow pipe, under this system, will be sufficient to heat about 5000 feet run of 4 in. pipe, or 20,000 ft. run of 2 in. pipe ; a 3 in. main now pipe will heat about 3000 ft. of 4 in. pipe, or 12,000 ft. of in. pipe. Eeturn mains. Bring down from connecting tank in roof three (two or more) 2 in. wrought-iron return mains, branching into 3 in. cast-iron return mains at the foot, connected to the front end of boiler at the bottom. A 4 in. main flow will serve about nine 2 in. return mains, and a 3 in. main flow about six 2 in. return mains. The wrought-iron return mains may be 2 in., \\ in., and 1 in., accord- ing to the work put upon them. Coil?. Branch off from these 2 in. wrought-iron return mains to each separate coil with \\ in. flow and return pieces, each having a gun-metal screw-down valve with capstan head fixed in it, with a brass throttle valve fixed in the 2 in. return mains between. The 2 in. return main serving the coils on the staircase is to be without any throttle valves. (This will allow the (106) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 36. water to return to the boiler should all the throttle valves be closed.) The coils in the various positions to be formed with 2 in. (3 in. or 4 in.) cast-iron pipes, let into cast-iron end blocks, slightly tilted. Then give the sizes and positions of the coils, such as say : Two coils in drawing-room, each six pipes high, 8 ft. long, 2 in. (3 in. or 4 in.) diameter. Two coils in dining-room, each six pipes high, 8 ft. long, 2 in. (3 in. or 4 in.) diameter. And to any other rooms and staircases ; and if under the bath, see Carpenter, clause No. 278. In calculating the size of the coils required to heat the various posi- tions, see the previous notes as to heating capacity of pipes ; the end blocks to the coils, and the 2 in. return mains should be taken into con- sideration as actual heating surface. The screw-down valves are for turning the water on and off to any separate coil or for repairs. The throttle valves are for regulating the flow of water into the coils, and down the return mains. But when several coils are placed over each other, and within a short distance of the 2 in. return mains, no throttle valves are absolutely necessary ; as each of the coils would obtain practically the same amount of heat ; but if one coil happen to be some distance away from a 2 in. return main, then a throttle valve becomes necessary. When the throttle valves have once been regulated to the require- ments of the various coils, they should not be again touched, but the screw-down valves on the coils may be shut off and on when required. Eadiators may be fixed instead of coils ; they give more heat, but are expensive. The coils being slightly tilted, as sketch, will allow air to find its way out up the 2 in. re- turn mains, and ensure efficient circulation, no air-cocks being required. When a coil has to be taken off the main flow pipe, it should be as sketch, with an air- cock at the highest point. Air-cocks are to let out the air in the pipes, otherwise they may not get fully charged with water. Jointing. All cast-iron pipes, both in main and coils, to be jointed together with gaskin and specially prepared fine Portland cement in the following manner. First tightly ram in a ring of gaskin, then fill up to two-thirds the depth of socket with Portland cement, ring round again with gaskin and finish with cement as before. All wrought-iron pipes to be jointed together with red lead cement, and screwed joints. Put all tees, bends, unions, supports, fastenings and other connections. 364 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (106) A Portland cement joint is one of the best known methods of jointing cast-iron heating pipes together, but the cement must be specially pre- pared, such as that supplied by Messrs. Earle, of Hull. Telt round pipes. All pipes in roof to be bound round with silicate cotton and canvas (or asbestos composition). If buried in trunks in the ground they may also be bound round in a similar way or with hair felt. Hair felt harbours moth. Supply cistern or expansion tank. Fix in roof a 150 (200 or 100) gallons riveted gal- vanised iron cold water supply cistern (expansion tank), fixed on fir bearers ; take 1 in. wrought-iron cold supply with stop cock and connect to connecting tank. Lay on J in. lead supply to supply cistern, with ball cock fixed half-way down the tank. For overflow, lead tray and casing round cistern, see Plumber, under clause No. 30. The supply cistern (expansion tank) must be fixed at a higher level than the connecting cistern, and being only half full of water in this position, acts as an expansion tank. The supply pipe is sometimes brought right down to the boiler, and connected in at the bottom. Coil cases. Tlan, Enclose round coils with cast-iron coil cases f in. (or J in.) metal, having perforated and moulded top- rails and bases, perforated and moulded panels, hinged access doors to valves and fixed together with bolts, nuts and straps. (Coils in some positions may do without cases.) All coils to have cast-iron trays, \ in. metal 2 in. deep (screwed together at joints, if long), with \ in. outlet pipes dis- charging outside through wall. For outside gratings; to air inlets to coils, see Bricklayer, clause No. 57. For timber coil casings, see Carpenter, clause No. 313. The trays catch any leakage water. If the coil cases have marble tops, describe them as : Enclose round coils with cast-iron coil cases f in. (or ^ in.) metal, having moulded top rails with screw nuts and lugs, perforated and moulded panels and bases, hinged access doors to valves, and fixed together with bolts, nuts and straps. Describe the trays as before mentioned, and state if any of the coils are to be without cases. The tops to be in 1 in. sawn Sicilian (veined or other) marble, polished on top face, with rounded and polished front and return edges, and laid on deal fillets spiked to walls. (108) SMITH AND POUNDEK. 365 The screw lugs are for regulating the marble top horizontally to a. nicety. Gratings. The gratings in front of the return mains to be per- forated cast-iron, f in. metal, 5 in. wide, screwed with countersunk screws every 12 in. apart to rebated deal fillets with small mouldings planted on to cover joint with the plastering. The gratings to stop 4 in. short of the skirtings and cornices. For gratings to horizontal pipes in channels, see clause No. 61. See clause No. 36, under Bricklayer, for piers or channels for hori- zontal pipe mains ; and Mason, clauses Nos. 35, 36 and 38, for stone covering, kerbs and templates. Linen closet. The linen closet to be heated with a coil of pipes- fixed against the walls, and formed of 1 in. galvanised iron steam tubing placed 6 in. apart, and connected to the 2-in. down return mains with stop and throttle valves. Fix in front of tubing for protection of linen J- in. galvanised iron wire netting. See Carpenter, clause No. 309. A linen clo set may be heated with ordinary coils. Painting. See Painter, clauses Nos. 28 and 49. See Painter, clause No. 47. Labels to pipes. Temperature. Clean out boilers and flues. The temperature of the air inside the building is to be from 56 to 60 Fahr. when the external temperature registers 32 Fahr. Clean out the boilers every month and the flues every week. Heating to stables. (107) See clause No. 111. FIRE HYDRANTS. In towns and cities where there is a public water supply fire hydrants may be connected direct with their mains : but in country districts where there is no water supply then hydrants can only be used when there is a storage of water at a high level, so as to enable the water to be thrown with sufficient force against the buildings. See clause No. 112, under Bricklayer, for a storage tank. Here is a description for a fire hydrant supply to a country house SMITH AND FOUNDER. (108) supplied from a storage tank or reservoir at a higher level than the house : Fire hydrant supply. (108) Connect to storage tank with a special cast- iron union, and carry down a 3 in. (or 4 in.) heavy cast-iron fire main to building, and continue round the building as a belted main with two 3 in. (or 4 in.) branches into house. Fix in tank at the outgo of main a movable per- forated cast-iron rose, having perforations equal in area to the area of the main itself. Branch off at lowest point a 3 in. (or 4 in.) pipe for emptying mains, and discharge into ditch near, with a movable perforated iron grating on end. Put four 3 in. (or 4 in.) full-way sluice valves at points A in small brick in cement chambers, with movable manhole covers on top, but without hinges or locks, and supply a key to each valve. Take up to top floor of building two separate 3 in. (or 4 in.) heavy cast-iron rising mains with stopped ends. All mains in ground to be coated inside and out with Dr. Angus Smith's solution, and buried at least 3 ft. deep upon a bed of 6 in. cement concrete 12 in. wide (or the pipes may be bedded on piers similar to iron drain pipes, see notes under clause No. 24, in Drainage). All mains in the house to be painted inside and out immediately on leaving the casting shop, in two coats of oxide paint, and two coats more when fixed, and decorated to match the other work. The mains both in the ground and in the house to be jointed with gaskin, and caulked with molten lead with proper caulking tools. Each of the two ground hydrants at points I> to be furnished with : A screw-down valve in brick chamber with cast- iron hinged lid, but no lock. One key to open valve and lid. One copper stem standpipe with single 'outlet. Two 50 (or 100) ft. lengths copper riveted leather hose, with gun -metal coupling screws, bound in with copper wire, leathered guards and straps. One small cupboard fixed in convenient position and painted five oils, with hinges and fastenings, but no lock ; and containing one hatchet, two polished hose wrenches, and one copper branch pipe with gun-metal screw and nozzle. On each floor there are to be two inside hydrants, each hydrant being furnished with : A gun-metal screw-down hydrant with patent screw and wheel handle, cap and chain. (108) SMITH AND FOUNDER. ,6 7 One 30 (or 50) ft. length oak bark tanned canvas hose, inlined with india-rubber, with gun-metal coupling screws bound in with copper wire, leathered guards and straps. One polished oak hose board fixed in convenient position, and supplied with one copper branch pipe with gun-metal nozzle, two polished hose wrenches, one hatchet, and the necessary fixings. Three copper riveted leather fire buckets (painted and varnished, with monogram or crest engraved on), and fixed on a polished oak rail with pegs. One 1 in. gun-metal draw-off cock under the hydrant. Two of the rooms to be each supplied with a " ladies' boudoir set," consisting of a pump, two buckets and stand. For fire bell, see Bellhanger, clause No. 7. Perform all excavating, filling in, cutting away and making good to all parts and in all positions. No pipes are to be covered up until the architect shall have inspected, tested, and found them to be watertight. If the vertical mains in the house be in chases, they should have vertical gratings in front similar to hot- water pipes, see clause No. 106, with the sketch on page 365. When the hydrants to a house are supplied from a public water com- pany, a valve A must be put near the connec- tion for repairs. The inside vertical mains may be galvan- ised inside and out, and decorated to match the other work on the outside. The hose to the inside hydrants may be double substance, oak bark tanned canvas hose, with gun-metal coupling screws bound in with copper wire and leathered guards and straps ; but this class of hose is liable to " sweat " or leak when in use. The sluice valves are for cutting off the water for repairs to the pipes. There should be no locks to any portion of fire hydrant fittings, so that they may be accessible at all times. The advantage in fire mains running round the house in the form of a belt instead of finishing with stopped ends, is that a better supply of water is obtainable by the former method when several hydrants are in action at the same time. Both when charging and emptying the pipes, take care that it is done very slowly, otherwise the pipes will be sub- _ w . w ^ lw ., jected to too great a strain and shock. ****?****** When filling the pipes with water the topmost hydrant should be opened, so as to let the air out. 368 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (109) If fire mains, or in fact any water mains, be supplied from several storage tanks at different levels, there must be a reflux valve A fixed in the pipes in a chamber with cover to each of the lower stora ge tanks, otherwise the water from the upper tanks would flood the lower tanks. The length of the hose to the various- hydrants should be sufficient to command all that part of the building which it is in- tended to protect. Frost in this country will not attack pipes when buried 3 ft. deep. .z^jifrU ' Labels to pipes. g ee Painter, clause No. 47. STABLES AND FITTINGS. (Clauses Nos. 109 to 111.) For sizes of stable yards, see the notes under Pavior, clause No. 11. For sizes of loose boxes, stalls, passages, and height of stables, see Pavior, clause No. 12. For sizes of carriages, see Pavior, clause No. 13, which will regulate the size of the coach-house. For paving to stable yard, stable, cleaning room, harness room and coach-house, see Pavior, clauses Nos. 11, 12 and 13 respectively. A washing box may be paved similar to the cleaning room. For stable drainage, see clause No. 54, under Drainage. For sizes of stable gates, coach-house doors, stable and loft doors, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 266, 267, 270, 271, 272 and 273 respectively. For special items under the various trades referring to stables, see Mason, clause No. 61 ; Bricklayer, clause No. 67 ; Painter, notes to clause No. 20 ; Plumber, notes to clause No. 21. The special gas points required in stables are as follows : Single arm fixed gas brackets with galvanised iron wire globes should be fixed in : One or two positions in coach-house. Two or more positions in stable passage in the stable. One or two positions in washing box, with nozzle for attaching tubing for singeing. One or two positions in cleaning room. One or two positions in harness room, with double arm pendant and galvanised iron wire globes. One or two positions in yard, with lamps, p.c. (say)l 10s. each. Gas should not be put in the loft ; it is safer to take a lantern. Also see notes to clause No. 8 in Gasfitter. Stables must be freely ventilated and well lighted. The sun must not shine in the horses' eyes or the light be too glaring. If there be (109) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 369 living rooms or a hay loft over the stable, the ceiling should be air-tight ; plaster is best for this purpose, but they are often boarded and varnished over, as in clause No. 216 under Carpenter. There must be no projec- tions in stalls or loose boxes against which the horses may be liable to hurt themselves. In addition to the accommodation required for the horses, stable buildings must have a complete suite of rooms for the coachman and his family ; as well as bedrooms for the stable men, a mess-room and a w.c. A clock is useful when fixed in a prominent position. It is almost preferable to put a provisional amount for the stable ironwork and fittings and select them afterwards, as they are made in several qualities by the various makers ; otherwise some maker should be selected, and the parts and fittings quoted from his catalogue. Messrs. Musgrave & Co., The St. Pancras Ironwork Co., and others, are makers of stable fittings. Generally speaking, the ironwork, where in contact with the urine or in wet positions, should be of cast iron ; in other parts, in wrought iron. Here are a few particulars of stall divisions : The length of stall divisions may be 9 ft., 9 ft. 6 in., or 10 ft., and either with or without one or two barrier rods. The width between the stalls is 6 ft. or 6 ft. 6 in.. Pillars (heel posts) are made 3J in., 4 in., 4J in. and 5 in. diameters. Air may be brought into the stable either at the head of the stall division or up the heel posts. The usual height at the head of a stall division is 7 ft., ramping down to 4 ft. 8 in. at the heel. Here are a few particulars of loose box divisions : Troivi 2 B 370 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (109) Loose box doors are usually 3 ft. 6 in., 3 ft. 8 in. and 4 ft. wide ; if hinged they should open outwards. The pillars are 3J in., 4 in., 4in., 5 in. and 6 in. diameters. The usual height of top rail is 7 ft. Here are a few particulars of manger fittings to stalls : P Ar water a**/ tern The mangers are fixed 3 it. 2 in. to 3 ft. 6 in. up, according to the size of the horses. Here are a few particulars of loose box manger fittings : ifir The mangers are fixed at the same height as mentioned to the stalls. The boarding to loose box and stall division is usually 2 in. thick, and against walls 1 in. thick. Here is a sketch plan of a stable described in the following clauses Nos. 109 to 111. For drains, see clause No. 54 under Drainage. CD c/ /SI alls Tt is useful to allow an extra space in the stable for throwing down ths fodder and the storage of blankets. (109) Generally. SMITH AND FOUNDER. 371 Loose boxes. (109) The work consists of fitting up three loose boxes, three stalls and one sick box ; with the necessary coach-house, washing box, harness room and cleaning room requirements. The ironwork to be neatly fitted together. All fittings to be japanned where not other- wise described, and fixed with screws. The loose boxes to be formed with cast-iron pillars 4 in. diameter, with ball tops (say if brass tops), self- fixing cast-iron bases bedded in concrete, and prepared for sliding or hinged doors as the case may be, and with a similar half pillar against the wall. Doors to two of the boxes to be framed up in wrought iron 7 ft. x 3 ft. 6 in., made to slide with wheels, runners, rollers, guides, gearing, and secured with brass latches. The upper part of doors to be filled in with wrought- iron riveted ventilating panelling, and the lower part with pitch pine boarding. The third loose box door to be similar, but hinged instead of sliding, with wrought-iron hinges and stoppers and brass latch. Form the loose box fronts and divisions between the boxes with wrought-iron riveted ventilating panelling at top 3 ft. deep, having moulded wrought-iron top cap- ping, moulded wrought-iron middle rail prepared for 2 in. boarding, and filled in between with in. wrought- iron bars, 3 in. centres. The lower part to be filled in with boarding fitted in between the middle rail and a cast-iron moulded sill with sliding piece for access to boarding, and bedded on brickwork. The divisions between the loose boxes to have in addition a wrought-iron solid head-plate 3 ft. (3 ft. 6 in., 4 ft., or 4 ft. 6 in.) long, to prevent the horses seeing one another when racked up, or, The divisions between the loose boxes may have solid wrought-iron panelling their whole length. This is sometimes necessary with high spirited horses, or, The divisions between the ^ose boxes may have the ordinary open ventilating panelling, with movable galvanised corrugated sheet- iron shuttering in 2 ft. (to 2 ft. 6 in.) lengths, with stubs at top and bottom fitting into corresponding holes in the top capping and middle rail, and provided with two flush handles to each length of shuttering. Eun round the wall sides of loose boxes wrought-iron moulded top capping, wrought-iron middle rail prepared for 1 in. boarding, and cast-iron moulded sill with 2 B 2 372 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (109) sliding piece for access to boarding, and bedded on brickwork. Line round the boarded portion of one of the loose boxes with seven rows of 2 in. x yg in. galvanised hoop iron in horizontal lines, every 3 in. apart, secured with screws every 3 in. apart, and varnished over with the woodwork. (This protects the woodwork when horses are much given to biting.) stalls. The three stalls to be formed with cast-iron pillars 4J in. diameter, with ball tops (say if brass tops), self- fixing cast-iron bases bedded in concrete, and with a similar half pillar against wall. The two centre divisions to stalls to be 9 ft. long, formed with wrought-iron riveted ventilated panelling, 3 ft. deep at head, diminishing to 8 in. deep at heel, with moulded wrought-iron ramp, moulded wrought-iron middle rail prepared for '2 in. boarding, and filled in between with f in. wrought-iron bars, 3 in. centres, with a solid wrought-iron head-plate, 4 ft. (3 ft. 6 in. or 4 ft. 6 in.) long at wall end, to prevent the horses seeing one another when feeding. The lower part to be filled in with boarding fitted in between the middle rail and a cast-iron moulded sill, with sliding piece for access to boarding, and bedded on brickwork. The middle rails to be each provided with a wrought-iron sliding barrier rod, with slot fixed to wall on opposite side of passage. (These barrier rods prevent the horses straying about should they get loose. Two barrier rods may be used.) The wall side of end stall to have a similar moulded ramp and middle rail, and cast-iron sill with sliding piece, prepared for 1 in. boarding, and bedded on brick- work. Eun across head of stalls, wrought-iron moulded top capping, wrought-iron moulded middle rail prepared for 1 in. boarding, and cast-iron moulded sill with sliding piece for access to boarding, and bedded on brickwork. The top capping is not always put across the heads of the stalls, neither round the wall sides of the loose boxes ; but it makes a better finish. With large horses, 9 ft. is not long enough for the stall divisions, they may then be 9 ft. 6 in. or 10 ft. long. Existing stall divisions may be lengthened with movable lengthening pieces, say about 4 ft. to 4 ft. 8 in. high, 2 ft. 6 in. wide, formed with 2 in. boarding, filled in between a wrought-iron frame and provided with fixing pins to the posts and a bolt to the floor. (109) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 373 Fill in between the sills and middle rails of loose boxes, stall divisions and loose box doors, with 2 in. picked specially selected small figure wrought both sides pitch pine V-jointed grooved boarding, in 5 in. widths to , loose boxes and 4 in. widths to stalls, and tongued together with 1 in. No. 18 gauge galvanised hoop iron tongues. Put similar 1 in. boarding against walls of loose boxes and stalls fixed to 2 J in. x f in. fir battens plugged to walls. No coarse figure or deeply coloured wood to be used. The woodwork may also be in oak or teak, and is sometimes only 1J- in. thick. The wall spaces in the loose boxes and stalls between the top capping and middle rail may be in glazed brickwork, similar as described in Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 89 and 87 ; or in glazed tiles on a cement back, as in clauses Nos. 88 and 89a in Bricklayer. The remaining portion of walls up to the ceiling may be in glazed brickwork, or else plastered and painted. It is best to see the coachman and settle with him the number and what fittings he requires in The loose boxes. The stalls. The stable. The cleaning room. The harness room. The washing box. The coachhouse. The yard. The following articles are some of those usually required : L fittT ^r ~^ ac k * oose k x to h ave ^ e following fittings : Two enamelled iron loose box mangers with large safety fronts, fixed 3 ft. 2 in. up (to 3 ft. 6 in.) from paving. One enamelled iron water pot 13 in. diameter, with brass plug flush with bottom, washer and chain, fixed 3 ft. 2 in. (to 3 ft. 6 in.) up from paving. One japanned iron name-plate frame, with painted glass slide about 16 in. X 2^ in. X| in., with name painted on in gold. One galvanised iron (brass or bronze) racking ring, with galvanised iron chain. Two galvanised iron dressing rings, with two galva- nised iron chains. One cast-iron ventilator, about 2 ft. 6 in. x 15 in., fixed at head of box, and glazed with 26 oz. clear sheet glass, with a cast-iron grating on the outside. Two. sets of loose box noiseless tyings. One stench trap 11 in. (or 14 in.) square (if under- ground drains). 374 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (109) See the sketches in the notes preceding this clause for the various kinds of loose box fittings. It is a better plan to put in a p.c. amount to each of the above items. In loose boxes, hay and grass are often thrown down on the floor for the horses to feed off ; if a hay rack be required state so. stall fittings. Each of the three stalls to be fitted up with : One stall manger with tubular front, fixed 3 ft. 2 in. (to 3 ft. 6 in.) up from paving, and combining an ena- melled iron feeding trough, enamelled iron water pot, 13 in. diameter, with brass plug flush with bottom, washer and chain, and wrought-iron hay rack. One japanned iron name-plate frame, with painted glass slide about 16 in. X 2J in. X J- in., with name painted on in gold. One galvanised iron (brass or bronze) racking ring, with galvanised iron chain. Two galvanised iron (brass or bronze) dressing rings, with two galvanised iron chains. Two galvanised iron (brass or bronze) pillar rings, with two galvanised iron chains. One cast-iron ventilator about 2 ft. 6 in. x 15 in., fixed at head of stall, glazed with 26 oz. clear sheet glass, with a cast-iron grating on the outside. Two sets noiseless tyings. One stench trap 11 in. (or 14 in.) square (if under- ground drains). Two kicking mats with dyed border, and fixed with bolts, nuts, heads and washers. See the sketches in the notes preceding this clause for the various kinds of stall fittings. It will be better to give a p.c. amount for each of the above items. stable fittings. The stable to be provided with the following fit- tings : One cast-iron niche and trap (usually 18 in. wide X 2 ft. 6 in. high) fitted flush into one of the walls, having a f- in. gun-metal cock with nozzle, and 30 ft. of red india-rubber hose with spreader and connections, and lay on f in. lead supply. (The rubber hose may be wired on the outside.) (Say) six teak buckets painted white inside, dark blue outside and initialled. (Say) three stable forks with polished ash handles and brass ferrules, and initialled. (Say) two stable brooms with polished ash handles, and initialled. (Say) two wrought-iron fork and broom racks for three forks and two brooms each. (Say) six folding brackets with polished wood cap- pings. (109) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 375 (Say) one japanned brush and sponge drainer. One long arm with polished ash handle and brass hook, for opening and closing ventilators. (Say) three straw plait holders. If a window look into a loose box or stall, take a wrought-iron window ard. P.c. amounts may be put to each of the above items. guard. Cleaning room fittings. (Say) six folding brackets, all in japanned iron. (Say) one japanned brush and sponge drainer. (Say) one wrought-iron telescopic harness cleaning hook, leathered. One wrought-iron cleaning horse. One gully trap. The harness is cleaned in this room before it is taken into the harness room. The floor would be paved, the walls may be of plain brick, or plastered and painted. The ceiling may be boarded or plastered. (Say) six sets ventilating brackets, with polished wood cappings for double harness. (Say) six do. do. do. for single harness. (Say) two do. do. do. gent's saddle and bridle do. (Say) two do. do. do. lady's do. do. One pitch pine polished cleaning horse with drawer, flaps and cupboard. (Say) one gent's oak saddle airer. One polished pitch pine bit case, 4ft. X 4 ft. Gin. X 6 in. deep, with 32 oz. sheet (or plate) glass doors, brass hinges, bolts and lock ; and lined on the inside with blue cloth, and provided with say one dozen brass bit and curb hooks with rosettes. (Say) one wrought-iron telescopic harness cleaning hook, leathered. (Say) one whip rack for three whips. A harness room is merely for hanging up the harness in when clean, and only dry cleaning should be done in it. A harness room is generally lined round with boarding ; see Carpen- ter, clause No. 216. The bit case is usually fixed over the mantelpiece. Harness room fittings. Sometimes the harness is kept in cup- boards ; these may be in similar framing as to cupboards mentioned in Carpenter, clause No. 293 modified, or the doors may be glazed. Of course shelves are not required. 3/6 Washing box. Coach house fittings. SMITH AND FOUNDER. (109) A washing box is a place for washing the horses under cover. The floor should be paved, with a gully in the centre ; the walls of brick, and the ceiling either wood ur plaster. The only fitting required is a galvanised iron racking- ring. One niche exactly similar in every way to that de- scribed in the stable, but sometimes two 30 ft. lengths of the india-rubber hose are required. (Say) three sets of wrought-iron carriage pole hooks, leathered. Yard. One movable strong framed galvanised iron wire manure guard, 5 ft. X 4 ft. X 3 ft. '(or 6 ft. x 3 ft. x 3 ft.) secured to eyes fixed in the wall. Fix to wall, (say) three galvanised iron yard rings. Manure guards are also made 4 ft. X 3 ft. X 2 ft. 6 in. ; 4 ft. x 3 ft. 6 in. X 2 ft. 9 in. ; 4 ft. 6 in. X 4 ft. X 3 ft. ; and 5 ft. X 4 ft. X 3 ft. 6 in. A draw off may be required in the yard, if there be no niche in the stable. If there be a dung pit a manure guard will not be required. It is a good plan to cover part of the yard in with a light iron framed and glass roof, similar to Smith, clause No. 29, so that either horses or carriages may be washed under cover. If a dung pit be required it should be built with brick in cement on concrete, and coped with rounded York stone or blue bricks in cement. The inside must be lined in cement and sand f in. to 1 in. thick, finished off in f in. neat cement. Loft. Corn, bran and chaff store (bins). Form corn store bin in loft with 1J in. (to 2 in.) wrought deal matched and beaded boarding, with 7 in. X 1J in. wrought ledges outside, and two 1J in. divisions inside. The bottom to be formed to a sharp slope to the shoots. Carry separate 1 in. (or 1J in.) wrought framed deal shoots from each division of store, and connect to a similar store or bin in stable below. The tops to be hinged with strap hinges. Line the inside of the bins (but not the divisions) with No. 13 gauge zinc, soldered together at joints, and copper nailed along top edge. Each shoot to have an iron shutter slide near the store bin in stable. (109) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 377 For space corn occupies, see notes preceding clause No. 46 in Carpenter. The shutter slide is for stopping the supply from the upper store bin to the lower. State how many bushels the bins are to hold. The shoots from the corn and bran store may be about 8 in. X 4^ in., and for the chaff not less than 12 in. X 12 in. ; they may each be lined with zinc. The store bins may also be in brickwork, rendered over on the inside in cement,, and covered over with wooden covers. When there is no separate corn bin in the stable, an iron corn bin may be fixed in the loft, with a shoot to the stable below, with a meter. The meter consists of two shutter slides, so that a measure of corn may be obtained each time. State the size of bin ; they may be had to hold 4, 6, 8, 10 and 12 bushels. Bran and chaff bins would be similar. Hay shoot from loft. Form hay shoot from loft to stable below with 4 in. X 2 in. stud framing, lined inside and out with 1 in. matched and beaded boarding, with two sets of folding dwarf doors, one being from the loft into the shoot, and one from the stable into the shoot, and provided with hinges and fastenings. A hay shoot may be built in brickwork. For space trusses of hay and straw occupy, see notes preceding clause No. 46 in Carpenter. Exhaust Ventilator. From ceiling level of stable carry a 2 ft. 6 in. x 2 ft. 6 in. timber framed exhaust ventilator to roof turret formed with 4 in. x 2 in. stud framing, and lined on the inside with 1 in. wrought deal matched and beaded boarding, having a ledged door formed in it on one side, with hinges and fastening for access to the trap door at the ceiling level. Describe the trap door as Clause No. 276 in Carpenter. For roof turret, see Carpenter, clause No. 97. .Instead of the ventilator being connected to the roof turret, it is a good plan to form it with two outlets, furnished with louvres at each end, see Carpenter, clause No. 99. Sick box. A sick box should be entirely separated from the stables and entered from the outside. Describe the paving, iron sill, iron middle rail, and the boarding, similar to a loose box ; the walls above should be in 378 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (110) glazed brickwork or tiles, and the ceiling plastered and painted. The following fittings would be required as in a loose box, which will be found fully described under loose box fittings : Two mangers. One water pot. One name-plate frame and name plate. One racking ring and chain. Two dressing rings and chains. One ventilator. Two sets tyings. One stench trap. One set slinging apparatus (from 10 to 20). One wrought-iron window guard against window. Fainting to fittings. Paint all ironwork one coat in oil colour before it leaves the makers, and two (or three) coats when fixed, and twice varnish in copal. Twice size and twice varnish in copal, all woodwork to boxes and stalls. Surface gutters in stables, (110) If instead of the stench traps in the loose boxes and stalls, surface gutters be required as men- tioned in the notes to Pavior, clause No. 12, and under Drainage notes to clause No. 54 ; then describe as : Lay 4J in. cast-iron surface gutters with all angles, tees and sliding covers, and carry up each of the loose boxes and stalls to within a short distance of the head. Take similar guttering with cover along the passage in front, but having a fall formed in the bottom of the guttering, and finish with a flap before discharging into the outside gully. Surface gutters are also made 5 in. and 6 in. wide. (112) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 379 Heating. (HI) Fi x i n harness room an independent dome top boiler with flue, (say) p.c. 12. Take 1J in. flow and Jfir ccdt Coach he*,** 111 L/il tSra.lt* return with valve, across cleaning room to stables, and continue along the passage wall of stable above the head of the windows as far as the end of sick box, with 3 in. (or 4 in.) flow and return pipes finished with a J in. air pipe at the highest point. Take a similar 1^ in. flow and return pipe, but with two valves, across harness room to coach house, and con- tinue round the three sides about 4 ft. up from the floor with 3 in. (or 4 in.) flow and return pipes, fur- nished with an air cock at the two highest points. Protect pipes from harness in harness room, with wrought deal beaded casing on bearers. Put 1 in. exhaust pipe from top of boiler. Lay on J in. lead water supply with ball cock to a 20 gallon galvanised iron supply tank on bearers, and carry down f in. sup- ply to boiler. Put 1 in. overflow pipe to cistern with lead safe and dribble pipe, and case in (see under Plumber, clause No. 30). Allow the p.c. sum of 1 10s. for an iron mantelpiece. Put all pipe and cistern brackets, bearers, connections and fittings. For the jointing of pipes, see under Smith, clause No. 106. It is not intended to draw off water from this boiler. Hot water. Fix in cleaning room an open fire stove with high- pressure circulating boiler at back, (say) p.c. 9. Take 1 in. flow and return pipe to a 20 gallon circu- lating tank near, with gun-metal draw off cock, and 1 in. steam pipe exhaust. Lay on J in. lead supply terminated with a ball cock into a 5 gallon supply tank with 1 in. over- flow, and take down 1 in. supply to boiler. Allow 1 10s. p.c. for an iron chimney-piece. The hot mash is made up on this open fire. An ordinary open fire, with open side boiler, may be used in small stables. Cow HOUSES. Cow-house stalls are also called " lairs " and " byres." Cow-honse (H2) Here are a few particulars about cow-house fittings. fittings ._ The " feeding passage " may be 3 ft. 6 in. or 4 ft. wide; the manger fitting, 2 ft. 'to 2 ft. 6 in. wide ; the 3^0 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (112) bed or standing space, from the manger to the outer side of the . drain channel, 8 ft.. 6 in. long (with very small cows it may be as little as 7 ft.) ; the " dunging passage " 3 ft. 6 in. to 4 ft. wide. Here is a sketch of a single cow house, showing the least total width suitable for ordinary size cows, to be 17 ft. 6 in. in the clear. Here are two sketches, showing alternate ways of arranging a double cow house ; the least total width being 31 ft. 6 in. and 32 ft. respectively fer csiartml fat Is tSTct Us Feed i tig * 2)*tnytnf7kssaft \ in the clear. When the dunging passage is in the centre, it may be made as much as 5 ft. wide. When two cows are accommodated in the one stall, the stall divisions (travises) are placed at 6 ft. 6 in., 7 ft., 7 ft. 6 in. and 8 ft. centres, but 7 ft. is a very serviceable width. When cows are placed singly in each stall, then the divisions may be placed at 4 ft. or 4 ft. 6 in. centres. (112) SMITH AND FOUNDER. Here are two sketches of stall divisions: the one being framed up entirely in wood, the other in wood and iron. The thickness of the woodwork should be 1J in., either in spruce or pitch pine. All arrises in the timber stall divisions must be rounded off. Stall divisions are also made entirely in iron. The floor or standing space of the stalls may fall 2 in. to 3 in. from the manger to the drain channel, and be paved with asphalt or cement on concrete, as in Pavior, clause No. 7, and finished with bull-nosed Staffordshire blue brick nosing on both sides of the drain channel, the channel being 10 in. wide and paved with 10 in. X 1 in. plain blue brick paving bricks, and discharging out into the open without traps. The standing space is sometimes paved with large flat stones with few joints, the great object being to get a standing space with few or no joints. Puddled clay may be placed for a distance of about 3 ft. 6 in. at the head of the stalls by about 9 in. to 12 in. deep, and the concrete should be placed underneath the clay. This puddled clay forms a soft bed for the cows to rest upon when getting up or lying down. The dung- ing passage may be formed with asphalt, concrete, stone or brick. The feeding passage may be plain earth, or else paved in any class of paving ; it is usually placed at a slightly higher level than the floor of the stalls. The mangers may either be in wood, in one long range the whole length of the cow house, with an out- 382 SMITH AND FOUNDER. (113) let and plug at one end for cleans- ing purposes, or else formed in a similar way with glazed half pipes or glazed brick blocks. The man- gers may be entirely separate to each stall without communicating with one other. When the stall contains a single cow only, the manger may be in one piece of glazed fireclay. The height of the manger from the floor varies, but 1 ft. 9 in. is a very suitable height. The slanting piece at the back of the manger is to allow room for the horns of the cows when feeding. The head- rail at the head of the stalls is to prevent the cows getting their heads too far out into the feeding passage. When the cows are in the stalls they are chained up to an 1 in. iron bar neck tie, about 2 ft. long, fixed to the stall division. The walls may be in brick or stone, the inner face being limewhited over unless it be in glazed brick. When in plain brick or stone, the walls may be cemented over against the dunging passage for a height of about 5 ft., and finished a trowelled face in neat Portland cement. This will allow that part of the walls to be periodically washed down. All sharp arrises should be taken off both to brick, stone, wood or other material. For windows, see Carpenter, clause No. 178. For doors, see Carpenter, clause No. 272. The doors should not be less than 4 ft. wide in the clear, and hung in two halves. There should be an abundance of light and ventilation in a cow house. In addition to the ventilation and light obtained from the louvred windows described in Carpenter, clause No. 178, there should be a louvred skylight in the roof. Air inlets with hit-and-miss gratings may also be placed in the passage walls opposite each stall. Cows should be provided with 12 gallons of water per head. The London County Council require each cow stall to be 8 ft. X 4 ft. for one cow, and 8 ft. X 7 ft. for two cows. The cubical contents of the cow house to be 600 cub. ft. per cow, and sometimes 800 cub. ft. ; not more than 16 ft. in height being reckoned in these amounts. The walls to be cemented up 5 ft., or be in similar impervious material. Twelve gallons of water to be provided per head. Iron hurdles and gates. (113) Iron hurdles are made 6 ft. long by 3 ft. 3 in., 3 ft. 6 in., 3 ft. 9 in., 4 ft. and 4 ft. 6 in. high, with three, four, five and six bars. (113) SMITH AND FOUNDER. 383 Hurdles 3 ft. 3 in. high have three or four bars, f in. top and J in. lower horizontal bars ; the middle and end uprights being 1 in. x i in. Those 3 ft. 6 in. and 3 ft. 9 in. high have five hori- zontal bars, the top bar being f in. diameter, the lower bars i in. or f in. diameter, or else in flat iron 1 in. X i in. The middle upright (one or two) 1 Jin. x in., and the end uprights 1 in. X ^ in. Those 4 ft. and 4 ft. 6 in. high have six horizontal bars, the top bar being f in. diameter, the lower bars either f in. diameter or else in flat iron 1 in. X J- in., the middle upright (one or two) If in. xf in., and the end uprights 1 J in. X f in. Here is a description : Fence round the field hurdle to with iron hurdles. Each be 6 ft. long, 4 ft. high above ground, and formed with two If in. x f in. middle uprights, slightly . rounded on top and with pointed feet 6 in. long ; end uprights 1J in. X f in., slightly rounded on top, with single-pronged pointed feet 12 in. long; f in. round iron horizontal top bar, and five f in. round iron lower bars forged into the middle and end uprights, and the whole finished with jet varnish. The hurdles to be fixed together just below the top horizontal bar and third and fourth horizontal bars with bolts 1 J in. long between the in. thick square between the f in. galvanised iron head and the point, and provided with heads and nuts. The feet may be tarred and the upper part painted instead of being finished with the usual black varnish. Iron hurdles are also entirely tarred over. For green wood hurdles, see Carpenter, clause No. 329. There are many and varied kinds of wire fencings. Gates. Wrought-iron field gates are made 9 ft. long, fixing posts and fittings. Side gates are made 3 ft. 6 in. wide. with (1) Slates. Double courses. Leave watertight. Clean out gutter and pipes, SLATEE. (Including Slate Mason.) (1) The slates to be whole, even in thickness, hard, tough and smooth; free from patches, spots, cracks, veins, shakes and other defects ; and reduced to equal widths, squared up and dressed ; and giving a clear ring when struck. The slating to be properly bonded in every part. No slates to be laid lengthwise. Perform all cutting and labours. (2) Put a double course of slates at eaves. (3) Leave slating watertight at completion of the building. (4) Clean out all gutters and stack pipes. Large slates should be laid to a pitch of about 22, or height of roof ^ of span. Ordinary slates (such as Countess) should be laid to a pitch of about 27, or height of roof J of span. Small slates (such as Ladies) should be laid to a pitch of about 30, or height of roof ^ of span. It is usual to make the pitch at 30 in ordinary work. Queens and Eags are 36 in. x 24 in. ; Imperials, 30 in. x 24 in., and are sold by the ton. Empress are 26 in. X 15 in. ; Princess, 24 in. X 14 in. ; Duchess, 24 in. X 12 in. ; Marchioness, 22 in. x 12 in. ; Viscountess, 18 in. x 10 in. ; Ladies, from 16 in. X 10 in. to 14 in. X 7 in. ; Doubles, 13 in. x 10 in. ; Smalls, from 12 in. X 8 in. to 10 in. X 5 in. ; all of which are sold by the 1000. Boofs. (5) Cover the main roofs and outbuildings with close-jointed Bangor purple Countess slates, best quality, laid to a 3 in. lap at 30 pitch. The horizontal and vertical joints to range perfectly straight, and the slates cut and dressed to ridges, gables, hips, valleys and verges. Each course of slates to be laid flat on a previous course and properly bonded in every part ; and each slate to be about J in. thick and fixed with two 1J in. copper nails, 6 Ibs. per 1000, upon 2 \ in. X in. horizontal fir battens spiked on to 2 J in. Xf in. (or 1 in.) fir battening running from ridge to (7) SLATER. 385 eaves, spaced 12 in. apart, and spiked through the felt to the boarding beneath. - In a curb roof, part of the slating would necessarily be laid to a greater pitch than 30. Cheeks of dormers. (6) Lay similar slating, felt and battens to cheeks of dormers. The cross line of battens mentioned in clause No. 5 gives good ven- tilation under the slates. It is only provided in first-class work. Often on boarded roofs no slate battens are used, the slates being nailed direct to the boarding. If the slates be only fixed to the ordinary battens without boarding, as is often the case, they may be " torched " on the under side in lime and hair mortar against the battens : or they may be " shouldered " in lime and hair mortar coloured with ashes. Shouldering is bedding the heads of the slates only, about 2 in. down. If Bangor slates be not used, state the kind, such as Penrhyn blue or Westmoreland green : if " Countess " size be not used, then state the size, such as Duchess (24 in. X 12 in.), Ladies (16 in. X 10 in), or other size. State if slating is laid in promiscuous sizes ; or in diminished courses from eaves to ridge ; or partly in ornamental courses, such as in every four courses alternately. Very small slates have to be used in circular slating. If the ordinary lap of 3 in. be not required, then state the lap, such as 2J- in. or 3 J- in. ; but in very steeply pitched roofs, such as those at 60 or more, then a less lap than 2 in. will suffice ; even as low in some positions as an 1J- in. lap. Battens may also be 2 in. X 1 in., or 2^ in. x 1 in. If copper nails be not used, state the class, such as composition or zinc nails, cast or malleable iron ; and if either of the two latter class of nails be used, then state they are to be either galvanised or dipped in boiled oil. If slates are to be screwed with brass or copper screws, state so. 1J in. copper 2 in. 1J in. composition If in. 1-J in. zinc If in. 2 in. nails weigh about 6 Ibs. per 1000. 10 Ibs. 6i Ibs. 8 Ibs. 4J Ibs. 7 Ibs. 11 Ibs. Glass slates. (7) Allow for (say) 20 glass slates in roofs, of Hartley's J in. ribbed plate, screwed to the battens, and the roof boarding cut through to allow the light to penetrate. Also see Glazier, notes to clause No. 3. 2 c 386 SLATER. (8) Felt - (8) Lay over the surface of all boarded roofs under the slate battens best asphalted (or inodorous) roofing felt about J- in. thick, properly passed, lapped and tacked on every 3 in. apart with 1J in. clout nails, 5 Ibs. per 1000 (or 1 in. copper nails). Sarking felt or Macilwraith's inodorous felt may also be used ; and felt is sometimes lime-whited over before the battens are spiked on. Felting a roof adds to the warmth in winter and the coolness in summer of the rooms below. Hip and ridge (9) Put 2 in. diameter Bangor slate, rounded, and bird's-mouthed hip and ridge rolls, with 6 in. x | in. sawn slate wings in long lengths, sawn edges and ends, and even in thickness, and bedded in oil putty. The wings to be fixed with 2^ in. brass (or copper) screws ; the hip and ridge rolls with 3 in. brass (or copper) screws, countersunk at heads and stopped in with oil putty (or cement). Sometimes the roll is formed on the one wing, the other wing being separate. The ridge may also be formed with red tile ridging, see Tiler, clause No. 4 ; but with slate roofing it looks common. The valleys are always formed in lead (and sometimes in zinc), see Plumber, clause No. 11 ; but the hips and ridges may also be formed in lead, and this makes the best work ; see Plumber, clause No. 11. Blue tiles are sometimes used for the hips and ridges, but they make poor work. Mitred Mps or The hips and valleys to be cut and mitred together, and carefully dressed over the secret gutters ; as also to the rakes of roof against walls, chimney stacks, dormers, traps and skylights. Valleys are seldom mitred together. This latter paragraph is only required when secret gutters are used in a roof to all the intersections and rakes. Filleting. (io) Eun cement filleting as flashings to back additions small roofs. (See Bricklayer, clause No. 92.) Filleting is only used in inferior roofing in lieu of lead flashings. But with flashings against stone walling which is too hard to cut, and having no bed such as in random rubble walling, as mentioned in Mason, notes preceding clause No. 104, then cement filleting becomes essential. Verges. (H) Bed and point verges in cement. (15) SLATER 387 Open slating. (12) Cover the temporary sheds with Bangor Coun- tess open slating, with joints 2 in. apart. Each slate to be fixed with two 1J in. composite nails, and laid to a 2J in. lap on 2 J in. X J in. fir battens spiked to rafters. Open slating consists in laying the vertical joints about 2 in. apart, but is only used in very inferior or temporary work. The hips, ridges, valleys, verges and filleting would follow as in ordinary slating ; see clauses Nos. 9 to 11. Vertical slating. (13) Slate the south- west side of house with similar slating as described to roofs, but bedded in mortar (or cement) and tacked on to 2 J in. x Jin. fir battens plugged to walls. There is to be no felt or boarding. This class of slating is used in exposed situations on vertical walling where subject to much wet. Prevention against (14) Lay a double course of Bangor Countess slating, damp walls. j n neat p or ti an( | cement, against the basement walls of building where the ground abuts. The brickwork to be roughly rendered over in cement and sand in equal proportions in the first place. Also see Plasterer, clause No. 64. If asphalt be used, see Bricklayer,, clause No. 43. SLATE MASON. (Clauses Nos. 15 to 22.) A cubic foot of slate weighs from 157 to 180 Ibs. Slate 1 in. thick is equal in strength to Portland stone 5 in. thick. Wine cellar. (15) Put round three sides of wine cellar two tiers of 1 in. sawn Bangor slate slabs 2 ft. wide, with sawn edges and butt jointed, and bedded on half-brick division walls built in cement every 5 ft. apart, slate slabs into walls. Pin edges of See clause No. 301 in Carpenter, for decanting bench. Iron wine bins are frequently used in lieu of slate shelving, for which a p.a sum may be allowed. Messrs. King and Smith's patent -terracotta " honey comb" wine bins are very good. 2 c 2 388 SLATER. (1G) larder (butter, milk and pastry). (16) Put round three sides of larder three tiers of 1 in. rubbed (or sawn) Bangor slate slabs, with sawn back edge, rounded front edge and corners, and joints rebated together in oil cement, and bedded on white glazed double bull-nosed one brick thick division walls, built in cement every 5 ft. apart. The slabs to be kept 1 in. clear of the walls for ventilation. See Carpenter, clause No. 153, for fly netting and louvres to windows, and Carpenter, clause No. 298 for meat hangers. For ice chamber or cold store, see Carpenter, clause No. 335. Frequently the first shelf only is of slate, the remainder being in wood ; see Carpenter, clause No. 297. For meat and game larder, see Carpenter, clause No. 298. Slate slabs may be bedded on to cut and shaped slate bearers, about 2 in. wide X 3 J in. deep, pinned into walls every 3 ft. apart in cement, or they may be fixed upon iron brackets pinned into walls. The front edges may be rubbed square or slightly bevelled off, and the jointing of the slabs may be grooved and tongued together with 1 in. x -J in. copper tongues in oil cement. The back edges are sometimes pinned into the walls, and in this case slate skirting may be fixed round the walls on the lower shelf as a protection for the plaster. The description would run : The first tier of shelving to have a 6 in. x f in. sawn (or rubbed) Bangor slate skirting against walls, drilled and screwed with brass (or copper) screws, countersunk and plugged to walls, and bedded in oil cement. (17) Put 1 in. white enamelled Bangor slate slab sides and back to urinal, 5 ft. high by 2 ft. deep, with rounded edges, quadrant-shaped corners at top, rebated and jointed together with red lead (or oil) cement, cut into the plaster and flooring, and screwed to plugs in wall with in. copper (or brass) screws, countersunk. See Plumber, clause No. 56, for the urinal basin. Form floor in white glazed brickwork in cement, with a fall of 3 in. to the back to a small slate channel, falling both ways to the gully. Urinal slabs are enamelled to represent marble of many kinds. The floor may be formed on a 4 in. concrete ' bed, rendered over with (22) SLATER. 389 cement and sand 1 in. thick, and finished in -| in. neat cement a trowelled face. For a rano-e of urinals, see Plumber, clause No. 56. (18) A p.c. amount is generally allowed for these, and they are usually enamelled. For other chimney pieces, see Mason, clauses Nos. 53 and 124 ; Car- penter, clause No. 215 ; and Smith, clause No. 74. (19) To be 3 ft. x 4ft. X 2 ft. 6 in. deep (or other size), and formed with 1 in. (to 2 in.) planed one side Bangor slate slabs, grooved at angles and bottom, and put together with red lead cement, and four J in. (to 1 in.) galvanised iron rods, nuts and washers. Drill the holes for the rods and pipe connections. Slate chimney pieces. siata cisterns. P/an Slate cisterns are very sanitary. Slate lavatory top. (20) To be 1 in. rubbed one side Bangor slate slab, rounded on front edge, with holes cut for elliptical (or circular) basins with a thumb moulded rim rebated on the under side ; and fixed on 2 in. X 3J in. cut and shaped slate bearers every 3 ft. apart pinned into walls. Eun a 6 in. x J in. rubbed slate skirting round three sides, with quadrant-shaped corners, and let into a rebate in the lavatory top, and at the angles in red lead (or oil) cement, and fixed with \ in. brass (or copper) screws, drilled, countersunk and plugged into walls. Form slightly dished circular (or elliptical) shaped soap sinkings. The bearers may be galvanised iron brackets. For marble lavatory top, see Plumber, clause No. 36 and notes. Plan Slate sinks. (21) To be in 1 in. slate 4 ft. X 2 ft. X 6 in. (to 4 in.) deep (or other size) square (or rounded) on top edges, .planed (or rubbed) on inside, sawn on outside, grooved together in red lead cement, and secured at the ends with two ^ in. (or -J- in.) galvanised iron rods and nuts ; and perforated for waste pipe. For sleeper walls, see Bricklayer, clause No. 32. For other kinds of sinks, see Bricklayer, clause No. 91 ; Mason, clauses Nos. 55 and 97; Plumber, clause No. 33; and Carpenter, clause No. 288. Slate creasing and weathering. (22) See Mason, clause No. 50; and Bricklayer, clause No. 116. 390 (0 TILEE. PLAIN TILES. (Clauses Nos. 1 to 10.) Ilain tiles. (1) The plain tiles to be whole, even in thickness, square, fairly straight, and free from cracks and blemishes. Eaves and verges. p u t all half tiles ; with tile and half tiles at verges, and double course at eaves. Labours. Perform all cutting, halving and labours. Leave water-tight. Leave tiling water-tight at completion of buildings. Clean out gutters and stack-pipes. Chan gutters and pipes. Pitch. The pitch to be 45 or height of roof J of span (This is the least pitch desirable.) The pitch may be from 30 to almost any greater angle. Boof tiling. (2) Cover main roof and outbuildings in Broseley plain tiles with cogs cast on ; laid to a 3 J in. gauge, bedded in hydraulic lime and hair mortar (or cement) none of which is to appear on the outside ; but bed the eaves in cement. The horizontal and vertical joints to range perfectly straight, and be cut and dressed to the ridges, hips, gables, valleys and verges. Each course to be laid iiat on a previous course and properly bonded in every part, and hung to ! in. x 1 in. (or 1 \ in. x Jin.) sawn red fir horizontal laths, spiked to 2J in. x in. (or 1 in.) fir battens running from eaves to ridge, spaced 12 in. apart, spiked through the felt to the boarding beneath. Glass tiles. Allow for (say) 20 glass tiles, in Hartley's J- in. ribbed plate, screwed to the laths, and with holes cut through the boarding to allow the light to penetrate. Also see Glazier, notes to clause No. 3. An explanation of this second course of battens is given in Slater (5) TILER. 391 under clause No. 6. Double fir or oak laths 1J in. X in. may be used, and the tiles would then be fixed with tenter hooks, as nails would split the laths. Tiles without cogs are hung to the laths either with oak pins or 2 J in. round galvanised iron nail pins. In addition to being hung with cogs the tiles may be nailed to the battens with copper or iron nails, either entirely or only at every fourth course. Tiles may be bedded dry without mortar or bedded dry on straw. If the tiles are nailed or hung to the laths, but without boarding under, then the tiling may be rendered on the under side between the laths in hydraulic lime and hair mortar ; or the tiling may be " torched " in hydraulic lime and hair mortar on the under side, that is pointing the horizontal joints up only. The gauge may also be 3^ in. or 4 in., but not more. Plain tiles are usually made 10 in. x 6 in. x J in. and 10j in. x 6^ in. X f in., and either square or ornamental shaped. State if there be any ornamental courses, the distance apart, and the number of courses wide ; such as " three ornamental courses and four plain courses alternately." Tiles may be had in different colours, as brindled, straw, brown and other shades ; the brindled stand the weather best. The best tiles are made at Broseley, but there are many other local makings. Plain tiling may be used as a roof covering to all good buildings, houses or cottages. Tiling requires one-third stronger timbers than slating. Tiles absorb much moisture, and may be dipped in boiled oil as a preventive. Cheeks to dormers. (3) Cover cheeks of dormers with tiling, laths, battens and felt similar to the main roofs. Hips, ridges and (4) The hips, ridges and valleys to be in round Broseley tiles, bedded and jointed in cement, with junction tiles to hips and ridges. The hip and valley tiles to be nailed with 3 in. nails. Hips and ridges may be finished in plain round roll tile ridging with wings, or with ornamental ridge tile cresting, and jointed together with oak dowels and bedded in cement. Ornamental finials are used either in tile ware, lead or ironwork. Allow a p.c. sum for each finial, such as from 15s. to 25s. Valleys are often formed in lead, and sometimes in zinc ; the hips and ridges may also be formed in lead, as in Plumber, clause Nb.ll. iron stays. (5) Put stay iron hooks to the end tiles of ridges, hips and valleys, and paint three oils. 39 2 TILER. (6) The ridges would only require stay iron hooks in the case of a gable end where no finial was provided. The hip and valley stay iron hooks may be in very ornamental ironwork ; in that case allow a p.c. sum. such as 10s. each. Mitred hips or (g) The hips and valleys to be cut and mitred va eys. together, and carefully dressed over the secret gutters, as also to all rakes of roofs against walls, chimney stacks, dormers, traps and skylights. See remarks to clause No. 9 under Slater, referring to secret gutters and mitred valleys. Filleting. (7) p tUn cement filleting as flashings to back additions small roofs (see Bricklayer, clause No. 92). See remarks under clause No. 10 in Slater. Verges. (8) Bed and point verges in cement. Felt. (9) See clause No. 8 under Slater. Vertical tiling. (10) Cover the upper portion of walls of house in vertical plain tiling, with angle tiles at angles, bedded and pointed in hydraulic lime and hair mortar, and nailed with copper (or galvanised iron) nails to 2 in. X 1 in. fir battens plugged to brickwork. Put double course of tiles at foot, tilted by a weather fillet over the ornamental brick (or stone) band below. State if there are to be any ornamental courses, with the number of courses ; or if the tiling be all in ornamental tiles. The battens may be fixed to vertical timbers built in the walls every 14 in. to 18 in. apart. Instead of vertical angle tiles sometimes wood beaded fillets are used, or the tiles may be cut and mitred at the angles. Vertical tiling is not always bedded and pointed in mortar, but hung dry. PANTILING. (Clauses Nos. 11 to 15.) PantUing. (H) Cover the roof with pantiles laid to a 3 in. (4 in. or 5 in.) lap, upon 1 in. x 1 in. red fir laths spiked to rafters, bedded and pointed in hydraulic lime and hair mortar. Perform all cutting and labours. (15) Pitch. TILER. 393 Leave tiling water-tight at completion. Clean out gutters and stack-pipes. The pitch to be not less than 24, or height of roof two-ninths of span. Pantiles are made about 14 in. x 9 in., with small cogs, and do not require nails. Glass tiles are made in the form of pantiles. Pantiles are chiefly used in sheds, workshops and cheap cottages, but never in good work. Boarding and felt are seldom, if ever, used with pantiling. There are other similar kinds of pantiles, such as double roll tiles and corrugated tiles. Pantile laths may be 1J- in. X 1 in. Hips, valleys and ridges. Iron stays. Filleting. verges. (12) To be simple special made concave and convex cement and nailed to the roof timbers. (13) p u t stays iron hooks to end tiles of hips, ridges and valleys, and paint three oils. (i4)_See clause Ho. 7. (i5)_See clause ]S T o. 2. OF THE UNIVERSITY I 394 (I) STONE TILEK. stone tile (1) Cover the main roofs and outbuildings with roofing. Tetbury " (or other locality) stone tiles, first quality, laid to a 3J in. lap at 39 pitch in diminished courses from eaves to ridges, with a double course at eaves, and cut and dressed to hips, valleys and verges, and pro- perly bonded in every part, and shouldered up in lime and hair mortar. Each tile to be fixed with one oak peg on to 1^ in. X J in. sawn oak laths spiked to rafters. The valleys to be formed with the stone tiles worked round to an easy angle. Bed and point verges in cement. Perform all cuttings and labours. Leave roofs water-tight. Stone tiles as a roof covering are much used in the Stroud Valley, and other places where stone tiles are cheaper than slate. Instead of shoul- dering the stone tiles in mortar, the laths may be rendered between the rafters from the under side, and perhaps this is the better way. The ridges, hips and valleys may either be in lead (see Plumber, clause No. 11), or else in tiles (see Tiler, clause No. 4) ; but the stone hip and ridge tiles are more in keeping with the rest of the roof. The hips and valleys are never mitred, as with slates and tiles. Boarding or felt is never used, but they may be so long that the laths are kept clear of the boarding for the oak pegs to rest upon, by raising the laths sufficiently above the boarding, with 2 J in. X 1 in. battens every 12 in. apart, running from the ridges to the eaves. The roof timbers must be strong, as stone tiles are heavy, say one- half stronger than that required for slates. Pitch. (2) The pitch to be 39, or height of roof two- sevenths of span. (This is a least pitch.) Hips and ridges. (3) The hips and ridges to be formed out of solid sawn stone, 8 in. wide on each splay, in lengths of not less than 3 ft., bedded and jointed in cement, with solid cut hip and ridge junction pieces, and strong wrought- iron stays painted three oils to the lowest hip stones. Cheeks. ^4) j^ a y s i m ilar stone tiles and laths to cheeks of dormers. (5) Clean out gutters and stack-pipes. Glass tiles. (6) See Slater, clause No. 7. (2) 395 Oak shingles. SHINGLEE. (1) Cover the turret with in. split oak shingles 6 in. wide by 12 in. (to 18 in.) long, laid to a 4 in. (or 5 in.) lap at 60 pitch, with double course at eaves, and nailed with copper nails to the boarding beneath. The hips (and ridges) to be formed and cut out of solid oak in long lengths 6 in. (or 8 in.) wide on each splay, and screwed on with copper (or brass) screws (and finished with solid cut oak hip and ridge junction pieces). Shingles may be in cedar or larch. Battens are not required. The hips may be cut to a mitre, and in fact they make the neater work ; bub a lead secret gutter should be taken; see Plumber, clause No. 11. Shingles should not be laid to a lesser pitch than 45, and are bonded together in a very similar manner to slates. Finial. (2) Describe an oak or lead apex-piece, with a finial or vane on top. 396 (1) THATCHEE. Thatching. (l) The roof and dormers to be covered with wheaten straw 15 in. thick, laid to a pitch of 45, in short bundles, the straw ends only showing ; and the thatch- ing carefully formed round the hips, ridges, valleys and chimney stacks and sewed on with tarred line to ! in. X $ in. sawn oak laths 8 in. apart, spiked to rafters. The eaves and gable ends to be neatly clipped off and dressed up. Pitch. The two (or one) " runners " (bands) along the eaves to be formed with twined straw spiked to the thatch covering with hazel spikes, the ends of spikes being left showing. The ornamental bands to the ridges to be formed in a similar manner, but interlaced. (2) The pitch to be 45, or height of roof to be one half span. (This is a least pitch.) Thatch is laid from 12 in. to 16 in. thick, and may also be formed with reeds when they are to be obtained ; rye or oaten straw ; and in inferior work even with heather. Fir laths may be used ; or in cheaper work rough ash or hazel " hether- ings" spaced up to 12 in. apart. The bands or " runners " are also formed with ash or hazel " hether- ings," split in half and fixed with buckles (a kind of wooden hairpin). The roof should be ceiled underneath with plaster. Thatch is used chiefly in small cottages, lodges, barns and farm buildings, but is found in some of the better class of old houses. Being a non-conductor, it is specially suitable for dairies. Chimney stacks should be kept well above the roofs. Wheat and hay stacks are covered with thatch in an inferior and temporary manner. (2) 397 PLUMBER. Sheet lead. Tests. (1) The sheet lead to be milled, uniform in thick- ness and texture, and free from sand cracks or other defects. In order to test the weight of the sheet lead used, the architect is to be at liberty to cut out samples from any piece of the leadwork after having been laid ; the con- tractor is to make allowance in his estimate for such tests, and is to replace such damaged work with entirely new sheets. Leave water-tight. Leave plumbing water-tight. to roofs, flats, pipes and fittings Cast lead for roofing purposes is made in sheets some 16 to 18 ft. long, by 6 ft. wide, but it is seldom now used, milled lead having taken its place. If cast lead be used, the least thickness should weigh some 6 Ib. per superficial foot. Milled lead is rolled in sheets some 25 to 35 ft. long, by 6 ft. to 7J ft. wide, averaging in weight from 1 Ib. to 12 Ibs. per superficial foot. The following are the weights of milled sheet lead used in the various positions : 4 Ib. per super, ft. in weight is suitable for safes, seatings to stone and iron columns, ends of girders, and secret gutters to roofs. 5 Ib. per super, ft. in weight is suitable for flashings, aprons, seatings to iron columns and ends of girders, lead slates, soakers, tacks, tingles, and secret gutters to roofs. 6 Ib. per super, ft. in weight is suitable for hips, ridges, valleys, flats, cisterns, lead hip slates, soakers, tacks, tingles, lead slates, flashings and aprons. 7 Ib. per super, ft. in weight is suitable for gutters, sinks, flats, hips, ridges, valleys, lead hips, slates, and cesspools to gutters. 8 Ib. per super, ft. in weight is suitable for sinks, cesspools to gutters, and gutters. In crediting old lead removed from roofs, 6 Ib. per cwt. is allowed off the net weight as " tare," that is the loss on dross. Soft water stored in lead cisterns attacks the lead and causes the water to be poisoned. Hard waters stored in lead cisterns are not prac- tically affected. Sizes of lead slates and fastenings. (2) Tacks, tingles, lead slates out of 6 Ib. (or 5 Ib.) sheet lead. and soakers to be 398 PLUMBER. (3) Dressings. (3) The dressings to be out of sheet lead of the following widths and weights, lapped together at joints, and with all tacks and tingles. Flashings 5 in. (6 in. or 7 in.) wide, out of 5 (or 6) Ib. leads. When soaker slates are not provided, the stepped flashings to be 12 in. (15 or 16 in.) wide, out of 5 (or 6) Ib. lead. When soaker slates are provided, the stepped flashings to be 7 in. (or 8 in.) wide, out of 5 (or 6) Ib. lead. Eidges and hips to be 18 in. wide, out of 6 Ib. lead. Valleys, 20 in. wide, out of 6 Ib. lead. Soakers, 12 in. wide, out of 6 Ib. lead. Aprons 15 in. (or 16 in.) wide, out of 5 (or 6 Ib.) lead. Lead hip slates 20 in. wide, out of 6 (or 7) Ib. lead. The width of aprons is governed by the depth of the timbers they have to lap. Bolls and angle tilting fillets to flats. (4) The lead covering the rolls to be bossed out at ends and intersections, and spaced at not more than 2 ft. 6 in. centres, and open copper nailed on the one side of sheets. The woodwork for lead rolls to be out of 2 in. x 2 in. (2 J- in. X 2 in., 2J in. X 2J in., 3 in. X 2 J in., or 3 in. X 3 in.) rounded deal. Angle tilting fillets to be out of 2 in. X 2 in. (or 1J in. X li in.). The wood rolls and angle fillets are also described under Carpenter, clauses Nos. 119 and 117 respectively; Zinc Worker, clauses Nos. 1, 2, and 4 ; and Coppersmith, clause No. 1. The usual size of wood rolls to flats for lead work- is 2 in. x 2 in. Hips and ridge rolls. For woodwork to rolls, see Carpenter, clause No. 83. Solder. (5) No solder to be used in flats or roofing, except where lead pipes cut through the lead work. Copper nailing. (6) Close copper nailing to be spaced 1 in. apart. Open copper nailing to be spaced 3 in. (or 4 in.) apart. (9) PLUMBER. 399 FLATS. (Clauses Nos. 7 to 10, 1 to 6 and 17 to 19.) For sketches of flats, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 113, 123a and 124. Flats. (7) Cover the flats over kitchen and billiard room (or other parts) with 6 Ib. sheet lead, laid to falls of 2 in. (1J in., 2^ in., or 3 in.), in 8 ft. (or 10 ft.) with 2 in. (or 1 J in.) drips ; properly dressed over rolls, drips, and tilting fillets, with bossed ends to rolls and inter- sections, and turned up 6 in. against walls, kerbs, and other work, with 5 Ib. lead flashings over 6 in. wide, properly passed and tacked ; and with 5 Ib. lead aprons 12 in. wide over kerbs of skylights (or trap doors), passed and tacked and open copper nailed to tops of curbs. The rolls and drips to be open copper nailed on the one side of sheets. The least pitch for lead roofing is 4. The leadwork over rolls is laid either as Drips are laid either as mOm T The angle tilting fillet between hori- zontal and vertical faces prevents the lead being so much bruised when being dressed over as when turned up verti- cally. Box gutters to (8) The gutters to be not less than 9 in. (or 12 in.) wide, and laid to falls of 3 in. (2 in., 2 in., or 1J in.) in 10 ft. in 7 Ib. lead ; with 2 in. (or 1 J in.) drips every 10 ft. apart ; the sheets to be turned up 6 in. against walls, and open copper nailed on the one side to the flats, and dressed, over the tilting fillets. Put 5 lead flashings, 6 in. wide, passed and tacked. For sketch of box gutters, see Carpenter, clauses ISTos. 113 and 79. The least fall to gutters should be not less than 4. The tilting fillets in the gutters enables their cleaner sweeping, in addition to the reason given in the notes under the preceding clause, No. 7. A fair width for a box gutter is 12 in., but they may be made 15 in. and 18 in. wide. Cesspools to (9) The cesspools to be bossed out of 7 Ib. (or 8 Ib.) gutters. j ea( ^ an( j ma( j e not } ess t h an 9 i n< x 9 in. x 6 in. in the clear, and close copper nailed on the upper edges. Con- 400 PLUMBER. (10) nect to the cesspools short lengths of 4 in. diam., 8 Ib. to the foot lead pipe, and carry through walls, and discharge over rain-water heads. or, Instead of lead pipes boss the cesspools out with an apron shoot, discharging through the walls over the rain-water heads. For sketch of cesspool, see Carpenter, clause No. 78. If the gutter be wider than 9 in. the cesspool would be correspondingly large. Boses to outlets. (io) Put over the cesspool outlets strong hemi- spherical copper (or galvanised iron) wire (or perforated lead) roses with thick wire lugs. Sometimes a strong copper or galvanised iron wire grating is placed over the entire area of the cesspool. DRESSINGS TO SLATED OR TILED Boors. (Clauses Nos. 11 to 13, 1 to 6, and 16 to 19.) For sketch plan of roof see Carpenter, clause No. 75 ; and for sketches of hips, ridges, and valleys, see Carpenter, clause Nos. 83 and 81. Hips, ridges and (n) Form the hips and ridges 18 in. wide, and valle y s 20 in - wide > in 6 lb - sheet lead > Properly lapped, passed, and secured with lead clips and copper nails ; the hips and ridges to be bossed out at intersections, and the valleys worked over tilting fillets. Put 6 lb. lead soaker slates 12 in. wide to all rakes of roof where abutting against walls, chimney stacks, dormers, traps or skylights, with 5 lb. lead stepped flashings 7 in. wide. The horizontal flashings to be 6 in. wide, out of 5 lb. lead, passed and tacked. State if ridges be cut to ornamental shapes, and in that case they may be out of any width of lead according to the design. State if the lead be dressed over deal h'nials. In slated or tiled roofs having mitred hips and valleys, a secret gutter must be specified, as no leadwork shows at the intersections of the roof planes ; the description would run: Secret gutters. Form secret gutters under the mitred hips and valleys, out of 5 lb. (or 4 lb.) lead 8 in. wide, and open copper nailed on both edges. The secret gutters to the rakes of roof against chimney stacks, dormers, skylights, and traps, to be laid in a similar manner, but out of lead 12 in. wide, with 5 lb. lead stepped flashings 7 in. wide over. For sketches of secret gutters, see Carpenter, clause No. 80. Secret gutters along the rakes of roofs do not require lead soaker slates. Soaker slates may be put under mitred hips and valleys instead of secret gutters. (14) PLUMBER. 4OI Slated roofs, with roughly mitred hips, may be formed without secret gutters, provided that the hips be covered with lead hip slates, cut to match the courses of the slates, and secured with copper nails. This form of hip looks very effectual, especially if the slates match somewhat the colour of lead work. Valleys are seldom formed with secret gutters. Gutters to tiled or slated roofs. . (12) The gutters to be in no part less than 6 in. wide, and laid to falls of 3 in. (1 J in., 2 in., or 2J- in.) in 10 feet in 7 Ib. lead, with 2 in. (or 1J in.) drips every 10 feet apart, and turned up 9 in. (or 12 in.) under slating and 6 in. against walls and dressed over the tilting fillets, and with 5 Ib. lead flashings over, 6 in. wide, passed and tacked. Put similar gutters and plain and stepped flashings to chimney stacks, skylights, dormers and traps. For sketch plans of roof and wall cutters, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 75 and 77. The least fall to lead gutters should not be less than 4. Cesspools. See clause No. 9. Roses, Lead-covered dormers, See clause No. 10. (13) Cover the flat on top of dormers with 6 Ib. lead, lapped over at ends and bossed and dressed over 2 in. x 2 in. deal rounded rolls ; with 5 Ib. lead cheeks, secured with brass screws and soldered dots, and with neatly welted ends on the front edges, close copper nailed. Put 5 Ib. lead soaker slates 12 in. wide to rakes with roof, and 5 Ib. lead aprons dressed over kerbs and open copper nailed. For sketch of dormer, see Carpenter, clause No. 94. Slated (or tiled) p u t to the slated (or tiled) dormers a 6 Ib. lead soaker dormers. where the ridge meets the roof plane. The ridges, valley, hips, flashings, soaker slates, and aprons to this latter class of dormer would be the same as to an ordinary slated (or tiled) roof; see clause No. 11. Lean-to roofs (clauses Ncs. 14, 1 to 6, and 17 to 19). (14) Cover the " lean-to " roof with 6 Ib. sheet lead turned up 6 in. against wall, and properly bossed over rolls, and open copper nailed on the one edge, and dressed over the tilting fillets, eaves and verges. Solder to the leadwork of each bay formed by the rolls a 6 Ib. 9 in. x6 in. lead tack, \tedged in at the wall end. Put 5 Ib. lead flashing 6 in. wide, passed and tacked. The horizontal jointings of the sheets to be formed 2 D 402 PLUMBER. (15) with a welted joint secured with clips copper nailed to the boarding. Tor sketches of welted joints, see Zincworker, notes to clause No. 2, or Coppersmith, clause No. 1. When lead is laid to a sharp pitch it is liable to "creep " down. If a hipped double span roof be entirely covered in lead, the descrip- tion would be similar to the above clause, with the addition of the ordinary ridging and hips out of lead about 18 in. wide, bossed out over the rolls. Drips are not required either to a lean-to or double span roof if the pitch be steep, say from about 20 upwards. Lead-covered roofs and domes (clauses Nos. 15, 1 to 6, 16, 18 and 19). (15) Cover dome with 6 Ib. sheet lead, dressed over rolls, and open copper nailed on the one side, and with welted joints to the horizontal joints of sheets. Dress the finial over in 7 Ib. lead. Form the gutter at base of dome in 7 Ib. lead. Finials and vanes. (16) Boss the lead out solid over bases of finials and vanes with 6 Ib. lead cut to ornamental shape. Eake, wedge and (17) Bake out joints of brickwork, wedge with lead point. (deal or oak) wedging, and point in cement to flashings. Also see Bricklayer, clause No. 24. Lead rain-water pipes. (18) Form the rain-water pipes out of 7 (6, 8, or 10) Ib. per foot drawn lead, 3 J in. diameter, with astragal joints, loose bands, ears and rose-headed nails ; and with ornamental cast lead rain-water heads, p.c. (say) 2 10s. each. Lead rain-water pipes are made 3J in., 4 in., 4J in., 5 in., 5J in. and 6 in. diameters in drawn lead, or they may be made square of any size of the same weights of sheet lead, seamed up at the joints, or else in lengths of cast lead of similar sizes. Clean gutters and pipes. (19) Clean out all gutters and stack-pipes. Beatings to cast- (20) Put 5 Ib. (or 4 Ib.) lead seatings under the iron columns and iron co i umnSj an( j un der ends of joists where bedded in walls. * Beatings to stone columns. Put 4 Ib. lead seatings to the joints of stone and granite columns, kept J in. back from the face all round. (21) PLUMBER. 403 COLD AND HOT WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY WORK. (Clauses Nos. 21 to 65.) When this branch of plumbing work relates to an old building, clause No. 29 under Drainage may be inserted here. An allowance of from 16 to 20 gallons of water per head per day should be allowed in non-manufacturing towns, and 20 to 30 gallons per head per day in manufacturing towns. A horse requires 16 gallons of water per day. For a two- wheeled carriage 9 gallons per day is required. For a four-wheeled carriage 16 gallons per day is required. A cow requires 12 gallons per day. The average rainfall in various places is from 20 in. to 70 in. per annum, or a mean may be taken at from 31 in. to 42 in. per annum, see notes to clause No. 53 under Drainage; and the average available rainfall for storage may be taken at about three-fifths of the rainfall. Sea water weighs 64*11 Ibs. per cubic ft. Distilled water weighs 62*425 Ibs. per cubic ft. Water may be taken as weighing approximately 10 Ibs. per gallon. There are 6J gallons approximately to a cubic ft. of water. A pipe 4 in. diameter, 3 ft. long, holds 16 gallons of water. Galvanised iron cisterns are usually made in three qualities : The ordinary strong quality. ^ in. plate bare. J in. plate full. And of the following capacities and sizes . No. of Gallons. Length in feet. Width in feet. Depth in feet. 20 2-0 1*4 1*3 25 2*0 1-5 1-5 30 2-0 1-6 1-7 40 2-3 1-8 1-8 50 2-5 1-10 1-10 60 2-6 I'll 1-11 70 2-8 2-2 2-0 80 2-10 2*3 2-0 90 3*0 2-3 2-2 100 3-2 2-3 2-3 125 3-4 2*7 2 4 150 3*6 2-7 2-8 200 3*10 2-11 2-11 250 4-2 3-3 3-0 300 4-6 3-7 3-0 500 6-0 4*0 3-4 1000 8*0 5*0 4*0 2 D 2 404 PLUMBER. (21) Other sizes niay be had to order. They may also be had in ^ in. plate full. In theory a pump will draw water up a suction pipe for a depth of 34 ft. In practice 25 ft. is considered the greatest working depth, but 15 ft. as a working depth gives very satisfactory results. When water has to be drawn up from a greater depth, special gearing has to be used. Also see notes to clause No. 57. The reason that water can only be drawn up from a depth of 34 ft. is that the pressure of the atmosphere balances a column of water of that depth. Eoughly speaking, the pressure of a column of water is lb. (actually a little under) per foot in height per square inch. The pressure of the atmosphere is about 15 Ibs. per square inch. Liquids may be syphoned out from a higher tank into a lower tank by placing one end of the syphon (merely a bent tube) into the liquid of the higher tank, and either exhausting the air out of the syphon or else filling the syphon with water, when the pressure of the atmosphere on the liquid in the higher tank will force it up through the syphon into the lower tank. The pressure of the atmosphere will be sufficient to force water through a syphon, provided that the height of the rise of the syphon above the water be not greater than 33 ft. Water supply, (21) The water supply to be in accordance with the water company's printed regulations, and executed to the satisfaction of their inspector. Give the company notice and pay their fees. Soldered joints. (22) Soldered joints to be wiped. Lead pipes, (23) Lead pipes to be drawn, the sizes mentioned being their internal bore. All lead service pipes where not buried in the ground, to be bound round with dry hair felt and canvas, and kept on the face of the work, and 2 ft. away from hot water pipes. See Carpenter, clause No. 41, for casing to pipes. Dry hair felt is used for packing round cisterns, encasing pipes, and against partitions. For thicknesses and weight of dry hair felt, see Carpenter, notes to clause No. 137. Dry hair felt is apt to harbour vermin. (23) PLUMBER. 405 Service pipes. Service pipes to be known as " strong." Pipes -J in. bore to weigh about 6 Ibs. per yard run. | in. 9 Ibs. 1 in. 12 Ibs. li in. ,. 16 Ibs. li in. 18 Ibs. 2 in. 24 Ibs. When lead pipes are not protected with felt and canvas, then specify " all lead pipes exposed to view to be painted four times in oil colour, and decorated to match the other work " ; see Painter, clause No. 49. The weight of service pipes is governed either by the weight or " head " of water from the cistern above, or by the pressures on the various water companies' mains. The weights given are suitable up to " heads " of 300 ft. Service pipes may be in iron, either " black " or "galvanised," and would be described similar as under clause No. 63. When iron pipes are used, it is a good plan to join them together with union sockets, in order that any separate length may be easily removed. When iron pipes are used to convey rain water, the jointing should be made with whiting mixed with boiled oil and varnish, instead of the usual red lead cement. Waste and overflow pipes. All waste middle." and overflow pipes to be known as Pipes f in. bore to weigh about 5 Ibs. per yard run. 1 in. 7 Ibs. li in. 9 Ibs. liin. lO.lbs. 2 in. 12 Ibs. Ventilating pipes. All ventilating pipes to be known as "light." Pipes 1 in. bore to weigh about 4 Ibs. per yard run. li in. ,, 6 Ibs. li in. 7 Ibs. 2 in. 9 Ibs. Pipes in ground. pi pes bedded in the ground to be encased in 1 in. tarred rough deal troughs filled with liquid pitch (or asphalt). Also see Carpenter, clause No. 40. Haines' lead encased block tin pipes are lead pipes with an inner casing of block tin, so as to do away with the liability of lead poisoning. They are much stronger than ordinary lead pipes and are made in the same sizes. 406 PLUMBER. (24) Tacks and wall hooks for pipes. Soil pipes generally. Ba.it.oL Joint Pipes 1 in. bore and over to have lead tacks out of 6 Ib. sheet lead, soldered on for fixing. Pipes under 1 J in. bore to be fastened with wrought-iron wall hooks. Lead soil pipes to be drawn out of 8 (or 10) Ib. per foot lead, 3J in. (or 4 in.) diameter, with astragal band joints, ears and rose-headed nails ; (or wiped soldered joints with 6 Ib. lead tacks and rose-headed nails). No knees or square junctions to be used, but all bends and Y-branches to be worked to easy sweeps. Put at the foot of all lead soil pipes a 3 in. (or 4 in.) brass screw cap and socket for inspection, and brass foot piece for support. All vertical soil pipes to be tested by first soldering a piece of lead over the top of the closet traps before the apparatus is fixed, and then filling the whole height of soil pipe with a column of water. Lead soil pipes are made in 6 Ib., 7 Ib., 8 Ib. and 10 Ib. per foot lead, in 3 J in., 4 in., 4^ in., 5 in., 5J in. and 6 in. diameters. -Astragal band jointed pipes make the neatest work, but are more expensive than wiped soldered joints. Seamed lead pipes should never be allowed. Wall hooks. (24) Wall hooks 5 in. long to weigh 7 to the Ib. 5 7 4 )> )> Traps. (25) Traps to be of "strong" cast lead ; those with screw caps must have them burned in. Brasswork. (26) Plumbers' brasswork to be of the best quality, well finished. Cocks. All labour and materials. Rising main. Bib cocks and draw taps to be best screw-down kind, with stuffing box and loose leather-faced valves. (27) Provide all soldered joints, stopped ends, bends, lead-headed nails, wall hooks, soldered dots, lead slates, tacks and tingles. (28) Dig up ground in road and pavement, and connect to company's main with f in. (J in. or 1 in.) screw ferrule and union ; carry on 3 in. (or other size) lead pipe to building as rising main, and encase where in ground! in an 1 in. tarred rough deal gutter trough laid 2 ft. 6 in. deep and filled with pitch ; fill in the ground and leave the road and pavement in good con- dition, and cart away the surplus earth. Carry the f in. (or other size) rising main up to the three (one or more) cisterns in roof, and terminate to each with a f in. (or other size) Tylor's patent high-pressure equi- (28) PLUMBER. 407 librium ball valve with copper ball and stem, and bracket support under. Put in convenient position in lobby a |- in. (or other size) gun-metal stop cock with spanner, and lix over an enamelled iron label with " Eising Main Stop Cock " printed on. The water company regulates the size of the tapping of their mains for the rising main to cisterns; in many cases J in. pipe only being allowed. 408 PLUMBER. (29) The stop cock on the rising main is often put outside the house ; in that case the description would be : Put f in. (or other size) square-headed, screw-down stop cock, with stuffing box and loose leather-faced valve, protected by a cast-iron cover and guard box let into the ground in concrete. Draw-off from Take J in. lead pipe draw-off direct from rising main, and finish over scullery sink with bib cock, p.c. Ss. mam. This draw-off will allow water to be drawn from the company's mains should the drinking-water cistern be under repair. Water meter. (29) Provide and fix on a shelf in suitable position a patent water meter, p.c. (say) 9, with an enamelled iron tablet over labelled " Water Meter." Water meters are generally used when the consumption of water is very great, such as in public baths and laundries. A water meter to a in. pipe is worth about 7 ; to an 1J in. pipe about 18. A water meter for a | in. bore pipe is capable of measuring 500 gals, per hour. A water meter for a J in. bore pipe is capable of measuring 750 gals, per hour. A water meter for a f in. bore pipe is capable of measuring 1200 gals, per hour, A water meter for a 1 in. bore pipe is capable of measuring 2200 gals. per hour. A water meter for a 1 J in. bore pipe is capable of measuring 4000 gals. per hour. For storage cistern and supplies to w.c.'s, slop sinks and urinals, see clauses Nos. 49 to 52 and 54 to 56. Drinking water, and any position from which water may be liable to be drawn off and used either for drinking or washing purposes, should bo drawn from a separate cistern entirely from that supplying the w.c.'s DRINKING-WATER CISTERN AND SUPPLIES TO THE VARIOUS FITTINGS. (Clauses Nos. 30 to 46 and 48.) See sketch under clause No. 28. Drinking-water (30) Fix in roof in position shown, on 11 in. X 3 in. rough fir bearers, a 300 (more or less) gallon J in. plate full (or bare) close riveted galvanised wrought-ircn cistern, with strong angle stays. Cover cistern over on the outside with thick brown paper glued on, and encase cistern with 1 in. wrought, matched and beaded board- ing, with a 2 in. space between, and fill in with silicate cotton (or hair felt). Form a double-cased rebated man- on 4 in. butts (or 18 in. cross (30) PLUMBER. 409 garnetts hinges). The top of cistern will have two thicknesses of boarding forming the casing for the silicate cotton. Overflow. Tap cistern 3 in. down and connect with brass union, and take 2 in. lead overflow pipe through roof, soldered to a 6 Ib. lead slate, and terminate with a copper (or brass) flap. Or the overflow may be thus : Tap cistern and connect with brass union, and take 2 in. to 4 in. trumpet mouth overflow with brass plug, and carry down 2 in. pipe and discharge over a hopper head outside wall, terminated with a copper (or brass) flap. It is very customary now to do away with large storage cisterns in private houses, and in fact in some cases cisterns are done away with altogether and the draw-offs taken direct from the rising main, owing to the water company keeping on a constant supply ; but in case the water company cuts off the water for repairs, it might make matters very inconvenient should there be no storage supply available. Overflow pipes should never discharge over sinks or like positions, owing to the danger of bad gas finding its way up the pipes. Brown paper protects a cistern from the effect of cold. Silicate cotton will be found more durable than hair felt as a padding to cisterns, hair felt being liable to frarbour vermin. Safe - Form a tray (safe) under cistern in 4 Ib. lead, 3 in. wider all round than cistern casing, and open copper nailed to a 3 in. X 2 in. splayed angle fillet on an 1 in. rough boarded bottom. Solder in to tray an 1J in. dribble pipe carried through roof and soldered to a 6 Ib. lead slate, and finished with a brass (or copper) flap. Tap cistern and connect with brass union, and take an 1^ in. lead cleaning-out pipe kept as flush with bottom of cistern as possible, and carry through roof and solder to a 6 Ib. lead slate, and terminate with a brass (or copper) flap. Put to this pipe a full-way 1J in. stop-cock close under or near cistern, with an enamelled iron tablet labelled " Stop cock to cleaning- out pipe." A trumpet-mouth overflow pipe to a cistern also serves as a cleaning- out pipe; the trumpet-mouth pipe, being movable, simply requires Cleaning-out pipe. 410 PLUMBER. (30) pulling up for the cistern to empty ; but the rush of water may be very great if it be pulled entirely out at once. In cases where there is insufficient height or space to get in a large cistern, two or more smaller cisterns may be substi- tuted. The description would remain exactly similar as the preceding paragraphs for the cisterns, the supply, wastes, safe and casing ; the only additional item required is the connecting pipes between the tanks, which would be described as : Connect the three cisterns in roof together with 1 in. (1^ in. or 1 J in.) galvanised iron pipe, nuts and washers, kept up 1 J in. from the bottom of cisterns. The size of these connecting pipes is regulated by the combined sizes of the main supply pipes drawing off these cisterns. For lead-lined cisterns see clause No. 61. Main service pipe Tap cistern and connect with 1 in. brass union and washer, kept 1J in. above bottom, and carry down 1 in. lead service pipe to lowest draw-off. Put an 1 in. screw-down brass (or gun-metal) stop cock fixed just below or near cistern, with an enamelled iron tablet labelled " Stop Cock to Main Supply." This pipe is kept up in the cistern to prevent sediment being drawn down from the bottom of the cistern. Branch off from this 1 in. main : J in. separate lead supply over slop sink. 3 in. ,, to lavatory. 1 in. to copper. J in. to housemaid's sink. ^ in. to each butler's sink. J in. to each scullery sink. j- in. to dispensary sink. J in. to each washing trough. j in. to draw-off in area. J in. to draw-off on landing. J in. to cook's hand lavatory in kitchen, and terminate each of these positions with in. gun-metal screw-down bib cock, p.c. 10s. each, and 1 in. similar cock to copper supply. A cook's hand lavatory in a kitchen is useful in a large establishment. Flushing tank Branch off J in. lead pipe to supply flushing tank supply. ( j ra i ns w jth s top cock (see Drainage, clause No. 47). (30) PLUMBER. 4 11 Feed cistern to Branch off J in. lead supply for feed cistern to range, range. an( ^ connec t to range with 1 in. supply, and put a cast- iron galvanised feed cistern 10J in. x 1 ft. 3 in. X 7J in. wide, with cover, brackets and ball valve. Feed cisterns are also made 10 in. X 12 in. x 6 in. and 10 in. X 13J in. x 6J- in., either plain or galvanised. A feed cistern to a range is only required when the boiler has an open top. A feed cistern to a hot water circulating tank, as shown by the sketch and mentioned in the notes under clause No. 64, would be similar to this paragraph, except that the supply should be 1 in. Geyser supply. Branch off a J in. lead supply to each geyser, with stop cock. Supply to kitchen Tap cistern and connect with 1 in. brass union and rang % C oilS! atin& washer, and take a separate 1 in. galvanised iron supply pipe down to kitchen to feed the circulating boiler ; put an 1 in. stop cock just under (or near) cistern, labelled " Stop Cock to Kitchen Boiler Supply." For circulating cistern and supplies to hot water arrangements, see clauses Nos. 63 and 64. Care must be taken that this cock is not shut off, otherwise the boiler would not ba supplied with water and would be liable to burn through. This pipe is required for supplying cold water to the hot water circula- tion throughout the house to the baths, lavatories and sinks. It may be a } in. pipe if there be not much work to do. Bath supply. Tap cistern and connect with 1 in. brass union and washer, and take a separate 1 in. lead supply to bath with an 1 in. stop cock placed just under (or near) cistern, and labelled " Stop Cock to Bath Supply " ; and furnish with an 1 in. gun-metal screw-down bib cock, p.c. 15 a. If patent fittings to the bath be required, then this bib cock would be omitted. It is often the practice to put a p.c. amount for 'the bath and cocks. A separate supply direct from a cistern to a bath is only required when there are many other draw-offs or several baths, and in a small house it is seldom put. In some houses a cistern is provided in the basement to supply the sinks and other draw-offs in the basement ; then in this case the descrip- tion would run as clause No. 31, and the foregoing paragraphs under clause No. 30 should be modified accordingly, so as to supply only positions above the basement level. But the pipe supplying the circu- lating boiler in kitchen must in any case be taken off the higher cistern, otherwise the hot water would not rise to the level of the upper floors. 412 PLUMBER. (31) ^Separate^cistern^ (31) Branch off from the rising main a in. lead pipe to a cistern in the basement (it might be placed, if more convenient, on the ground floor), and terminate with | in. Tylor's patent high-pressure equilibrium ball valve, with copper ball and stem, fixed on a bracket support. A low-pressure ball cock may be used when a water company supply a district only at a low pressure from their mains. Then describe the following items under clause No. 30, such as the cistern itself, with its overflow, and say where it is to discharge ; the cleaning-out pipe, with stop cock, and say where it is to discharge ; and the casing, the packing and bearers to cistern. The tray and its waste will not be required if the cistern be over an area. Then take the main supply with the stop cock and the various branches to the sinks, and any other positions below the basement cistern level. The supply to the feed tank of an open boiler in the range may also be taken off this lower cistern. Housemaid's and (32) The housemaid's and butler's pantry sinks bUtl dnkr ntry are each to be lined with 8 lb - lead bottom and 7 lb - sides, with all the angles soldered, and the top edges of leadwork copper nailed ; take 1-J in. lead waste pipe, with 2J in. diameter sunk brass cobweb movable grating, brass plug, washer, and double-link brass chain, with 1J in. lead S trap and screw cap, and carry through wall to discharge over hopper head (or gully) outside. Put 1J in. overflow connected above trap, with 3 in. brass perforated grating soldered in. The top of sink should be about 3 ft. from floor. The carpenter's work to the sinks may be described here with the plumbing ; see Carpenter, clauses N"os. 286 and 287. Tinned copper is very suitable for sinks, as it is not so liable to expansion and contraction as lead. Draining boards. The draining boards and skirtings round sinks to be dressed over with 8 lb. lead, close copper nailed on all edges. The carpenter's work to the draining boards may be described here with the plumbing ; see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 286 and 287. Safes. Lay under each sink on the floor level a 6 lb. lead safe, dressed round on three sides over deal splayed fillets, and close copper nailed on four edges. (35) PLUMBER. 413 The safes under these sinks are more for cleanliness than for catching any overflow water ; and they are made in 6 To. lead owing to the wear and tear on them from articles being placed under the sinks. Scullery sinks. (33) The three sinks and draining boards in scul- lery to be lined precisely similar to the housemaid's sink (see clause No. 32), but with separate 2 in. lead wastes, traps, screw caps, plugs, chains and washers, and 1 J- in. separate overflows ; the wastes being carried to a gully outside the wall. Tor sketch see Carpenter, clause No. 288. Tinned copper may also be used in these sinks. The carpenter's work may be described here with the plumbing ; see Carpenter, clause No. 288. It is only in large establishments that these sinks are required in a scullery ; one being for washing the vegetables, another for rinsing, and the third for washing the plates and dishes. They must not be made too deep or fixed too low. In small private houses a glazed stoneware sink is mostly used, about 3 ft. 6 in. x 1 ft. 6 in. x 6 in. deep, the supplies and wastes being the same as to lead-lined sinks. For other kinds of sinks, see Bricklayer, clauses Nos. 32 and 91 ; Mason, clauses Nos. 55 and 97; and Slater, clause No. 21. Safes are never put under scullery sinks, as the flooring is usually of stone or some similar material. Draw-off sink on (34) Line sink with 8 Ib. lead bottom, turned up landing. against walls 18 in., and over small angle fillets on floor, and close copper nailed all round. Take 1J in. waste pipe, with trap, and 3 in. brass grating soldered in, and carry outside wall over copper head. See Carpenter, clause No. 290. This sink being merely under a draw-off, a trap is not absolutely neces- sary ; but a brass flap should then be taken instead, to minimise any draught. o Dispensary sink. (35) The sink, draining board and skirting to be lined with best pewter -^g- in. thick, copper nailed on edges and soldered at angles, with 1J in. waste and overflow, trap, screw cap, 2 in. brass grating, plug, washer and chain. Line the two shelves and skirting at back with similar pewter, close copper nailed. Take a lead safe to it if required, as in clause No. 32. The carpenter's work may ba described here with the plumbing ; see Carpenter, clause No. 289. 414 .PLUMBER. (35a) Washing troughs in laundry. O*Q (35a) Put two glazed stoneware washing troughs in laundry, each 3 ft. X 2 ft. X 1 ft. 3 in. deep, supported on brick bearers. Take a 2 in. lead waste pipe, 2 in. lead S trap, screw cap, with 2J in. diameter brass screw grating, plug, washer and chain from each trough to gully outside, with 2 in. overflow con- nected to trough side of trap, and 2 J in. diameter brass grating. For wood top, see Carpenter, clause No. 291. The waste pipes will keep more free if the traps be dispensed with. Stoneware troughs are also made 2 ft. 3 in. x2 ft. X 15 in., 2 ft. 3 in X 1 ft. 8 in. x 15 in., 2 ft. X 1 ft. 8 in. X 15 in. deep. The troughs may be ob- tained in galvanised iron ; or else made with 1 J in. (or 1 in.) wrought pine sides, and 2 in. (or 1 J in.) bottom, grooved and rebated together, and bolted with tv in. bolts, nuts and washers, similar to a wood bath ; see clause No. 40. Lavatory. (36) The lavatory basin to be in " Queens ware " (white china ware) 14 in. diameter (or 16 in. X 14 in. elliptical shape) secured with brass clips to an 1 in. polished Sicilian marble top, shaped and moulded on outer edges, with hole cut for basin with a thumb- moulded rim, and rebated on the under side, and with two small elliptical sinkings 6 in. x3 in. xf in. deep, dished cut for soap and nail brushes. Put a 6 in. X f in. polished Sicilian marble skirting along wall side, screwed to wall with brass screws countersunk, and rebated to lavatory top, and fix the whole on cast-iron ornamental brackets. Connect to basin an 1J in. brass union and fly nut, with 1J in. lead S trap, screw cap, and 1J in. lead waste carried through wall over a hopper head, and supply with a 1J in. diameter brass movable cobweb grating and plug, and double link brass chain. Connect 1J in. overflow pipe with 2 in. diameter brass grating to the overflow arm of basin to lavatory side of trap. Allow the p.c. sum of 10s. each for two cocks. " Queensware " is merely a form of fine porcelain or fire-clay. If it be an angle lavatory there will be two sides of skirting. Lavatories are made with the basin, top and skirting all in one piece in porcelain, when a p.c. amount may be allowed for them. The supplies and wastes being described. The cocks and fittings may be in nickel. Tip-up lavatories are unsanitary. For slate lavatory tops see Slater, clause No. 20. Enamelled cast-iron lavatories are liable to chip. (37) PLUMBER. 415 For casings' to lavatories see Carpenter, clause No. 281, but a lavatory is more sanitary without a casing. The cocks, waste and overflow fittings may be of some patent kind. Safe. A safe is not often put under a lavatory ; in case one is required the description may be as clause No. 51. Cook's hand Similar to the foregoing clause, No. 36, modified, but lavatory. without marble top. Lavatories are made in 10 in., 12 in., 13 in., 14 in. and 16 in. diameters, and 13 in. x 15 in. and 14 in. x!8 in. elliptical shapes; the 10 in. and 12 in. diameter basins are very small for adults. Height of lavatory from floor, 2 ft. 5 in. Bath. (37) Put in bath room one of Finche's (or Kufford's) best white heavily glazed fire-clay (porcelain) baths, 5 ft. 6 in. long, with circular end, and fix on wrought deal bearers. Carry 2 in. lead waste to hopper head outside wall, with brass union and enamelled porcelain grid. Form an S trap in the waste pipe, and put a 2 in. full-way brass stop valve. Take 2 in. overflow into waste pipe on the bath side of trap, with a 3 in. enamelled porcelain grid. Allow the p.c. sum of 3 for lever handles, engraved with " Hot," " Cold " and "Waste." (For bath casing, see Carpenter, clause No. 278.) The grids to the wastes and overflows may also be in brass or nickel. The trap should be made sufficiently easy to admit of sweeping with a brush ; no screw cap would then be necessary. The cheapest way of supplying a bath with water is by simply discharging the water over the top with ordinary screw-down bib cocks ; and for emptying the bath with an ordinary plug and chain instead of the stop valve. Fire-clay baths are made 5 ft., 5 ft. 6 in. and 6 ft. long, either tapered or parallel. The 5 ft. is a very useful size for women and schools. Fire- clay baths, when thoroughly warmed, retain the heat longer than any other kind of bath material, but they require more water to get them thoroughly hot in the first instance. They should always be used in public institutions. The North British Plumbing Co. make an excellent stop valve for bath wastes. Safe - Block up floor to a fall of 1J in. in 4 ft., and lay 1 in. rough boarding with angle fillets round, and small gutter formed on front edge ; dress over with 4 Ib. lead safe, open copper nailed, and take an 1 J in. dribble pipe over hopper head outside wall with brass (or copper) flap. For sketch see Carpenter, clause No. 278. For bath casing and step, see Carpenter, clause No. 278. 416 PLUMBER. (38) If the safe be formed in this way a step will most likely be required to the bath, owing to the bath being blocked tip. Frequently the lead safe is merely laid level on the flooring with a dribble pipe, but in case of an overflow this form of safe does not clean itself, owing to its having no fall. If this class of safe be required, the description would run : Lay 4 Ib. lead safe on floor against angle fillets, and open copper nailed all round ; carry 1 \ in. dribble pipe through wall over hopper head with brass (or copper) flap. Slate bath. (38) Form the bath 5 ft. 6 in. long, 1 ft. 10 in. deep, with 1 in. (or J in.) tapered rubbed Bangor slate slab sides and ends and 1J in. bottom, and rebated together in lead cement, and bolted with four J in. galvanised iron bolts, nuts, heads and washers. Then describe the waste, overflow, valve, trap, gratings, blocking up and safe, similar to clause No. 37. For wood casing see Carpenter, clause No. 278. Marble bath. (39) The description is similar to a slate bath, except that the marble would be described as polished. State the kind of marble ; 1 in. Sicilian marble is often used. Then describe the waste, overflow, valve, trap, gratings, blocking up, and safe, similar to clause No. 37. For wood casing see Carpenter, clause No. 278. Wood bath. (40) The description would be similar to a slate bath, but the material would be 1J in. wrought pine sides and ends and 1 in. bottom. Then describe the overflow, waste, valve, trap, gratings, blocking up and safe, similar to clause No. 37. For wood casing see Carpenter, clause No. 278. A sunk bath on the ground floor. (41) Put in bath room one of Finche's (or Bufford's) best white glazed fire-clay baths, 5 ft. 6 in. long, with circular end. ' The bath to be sunk 10 in. down below the floor level. Carry 2 in. lead waste pipe and union with 3J in. diameter brass cobweb movable grating (or porcelain), and discharge into gully outside wall with brass flap on end ; form S trap in waste, and put a 2 in. full- way stop valve ; take. 2 in. overflow into waste the bath side of trap, with 3 in. diameter enamelled fire- (43) PLUMBER. 417 clay grid. Block up the bath on fir bearers, and form safe round in concrete and cement to falls ; and take 1J in. dribble pipe with 2J in. brass grating and brass (or copper) flap into gully outside wall. (See Carpen- ter, clause No. 278, for wood casing.) The grating to the dribble pipe is put in as an extra precaution against insects and creeping things finding their way into the bath safe from the ground outside. A copper bath. (42) The bath to be a taper-flanged brim copper bath 5 ft. 6 in. long, enamelled inside, with circular end and dished bottom, with short lengths of copper pipes for hot and cold supplies, overflow and waste, and 3 J in. diameter copper gratings; the bath complete not to weigh less than 100 Ibs. Put 2 in. full- way screw- down valve, 2 in. lead 8 trap formed in the waste, and carry 2 in. lead pipe outside wall to discharge over a hopper head. Take 2 in. lead overflow pipe with 3 J in, diameter copper grating, and connect to waste the bath side of trap. Allow the p.c. sum of 3 for lever fittings, engraved "Hot," " Cold" and Waste." Then describe the blocking up of floor and the lead safe as in clause ISTo. 37. All metal baths require cradling to support the sides when the bath is full of water ; see Carpenter, clause No. 278. The cradling may be described here with the bath. Copper baths are made 5 ft., 5 ft. 6 in. and 6 ft. long. They require less water to keep them warm than any other form of bath. For wood casing see Carpenter, clause No. 278. An iron bath, (43) The bath to be a taper flanged brim cast-iron bath 5 ft. 6 in. long, enamelled inside best finish, with circular end and dished bottom. Put 2 in. full-way screw-down valve, with 2 in. lead S-trap formed in the waste, and 3J in. diameter screw grating and brass union ; and carry 2 in. lead waste outside wall to dis- charge over a hopper bead. Take 2 in. lead overflow with brass union and 3 J in. diameter grating, and con- nect to waste the bath side of trap. Allow the p.c. sum of 3 for lever fittings, engraved "Hot," Cold" and " Waste." Then describe the blocking up of floor, the safe and cradling, see clauses Nos. 42 and 37, and casing, see Carpenter, clause No. 278. A p.c. amount is often allowed for the bath and fittings, instead of describ- ing it in detail. Cast-iron baths are made 5 ft., 5 ft. 6 in. and 6 ft. long, and in three qualities, "japanned white or sienna," as a third quality ; and " enamelled," in " second " and " first " qualities. If no wood casing is required, cast-iron baths can be obtained in the same 2 E 41 8 PLUMBER. (44) qualities and sizes, but state there is to be a rolled brim on edge (instead of a flanged brim) and cast-iron feet, and that the bath is painted on the outside. All the fittings would remain as to other baths. For a plain wood rim, see Carpenter, clause No. 27 ( .X steel bath. ^44) Describe in exactly a similar way as to a copper bath, see clauses Nos. 42 and 37, but state that it is to be a steel bath, and either enamelled or polished. (For wood casing, see clause No. 278 under Carpenter.) Steel baths are made in the same sizes as copper ; they heat better than cast iron and nearly as well as copper. Zinc bath. (45) Describe in exactly similar a way as to a copper bath, see clauses Nos. 42 and 37, but state it is to be in extra strong zinc, with small lengths of copper pipe for hot and cold supplies, waste and overflow, and that it is japanned inside. Zinc baths are made 5 ft., 5 ft. 3 in. and 5 ft. 6 in. long, in two qualities, "ordinary" and "extra strong." They are only used in inferior work. For casing, see Carpenter, clause No. 278. Movable bath. (45) To be a copper taper bath 5 ft. 6 in. long, with circular ends, enamelled inside, rounded edges (or brim) and dished bottom, the whole to weigh not less than 90 Ibs., and supplied with a f in. copper waste pipe con- nection, with |- in. screw- down gun-metal bib cock, and the bath encased in a strong wrought-iron frame, fitted on wheels, and supplied with handles at either end and painted on the outside. These baths are used for bringing into the room of an invalid, and may be in cast-iron or steel. A p.c. amount may be allowed instead of describing them. There are other kinds of baths, such as the "Boman Bath," and the " Needle Bath," each fitted with spray, shower, douche, wave and plunge. Allow a p.c. amount, such as 15, but describe the waste and supplies. Kejapan old (47) Take down bath and fittings, scrape off old japan, clean and rejapan white and refix. This work is to be sent to and done by a proper bath japanner. 5. Geyser. (48)- Allow the p.c. sum of 6 for a Ewart's (or Maughan's) patent geyser to bath, with copper interior, lay on gas and cold-water, supplies to same and put a bracket stand for fixing', and take a gas exhaust flue out into the open. (49) PLUMBER, 419 For supplies see clause No. 30 ; and Gasfitter, clause No. 8. There are various makers of geysers. The prices range according to the quickness and amount of water required to be heated. Geysers are serviceable for obtaining a quick hot supply. Geysers are usually made to supply from 6 quarts to 1, 1J-, 2, 3, 4 and 4^ gallons of hot water at 100 Fahr. per minute, according to their size. CISTERNS AND SUPPLIES TO W.Cs., SLOP SINK AND URINALS. (Clauses Nos. 49 to 52, and 54 to 56.) See sketch under clause No. 28. Cistern and (49) Fix in roof on 11 in. x 3 in. rough fir bearers supplies to W.Cs. in position shown, a 300 gallon 1 in. plate full (or bare), close riveted, galvanised wrought-iron cistern, with strong angle stays. Line cistern on the outside with thick brown paper glued on, and encase with 1 in. wrought, matched and beaded boards with a 2 in. space between filled in with silicate cotton (or hair felt), and form a double cased rebated manhole lid in top, hinged with 4 in. wrought butts (or 18 in. cross garnett hinges). There is to be a double casing to the top of cistern. For lead-lined cisterns, see clause No. 61. Overflow. Tap cistern 3 in. down, and connect with brass union, and take* 2 in. lead overflow through roof, soldered to a 6 Ib. lead slate, and terminate with copper (or brass) flap. or the overflow may be thus, Tap cistern and connect with brass union, andi take 2 in. trumpet mouth overflow with brass plug, and carry down 2 in. pipe and discharge over a hopper head outside wall, and terminate with a copper (or brass) flap. The remarks under clause No. 30, referring to a trumpet mouth overflow, equally apply here. Safe. Form a tray (or safe) under cistern in 4 Ib. lead, 3 in. wider all round than cistern, and open copper nailed to a 3 in. x 2 in. splayed angle fillet on a 1 in. rough boarded bottom. Solder in to tray an 1J in. lead dribble pipe, carried outside roof and soldered to a 6 Ib. lead slate, and finish with brass (or copper) flap. Cleaning-out pipe. Tap cistern and connect with brass union, and take 1^ in. lead cleaning-out pipe, kept as flush with bottom of cistern as possible, and carry through roof soldered 2 E 2 420 PLUMBER. (50) to a 6 Ib. lead slate, and terminate with brass (or copper) flap. Put to this pipe a full-way 1 J in. stop cock close under (or near) cistern. For sketch, see clause No. 30. Main supplies to closets. (50) Tap cistern and connect with 1J in. brass union kept 1 in. above bottom of cistern, and carry down 1J in. lead supply, with a 1J in. stop cock just under (or near) cistern and labelled " Stop Cock to W.Cs.," and continue the 1^ in. pipe down to valve closet on top floor, continued on with 1J in. pipe to valve closet on first floor, and continued on with 1 in. pipe to valve closet on ground floor, and put a separate stop cock to each closet supply immediately next the closet valve. Branch off with separate J in. lead pipes to each water- waste preventer for slop sink, urinal, and servants' closet in basement. This 1J in. pipe is kept up above the bottom of cistern to prevent the sediment being drawn down into the close i; valves. The nearer a valve closet is fixed to a cistern, the larger will the supply to it be required, as a valve closet depends for the flush entirely upon the " head " or pressure of the water. In a wash-out or pedestal closet, with a water-waste preventer, the question of the supply pipe is quite a different matter, see clause No. 52. Valve closets and soil pipe. 6fr ,r, j/ e : ^ (51) The valve closets on the second, first and ground floors to be Hellyer's " Optimus " (or The North British Plumbing Company's) best white ware basin, copper bellows regulator, with 1J in., 1| in. and 1 in. supply unions respectively, and with a stop cock to each for shutting off the supply (previously mentioned in clause No. 50) ; take 1 \ in. vent pipe from each valve box, and carry through wall and finish with brass perforated grating; connect 3J in. anti-D lead syphon traps to a 3^ in. lead pipe arm, branched into a 3^ in. diameter drawn lead soil pipe out of 8 Ib. (or 10 Ib.) per foot, with astragal banded joints, ears and rose headed nails every 6 ft. apart (or wiped soldered joints, with 6 Ib. lead tacks and nails every 6 ft. apart) ; carry down to drain and connect with brass seating at foot, provide with a 3 in. brass screw cap for cleaning pur- poses. Carry the soil pipe up in lead the full bore and weight, and finish 4 ft. above parapet with pierced and expanded lead head and copper wire rose with lugs. A 7 Ib. or 8 Ib. lead ventilating pipe will be sufficient. (52) PLUMBEK. 421 Anti-syphon pipe. Branch from a point near top of traps of each closet, a 2J- in. anti-syphon lead arm, and connect into a 3 in. anti-syphon lead pipe carried up from ground floor trap to 3 ft. above parapet, and finished with expanded, pierced lead head and copper wire rose and lugs, and jointed with astragal bands as before (or wiped soldered joints and tacks). The old-fashioned pan closet with container is both unsanitary and out of date ; D traps should never be used, as they never clean out entirely. An S or P trap cleanses well, but owing to the force of water down a closet, it sometimes unsyphons ; an anti- D trap is then prefer- able. It is a trap having the advantages of D, P or S traps, without their disadvantages. The stop cock immediately between the supply pipe and the closet apparatus, is useful for shutting the water off when repairing the closet. There are many makers of valve closets, but either of those mentioned is considered good. Closet seats should not be fixed higher than 15 in. for adults, and for children they may be as low as 9 in. or 12 in. from the floor. To obtain this low height, the apparatus must sometimes either be sunk or else a step provided. Safes. Block up the floor to a fall of 1J in. in 4 ft., and lay 1 in. rough boarding with angle fillets round, and small gutter formed on front edge ; dress over with 4 Ib. lead safe, open .copper nailed, and take 1J in. dribble pipe with brass (or copper) flap through wall. See notes under clause No. 37, referring to safes, which would apply here. For woodwork of closets see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 282 and 283. Servants' wash-ont (52) The w.c. in basement to be Hellyer's patent Or c f e se e t s s tel hygienic glazed whiteware pedestal closet, with flushing rim and trap, p.c. 3, with white wood seat, and Purn ell's 3 gallon flush automatic syphon water- waste preventer and cover, fixed on iron brackets, with gal- vanised iron (or brass) chain and handle, and cased in with deal movable casing and felt packing ; carry an 1 in. (or f in.) overflow arm through wall, and finish with brass (or copper) flap. Take down 1 J in. (or 1J in.) lead discharge pipe, with bands and nails, to closet pan, with rubber cone bound round the connection in copper wire. Tylors make a very excellent wash-out closet called the " Column." A p.c. amount may be allowed for the water-waste preventer ; as there are many to choose from. Water- waste preventers are supplied with a ball valve in them ; they should be fixed about 7 ft. above the closet for 1J in. pipe flush, 6 ft. 422 PLUMBER. (53) for an 1^ in. pipe, and 5 ft. will do with a 2 in. pipe. This class of closet has no riser, merely a seat and flap, which are generally sold with the closet, either in white wood or mahogany. See Carpenter, clause No. 284 As this class of closet is limited in its flush to the capacity of the water- waste preventer, sometimes this is an objection. A very good plan is to form a cistern in deal, lined with lead, and holding about 6 to 10 gallons, and provided with an overflow pipe, and fed by a J in. pipe and ball cock, and then by taking the 1 in., 1 J in., or 2 in. supply pipe immediately from the bottom of the cistern to the closet, with a lift and drop valve at the outgo. By pulling the chain then some 6 to 10 gallons can be discharged at once if required. In a valve closet, so long as the handle is held up, so long will the supply of water continue to flow. The old-fashioned long hopper closets are out of date, they do not cleanse themselves ; the wash-out or pedestal closets having taken their place. Pedestal closets are made with plain and ornamental fronts. r, ii I E 7 1 Earth closets. ; (53) In positions where there is no drain an earth closet may be used. Allow a p.c. amount, such- as 7 complete. Messrs. Moule make a very good earth closet. Of course no water supply is required. The container A is filled with finely sifted dry earth or dry cinder siftings, and after using, a valve is loosed, which allows a certain amount (usually 1J- pints) to fall through the closet basin on to the soil below, which should be cleared away once every day at least. Dry earth of a loamy character is the best deodorant and disinfectant of faecal matter. Sand is of little use. The siftings should pass through a sieve having 4 meshes to the inch. The earth may be dried during the summer under cover, or else in front of a fireplace or over a drying stove. Latrines or trough closets. (54) Latrines or trough closets are used mostly in barracks, charity and Board schools, and consist of a range of two or more closet pans, all discharging along the troughs into a trap at one end. They are objection- able as they are not cleanly. They are made either in painted or galvanised cast iron, or else in stoneware ; the whole range being flushed out at one time by an automatic cistern. Messrs. Bowes, Scott and Western make a good stoneware latrine. For casing, see Carpenter, clause !N"o. 285. Slop sink. (55) The slop sink to be formed with Hellyer's patent hygienic (or Tylor's column) closet pan and slop tray top, with lead P trap and thick cast brass wire (56) PLUMBER. 423 grating at outgo. Branch with a 3 in. lead arm pipe into a 3 in. vertical galvanised heavy cast-iron soil pipe, carried from drain to 3 ft., above parapet, fixed with loose bands and rose-headed nails, and finished with a lead pierced and expanded hood and copper wire rose and lugs, and jointed with lead filings. For sketch, see Carpenter, clause No. 292. Tlush pipe to slop p u t a Purnell's 3 gallon flush automatic syphon water-waste preventer and cover, fixed on iron brackets, with galvanised iron (or brass) chain and handle, and cased in with deal movable casing and felt packing ; carry an 1 in. (or f in.) overflow arm through wall, and finish with brass (or copper) flap. Take down 1J in. (or 1 J in.) lead discharge pipe, with bands and nails, to slop sink pan, with rubber cone bound round the con- nection in copper wire. Dress round from the slop-top opening to the walls in 7 Ib. lead, bossed over angle fillets and up the wall 12 in., and copper nailed. For woodwork, see Carpenter, clause No. 292. Saf e. Describe similar to clause No. 32. * Draw-off. See clause No. 30 ; and notes under clause No. 29. A p.c. amount may be allowed for the slop sink pan, and selected afterwards. It is better to put a slop sink pipe in iron, as the hot water thrown down is liable to damage a lead pipe. There are all kinds of slop sinks made, ornamental and otherwise; but the method specified is simple and works well. The flush tank may be of the kind specified as the alternative method mentioned in the notes under clause No. 52. Valve closets are supplied with a white ware " slop top," and require the seat to be lifted to get at. There should always be a draw-off over the slop sink for cleaning purposes, which should be drawn from the drinking water cistern ; see notes under clause No. 29. An inside urinaL (56) The urinal to be a white flushing rim basin, p.c. 1, secured to wall (or slate back). Put 1 in. lead 8 trap, screw cap and waste, and connected to the lead soil pipe. Fit up a Purnell's 2-gallon flush water- waste preventer, with cover, fixed on iron brackets, with galvanised iron (or brass) chain and handle, and cased in with deal movable casing and felt packing. Carry an 1 in. (or in.) overflow outside wall and finish with brass (or copper) flap. Take 1J in. lead discharge pipe, with bands and nails, to urinal basin, secured 424 PLUMBEE. (56) with rubber cone and bound round the connection in copper wire. For sketch,"see Slater, clause No. 17. Urinals in a private house are always objectionable, unless kept very clean. The walls and floors round a urinal should be lined either in glazed brick, tiles, or enamelled slate, which may be included in this, description ; see clause No. 17 under Slater. The urinal waste may be taken into a 2 in. trap in the floor, with, movable brass grating, and from thence into the soil pipe or drain direct. In a range of urinals the distance of the divisions should not be less than 18 in. apart, 24 in. being preferable. The floor should fall sharply to the back about 3 in., with a small channel to the trap. Iron urinals are not so sanitary. Urinal wastes must not discharge into the open, as the pipes get very foul, unless the outlet is entirely away from any window or door. In a range of urinals without basins in the divisions, the sides and 1 floor, gutter and trap in floor may be as clause No. 17 in Slater, in addition to the preceding clause referring to a range of urinals. They are flushed by an auto- matic flush tank ; and instead of the pipes being con- nected to the basins (there being none) they are connected to a 1 in. (or | in.) copper (brass, zinc or galvanised iron) sparge pipe carried along the back and sides with J i n . perforations every f in. apart. See Zincworker, clause No. 8 ; and Coppersmith, clause No. 4. A sparge pipe is one having small holes pierced in it. When a urinal is formed between brick divisions, the sides may be rendered over f in. thick in cement and sand, 4 ft. high, and finished in |- in. neat cement. Hand pump. (57) Allow the p.c. sum of 5 for a 2 J in. brass lift and force hand pump from well, mounted on an oak plank, and screwed for and including 1J in. (1 in. or 2 in.) lead (or galvanised wrought-iron) suction pipe and 1 in. (or 1 in.) galvanised wrought-iron delivery pipe to first floor, with 1 in. (or 1 in.) holding-up valve, 1J in. (1 in. or 2 in.) suction rose, retaining valve and brass unions. This class of pump is suitable for ordinary houses. A gully and drain should be provided to catch the waste water. Hand pumps are made 2 in., 2J in., 3 in., 3J in. and 4 in. diameter. There are many kinds of pumps, either for man, horse or steam power. It is better to allow a provisional amount and select the article from a good tradesman. A hand pump may either be simply a lift pump, or a lift and force pump combined. A lift pump merely 'draws water up through the suction pipe, but a lift and force pump both draws the water up and forces it to a higher level. A pump with a long horizontal suction pipe should have a retaining (59) PLUMBER. 425 valve, as it keeps the pump always charged. Suction pipes should be perfectly air-tight, as straight as possible, and with very easy bends when absolutely necessary ; and it is better to put a retaining valve, even if the suction pipe be short. A suction pipe should be larger than the delivery pipe ; and if the suction pipe be long, it should be of large area. 'The length of a suction pipe will not very materially affect the easy working of a pump, so long as it be either horizontal or fall to the pump ; of course if it rise to the pump, then the amount of the rise must be taken into account as being part of the working depth from which a pump is able to draw ; see notes on Pumps preceding clause No. 21. The strainer at the foot of a suction pipe should be three times the area of the suction pipe. The strainer is sometimes put near the pump valve. The delivery pipe, that is, the pipe which is used to force the water up to a desired level, should be as straight as possible, and if possible free from bends, which, if absolutely necessary, must be easy. A check valve should be put to the delivery pipe to relieve the pump when starting to work. Also see notes on Pumps preceding clause "No. 21. Hydraulic ram. (58) In districts where there is no public water company, or in the case of a building situated above the level to which a public water company's mains will supply, then water has either to be pumped up, or else it may be obtained by a hydraulic ram. It is better to allow a provisional amount, which would be governed by the amount of water to be raised per hour and the distance of the supply. Messrs. Blake, of Accrington, make a good ram. The principle upon which a hydraulic ram works is that a volume of water with a certain fall will force a smaller volume of water to a higher level than the larger volume. Eoughly speaking, about one-seventh of the water necessary to work the ram can be raised five times as high as the fall of the water being used, or one-fourteenth part may be raised ten times the height. In practice the fall desirable to work a ram may be from 18 in. to 10 ft. Speaking tubes. (59) Take a f in. diameter composition pipe speak- ing tube, fixed with clips, from kitchen to dining-room servery, and finish ends with short lengths of flexible india-rubber worsted braided tubing and nozzles, with turned walnut (or ivory) mouthpiece, whistle, brass chain, rack and small ivory indicator at either end. Also see Painter, clause No. 48. State any other positions required, such as from house to stables. Speaking tubes may be made with copper, zinc or iron piping, from f in., | in., | in. and 1 in. diameter, and if the distance be very great a larger diameter pipe is necessary, such as 1J in. or 1J in. The flexible end may be covered with silk or mohair. The indicators are necessary when there are several tubes placed side by side, but speaking to different parts of the building. 426 Telephones. PLUMBER. (60) Lead-lined cisterns. (60) Allow a provisional sum. For long distances a telephone is more suitable than a speaking tube. The Swinton telephone is a good form. The advantage of a telephone is that one can speak and listen at the same time. (61) Galvanised iron cisterns have almost entirely superseded lead-lined cisterns. In certain positions it is impossible to get an iron cistern of sufficient capacity into an old building without disturbing the structure. A lead-lined cistern becomes then absolutely necessary, which can be built up and lined in the position desired. The description of a large lead-lined cistern would run thus w Jron Jfod F / si l\ throuq/t Cistern. Form cistern 16 ft. long, 6 ft. wide, 5 ft. deep, with : If in. (2 in. or 1 J in.) deal, wrought one side, grooved and tongued boarding to sides and ends in 7 in. widths, dovetailed at angles. 2 in. similar framing to bottom, with a fall of 2 in. to one end, and rebated to groove in side and end framings. 7 in. X 1 J in. (or 2 in.) wrought deal ledges dovetailed together, and screwed to framing with 3 in. screws at 7 in. centres, and secured at angles with 15 in. X 15 in. X 2 in. wrought angle irons, \ in. metal, with ten countersunk 3 in. screws in each, and secured at top with n -shaped wrought -iron straps 15 in. long, 2 in. X \ in. metal, and four 3 in. countersunk screws on each side. Care to be taken that the screws clear the joints in the framing. Three 6 in. X 2^ in. wrought deal stiffeners across top of cistern, dovetailed into sides, and secured with (6 la) PLUMBER. 427 15 in. X 15 in. x 2 in. wrought angle iron, i in. metal, screwed with four 2 J in. countersunk screws on top and four 2 in. screws at sides. Fill in the internal angles to sides and bottom with 2 in. X 2 in. deal angle fillets. Four J in. wrought-iron pipes (or rod) stiffeners taken through centre of tank, with heads, nuts and 4 in. X 4 in. X J in. plate washers, and enclosed in strong lead pipe outer tubing let into the woodwork at both ends I in., soldered on to the lead lining. Line tank on inside with 6 Ib. (or 7 Ib.) milled lead sides and bottom, dressed over top edges, and 1J in. copper nailed 3 in. centres. Groove out the boarding for the jointing of the lead sheets, and form the joints with 7 Ib. underlay, 1 in. copper nailed 6 in. apart on either side, wiped in with solder. Dress round in 7 Ib. lead the wood stiffeners at top with soldered joints. Paint the iron straps and stiffeners three times in oil colour before fixing. Then describe the bearers to cistern, the casing, hair felt or silicate packing, manhole, overflow, safe, cleaning- out pipe, supply pipe and other littings as clause No. 30. If the cistern is to store rain water, the inside may be limewhited, cement washed or tarred. The overflow to this size tank should be 3 in. diameter, and the dribble pipe from safe 3J in. to 4 in. diameter. The safe being very large may either be formed like a flat with rolls, gutter and cesspool ; or the lead sheets may be soldered together in the same way as to the cistern. Cistern rooms should be ventilated. Instead of wood fillets, the inside angles of cisterns may be formed in solder. A small lead-lined cistern may be described as : Put in roof a 350-gallon lead-lined cistern, formed with 1^ in. (or 1J in.) wrought one side, grooved and tongued deal boarding, dovetailed at angles, with bottom grooved, rebated and glued together. Then describe the lead lining as in this clause, No. 61, and the bearers, packing, casing, manholp, overflow, safe, cleaning-out pipe, supply pipe and other fittings as clause No. 30. For galvanised iron cisterns, see clauses Nos. 30 and 49. For zinc-lined cisterns, see Zincworker, clause No. 7. Water trunk. (61a) When the roof water is collected into the cisterns in the roof it may be conducted either with a 4 in. lead pipe or along lead-lined deal trunks thus : Form 1 in. (or li in.) rough deal grooved and rebated water trunks from cesspools to cistern, 9 in. deep by 9 in. wide, with 1 J in. drips and all supports. The ends 428 PLUMBER. (62) Rain-water cisterns or water butt. to be turned down into cistern. Line with 5 Ib. lead, copper nailed 6 in. apart on top edges, and put an 1 in. rough deal top with ledges, in movable lengths. (62) When the rain water is collected outside the house, the cistern may be in galvanised iron of sufficient capacity, fixed on brick or iron bearers. The only fittings necessary would be a f in. (or 1 in.) draw- off tap, a short length of overflow (or warning pipe) and a deal movable cover. A water butt, banded round in iron, may be used with draw-off and overflow in lieu of a galvanised iron tank. When a rain- water cistern is required to serve the draw-offs in the house, the cistern should be placed in the house as high up as possible, to catch the rain water from the roofs, which would be brought to it either by lead -lined troughs or 4 in. lead pipes from the various gutter outlets, as mentioned in clause No. 61a. The fittings in this case would be exactly the same as in an ordinary drinking-water cistern, see clause No. 30, but with the overflow taken over a hopper head down to a gully. This cistern may be in lead if convenient, as in clause No. 61. The outgo in either case should be (say) 3 in. up from the bottom, as there is much sediment with rain water from roofs. The rain-water cistern, if placed in the roof to catch the rain water from the roof, could not discharge its overflow on to the roof owing to the cistern being at a lower level than the roof; hence the necessity of taking the overflow down to a lower level. Eain water attacks iron. If the rain water be used for drinking purposes, no lead work of any description should be allowed to come in contact with the water, gal- vanised iron cistern and pipes only being used ; see notes to clause No. 1. The jointing of the pipes may be made with whiting, boiled oil and varnish. Messrs. Roberts make a rain-water separator, which assists in getting rid of most of the dirt from the roofs before the rain water is allowed to discharge into the cisterns. HOT WATER SUPPLY. (Clauses Nos. 63 to 65.) Generally. (63) All hot-water piping to be kept 2 ft away from cold-water pipes, and where exposed to view on the face of the work to be painted three coats in oil colour and decorated to match the other work; and painted two coats in oil colour where not exposed to view, such as under floors and in roofs. (See Carpenter, clause No. 41, for wood casings to pipes.) (63) PLUMBER. 429 Jao / hoc A Jiand,. t ft i/). The pipes to be in galvanised wrought-iron, welded steam, tubing, with all tees, bends, angles, crosses, unions, screwed joints, elbows, pipe brackets, reducing sockets, caps, plugs, wall hooks, clips, bands and other connections and fastenings. The joints to be made with red lead cement, and the tubing fixed to walls with wall hooks and to woodwork with iron bands ; but in all positions where passing through rooms and passages, with iron bands (or patent clips). All pipes to be laid to falls so that the whole of the tubing may be emptied, and where in exposed situa- tions and against external walls, bound round with dry hair felt and canvas (or silicate felt). Floor boards covering up tubing to be fixed with brass cups and screws, with access traps over. No floor joists or main timbers to be cut or bored through except immediately against the walls, and then only ^ in. down. The patent iron clips keep the pipes away from the walls, which is an advantage. Practically there are two ways of supplying hot water to a building, the only difference being the position of the circulating tank, as shown* by the sketches. A quicker and hotter supply is obtained by placing the cir- culating tank near the boiler than if placed in a roof. The circulating tank may either be a square tank or a cylinder, preferably a cylinder. In a close-fire range the high-pressure boiler for the hot-water circu- lation may be a back boiler with "N ^N. ---^ ' F*} f i^l arch flue, an L-shaped boiler with I \ \ I] J__\_l^ } J J arch flue, or a boot boiler with arch XN ^ ^^-^ ' L-e^^J^ flue ; all of which should be of Backfleiitr L shape* Soiitr JBooijiotter welded wrought iron and provided with manholes. In an open-fire range the boiler may be in welded wrought iron, with arch flue and manhole, or in riveted wrought iron with manhole, and the flue formed under in firebrick. The flow pipe should continuously rise from the top of the boiler, and 430 PLUMBER. (64) Hot-water circulation with close- fire kitchen range, high- pressure boiler and cylinder. fn. the return pipe always fall to the bottom of the boiler, neither being al- lowed to rise and fall alternately. The exhaust pipe must always be higher than the cold-water supply tank. Here is a description of the hot-water supply to a house, with the circulating cylinder placed near the boiler : (64) Fix in kitchen range, the full width of fire, a (or -!% in.) plate wrought-iron, high - pressure, welded boot boiler, with manhole and arch flue, drilled for pipe connections (see Smith, clause No. 91), and provided with an 1 in. (or 1| in.) dead weight safety valve, and 1 in. emptying-out pipe with gun-metal stop- cock. Connect with boiler IJin. (1J in., If in., 2 in. or 1 in.) flow and return pipe to a 50 (20, 30 or 60) gallon in. plate galvanised iron, riveted circulating cylinder, with manhole, fixed on cast-iron brackets near boiler, and cased round with asbestos cement on wire frame. The flow pipe to be flush with the under side of top of boiler. Take from circulating cylinder an lj in. (or 1 in.) flow and return pipe, somewhat higher than topmost draw-off, and continue with 1-j; in. (or 1 in.) exhaust pipe turned over cold-water supply cistern. The flow pipe to be flush with the under side of top of cylinder. Branch off from flow pipe 1 in. separate supplies to each bath, and provide with gun-metal bib cock, p. a 10s. each (or else attach the pipes to the bath fittings). Branch off from flow pipe J in. separate supplies to Each housemaid's sink, Each butler's sink, Each scullery sink, Dispensing sink, Slop sink, Draw-off on landing, Each washing trough, Cook's hand lavatory, Each lavatory, and finish each position with gun-metal bib cocks, p.c. 10s. each. In this method of hot- water circulation the draw-offs may be taken either from the flow or return pipe, but preferably from the flow. Hot water is to be drawn at once in every case, no dead water being allowed to remain in the pipes ; the branches off the flow pipe will therefore, in some cases, also have to be connected with the return pipe. With supplies to baths a short length of dead water will be allowed. For cold supply to kitchen boiler, see clause No. 30. Also see sketch to clause No. 28. (64) PLUMBER. 43* Pipes for the various parts of a hot-water circulation are usually J in., j in., 1 in., 1J in., 1^ in., If in. and 2 in. diameters, according to their positions. In a close-fire kitchen range a boot boiler is preferable, as it gives more flue surface exposed to the fire. The flow pipe should always be taken from the top of the boiler,, otherwise air is liable to get locked up. The return pipe should be brought down to within an inch or so of the bottom of the boiler. The asbestos cement covering round the circulating cylinder prevents loss of heat in the circulation and excess of heat in the kitchen. State if the circulating cylinder is cased in with wood framing, doors, hinges and fastenings similar to a gas meter ; see Gas- fitter, clause No. 6. It is an open question whether a safety valve is of much service, as- it usually gets fixed. With some hard waters the boiler and pipes as far as the circulating cistern become furred up in time, and require cleaning out at short periods. In an open-fire range the description of the high-pressure boiler may be: Supply kitchen range 3 in. longer than the full width of fire with a high-pressure fin. (or /g in.) plate riveted wrought-iron boiler (say) 3 ft. 3 in. long x 2 ft. high x 9 in. to 6 in. wide, with manhole, and with holes drilled for pipe connections (for sketches, see Smith, clauses Nos. 94 and 93), and provided with an 1-| in. (or 1 in.) dead weight safety valve, 1 in. emptying-out pipe with fan-metal stop -cock. Form flue under and at back in re-brick with damper. The description of the circu- lating pipes and cylinder would remain the same as with a close-fire range boiler. When the circulating tank is placed in the roof the arrangement would be as either of the two sketches. But in each case it is better to bring the cold supply separate and direct to the boiler. The feed tank shown on the one sketch, and the syphon shown on the other, is to prevent any back circulation of hot water finding its way into the cold water supply tank, the first method being the most satisfactory. But of course if the cold supply is taken down direct to the boiler as shown on page 429 then there will be no question of any back circulation of hot water into the cold-water supply tank. When the circulation tank is placed in the roof, the draw-offs must only be taken from the flow pipe. 432 PLUMBER. (64) Here is a sketch showing the circulating tank fixed in a bath room or linen closet ; the advantages bein^ that the heat from the tank helps to warm the apart- ments in question. When a large amount of hot water is re- quired, boilers may be placed both in the kitchen and scullery ranges, and two circu- lating cylinders provided and arranged with stop cocks so that either or both boilers and cylinders may be used ; or that either boiler and cylinder may be cleaned out or repaired independently of the other. Circulating cylinders are made in 16, 14 and 12 B.W.G, and J and -^ in. plate iron. Here are some sizes : 15 in. diam. x 30 in. high contains 20 galls. 15 in. x 48 in. 30 18 in. X42in. 40 20 in. x42in. 50 22 in. x48in. 60 1 When hot water is re- quired to opposite ends of a building, the pipes may be arranged with two branch flows and two branch returns, as shown on sketch. (66) PLUMBER. 433 For a very small house of no great height, the pipes may be arranged with the draw-offs taken from the exhaust pipe, so long as the draw-offs be not very high up. It is a very good plan in a large house or establishment to have an independent separate heating boiler for the hot- water circulation, with a fire entirely to itself. The circulating tank, when placed in the roof or on an upper floor, should be provided with a safe in case of leakage, similar to that under clause No. 30. Circulating tanks 18 in. X 18 in. X 18 in. contain about 20 galls. 24 in. x 16 in. x 18 in. 25 24 in. X 18 in. X 20 in. 30 26 in. x 18 in. X 24 in. 40 30 in. X 20 in. x 24 in. 50 30 in. X 24 in. X 24 in. 60 They are made in 16, 14 and 12, B.W.G., and J in. and -^ in. plate full. When a circulating tank is used in lieu of a cylinder, the capacity should be about the same. Eepairs generally. ^ (65) Clean out all cisterns, boilers, pipes, baths, sinks, traps and wastes. Eegrind all cocks. Clean out w.c. pans, oil and adjust the apparatus and fittings, and put in working order. Lead weatherings to sills and strings. (66) Cover the string courses and sills with 5 Ib. lead weathering wedged in. 2 F 434 (1) Generally. Wood rolls. Drips. Pitch. Flat. Cap ZINCWOKKEK. (1) The zinc roofing to be the Vieille Montagne Company's manufacture best tough malleable sheet zinc, even in colour and texture, and laid upon the latest and most approved methods. No nails or solder to be used in any part. The wood rolls to be If in. X If in. twice splayed deal fillets, spaced 2 ft. 10^ in. centres. The drips to be 2J in. (or 3 in.) deep to flats, and 1^ in. (or 2 in.) to gutters, and spaced not more than 7 ft. 6 in. apart. . The pitch to be not less than 4, or . height of roof about one-twenty-ninth the span. (2) Cover flat over kitchen offices with No. 15 (Nos. 14 or 16) gauge sheet zinc, laid to falls of 2 in. in 8 ft., turned up 4 in. against walls and kerbs, with all laps, clips and passings. Dress up against If in. x If in. twice splayed deal rolls (fillets) spaced at 2 ft. 10 J in. centres, and se- cured with zinc clips every 3 ft. apart. Form drips 2J in. (or 3 in.) deep with the JDrip Eaves zinc turned up and over- lapped, with a beaded edge. Cap the rolls with No. 15 (Nos. 14 or 16) gauge zinc roll caps, secured with fork connections with patent saddle pieces (plates) and stopped ends. Put No. 15 gauge (Nos. 14 or 16) zinc ridge roll cap, beaded on both edges, over 3in.x2in. rounded deal ridge roll. The eaves to be splayed off sharply and finished with a beaded edge. Flashings, stepped flashings and aprons to be in 14 in. gauge zinc, beaded on edge, wedged and pointed up in cement. Cover box gutter with No. 16 gauge sheet zinc, turned up on either side, with drips 1 J in. (or 2 in.) deep ; form cesspools and 4 in. outlets. (4) ZIKCWORKER. 435 For boarding and felt under the zincwork, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 115 and 116 respectively. The eaves may be finished with a plain lap. Zinc roofing should only be used in the cheaper ' class of building. It must not come in contact with lead, copper, iron, lime, or wood containing acid. The sea air is said to cause zinc to perish. Zinc is made in sheets 6 ft., 7 ft and 8 ft, long by 2 ft. 8 in. and 3 ft. wide, in gauges from Nos. 1 to 26 ; Nos. 9 to 18 being those mostly employed in buildings. Gauges Nos. 13, 14, 15 and 16 are suitable for roofs and flats ; Nos. 14, 15 and 16 for gutters ; and Nos. 10, 11 and 12 for cheaper and temporary buildings. Zinc gauge No. 10 weighs per foot super, about 11J oz. 11 13i oz. 12 15 oz. 13 17 oz. 14 18Joz. 15 16 21f oz. 24f oz. In roofs with a pitch of not less than one-seventh the span the drips may be dispensed with, the horizontal joints of the sheets being secured together with a welt or fold. Aprons, soakers, flashings and valleys to slated or tiled roofs. (3) To be in No, 14 (or No. 15) gauge zinc. Describe the widths similar as if in lead. Plumber, clause No. 3. See It is only in poor class work zinc is used in these positions. Italian roofing. (4)_Cover roof with No. 15 (Nos. 14 or 16) gauge sheet zinc, laid with Italian corrugations, and secured to rafters (or rolls) with mushroom-headed screws upon bossed sockets, and turn up 4 in. against walls and kerbs. The horizontal joints to be formed with a welt. Then describe the flashings, ridge rolls and eaves similar to clause No. 2. 2 F 2 436 ZINCWOEKER. (5) This form of zinc roofing is generally laid to roofs with a fairly steep pitch, and may be laid without boarding ; the roof rafters being spaced at 15 in. centres, and rounded to receive the corrugations. If Italian corruga- /^ ^ /^_ tions be laid with rolls on a boarded ^\J|W^^ roof, they should be 2 in. x If in. spaced at 15 in. centres. If a zinc flat be laid with Italian corrugations, then there must be drips similar to clause No. 2. Eaves gutters. (5) To be formed with No. 15 (Nos. 14 or 16) gauge zinc, half round (or Ogee) pattern, 3J in. wide, with hollow zinc stays every 18 in. apart, and secured to fascia with screws driven through the stays (or with clips in addition). Form all nozzles, ends and angles. Zinc guttering is only used in inferior work and outbuildings. It is made in 2J- in., 3 in., 3 j in., 4 in., 4J in. and 5 in. widths. Bain-water pipes. (6) Carry down (say) four 3 in. diameter rain-water pipes from gutters to ground level, with all bends, shoes, heads and connections in No. 15 gauge zinc. Zinc rain-water pipes are only used in inferior work and outbuildings. They are made 2 in., 2J in., 3 in., 3 in. and 4 in. diameter. .Zinc-lined cisterns. (7) Line cistern with No. 12 (Nos. 13 or 14) gauge sheet zinc, soldered at angles, and tacked on the upper edges. Form outlets and connections for pipes. Zinc-lined cisterns are only used in very inferior work. For lead- lined and galvanised iron cisterns, see Plumber, clauses Nos. 61, 30 and 49 respectively. Zinc pipe. (8) The sparge pipe to urinal to be % in. (or 1 in.) diameter, out of 21 oz. (No. 15 gauge) zinc, soldered at ends and perforated with J in. diameter holes every % in. apart. Also see Plumber, notes to clause No. 56, and Coppersmith, clause No. 4, for sparge pipes. Tin pipe. (9) j. i n . pipe to weigh 18 oz. per lineal yard. $ 32 1 48 li 64 l 80 Tin pipe is used in public house bar fittings, see Carpenter, clause No. 318. (10) ZINCWORKER. 437 Pewter to counter. (10) Cover the counter top and edges with polished sheet pewter weighing 3^ Ibs. per super, foot, with bevel soldered joints, and edges copper nailed on the under side. Pewter covering to counters is chiefly used in public houses and hotel bars, see Carpenter, clause No. 318. 438 (1) COPPERSMITH. SHEET copper is rolled in sheets 4 ft. long by 2 ft. and 3 ft. G in. wide, in gauges Xos. 1 to 30 B.W.G. ; but when employed as a roof covering to flats it is specially rolled in sheets about 5 ft., G ft., 7 ft. and 8 ft. long, by 3 ft. wide. Sheet copper weighing from 12 to 20 oz. per super, foot is mostly used for roofs, flats and gutters. Copper of B.AV.G. No. 18 weighs per foot super. 36 oz. Flats (or roofs) an d gutters. tt &. Uf If T 71-r T he Y T t 20 22 24 26 28 30 20 16 12 8 6 Tloll (1) Cover the main flat (or roof) and gutters with malleable sheet copper No. 24 B.W.G. , 16 oz. per super, foot, laid to falls of 2 in. in 8 ft., with all ties, nails, seams, clips, flashings, aprons and roll caps. The roll caps to be welted on both sides to If in. x If in. (or 1^ X 1 J in.) twice splayed deal rolls (fillets) spaced at 2 ft. 9J- in. centres. The stopped ends to rolls to be welted all round, and the saddle ends welted to the sheets above. Form the horizontal jointing to the sheets about every 5 ft. (or 4 ft.) with a double welt, and form the dips about every 10 ft. (or 8 ft.) apart, 2 in. deep, also with a welted joint. Turn up the sheets 4 in. against walls and kerbs, with the flashings over finished a welted edge, and wedged and pointed up where against brickwork in cement. Form cesspools and 4 in. outlets. The eaves to be sharply splayed off. Kelt Copper roofing laid in the manner described is very similar to zinc roofing, except that the jointing of the sheets is made with welts. For boarding and felt under the copper, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 115 and 116 respectively. The least pitch desirable is 3 50" or height of roof the span. It is safer to put a drip to each length of sheet, if a flat (1) .COPPERSMITH. 439 be of small fall, otherwise the welted horizontal joints are perfectly secure. If it is desired to dispense with the wood rolls; then the copper roofing may be laid with welted joints in every part both vertically and hori- zontally, but the flat must have some some considerable fall, say ^th ' the span. Copper is not liable to " creep " down a roof having a steep pitch, as is the case with sheet lead. Turret tops and small domes are often covered with sheet copper of the same substance as that used for flats and roofs. The horizontal joints should be welted together, and the joints at the angles should be covered with a " verandah " capping as sketch. Verandah capping is usually rolled about 1 in., l T 3 g in. and If in. wide. After a, time, copper exposed to the elements will get covered with a film of carbonate, commonly known as verdigris. If it be desired to obtain this green effect on a dome without waiting for it to naturally colour, then the copper may be payed over with spirits of salts ; but this will materially affect the life of the copper. LIGHTNING CONDUCTOKS. Of the cheaper metals copper has been considered the best material for a lightning conductor ; following on in conductivity are zinc, iron, tin and lead, in the relative proportions of 12, 4, 2, 1 and 1. Copper, therefore, is twelve times as efficient as lead. Lightning conductors should be taken down the wet side of a building, terminating in a w*}t, place in the ground, and kept away from all gas and soft metal pipes and electric light wires. Sharp bends in the conductors should be avoided. Iron lightning conductors should weigh not less than 2 Ibs. per foot run, and may either be in plain iron or galvanised ; but in both cases it should be painted, and ' attached at the foot to a galvanised iron plate buried in the ground. Solid iron lightning rods may be J in. or in. diameter, but if in the form of iron bars, then 2^ in. (or 2 in.) X f in. Eods should be screwed at joints and bars scarfed and riveted. Professor Lodge recommends iron as a lightning conductor in pre- ference to copper. Although copper is the greater in conductivity, iron has a higher fusing point and greater specific heat, and therefore an iron conductor is capable of taking a larger amount of elecirical energy (or current) and getting rid of it more quickly. There is also a question as to whether the current taken by a large copper conductor does not oscillate up and down the conductor before it is discharged into the earth, which in the case of iron it is not so liable to do. Copper lightning conductors may be formed of solid rods, hollow tubes, wire rope or solid tape (ribbon), the tape being preferable. Solid copper rods are made f in., J in., | i n . and f in. diameter, and copper tubes in 1 in. and 1J in. diameters |- in. metal; the joints should be screw and socket, and soldered. Copper wire rope is made in f in., J in. and -g- in. diameters. 440 COPPERSMITH. (2) Copper ribbon (tape) is made : f in. X ^ i n - weighing per foot run about 4*83 oz. | in. X J in. 5 80 oz. 1 in. X | in. 7 73 oz. IJ-in.x J- in. 9-67 oz. IJin.x J- in. 12-69 oz. 2 in. x J in. 15-46 oz. 2in.x in. 19-33 oz. The joints of copper tape should be scarfed, riveted and soldered. Copper wire rope is not so much used, as the small copper wire strands become destroyed. Copper lightning conductors should weigh not less than 6 oz. per foot run, and should be attached at the foot to a copper plate in the ground. Lightning conductor. jSfcti'on (2) Affix to the highest chimney a f in. x J in. solid copper tape lightning conductor in one continuous length without joints, carried through (or round) the string courses and insulated, with copper eyes 3 ft. apart, so as to firmly hold but not to pinch the tape. Finish the upper end of tape with a solid copper pointed rod 3 ft. above chimney, with the rod carried 5 ft. down and secured to the tape with a coupling. Encase the lower end of tape for 10 ft. (or 8 ft.) above ground in a painted galvanised iron pipe, and carry down 4 ft. (to 6 ft.) below ground in a similar pipe, and continue on for 10 ft. (or 15 ft.) along ground away from the walls, and connect to a 3 ft. X 3 ft. X J in. (or ^ in.) copper plate, buried in a bed of moist powdered coke 3 ft. wide, 5 ft. deep, 6 ft. long. There is not to be more than 10 per cent, alloy in the copper. If the copper band be not in one continuous length, the joints should be scarfed, riveted and soldered together. The copper plate at the lower end of the tape may also be bedded in cinders or in a well, a running water-course or a drain. Two lightning conductors will be sufficient for a building 45 ft. long ; and if over 45 ft. long, they should be placed every 30 ft. apart. Copper wire cord. Sparge pipe. (3) Copper wire cord for sash lines is made in : in., | in., J in., | in., in., 1 in., 1J- in. and 1^ in. diameters, with a working load of 34, 50, 75, 112, 168, 224, 336 and 448 Ibs. respectively. (4) See Zincworker, clause No. 8 ; and Plumber, notes to clause No. 56. Copper pipes J in. and 1 in. bore are made in ^ in., \ in., ^ 6 in. and in. metal. (6) 44' PLASTEBEK. A CUBIC foot of plaster composed of lime, sand and hair, weighs about 86-5 Ibs. Sand. (l) See Excavator, clause No. 24. Lime. (2) To be best white (or grey) chalk lime, well slaked and screened. Hydraulic limes are not used in plastering, as they are liable to blow. Selenitic lime. (3) To be selenitic lime, used and mixed in accord- ance with the Selenitic Lime Co.'s printed instructions. This class of lime is only used in special cases of plastering. Portland cement. (4) See Excavator, clause No. 23. Eoman. Medina and similar cements are not so strong as Portland cement, and are seldom now used. But Medina cement may be used as an external rendering if the work is required to be painted imme- diately, as if Portland cement be used under these circumstances it would kill the paint. Hair. (5) To be best long black (or white) bullock's hair, well beaten and free from grease and dirt. Goat's hair may be used in very special first-class work. Laths. (6) The lathing to be executed with "lath-and- half " laths, rent out of the heart of the best red Baltic fir, and free from sap and knots. The laths to be fairly straight, and butt jointed, with the joints frequently broken (say every 3 ft.), and secured with good gal- vanised cut wrought- iron lathing nails. Laths to be spaced about f in. (to f in.) apart. Laths are split about 1 in. wide in three thicknesses ; " single laths " being about J- in. to -fg in. thick; " lath-and-half " laths, about Jin. thick ; and " double laths " about \ in. to f in. thick. " Single laths " are used in cheap work, and are sometimes lapped at joints ; the other two classes of laths are used in good work, but should never be lapped at joints. Laths are sometimes in oak. 442 PLASTERER. (7) Lathing nails are either of wrought, cut or cast iron. Cut nails are generally used with fir laths, and wrought nails with oak laths. Zinc nails are also sometimes used with fir laths. Copper nails may be used for the best work. When iron nails are used which have not been gal- vanised, the heads should be painted over before the plastering is done. Thickness of plastering. (7) The ' plastering, when finished in three-coat work, is not to be less than 1 in. (J in., f in., or 1 in.) thick. Internal plaster. (8) To be composed of 2 (or 3) parts sand, 1 part lime, mixed with 1 Ib. hair to 1 bushel of lime (or 1 Ib. hair to 2 (or 3) cubic ft. of plaster). The setting coat to be finished in pure lime, run into putty one month before using. (The setting coat may have' a little washed sand mixed with it. Many plasterers prefer it.) This is the class of plaster ordinarily used in all good internal plaster work. Cornices and coves. (9) To be run out of 1 part pure lime to 1 part plaster of Paris, on a rough plaster backing, and finished to true metal moulds. Cornices with from 2J in. to 4 in. projection to be made out with Scotch bracketing as a backing ; and beyond 4 in. projections with 1^ in. (or 2 in.) rough deal brackets every 12 in. apart, cut out roughly to the shape of the cornice or coves, and lathed over. Form all mitres, irregular mitres, stopped ends, ends on splay, returned and mitred ends and circular angles. Also see Carpenter, clause No. 39. " Scotch bracketing " consists in fixing short lengths of laths anglewise, with the ends pushed into roughly formed plaster screeds. Counter lathing. (10) Lath and counter lath to beams over 3 in. wide where plastered. or, Batten out beams over 3 in. wide with 1 in. X 1 in. fillets to receive the lathing. (18) PLASTERER. 443 Arrises. , (11), Run all arrises and angles in "neat" Keene's (Parian or Martin's) cement (or plaster of Paris) 2 in. (or 3 in.) wide on a backing of Portland cement and sand in equal -proportions. Circular work. (12) Form the circular work to true curves. Cracks and blisters. (13) Cut out all cracks and blisters, and make good in plaster of Paris. If the work is finished in Parian, Keene's or Martin's cement, as in clause No. 2 1 4 , cracks and blisters should be made good in a similar class of cement. Make good plaster. (14) Make good in plaster of Paris to shelves, hand- rails, brackets, chimney pieces, and to other work fixed after the plastering has been finished. Also see clause No. 4 under Electric Lighting. CLAUSES Nos. 15 to 18 should more properly come under Painter, as also clauses Nos. 59 to 62, references to which will be found in Painter. Whitewash . (15) To be composed of white fat lime, Poissian Used mostly in cellars, roof timbers, sheds and walls in common work, either internally or externally. Also see clauses Nos. 16, 93 and 94 in Bricklayer. Whitening. (16) To be made in the proportion of 6 Ibs. whiting, 1 quart double size, water and a small amount of blue black. Used chiefly on ceilings and cornices internally. Colouring. (17) To be composed of whitewash with a colouring pigment. Used both for inside and outside work. See clause No. 95 in Bricklayer. Distemper. (18) To be made in the proportion of 6 Ibs. whiting 1 quart size, water, a colouring pigment, and a small amount of alum (or soft soap). Used both on ceilings and walls internally. 444 PLASTERER. (19) lime stucco for (19) To be composed of 3 parts sand to 1 part external work. hydraulic l ime . Cement stncco for To be composed of 1 part Portland cement to 3 external work. ( or 2) parts sand. Bough cast lime Kough cast lime stucco to be composed of 2 parts stucco. p ure -^ me f. Q -^ p ar j. ggj^ w ith small pebbles mixed up together with it. Bough cast Kough cast cement stucco to be composed of 1 part ment Portland cement to 3 (or 4) parts sand, with small pebbles mixed up together with it. Lime stucco, whether plain or rough cast, is suitable for external work, but seldom now used, Portland cement stucco having taken its place. See clauses Nos. 68 to 71. Plain lime stucco may be " common stucco/' that is with 3 parts sand to 1 part hydraulic lime ; Trowelled stucco composed of 2 parts pure lime to 1 part sand ; Bastard stucco composed of 2 parts pure lime to 1 part sand, and a small quantity of hair. Pebble dash work is formed by throwing small clean pebbles on the surface of the stucco. CLAUSES Nos. 20, 21, 3 and 77 refer to special work only, and clauses Nos. 1, 2, 4 to 19, 22 to 76 to ordinary work. Gauged plaster for (20) To be composed of 3 (or 2) parts sand, 1 part lime, with 1 Ib. hair to one bushel of lime (or 1 Ib. hair to 2 (or 3) cubic feet plaster), and mixed with 1 part plaster of Paris. The setting coat to be composed of 1 part pure lime putty to 1 part plaster of Paris. or, Gauged plaster may be composed of 2 (or 3) parts sand, 1 part lime, with 1 Ib. hair to 1 bushel of lime (or 1 Ib. hair to 2 (or 3) cubic ft. plaster), and mixed with 1 part Portland cement. The setting coat to be composed of 1 part pure lime putty and 1 part plaster of Paris. A lime setting coat on a backing of Portland is liable to shell off; it is better to finish the setting coat in Keene's cement. Gauged plaster is used when the work is required to dry out quickly, and when on lath work it should be gauged rather stronger, as it takes longer to dry than when used on walls. Cornices to gauged plaster-work are finished in exactly the same way as ordinary plaster cornices, see clause No. 9, but on a rough gauged plaster backing. Gauged plaster coves are finished as other gauged plaster-work, as described in this clause. When gauged plaster is finished with Keene's cement and has to be (23) PLASTERER. 445 painted, the work should remain a while, otherwise the Portland cement will show through, but the first coat of paint should be put on at once, and the remaining coats left for some short time. Parian, Keene's, (21) To be used in the proportion of 3 (or 2) parts KobhTson^cement sand to 2 ( or *> P arts Parian (Martin's, Eobinson's or piaster. Keene's) cement, the finishing coat being in the neat cement. Keene's cement is mostly used, but Parian is considered best. These cements are used as plaster where work is required to be deco- rated very soon after finishing. They are only suitable for internal work. Parian and Keene's are mostly used, and can, if required, be finished with a polished face. When the work is finished to receive paint, state that the cement is to have a coat of paint laid on almost immediately, and before it has time to dry ; the remaining coats may be put on shortly after. Cement cornices and coves to this class of work are finished in the same way as the other cement plaster-work in this clause. Parian, Keene's, Martin's and Eobinson's cements may also be finished neat on a backing about J in. thick of 1 part Portland cement to 2 parts sand ; but if finished with paint, only the first coat should be laid on at once, the remaining coats being put on some time afterwards. Ceilings. (22) Lath with " lath-and-half " laths, plaster, float and set ceilings on all floors to all rooms, passages, lobbies, halls, landings and soffits. State if " single " or " double " laths be required. See notes to clause No. 6. For special work ceilings may be plastered in gauged stuff or cement, as clauses Nos. 20 or 21. Lath and plaster one coat is only used in rough situations, such as between the roof rafters, to keep out cold ; or to the under side of ground floor joists when there is sufficient space under to do it ; or to cellar ceilings ; but iit is never done in gauged plaster-work or cement as described under clauses Nos. 20 and 21. Lath, plaster and set is used in inferior work, the plaster being scratched over with a birch broom before the setting coat is applied. It may either be done in ordinary plaster as clause No. 8, or in gauged plaster or cement' as in clauses Nos. 20 and 21. Lath, plaster, float and set is used in all ordinary and good class work, the plaster coat being pricked over with a scratching tool, and the floating coat scratched over with a birch broom. It may either be done in ordinary plaster as' clause No. 8, or in gauged plaster or cement as in clauses Nos. 20 and 21. Fire and sound (23) See clause No. 57 under Carpenter. Then ' describe the plastering as in Clause No. 22. 446 PLASTERER. (24) Cellars and boiler house ceiling. (24) Lath with " single laths," and plaster one coat the ceilings and soffits to these positions. Plaster nnder (25) Same as clause No. 24. ground floor joists. Plaster between (26) Plaster one coat to the slate or tile battens roof timbers. between the roof rafters. In slated roofs it is necessary to lath in addition. Also see notes to clause No. 2 under Tiler ; and notes to clause No. 6 under Slater ; and notes to clause No. 1 under Stone Tiler. If the roof is boarded on the outside, then lathing must be taken across the roof timbers. Ceilings to concrete (27) Hack over surface of concrete ceilings and rSa stair S s ffit soffits to stairs > and render float and set in Plaster. It is almost better to do plastering to concrete floors in gauged stuff as clause No. 20. It may also be done as clause No. 21, if required, and also as clause No. 51. Brandering. (28) All ceilings on all floors to all rooms, passages, lobbies, halls, landings and soffits to be covered with brandering, formed with 1 in. x 1 in. battens 12 in. (to 14 in.) apart, spiked to joists, then lathed with " lath- and-half " laths, plastered, floated and set. When the joists are somewhat wide this brandering or battening will afford a better key to the plaster. The work may be finished in gauged plaster, or cement, 'as clauses Nos. 20 or 21. Also see notes under clause No. 22 for finishing plaster ceilings in other ways to other positions. Cornices, second floor. Cornices, first floor. (29) Eun plain moulded plaster cornices to all rooms on second floor, 8 in. girth, on rough plaster backings. (30) Run plain moulded plaster cornices to all rooms on first floor, 10 in. girth, on deal brackets and plaster backings. State if any member is enriched, and the class of enrichment. (32) Cornices, ground floor. PLASTERER. 447 (31) Eun an enriched moulded plaster cornice to dining room, drawing room, breakfast room and billiard room (or other best rooms), 12 in. girth, on deal brackets and plaster backings, with two enriched members. or, Eun an enriched moulded plaster cornice to dining room, drawing room, breakfast room and billiard room (or other best rooms), 10 in. girth, on deal brackets and plaster backings, with two enriched members, and a frieze moulding 3 in. girth with one enrichment. State if dentils, medallions or patene are required in the cornice to best rooms, with their modelling. Coving. (32) Form a plain plaster cove 18 in. girth, with 2 in. deal bracket framing and fillets, lath with "lath- and-half" laths, plaster, float and set, and run two sets of enriched plaster mouldings, one 6 in. girth and one 4 in. girth, to the top and bottom of the coving, with two enrich- ments in each set. The cove may be formed in gauged plaster or cement, as clauses Nos. 20 or 21. State if the bracket framing is built up in pieces. 448 PLASTERER. (33) Hall, stairs and (33) Bun an enriched moulded plaster cornice vestibule cornices. 1Q ^ ^^ wifch twQ enrichments, to vestibule, hall and main staircase, passages and landings, from ground to second floor, on brackets and plaster ]3ackings. The sketch to clause No. 30 would be suitable, with two enriched members. See notes under clause No. 31. lobby cornice. (34) Run a plain moulded plaster cornice to prin- cipal entrance lobby, 6 in. girth, on plaster backings. See sketch to clause No. 29. Centre flowers. (35) Allow the p.c. sum of 1 5s. each for a centre flower to drawing room, dining room and breakfast room, and 1 for one to entrance hall. Ceiling ribs. (36) Form plain plaster moulded ceiling ribs 4 in. girth to dining room to design, with all intersections and mitres. See sketches in Carpenter, clauses Nos. 209 and 208. Then describe the cornice as any of the clauses Nos. 29 to 34 or 37. Basement cornices. (37) Run plain plaster moulded cornice 8 in. girth to kitchen, butler's pantry, housekeeper's room (or other servants' rooms) and servants' hall, on plaster backings. See sketch to clause No. 29. Ceiling roses. (38) Form plain plaster moulded ceiling roses 8 in. (12 in., 15 in. or 18 in.) diameter to kitchen, butler's pantry, housekeeper's room, servants' hall (or other servants' rooms), round the gas pendants. Skylight mouldings (39) Lath with " lath-and-half " laths, plaster, float and fascias. an ^ ge j. ^ f asc ^ a li n i n g S to lantern light, with a plain moulding on ceiling, 3 in. girth, one necking moulding 2 in. girth, and a cornice moulding 6 in. girth. Form out the fascia in panels with mouldings 1J in. girth. The plastering may be done in gauged stuff or cement, as clauses % Nos. 20 or 21. Lantern linings may be to almost any design. State clearly the labours and enrichments. Describe the ceilings and cornices to lantern soffits when there is no skylight but merely the vertical side lights. (45) PLASTERER. 449 Fibrous piaster, carton pierre or papier mache ceilings. Plaster to quartered partitions. (40) Prepare joists, fir up, and fix with galvanised screws (or zinc nails), an ornamented fibrous plaster ceiling to design to drawing room, p.c. 1 per yard super., and fill up joints with plaster of Paris. liun round this room an ornamental fibrous plaster cornice with two enrichments, and an ornamental frieze and frieze moulding, p.c. os. per foot run complete, and fixed to brackets and fillets plugged to walls. (41) Lath with " lath-and-half " laths, plaster, float and set to all quartered partitions on all floors, filling in the backs behind the skirtings with rough plaster (gauged plaster or cement). Form all arris angles in Keene's cement on a backing of Portland cement. State if " single" or "double " laths be required, see clause Xo. 6. For special work, partitions may be plastered in gauged stuff or cement, as clauses Xos. 20 or 21. See notes under clause Xo. 22, but plastering to partitions in one or two-coat work is only done in very inferior positions. Walls to be papered should be " set " in pure lime putty. Walls to be whitened (or coloured) should be " set " in lime putty with a little sand. Walls to be painted should be "set" in plaster of Paris or other internal cement, such as Parian, Keene's, Martin's, or Bobinson's. Plastered partitions panelled out. Eough plaster in roof. Sound-proof plastered quartered partitions. Plaster to walls. (42) State if partitions are panelled out in plaster, giving the size of moulding and any enrichment. (43) Lath with " single " laths, and plaster the quartered partitions on the roof side of attics. (44) See Carpenter, clause Xo. 137. Then describe the plastering as clause Xo. 41. (45) Eake out joints of brickwork, hack over walls to form key, render, float and set in plaster all brick walls and partitions on all floors, filling in the backs behind the skirtings with rough plaster (gauged plaster or cement). Form all arris angles in Keene's cement on a backing of Portland cement. For special work, walls may be plastered in gauged stuff (or cement), as clauses Xos. 20 or 21. 2 G 450 PLASTERER. (46) Bender one coat, is only used on walls in rough situations, such as at the back of skirtings and window backs, and may cither be clone in gauged plaster, as clause No. 20, or in ordinary plaster, as clause No. 8. Bender and set, is used on walls in inferior work, and not often scratched over as in lathed work. It may be done either in gauged plaster, as clause No. 20, or in ordinary plaster, as clause No. 8. Bender, float and set, is used on walls in all ordinary and good class work. It is not often scratched over as in lathed work, but the floating coat is broomed over. It may either be done in gauged plaster or cement, as clauses Nos. 20 or 21, or in ordinary plaster, as clause No. 8. Plastered walls panelled out. Rough plaster in roof. (46) See clause No. 42. (47) Bender in plaster the walls in roof next attic rooms, as also to all flues and chimney breasts in roofs. See Bricklayer, clause No. 44. Batten walls and plaster. (48) The external walls on all floors on the south sou th-west side of building, to be battened out on the inner face with 2 in. (or 2^ in.) X f in. (J in. to 1J in.) fir battens 12 in. apart, plugged to walls, and where against flues fixed with iron holdfastg Then describe the plastering as clause No. 45, but of course the brickwork would not require hacking over. Battening to walls is mostly used against thin walls, or near the sea, to keep out the damp from entering the plastering. In hollow walls battening is not necessary. staff beads. (49) Bun 1 J diameter staff beads in Keene's cement, with splayed stops to archways and openings and to all similar positions, as also to angles of walls in passages. inside reveals, (50) Form the inside reveals, head linings, and in- soffits^and window ternal sin ii n i ngs to windows of plastered cellars, 1 in. thick in Portland cement and sand in equal proportions, finished a trowelled face, with the arris slightly taken off and keyed into the other work. (Also see Carpenter, notes to clause No. 144, as also for sketches.) For external sills in cement, see clause No. 73. Bender internal (51) Bake out joints of brickwork, hack over walls walls in cement. to form ft key> and ren( | er) float and set tne wa n s O f scullery 1 in. thick in Portland cement and sand in the proportion of 2 to 5, and finish a floated face. Concrete ceilings and soffits to stairs may be finished in Portland cement in a similar manner. (58) PLASTERER. 451 Cement skirting. (52) Kun round walls of scullery, kitchen, larder servants' w.c. (or other offices), and passages in base- ment, where against a cement or stone floor, a 7 in. x J in. plain cement skirting, formed with Portland cement and sand in equal proportions. Moulded cement skirting. (53) Sometimes certain rooms, halls and staircases have moulded cement skirtings. Describe as clause No. 52, giving size and labours ; also mention the mitres, irregular mitres, stopped ends, ends on splay, returned and mitred ends and circular corners. Cement backs to window backs. (54) Eough render in Portland cement f in. thick the brickwork at back of deal window backs. The brickwork behind the linings and shutters to windows may also be cemented or plastered over roughly, as also behind coil cases. Old plaster or cement renewed. (55) Hack off old plaster (or cement) from brick walls in scullery, rake out joints of brickwork, render, float and set in plaster (gauged plaster or cement, as clauses Nos. 20 or 21, or in Portland cement, as clause No. 51). Old plaster to ceilings or partitions renewed. Dubbing out. (56) Hack off old plaster from ceilings and par- titions in breakfast room, remove decayed laths, relath, replaster, float and set in plaster (or gauged stuff or cement, as clauses Nos. 20 or 21). (57) Eake out joints of brickwork to irregular wall of passage in basement, dub out in plain tiles and cement to 3 in. thick ; render, float and set in plaster (gauged plaster or cement, as clauses Nos. 20 or 21, or in Portland cement, as clause No. 51). Dubbing out in tiles may be done to thicken walls, as thickening out in brickwork would take too much space, and if done in plaster would be too weak. Pugging to floors. (58) See clause No. 46 in Carpenter. CLAUSES Nos. 59 to 62 should more- properly come under Painter; as also clauses Nos. 15 to 18, references to which will be found in Painter. 2 G 2 452 PLASTERER. (59) Whitening. (59) Size and twice whiten all ceilings, cornices, coves and centre flowers to all rooms, passages, land- ings, halls and soffits on all floors. See notes to clause No. 16. Ceilings and cornices may also be dis- tempered ; see clauses Nos. 60 and 18. On old ceilings the description would run : Wash, stop and twice whiten ceilings, cornices, coves, and centre flowers (state where), and cut out stains. If the old ceilings have been papered, the description would run : Strip, wash, stop, line with stout elephant lining paper, cut down joints, size and twice whiten ceiling, coves, cornices and centre flowers (state where). Ceilings are papered over with lining paper to hide the cracks when they are very bad, as it might entail too much work to cut them all out. Distempering. (60) Size, clearcole and distemper walls of kitchen, sciillery, larder, passages and servants' w.c. (and similar positions). See notes to clause No. 18. Distempering on old walls would be similar to clause No. 59 in the preparation. Colouring. (61) Twice size and colour walls of areas and larder (and similar positions). See notes to clause No. 17 ; and clause No. 95 under Bricklayer. Colouring to old walls would be similar to clause No. 59 in the preparation. Whitewashing (62) Twice limewhite (whitewash) ceilings, walls (limewhiung). an( j roo Ambers O f boiler house, coal cellar, areas and sheds. See notes to clause No. 15, and clauses Nos. 16, 93 and 94 in Brick- layer. In old work the description would run : Brush down (or scrape off) old limewhite, wash and twice, limewhite walls (state where). See clause No. 94 under Bricklayer. Parapet wall. (63) Eender the roof sides of parapet walls J in. thick in Portland cement and sand in equal proportions. (65) PLASTERER. 453 Prevention (64) Eender outside of walls of basement where imp * ground abuts, 1 in. thick in Portland cement and sand in the proportion of 1 part cement to 2 parts sand, and finish in neat Portland cement f in. thick, trowelled face. Asphalt may be used (see Bricklayer, clause No. 43), or slates and cement may be used (see Slater, clause No. 14). Ordinary Portland cement mixed with sand will not prevent wet penetrating walls. A finishing coat of neat Portland cement only is reliable when there is continual damp against the walls, but with walls above ground wet may be prevented coming through by treating them as in clauses Nos. 68 to 70. External lime stucco. (65) Eake out joints and hack over surfaces to form key to all external brick walls, sills, heads and reveals from first-floor level to roof ; render, float and finish in lime stucco, trowelled face, and paint over four times in oil colour (or finish with felt floated face, size and twice colour). Lath with " double laths," plaster, float and finish the eaves soffits (planceers) in a similar way, and paint as before (or colour). Eun two mouldings, each 3 in. girth, against walls and eaves boards. See clause No. 19 ; also see Carpenter, clause No. 86. State if eaves soffits are formed out in panels or with cast plaster brackets. Lime stucco between the bays of half timber work, as shown by the sketches in Carpenter, clause No. 333, would be similarly described. External stucco is not necessarily painted or coloured. If stucco is on timber studding, or timber and brick framing which is all flush, the description would run : Batten over the surfaces and reveals with 1 in. x 1 in. battens every 12 in. apart, lath with " double " laths, plaster, float and finish in lime stucco, trowelled (or felt floated) face, and paint four times in oil (or size and twice colour). Then describe the eaves soffits, mouldings, panels or brackets. External cement stucco. Describe the position of the work, and go on with render and set in Portland cement stucco, the setting coat to be mixed with washed sand. Paint four times in oil colour (or twice colour). 454 PLASTERER. (66) See clause No. 19. Cement stucco between the bays of half timber work, as shown by the sketches in Carpenter, clause No. 333, would be similarly described. If the stucco is on timber studding, or timber and brick framing which is all flush, the description would run : Batten over the surfaces and reveals with 1 in. x 1 in. battens every 12 in. apart, lath with " double " laths, render, float and set in Portland cement stucco, the setting coat to be mixed with washed sand and finished a trowelled (or felt floated) face, and painted four times in oil colour (or twice coloured). External rough (66) Describe the position of the work as in clause cast lime stucco. ^-^ ^ an( j ( ^ Q on w ^ render and rough cast in lime stucco (and twice colour if required). See clause No. 19. Rough cast lime stucco between the bays of half timber work, as shown by the sketches in Carpenter, clause No, 333, would be similarly described. If on timber studding, or timber and brick framing, all of which is flush, describe the battens as in clause No. 65 ; then lath with " double " laths, render and rough cast in lime stucco (and twice colour if required). External rough Describe the position of the work as in clause No. 65, cast cemer* stucco. and go on with render and rough cast in Portland cement stucco (and twice colour if required). See clause No. 19. Bough cast cement stucco between the bays of half timber work, rfs shown by the sketches in Carpenter, clause No. 333, would be similarly described. If on timber studding, or timber and brick framing, all of which is flush, describe the battens as in clause No. 65, then lath with " double " laths, render and rough cast in Portland cement stucco (and twice colour if required). Pebble dash. (67) Describe the position of the work as in clause No. 65, and go on : Render and float in lime stucco, and finish with pebble dash ; the pebbles being not larger than i in. (or | in.) diameter. See notes to clause No. 19. Pebble dash between the bays of half timber work, as shown by the sketches in Carpenter, clause No. 333, would be similarly described. If on timber studding, or timber and brick framing, all of which is flush, describe the battens as in clause No. 65, then lath with " double " laths, plaster, and float in lime stucco, and finish with pebble dash, the pebbles being not larger than % in. (or 3 in.) diameter. (70) PLASTERER. 455 Plain cemented external walls. (68) Bake out joints, hack over face to form key, render and set 1 in. thick in Portland cement and sand, in the proportion of 1 part cement to 3 (or 2J) parts sand, to the external walls of building, from 3 in. below ground line to roof level, form cement reveals and angles with sharp arrises. The window sills to be cemented over and throated. This is practically the same class of work as cement stucco, mentioned under clause No. 65. State if painted. If on timber studding, or timber and brick framing, all of which is flush, state the work is to be battened out as in clause No. 65, then lathed, plastered, floated and set in cement. Rough cement to outbuildings. (69) Bender walls, reveals, and sills of outbuildings in Portland cement and sand in the proportion of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand. Ashlar cemented walls with mouldings. (70) Bake out joints, hack over face to form key r render and set trowelled face (or felt floated face) in Portland cement and sand in the proportion of 1 part eement to 3 (or 2J) parts sand to external walls of buildings from 3 in. below ground line to coping level, round the parapets and down to the roof gutters. The setting coat to have a little washed sand mixed with it. Line out in ashlar courses from 1st floor string to coping level. Dub out from 3 in. below ground line to first floor string course- 1 in. extra thickness, and form blocks with channelled rustic grooves J in. deep, 1J in. wide, with similar reveals and voussoirs to arches. Dub out the angles of buildings from ground level to parapet with plain tiles and cement, and form similar rustic quoins standing out 1 in. beyond the rustic blocks on ground floor, and 2 in. beyond the plain ashlar blocks on first floor. Dub out plinth in plain tiles to an 1 in. extra thickness beyond the rustic quoins on ground floor, and run the plinth moulding 2 in. girth in cement and sand in equal pro- portions. Form the weathered, throated and moulded string course 8 in. girth, the moulded necking course 3 in. girth, the weathered, moulded, throated and sunk cornice 24 in. girth, and the weathered and twice throated coping with a moulding on front edge 4 in. PLASTERER. (70) girth in Portland cement and sand in equal proportions. Form the moulded architraves 8 in. girth with plain reveals to first floor windows ; and moulded, weathered and throated sills 4 in. girth to all windows on ground and first floor, in equal proportions of Portland cement and sand. Block out the main cornice with rough splayed York core (say) 2 ft. wide, 3 in. (or 4 in.) thick, in lengths of not less than 5 ft., with a brick core filling above and below. (See Mason, clause No. 33.) Form out the string on first floor with brick core. If instead of the plain cement parapet blocking a balustrade is required, then describe the cast cement moulded balusters with the diameter, height and dis- tance apart, including the modelling. Also mention the moulded base, with the girth of the moulding, and the size of the dies and half balusters. Describe any cast ornaments to the frieze, including the modelling. State if the rustic blocks and quoins are V shaped or moulded instead of channelled, and if vermiculated. JTotded V shafrd CAanellftl Vermiculattd The York stone core varies in size as to the projection of the main cornice, see Mason, clause No. 33. If the cement- work is on timber studding, or timber and brick framing all of which is flush, state the work is to be battened out as in clause No. 65, then lathed, plastered, floated and set in cement. State if the work is painted. Cemented columns or pilasters. (71) See Bricklayer, clause No. 38 for brick core, and go on : Bender and set in Portland cement in the proportions of 1 part cement to 2 parts sand, the columns and pilasters to entrance porch ; carefully form the flutings, mould- ings, caps, bases and enrichments. The setting coat to have a little washed sand mixed with it. The entablature with the mouldings would be described similar to clause No. 70. Portland cement (72) Hack off loose cement- work and re-cement. wash on old work. Scrape and was h down the face of old cement-work to buildings, cut out and stop up cracks, make good (77) PLASTERER. 457 mouldings, arrises and enrichments in Portland cement and sand in equal proportions, and wash down twice in Portland cement-wash the whole of the work. External cement (73) Form sills in Portland cement and sand in equal proportions in. thick, trowelled face, with a deep throat on the under side, weathered on top, and with a brick core backing. Cement sills are only done in very poor work. Cement reveals and soffits J in. (to J in.) thick are sometimes required to windows and doors of brick buildings, and painted over, with the arrises truly formed. For internal sills and reveals in cement, see clause No. 50. Cement floors and pavings. (74) Cement floors and pavings are often done by Plasterers. See Pavior, clauses Nos. 7, 8 and 9. Cement hearths. (75) See Pavior, clause ISTo. 5. Tiling. Plaster slabs. (76) Tiling is often done by Plasterers, layer, clauses Nos. 88 and 89a. See Brick- (77) When plastering to ceilings is required to be done very quickly, then ceiling slabs may be used. They are made from J in. to f in. thick in plaster of Paris on canvas, in slabs 2 ft. 6 in. wide by 2 ft. 6 in. or 3 ft. 6 in. long, and nailed to the joists with 1J in. nails ; the work is then floated over and set in the usual manner with plaster. 458 (1) GASFITTEK. TuMng.- (1) The pipes to be "Russell's "black" (or gal- vanised) wrought-iron welded gas tubing, with all tees, bends, angles, crosses, nipples, unions, screwed joints, elbows, pipe brackets, reducing sockets, caps, plugs, wall hooks, clips, bands and other connections; the joints being made with red lead cement. The tubing to be concealed in the plaster and fixed to walls with wall hooks and to woodwork with iron bands. The tubing in the servants' bedrooms, kitchen offices and like situations to be secured on the face of the walls with patent clips. For sketches of pipe fixings, see Plumber, clause No. 63. All tubing to be laid to falls, so that any water accu- mulating can be drawn off from any part ; a sufficient number of screwed caps or plugs being provided for this purpose. Tubing exposed to view to be painted three coats in oil colour and decorated to match the other work ; and where not exposed to view, such as under floors or con- cealed in the plaster, it is to be painted two coats. (See Painter, clause No. 49.) For casings to gas pipes, see Carpenter, clause No. 41. Floor boards covering up tubing to be fixed with brass cups and screws, with access traps. No floor joists or main timbers to be cut or bored through, except immediately against the walls, and then only in. down. It is preferable to fix all gas tubing on the surface of walls and ceil- ings, so that the pipes can be seen, and the least escape of gas detected. It is usually done so in servants' offices and like situations ; the tubing may be fixed either with w^all hooks, iron bands or patent clips. The patent clips keep the tubing away from the walls, and allow the pipes being removed with ease. Gas tubing for best work should be gal- vanised in addition to the painting. When gas has to be laid on to an existing building, the tubing may be fixed surface work if desired in the best rooms, encased in wood casings similar to electric light casings. (2) GASF1TTEE. 459 Wrouht-iron as tubin is made in the following sizes and weights : Ul 5,0 I L\_/ AJLft VAH-* Jl .V^-LJ.' Ibs. OZ. I in. bore weighs about 13 per yard run. i in - >3 >3 1 3 33 8" i Q - 33 1 13 i i n - 33 33 2 9 }) | in. > J) 3 8 ): 1 in. JJ 5 5 3> 11- in. 5> J> hy / 9 3> 1 j- in. J> 8 14 33 If in. J? J> 11 12 , ? 2 in. 3> 5' 13 7 ;j 21 in. 2-i- in. 3> 15 20 15 3> J > 2| in. 3^ 25 3 ;> 3 in. 53 >3 27 11 33 Composition tubing and block tin tubing are made in the following sizes and weights : J in. bore composition tubing weighs about 13 oz., and block tin weighs about 8 oz. per yard run. -f^ in. bore composition tubing weighs about 16 oz., and block tin weighs about 9J oz. per yard run. | in. bore composition tubing weighs about 21 oz., and block tin weighs about 11 oz. per yard run. -^Q in. bore composition tubing weighs about 26 oz., and block tin weighs about 14 oz. per yard run. Jin. bore composition tubing weighs about 34 oz., and block tin weighs about 17 oz. per yard run. | in. bore composition tubing weighs about 52 oz., and block tin weighs about 23 oz. per yard run. J in. bore composition tubing weighs about 68 oz., and block tin weighs about 30 oz. per yard run. | in. bore composition tubing weighs about 76 oz., and block tin weighs about 38 oz. per yard run. 1 in. bore composition tubing weighs about 88 oz., and block tin weighs about 47 oz. per yard run. India-rubber gas tubing and flexible glazed tubing are made in in., f in., j 7 g in., J in., f in. and in. interior diameters, and are used for attaching to gas burners for supplying table reading lamps. Composition tubing is used in inferior work. Block tin tubing is seldom used for gas, and copper tubing is not suitable. Bore is the clear internal diameter. To pass gas (2) The gasfitting is to be executed to the satis- inspector's faction of the gas company's inspector. Give the examination. ' company notice and pay their fees for connecting with their main. Make good all pavements, roads, kerbs and channelling disturbed, to the satisfaction of the local authorities. 46O GASFITTER. (3) Test gas. (3) Before covering up the tubing the whole system is to be tested by hydraulic pressure in the presence of the architect to five times the pressure in the company's mains, and any defects found are to be remedied. Cut away and make good. (4) Cut all holes and chasings and make good. The following sizes of gas tubing may be taken roughly as of sufficient capacity for supplying the number of jets mentioned below : Tubing J in. bore will supply up to fin. fin. | in. 1 in. 1 in. IJin. If in. 2 in. 3 gas jets. 4 or 6 10 or 12 16 25 45 or 50 65 or 70 100 or 120 140 180 or 200 But in practice gas tubing from J in. bore and upwards often has to accommodate many more lights than the numbers mentioned. An allowance of 4 cubic ft. of gas per hour should be made for internal lights, and 5 cubic ft. for external lights. An Argand burner requires from 6 to 10 cubic ft. per hour. There are two ways of supplying a building with gas : " First," and the usual method : By taking the largest pipe from the meter to the lowermost floor and diminishing the pipe as it ascends to each upper floor ; the lower floors having generally to supply the largest number of jets, must also be of a capacity to allow sufficient gas to pass onwards to the upper floors. " Secondly," or the unusual method : The largest pipe is taken to the top of the building and run round in the roof the full bore, with several separate pipes brought down from separate points off the main in the roof to each floor below, diminishing on each floor as they descend. Thus, in this case the pipes must be brought down sufficiently large to supply the lower floors, where the greater amount of work is required. It is only in very special cases that this method of distributing gas would apply, and will not therefore be further referred to. (5) GASFITTER. 461 The following description is an example case for supplying a building with, say, 110 lights by the first-mentioned or usual method : /Branfttii fb the vartou-* jboinft -f ^//^/^^//// ^s^^^^^^^^^^sss^ss^^zs^ /JSreincfie & to t/it various Aomfs - /*" w/tftf/w/fr y///////////////////^^^^ /JBranches A f/te various Aotn/f \* M&MW/t / /% / ftW/%M/MMtf^^ $? j-J3 ranches lb fhe various />0irt& T 2>i*c+ etr Connection with gas company's main. Stop cock. Syphon. Gas governor. (5) Open up ground in road and connect to gas company's main with 1J- in. screw ferrule, and take 1^ in. wrought-iron welded gas tubing to building, buried 2 ft. down in the ground in an 1 in. rough deal tarred trough filled with pitch, with an 1^ in. full-way brass stop cock and spanner fixed in an iron chamber in ground and bedded round in concrete, having an attached enamelled iron label marked " Gas Stop Cock to Syphon." Continue the IJin. pipe to a 1 quart syphon box, fixed in ground and bedded round in concrete, and provided with an attached enamelled iron label marked " Gas Syphon." Take the 1 J in. pipe on to a Stott's 1J in. patent self-acting gas governor, with lock and key, and labelled " Gas Governor," and connect to meter with heavy lead pipe and brass connections. This stop cock in the ground is for shutting off the gas from the gas company's mains when attending to the syphon. 462 aASFITTER. (6) Syphon boxes are only required when the service pipe from the gas company's main descends towards the building, so as to collect any con- densed liquids that may find their way down from the gas company's mains. When the supply from the gas company's mains ascends towards a building, a syphon box is unnecessary. Syphon boxes are made in 1, 2, 3 and 4 quart sizes. A gas governor regulates the pressure from the gas company's mains into the meter, so that gas may not force its way through the meter and be wasted through the burners, as is often the case when the pressure of the gas company's mains is great. Stott's gas governors are made for J in., | in., 1 in., 1 in., 1 in., 2 in., 2J in., 3 in. and 4 in. pipes ; there are also other makers. Meter. (6) Allow for the hire of an 80-light dry (or wet) gas meter, and fix on an 1J- in. wrought deal rounded shelf with brackets, and encase with ^ in. wrought deal beaded matching and bearers, with door hung on 1J in. brass butts, and provided with 1J in. brass knob and turn-buckle on plate. In deciding the capacity of a meter, only about five-eighths of the number of lights required should be taken into account, as meters are capable of supplying more gas jets than those indicated on the meter as its nominal capacity. Thus 110 lights would only require about an 80 light meter. Dry gas meters are made for 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 and 1000 lights. Vertical main. (7) Connect to outgo of meter with heavy lead pipe and brass connection, an 1J in. brass stop cock and spanner labelled " Gas Stop Cock to House," with an 1 J in. T piece 3 in. long and screw plug, and take 1 J in. main tubing up to ceiling of ground floor, continued on with 1J in. tubing to ceiling of first floor, and 1 in. tubing to ceiling of second floor. This T piece will collect any condensed liquids that may form in the house tubing, and can be cleaned out periodically by unscrewing the plug. This second stop cock is not absolutely essential. Branch pipes. (8) Branch off from the various vertical mains separate pipes to the following positions : ^ in. tubing to 20 positions in basement. in. to 30 on ground floor. J in. to 20 on first floor. J in. to 20 on second floor. \ in. to 4 on staircase, and finish with brackets, p.c. 12s. each. in. tubing to 2 positions to newel tops in hall, and finish with newel lamps, p.c. 30s. each. in. tubing to 1 position in hall, and finish with hall lamp, p.c. 3, with a 10 in. glass bell consumer above with brass chain and rose. (8) GASFITTER. 463 1 in. tubing to 1 position in billiard room, and finish with a six-arm fitting, p.c. 3. | in. tubing to 1 position in smoking room, and finish with a pipe jet and stop cock. 1 in. tubing to 1 position for hot plate in kitchen, , with stop cock (see Smith, clause No. 98). ^ in. tubing to 2 positions to geysers in bath rooms, with stop cocks, and allow the p.c. sum of 7 for each geyser. { in. tubing to 4 positions to gas stoves, with stop cocks, and allow the p.c. sum of 6 for each stove (see Smith, clause No. 88).' j in. tubing to 2 positions for gate lamps, and allow the p.c. sum of 5 for each lamp. |- in. tubing to 1 position for Sun burner, with bye- pass tap and regulator and stop cock, and allow the p.c. sum of 12 for Sun burner. f in. tubing to 1 position for gas oven in kitchen, with stop cock (see Smith, clause No. 99). In settling the positions of gas points do not omit the w.cs. and bath rooms. Of course the branch pipes need not necessarily all be taken separately off the vertical main passing through the rooms, so long as they are taken from horizontal branches off the vertical main of sufficient capacity to allow of the branch pipes to the various points being taken off the horizontal branches. Glass bell consumers may be placed in any position over fixed gas jets, where the jet is too near a ceiling. Jets should not be fixed nearer a ceiling than 3 ft., but at a sufficient height to allow people to pass under. SUn maTfor ^ } 9 15 20 27 44 63 and 81 ^ With diameters of 15 20 24 29 31 34 and 42 in. They are mostly used for lighting public buildings and the principal staircases of private houses. Owing to the volume of gas burnt, a con- siderable amount of heat is generated, which will cause an excellent updraught and assist the ventilation ; but a large exhaust tube should be taken from the top of sun burners out into the open air, with an access door. Also see the notes upon gas under " Ventilation." The Wenham and Meteor gas lamps are enclosed in a glass globe, and used for lighting public buildings and shops. They are a species of small Sun burner, and require a ventilating tube as well as a bye-pass tap and regulator. They are made in sizes to consume 6, 9, 12, 15, 20 and 23 cub. ft. of gas per hour. If a gas engine be required for any purpose, extra provision must be made in the size of the pipe taken from the company's main. Gas may be required to assist in creating an updraught in a flue or ventilator in the ceiling ; | in. to J in. pipes are usually large enough. Gas points in stables should be supplied with fixed brackets, and a 464 GASFITTER. (9) nozzle at some point for attaching a rubber tube for singeing the horses. Yard lamps are also required. In a kitchen (and sometimes in other rooms with skylights over) the gas tubing must be run across the light and under the blind ; see the sketch on page 182. Pendants. (9) p u t to kitchen a strong 2 light iron pendant, p.c. 1 5s., secured to bearers fixed to joists, with brass universal joint, Sugg's burners, and 7 in. opaque moons. Brackets. (10) Put to office a double-jointed bronzed gas bracket, p.c. 15s., with rose plate, mahogany block. Sugg's burner, and 7 in. opaque moon. Fittings. (11) Allow the sum of, say, 80 for gas brackets, chandeliers and other fittings. The gas fittings are not often included in a contract. Brackets are made " stiff," with arms either 6 in., 8 in. or 9 in. long ; " single swing," with an arm 12 in. long; "double swing," with two arms each 12 in. long. Pendants are made either to swing, to slide or stiff, and for one light or more. Library and (12) Allow for two 10 ft. lengths of india-rubber studio. tubing, with screw unions at either end for attaching to gas burners and reading lamps. Private carriage (13) Allow a p.c. sum, and take laying on the gas drive lamp posts. . (5) BELLHANGER WIRE BELLS. (Clauses Nos. 1 to 6 and 11.) wire bells, (1) Hang bells with ~No. 16 gauge stretched copper generally. w ^ re concea i e( j i n walls in stout zinc (brass, galvanised iron, or copper) tubing, and supplied and mounted with brass cranks, carriages, steel springs, copper wire check springs and bell board runners. The flooring over bell wiring is to be made movable, and fixed with screws. The bells to be 3 in. (3J- in. or 4 in.), of good tone, each bell giving a different sound; with an average weight of 14 oz. (to 2 Ibs.) each, and provided with brass pendulum indicators and springs. The metal to be composed of 1 part pure tin to 3 (or 4) parts of copper. Nos. 16 to 19 B.W.G. copper wire is used for bell wiring. Bell board. (2) The bell board to be 11 in. x li in. '(or 1 in.) wrought beaded and rounded deal, screwed to plugs in wall, with the names of the various rooms marked on. See Painter, clause No. 48. Boom bells. (3) Hang a wire bell to ring from each ground floor room to bell board, with lever bell-pulls, p.c. 5s. each; and from each first and second floor room with stranded silk cords and tassels near the beds ; and with plain cords and tassels to third floor bedrooms. Give any other position required. Bell levers may be in brass, china, glass or wood. W.C. bells. (4) Hang similar wire bells from each w.c. to bell board, with lever bell pulls, p.c. 3s. each. Call bells. (5) Hang similar separate wire call bells from ground to top floor; first floor to top floor; and top floor to ground floor, with lever bell pulls, p.c. 3s. each, and with the positions to which they ring written on the walls. 2 H 466 BELLHANGER. (6) Entrance door (6) Hang a similar wire bell to ring from front bel1 ' door to bell board, with bronzed sunk bell pull, p.c. 8s. ; and from tradesmen's entrance with sunk bell pull, p.c. 5s. Sunk bell-pull plates are made 5 in. X 5 in., 6 in. x 6 in., 5 J in. x 5 J in., 6 J- in. x 6 J in., 13 in. x 5 in., 8 in. x 3 in. ; and in 3 J in., 4 in., and 4^ in. diameters. Outside bell pulls may have long slide pulls, or chains and handles in iron, brass or gun-metal. Fire bell. (7) Allow the p.c. sum of (say) 10 for a fire bell, with brackets and rope pull. Church or school (8) Allow a p.c. sum. bells. Electric bells (9) The wire to be tinned copper covered with india-rubber and cotton, concealed in the walls in stout zinc (or copper) tubing. Where in ground the wires are to be covered with gutta-percha and tarred tape, and laid in a deal trough filled with pitch. Provide a battery with porous pots, and an indicator box in mahogany with glazed tell-tale front, with the name of each position marked on. All ground floor rooms to have press buttons, p.c. 2s. 6d. each, and bed rooms to have stranded silk covered wire with push tassels. Press buttons are made in china, glass, brass and wood. Give the number and position of bells required, as in clauses Nos. 3 to 6. State if any bell is to have a continuous action, such as is used in shops. Pneumatic bells, (10) Compressed air is employed through very small tubes. All the fittings are very similar to Electric Bells. Give the positions, as in clauses ISTos. 3 to 6. Eepairs to bells (H) Test all bell wires, strain up and repair with (wire or electric). ^0. .16 gauge copper wire, adjust all bells, cranks, levers, pulls, runners, blocks, boxes, springs and pen- dulums ; put new where defective or missing ; black all bells and relacquer the brasswork to pulls and pendulums. Test electric bells and fittings, and put in working order and recharge batteries. (3) 467 GLAZIER. Generally. fufty (1) The glass to be the best quality of its kind, free from bubbles, smoke wanes, air holes, scratches and other defects ; and cut to fit the rebates, with due allowance made for expansion; and carefully bedded in putty, back puttied, and sprigged (or pinned) where required with stout copper (or iron) sprigs. Vertical glazing to be glazed perpendicular. The British polished plate to be " Best quality," i in. thick, full (or bare), and bedded in putty and wash- leather (or vulcanised India-rubber). The British sheet to be second (or best) quality. Hartley's rolled plate to be carefully selected. i. glaziers' sprigs weigh about j- Ib. i. ' 1 Ib. in in Clean glass. Templates. j- Ib. per 1000. 1 Ib. (2) Clean all glass at completion inside and out. (3) Supply all templates for lead glazing, circular sweeps, or irregular shapes. Sheet glass (also called British sheet) is specified by the weight in ounces per superficial foot ; it is made in six qualities A, B, Best, Seconds, Thirds and Fourths, of the following weights : 15 oz. per ft. super, (generally weighs about 16 02.) and measures about y 1 ^ in. to y^ in. thick. 21 oz. per ft. super, measures about T T g in. thick. 26 oz. 32 oz. | 36 oz. 1 42 oz. J- ,, 15 and 21 oz. are used for ordinary glazing. 26 and 32 oz. are used for a better class of glazing. 36 and 42 oz. are used for the best class of glazing. A and B qualities are only used for pictures. Best, Seconds and Thirds qualities are used for ordinary glazing, according to the class of building. Fourths are seldom used, except in most inferior work. Coloured and stained sheet glass is made in 16, 21, 26 and 32 oz. per ft. super., the glass being coloured throughout. 2 H 2 468 GLAZIER. (3) Flashed coloured sheet is made in 16, 21, 26 and 32 oz. per ft. super., one side of the glass only being coated with a thin film of coloured glass. Ground (or obscured) sheet glass is sheet glass ground on one side, and is made in 15, 21, 26, 32, 36 and 42 oz. per ft. super ; it is suitable in positions where privacy is required. Enamelled and embossed sheet glass is made in 15, 21 and 26 oz. per ft. super., and is similar to ground glass, but ground in the form of a pattern. It may be in colours. Fluted sheet glass (also called English fluted sheet) is of a wavy section, and slightly obscured in transparency ; it is made in the fol- lowing weights : 15, 21, 26 and 32 oz. per ft. super., and suitable for any position where a small amount of privacy is required. " Patent plate " glass is sheet glass polished on both sides, and made in the " Usual " and " Extra white " colours (both being white) in three qualities Best, Seconds and Thirds, and specified by the following numbers : No. 1, measuring about T T g in. thick, and weighing about 13 oz. per ft. super. No. 2, measuring about ^ in. thick, and weighing about 17 oz. per ft. super. No. 3, measuring about -fa in. thick, and weighing about 21 oz. per ft. super. No. 4, measuring about J- to ^ in. thick, and weighing about 24 oz. per ft. super. It is suitable for glazing the best class of pictures, engravings and show cases, but seldom used fqr ordinary glazing in buildings. In buildings, the " Usual " colour is suitable ; and for pictures and engravings the " Extra white." Crown glass is made in six qualities, A, B, Best, Seconds, Thirds and Fourths, and in two thicknesses : 2^ in., weighing about 10 oz. per super, foot. A 16 to 18 oz. A and B are picture qualities. Best, Seconds and Thirds are ordinary glazing qualities. Fourths are used in small cottages. Crown glass is slightly, clearer than sheet. The largest sheet of crown glass obtainable is about 33 in.x2."> in., but crown glass is now almost entirely superseded by sheet glass. British plate glass may be either " rough " or " polished," such as : Rough cast plate. Eough rolled plate, either plain pattern, diamond, or quarry pattern. Polished plate. The rough cast plate is somewhat obscured, and is made J, f , J, 3 and 1 in. in thickness, and suitable for pavement lights, sky- lights and roof lights. (3) GLAZIER. 469 The rough rolled plate (often called Hartley's rolled plate) is also somewhat obscured, and having a series of small flutes on one side, either in very fine lines near together, or with 4 or 11 flutes to the inch run ; it is only made in one quality, in J in., ^Q in., in., and |- in. thickness, and is mostly used for top lights of lanterns, greenhouses and in roofs where too much light is not required. Diamond or quarry rough rolled plate is similar to rough rolled plate, but having the flutes rolled in diamond or lozenge shaped patterns. It is made ^ in., ^ i n -> an( ^ 4 i n - thick, and is mostly used in vertical glazing where privacy and strength are required, such as public halls and offices. The British polished plate glass is polished both sides, and per- fectly transparent. It is made in three qualities only, " Ordinary," " Best " and " Silvering," and can be obtained ^ in., T 3 g in., J in., |- in., ^ in., f in. ; in., |- in. and 1 in. thick ; the J in. full (or bare) being mostly used for glazing purposes ; and either J in. or J in. for silvering, It is suitable for the best class of buildings and large shop fronts. Shelves in shop fronts may be J in. to | in. thick, but the edge must be ground and polished, either on one or both edges-, or all round. If polished plate is bevelled on edges, state size of bevel, such as J in., -g- in., in., |- in., 1 in., 1J in. or 1J in. Bevelling is chiefly used for looking-glasses, screens, special doors and such like. Plate glass is very strong, and keeps out cold and heat better than any other description of glass. thedral glass is rolled plate about |- in. thick, or 26 oz. per foot \ ; it is slightly obscured, and may be either white or in tints of no Cathedral super, positive colour. It is mostly used in churches and schoolrooms. There are many other forms of glass in the market, many of which are slightly obscured, either white or coloured, such as hammered plate, muffled plate, Muranese plate, or rippled plate. Polished British plate is the most transparent of all glass. Sheet glass is next in transparency. Rough cast is only about one-half to one-third as transparent as British polished plate. Rolled plate is only about one-fourth as transparent as British polished plate. Common glass intercepts about 10 per cent, of light, 1 ground glass about 25 per cent., and opal from 40 to 50 per cent. Glass slates are made in plain rough plate, J- in., -^ in., in., | in. and J in. thick ; and in sheet glass, 16, 21, 26 and 32 oz. per foot super. Glass tiles are made in rolled rough plate, either plain or fluted, -J- in., f% in., J in., f in. and J in. thick; and in sheet glass 16, 21, 26 and 32 oz. per foot super. They are both made in the usual sizes of ordinary slates and tiles, and are fixed with copper nails, brass screws or oak pegs. Glass, in any position subject to jars, should be bedded in wash- leather. 470 GLAZIER. (4) Lanterns and Skylights. (4) Glaze the top lights to lantern and skylights with Hartley's -J- in. (fy in. or other thickness) rolled close ribbed plate, back puttied and sprigged with copper (or iron). The sheets to lap at joints J in., and cut a segmental (or diamond) shape, and clipped together with i Q - ( or f in.) copper (or zinc) clips (tingles). The vertical sashes to be glazed with 21 oz. fluted sheet, bedded in putty, and sprigged with J in. copper sprigs. For sketches of skylights and lanterns, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 124, 127, 129 to 131, and 133 to 134a. If the skylights be glazed with clear sheet glass, it is always well to glaze the eaves portions with Hartley's plate, on account of icicles during frost time. It is very usual now to glaze the top lights of skylights and lanterns by bedding the glass only in putty, flush with the upper surface of the glass, and then afterwards painting the glass to the framework, as the less putty in top- lights the better. Cutting the laps segmental or diamond shape, leads the water down the centre of the squares. The vertical lights to lanterns are often glazed with leaded glass. Ground and first floor windows. (5) Glaze the ground and first floor windows, with J in. full British polished plate, bedded in putty and washleather, and sprigged. The servants' offices on this floor to be glazed with 21 oz. sheet glass in putty and sprigged. Basement, second floor and attic windows. (6) Glaze all the windows on these floors with 21 oz. sheet in putty and sprigged. W.c.'s and bath. (7) Glaze bottom sashes of w.c.'s and bath room with 21 oz. fluted sheet in putty and sprigged. lights. Also see Painter, clause No. 39. W.c.'s may be glazed in any form of obscured glass, or in leaded Doors. (8) Glaze the upper panels of (say) six of the base- ment doors with 21 oz. fluted sheet bedded in wash- leather and putty. Hartley's rolled plate is also used in these positions, it is stronger but more obscured. Washleather or vulcanised india-rubber deadens the concussion when slamming doors. (11) GLAZIER. 471 Fanlights over Bedroom doors, second floor. (9) Glaze the fanlights over (say) eight of the second floor bedroom doors with 21 oz. fluted sheet, puttied and sprigged. In dark passages the light thus obtained may be an acquisition ; see Carpenter, clause No. 247. Entrance hall screen. n (10) Glaze the upper panels and fanlights to screen hall in 16 oz. muffled sheet glass in five tints to sketch, in -j 3 ^in. (f in. to J in.) lead cames, bedded in putty (or washleather) and sprigged, and secured to framing with -f^ in. iron saddle bars 18 in. apart, copper banded. For sketch, see Carpenter, clause No. 235. State if a design be painted on the coloured glass. Leaded lights in positions subject to concussion often bulge if the saddle bars are too far apart. It is also a good plan to glaze them at the back in addition with some clear glass, such as sheet or plate. Lead cames are made in various sizes from ^ in. to J in. wide, with grooves for the glass from -/. 2 in. to J in. ; the cames are either flat or rounded on the face in these sections Fretwork is similar to leaded light glazing, but the name applies more especially to leaded work in designs of figured subjects, which, of course, are hand painted. If no design be given, state the pattern and number of lines in the border, with their width and colours. If leaded lights be fixed in stone grooves, they must be run in with mastic. Shop front. (11) Glaze the shop front with l in. full British polished plate, seated and bedded in putty and wash- leather (or vulcanised india-rubber), and sprigged with copper spriggs. The small squares at top to be glazed with 16 oz. muffled tinted sheets in in. leaded cames, bedded in putty and sprigged. For sketches see Carpenter, clause No. 315. State if there be any circular bent glass to the shop front at the angle. 4/2 GLAZIER. (12) Looking-glasses. (12) Each of the (say) three wall spaces between windows in front room first floor to be covered over with a sheet of J in. (or -g in.) British polished silvered plate glass, " Silver- ing " quality, secured to a 3 in. X 2 in. rebated deal frame with f in. square framed deal back, rebated and grooved together and secured to wall with brass screws and eyes, and finished with a 2 in. X 1 J in. deal and compo moulded beading round, double English gilt. State if the glass is to be bevelled all round, with the size of bevel ; see notes to clause No. 3. Iron lights. (13) Glazing to iron sashes or lights is clone in precisely the same manner as to deal, but care must be taken to well bed the glass in putty, and instead of springs screws are used to keep the glass in place. Also see Smith, clauses Nbs. 69 and 70. Paintei.glass. (14) A p.c. amount is usually allowed for hand- painted glass ; see notes to clause No. 10. Internal (15) Glaze the internal dome light over principal staircase with clear 16 oz. muffled sheet glass, bent both on plan and section and bedded in putty, with a rim of coloured muffled sheet near the apex. Four of the lowermost squares are to be bedded loose, but secured. (For Painting, see Smith, clause No. 69.) Bedding four or more squares loose enables their easy removal, so that planks may be put across the span of dome for cleaning the glass on the underside, should it be inaccessible from the staircase. A cheaper way than double bent glass is to form the dome in angular sections on plan instead of being bent, and at a fair height up their (17) GLAZIER. 473 ^^TT^^ rm angular shape is almost imperceptible. By so doing it only requires the glass to be bent in section ; the description in this case would run as follows : Glaze the dome light over principal staircase with clear 16 oz. muffled sheet bedded in putty, with a rim of coloured muffled sheet near the apex. The lower- most squares are to be in bent glass on section only four of which are to be bedded loose, but secured. The remainder of the glazing to be straight. In a spherical dome all the glass has to be bent both ways. The glass may be bent in section only if the horizontal bars are straight VcnTilator Mm iii I ^\\\ instead of circular, but the appearance would be distinctly bad when looking up. Patent zinc and lead glazing bars. (16) There are many systems in vogue; amongst others may be mentioned Shelley's, Helliwell's, Braby's, Kendle's, Pennycott's and the British Glazing Co. It will be better to obtain an estimate for this description of glazing from the manufacturer selected, and put the amount in as a p.c. sum ; and then describe the kind of glass. Zinc bar glazing is mostly used for top lights, stations and conser- vatories. Glass ventilators. (17) The two top windows of office are to have Cooper's circular hit-and-miss glass ventilators 10 in. diameter, in 26 (or 32) oz. sheet (or \ in. plate) glass. or Moore's louvre ventilators, 15 in. X 12 in., in brass frames and levers and % in. British plate louvres. 474 , GLAZIER. (18) or in Zinc frames, brass levers and patent plate louvres. or in Zinc frames and levers and 26 oz. sheet glass louvres. Moore's louvre ventilators are made 6 in., 9 in., 12 in., 15 in., 21 in., 24 in. and 30 in. x 12 in. ; also 18 in., 24 in. and 30 in. x 18 in., and 24 in. and 30 in. x 24 in. Moore's circular glass ventilators are made for 3J in. to 10 in. dia- meters in 26 and 32 oz. sheet and % in. polished plate, and are sold with the square of glass itself. Cooper's circular glass ventilators are made and sold in a somewhat similar manner. Cooper's louvre Venetian ventilators are made in 1st, 2nd and 3rd qualities, 6 in., 12 in., 18 in., 24 in. and 30 in. x 12 in. ; also 15 in., 24 in. and 30 in. x 18 in., and 30 in. and 36 in. x 24 in. Pavement lights (18) Either allow a p.c. sum for pavement lights, or ceUars describe them thus :- Enclose the three (more or less) areas at pavement level with Messrs. Hay wood -g rog ^^ Eckstein's patent semi-prism and convex lens pavement lights, fixed in alternate lines in cement to an iron frame, let into the wall on the one edge and rebated in on the other edges to a 9 in. X 5 in. (or 6 in.) tooled (or rubbed) hard York kerb in lengths of not less than 6 ft., rebated out for lights, set and jointed in cement, dowelled at joints, and ends let 6 in. into wall. Paint the ironwork four times in oil colour. State if part of the lights are ventilated. Pavement lights may also be glazed with plain rough cast plate J in. to 1 in. thicknesses. When pavement lights finish against woodwork, such as the stall- board framing to a shop, then state that they are to have a water bar on the one edge. The St. Pancras Iron Co., Messrs. Hyatt and others are makers of pavement lights. There are special restrictions as to the length and width of pavement, lights in the various parishes. See Mason, notes to clause No. 50, relating to street kerbing, which would apply to the kerbs of pavement lights. stall-board lights Allow a p.c. sum. These are made in somewhat a similar way to pavement lights, and may be partly ventilated (21) GLAZIER. 475 Circular floor (19) Used for cellars and similar positions, in 10 in., lights for csiiars. 12 in ^ u in ^ 16 in ^ lg ^ 22 in and 25 ^ diameters, and either diamond or semi-prism lenses. . Chappuis's (20) Allow a p.c. sum. reflectors. These are very useful for reflecting light into dark places from the outside, and are slung up to the outside wall with chains. Rs-giazingto (21) Hack out all broken glass and cracked or starred glass over 1 in. long, re-glaze with new of similar kind. Hack out defective or perished putties and re-putty. 4/6 PAINTER OUTSIDE paintwork will last longer if done in the spring or autumn, preferably in the spring. Unseasoned woodwork covere.d with paint will decay sooner than if left exposed. Woodwork should be specially prepared in the finishing, if painted an enamel white, otherwise the grain of the wood will show through the paint ; see Carpenter, clause No. 5, with notes. Woodwork and ordinary plastering should be quite dry before paint- ing. When plastering executed in Parian or Keene's cement is to be painted, a coat of paint should be applied before the plastering has had time to dry; see Plasterer, notes to clause No. 21. The remaining coats of paint may be added after. Ordinary wood and plaster- work require at least four coats of paint : in high-class work six or seven coats, and even more coats may some- times be applied. Old paintwork repainted requires two or three coats. Ironwork requires at least three coats of paint. Paint for internal wood or plaster-work is generally composed of white lead, linseed oil, litharge (driers), a little turpentine, and the colouring pigment. In outside work, boiled oil may be used instead of linseed oil, especially in dark colours ; it also assists outside work in drying better. Linseed oil is no good for dark mineral colours, but should only be used for white. Knotting woodwork is covering. over the knots in the wood, either with " size knotting " (the old way, but little used) ; " patent " (shellac) knotting (the best and usual kind) ; or silver or gold leaf (not much used). The knots may also be cut out to a slight depth, and filled up with white lead, japan and turpentine, formed into a putty. Stopping woodwork is filling up the holes and cracks with putty or hard japan stopping ; usually the latter for outside work. Priming woodwork is usually done with red lead, as it fills up the pores and sets hard. Flatting is done with paint containing no oil ; it leaves a dead surface and the inequalities of the woodwork are not so liable to show as if done in ordinary oil paint ; but a little varnish mixed with the flatting coat improves the work and enables it to be the better cleaned. Ordinary flatting will not bear much washing, as it rubs off. Work finished an eggshell gloss is a flatting coat with varnish mixed with it. Bastard flatting is done by adding a little size to the ordinary flatting, and enables the work to be washed, and is cheaper than if mixed with varnish. Clearcole is made with white lead, water and size, and mostly used (2) PAINTEE, 477 as a first coat on old plaster surfaces, if much stained or greasy, before the whitening or distempering is done. Fresco work is plaster decorated specially while it is wet. Zinc white (oxide of zinc) gives a more dead white surface than if -white lead be used ; but more coats are required for the work to bear out. It is not considered so suitable for outside work as lead paint. White lead paint is suitable both for inside and outside work, but not in positions subject to the fumes of chemicals, as it discolours. Zinc white may be used in these positions. Paintwork finished white will turn yellow if unexposed to the light. Woodwork grained and varnished lasts longer than any other class of painting. Paint made from oxide of iron is better than white lead paint for ironwork. Eust should be scraped off ironwork before painting. Cast iron should be painted one coat before it leaves the foundry. Gilding is covering a surface with English gold leaf ; it may either be left dead or burnished. First the surface to be gilded is covered with oil gold size for dead gilding, and with burnish gold size for burnished gilding, and then gold leaf is laid over the parts, and either left dead or burnished with a burnisher as the case may be, and sized over. Mat gold is quite dull, and is laid on with water size ; it will not bear washing, but may be burnished. Double gilding is two layers of gold leaf. Enamel paint is sold already mixed, and gives an enamelled surface on the work. Charlton white enamel paint is very suitable as a white enamel. Copal or Coburg varnish is suitable for outside work, and over grained work. White enamel Coburg varnish and French oil varnish are both suitable for varnishing over work finished white as it bleaches the work out. Japanning is lead paint mixed with varnish. Sanding is throwing sand on wet paintwork on walls to represent somewhat a stone surface. Lining paper should be lapped at joints when fixed on an already painted surface. When large pictures are hung against painted plastered walls it is best not to paint the walls behind the pictures, so that the plaster may catch up any dampness from the air. Pictures should, however, always be kept clear of the walls. Whitening, colouring and painting should be left until the work is quite dry, otherwise it is liable to be spoilt. Notices as to (i) The contractor is to give the architect written separata coats. no tice of each separate coat of paint, varnish, colour, distemper or whitening, before applying to either wood, iron, plaster, stone or other work. Separate written notices beincr mven both for interior and exterior work. O D How to finish See Carpenter, clause No. 5, which may be inserted certain woodwork. i^ch coat a (2) Each coat of paint, colour, distemper or whiten- ing to be a different tint to the previous, and the whole of the paint, colour and distemper work to be finished 478 PAINTER. (3) Finishing coat. Tints. Imitation of woads. Stencilling. Touch up. White lead. Varnish. Staining. if practicable, one coat over the whole interior and ex- terior surfaces before- a next coat is applied. The work to be finished from the topmost story downwards. (3) The finishing coat of paint, varnish, colour, dis- temper or whitening to be done when the building is otherwise entirely completed. (4) All tints to be set up and submitted to the architect for approval. (5) Samples of imitation woods to be set up and submitted to the architect for approval. The imitation to be done in an artistic manner. (6) The stencils to be cut clean, and the stencilling left sharp. The omitted jointing of the stencilling to be put in afterwards with the brush. (7) Touch up all work at completion. (8) To be Champion's (or other) best old white lead. (9) The varnish for interior and exterior work to be Mander's. (or other) best copal. The varnish to paintwork finished white to be Mander's (or other) white enamel Coburg (or French oil) varnish. (10) The stains to be Stephens's, let down with water to the required tint. Oil stains may also be used, but are not so transparent as water. Whitening. (11) See Plasterer, clause No. 16. Distemper. (12) See Plasterer, clause No. 18. There are patent washable distempers, such as Morse's patent Calcarium and others. Colouring, (13) See Plasterer, clause No. 17. Whitewash. (14) See Plasterer, clause No. 15. Tar paint. (15) Boil together, in the proportion of 9 gallons coal tar, 13 Ib. slaked lime, 2 (or 3) quarts turpentine (or naphtha), and, after applying, dress over with sand. Suitable for canvas roofs. (20) PAINTER. 479 Tar for ordinary (16) Boil together, in the proportion of 6 gallons ' OI c al tar > 1 lb - resin > l lb - P ifcch > and a ppty hot - or, Stockholm tar, 6 gallons to 1 lb. pitch. on paint. (17) Oil colours to be mixed on the premises, and composed of best white lead, pure linseed oil, a small amount of spirits of turpentine, driers and a colouring pigment. Boiled oil to be used for outside work. Knotting and (18) Knot woodwork with " patent " knotting (or stopping^ordinary gize kitting), stop with hard japan stopping (or putty) and prepare for paint. or, Knotting and Knot woodwork with silver or gold leaf, stop with St cE n wdrkf l1 ^ ard J a P an stopping (or putty) and prepare for paint. or, Do. Cut out knots to a slight depth and fill up with hard japan stopping. Hub down between (19) Bub down wood and ironwork with sand-paper each coat. an( ^ gt0 p between each separate coat. Face down, and stop plaster-work between each separate coat. In preparing old woodwork, it must be pumice-stoned down. Analysis. (20) Allow the sum of (say) 10 10s. for analysis of paint. Wood and ironwork to kitchen, offices and servants' rooms may be finished : In paint, one tint all over. or, Grained and varnished. or, Stained and varnished. Wood and ironwork to servants' bedrooms is generally finished in paint, one tint all over. Wood and ironwcrk to best rooms, either living or bed rooms, may be finished : In paint in party colours (that is, in different tints) with the mouldings picked in separate tints, or with the mouldings gilt. 4^0 PAINTER. (20) or, The work may be finished a flat in the same tints, with the mouldings picked in. or, The work may be finished a white flat, and varnished. or, The work may be grained and varnished. Wood and iron work on staircases, halls and landings may be : Grained and varnished, or. Painted in party colours, with the mouldings picked in. The treads and risers may be finished white, or grained and varnished. The skirtings may be grained and varnished, or marbled and varnished. Wood and iron work to stables may be : Grained and varnished, or, Stained and varnished. Or, on the outside, where not subject to much wear, it may be finished in ordinary paint. INTERNAL PAINTED WORK. JFor painting to wood, iron and plaster in high class work, see the various paragraphs under clause No. 45 ; and for distempering to high class work, see the same clause. Internal wood and (21) Prime one coat in red lead priming, and paint (ordinar^wwk) a ^ i ronwor k, internal wrought deal and pine wood- work to windows, doors, skirtings, panellings, cornices, framings, partitions, staircases, cupboards, presses, sink fronts, dressers and other fittings, fitments and finishing in three (or four) coats of oil colour to tints. Plate racks, foot boards, dresser tops, table flaps, table tops ; shelving in larders, pantry, presses, cup- boards and other positions, are not to be painted ; but the edges of shelves in cupboards, except in linen cup- board, and both sides of all cupboard doors to be painted to match the other work. (21) PAINTER. 481 State if any of the work is to be finished in party colours ; if finished a flat ; if any mouldings are to be picked in separate tints ; or it* gilt. Thus, after the general description of the internal paint-work, the description might run as : Finish the dining room, drawing room and billiard room on ground floor, and the two best bedrooms on first floor in party colours, with one (or more) moulding of the architraves, panels and skirtings picked in a separate tint. or, The dining room, drawing room and billiard room on ground floor, and the two best bedrooms on first floor to be finished a flat mixed with varnish in party colours, with one (or more) moulding to the architraves, panels and skirtings picked in a separate tint. or, Finish the drawing room a flat white mixed with varnish, and once varnish in French oil varnish. or, Finish the dining room and billiard room grained and overgrained as wainscot (or pollard) oak (Honduras or Spanish mahogany or other fancy wood), and twice varnish in copal. or, Finish the drawing room grained and overgrained bird's-eye maple, and once varnish in French oil varnish. or, Finish the dining room grained and overgrained Amboyna wood (a very fancy wood), varnish three times in copal, felt down between each coat, and finally hand polish. or, Finish kitchen offices comb-grained as oak, and twice varnish in copal. Comb-graining is a very effective and cheap way of graining wood- work. Graining and overgraining is a better and more expensive imitation of a fancy wood. In grained work, three coats of paint are often considered sufficient, but in most cases four coats are necessary, and in some cases five. The actual graining in imitation of oak is done in oil, but with bird's- eye maple, mahogany and similar transparent woods, the graining is done in water-colour, as it is the more transparent. Paint margins 10 in. wide to treads and risers of stairs, and 15 in. wide to passages, landings and halls, 2 I 482 PAINTER. (22) whether in wood or stone, on all floors, finished a bastard flat and once varnished in copal (or grained, and twice varnished). Balusters to be finished to match the woodwork of stairs, and once varnished ; newels to be grained to match the handrail and twice varnished. Skirtings to stairs, halls, landings and passages to be finished to match the woodwork of stairs (or marbled and twice varnished, or grained and twice varnished). Paint flock See Paperhanger, clause No. 13. paper. Paint Lincrusta See Paperhanger, clause No. 7. Walton. Gilding. (22) Gild one (or more) moulding to the architraves, panels and skirtings in drawing-room in English single (or double) gold leaf, left dead (or burnished) and sized. If varnish touches gold leaf it will spoil it. Gold beading. (23) Eun round walls of drawing and dining room, along the cornice, skirting, and architraves of doors and windows, a f in. burnished gold moulding fixed with needle points. This beading is not much now used. These mouldings may be obtained in black and gold ; plain polished black ; or polished stained woods, in in., f in., in., 1 in., 1 in., 1 J in., If in., and 2 in. sizes. staining. (24) Stain, stop, twice size and twice varnish in copal the woodwork to kitchen and servants' offices. The deal work is very effective without staining if clean in figure. Stain, stop, twice size and twice varnish in copal the pitch pine in hall. Pitch pine is very effective without the staining. Plain deal or pine (25) To be finished to match the other work of wood chimney- rooms pieces. Floor margins. (26) Plane down, stain, stop, twice size and twice varnish floor margins 2 ft. wide, to dining room, draw- ing room, billiard room and bedrooms on first floor. (33) PAINTER. 483 In old work the description would be : " Scrape, stain, size and twice varnish floor margins." Iron chimney- pieces. (27) May be painted to match the other work, or grained and twice varnished, or marbled and twice var- nished. iron coil cases (28) The iron coil cases and gratings in walls to be and gratings. painted to match the other work, the gratings in floors to be finished black. ironwork not (29) All iron or steel joists, carriages, girders, exposed to view. lintelgj flitches, columns, rod's, plates and other steel or ironwork bedded in floors, walls or in other parts not exposed to view, to be painted two coats in oil colour, in addition to one coat to be received at the foundry. Straps and bolts. Old wood, iron or plaster work repainted. (30) See Smith, clauses Nos. 7 and 19, and Car- penter, clauses Nos. 74 and 75. (31) Clean old paintwork and touch up. or, Touch up old varnished work, and once varnish in copal. or, Pumice stone down existing paintwork to a smooth face, stop, prepare and paint two (or three) coats oil colour. Where the work is much worn, it is to have additional coats so as to bear out. State how finished, as any of the ways mentioned under clause No. 20. Generally on old work two or three coats will be found sufficient, unless the work be very bad, when four coats may be required. "Where old work has been blistered by the sun, it may be burned and scraped off and repainted as ordinary new work. Cracks in old plasterwork if large, may be necessary to be filled up in Parian cement. French polish. (32) Stop and French polish all oak, walnut and mahogany (or other fancy wood) work. Generally required to bath and w.c. casings, handrails, table flaps and panelling. Old French polished work. (33) Eevive French polished work, or, 2 i 2 484 PAINTER. (34) Scrape, stop . and re-French polish mahogany, oak, walnut (or other fancy wood) work. Polish oak floors. (34) Stop and French polish oak floors. Floors may also be wax polished, when a dull polish is required, or if the floor is required for dancing. Also, see Carpenter, notes to clause No. 67. Old oak floors. (35) Plane, scrape, touch up, stop and re-French (or re-wax) polish oak floors. If the oak floors are not discoloured or uneven they will not require planing over. Also see Carpenter, notes to clause No. 67. P ffi^ tpl iiin r (36) See under Clause No. 45, which would be coves, corniceTand modified to the amount of coats and labour to be centre flowers expended, (ordinary work). State if any mouldings to cornices, coves, centre flowers, or ceiling ribs are picked in different tints, or if gilt. Paint plaster (37) See under clause No. 45 which would be walls. modified to the amount of coats and labour to be expended. State if any mouldings on panelled walls are picked in different tints, or if gilt ; if there be a dado painted a different colour to the filling above ; if with an 1 in. line border on top, or a 3 in. stencilled border. Where there is no cornice a 1^ in. line border may be described against the ceiling, or a 3 in. stencilled border. Cament skirtings (38) State if painted, grained or marbled, and reveals. stipple glass. (39) Stipple glass in w.c. windows white. Whitening to (40) See the paragraphs in Plasterer, clause -No. 59. soffits, ceilings, coves, cornices and centre flowers to new or old work. State if mouldings to cornicss, coves, centre flowers or ceiling ribs are picked in different tints, or if gilt. Distempering to (4i)__See Plasterer, clause No. 60. soffits, ceilings, cornices, coves and centre flowers to new or old work. (45) PAINTER. 485 State if mouldings to cornices," coves, centre flowers, or ceiling ribs are picked in different tints, or if gilt. Distempering to (42) See Plasterer, clause No. 60 ; and see the notes 1 S old? W to clause No. 37 as to picking in mouldings on walls, or line or stencilled borders, or dado a different tint. Colouring to walls, (43)_g ee Plasterer, clause No. 61. new or old. "Whitewash walls, new or old. (44) See Plasterer, clause No. 62. Paint on plaster (45) Painting on internal plaster walls to high cilsfwork^ew class work ma ^ be described as :- or old! Face down, stop and prepare plasterwork of walls to a smooth face, paint one coat in oil colour, fill up with distemper filling, face down, oil in, paint three (or more) coats in oil colour, and finish one coat stippled in flat colour mixed with varnish to tints with an egg- shell gloss. If cracks in walls are very bad, they must be cut out and stopped up first in Parian cement. Painting to plaster ceilings in high class work, new or old. Painting on internal ceiling to high class work may be described as : Face down, stop and prepare plaster ceilings, soffits, cornices, coves and centre flowers to a smooth face, fill up with distemper filling, oil in, and paint three (or more) coats in oil colour, and finish white one coat stippled a flat mixed with varnish, egg-shell gloss. If badly cracked, either cut out and fill up with Parian cement or line with lining paper. Painting to wood Painting to wood and ironwork in high class work in d hlghT y be described as :- work, new or old. Face down, prepare wood and ironwork, fill up in hard stopping, paint one oil, fill up in distemper filling, rub down, oil in, paint three (or more) coats in oil colour, and finish one coat flat white, mixed with varnish, and once varnish over in French oil varnish (or white enamel varnish). State if backs of shutters are to have less coats of paint. Distempering to Fill up cracks in Parian cement, prepare ceilings and sTwork^ wa ^ s > li ne with stout elephant white lining paper, lap new or old. ' and cut down joints, clearcole, and distemper to tints. 486 PAINTER. (46) Numbers and names to rooms. (46) Paint in block letters 1J in. deep separate num b er on each bedroom door. These numbers may be in enamelled china or iron plates screwed on. Paint " W.C." on each w.c. door. Paint " Bath Eoom " on each bath room door. Paint " Lavatory " on each lavatory door. Describe any other lettering required. Description of cisterns and pipes, Names of bells (47) Paint on all cistern casings to hot, cold and hewing pipes, a description as to what they supply. Attach zinc (or copper) labels to all stop-cocks to gas, hot and cold water, heating and fire hydrant pipes, with a printed description as to what they control. (48) Paint on bell boards the rooms to or from which the bells ring. Attach to walls near all bell pulls and speaking tubes, small ivory labels with the names of the rooms to which they speak, printed on. (49) All gas, hot, cold, heating and other pipes, whether lead or iron, plain or galvanised, to be painted three coats in oil colour where exposed to view, and two coats where not exposed to view ; but heating coils behind coil cases to be twice distempered. Also see Gasfitter, clause No. 1, Plumber, clauses Nos. 23 and 63, and Smith, clause No. 106. Painting pipes. w,c. seats. Clean glazed brickwork. (50) See Carpenter, clauses Nos. 282 to 284 (51) Wash and leather down glazed brickwork. Eelacquer old (52) Take off all ironmongery from windows, doors, clean S onmongery cupboards and fittings before commencing to paint. Clean all locks, oil, and supply with keys where missing. Put new ironmongery where damaged or broken. Clean and relacquer all brasswork, including picture rods and curtain poles, and refix all ironmongery. Eejapan all japanned work. Brasswork may be fairly well cleaned up with oxalic acid if relac- quering is not desired. Sweep flues. (53) Sweep all old flues before commencing lo paint. (58) PAINTER. 487 Clean windows (54) See Preliminary Items, clauses Nos. 70 and 69. and scrub floors. Clean marble (55) See Mason, clause No. 125. chimney-pieces. The polishing to marble chimney-pieces, or other marble work, may be revived by slightly polishing with putty powder, after being cleaned with plain soap and water. Plain soap and water is best for cleaning delicate marbles. When marble is very much scratched it must be entirely gritted down and repolished. Electric light (5 5 a) Paint electric light casings to match the other casings. work where they come across. See Electric Lighting clause, No. 4, with notes. EXTERNAL PAINTING. External wood- (56) Prime in red lead, and paint all external (ordin? } wrought woodwork to doors, windows, skylights, traps, fascias, soffits, barges, verandahs, roofs, gates and other parts, in three (or four) coats oil colour. State if the last coat is finished in varnish ; if the work is varnished over ; if the sashes are picked in a different tint to the frames ; if the work is finished in party colours ; or if grained and varnished. Front door. The front door to be finished in party colours, and twice varnished (or grained and twice varnished), with the number lettered on in English gold leaf 3 in. deep, double gilt. Back door. Paint " Tradesmen's Entrance " in block letters 2 in. deep on back door. Name of house. Paint the name of the house on the front entrance gates (or in gold leaf) 2 in. deep. French polishing. (57) Describe any French polishing to mahogany or other hard woodwork, see clauses Nos. 32 and 33. French polishing is not suitable for outside work ; the best way is to slightly bring the work forward with French polish, and then twice varnish it over. Old work. (58)_See clause No. 31. Ironwork. (5 8 a) Paint all ironwork to railings, gates, guards, grills, gratings and other ironwork ; lead or iron soil, 488 PAINTER. (59) ventilating, stack and waste pipes, heads, eaves gutters inside and out, three times in oil colour. All galvanised ironwork to be first coated with Mordant's compound, and then painted as in the other ironwork. Eainwater pipes may be heated and coated inside with tar. Ironwork may be painted with oxide of iron paint. Mordant's compound is composed of pure soft water, 64 parts, chloride of copper, 1 part, nitrate of copper 1 part, sal-ammoniac 1 part, hydrochloric acid, 1 part. Painting to stucco- (59) See clause No. 65 in Plasterer. work. Old plasterwork will only require two or three coats. State if only the reveals of windows and doors are painted. Colonringto (60) See clauses Nos. 65 and 66 in Plasterer. stucco-work. Painting on brick- (61) Usually requires five or six coats. Enamel work ' paint may be used. On old work two or three coats may be sufficient. Cement-wash on (62) See clause No. 72 in Plasterer. old work. (2) PAPERHANGEK. ENGLISH papers are made 21 in. wide in 12-yard lengths. French papers are generally 18 in. wide in 9-yard lengths. Lining papers are made 22J- in. wide by 12 yards long, and may be obtained either plain white, or plain distemper tints, or in plain oil tints. In common papers the pattern is printed on the natural colour of the paper. Sanitary papers are common papers made washable. Some papers are made with a varnished surface. Satin paper is first painted over, then polished, and the pattern printed on afterwards ; it should always be hung with a lining paper underneath, as it is very liable to stain. Best papers are printed by hand ; common papers are machine printed. Flock papers have the pattern raised with flock. Anaglypta and Lincrusta Walton are papers with a raised surface, and are suitable for painting. Papers containing arsenic should not be used. Plastering should be quite dry before paper is hung. Thin sheet lead, tin foil, gutta-percha, india-rubber, and thick brown paper are used on damp places on walls to keep the damp back, but it is better to let the walls dry out. Dining rooms are often papered with a dado and border, and a filling above. Drawing rooms are either papered all over or with a filling and frieze. Best bedrooms may be done in the same way. Common bedrooms are generally papered all over. Staircases, halls and passages are either plain papered all over, or else with a dado and border and filling above. State if the dado and border are twice sized and twice varnished. Staircases, halls and passages are also papered all over with marble paper, twice sized and twice varnished, and lined out' with pencil in blocks. Bathrooms and w.cs. are either papered all over, twice sized and twice varnished ; or else papered with an already varnished paper, but in these positions it is preferable to varnish the paper over. Papering should be left until the walls are quite dry, otherwise the paper will be spoilt. Prepare walls. (i) The walls and ceilings to be stopped, rubbed down, sized and carefully prepared to receive the papers. Size. (2)_ Double size " to be used. " Double size " is twice the strength of ordinary size. 490 PAPERHANGER. (3) Paste. (3) To be made from best white sifted wheat flour, alum and clean boiling water. Prime cost. (4) See Preliminary Items, clause No. 65, and in addition allow for preparing walls or ceilings and hanging. The discount allowed off the list prices of paper is usually 33 J per cent. Hanging papers. (5) All papers to be cut close on both sides and hung with butt joints. Satin paper to (6) Line walls of drawing room with stout elephant Dm ' lining paper, lapped at joints and rubbed down, size, and paper with satin paper of the p.c. value 5s. per piece. Hang a frieze paper 15 in. deep of the p.c. value Is. per yard run. The lining paper may be distempered over and rubbed down before papering. Hand-printed (7) Hang walls of dining room with a hand-printed Pap6 room S paper dado 3 ft. high, of the p.c. value Is. 6d. per yard run, a border 4 in. deep of the p.c. value 3d. per yard run, a paper filling above of the p.c. value 3s. per piece, and a frieze 15 in. deep of the p.c. value Is. per yard run. or, The dado to be lined with thick brown paper, sized, and covered with Lincrusta Walton of the p.c. value 2s. Gd. per yard run ; paint two coats in oil colour, and pick out the ornament in a separate tint (or in gold). When a raised paper dado is used, such as Lincrusta Walton or Anaglypta, a dado rail is generally put ; see in Carpenter, clause No. 204. First floor (8) Hang walls of first floor bedrooms with hand- Bedrooms, printed papers of the p.c. value 2s. 6d. per piece. Second floor (9) Hang walls of second floor bedrooms with machine-printed (or sanitary) papers of the p.c. value Is. 3d. per piece, with an 1 in. paper line border against ceiling (only required if there be no cornice). staircase. (10) Hang on staircase walls a hand-printed paper dado 3 ft. high of the p.c. value Is. Qd. per yard run, a paper border 4 in. deep of the p.c. value 3d. per yard run, and a paper filling of the p.c. value 2s. 6d. per piece. (15) PAPERHANGER. 491 or, Hang walls of staircase with marble paper of the p.c. value 2s. per piece, line out in pencil blocks, twice size and twice varnish. Varnished marble papers are seldom now used, but they wear well. Old marble paper (H) Distemper over marble paper on staircase, rub a sandpaper down, size and hang a paper of the p.c. value 2s. 6d. per piece (or with marble paper varnished as clause No. 10). w.c. and bath- (12) Hang walls of w.c. and bathroom with a tile- pattern paper of the p.c. value 2s. 6d. per piece, twice size and twice varnish. or, Hang walls of w.c. and bathroom with a varnished tile paper of the p.c. value 3s. per piece. Paper already varnished is not so good as varnishing over paper, as the joints of the varnished paper when trimmed down are without varnish. Ceiling paper. (13) Hang paper of the p.c. value of 2s. Qd. per piece on ceiling of morning room. or, Hang ceiling of drawing room with flock paper of the p.c. value 15s. per piece, size and paint two coats oil colour, the raised surfaces to be rolled flat a separate tint. Old paper removed. (14) gfc r ip O ff \& paper, stop up cracks in parian, rub down, stop, size and paper walls (describe the paper and state where). The old walls may be distempered and rubbed down before repapering. Gold mouldings. (i5)_s e e Painter, clause No. 23. 492 GENEEAL EEPAIES AND ALTERATIONS. THE following general clauses may be taken as embracing the whole of the building ; but in some cases, it is as well to describe the particular repairs separately to each room or other part of the building. Roof. Externally. Internally. Take out cracked and broken slates (or tiles), put new of similar kind, and fix with lead (or copper) tingles. Eedress the lead (or zinc) work, and relay with new where cracked. Clean out gutters, cesspools and stack pipes. Eejoint stack pipes, and paint two oils. Paint eaves-gutters inside and out, three oils. Point in cement to defective flashings. Eake out open joints of brickwork to chimney stacks, parapets, party walls and copings, and point in cement a weather joint. (If any walls are rendered, state, hack off loose rendering, and re-render in cement.) Eeset and point stone coping in cement. Eestore missing chimney pots, reset all pots and flaunch in cement. Eepair woodwork and paint three oils. Erect scaffold, rake out joints of brickwork to all external walls of building, clean down, stain and weather joint point in cement (or tinted mortar), re- move scaffold and make good -putlog holes. or, Erect scaffold, rake out joints of brickwork to all external walls of building, clean down, stain, fill up joints in mortar, and tuck joint point in fine stuff; remove scaffold and make good putlog holes. Eake out joints of brickwork to garden walls, and point up in blue-ash mortar (or cement). ' Eepair all cement sills, reveals, cornices and mould- ings in neat cement. Hack off loose and decayed cement-work, and re-render in cement and sand. Take down, and rebuild bulged portion of area walls in cement, and reset coping. Eepair damaged ironwork and rehang gate. Hack 'out all broken glass, and cracked or starred glass over 1 in. long, reglaze with new of similar kind. Hack out defective or perished putties and reputty. GENERAL REPAIRS AND ALTERATIONS. 493 Take up carpets, beat and relay. Cover up and protect all furniture. Examine, repair ' and Berlin (or Brunswick) black all stoves and ranges, and put in working order. Put new fire lumps where worn out or broken. Point up in cement round' stoves and ranges. Take out cracked or damaged cement (stone or marble) hearths, and put new of similar kind. Clean and bleach with potash white marble mantel- pieces and curbs, reset where loose, and repair where damaged. Ease all sashes, casements, doors and other wood- work, repair all decayed or damaged parts, and tighten up mouldings. Put new sash lines to windows, and cords to skylights where worn or broken. Put speaking tubes in working order, and repair fittings, and put new where missing. Fix loose floor boards, and put new where perished or much worn. Take out rotten joists and put new. Kepair cement- work to copper, and put new fire-door and fire-bars, and new copper (or galvanised iron) copper. Cut out all broken, loose or cracked plaster to ceil- ings, soffits, walls, cornices, centre flowers and mould- ings, and replaster. Carefully wash out the enriched parts, so that they show up sharp. Test all gas fittings and pipes and put in working order, rebronze and relacquer the fittings. Where the paintwork is perished, it is to have extra coats of paint so that it may bear out ; as also to all new parts of woodwork where repaired. Touch up all work at completion. Describe repairs to any other items which may appear defective. For further requirements in the nature of repairs, alterations or items which may bear upon these works, see also : Preliminary Items, clauses Nos. 1 to 80 generally, selecting out those which may be required. Drainage, clauses Nos. 28 to 35 and 60. Excavator, clauses .Nos. 8, 13, 14 and 33. Pavior, clause No. 3. Bricklayer, clauses JSTos. 2, 21, 34, 40, 69, 89a, 94 and 108. Mason, clauses Nos. 46, 62, 89, 103A, 106, 125 and 128. Carpenter, clauses Nos. 11, 31, 42, 69, 158, 162, 167, 199, 226, 254, 275, 318 and 333. Smith and Founder, clauses Nos. 23, 82. Slater, clause No. 14. 494 GENERAL REPAIRS AND ALTERATIONS. Plumber, clauses Nos. 47 and 65. Plasterer, clauses Nos. 14, 55 to 57, 59 to 62, 04 and 72. Bellhanger, clause No. 11. Glazier, clauses Nos. 2 and 21. Painter, clauses Nos. 26, 31, 33, 35, 40 to 48, 51 to 55a, 58, 59 and 62. Paperhanger, clauses Nos. 11 and 14. Eoadmaking, clauses Nos. 15, 29 and 31. Electric lighting, clauses Nos. 4, 7 and 23. 495 VENTILATION. GENERALLY speaking, air inlets should be low down, and air outlets liigh up, in opposite positions. Each air inlet should not be more than 48 to 60 square inches in area; this will allow sufficient air to pass through per hour for the requirements of two persons. Tobin's tube air inlets may therefore be made about these sizes ; see Carpenter, clause No. 312, and Bricklayer, clause No. 57. Air may also be brought into a room through a drawer inlet, with a perforated zinc or fly wire on top ; the drawer can be opened and closed at will. Air may also be brought into a room between the meeting rails of a sash window, a deep bead being provided on the oak sill so that the lower sash may be slightly raised without feeling a draught at the sill level; see Carpenter, notes to clause No. 144, with the sketches to clauses Nos. 144 and 146 in Carpenter. For other air inlets through windows, see Carpenter, clauses Nos. 148, 152 and 177 with sketches. Fanlights over doors and windows may be used either as air inlets or outlets. Air outlets may be twice the size of air inlets. Moore's and Cooper's glass louvre and disc ventilators may be fixed in a window, either as inlets or outlets, see Glazier, clause No. 17. Air outlets may be taken up a flue beside the chimney flue with an iron plate between ; this plate becomes heated and assists the upcast, see clause No. 56 in Bricklayer. Air outlets may also be taken from the ceiling level into these flues, or else along the joists to the external walls with hit- and-miss gratings in the ceiling and ordinary gratings in the outer walls. Air will pass through mortar, brick, sandstone and plaster, but not through paper or limestone. The ordinary fitting window will allow from 5 to 8 cubic feet of air to pass into a room per minute. A room to be healthy should be provided with 3000 cubic feet of pure air per person per hour. Air must not be changed in a room more than three or four times per hour to be without draught ; therefore a room should contain from 750 to 1000 cubic feet of space per person, which being changed three or four times per hour, would give 3000 cubic feet of air per person per hour. The cubical contents of a room should only be reckoned up to 12 ft. high, as above that height the air is mostly stagnant. The space the furniture occupies must also be allowed for in calculating the available cubic contents of a room. An ordinary fire-grate will provide an outlet for about 10,000 cubic feet of air per hour, or sufficient for four or five persons. 496 VENTILATION. A one-gas pendant with an air-outlet tube above will discharge 1000 cubic feet of air per 1 cubic foot of gas consumed ; and an ordinary gas burner will consume 3 cubic feet of gas per hour and produce 6 cubic feet of carbonic acid per hour, and consume as much oxygen as five persons. Two sperm candles, or one good oil lamp, consume as much oxygen as five or six persons, and give out as much carbonic acid. Each person exhales 6 cubic foot of carbonic acid per hour. Pure air contains per 100 parts : 20 * 815 parts of oxygen ; 79*185 parts of nitrogen ; 0*06 parts of carbonic acid ; and a small percentage of argon. (1) 497 EOAD-MAKING. EOADS and footpaths may be divided under two headings, " paved " and " metalled." Paved roads require a fall of f in. to the foot each way from the crown to the side channels, and metalled roads J in. to | in. to the foot. Paved footpaths require a fall of | in. to the foot from the highest point to the kerb, and metalled footpaths J in. to the foot. In paved roads the bottoming or foundation should be of concrete 9 in. to 12 in. thick. In metalled roads the bottoming may be 6 in., 9 in. or 12 in. thick ; and formed either of chalk, burnt clay, ballast, gravel, hard core, slag, flints, or hard broken bricks according to the locality. It should be laid in two thicknesses, each layer being rolled and consolidated with a 3 horse- power steam roller. If the natural earth be solid gravel, chalk, or rock, no artificial foundation or bottom- ing is absolutely necessary, the top metalling being then only required. In paved roads the top surface may be of granite setts, asphalt, wood blocks, or tar paving. In metalled roads the metalling should be at least 6 in. thick, and may be of broken Guernsey, Aberdeen, Leicester, or Cornish granites ; trap rocks, greenstones, basalts, Silurian grits, flints, gravel, sandstones (limestones are not good), or beach pebbles, according to the locality ; all of which should pass a 2 in. (IJ in. or 2^ in.) ring and be laid in two thicknesses ; each layer being rolled with a 3 horse-power steam roller, with fine gravel or sand as a binding material. Paved footpaths may be laid with York stone, slate, granite, or other stone flagging, or with artificial stone paving, on a hard core or concrete bedding. They may also be paved with concrete paving, laid u in situ," or asphalt or tar paving, on a concrete bedding. Metalled footpaths may be covered with fine gravel or stone chippings, laid on coarse gravel or stone, and rolled with a 4 cwt. hand roller. Country roads for vehicular traffic should be at least 36 feet wide, the footpaths being on each side one-sixth of the entire width of the road. With a road 36 ft. wide, this would allow for the carriage-way 24 ft. in width, with a 6 feet path on either side. Eight feet is a sufficient width for each vehicle, therefore with a carriage-way 24 ft. wide it would allow three vehicles to pass at one time ; a carriage-way should therefore be some multiple of 8 ft. Sixteen feet is enough to turn a carriage and pair, but 20 ft. is desirable ; a large one horse van requires 20 ft. Kerbs should not be less than 3 in. or more than 7 in. above the road channels. The least width of country roads for foot traffic only, should not be less than 24 ft. Many of the turnpike roads are only 30 ft. wide, with footpaths 6 ft. wide. If possible the gradient to a roadway should not exceed 1 in 40. The London Building Act, 1894, requires the entire least width of 2 K 498 ROAD-MAKING. (1) roads for carriage traffic to be not less than 40 ft., and for foot traffic 20 ft. The gradient to be not less than 1 in 20. The fall from crown to side channels | in. per foot. The kerb not less than 4 in. or more than 8 in. above the side channels. The footpaths to have falls of -J in, to the foot if paved, and J in. if metalled. A 36 FT. WIDE COUNTRY EOAD, OR PRIVATE CARRIAGE Bo AD, WITH FOOTPATHS. (Clauses Nos. 1, 2, 4 and 5.) Carriage-way. (1) Excavate ground to an average depth of 18 in. for a carriage-way 24 ft. wide to contour, for a length of (say) 200 ft., together with two branch roads each having a length of (say) 50 ft., and spread the earth on the properties adjoining (or wheel and deposit 22 yards run, or cart away). Fill in the carriage-way with clean hard gravel core (or large slag, chalk, burnt ballast, or hard broken brick) 12 in. deep in two 6 in. layers ; each layer being well rolled and consolidated with a 3 horse- power steam roller. Spread over 4 in. clean ballast to pass a 2 in. ring, roll and water, and finish with 2 in. finer ballast on top, also rolled and watered with suf- ficient sand (clay or loam) for binding purposes, and formed to a curvature of J in. to the foot from the crown to the side channels ; the crown being slightly rounded for a width of 4 ft. The side channels to fail towards the road gullies. See clause No. 5 for the " crossings " ; clause No. 2 for the footpaths and clause No. 4 for the kerb. The bottoming to carriage-ways may be formed with a layer of 6 in. of burnt ballast and chalk mixed in equal proportions, and 6 in. of hard core on top. Chalk has great binding qualities ; but it must be kept from the weather. The class of road described is very suitable where there is not a very great amount of traffic, such as in parks and private roads to grounds. When in these positions the bottoming may be from 6 in. to 9 in. thick. Metalled footpaths in gravel to country roads. (2) Excavate ground for footpaths on either side of carriage-way 6 ft. wide (3 ft.. 4 ft., or 5 ft.) to a fall of in. to the foot towards the kerbs, and deposit the earth on the adjoining properties ; (cart or wheel away), spread 4 in. (or 3 in.) coarse ballast to pass a 2 in. ring, (3) ROAD-MAKING. 499 well watered and rolled with a 4 cwt. hand roller, and finish with 2 in. good binding gravel and hoggin, also watered and rolled. - This form of footpath is suitable for country lanes and private roads. Any hard core 3 in., 4 in. to 6 in. deep may be used as a bottoming to footpaths. The top layer, from 2 in. to 3 in. thick, may be in granite or other hard stone, or quarry chippings. Screened cinders make a dry foundation, both for paths and roads. A good pathway suitable for lanes and across private properties may be made with screened cinders 3 in. to 4 in. thick, with the screenings on top about 1 in. to 2 in. thick well rolled in. Paths or footways may also be formed of natural asphalts, artificial asphalts, brick, stone, granite, slate or concrete paving ; and instead of being paved over the entire width with any of these materials, they may have a portion paved over only from 2 ft. 6 in. to 4 ft. or 5 ft. wide along the centre. Clause No. 2 would refer to the side metalling, and any of the following clauses, Nos. 3, 6 to 14, 16, 17, 26 and 34, would apply to the centre portion. PAVED FOOTWAYS. (Clauses Nos. 3 to 14, 16, 17 and 34.) A good tar pave- (3) Excavate ground for footpath on either side of ootway ' carriage-way 6 ffc. (3 ft., 4 ft. or 5 ft.) wide to a fall of i in. (or f in.) to the foot towards kerb, and deposit (cart or wheel) on adjoining properties. Spread 4 in. tar paving composed of limestone clippings screened through sieves of 1^ in., J in., J in., and \ in. meshes, one ton of which is to be mixed with a boiling composition composed of 12 gallons of doubly distilled tar, . J cwt. pitch, and 2 gallons creo- sote ; the larger stones being placed at the bottom and worked up with the finer to the top, and dressed over with fine grit or stone dust, and rolled in with a 10 cwt. hand roller. Derbyshire limestone chippings or broken Kentish rag make the best tar pavements, and may be laid 2 in. (or 1J in.) thick to pass an 1J in. ring, and 1 in. thick to pass a in. ring mixed with doubly distilled tar, and with the fine grit dressing on top, as before. This will make as good a pavement as that just described. Messrs. Constable supply a tar paving somewhat similar to the above 3 in. thick. Tar paving for footpaths is much used in suburban districts. Tar paving ^is laid 2J in. 3 in. and 4 in. thick for foot traffic; and 6 hi. and 9 in. thick for roads and promenades. 2x2 500 ROAD-MAKING. (4) Hobman's limestone tar paving is laid 2J in. thick for foot traffic, and 4 in. for roads and promenades. Hard core 3 in. thick, or 3 in. of cement concrete, may be required as a foundation in some positions before the tar paving is laid. Gravel tar paving is mixed in the same way as limestone, but it wears lumpy ; limestone tar paving wears more evenly. If the tar is doubly distilled, the paving is not liable to smell. In tar pavements, the limestone, Kentish rag or gravel is first heated, and the boiling tar then thrown over it. Kerb. (4) To be in 12 in. X 6 in. Aberdeen granite, laid flat (or on edge) in lengths of not less than 3 ft. (5 ft. is a good length), with the top and front surfaces finely dressed (axed), and the back edge and ends squared and dressed (drafted) 1 in. down and jointed together in cement mortar. The kerb corners to be in similar 12 in. x 6 in. Aberdeen granite worked to a circular sweep 18 in. external radius (or other sweep, the size mentioned being about the least possible sweep for a road at right angles). Finely axed hard Norway granite kerbs are also much used. Kerbs are generally 5 in. X 10 in., 6 in. x 10 in., 5 in. x 12 in. and 6 in. X 12 in. laid on edge ; or 6 in. X 12 in., and 8 in. X 12 in. laid flat ; when laid flat, a cement concrete bed under is desirable, say 12 in. .widexG in. to 9 in. deep; when laid on edge, concrete is not necessary, unless the foundation be bad. If the foundation be hard then the concrete bed is not requisite in either case. The outer top edge of kerbs is sometimes bevelled off. Crossings. (5) Pave the four crossings 3 ft. 6 in. (or other) wide with fairly well dressed 3 in. (4 in. or 5 in.) Aberdeen granite setts 7 in. deep, laid in parallel courses in fine gravel on a 9 in. (or 6 in.) cement con- crete bed, and grouted in cement and well rammed. The setts to be square the full width and kept close together. Crossing setts may also be in Aberdeen, Cornish, Enderby or Mount Sorrel granite, 5 in., 8 in. or 9 in. deep. York paving to (6) Describe the excavating as clause No. 2. The paving to be laid to a fall of in. to the foot towards the kerb, with 2J in. tooled, quarry-worked, hard York stone flags, not more than fourteen stones being laid in 100 super, ft., and jointed and laid in parallel courses, with the joints alternately broken, and set and jointed in blue lias lime and sand (or cement and sand) mortar, and bedded in sand on a 4 in. hard gravel (or brick rubbish) bed. (14). Kerb. KOAD-MAKING. See clause No. 4. 501 York stone flagging is largely used for footpaths in 2 in., 3 in., 4 in., 5 in. and 6 in. thicknesses. It is seldom used with a rubbed face except in private terraces and colonnades* It does not get slippery. All flag pavements of whatever description of stone require a solid foundation, which may be made either of hard core 4 in., 6 in., or 9 in. thick ; or lime (or cement) concrete 4 in., 6 in., or 9 in. thick, or with both if the foundation be poor; and whether laid on the hard core or on concrete it requires a sand bedding to take the inequalities of the stone. Victoria stone paving to footway. (7) Is laid 2 in., 3 in. and 4 in. thick, in the same way as York paving, 2 in. being the usual thickness. It is an artificial stone and wears well. Also see Mason, clause No. 31. Bath stone paving to footway. (8) Is laid 3 in. thick in the same way as York paving. Corngrit and Corsham Down are the usual quarries from which Bath stone paving is obtained, but Bath stone is very soft for pavements. Caithness flagging to footway. (9) Is laid in the same way and of the same thick- ness as York paving ; it makes a capital pavement and does not get slippery. Slate flagging to footway. (10) Is laid in a similar way to York paving and does not get slippery ; it wears well and is not required so thick as ordinary flagging. Purbeck paving to footway. (11) Used chiefly in churches (a mixed green in colour). It makes an excellent pavement and is laid 2 in. thick in the same way as York paving, and used either with a rubbed or tooled face, and either in random or parallel courses. Portland stone paving to footway. (12) Is laid in a similar way to York paving, in 1^ in., 2 in., 2J in. and 3 in. thicknesses, but with a. rubbed face, and chiefly used in private terraces. Silex paving to footway. (13) This is a very hard stone and makes one of the best pavements. It is laid in the same way as York paving, either 2 in., 2 in. or 3 in. thick. Granite paving to footway. (14) Is laid in a similar way to York paving, 3 in., 4 in., 6 in., 7 in., 8 in. and 9 in. thick, and when in the thicker sizes no kerb is necessary. It gets somewhat slippery. 502 ROAD-MAKING. (15) also, Aberdeen, Cornish, Enderby and Mount Sorrel granite paving is laid in parallel courses 5 in. wide by 5 in. 7 in., 8 in. and 9 in. deep in sand, and jointed in cement as with York paving. Old paving to foot- ways relaid. Concrete paving to footway. (15) Take up old York (or other) paving, square and relay in lime (or cement) mortar, and make out with new as required. (16) Describe the excavating as clause No. 2, and a cement concrete bed 6 in. (or 9 in.) thick, and go on : Lay 3 in. concrete pavement in two layers in 6 ft. widths with f in. laths placed between, the first layer being 2J in. thick and composed of 4 parts Portland cement to 1 crushed granite (or other hard stone), and the second layer J in. thick, composed of 1 part Port- land cement to 2 parts finer granite crushings worked up to a trowelled face, and when thoroughly set, wet sand is to be spread over the face when first used for traffic. Fine uncrushed shingle or ballast may be used instead of granite or stone, but it is not so good. There are patent concrete pavings made such as Homan's patent granite concrete paving 1 in., 2 in. and 3 in. thick, obtained from Mount Sorrel granite. Ward's granite-faced concrete flags are used 2J in. thick ; and there are other makers. Brick paving to footway. (17) Describe the excavating as clause No. 2, and a concrete foundation 4 in. (6 in. or 9 in.) thick, and if necessary hard core under. Lay blue Staffordshire 9 in. x 4J in. X 2 in. paving bricks in cement on an 1 in. (or f in.) floated cement (or lime) and sand bedding, and grout in cement. or, Ordinary blue Staffordshire bricks 8} in. X 4J in. x 2 fin.; or chequered blue Staffordshire bricks; or ordinary building brick paviors. See notes under clause No. 1 in Pavior for brick paving to other positions. Brick pavements wear very uneven, and blue Staffordshire bricks wear slippery. See that the blue goes right through the bricks and is not merely surface colour. (20) KOAD-MAKING. 503 TAR PAVING TO A PUBLIC CARRIAGE DRIVE. damage drive. (18) Describe the excavation and any core bottom- ing as clause No. 2. Form the surface of carriage drive with a fall of f in. to the foot from crown of road to side channels, the crown being rounded off for a dis- tance of 4 ft. Lay 4 in. (or 5 in.) clean Mendip lime- stone macadam, to pass a 2 in. ring; and IJin. (or 2 in.) Mendip limestone macadam, to pass a f in. ring. Each layer being heated and mixed with boiling tar and well rammed and rolled with a steam roller. Form the channels to falls to the gullies. Public carriage drives are not often paved with tar pavement. The promenade. Describe the excavation, and any core bottoming, as clause No. 2. Form the surface of promenade to a fall of f in. to the foot towards the kerb. Lay 3 in. gravel to pass a 2 in. ring ; f in. Mendip limestone to pass a | in. ring ; and f in. Mendip limestone screenings to pass an ^ in. sieve ; each layer being heated and mixed with boiling tar and well rolled with a 10 cwt. hand roller. The paving may also be similar to clause No. 3. Kerb. See clause No. 4. An esplanade. (19) Describe the excavation and any core bottoming as clause No. 2. Form surface of esplanade to a fall of f- in. to the foot towards the kerb ; lay 1 J in. gravel to pass an 1 J in. ring ; f in. gravel to pass a f in. ring ; and in. fine gravel sif tings ; each layer being heated and mixed with boiling tar (about 1 J gallons per yard super.). The paving may also be similar to clause No. 3. Kerb - See clause No. 4. GARDEN PATHS. Paths - (20) Excavate ground for new paths to an average depth of 12 in. and deposit on the site within 22 yards run (or cart away). Fill in with hard dry brick rubbish 6 in. (or 12 in.) deep, well rammed, and laid to a fall of J in. to the foot from the centre to the sides, with the sides falling slightly to the gullies. Cover with good screened gravel 2 in. thick to pass an 1^ in. ring, and fine gravel 1 in. thick, with sufficient hoggin for binding ; and a 504 ROAD-MAKING. (21) layer of shells m - thick on top. Each layer to be well rolled and watered. This will make a first class path, but must be modified according to the amount to be expended. Shells as a top layer are very suitable and very clean. A very good garden path may be formed with gravel (or any of the materials mentioned in clause No. 2) to pass a in. ring, mixed with hot tar and pitch (10 gallons of tar to 1 Ib. pitch), and laid 3 in. or 4 in. thick on concrete 4 in. deep ; and finished with fine binding gravel to pass through a in. mesh sieve, thrown over the surface 1 in. or 1 in. deep, and well rolled so as to be incorporated with the tar paving beneath. This forms a very solid gravel path which is not liable to kick up ; and is very suitable for the best class work. It soon dries up after rain, Garden edging. (21) Form the edges to paths with plain roll buff garden edging tiles J in. thick (state if ornamental). Garden edging tiles are made in various colours, about 8f in. long, 6 J in. deep. A 36 FT. WIDE MACADAM EOAD. (Clauses Nos. 22 to 24.) Carriage-way. (22) Excavate ground to an average depth of 18 in. to contour for a carriage-way 24 ft. wide for a length of (say) 200 feet, together with two branch roads each having a leogth of (say) 50 feet, and spread the earth on the adjoining properties (or wheel, and deposit 22 yards run or cart away). Fill in the carriage-way with clean hard broken bricks (or other hard core or large slag) 12 in. deep, in two 6 in. layers, each layer being well rolled and consolidated with a 3 horse-power steam roller ; and finished on top with 6 in. Guernsey granite metalling to pass a 2 in. ring spread over in two 3 in. thicknesses, each layer being well rolled and watered and incorporated with a sufficient amount of sand and gravel for binding purposes. The carriage- ways to be formed to a contour of J in. to the foot fall both ways from the crown to the side channels, and the side channels to fall slightly towards the road gullies. This is the best form of country road; gravel roads are cheaper, but wear out quicker. Granite macadam is laid 3 in., 4 in., 5 in., 6 in., 7 in., 8 in. and 9 in. deep. Side channelling. (23) Form the side channelling (gutters) in 5 in. (3 in. or 4 in.) Guernsey granite setts 7 in. deep, three (27) BOAD-MAKING. 505 courses wide, laid in fine gravel and bedded and grouted in cement mortar and rammed. The side channels are not always formed with granite setts ; often merely in the road metalling itself. Crossings. See clause No. 5. Kerbs. See clause No. 4. Whinstones, syenites, basalts from the Trappean rocks, Devonshire, Cornish, Aberdeen and Guernsey granites, greenstones, flints and beach pebbles may be used as macadam, to pass a 2 in. ring. If beach pebbles be used, they require a large amount of gravel. Beach pebbles and flints are the least suitable. Pebbles require a fair amount of hoggin (screenings from gravel) to bind them together owing to their roundness. Footpaths. 34. (24) See clauses Nos. 2, 3, 6 to 14, 16 and 17 and Pebble paved (25) Jersey or Guernsey pebble paving may be laid 4 in. or 5 in. deep in screened gravel (hoggin) on a similar depth of bottoming, and in a similar way as described to macadamised roads, see clause No. 22. This form of road paving is used more for small side streets and alleys ; it wears very well. Bea ^ el)ble (26) Beach pebbles are laid in fine gravel, on a hard foundation and rammed in ; they are found mostly i n Q[^ towns, and seldom now used. Flint roads. (27) Flints to pass a 2J in. ring may be laid in precisely the same way and on the same bottoming, as described to macadamised roads, see clause No. 22. Kentish flints are very suitable. Flint roads are mostly found in districts where the flints are obtain- able locally ; but they do not make the best roads. In all metalled road where the foundation is bad, either more earth must be removed or else faggots or brushwood from 4 in. to 6 in. deep must be laid as a first layer under the road bottoming ; and in this case underground cross drains are essential. 506 ROAD-MAKING. (28) DRAINAGE. The size of the drains (sewage drains are not referred to here in any way) depends entirely upon the length of the roads and the number of the outlets. Drains are required both for metalled and paved roads to take the surface water from the road gullies. In metalled roads where the foundation is bad, drains are in addition also required to lead the water that finds its way under the road bottoming into the gullies or other outlets. Thus, if the ground be fairly soft, lay underground drains across the road, say 15 ft. to 20 ft. apart, com- posed of agricultural tiles, bricks, or flat stones, filled in round with small stones, and connected to similar side drains into the gullies or ditch outlets. In fairly hard ground if the curvature of the road be properly formed, the water will find its way naturally to the sides, and can then be caught up in the side drains under the channelling and led off at once into the road gullies or ditch outlets ; the cross drains in this case are not absolutely necessary. Side drains should be laid from 2 ft. to 3 ft. deep. Messrs. Doulton, Jennings, Adams and others are makers of suitable gullies to catch the mud washed from the surface of the roads before the surface water enters the main road drains. The grids must be strong as they are subject to rough usage. Macadam (28) Form ground to curvature and roll with heavy ^a made-upToU 011 r U er 5 l a j bushes 6 in. deep and again roll. Lay cross drains with 2 in. agricultural drain pipes every 15 ft. apart, leading into 4 in. similar side drains connected to gullies. Lay and spread hard core of brick rubbish (or chalk) to pass a 3 in. ring, well roll and consolidate, and coat over with 3 in. of gravel, water and roll, and finish with 3 in. (or 4 in.) of Guernsey granite, maca- dam metalling to pass a 2 in. ring (or gravel), also water and roll and incorporate with sufficient binding finer gravel, and finish the surface to a fall of J in. to the foot from crown to the side channels, the crown being rounded for a distance of 4 ft. Then describe the channels, kerb and footpaths as in clauses Nos. 22 to 24. Eepairs to (29) Pick up the top surface some 3 in. deep, re- P. air > and la ^ 3 in ' ^ uernse y ( or other ) granite, metal- ling (gravel or other road metalling) to pass a 2 in. ring, well water, and roll with a 3 horse-power steam roller, and incorporate with a sufficient amount of fine gravel for binding. (30) ROAD-MAKING. 507 A 40 FT. WIDE KOAD PAVED WITH GRANITE SETTS. (Suitable for large towns and cities.) Carriage-way in (30) Excavate the ground to an average depth of granite setts. -^g ^ f QT a carr i a g e _ wa y 28 ft. wide to contour for a Channels. length of (say) 200 feet, together with two branch roads, each hav- ing a length of (say) 50 ft., and cart the earth away (or otherwise dispose of). Fill in the carriage- way with cement concrete 9 in. (or 12 in.) thick, composed of 1 part Portland cement to 5 parts ballast and sand, and formed to a fall of f in. to the foot from the crown to the side channels, with the crown rounded off some 4 ft. wide. Lay 3 in. X 7 in. deep X 10 in. (to 12 in.) long Aberdeen (or Cornish) granite setts in parallel courses and touching, on a 2 in. sand (or fine ballast or hoggin) bedding; and grout in cement and sand mortar, and well ram. Each stone to be fairly well dressed and squared the full width through. Form the side channels 3 (or 4) courses wide parallel with the length of road, with setts 4 in. X 7 in. deep X 12 in. (to 18) long. Guernsey pitching may be obtained 5 in. x 6 in. deep, 4 in. X 4 in. deep, 4 in. x 7 in. deep, and 3 in. X 5 in. deep ; and Aberdeen pitching 5 in. X 6 in. deep and 3 in. x 5 in. deep. The length of pitching varies from 8 in., 10 in., 12 in. to 14 in. long. Setts are also laid on a bed of 12 in. of clay puddle instead of on the concrete. Crossings. The crossings to be paved 4 ft. wide, with 4 in. (or 5 in.) x 7 in. deep x 12 in. (to 18 in.) long similar granite setts. In courts and side streets 4 in. cubes are much used. Lime concrete, composed of 6 parts ballast to 1 ground stone or hydraulic lime, may be used as a foundation. Enderby granite crossings and channels 5 in. X 7 in. deep are much used. Kentish rag and many local tough stones are used as paving sett. Granite setts as a paving to roads is about the most lasting of all classes of pavement. Kerb. See clause No. 4. 508 Footpaths. Bepains to old sett paving. ROAD-MAKING. (31) These may be formed in asphalt, or of any other class of paving ; see clauses Nos. 3, 6 to 14, 16, 17 and 34. Setts are never used. (31) Take up and relay the old granite setts on sand and gravel and grout in cement and ram, and make out where required with new. Carriage-way. A 40 FT. WIDE EOAD PAVED WITH WOOD. (Suitable for large towns and cities.) (32) Excavate ground to an average depth of 18 in- for a carriage-way 28 ft. wide to contour, for a length &8X8SS8&W of (say) 200 ft., together with two branch roads, each having a length of (say) 50 ft. and cart away (or otherwise dispose of). Fill in the carriage-way with 9 in. (6 in. or 12 in.) cement concrete, composed of 5 parts ballast and sand to 1 Portland cement, and finish with a floated cement face in. (to 1 in.) thick, having a fall of f to the foot from the crown of road to the side channels, with the crown slightly rounded off some 4 ft. wide. Lay well seasoned 3 in. x 9 in. X 6 in. deep Baltic red fir blocks, free from sap, large knots and shakes, with the end grain uppermost in transverse parallel courses, with in. (or | in.) joints kept apart with laths, and the interstices grouted in cement and sand grout in the proportion of 1 Portland cement to 3 of sand ; and well rammed and top dressed with fine shingle 1 in. thick. Form the channels to falls to gullies 3 (or 2) blocks wide, laid parallel with the length of roads. An 1 in. (to 1J in.) space to be left for expansion for 12 months, and filled up in sand in the meantime. An 1 in. fall in 3 ft. is very good, or ^th of the width (slightly under f in. to a foot). Blocks are also used 3 in. wide X 8 in. and 11 in. long, and 5 in. and 7 in. deep, and may be of Baltic or Dantzic fir, pitch pine, spruce, beech, larch, oak, elm, ash and Swedish yellow deal. Gothenburg thirds are much used. Oak, elm and spruce are least suitable. Jarrah and Karri hard wood block paving is now much used ; 5 in., 6 in., 4J in. and 4 in. deep, with J-in. to J-in. joints filled in with creosote and pitch grout ; or else the blocks are merely dipped in the grout and laid close together, and dressed over with cement grout. Hard wood blocks 9 in. X 3 in. x 4 in. deep are mostly used. (34) ROAD-MAKING. 509 If the foundation be poor 6 in. to 9 in. hard core or gravel may be laid under the concrete. The concrete may be hydraulic lime concrete ; and whether of cement or lime, it may for cheaper work be worked up roughly to an even face and the blocks laid on sand instead of on a floated cement face. The grout may be hot lime and sand grout. The blocks may also be laid on and in hot tar, lime and pitch grout, or asphalt ; or on a com- position composed in the proportions of 6 gallons hot coal tar, mixed with 1 Ib. pitch, 1 Ib. resin, with the cement grout run in on the top. The Improved Wood Paving Company lay an excellent pavement by laying similar fir blocks pickled in creosote oil and top dressed with shingle. This is much used in London streets. About 7 Ibs. hot creosote oil is required to a cubic foot of the blocks. Wood pavement is very suitable for cities and towns subject to great wear. Kerb. See clause No. 4. Footpaths. These may be in asphalt or stone paving. See clauses Nos. 3, 6 to 14, 16, 17 and 34. They are never laid with wood blocks. A 40 FT. WIDE BOAD PAVED WITH ASPHALT. (Suitable for large towns and cities.) Carriage-way. (33) Excavate ground to an average depth of 15 in. for a carriage-way 28 ft. wide to contour for a length Kerb. of (say) 200 ft., together with two branch roads, each having a length of (say) 50 ft., and cart excavations away (or otherwise dispose of). Fill in with 12 in. (or 9 in.) cement concrete, com- posed of 1 part Portland cement to 5 parts ballast and sand, and float over with Portland cement and sand in equal parts 1 in. (or | in.) thick to an even face having a fall of |- in. per foot each way from the crown to the side channels, the crown being rounded off some 4 ft. wide. Spread Val de Travers ground powdered asphalt 2 in. (or 1 J in.) thick whilst hot, and compress- with hot iron rammers. The channels to fall to the street gullies. See clause No. 4. Asphalt footpaths. (34) Excavate ground to an average depth of 12 in. for the pathways, and cart away (or otherwise dispose 510 ROAD-MAKING. (34) of). Lay 9 in. (or 6 in.) cement concrete bed floated over in cement and sand 1 in. (or in.) thick to an even face, with a fall to the kerb of i in. to the foot, and spread Yal de Travers ground powdered asphalt 1 \ in. (li in. and 2 in.) thick whilst hot, and compress with hot iron rammers. Asphalted paths should not be less than 1 in. thick, or the concrete less than 3 in. thick. Asphalt for carriage-ways is not suitable for steeper gradients than 1 in 60, as it affords no foothold for the horses. The Val de Travers Co. also supply mastic asphalt, melted, spread, and rubbed to a smooth surface in the same thicknesses ; but the pow- dered state is far more suitable to heavy wear. Limmer, Seyssel and other firms do similar work. Asphalt pavement is much used in cities ; it is almost noiseless, but slippery in some weathers. (1) ELECTEIC LIGHTING. IT is not intended that this article upon electric lighting should embrace a description, either of the plant for generating or for the storage of electricity. The notes and descriptions refer only to the wiring of private buildings for an installation of incandescent lamps, and does not include that for arc lamps. Electricity may be supplied to a building in three ways : 1st. Erom a company's mains having a high tension (pressure) transformed down to a low tension within the build- ing. 2nd. From a company's mains having either a high or low ten- sion, which charge accumulators with electricity, and from which it is distributed over the building. 3rd. From a company's mains having a low tension taken direct into the building without transforming down to a lower tension. Each of these three systems is severally in vogue in various dis- tricts. The wiring to a building would remain practically the same whatever the company's supply system may be, the only difference being in connecting the company's mains into the building. The lirst of these three systems, that is, the " high tension " system, is that most commonly in use. These notes will refer therefore to the wiring of a building supplied with electricity by that system. There are two methods usually employed in arranging the wiring to a building : 1st. That known as the " tree " system. 2nd. The " distributing board " system. The " tree " system consists in the branch wires being jointed to the main leads. It will be seen from the sketch that if any of the joints at points A be defective, then none of the lamps on that branch would light. This system of wiring will not therefore be further mentioned. 512 ELECTRIC LIGHTING. (1) Jflfl The " distributing board " system consists in taking the main leads to separate distributing boards placed on each of the several floors of the building, and from which separate branch leads are taken to each of the various points. It will be seen by the sketch that should one of the branch leads get damaged, such as at either of the points B, then only the lamp on that branch would be affected. The distributing board system may be so arranged that it does away with all joints in the wires, the connec- tions being made only at the distributing boards. It is this system of wiring then that will be described. Joints in the wires should always be avoided if possible, as they are liable to cause trouble through imperfect making. But when they are absolutely necessary, then the only certain way to ensure perfect insulation, is to employ what is termed a vulcanised joint : to make these joints it requires special appliances used by highly skilled work- men. Here are a few definitions and explanations of some of the terms used in electric lighting. If the sketch on page 522 be referred to when reading these notes, perhaps it may assist the explanations. The terms "Cable," "Wire," "Conductor," "Lead" and "Branch" are practically all synonymous words ; a " Cable " being a number of stranded wires, and a " Wire " being a single strand, but the term "Wire" is often applied to a "Cable"; a "Conductor," "Lead" or " Branch " might refer to either. Incandescent (glow) lamps have a thin filament of carbon in a her- metically sealed air-exhausted glass globe. These lamps are chiefly used in private buildings, and are made of various illuminating powers from 1 candle-power to 1000 candle-power, and to work with a pressure of from 2 to 120 volts (that is the intensity of the pressure of the current). Those of 8, 16 and 32 candle-powers are mostly employed in the general class to private buildings. Small lamps suitable for candelabra fittings are generally from 5 to 10 candle-powers. Incandescent lamps may be obtained with clear glass, tinted glass, ground or partly ground glass, and partly silvered glass globes. Clear glass absorbs 10 per cent, of the total light of the lamp. Ground glass absorbs 30 to 50 per cent, of the total light of the lamp. Opal glass absorbs 50 to 60 per cent, of the total light of the lamp. Lamps are supposed to burn for 1000 hours, after which they are practically useless and have to be replaced with new, but some lamps will last for a much longer period and some considerably less. It is very material then that a good class lamp be used. Large incandescent lamps from 100 to 1000 candle-power are called " Sunbeam Lamps," and are used mostly in shops and public buildings. The following list gives some of the various candle-powers of incan- descent lamps, together with the number of volts pressure at which they are made to work. of work candle or (1) ELECTRIC LIGHTING. 513 A 1 candle-power lamp is made to work with a pressure of from 2 to 8 volts. 2J do. do. 5, 25 and 28 5 do. do. 10, 22, 28 and 35 - 8 do. do. 15, 20, 25, 45, 55, 100, 110 and 120 10 do. do. 60, 70, 100 and 120 16 do. do. 20, 25, 30, 45, 55, 60, 70, 100, 105, 110 and 120 25 do. do. 20, 40, 45, 55, 60, 70, 100, 105, 110 and 120 32 do. do. 30, 50, 55, 105 and 120 35 do. do. 60, 70, 100 and 120 50 do. do. 30, 50, 80, 105 and 120 100 do. do. 50, 80, 105 and 110 150 do. do. 50 and 110 200 do. do. 50, 80, 105 and 110 300 do. do. 50 and 110 400 do. do. 50 and 110 500 do. do. 80 and 105 800 do. do. ' 80 and 110 1000 do. do. 80, 105 and 110 Lamps to work with 100 and 110 volts pressure are more usually employed in private buildings, but in no case should a lamp be em- ployed where the voltage is greater than the capacity of the lamp, as it will materially diminish the life of the lamp. A 16 candle-power lamp will light from 60 to 100 square feet of floor space. An " Arc " lamp has two candles of carbon almost touching, but free to the external air. This form of lamp is chiefly employed for street lighting and will not be further mentioned. The term "Ohm" implies a measure of resistance to the electric current in the metal forming the wire. " Conductivity " means the suitability of the metal forming the wire for conducting the current with a least amount of resistance. There is less resistance to the current flowing along a larger wire than in a smaller wire, but the further the current has to flow away from the source the greater will be the resistance. A Meg-ohm is a defined number of ohms resistance. E.M.F. stands for Electro-Motive Force, that is, the pressure at which the current flows along the wire ; the pressure intensity of this force is measured in volts. The difference of Potential means the difference of pressure between the ends of a circuit. In high-tension mains the current flows along with great force ; in low-tension mains the current flows with a small force. An Ampere is a measure of the electric current strength flowing. A Volt is a measure of the intensity of the pressure of the current. A Watt is the product of one ampere multiplied by one volt ; a watt is therefore a measure of electric energy. C.P. stands for candle-power. A 16 c.p. lamp requires 0'6 amperes of current at a pressure of 100 volts to give it light, or, in other words, it requires 60 Watts (that 2 L 514 ELECTKIC LIGHTING. (l) is 0'6 amperes X 100 volts = 60 watts) of electric energy, which is equal to about 4 Watts per candle-power. A Board of Trade " Unit " of electric energy is 1000 watt hours, that is, it is equal to the product of the current in amperes X the pressure in volts X the hours, which together will give a result of 1000. Thus sixteen (or more correctly sixteen and a half) 16 c.p. lamps will require one Board of Trade "unit" in one hour in giving them proper light (that is, taking the current at 0'6 amperes per one 16 c.p. lamp at a pressure of 100 volts for 1 hour, multiplied by sixteen lamps, or 0-6x100x1x16 = 960, which might be called 1000). Therefore one 16 c.p. lamp will burn for about 16 J hours at the expenditure of one Board of Trade unit. The insulation resistance of a wire means the effectiveness of the covering to resist the escape of the current from the wire along which it flows. This resistance is measured in meg-ohms. A Cut-out (or Safety fuse) is a piece of lead or tin wire which is used in joining conductors together, but offering a higher resistance to the electric current than the capacity of the conductors themselves. Thus, if a wire at A will take a certain current without ^A r B getting overheated, but the wire B will not take the 1 same amount of current without getting overheated, then the fuse at F is of such a size that it will fuse or burn through without allowing the current to be transmitted on to B. Of course the fuse F is necessarily fixed upon an incombustible base. Fuses should be of such size that they will fuse should there be 50 per cent, more than the maximum current the wires have been arranged to take. Cut-outs are made in 1, 5, 10, 20, 30, 50, 75, 100, 200 and 500 ampere sizes. A " Pole " may be taken as referring to an undefined point at any part of a wire, and it requires the negative and positive poles of the wires to be connected at that point where light is required before current will flow and light be obtained. The positive pole is on the wire leading from the positive terminal, the negative pole being on that returning to the negative terminal. The Terminals are the junctions of the wires with the source of supply. A Switch is a movable connection between the positive and negative poles of the wires, so that when the switch is "off" the poles are dis- connected, and consequently the current cannot flow ; but when the switch is " on," the wires are connected arid allow the current to flow. The office, therefore, of a switch is to turn the current on or off to the lamps of a building. A switch should, always have a fuse connected on it. Switches are made in sizes of 1, 3, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 25, 50, 80 and 100 amperes, and advancing in fifties from 100 to 1000 amperes, but they can be made to any size required. A Single-Pole Switch severs or connects the one (positive) pole (wire) only ; a Double-Pole Switch severs or connects the two (positive and negative) poles (wires). Switches may be single-break or double-break, that is, they may sever each of the poles either at one or two points. Main switches are always double- pole, and may be either single- or double-break. Small switches, such as to the lamps, are generally single-pole, single-break. A Master Switch is a large switch used to control generally all the lights in one room, and is usually placed near the 'door. (1) ELECTRIC LIGHTING. 515 Wall and Floor sockets are fittings into which the wires attached to movable lamps may be inserted for obtaining light. A Meter registers in Board of Trade " units " the amount of elec- tricity supplied. A " Transformer or Converter " transforms the current from a high tension (pressure) down to a lower tension. A " Main Switch " is a fitting which cuts off the current from going to any of the lamps. A " Main Switch Board " has several switches on it which cut off the current from going to the various Distributing Boards. A " Distributing Switch Board " has a switch on it which cuts off the current from going to any of the lamps supplied from that board. A " Circuit " may be taken as including all the wires and lamps between the terminals of its course. Under the " distributing board " system, the arrangement of the wiring to the various parts of a building is divided up into small circuits, each of which should not exceed a carrying capacity of more than 10 amperes of current, but 5 amperes is considered a more satisfactory maximum. In each circuit there are the three points to be considered for the efficiency of the lighting : 1st. The resistance to the current in the wire, which is designated by " Ohms." 2nd. The E.M.F., or pressure of the flow of the current, which is registered in " Volts." 3rd. The strength of the current flowing, which is measured in " Amperes." A Fuse Board is a fitting supplied with separate JjJ fuses on it to each of the various circuits for protec- tion against the overheating of the wires. Cables or (wires are) made up of 3, 7, 19, 37 and 61 strands (wires) of Nbs. 25, 23, 22, 21J, 20J, 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13 and 12 B.W.G. wire ; the carrying capacity of the cables (or wires) being distinguished by the number of strands of a certain B.W.G. wire ; thus, a 3/22 cable or wire means three wires of 22 B.W.G. wire. Owing to the high conductivity of copper (that is, the small amount of resistance offered to the current), cables and wires are always formed of this metal. Here follows a table showing the approximate greatest capacity of various cables suitable for carrying the current required for lighting the greatest number of 16 c.p. 100 volt incandescent lamps at a farthest distance (at the safe working current density of 1000 amperes per square inch of section of the wire), so that the fall of potential at the farthest point does not exceed 2 volts (this fall in the voltage will not materially diminish the brilliancy of the light). Each lamp taking 0*6 amperes 2 L 2 ELECTEIC LIGHTING. (1) of current at 100 volts pressure, which is equal to 60 watts of electric energy. If 8 to 10 c.p. lamps be employed, then the cables will serve twice the number of lamps to those given for the 16 c.p. lamps. If the cables be run only half the distance with the same greatest number of lamps, then the fall of potential would be 1 volt only instead of 2 volts. Approximate number of 16 c.p. 100 volt Approximate number of amperes each cable lamps each cable or wire will take at 100 Size of Cable or wire will carry at volts pressure, allowing or Wire in the safe working 6 amperes of current B.W.U. Wire. current density of 1000 amperes per square per lamp (that is, 60 watts of electric inch of section. energy per lamp, or 4 watts per candle power). & 1-8 2 3-2 5 ** 4.4 6 4 . 7-1 10 A 8-8 13 A 12-7 20 A 17-2 27 22-5 33 A V 28-5 45 35-2 55 if 1 * 34-5 53 i? 46-5 74 ti 61-2 90 If 77-5 123 97-3 150 15. 126-0 195 H 162-0 240 120-0 190 H 152-0 235 ,7 fi 190-5 275 250-0 393 fj 320-0 500 HJL 305-0 476 .1 435-6 680 M 13 518-5 810 Each of the above cables and wires accommodating the above stated number of lamps may be taken for a distance of 80 yards (that is, 40 yards each way, lead and return) when the fall of potential at the farthest point will not exceed 2 volts. If a greater distance be required to be run with the same number of lamps, and no greater fall of poten- tial than 2 volts, then a larger cable must be selected. Thus, if a cable be loaded to 500 amperes per square inch instead of 1000 amperes per square inch (or in other words by employing only half the absve stated (3) ELECTRIC LIGHTING. 517 number of lamps on the cable in question), then the cables may be run for a distance of 160 yards instead of 80 yards, with the same fall of potential of only 2 volts. The sizes of the cables in the foregoing list mostly in actual use are: 3/22, 7/22, 7/20, 7/18, 7/16, 7/14, 19/18, 19/16, 19/14, 19/12, ' 37/16, 37/14, 37/12, 61/14, 61/12. It is always well to specify larger main cables than necessary, so as to allow for possible additional lights in the future. Here follows a specification for electric lighting. SPECIFICATION OF CABLING AND WIRING FOR ELECTRIC LIGHTING with Incandescent lamps to (give address) for (give name and address of Employer) under the superintendence of (give name and address of Archi- tect). January 1898. Fittings and (i) Xote. The lamps and fittings are not included Sded' * t^ contract. It is always better to let the contract for the fittings and lamps sepa- rately, as they vary so greatly in price and design. The lamp fittings most commonly in use are : The Drop Pendant ; this fitting is suitable for rooms and passages generally, being dropped down from the ceiling at a fixed height. The Adjustable Pendant ; this fitting is more suitable for positions over tables ; it is similar to the drop pendant, but can be adjusted to various heights. There is another form of adjustable pendant suitable for dressing-tables ; in this case the lamp shade can in addition be adjusted to any angle. In best bedrooms two of these pendants should be fixed, one on either side of the looking-glass. The Wall Bracket ; this fitting is suitable for any position similar to a gas bracket. Portable Lamps ; these are useful for reading tables, or placing in any movable position in a room. When light is required the wires connected to the lamp have to be fixed for the time being either into a wall or floor socket. Number of (2) The contract includes a complete system of cabling and wiring for electric light to (say) 130 points. It is always well to describe the wiring to a certain number of points, and not for a certain number of lamps, as any one point may be finished with several lamps. Materials and (3) The materials and workmanship tu be of the best character. The contractor is to include all labour, material, expenses, superintendence, cables, wires, con- 518 ELECTRIC LIGHTING. (4) ductors, leads, branches, casings, main cut-out, main switch, main switch board, distributing switch boards, sub-distributing switch boards, fuse boards, cut-outs, switches, ceiling plates, wall and floor sockets with fuse in detachable portion, transformer (converter) and meter. The terms, cables, wires, wiring, branches, conductors and leads, are to be understood as being synonymous words. Cutting away and (4) Perform all excavating, filling in, cutting away, making good. making good, lifting and relaying floors, and painting and decorating to match the adjoining work both to the casings and roses and to the work disturbed. The making good to the plastering is to be done in Parian cement and painted one coat before it dries (if finished with paint). When the wiring applies to a building in course of erection, this clause would be modified, as the decoration and similar work would be done by the builder ; but in the building contract do not omit to state what has to be done to the electrical engineer's work. See Pre- liminary Items, clause No. 25 ; and Painter, clause No. 55a. Position of (5) The casings where practicable are to be fixed CaS wifes and on ^ ne sur f ace > except where crossing floors. In the best rooms they are to be chased and hidden in the walls, and in all cases placed in positions where they are not liable to dampness or injury. Where the wiring goes under the floors, the boards are to be screwed with brass countersunk screws, and where fuses or similar fittings are hidden, hinged access traps are to be formed for inspection. Where the wiring goes through the walls the casings are to be placed in porcelain tubes. State in what positions the casings are to be hidden in the walls. Where bedded in walls, or where liable to rough usage, the wires may be laid in plain or galvanised iron tubing. When buried in the ground galvanised iron tubing should always be used, and laid in an 1 in. rough deal trough filled with pitch. To satisfaction of (6) The work to be carried out in accordance with SU |ire Office* ^ e ru ^ es ' regulations and requirements of the company supplying the electric current, as well as those of the fire office insuring the building and furniture ; and the work is to pass the survey of their respective inspec- tors. Alterations. (7^ The architect may alter the position of any point without extra charge being made, provided that such alteration does not necessitate the work being done twice (10) ELECTKIC LIGHTING. 519 Thus, if a point be described to one part of a room it may be altered to another part without extra charge, provided it has not already been put in. Class of switch and other boards. Cu-t Ouf Class of conductors and insulators. (8) The main switch board, distributing switch boards, sub-distributing switch boards, cut-out or fuse boards to be of slate, enamelled on front and back, with the positive and negative portions insulated from each other. The slates to be mounted and framed in oak (mahogany or teak), with similar wood doors glazed with plate glass, and provided with lever locks and two keys to each. The holding screws to be insulated by ebonite rings and collars. Each of the switch boards to have a cut-out and switch on the positive pole, and a cut-out only on the negative pole ; all connections being arranged on the front of the boards with safety fuses and brass omnibus bars. Additional cut-outs to be placed at points where there is a change in the section of the wires, the fuses being mounted" on incombustible porcelain bases with porcelain covers. All distributing and fuse boards to have two spare ways on them for future additions. The main switch board, the distributing switch boards, the sub-distributing switch boards, the fuse boards and the main cut-outs to be labelled in ivory, with a reference list of the lights they control. (9) All conductors to be of stranded copper wire of not less than 98 per cent, high conductivity (Mat- thiesen's standard of pure copper), and tinned before stranding ; and ; insulated with pure india-rubber, then with vulcanised india-rubber, then with india-rubber coated tape, and the whole vulcanised together and finished with braided tarred flax and coated with pre- servative compound. The insulation resistance of the main conductors to be not lower than 600 meg-ohms per mile, the branch cables 300 meg-ohms, and all cables where liable to damp 750 (or 1000) meg-ohms when tested in water after twenty-four hours' immersion at 60 Fahr. after one minute's electrification. The cha- racter of the insulation to be equal to Q (or K and S) Silvertown manufacture (or No. 42 class Glover's manufacture). See the sketch of cables on page 515. Joints. (10) If joints be absolutely necessary, they are to be soldered together, resin only being used as the flux, and then insulated with pure and prepared rubbers, and afterwards vulcanised and taped with rubber- coated tape. 520 Bunching of conductors. Conductors of different colours. ELECTRIC LIGHTING. (ll) (11) There is to be no bunching of conductors. (12) The positive and negative conductors to be coloured black and red respectively, and placed in separate grooves in the casings, each conductor being in a separate groove. The positive leads to be placed in the left-hand groove, and the negative returns in the right ; and where inclined to a horizontal position, then the positive leads to be below with the negative returns above. least size of (13) The smallest wire used to be 3/22, but where wires. from convenience of wiring separate cut-outs are not put in, then 7/23 wires must be taken up to each point; but two 16 c.p. points may be connected on to a 3/22 wire provided they are looped in, and similarly three 16 c.p. points may be connected to a 7/23 wire. The wires in the pendants and other fittings will probably be of a smaller section. Small circuits. (14) The conductors from the sub-distributing and fuse boards to be divided into small circuits, each circuit carrying not more than 5 amperes (that is about equal to eight 16 c.p. 100 volts lamps or their equivalent). Current density (15) The wiring to be suitable for 100 volt lamps. capadty^Zwkes. The current density is not to exceed 750 (or 850) amperes per square inch of section in the main and principal branch conductors, and not more than 900 (or 1000) amperes in the smaller conductors. The carry- ing capacity to be such that, when all the lamps are alight, the fall in E.M.F. between the meter and the farthest lamp on any circuit is not to exceed 2 volts. Under the Board of Trade regulations the voltage in private dwellings is not to exceed 200 volts. The voltage at the mains in the streets are run up to some 10,000 to 20,000 volts, and reduced down by a trans- former (converter) to 100 volts in the buildings. Possibly the Board of Trade may allow private dwellings to be supplied at a greater voltage than 200 volts, say. up to 350 volts, when in this case this clause must be modified accordingly. Separate switches (16) Each point to have a separate switch, but to each point. cer tain points to have two switches, as hereinafter mentioned. Floor and wall sockets are not always provided with a switch, as they are used for attaching temporarily reading lamps and other movable fittings by merely placing one end of the cord of the lamp into the socket in question. (19) ELECTRIC LIGHTING. 521 Casings. (17) The casings to be of well seasoned American whitewood, grooved out for the cables and wires (con- ductors). Casings carrying the main conductors to have fillets 1 in. wide separating the grooves, those carrying the principal branch conductors to have fillets f in. wide, and those carrying the smaller branches to have fillets J in. wide. The covers to be screwed to the casings with brass screws, and the casings screwed with brass screws to plugs in the walls or to the other fixings. Casings and covers to be painted over entirely, both inside and out, with two coats of fireproof paint (or shellac) before fixing. All corners to be half lapped or butted, and the cappings mitred. The casings and cappings to be of an ornamental character where not hidden, and of special design in positions where the architect may require, in order to harmonise with the surrounding work. In surface work against damp walls the casings are to be kept f in. away with por- celain insulators every 2 ft. 3 in. apart. Casings are made from 1J in. to 6 in. wide, with fillets between the grooves from ^ in. to 2 in. wide. Here are some sizes of casings suitable for various cables : Size of Cables in B.W.G. Wire. Total Width of Casing. Size of each Groove. Width of Fillet between Grooves. in. in. in. A If A i A 2 i A 2J 1 i A 3 | i It 3* 4 ij 1|. 4 -J. i| if 4 * 1 4 Class of switches. (18) Switches to be of the quick make-and-break type, so that they do not rest in any position between " on " and " off." They are to be mounted on incombustible porcelain bases upon wood blocks (or in some positions they may be upon orna- mental oak or teak roses). The cases and handles to be in ivory porcelain in all posi- tions except basement, cellars and top floor, where they are to be of brass tumbler make. Cases and handles to switches may be very elaborate, either in brass, ivory or wood. Porcelain cases with ivory handles make very neat work for principal positions. Class of ceiling plates. (19) Ceiling plates to have incombustible porcelain bases with separate cut-outs on the one pole, and fitted with ivory porcelain covers and cord grips. 522 ELECTRIC LIGHTING. (20) Samples of (20) Samples of all switch, distributing and fuse materials. boards, casings, cables, wires, conductors, switches, cut-outs, ceiling roses, blocks, wall and floor plugs, fuses and all other fittings to be approved by the architect before fixing. (21) The fuses are to melt at 50 per cent, more current than the capacity of the wires have been de- signed to take. All fuses to be accessible. (22) When the contract includes lamps, here is a description : The incandescent lamps to be of Edison and Swan make, fitted with brass collars. The lamp holders to be of the bayonet socket type with spring plungers, mounted on porcelain bases. State the candle-power and voltage of the lamps. Testing. (23) Test all wires before the cut-outs, fuses, switches or fittings are put in. Fusing point of fuses. lamps. r ' The above is a sketch showing the wiring to a house upon the distri- buting board system, to the particulars of which the folio wing pages refer. (24) ELECTRIC LIGHTING. 523 The following is a schedule of the arrangement of the wiring to the various points ; the total number of points being taken at 130, divided up as follows : basement 27 points, ground floor, 62, first floor, 27, second floor and roof, 14. The cables from the converter A to the main or distributing switch board E have to supply current to 130 points (each point being taken as equal to one 16 c.p. 100 volt lamp), and allowing for an increase of say 20 more lamps which may be required at some future time, it will make the number of points ultimately to be supplied at 150. Then looking at the table on page 516, one hundred and fifty 16 c.p. lamps will be found opposite the cable 19/14, therefore these mains will require to be 19/14. Again, the cables from the main switch board E to the distributing fuse board E in the basement have to take 27 lamps, and allowing for 3 lamps extra, this would make 30 lamps ; looking again at the table on page 516, opposite (say) 33 lamps will be found a cable 7/16, which will be the size required. In like manner the cables from the main switch board E to the dis- tributing fuse board G on the ground floor have to take 62 lamps, and allowing 12 lamps extra would equal 74 lamps, opposite which in the table will be found the cable 19/17, being the size suitable for this number of lamps. Further, the cables from the main switchboard E to the distributing fuse boards H and J on the first and second floors have to take 27 and 14 lamps respectively, and say with three extra lamps on the first floor, would be equal to 30 and 14 lamps, opposite which (say 33 and 13) will be found the cables 7/16 and 7/19, being the sizes required. Do not forget that the table on page 516 shows the suitable number of lamps for a distance of 40 yards each way, with a fall of potential of 2 volts ; if the distance be greater, then read the notes at the foot of that table. Notice to Supply (24) Give notice to Electric Supply Co., and pay their fees and expenses for connecting to their mains and bringing in their supply mains in galvanised iron tubes, and attaching to a transformer (converter) A fixed in the cellar in a fireproof chamber (or in an iron wire grille case), for a supply of E.M.F.' of 100 volts to 150 16 c.p. lamps. Mains. Carry on a pair of 19/14 mains from converter A to main switch board E placed in hall on ground floor ; with a meter at D ; a main double-pole, single-break switch at C in case ; and a main double-pole cut-out at B fixed in basement passage near the entrance. The main switch board E to have a double-pole, single-break main switch to cut off all the circuits. Take (say) four separate circuits, consisting of sepa- rate pairs of mains to the four distributing fuse boards F, G, H and J. Each of the distributing fuse boards to have a double-pole, single-break switch for controlling all the lights supplied from each board (that is, the 524 ELECTRIC LIGHTING. (24) branch circuits to any various sub-distributing fuse boards with their points). The following are the sizes of the mains to these four circuits : Take a pair of 7/16 mains from main switch board E to the distributing fuse board F in basement. Take a pair of 19/17 mains from main switch board E to distributing fuse board G on ground floor. Take a pair of 7/16 mains from main switch board E to distributing fuse board H on first floor. Take a pair of 7/19 mains from main switch board E to distributing fuse board J on second floor. Basement points. Take from distributing fuse board F in basement separate pairs of 3/22 wires to the following points : No. of 3/22 points. Entrance lobby, for one pendant point . 1 Passages, 6 brackets or pendants . . 6 Kitchen, 2 pendants and 2 brackets . . 4 Scullery, 1 bracket and 1 pendant . . 2 Servants' hall, 2 pendants ... 2 Butler's pantry, 1 bracket and 1 pendant . 2 Housekeeper's room, 1 pendant and 2 brackets ...... 3 Larder, 1 pendant. .... 1 Cellars, 5 brackets or pendants . . 5 W.C. 1 bracket 1 27 Mention any other positions required, If the kitchen have a sky- light the pendants over the table should be dropped down from a metal tube running across the skylight under the blind ; see Gasfitter, notes to clause No. 8, and the sketch on page 182. The pendant and bracket points may be altered to suit the circum- stances of the case. A swing bracket is very useful over a kitchen range or hot plate. Ground floor Take from distributing fuse board G on ground floor separate pairs of 3/22 wires to the following points : No. of 3/22 points. Vestibule, to 1 pendant point ... 1 Hall, 1 pendant and 2 brackets . . 3 Lavatory and W.C., 2 brackets . . 2 Dining-room, take a pair of 7/22 wires to 1 pendant for 6 lights, and 3/22 pairs of wires to 2 wall sockets. The centre pen- dant to have 2 switches, each controlling 3 lights . . . (say equal to) 8 (24) ELECTRIC LIGHTING. 525 No. of 3/22 points. Drawing-room, 6 brackets, 3 wall and 3 floor sockets . . . . .12 Library, 4 brackets and 2 wall sockets . 6 Passages, 6 brackets .... 6 Billiard-room, take a pair of 7/18 wires to 1 pendant for 18 lights (say equal to) 18 Put separate master switches outside the drawing-room and dining-room doors to control all the lights in each room ex- cepting one. Entrance gate lamps, take separate pairs of 7/23 wires in galvanised iron tubes to each gate lamp for 3 lights each (say equal to) 6 62 Mention any other points required. If there be a large lantern light over the main staircase, with a pen- dant carrying 6, 8 or 12 lights, then it should have two switches fixed in the hall below, each switch controlling half the lights. The mains to this pendant should be 7/20 wires if for say 8 lights. First floor points. Take from distributing fuse board H on first floor separate pairs of 3/22 wires t6 the following points : No. of 3/22 points. Each of the six bedrooms for, say, 1 pendant and 1 wall socket . . . .12 Boudoir, 4 brackets, 2 wall and 1 floor socket ...... 7 Bath room, 1 pendant .... 1 W.C., 1 pendant 1 Passages and landings, 6 pendants or brackets ...... 6 27" Put a master switch to control all the lights in boudoir excepting one. Mention any other points required. Second floor and Take from distributing fuse board J on second floor roof points. separate pairs of 3/22 wires to the following points : No. of 3/22 points. Each of the six bedrooms for, say, 1 pendant 6 Bath-room, 1 pendant .... 1 W.C., 1 pendant 1 Passages and landings, 5 brackets or pen- dants ...... 5 Over cistern in roof, 1 pendant . . 1 14 Mention any other points required. 526 ELECTRIC LIGHTING. (24) If any room be somewhat large and many points required, it is better to take a separate pair of mains from the distributing fuse board on that floor to a sub-distributing fuse board near the room in question, and from thence to each of the several points, instead of running the wires all back to the distributing fuse board, which may be some distance away. Switches are generally placed near the door entering a room. The exact position of the main switch board, the distributing fuse boards and the sub-distributing 1 , fuse boards may be stated ; they are generally fixed in the passages or halls. 527 FORM OF TENDER. TENDER for pulling down the EXISTING BUILDINGS known as No. 3 Eastleigh Road, Croydon, and erecting entirely NEW BUILDINGS upon the site, together with various OUTHOUSES, PAVINGS and FENCING ; and making certain ALTERATIONS and EEPAIRS to the adjoining premises, for John Smith, Esq., of Woodside Lodge, Grange Eoad, Bedford. To RALPH ROBINSON, Esq., Architect, 26 Plaistow Buildings, London, N.W. SIR, I am willing and hereby agree to pull down the existing premises known as No. 3 Eastleigh Road, Croydon, and to perform all the work required to be done in erecting entirely New Buildings upon the site, together with various Outhouses, Pavings and Fencing ; and making certain Alterations and Repairs to the adjoining premises according to the Drawings, the Specification and Conditions of Contract prepared by you, and to complete the work to your satisfaction for the undermentioned sums : Pulling down the existing premises and rebuilding the House for 2020 Erecting new Stables . . . . .800 Paving and Fencing to site, and Alterations and Repairs to adjoining premises . . . 180 3000 or for the whole sum of Three Thousand pounds. If the joinery to the main staircase be executed in oak instead of deal, as also the stone facings and ashlar work in Portland stone in lieu of Bath stone, as per additional detailed specification, then I am willing to perform this work for the further sum of Two Hundred and Fifty pounds. I am further willing to allow a deduction off the above amount of Thirty pounds in purchase of the old materials pulled down. It is understood that the employer does not bind himself to accept the lowest or any tender. As witness my hand this 1st day of March, 1897. CHARLES BROWN, Contractor and Builder, 27 Delair Street, London, S.W. See Preliminary Items, clauses Nos. 7 and 76, when the tender is to be in several amounts and portions of the work are to be executed in different materials. INDEX. Access door to Sun burner, 463 from roof, trap doors and dormers, 167, 168, 168, 171 holes to heating pipes, 70 traps in floors, 458 Accounts in small items, 15 Accumulators, 511 Acid pipes, 24 Acids and zinc, 435 Act, London Building, see under London Building Act, and London County Council Acts, 7 Adamantine clinker paving, 57, 58 clinkers, 51 sizes of, 51 Adams fanlight opener, 247 road gullies, 506 Adjoining owner's premises, make good to, 15 rooms, board up, 11 Adjustable hinges, 315 pendant to electric light, 517 where used, 517 Advertising contractor and hoarding, 11 Agreement, 20 Agricultural drains, 36, 506, 506 sizes of, 36 Air, amount allowed to pass by windows, 495 amount discharged by gas pendants, 496 argon in, 496 bricks, 75 in iron, 342 sizes of, 342 carbonic. acid in, 496 cock to coils, 363 to expansion tank, 362 cocks, 379 cold, 324 component parts of pure, 496 compressed, 466 cubic feet required for health, 495 furniture, and amount of available, 495 in hydrant pipes, 367 materials not proof against, 495 proof against, 495 nitrogen in, 496 Air, oxygen in, 496 pipe, 379 proof materials, 495 round ends of timber, 147 space for cows, 382 to be changed a certain number of times in a room, 495 to stoves, 350 - warm, 324 inlet, 28 between meeting rails of sashes, 495 drawer, 495 fanlight as, 495 flues, 75 position of, 495 size of, 495 through window framing, 200, 204, 213, 212 sizes for, 213 to billiard room, 150 to cow stalls, 382 to stables, 369 Tobin's tube, 292, 293, 495 positions of, 293 zinc lining to, 293 outlets, fanlights as, 495 flues as, 75, 495 position of, 495 provided with gratings, 495 size of, 495 Alloy in copper, 440 Alterations and general repairs, 492 to 494, and see under Eepairs and Alterations Alum in distemper, 443 in paste, 490 Aberdeen granite ashlar, 131 columns, 131 kerb to roads, 500 macadam to roads, 505, 497 paving to footpaths, 502 setts to roads, 507, 500 steps, 132 Absorption of light by glass of lamps, 512 of moisture by tiles, 391 Amboyna wood, graining as, 481 American fir, 139 oak, 141 pine, 140, 137 spruce (white fir), 140, 137 sizes of, 137 2 M 530 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. American walnut, 141 Amounts, provisional, 17 Ampere defined, 513, 515 number required by incandescent lamps, 513, 515, 516 Analysis of paint, 479 Analyst's fees, 10 Anaglypta paper, 490, 489 Angle brace tie, 162, 171 brackets, 321 to partitions, 233 fillet to leadwork, 421, 423 to safes, 409, 412, 413, 415 iron to girders, 332, 332, 332 lavatory, 269, 414 piece, 305, 305, 306 piles, 326 plates to girders and stanchions, 180, 262 posts to fencing, 307, 311, 312 to half-timber work, 320, 320, 320, 320, 320, 321 to lanterns, 181, 182 shop shutters, 300, 301 skirting, 217 fillet to w.c., 272 soldered, 412 stone quoins, 124, 128, 129 straps, 320 swing brackets to flaps, 280, 291 tiles, 392 tilting fillets to leadwork, 398, 399, 399 size of, 398 w.c., 270 Angles of joinery, 138 pipe, 429 to gas pipes, 458 Angus Smith's solution, 366 Anti-D trap, 420, 421 syphon pipe, 421 Apophyges, 127, 131 Apex, 178 piece, 395 Apron, copper, 438' in lead, 399, 401, 401, 398, 397, 397 size of, 393 linings in plaster, or boarding to stairs, 115 to lanterns, 180, 181, 184, 185 stairs, 225, 227 splayed, 225, 227 shoot, 409 zinc, 435 Archangel deal, 139, 140 flooring, 157 Arch bar, 346 plate, sliding, 355 to carry steps, 120 Arched fireproof floors, 48 roof in corrugated iron, 336 spans of, 336 Arches, axed, 70, 80 bolts to trimmer, 148 cambered, 74 Arches, camber to, 80 cellar, 71 centering and turning pieces to, 14& circular, 71 concrete spandrils to, 45 counter, 70 drain, 22, 71 fireplace, 74 gauged, 80 glazed brick, 81, 82 granite, 131 in half-brick rings, 70, 80 internal, 83 keys to, 80 labels to, 80 other, 80 over voids, 74 rough relieving, 70 stone, 126, 128 to flues, 74 to pig tub, 80 trimmer, 71 Arc lamp defined, 513 where employed, 513 Area draw-off, supply to, 410 dry, 73 stone cover to, 107, 120 excavate, 40 glazed brick facing to, 80 gratings, 344 kerbs, 111, 112, 121 paving, 109, 120, 55 railings, 344 small, 71 steps, 118 Argand burners, consumption of gas by, 460- Argon in air, 496 Architect, meaning of, 4 Architect's tests, 10 test for lead, 397 of iron columns, 331 of wrought iron, 329 Architrave, built up, 242 in cement, 456 to doors, 239, 240, 240, 241, 241, 242, 246, 247, 251, 252, 264 to shop window, 295 to vestibule framing, 236 to windows, 191, 194, 194, 196,197, 198,. 199, 205, 209, 212, 307 Arch. Smith & Stevens casement bolt, 210 spring hinges, 233, 236, 251 Arras palisades, 313 sizes of, 313 Arris, drafted, 129 rails, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 313 ash, 310, 312, 313 fir, 310, 312, 313 larch, 312, 313 numbers required of, 309 oak, 308, 310, 311, 312, 313, 313 sizes of, 310, 312, 313 Arrises to plaster in cement, 443 Arrow, 318 INDEX. 531 Arsenical paper, 489 Articles, stock, 9 Artificial stone paving to footpaths, 501, 497 Asbestos cement to cylinders, 430, 431 to heating pipes, 364 -Ashes, 45 Ash guard, 355 Leatherings, 396 pan, 355, 355 Ashlar, Bath, 121, 123 cemented walls, 455 coursed, 121, 122, 124 faced building in Bath stone, 123 facing to old building, 127 granite, 131 hammer-dressed, 121, 122 joints, 123 Kentish ra? rubble, 129 Portland, 121 random, 121, 122 rubble, 129 thickness of, 124, 127, 129, 131 Aspect, 37 of larders, 289 Asphalted felt as roofing, 306 to flats, 179, 180 to roof, 164 weight of, 160 Asphalt damp course, 54, 70 flats, 49 flooring, 47, 54 mastic, 510 paving, 54 thickness of, 54 -to footpaths, 509, 510, 497, 54 to roads, 509, 497, 54 greatest gradient for, 510 powdered, 509, 510 roofs, 54 to cellars, 71 to damp walls, 453 - to hollow walls, 61 to tanks, 97 various kinds of, 54, 55 weight of, 46 Astragal band joints, 402, 406, 420, 421 Atmosphere, pressure of, 404 and column of water, 404 Attend upon trades, 9, 143 Attics in roofs, 174, 176 skirting to, 216 Attic windows, glass to, 470 Austrian oak, 141 Automatic flush tank to urinal, 424 Available rainfall, 403 Average rainfall, 403 Axed arches, 70, 80 Axle pulleys, 191, 196, 200, 205 B, Back, 317 boiler, 429 flap hinges, 197, 198 Back flaps, 197, 198, 199 linings to sashes, 190, 191, 192, 193, 193 to shutters, 197, 198, 199 putty to glass, 467, 470 staircase in stone, 115 to bath, 268 to w.c., 271 Backings, dovetailed, 240, 241 skeleton-framed, 196 to jamb linings, 239, 241, 246 to joinery, 142 to window linings, 194, 196 Baize, 244 doors, 244, 245 Baker's shop, snowboard to, 299 Balance weights to stairs, 266 Balconettes, 344 Balcony brackets, various, 113 railing, 344 stone, 113, 121 Balk timber, 137 Ballast as road metalling, 498 fine, as road metalling, 498 for concrete, 43, 22 foundation to road, 498, 497 found on site, 15 to drying ground, 303 Ball catch, Homer's, 255, 256, 261 cock, 364, 379, 422 valve, 406, 411, 412 Baltic timber, 137 Balusters, cement, 456 iron, 116, 228, 229, 344, 344 outside nosings, 229 paint, 482 stone, 125 wood, 225, 227, 229 Balustrade, cement, 456 stone, 125 to entrance steps, 120 Band round dome in iron, 178 Bands to gas pipes, 458, 458 Bangor slates, 384, 387, 385 Bar counter and fittings, 301, 302, 303 gate, 256 grate with brick sides, 352, 351 hanging, 243 to transome, 209 wood, to coach-house doors, 261 Barff treatment of ironwork, 26 Barge boards, 165, 166, 171, 322, 306 j brackets and corbels to, 166 ^ straps to, 165 Barley, space occupied by, 146 Barrel drains, 21 Barrier rod, 372, 369 Bars, chimney, 74 cleft, 318 gate, 318, 315, 316, 256 sash, to shop, 299 skylight, 182, 183, 184, 185, 186 to sashes, 191, 193, 194, 196 Basalts as macadam, 505 Basement cornices, 448 2 M 2 53* SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Basement, depth of, 40 doors and linings, 239, 240 electric lights to, 524 excavation to, 40 floor joists, 149 gas to, 462 pavings, various, 53, 109 bkirtiugs, 21 7 stairs in stone, 118 windows, 190 to 195 windows, glass to, 470 Base, sell-fixing, to loose box pillar, 371 to stall pillar, 372 stone, to coach-house doors, 262 to cast-iron column, 340 Bases, stone to columns, 109, 127, 131 - to door frames, 113, 121, 144 to posts, 113 Basins, bar, 302 Bastard flatting, 482, 476 stucco, 444 Bass wood, 140 Bath, back to, 268 bearers to, 417 - block up for, 417, 417, 417 casing mid fittings to, 267 to 269 to, 415, 415, 416, 416, 416, 417, 417, 417, 418, 418 cast-iron, 417 quality of, 417 sizes of, 417 without casing, 417 - cold supply to, 411 copper, 417, 418 sizes of, 417 weight of, 417, 418 cradle, 268 cradling to, 417, 417 elbows to, 268 enamelled, 417, 417, 418, 418 feet to, 418 Finche's, 415, 416 Sreclay, 415 sizes of, 415 fittings to, 411, 415, 417, 417, 418 flap, 268 frame, 418 invalid's, 418 marble, 416 movable, 418 weight of, 418 needle, 418 polished, 418 porcelain, 415 rail, 268 re-japan old, 418 run, 269 riser, 267 Roman, 418 Rufford's 415, 416 - safe, 415, 416 in cement, 417 - in lead, 417, 417 skirting to, 267 Bath, slate, 416 - steel, 418 sizes of, 418 Bath room, gas to, 463 heated by circulating tank, 432 - paper to, 491, 489 windows, glass to, 470 - step, 267, 415 sunk fireclay, 416 - top, 267 size of, 267 - valve, N. B. P. Co.'s, 415 ventilators to, 268 - with rolled brim, 418, 418 - wood, 416 zinc, 418 japanned, 418 quality of, 418 sizes of, 418 Hath stone, 121 to 129 - arches, 126, 128 -ashlar, 123 to old buildings, 127 balusters, 125 balustrade, 125 - chimney stack, 126, 128 columns, 127 - cornice, 125, 128 - dressings to doors, 126, 12S - to windows, 126, 128 frieze, 125 - lintels, 126, 128 - mullions, 126, 128 - necking, 124, 128 paving, 109 to footpaths, 501 - plinth, 124, 128 - quoins, 124, 128, 130 - sills, 126, 128 -strings, 124, 128 various kinds of, 106 Battening for thatch, 214 to beams for plaster, 215 to brick-nogged partitions for plaster, 214 for panelling, 215 to ceiling joists for plaster or panelling, 153, 215, 215, 446 to damp walls, 60 to quarter partitions for plaster, 214 for panelling, 215 - to slated roofs, 214 to stone tiled roofs, 214 - to tiled roofs, 214 or slated walls, 214 to walls for boarding, 373 - for panelling, 215, 218, 219 - for plaster, 214, 322, 450, 453, 454, 454, 454, 454, 455 Batten widths, 155, 156 Battens, footboard, 277 for lathing to beams, 442 half, size of, 157 linen closer, 292 roof, 164, 165 INDEX. .53.3 Battens, slate, 384, 384, 385, 387, 387, 385, 385 sizes of, 384, 385, 387, 3S7 size of, 137 size of, for plaster, 450 tile, 390, 394, 392, 392 to dresser, 283, 284 to partitions, 189, 189 to walls, when required, 450 Batter of retaining walls, 91 Battery, electric bell, 466 recharge, 466 Bay, corbels to, 107, 120 landing to, 107 window, 192, 212 roof to, 192 Bays, roof to, 169, 171 B. B. finish to stoves, 352 Beach pebble macadam, 505, 497 paving to roads, 505 where used, 505 Beam, 317 filling, 64 Beams, battens to, 215 Bearing bar, 356 Bead butt linings, 197 flush linings, 197 guard, 196, 208, 295 Beads generally, 1V2 inside, 190, 193, 195, 196, 199, 203 ventilation, 190, 191, 193, 195, 204 Beading, gold, 482 sizes o', 482 various forms of, 482 Bearers, brick, to sink, 277 gutter boards and, 163, 163, 178 to bath, 417 to billiard table, 149 to cistern, 408, 412, 419, 427, 428 to linen closet shelves, 292 to sinks, 273, 274, 277, 281 to washing troughs, 281 to w.c., 270, 271, 272 Bearing bars to ranges, 346 Beasts, 325 Beat carpets, 493 Bed and point frames, 68 sills, 68, 105, 190 thresholds, 68, 105 verges, 386, 394 boards, 217, 218 feet of pipes in concrete, C4 for footpaths, concrete, 500, 501, 502, 510, 497 in other materials, 499, 500, 501 , 503, 503, 497 glass in putty, 467, 467, 470, 470, 470, 470, 471, 471, 472, 472 plates, 68 space for cows, 380, 381 stone, 68, 105 terra cotta, 68 window frames, 138, 68 Bedroom cupboards, 291 Bedroom papers, be.-t, 490/489 common, 490, 489 Bedrooms, paintwork to servants', 479 Beer cellar, 290 engines, 302 distance apart of, 303 - horse, 290 BELLHANGER, 465 to 4C6 Bellows regulator, 420 Bell board, 465, 292 paint names of rooms on, 465, 486 call, 465 carriages, 465 consumer, glass, 462, 463 cot, 169, 171 cranks, 465 entrance door, 466, 246, 249, 250, 251, 252 fire, 466, 367 gate, 259 metal, composition of, 465 pull plater,, size of, 466 pulls, various, 465, 465, 465, 466, 466, 466 school, 466 slide pull to, 466 springs, 465, 465 check, 465 Bells, church, 466 connections to wire, 465 continuous action, 466 copper wire to, 465 to, gauges of, 465 coids and tassels to, 465, 465, 466 electric, 466 ; and see un^er Electric Bells continuous action, 466 repairs to, 466 test, 466 flooring to be movable over wires of, 465 generally to wire, 465 ivory labels to, 486 levers to, 465, 465, 465, 466 pendulum indicators to, 465 pneumatic, 466 repairs to wire, 466 sizes of, 465 to various rooms, 4C5 to w.cs., 4*-'5 tubing to wire, 465 weight of, 465 wire, 465, 466 Belted fire main, 366, 367 Bench, decantii g, 290 fruit, 290 Benches, 290 Bends to gas } i^es, 458 Bent glass, 471, 472, 473, 473, 473, 473 Berlin black stoves, 493 Best Best South Staffordshire wrought iron, 329 Best paper, hand printi d, 490, 490, 490, 490 489 Bevelled glass, 469, 472 size of bevel to, 4,69, 472 534 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Bevelled glass, where suitable, 469 Bevel soldered joints, 437 Bib cocks, 406, 408, 410, 411, 418, 430 Billiard room, 149 air inlets to, 150 cigar light in, 150 gas to, 463, 150 height of, 150 - lantern to, 149, 150 lighting to, 149 size of, 150 windows to, 149 Billiard table, bearers to, 149 size of, 150 space around, 150 Bill of quantities, 15 Binding gravel to drying ground, 303 to footpath, 499, 503 joists, 152, 153 - distance apart, 152, 153 materials for roads, 490, 504, 497 Bins, vegetable, 278 wine, 290 Birch chopping-block, 279 table top, 279 Bird's-eye maple, graining as, 481 Birdsmouth, 326 Bit and curb hooks, 375 case, 375 Bunching of conductors, 520 Black, blue-, 443 ' gas tubing, 458 iron service pipe, 405, mortar, 63 stoves, 493, 493 varnish, 383 Blake, Messrs., 425 Bleaching-out varnish, 477 Bleach marble chimney-piece, 493 Blind box, 206, 296 outside, 206 board, 296 Blinds, conservatory, 207 duck material for, 207 fastenings for, 207 holland, 207 inside, 207 laths for, 207 linen, 207 painting to, 207 rollers to, 207 shop, 296, 207 arm rods and standards to, 296 board to, 296 box to, 296 gear to, 296 rollers to, 296 side, 296 , strip to, 296 sun, 296 space for roller, 194, 196, 197, 211 spring roller, 207 : tassels to, 207 to lanterns, 207, 182 Blinds, union, 207 varnishing, to 207 - Venetian, 207, 204 , 211, 213 repairs to, 207 space required for, 211, 206 wire, 207 Blistered paintwork, 483 Blisters and cracks in plaster, 443 Block flooring, wood, 53 - letters, 486, 487 tin gas-tubing, 459, 459 sizes of, 459 weight of, 459 - up bath, 417, 417, 417 up iron gutters to falls, 343 Blocks, concrete, 143 Blower to open hob grate, 352, 353, 351 to range, 356 Blue-black, 443 Blue mortar, 63, 105 Blue Staffordshire brick paving to footpaths, 502 Boarding, matched and beaded, 165 to cow stalls, 381 - to fiats, 179, 179, 180, 435, 438 to loose boxes, 373, 370, 223 - to roofs, 164, 171, 174, 175, 175, 176 rough, 306 V-jointed, 165 wrought, 165 - to stalls, 373, 370, 223 weight of, 160 Board of Trade unit explained, 514 number of hours one lamp will burn at the expenditure of one, 514 number of lamps per hour which can be supplied from one, 514 regulations of, 18, 520 Board up adjoining owners rooms, 11 Boasted stone, 103 Boiled oil, where used, 476 Boiler, bridge to heating, 361 cast-iron, heating, 361 Chatsworth, 360, 362, 359 sizes of, 361 - clean out, 365, 433 - cocks to heating, 360, 361, 362 core to heating, 361 dampers to heating, 362, 361 - dead plate to heatiug, 362, 359 dome top, 379 drain to heating, 361 - feed tank to range, 355, 355, 357, 354 fire bars to heating, 360, 362 firebrick, fire lining and fire lumps to heating, 360 fire doors to heating, 361 floor above heating, 362 flow pipe to heating, 362, 359 capacity of, 362 size of, 361 for hot water circulation, back, 429 boot, 430, 355, 429 INDEX. 535 Boiler for hot water circulation, cold supply to, 430 flues to, 430, 431, 429 high-pressure, various, 430, 431, 429, 379 j independent, 433 L-shaped, 429 manhole to, 430, 431, 429, 429 riveted wrought-iron, 431, 429 to close fire range, 430, 429 to open fire range, 431, 429 various, 429, 431 welded wrought-iron, 430, 429, 429 furnace front to heating, 360 furring up of heating, 360 heating, flue to, 362, 359, 359, 360, 360, 361, 361 size of, 359, 360 high-pressure to range, 355, 356, 354 house ceiling, plaster to, 446 house, concrete foundations to, 45 excavation to, 40 kitchen, supply to, 411 man or mud hole to heating, 360 open range, 355, 355, 356, 354 i eturn pipes or mains to heating, 362, 359 sizes of, 361, 362 rise in heating, 359 Caddie, 359, 362 sizes of, 360 sand to heating, 360 setting to heating, 359, 360, 361, 362 shaft or flue, 73 soot door to flue of heating, 360, 362 steel plate heating, 362 stoking tools for heating, 362 surface, heating capacity of, 359 thermometer to heating, 362 thickness of metal of heating, 361 ties to heating, 360 to stove, 352 Trentham, 361, 362, 359 sizes of, 361 work and Board of Trade, 18 working space in front of heating, 361 Selection mouldings, 238, 239, 247, 250 Bolts, barrel, 233, 236, 236, 243, 243, 246, 247, 250, 251, 253, 255, 256, 261, 263, 264, 266 dip in oil, 330 espagnolette, 209 flush, 237, 243, 244, 247, 250, 251, 267, 270, 272, 293, 302 kinds of, 247 screwed to Whitworth threads, 330 sizes of, 247 of, to ironwork, 330 square monkey tail, 260, 261 to bressummers, 145 ito door frames, 260 i Bolts to flat girders, 180 to gates, 255 to hearth trimmers, 148 to iron casements, 348 to wood casements, 209, 205 tower, 236, 247, 250, 251 Bond, cut tooth and, 14 English and Flemish, 64 to plain tiles, 390 to slating, 384, 384 to stone tiles, 394 Bonder stones, 124, 126, 128 Bonnet shelf, 291 Boot bench, 290 height of, 290 - boiler, 430, 355, 429 room, 290 - cupboards, 290 Border line, paper, 490 paper, 490, 489, 489 Bore joists for ventilation, 143 Borrowed light to stairs, 224 Bosses, 221 Postwick gates, 345 Bottle rack, 280, 275 Bottoming to footpaths, 499, 497 - to roads, concrete, 507, 508, 509, 497 in other materials, 498, 504, 5Q5, 505, 505, 497 when not required, 497 Bjttom rail to doors, 237, 253, 260, 262, 264 rail to gates, 254, 257, 315, 316 Boudoir sets, 367 Boulder boundary walling, 89 knapped, 89 paving, 56 walls, 87, 88 knapped, 88 Boundary walling, brick, 84, 307 " dwarf, 86 flint and boulder, 88, 89, 89, 307 Kentish Rng, 129, 130 Malvern Hill, 130 rubble, various, 129, 130, 307 Bowes Scott & Western, Messrs., fittings, 422 Boxed marble chimney-pieces, 134 Box girders, 332 gutter in iron, 343 in lead, 399 fall of, 399 size of, 399 in wood, 163, 171, 176, 178, 180 lilt, 235 size of, 235 Boxing shutters, 197, 199 in separate heights, 198 Braby's patent system of glazing, 473 Brace, angle tie, 162, 171 Braces, fencing, 310 to doors, 253, 253, 260, 261, 262 to gates, 254, 255, 257, 315, 316, 318 to half-timber work, 320, 321 to partitions, 187, 188 536 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Bracketing generally, 144 Scotch, 442, 442 Brackets, angle, 321 to flap, 280, 291 to partitions, 233 double swing gas, 464 sizes of arms, 4f>4 fixed gas, 463 folding, 374, 375 for step ladder, 265, 265 gas, 464, 464, 462, 463 pipe, 458 to stable, 463' iron, 113 plaster, 453 single swing gas, 464 sizes of arms, 464 slate, 113 stiff gas, 464 sizes of arms, 464 stone, 113 swing, 524 to barges, 166 to cornices, 442, 446, 447, 447, 448, 15 to coves, 447, 442, 215 to eaves gutter, 343 to handrails 117, 227 to lavatory, 414, 389 . to slate shelves, 388 to stairs, 230, 231 to table flaps, 286 ventilating, for harness, various, 375, 375, 375, 375 wall, 517 Braided tarred flax to electric light wires, 619 Branch drains, 29 wires defined, 512 electric light, 511, 512, 512 Brandering, 446, 215 Bran store bin, 376, 377 Brass beads, 244 chain, 412, 413, 413 foot-piece, 406 ironmongery generally, 142 name plate, 300 nosings, 231 sash-bars, 300 tubing to wire bells, 465 work, clean with oxalic acid, 486 plumber's, 406 relacquer, 486 Braziers, 9 Bressummers, bolts to, 145 fir, 145 safe load on, 145 flitch, 145, 334 safe load on, 334 over coach house doors, 261, 261 rolled iron joists as, 145 Brick backing to half-timber work, 318 barrtl drains, 21 bearers to sink, 277 boundary walling, 84, 307 Brick boundary wallin?, dwarf, 86 building dresstd with stone, 128 casing to old building, 89 coping, 69, 84, 85, 310 core to column, 70 to cement cornice, 456 cornice, 79 dressings, 78 eaves course, 79 foundations to roads, 498, 497, 504, 506 frieze, 79 hearths, 53 niches, 80 nogged partitions, 77, 189 on edge, 85 paving, 55 - to footpaths, 502, 499 blue Staffoidshirc, 502: pilasters, 79 pillars, safe load on, 62 plinth, 78 quoins, 19 reveals, 79 rubbish, 41, 42 bed to footpaths, 500, 503 sill to windows, 192 strings, 79 walls, half, 77 London Building Act requirements for, 64 to 67 thickness of, 64 to 67 BRICKLAYER, 60 to 112 Bricks, air, 75, 342 bull-nose, 71, 81 class of building, 61, 62 sizes of, 61 concrete, 143 enamelled, 62, 80 81, 82 - glazed, 62, 80, 81, 82 iron air, 342 sizes of, 342 paving, 51 sizes of, 51 re-use old, 14 - salted, 62, 81, 82 various, 61, 62 wood, 142, 143 distance apart of, 142 Brickwork, circular, 69 in cement, 64, 68, 68, 68, 69, 69, 69, 69, 69, 69, 69, 70, 70, 70, 70, 70, 71, 71, 71, 71, 72, 73, 73, 73, 74, 74, 74, 76, 77, 77, 83, 84, 92, 96, 98, 99 in mortar, 64 in underpinning, 70 joints to, 64 painting on, 488 point old, 492, 492, 492, 492 pointing to, 78, 80, 80, 80, 81, 81, 81, 81, 84, 101 rake out joints and hack over for plaster,. 449, 450, 451, 451, 453, 455, 455 round stoves, 351, 352 safe load on, 62, 100 INDEX. 537 Brickwork, stain down, 492, 492 thickness of joints to, 64 to drains, 22 to loose-box and stall divisions, 371, 372, 372, 372 ' to manholes and chambers, 25 weight of, 46, 62 Bridge, 146 to heating boiler, 361 Bridging joists, 147, 149 to 153 distance apart, 148 spans of, 147 ventilation to, 151 piece, 187 solid, 149, 151, 151, 152 Bridle gate, 318 sizes of, 318 Brindled tiles, 391 Brine copper, 269, 268 British Glazing Co.'s patent system of glazin-, 473 British plate glass, rough cast, 468, 468 thickness of, 468 transparency of, 469 where suitable, 468 rough rolled diamond pattern, 469, 468 thickness of, 469 where suitable, 469 rough rolled, Hartley's, 469, 468 quality of, 467 thickness of, 469 transparency of, 469 where suitable, 469 rough rolled, quarry pattern, 468, 469 thickness of, 469 where suitable, 469 British polished plate glass, bed in vulcanised india-rubber, 467, 470, 471 bed in wash-leather, 467, 470, 471 bevelled, 469 size of, 469 cold or heat and, 469 quality of, 467, 469 quarter inch bar^, 467, 469 full, 467, 469 shelves of, 469 silvering quality, 469, 471 strength of, 469 thickness of, 469 to shop front, 470 to windows, 470 transparency of, 469 where suitable, 469 British sheet glass, coloured or stained, weight of, 467 enamelled or embossed, weight of, 468 flashed coloured, weight of, 468 fluted, weight of, 468- where used, 468 ; r - , ground, or obscured, 468 British sheet glass, ground or obscured, inter- ception of light by, 46& weight of, 468 where used, 468 ' plain, interception of light by, 469' - quality of, 467, 467 thickness of, 467 to windows, 470, 471 transparency of, 469 weight of, 467 where suitable, 467 Broken-jointed flooring, 155 Broom, 374 rack, 278, 273, 281, 282, 374 size of, 278 Broseley tiles, 390, 391 Brown paper backing to baize, 244 lining to cistern, 408, 409, 419 to damp walls, 489 to other papf rs, 490 under flooring, 158 Brunswick black stove , 493 to w.c. seat, 270, 272, 272 Brush and sponge dminer, 375, 375 Brushwood to roads, 505 Bucket, fire, 367, 367 stable, 374 Buckles, 396 Buffer stop, 246, 259 Builder, meaning of, 4 Building Act, London, and brick walls, 64 to- 67 and concrete walls, 50 and cow houses, 382 and party wall doors, 348 and staircases. 147 and stone walls, 64 to 67 and tall chimneys, 100 and wood joists, 335 requirements for footpaths, 498 roads, 497, 498 Build in generally, 68 in stones, 105 Bullet catch, 255, 263, 263 Bullock's hair, 441 Bull nose bricks, 78, 81 ends to skirting, 270 Burner?, consumption of gas by, 496 of oxygen by, 496 gas, 464 Sugg's, 464, 464 production of carbonic acid by, 496 Burnished gilding, 482, 477 gold moulding, 482 Burn off paint, 483 Burnt clay foundation to roads, 498, 498, 497 joint, 302 Burt & Potts' iron casement? 5 , 348 Bushed wheels. 243, 259 Bushes to roads, 506 Butchers' shops, shutters to, 297 Butler's pantry, china cupboard in, 175 shelves to, 275 sink, cold supply to, 410 538 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Butler's pantry sink and fittings, 274 to 276 height of, 274, 274, 412 hot supply to, 430 lead to, 412 - flap to, 274 not cased in, 274 size of, 274, 274 table, 275 bize of, 275 Butter larder, 289 slate shelves to, 388 Butt-jointed paper, 490 Butts, 234, 236, 239, 240, 241, 242, 246, 248, 250, 251, 253, 255, 264, 264, 265, 265, 268, 269, 270, 271, 271, 271, 272, 274, 275, 280, 284,285,287, 288, 293, 295, 295, 299, 302, 408, 419 generally, 142 sizes of, 240, 242 to casements with gun-metal washer, 209 - various kinds of, 242 Buttresses, 73 Bye-pass tap and regulator, 463 Byres, cow, 379 C. abin hook, 247, 263, 265, 268, 280, 287 sizes of, 247 Cable defined, 512 carrying capacity of, 520 strands to, 515 Cables, current density of, 520 or wires, electric, 515 ; and see under Wires Caen stone, 106 Caithness flagging to footpaths, 501 Call bells, 465 Camber to arches, 80 to iron girder, 329 to rolled iron joists, 329 Cames, lead, 471, 471 sizes of, 471 Camp sheeting, 325, 326 Canadian pine, 140 Candle bracket, 271, 272, 272 power, defined, 513 of incandescent lamps, 512, 512, 512, 513 Sunbeam lamps, 512 Candles, consumption of oxygen by, 496 production of carbonic acid by, 496 Canopy, 248 Cantilever brackets to stairs, 230, 231, 339, 340 Cantilevers, cast-iron, 339 Canvas and felt to cold-water service pipes, 144, 404 to gas pipes, 144 to heating pipes, 364 ' to hot-water service pipes, 144 and paint window backs, 190, 196, 198 hose, 367, 367 Capacities and sizes of circulating cylinders, 432 tanks, 433 of galvanised iron supply cisterns, 403 Capacity of storage tanks, 34 Capping, bath back, 268 fencing, 309, 309, 312 gate, 255, 257 - piece, 326 verandah, 439 \v.c. back, 272 Caps to columns, 127, 131 to gas pipes, 458, 458 to hot-water pipes, 429 to piles, 327 Carbonic acid in air, 496 produced by candles, 496 by gas burner, 496 by oil lamps, 496 by people, 496 Carbon in cast iron, 329 in steel, 329 in wrought iron, 329 CARPENTER, JOINER AND IRONMONGER, 136 to 328 Carpets, beat, 493 Carpet steps, 159 Carriage gates, 308, 311, 313 height of, 256 hinged, 258 - open framed, 315, 260 sizes of, 315 in halves, 316 - panelled, 258 sliding, 259 width of, 255 - pole hooks, 376 Carriages, amount of water required for washing, 403, 403 bell, 465 - in iron to stairs, 230, 231, 232 to stairs in wood, 225, 226 S i zes of, 227 wheeled, distance apart in coach house, 58 space required to turn in, 56, 497 sizes of, 58, 368 Carriageway to roads, 498, 504, 507, 508, 509 - width of, 497 Carry on employer's business, 13 Carrying capacity of electric light wires, 520, 515, 516 Cartage, 8 Cart away, 303, 325 Cart gates, see under Gates height of, 256 - sizes of, 255, 256, 257 Carton pierre, 449 Carved wood mouldings, 242 Carving in stone, 105, 125 to brickwork, 79 to woodwork, 218, 219, 220, 221 Cased and solid frames combined, 213 Cased frames and sashes, 190 to 204, 213 architraves to, 191, 194, 194, 196, 197, 198, 199, 205, 209, 212 INDEX. 539 'Cased frames and sashes, axle pulleys to, 191, 196, 200, 205 - back linings to, 190, 191, 192, 193, 195 to shutters of, 197, 198, 199 bars to, 191, 193, 194, 196 bottom rails to, 191, 196 cement linings to, 192 cornice to, 192 double glazing to, 193, 209 sets of, 204 of, with Venetian blinds between, 204 elbow linings to, 192, 194, 196, 197 fascia to, 192 filling in piece to, 19 1 framed grounds to, 191 glazing to, 191, 194, 196, 205 - grounds to, 194, 196 guard beads to, 196, 208 head linings to, 190, 193, 195, 204 to shutters of, 199 . horns to, 191, 196 in glazed brickwork, 192 in 9 in. wall, 190 - in 14 in. wall, 193 inner linings to shutters of, 199 inside linings to, 190, 191, 193, 195 iron gutter to, 192 tongue to, lyO, 192, 193, 195, 204, 208, 212, 214 lead flashing to sill of, 192 lines to, 191, 196, 200, 203, 205 meeting rails of, 191, 196 necking to, 192 outer linings to shutters of, 1 99 outside linings to, 190, 193, 195, 203 parting beads to, 190, 191, 193, 194, 195, 19H, 203, 204 slips to, 190, 193, 195 - to shutters of, 198, 199 zinc to, 190, 193, 195 to shutters of, 199 pocket-pieces to, 190, 193, 195, 204 to shutters of, 199 pulley styles in oak to, 195 to, 190, 193, 195, 204, 205 to shutters of, 199 repairs to, 206 sashes in small squares to, 191, 194, 196 to, 191, 194, 196, 203, 204, 205 sa^h fasteners to, 191, 196 handles to, 191, 196 lifts to, 191, 196, 205 semicircular, elliptical or seg- mental heads to, 191, 194, 196, 197, 199, Cased frames and sashes, semicircular, ellip- tical or segmental on plan, 191, 194, 197, 209 short description for, 195 sills in oak to, 190, 193, 195, 204, 208, 212, 214 skirting to, 196, 197, 198 = to shutters of, 200 soffit to, 194, 196 spandril piece to, 194 splayed grounds to, 191, 193, 194, 196, 205 to bay window, 192 Venetian, 202, 203 ventilating bead to, 190, 191, 193, 195, 204 weights to, 191, 196, 205, 206 - to shutters of, 200 window board and bearers to, 192, 194, 197, 204, 205, 209 nosing to, 191, 196, 198, 204, 209 - with brick sill, 192 mullions, 203 casements to existing win- dows, 193 panelled linings, 195, 196, 197 - plain linings, 192, 193, 194 - wood mullions, 202, 203 Case in old building with brick, 89 in with ashlar to old building, 127 up stone, 105 Casement doors, 250 Casement frames and casements, 208 to 213 double sets of, 211 to bay, 212 to w.c., 212 Casements, 209, 210, 211, 213 bars to, 209 bolts to, 209 Burt and Potts' iron, 348 double glazing to, 193, 209 sets of, 211 - fanlight to, 209, 210, 211, 212 Farrar & Co.'s iron, 348 fastenings to, 209, 347, 348 - glass to, 209, 211, 212 hinges to, 209 in gun-metal, 348 in small squares, 209 - in steel, 348 in wrought iron, 348 on centres, 209, 347 opening inwards, 210, 211 outwards, 2C8, 211 repairs to, 206 stay to, 209 to bay, 212 to circular sweep on plan or head, 209 to existing windows, 212, 193 to w.c., 212 water bar to, 209, 210, 211 Case up work, 142 540 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Casing to bath, 267, 268. 415, 415, 416, 41G, 416, 417, 417, 417, 418, 418 to cistern, 408, 412, 419, 427, 364 to coils, 293 to cylinder, 431 to expansion cistern, 364 to gas meter, 462 to gas pipes, 144, 458 to lavatory, 269, 415 to pipes generally, 144 to sinks, 274 to spirit pipes, 302 to w.cs., *70, 271, 272 to water-waste preventers, 421, 423 Casings to electric light wires, 521, 218 insulators to, 521 position of, 518 sizes of, 521 Casks, 303 Cast-iron bath, 417 quality of, 417 sizes of, 417 without casing, 417 cantilevers, 339, 339, 340 carbon in, 329 chairs, 336, 336 Cast-iron columns, test, 331 fireproof, 342 height and thickness of, 340 safe load on, 340 strength of various sections of, 340 various, 340 Cast-iron girders, 339 safe load on, 339 stress of, 339 sizes of, 3L.9 heating boiler, 361 malleable, where employed, 3:9 painting to, 330 quality of, 330 Cast-iron stanchions, fireproof, 342 safe load on, 341. strength of various sections of, 341 thickness and height of, 341 various forms of, 341, 342 weight of, 329 - where employed, 329 windows, 347 Casters, 286 Cast-lead trap, 406 sheet lead, 397 size of, 397 weight of, 397 Cathedral glass, ci lour of, 4C9, thickness of, 469 weight f, 469 where used, 469 Catches, 234, 246, 247, 263 fanlight, 295, 299 Catch pits, 33 Cat ladder, 167 Caulked lead joints, 366 Cedar shingles, 395 Ceiling joists, battens to, 215, 215 distance apart of, 148 , C eiling joists, fl< orii g in rocf over, 156 > - strutting to, 149, 151, 152, 153, 156, 162, 167, 171, 174, 179, 180 to roofs, 167, 162, 17 J, 174, 179, 180' lights, 186 cleaning to, 186 glass to, 186 - paper, 491, 491 plates, class of, 521 panelling, 221, 221 - ribs, 221, 448 picked out in tints, 484 roses, 448 to cleaning room, 375 to sick box, 378 to stables, 369 to thatched roof, 396 to washing box, 376 union, 303 Ceilings, distempering to, 585 fire and sound proof \ laster, 445 in cement, 445 in gauged plaster, 445 - line old, 452 - plaster for, 445, 445, 446 , renew old plaster to, 451 to cellars and boiler-house in plaster, 44&- to concrete floors and stairs, 446, 450 to lanterns and lights in i laster, 448 wash, stop and whiten, 452 whiten, 452 - old, 452 Cellar, beer, 290 ceilings, plaster to, 446 doors and linings, 240, 252, 253, 253, 254: - flaps, 266 glazed, 266 - lights to, 475, 474 sizes of, 475 various makers of, 474 wine, 290 Cellars, arches to, 71 asphalt to, 71 excavate for, 40 facings to, 80 paving to, 55, 1C 9 Cement against damp walls, 453 and heat, 73 architraves, 456 arrises, 443 ashlar, 455 balusters, 456 balustrade, 456 bed tiling in, 390 columns, 456 concrete, 44, 44, 45, 45, 45, 45, 45, 84, 22 to clothes posts, 304 to drying-ground, 304 coping, 455 core to cornice formed in, 456, 456 cornice, 455 coves, 447 fillets, t 3 filleting to slates, 386 where necessary s 386 INDEX. 541 'Cement floated facs to roads, 508, 509 floors in, 457 for plaster, 441 frieze ornaments in, 456 hack off loose, 456 hearth, 53, 457 joints to heating pipes, 363, 364 Keene's, 445; and see Keene's Cements linings to shutters, 451 to sash frames, 192 Martin's, 445 - Medina, 441 to outside work for quick painting, 441 Messrs. Earle's, 364 - mortar, 64, 22, 105 - oil, 386, 388, 388, 389 - packing to rivets, 332, 332, 332, 332 - paint, 453, 454, 456, 456 _ painting to Keene's or Parian, 476 Parian, 455 - paving, 47, 54, 55, 55, 58, 457 pilasters, 456 plinth, 455 - Portland, 42, 22, 62, 105, 441 quoins, 455 - red lead, 388, 389, 389, 389, 429 repairs to, 451, 456 reveals, 457, 450 Robinson's, 445 Roman, 441 rustic blocks, 455, 456 sides to urinals, 424 sills, 457, 456 skirting, 218, 451, 451 - soffits, 457, 450 strength of, 42 strings, 455 stucco, composition of, 444 externally, 453, 454, 455 where used, 444 rough cast, composition of, 444 externally, 454 where used, 444 to backs of coil cases, 451 to bath, 267, 268 to external walls, 455, 455 to half-timber work, 318, 318, 322, 454, 454, 454 to internal walls, 450 to parapet walls, 452 voussoirs in, 455 wash to lead cisterns, 427 to walls, 456, 488 weight of, 42 window backs, 451 boards, 450 Centering to arches, 143 to groins, 143 to trimmers, 143 to vaults, 143 Central wood newel to stairs, 231 Centre flowers, 448 flowers, distempering to, 485 guide, 203 lining, 204, 204, 213 Centres, 209 - to sashes, 182 Ceramic paving, 52 Cesspools, 31 cubic capacity of, 32 excavate for, 40 in copper to gutters, 438 - in lead to gutters, 399, 401, 397, 397 sizes of, 399, 401 - in wood to gutters, 163, 171, 179, 180 in zinc to gutters, 434 pump to, 31 short length of pipe to, 400 sizes of, 32 Chaff bin, 376, 377 Chain, brass, 412, 413, 413 to dome, 178 - to flaps, 266 Chair rail, 218 in ha:d wood, 218 Chairs, iron, 336, 336 Chalk, binding qualities o r , 498 foundations, 3v> keep from action of weather, 498 to gate posts, 258 - to roads, 498, 498, 497 - weight of, 90 Champion's old white lead, 478 Channel iron to gates, 259 stones, 113, 121 Channelled rustic quoins in cement, 455, 456 Channels for heating pipes, 70 - kerbs for pipe, 108, 120 open drain, 24 stone covers for pipe, 107 - to roads, 498, 503, 504, 507, 508, 509 Chappuis' reflectors, 474 Charcoal hot plate, 357 stove, 353, 350, 350 Charlton white enamel paint, 477, 324 Charring to gates, 258 to posts, 305, 307, 308, 308, 311, 311, 312, 312, 314, 314, 315, 316, 318 Char timbers, 142, 147, 149 Chases for pipes, 70 Chatsworth boiler, 360, 362, 359 sizes of, 361 Cheeks, pewter, 302 lead, to dormer, 401 slate, to dormer, 385 tile, to dormer, 391, 394 to fireplaces, 269 to stoves, 350, 351, 351, 351, 352 Check spring to bells, 465 throated sill, 190, 193, 195, 204, 208 valve, 425 Children's w.cs., height of, 270 Chimney bars, 74, 335 breast in roofs, plaster to, 450 , breasts, corbels to, 106, 107 pieces, boxed, 134 clean, 13 i, 487, 493 in iron, 335, 349 - in slate, 389 in stone, plain, 112, 121 542 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Chimney pieces in wood, 223 marble, 134 paint, 483, 482 re6xed, 352 pots, 72 flaunch, 492 reset, 492 restore, 492 sizes of, 72 shafts, tall, 99 thickness of, 100 stacks and iron stiffened, 335 ties, 335 thatch, 396 in brick, 72, 73, 86 in stone, 126, 128 point, 422 stone dressings to, 126, 128 China cupboard, 275, 289 Chocks, 256, 310 Chopping block, 279, 286 Christiania deal, 139, 140, 140 Church bells, 466 Cigar light, 150 Cinder path, 499 Cinders to footpaths, 499, 499 to roads, 499 Circuit, carrying capacity of, 520, 515 definition of, 515 points to be considered in each, 515 Circuits, separate, 523 small, 520, 515 Circular arches, 71 bent glass, 471, 472, 473, 473, 473, 473 brickwork, 69 doors, 241 plaster, 443 ribs, 176, 177 sashes and frames, 191, 194, 196, 197, 209 segmental or elliptical heads to doors, 241 slating, 385 - staircases in stone, 117, 117, 118, 120 in wood, 231, 231 Circulating cylinder, 430 asbestos cement to, 430, 431 capacity of, 432 casing to, 431 - position of, 429 quality of, 432 sizes of, 432 cylinders in duplicate, 432 tank, capacities of, 433 feed tank to, 431 position of, 429 quality of, 433 - safe to, 433 - sizes of, 433 supply to, 431 to stables, 379 when in bath room, 432 in linen closet, 432 in roof, 431, 433 Cisterns and supplies to w.cs., slop sink and urinals, 419 to 424 Cisterns, bearers to, 408, 412, 419, 427, 428 brown paper lining to, 408, 409, 419 - casing to, 408, 412, 419, 427, 364 cement wash to lead, 427 clean out, 433 feed, and supply to range, 411 felt or silicate cotton packing to, 408, 412, 419, 404 for basement supply, 412, 411 galvanised iron, 419, 427, 428 drinking-water supply, 408, 410, 412 supply, qualities of, 403, 404- sizes and capacities of, 403 lead, and hard water, 397 attacked by soft water, 397 lined, 426, 427, 419 for rain water, 427 soldered angles to, 427 stiffeners to, 426, 427 underlay to, 427 - overflows to, 409, 409, 412, 427 trumpet mouth, 409 paint names on, 486 rain-water, 428, 427 safes to, 409, 412, 419, 427 sediment in, 410, 420 several together, 410 - slate, 389 storage, done away with, 409 to each w.c., 422 weight of lead suitable for, 397 zinc lined, 436 Clark, Bunnett & Co.'s shutters, 298 Clay bed to roads, 498, 498, 497 puddle floor to cow stalls, 381 to walls, 45 soils, 39 weight of, 90 Cleft oak bars, 318 pales, 307, 309 height of, 309 rails, 314 Cleaning chamber, 29 hook, 375, 375 horse, 375, 375 Cleaning room, brush and sponge drainer in, 375 ceiling of, 375 cleaning horse in, 375 fittings to, 375 folding brackets in, 375 gas to, 368 gully trap in, 375 paving to, 368, 375 telescopic harness cleaning hook in, 375 walls of, 375 out pipes to cisterns, 409, 412, 419, 427 Clean and bleach marble chimney pieces, 134, 487, 493 and touch up paint, 478, 483 glass, 467 glazed brickwork, 486 leave premises, 17 INDEX. 543- Clean marble, 486 out baths, 433 boilers, 433 cisterns, 433 gutters, cesspools and stack pipes, 384, 492, 393, 394, 402 heating boiler and flues, 365 pipes generally, 433 traps, 433 under floors, 17 w.cs., 433 pavings, 17 windows, 17, 486 Clearcole, composition of, 476 on plaster, 485 walls, 452 where used, 476 Clear away, 14 Clear sheet glass, see Sheet Glass sheet glass and eaves, 183 Cleat fastenings, 182, 209, 247, 265, 265, 304 Cleats to roofs, 162, 171 wood, 310 Clerk of works office, 9 Clinkers, adamantine, 51 paving, 57, 58 sizes, 51 Dutch, 51 paving, 58 sizes, 51 Clips to bath, 269 to eaves gutter, 342 to glass, 182, 184, 470 to lavatory basin, 414 to pipes, 429, 458 Cloak hooks, 268, 291 rails, 236, 291 Clock, 369 Close copper nailing, 398, 399, 401, 412, 412, 413, 413 fencing, 307 to 312 fire range, 355, 355, 354, 354, 354 boiler, 430, 429 sizes of, 354 Closets, earth, 422 Closet, linen, 292 trough, 422, 273 water, see Water Closets Clothes line, 304 posts, 303, 304 rail, 11 Coach house, carriage pole hook in, 376 doors, 260, 261, 262 frames to, 260, 261, 262 height of, 261 in thin walls, 261 light in, 262 size of, 368 stone blocks to, 261 width of, 261 with segmental heads, 261 fittings, 376 gas to, 368 niche in, 376 Coach house niche, indiarubber hose to, 376- - paving to, 58, 368 sizes for, 58 Coachman's rooms, 369 Coach screws, 260, 263, 320, 320, 321, 321 Coal-cellar doors, 252 hot plate, 357 hood to, 357 lift, 235 plate kerb, 76, 108 plates, 347, 76 sizes of, 347 space occupied by, and weight of, 14& shoot, 76 Cock piece, 162 Cocks, air, 379 ball, 422, 379 bib, 406, 408, 410, 411, 418, 430 electro-plated, 302 to heating boiler, 360, 361, 362 hydrant draw-off, 367 lavatory, 414 required, 433 screw-down kind, 406 stop, 407, 408, 409, 410, 410, 411, 411 ,. 412,415,416 to gas, 461, 461, 462, 463, 463, 463, 463,463,463 Coarse stuff plaster, 147 Coat hook, 236, 243, 269, 271, 272, 272 Coburg varnish, 478, 477 white enamel, 478, 477 Mander's, 478 Cobweb grating, 412 Cocoa ma'tting, 159 Cogs to tiles, 390, 391, 391, 393 Coil cases, 364 access door to, 364 cement at back of, 451 marble top to, 364, 135 paint, 483 Coils, heating, 362, 363, 363, 363,363, 363,. 363, 365, 361 sizes of, 363 casing to, 293 trays to, 364 Coke, 9 Cold air, 324 Cold store or refrigerator, 322 to 325, 289,. 289, 388 double roof to, 325 position of, 322, 325 size of, 325 temperature of, 325 water draw-off from main, 408 service pipes in lead, 405, 404 governed by head of water, 405 weight of, 405 in iron, 405 keep away from hot-water pipes, 404 Cold water supply to bath, 411 to butler's sink, 410 to circulating tank, 431 544 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Cold water supply to copper, 410 to draw-off in area, 410 on landing, 410 to dispensing sink, 410 to feed cistern to range, 411 to flushing tank, 410 - o geysers, 411, 418, 419 to heating boiler, 364 to housemaid's s : nk, 410 to kitchen boiler, 411, 430 - to lavatory, 410, 410 to scullery sink, 410 to slop sink, 410 t ) washing trough, 410 Collar beam, 175 roof, 175 spans of, 175 tie, 175 Collinge's gate-stay, 255, 256 hinges, 255, 257, 260, 263, 264, 316 - sizes of, 256 Colonnade paving, 120 Coloured sheet glass, weight of, 467 Colouring, composition of, 443 -*- leave work to dry before, 477 pigment, 443, 443, 479, 476 to half-timber work, 318 to old walls, 452 to stucco, 453, 453, 454, 454, 454, 488 - to walls, 83, 452, 478, 485 where used, 443 Column closet, 421 Columns, bases to, 127, 131, 109 caps to, 127, 131 cast iron, height and thickness of, 340 safe load on, 340 tests for, 331 various, 310 cement, 456 core to, 70 granite, 131 marble, 133 seatings to, 127 steel, 342 stone, 127, 131, 133 wood, 220, 221 and iron combined, 221 wrought-iron, various, 342 Comb graining, 481, 481 Common lime stucco, 444 paper, how printed, 489 - rafters, 162, 170, 171, 173 when extra strength required, 161 Completion, date of, 6 Compo moulding, 472 Composite roof, 173 spans of, 1 73 Composition gas-tubing, 459 weight of, 459 sizes of, 459 nails, weight of, 335 Compressed air, 466 Compressive stress on cast-iron girders, 339 on steel girders, 331 Compressive stress on wrought-iron girders, 331 Concave tiles, 393 Concrete and cement paving, 47, 54, 55, 55, 58 bricks or blocks, 143 - cement, 44, 44, 45, 45, 45, 45, 45, 84, 22 excavate for, 40, 84 filling round stoves, 352, 351 fireproof floors, 46, 47, 44 stairs, 46, 47 - flats or roofs, 48, 49, 44 weights on, 49 floor, ceiling to, 446, 450 staging to, 143 - foundations, 44, 45, 84, 85 not always required, 39 - to footpaths, 500, 501, 510, 497 - to kerbs, 500 - to roads, 507, 508, 509, 497 gangways, 49 - landings, 47, 48, 115 to stairs, 115 - lime, 44, 22 hydraulic, 44 selenitic, 44 - lintels, 143 mixing and laying, 44 paving to footpaths, 502, 497 - plateau of, 39 proportion of ingredients for various posi- tions, 44 river and sea walling, 93, 50, 60, 44 roof, staging to, 143 spandrils to arches, 45 - stable pillar bases, 371, 372 strength of, 47 surface, 45 terraces, 49 - to clothes posts, 304 to drying grounds, 303 - to fencing and gates, 255, 256, 259, 307, 308, 310, 311, 311, 312, 312, 315, 316, 318 to fire mains, 366 underpinning, 45 under water, 44 - walls, 49, 60, 44 communicate sound, 50 planking to, 143 London Building Act requirements for, 49, 50 strength of, 49 thickness of, 49 weight of, 46 Condensation, 325 - gutter, 182, 183, 184 outlet holes to, 183, 184 Condensed liquids in gas pipes, 462, 462 Conditions, general, 4 read, 5 Conductivity defined, 513 Conductors, bunching of, 520 class of, 519 INDEX. 545 Conductors of different colours, 520 position of, 520 Confectioner's counter, 303 Connections to gas company's mains, 461 to gas pipes, 458 to stone, 104 Connecting tank, 36?, 364 Connect to water company's main?, 406 with sewer, 28 Conservatory blinds, 207 Consoles, 225, 226 Constable's tar paving, 499 Constructional timbers, class of various, 139, 140 . distance apart, 139 in elm, 141 in greenheart, 142 in oak, 140 in pitch pine, 141 in teak, 141 Constantine's convoluted stove, 358 Consumption of gas by Argand burner, 460 by burners, 496 by Meteor lamp, 463 by ordinary jets, 460, 460 by VYenham lamp, 463 Container, pan closet, 421 Continous action bells, 466 handrail, 228, 229, 2 127 outer string, 228, 228 Contour of roads, 498, 504, 503, 507, 508, Contract, form of, 2 Contractor not to advertise, 11, 19 Converter, 523 defined, 515 Convex lense pavement lights, 474 tiles, 393 Cook's hand lavatory, 415 cold supply to, 410 Cooking ranges and hot plates, 354 to 357 Cooper's glass ventilator, 473, 474, 474, 495 sizes of, 474 Copal varnish, 478, 481, 481, 482, 482, 477 Mander's, 478 Coping, brick, 69, 84, 85, 310 on edge, 310 cement, 455 stone, 111, 85, 121 Copings, point, 492, 492 reset, 492 Copper aprons, 438 bath, 417, 418 sizes of, 417 weight of, 417, 418 bell tubing, 465, 466 brine or salt water, 269, 268 cold supply to, 410 domes, 439 - flap, 409, 409, 409, 409, 415, 416, 417 flashings, 438 Copper flats, 438 boarding to, 433 cesspools to, 438 Copper flats, drips to, 438 dcuble well to, 438 felt to, 438 gutters to, 438 pitch for, 438, 438 roll caps, 438 saddle ends to, 438 - rolls for, 438 distance apart of, 438 seams to, 438 splayed eaves to, 438 welted joints in, 438, 438, 438, 43 - lid, 75 Copper lightning conductors, 440, 439 alloy in, 440 joints to, 439, 440, 440 plate to, 440 size of wi-e rope, 439 - .sizes of, 439, 440 and weitrht of ribbon or tape, 440,439,440 various forms of, 439 weijiht of, 439, 440 Mathieson's standard of pure, 519 nailing, close, 398, 399, 401, 412, 412, 413, 413 open, 389, 398, 399, 399, 400, 401, 402, 409, 415 - nails, 419, 421, 423, 427, 437 weight of, 385 pan, 74 plate to lightning conductor, 440 portable washing, 347 sizes, 347 ribbon or tape as lightning conductor, sizes of, 440, 439 weight of, 440 rods as lightning conductors, 439 - roofs, 438 scullery, 74 sheets, sizes of, 438 - weights of, 438, 160 sparge pipe, 440 sizes of, 444 - tinned, 412, 413 tubes as lightning conductors, 439 tubing not to be used for gas, 459 turrets, 439 verandah capping in, 439 sizes of, 439 verdigris and, 439 wire cord sash lines, 440 sizes of, 440 working loads of, 440 - wire lines, 191, 196, 200 rope as lightning conductor, size of, 439 to bells, 465 gauge of, 465 COPPERSMITH, 438 to 440 Copy of plans, 7 Corbelling, various, 68, 106, 107, 107 Corbels, iron, 174, 335 to bay, 107, 120 2 N 546 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Corbels to plates, 107, 120 Cord, copper sash line, 440 Cords and tassels to bells, 465, 4G5, 466 Core, brick, to columns, 70, 116 - stone, to cornice, 107 to cement cornice, 456, 456 string, 456 sill, 457 to handrail, 344, 229, 116 to heating boiler, 361 to sash bars, 300 to string, 344, 228 Corn bin in iron, 377 sizes of, 377 meter, 377 - shoot, 376, 377 - size, 377 space occupied by, 377 store bin, 376, 377 Corner or angle posts to lanterns, 181, 182 Cornice, shop, and London Building Act, 296 Cornices and coves in cement, 445 in gauged plaster, 444 in plaster, composition of, 442 brackets to, 442, 446, 447, 447, 448 brick, 79 - distempering to, 485 enriched moulded to ground floor, 447 with frieze ornaments, 447 - to first floor, 446 - to hall, 448 - to stairs, 448 to vestibule, 448 external cement, 455 granite, 131 - in wood, 219, 220, 222, 221, 221 - built up, 219 mouldings to window, 192 plain moulded plaster to basement, 448 - to first floor, 446 - to lobby, 448 to second floor, 446 plaster of Paris to, 442 stone, 125, 128, 131 - core to, 107, 456 to shop, 296 Cornish granite macadam, 505, 497 paving to footpaths, 502 . setts to roads, 507, 497, 507 Corrugated iron roofs, 338 - arched, 336 sheets, sizes and weights of, 338, 160 tiles, 393 Corsehill stone, 106 Corsham Down stone, 106 Cotton wool, filtering by, 292 Counter arches, 70 bar, 301 basin to, 302 confectioners', 303 cupboards under, 302 flap, 302 hinges, 302 Counter flooring, 158 front, 302, 302 door, 302 lathing, 442 marble, 303 pewter to, 437 weight of, 437 - rail, 309, 309, 312 screens, 302 shop, 303 sub-, 302 - top, 302, 303, 303 size o'', 302, 303 - under-, 302 Countersunk rivets, 330 Countess slates, 385, 387, 384, 384 Country footpaths, width of, 497 road described, 498 where suitable, 498 roads, width of, 497 County Council, London, and staircases, 147 requirements for cow houses, 382 Coupling screws, 366, 367, 367 Course, damp, to walls, 76, 84, 54 to parapets, 76 Coursed ashlar, 121, 122, 124 random rubble, 122, 123 Covered ways, 41 Cover plates to girders, 332, 332 stones to bressummers, 145 to coach house doors, 261 to dry areas and channels, 107, 120 - to girders, 108 - to iron and steel girders, 332, 332, 332, 339 - to lintels, 333 to rolled iron joists, 331 to steel joists, 331 - up walls, 10, 61 Coves, bracket to, 447, 442 enriched, 447 distempering to, 485 - in plaster, 447, 442 Covings to ranges, 355, 355, 355, 354 Cow byres, 379 - lairs, 379 Cow houses, bed or standing space, width of, 380 cubical contents per cow, 382 - doors to, 264, 382 width of, 264 dunging passage, width of, 380, 380 feeding passage, width of, 379 - fitments to, 379 to 382 floor or paving to, 381 - puddled, 381 London County Council requirements for, 382 manger fittings, width of, 379 height of, 382 mangers, various, 381, 382 partly cemented over, 382 sizes of, 380 skylight to, 382 INDEX. 547 Cow houses, stall divisions (travises), sizes of, 381 woodwork to, 381 ventilation to, 382 _ wa iis of, 382 water required for cow, 382, 403 windows, 213, 214, 382 Cows, water required for, 382, 403 C.P., definition of, 513 Cracks and blisters in plaster, cut out, 443 in single-joisted floor ceiling, 151 Cradle, bath, 268, 417, 417 Cradling to lanterns, 180 to shops, 296, 145 Cramps, 92, 104, 11? 5, 126, 127, 331 Cranes, jack, 356, 355, 355, 355, 356 liftins, 349, 264, 266 smoke, 355, 355, 356 Cranks, bell, 465 Creasing, slate, 111, 344, 389 tile, 85, 112 Credit old lead, 397 materials, 18 Creosote, amount required of, 142, 509 to tar paving, 499 to wood paving, 508, 509, 142 Creosoted piles, 326, 327, 328, 142 Creosoting and life of timber, 137, 142 Cresting, tile, 391 to eaves gutter, 342 to gates, 255, 257, 315, 316 Crippled wreaths, 228 Crosses to pipes, 429, 458 Cross garnett hinges, 252, 253, 408, 419 sizes of, 253 girders to flat, 180 Cross rebated drips, 178, 178, 180 Crossing setts, 500 Crossings, road, 500, 507, 498, 505 Crown glass, qualities of, 468 superseded by sheet, 468 thickness of, 468 - weight of, 468 where suitable, 468 Memel oak, 141 of road, 498, 504, 507, 508, 509 Crushed granite, 502 Cupolas, see Domes Cup and ball hinges, 255, 257, 260, 263, 264, 323 sizes of, 256 and jug hooks, 276, 289 Cupboards, china, 275, 289 dwarf, 291 for fire hose, 366 harness, 375 in bedrooms, 291 - kitchen, 285 - locks to, 275, 276, 284, 285, 285 - pot, 271, 272, 272 to boot and lamp room, 290 - to dresser, 284 to housemaid's sink, 273 to linen closet, 292 ' Cupboards to scullery, 278 - to slop sink, 282 - under counter, 302 various, 291 with circular angle, 285 sliding fronts, 276 Cups and screws, 196, 209, 243, 249, 251, 267, 267, 270, 272, 272, 295, 295, 295, 299, 302, 458 Curb roof, 174 contour of, 174 Garbs, see under Kerbs Current density, safe working, 520, 515, 516 Curtail steps, wood, 226 stone, 115, 119 Curtain poles, relacquer, 486 - rods, 222 Curvature of roads, 506 Cut and mitred hips and valleys, 392 away for, and make good for electric light, 518 for, and make good for gas, 460 Cutting away, 367 Cuttings to brick, rough and fair, 67 to tiles, 51 Cut-out, additional, 519 base to, 514 defined, 514 main double-pole, 523 resistance of, 514 sizes of, 514 Cut out knots, 479, 476 stains in plaster, 452 tooth and bond, 14, 68 Cylinders, circulating, 430 asbestos cement to, 430, 431 capacities of, 432 casing to, 431 in duplicate, 432 qualities of, 432 sizes of, 432 D. Dado against flues, 218 irregular panels in, 219 marble, 133 painting to, 484 - paper, 490, 490, 489, 489 plaster at back of, 218 rail, 218, 490 - wood, 218, 219, 220 Dairy, thatched roof to, 396 Damages, liquidated, 6, 20 Damp course to parapets, 76 walls, 76, 84, 54, 305 vertical, 387 prevention of, 387 search for, 15 walls, asphalt as a preventive against, 453 brown paper to, 489 cement as a preventive against, 453 2 N 2 548 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Damp walls, gutter percha to, 489 India rubber to, 489 neat Portland ceinent only proof against, 453 sheet lead to, 489 tin foil to, 489 Dampers to flue, 431 to heating boiler, 362, 361 1 to range, 355, 355, 356, 357 sizes of, 355 Dancing on floors, 158 Dantzic fir, 139 oak, 141 Date of completion, 6 Dead gilding, 482, 477 load, 136, 146, plate, 362 water in hot water circulation ,'430 Deal flooring, 155, 156, 157, 157, 158, 158, generally to, 154 Deals, Archangel, 139, 140, 157 Christiania, 139, 140 for flooring, 140 for joinery, 139, 140 1 half, 157 Onega, 139, 140 i red or yellow, 139 St. Petersburg, 139, 140 sizes of, 137 Stockholm, 140 Swedish, 140, 155 white, 140 yellow or red, 139 f Dean's gullies, 33 Decanting bench, 290, 387 height of, 290 Decay of timber, 137 Definitions of terms used in electric I 511 to 515 Delivery pipe, 424, 425 Dentils, iron, 218, 219, 220, 242, 296 plaster, 447 stone, 125 Derbyshire limestone chippings, 499 Details, 9 Devonshire granite macadam, 505 Diagonal boarding, 254 Diamond pattern glass, 469, 468 thickness of, 469 where used, 469 Difference of potential defined, 513 Dimensions not shown, 5 of drain pipes, 22, 25, 36 Dinner flap, 234 lift, 234 height from floor of, 234 sizes of, 234 Dining room paper, 490, 489 Discharge pipe, 421, 423, 423 Disconnect sewer, 26 Discount off paper, 490 Dish cover rack, 286 hooks, 286 rest, 355, 355, 355, 355, 357 Dish shelves, 283 Dispenser's sink, 280 cold supply to, 410 height of, 280 hot supply to, 430 pewter to, 413 shelves to, 280 size of, 280 Distance of main timbers apart, 139. Distemper, composition of, 443, 478 lining paper, 490 marble paper, 491 on walls, 452, 485 on old walls, 452, 485 where used, 443 Distempered lining paper, 489 Distempering to ceilings, cornices, coves and centre flowers, 484, 485, 485 Distilled water, weight of, 403 Distributing board system, 522, 511, 512 switch boards, 518, 519, 519, 523 class of, 519 defined, 515 fuse boards, 523, 523, 523, 523, 523, 524 r 524, 524, 525, 525, 526 Divans, 150 Division walls to larder shelves, 388 to wine cellar shelves, 387 Dog grate or stoves, 352, 350, 350, 351 register to, 352, 351 Dog-legged stairs, 224, 225, 226 irons, 256 Dome top boiler, 379 Domed skylights, iron, 336, 337 glazing to, 472, 473, 473- Domes, band to, 178 base of, 177 boarding to, 177 chain round, 178 copper, 4 39 head piece to, 177 iron, 177 - kerb to, 177 lantern to, 177 lead to, 402, 177 rafters to, 177 ribs to, 177, 178 rolls to, 177 sole piece to, 177, 178 ties to, 177, 178 timber, 177 spans of, 177 Domestic buildings, quantity of piping re- quired for heating, 358 Door bell, 466, 246, 249, 250, 251, 252 buffers, 246 butts, see under Butts sizes of, 240, 242 catch, 246, 234, 247, 263 chain, 246, 247 sizes of, 247 checks, 261, 261 dressings, stone, 126, 128 escutcheons, 239 INDEX. 549 "Boor frames, 246, 247, 248, 251, 252, 252, 253, 253, 260, 261, 320, 262, 263, 264, 264 build in, 138 dowels t^, 144 horns to, 237 painting to, 237 shoes to, 143, 346, 317 ; and see Shoes, door sizes of, 247 stone bases or seatings to, ,113, 121, 144 secure, 138 to half-timber work, 320 to ice chamber, 323 furniture, generally, 142 various, 238, 239, 239, 239, 240, 241, 244, 246, 250, 251, 252, 253, 260, 263, 264 grille, 297 guard, 246 handles, 239, 241, 244, 250, 251 head or canopy, 248, 307 knob, 246 leaves, 243 linings, 238, 239, 240, 240, 240, 240, 241, 241, 242, 246, 247 posts, 187, 262 shoes, 143, 346, 347, and see Shoes, Door weight of, 347 springs, 240, 241, 243, 253 tdzes of, 241 stops, 233, 246, 251, 261 tradesmen's entrance, 250 Doors, 237 to 254, 260 to 265 architraves to, see under Architraves to Doors baize, 244 basement, 239, 240 bolts to, 240, 243, 243 bottom rail to, 237, 253, 260 - cellar, 240, 252 circular, segmental or elliptical header), 241, 247 , built up, 247 on plan, 241 coach house, 260, 261, 262, 262, 368 cow house, 264 size of, 264, 382 double margined, 248 elliptical headed, 241, 247 entrance, 246 to 251 external, 246 to 254, 260 to 264 ; and see under Entrance Doors eye plates to, 239 fanlights to, 243, 246, 249, 251, 252, 262, 263 finger plates to, 239, 233 first floor, 243 folding, 243, 250, 250, 251 framed and braced, 253, 254, 260 to 264 French casement, 250 frieze rail to, 237, 260 . generally to, 237 Doors, glass to, 470, 249, 250, 250, 251, 262, 264 to lower panels of, 240 to fanlights over, 471 grilles to, 249 ground floor, 241, 243 hard wood, 245 in two leaves, 238 ' internal, 237 to 245 iron, 348 to party walls, 348 irregular panels to, 241 ironmongery to, allow a p.c. sum for, 238 jib, 245 kitchen offic >s, 239, 240 ledged, 238, 252 where used, 238 and braced, 253 lock rails to, 237, 253, 260 height of, 237 locks to, 236, 239, 239, 240, 241, 244, 246, 250, 252, 253 lofr, 264 guard to, 264 size of, 368 loose box, 371 size of, 371 sliding, 371 louvred, 26 - metal plates as a protection to, 251, 252 middle rail to, 237, 253, 260 height of, 237 munting to, 237, 248, 258 number of panels in, 241 office, 244 old, reused, 144 panel mouldings to, 238, 239 panelled, 237 to 252 where used, 238 panels in pin, 237, 238 . in two thicknesses, 237 partly glazed, 249 pilasters to, 242 plinth stops, 239, 240, 240, 241, 241, 246 public house, 251 repairs to, 265, 493 revolving shutters as, 348 safe, 349 segmental headed, 241, 247 shed, 305 shop, 250, 251 shutters to, 249, 249, 250 sizes of, 238 sliding, 238, 243, 371 cupboard, 276, 285 iron, 348 stable, 262, 263 size of, 368 stacking, 237 strong room iron, 349 study, 244 styles to,. 237, 243, 244, 250, 250, 251, 253,260,262,264,264 t i;. .i ,i 550 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Doors, swing, 251, 252 thickness of, 241 to counter front, 302 to cow house, size of, 382 to dresser, 284, 285 to half-timber buildings, 322, 320 to ice chamber, 324, 324, 325 to lift, 234, 235 to show board, 295 to sink, 274 top floor, 243 rail to, 237, 253, 260 trap, in ceiling, 265 in floor, 265 in roofs and flats, 167, 168, 171, 179, 180 veneered, 245 ventilation to, 249 water closet, 240, 243, 245, 253 with marginal lights, 249 sashes, 249 wrought iron, 348 in party wall, 348 Dormer access to roof, 168, 171 cheeks, lead to, 401 slating to, 385 tiling to, 391, 394 windows, 169, 171, 205 Double arm pendant, 368 course of shingles at eaves, 395 of slates at eaves, 384 of tiles at eaves, 390, 392, 394 dinner lift, 234 floors, 147, 152 span of, 147 flooring, 158 and skirting, 215 gilding, 482, 477 glazing to sashes and casements, 193, 209 laths, 441, 445, 449 margined doors, 248 pole switch, 514 single-break switch, 523, 523, 523, 514 double-break switch, 514 roll tiles, 393 roofs, 325 sets of cased frames, 204 with Venetian blinds, 204 of casement frames, 211 size, 489, 443 skylights, 186, 187 span roof, lead to, 402 swing gas bracket, 464 sizes of arms, 464 welt, 438 Doubles, 384 Doulton's road gullies, 506 Dovetailed backings, 196, 216, 217 skeleton framed, 196 legs and bearers, 270, 272, 273, 274 Dove marble, 132 Dowels to door Ir.im^s, 144 to floors, 157 ! Dowels to stone, 104, 125, 120 1 to tiles, 391 I Dowelled flooring, 157 joints, 104 Downrights, 318 Drafted arris, 129 face, 103 Dragged face, 103 Dragon piece, 162, 171 DRAINAGE, 21 to 38 Drainage, house, 21 stable, 35, 378, 370, 368 Drain, main, 29 pipes, dimensions of, 22, 25, 30 in concrete, 24 to heating boiler, 361 Drains, acid pipe, 24 agricultural, 36, 506 arches over, 71, 22 bed feet in concrete, 24 branch, 29 brick barrel, 21 brickwork to, 22 excavate for, 22 flush out, 26 garden path, 33 gradient of, 21 grub up, 26 iron pipe, 24 joints to, 25 open channels to, 24 planking and strutting to, 22 rain water, 33, 31 report on, 38 road, 506, 506 distance apart of, 506 depth of, 506 gullies to, 506 shoes to, 33 stable, 35, 378, 370, 368 Stanford's joints to, 23 stoneware pipe, 23 cement joints to, 23 subsoil, 36 testing, 21 to lawn, 33 trench out for, 22 tunnel for, 22 ventilating pipe to, 30 weeping, 91, 92, 93 Drainer, spirit, 303 Draining board, fluted wood, 273, 27 I, 274, 277 kad to, 412, 413, 413 Draper's shop, show board to, 299 Drawer, air inlets, 495 handles, 276, 279, 283 knobs, 279, 283 locks, 276, 279, 283, 302 j Drawers, china cupboard, 276 dresser, 283 I lamp and boot room, 290 table, 279, 275 to counters, 302 INDEX. 551 Draw fret, 355, 355, 355, 355, 357 off cock to hydrant, 367 for hot water from exhaust pipe, 433 from rising main, 408 in yard, 376 in area, 410 on landing, 410 hot supply to, 430 sink on landing, 413, 280 to slop sink, 423 out stand, 355 Drawing room paper, 490, 489 Drawn lead pipes, 404 weights of, 405, 405, 405, 406 soil pipes, 406 Dresser hooks, 283 kitchen, 282 scullery, 278 timber suitable for, 140 top, 283, 284 with cupboards under, 284 with doors, 254 sliding, 284, 285 Dressing rings and chains, 373, 374, 378 Dressings, brick, 78 stone, to brick building, 128 to chimney stacks, 126, 128 to doors, 126, 128 to windows, 126, 128 to slated or tiled roofs, in lead, 400 to 402 Dribble pipe, 409, 415, 417, 417, 419, 421, 427 Drinking water cisterns, 408, 409, 410, 412 Drips, 434, 434, 434, 438 cross rebated, 178, 178, 180 distance apart of, 434, 438 lead to, 399, 399, 399, 401 size of, 434, 438 when not required, 402 Driving, pile, 326, 327, 327 Drop handles, 276, 279, 283, 286 pendant for electric light defined, 517 where used, 517 rings, 326, 327, 328 Dross, 397 Dry areas, 73 stone covers to, 107, 120 earth for earth closet, 422 gas meters, 462 sizes of, 4f>2 hair felt and canvas to pipes, 404 and vermin, 404, 409 to cisterns, 408, 412 where used, 404 rot in timber, 137 Dryers, 479, 476 Drying ground, 303, 304 stove, quantity of piping for heating to, 358 D trap, 421 anti-, 420, 421 Dub out, 451, 455, 455, 455 Duchess slates, 384 Duck ladder, 167 material, 207 Dull black finish to stones, 352 Dung pit, 376 Dunging passage, width of, 380, 380 Dust bin, 347 stop, 291 Dutch clinkers, 51 paving, 58 sizes of, 51 Dwarf boundary brick walling, 86 cupboard, 291 fencing, 310, 312, 313 partitions, 233 Dwelling house floors, weights on, 146, 188 E. Earle's cement, Messrs., 364 Ears to rain water pipes, 343 to soil pipes, 420 Earth closet, 422 - dry, for earth closet, 422 remove surface, 39 weight of, 91 Ease sashes, 493 Eaves board (fascia), 165, 171, 174, 175, 175, 176, 179, 180, 322 course, brick, 79 double course of slates at, 384 of tiles at, 390, 392, 394 - glass, 183, 470 gutter, blocked up to falls, 343 brackets to, 343 clips to, 342 cresting to, 342 iron, various, 342, 343 lion-head ornaments to, 342 nozzles to, 342 paint, 492 roses to, 342 sizes of iron, 343 to bay, 192 zinc, 436 sizes of, 436 in cement, 69 soffit in plaster, 453, 165, 322 in wood, 165, 171, 174, 175, 175, 17-S, 322 splay to flat, 434, 438 Ecclesiastical work, 1 Edging, boarded, 303 tiles, 504 sizes of, 504 Edison and Swan incandescent lamps, 522 - Egg-shell gloss, 485, 485, 476 Elbow linings, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 295 Elbows, bath, 268 to gas pipes, 458 to hot water pipes, 429 to rain water pipes, 343 w.c., 271 Electric bells, 466 552 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Electric bell?, battery to, 466 continuous action, 466 indicator box to, 466 porous pots to, 466 press buttons to, 4^6 pu^h tassels to, 466 repairs to, 466 recharge battery of, 466 tell-tale front to, 466 tubing to, 466 wire for, 466 energy, 513, 514, 514, 516, 516 Electrical terms, definitions of, 511 to 515 Electricity, plant for generating, 511 storage of, 511 supplied by high tension system, 511, 511 by high or low tens'on system with accumulators, 511 by low tension system, 511 system most in vogue for supplying, 511 three ways of supplying from company's mains, 511 ELECTRIC LIGHTING, 511 to 526 Electric lighting, absorption of light by glass of lamps, 512 accumulators, when used, 511 adjustable pendants, 517 where suitable, 517 alt< rations to, 518 arc lamps not included, 511 where employed, 513 Board of Trade unit explained, 514 bunching of conductors, 520 cables or wires, carrying capacity of, 520, 516, 515 current density of, 520 sizes of, 516, f 15 stranded, 515 candle power of incandescent lamps, 512, 512, 512, 513 of Sunbeam lamp, 512 carrying rapacity of wires or cables, 5'- ; 0, 516, 515 casings to wires, 521, 218, 140 paint, 487 position of, 518 sizes of, C21 ceiling plates, 521 circuit, carrying capacity of, 520, 515 points to be considered in, 516 class of ceiling plates, 521 of conductois or wires, 519 of F witch and other boards, 519 - of switches, 521 conductors to be of different colours, 520 conductivity of wires, 519 converter, 523 current density of wires or cables, 520 required by lamps, 513 cut away and make good for, 518 - cut-outs to, 519, 519, 521 sizes of, 514 Electric lighting, definition of adjustable pendant, 517 of am] ere, 513, 515 of arc lamp, 513 of Board of Trade unit, 514 of branch, 512 of cable, 512 of C.P. or candle power, 513 - of circuit, 515 of conductor, 512 of conductivitv, 513 of converter, 515 of cut out, 514 of difference of poteiit'al, 513 of distributing board system, 512 switch board, 515 of drop pendant, 517 of E.M.F. or electro motive forco, 513, 515 of floor socket, 515 of fuse board, 515 of glow lamps, 512 of incandescent lamps, 512 of insulation resistance, 514 of lead, 512 of main switch, 515 - board, 515 of meg-ihm, 513 of meter, 515 of ohm, 513, 515 , j of pole, 514 of portable lamp, 517 of safety fuse, 514 of switch, 514 of terminals, 514 of terms used in, 511 to 515 of transformer, 515 of tree system, 511 of volt, 513, 515 of wall bracket, 517 socket, 515 -of Watt, 513 of wire, 512 distributing fuse board, 523, 523, 523, 523, 523, 524, 524, 524, 525, 525, 526 - switch board, 518, 519, 519, 523 double-break switch, 514 pole double-break switch, 514 single-break switch, 523, 523, 523, 514 - switch, 514 drop pendant, 517 where suitable, 517 Edison and Swan lamps, 522 - fall in E.M.F., 520 of potential, 520, 515, 523 ol v- Itage, 520, 515, 516, 517 fireproof chamber to transformer, 523 - floor sockets, 525, 525 not always provided with a switch, 520 office of, 515 fuse boards, 519, 519, 515 INDEX. 553 Electric lighting, fusing point of fuses, 522, 514 galvanised iron tubes to wires, 523, 525 Glover's insulation, 519 glow lamp, 512 : high tension mains, force of current in, 513 incandescent lamps, 522, 511, 512 - candle power of, 512, 512, 512, 513 for candelabra or candle fittings, 512 glass to, 512 - life of, 512, 513 sizes employed, 512 Sunbeam, 512 where used, 512 where used, 512 working pressure on voltage of, 512, 51?, 513, 513, 513, 514, 515, 516, 522 installation, 511 insulation resistance of wires, 519 to wires, 519 insulators to casings, 521 iron grille to transformer, 523 joints in wires to be dispensed with, 512 to wires, 5 1 9 lamp holders, 522 lamps and fittings commonly in use, 517 when not in contract, 517 least size of wires, 520 length wires may be taken, 515, 516, 517 lift and relay floors for, 518 life of incandescent lamps, 512, 513 lighting power of lamps, 513 list of positions for lamps to, 524 to 526 low tension mains, force of current in, 513 main cut-on f , 523 switch, 523, 514 -board, 519, 519, 523 mains, 522 master switch, 525, 525, 514 materials and workmanship, 517 meaning of the terms wires and cables, 518 meg-ohms, 519, 513 me f al for wires, 515 meter, 523 negative pole, 514, 519 notice to electric supply company, 523 number of amperes taken by incan- descent lamps, 513, 515, 516 required by one 16 c.p. j lamp, 513 of hours one lamp will burn at the i expenditure of one Board of Trade unit, 514 ! Electric lighting, number of lamps supplied from one Board of Trade unit per hour, 514 of points for, 517 ohms, 513, 513 overheating of wires, 5 14 points to basemen f , 524 to first floor, 525 _, to gate Limps, 5i'5 to ground floor, 524 to kitchen skylight, 524 to roof, 525 to second floor, 525 to staircase lantern, 525 position of conductors, 520 of switch and other boards and fit- tings, 526 of wires and casings, 518 positive pole, 514, 519 - regulations of Board of Trade, 520 safe working current density of wires, 520, 515, 516 safety fuses s i zes f> 514 samples of materials, 521 schedule of wiring to, 523 to 526 Silvertown insulation, 519 single-break switch, 514 pole single-break switch, 514 switch, 514 spare ways on switch boards, 519 specification for, 517 to 556 specify large cables, 517 sub-distributing fuse board, 524, 526 switch board, 518, 519, 519, 524 swing bracket, 524 switches, 520, 521 office of, 514 sizes of, 514 table of working sizes of wires, 51-% 516 - testing to, 522 the portable lamp, 517 where suitable, 517 to be to the satisfaction of electric sup- ply company, 518 - fire office, 518 transformer, 523 voltage in street mains, 520 of lamps, 512, 512, 513, 513, 513, 514, 515, 516, 522 vulcanised joints to wires, 519, 512 wall brackets, 517, 524, 524, 525, 525 where suitable, 517 - sockets, 524, 525, 525 - Watts required per lamp, 513 wires or cables, carrying capacity of, 5 9 0, 516, 515 cunent density o r , 520 in separate circuits, 523 in small circuits, 520, 515 sizes of, 516, 515 wiring by the distributing board system, 522, 511, 512 tree system, 511, 511 554 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Electric lighting, wiring by two methods, 511 Electro motive force defined, 513, 515 fall in, 520 supply of, 523 Electro plated cocks, 302 Elephant lining, paper, 485 Elliptical headed door, 241, 247 sashes and frames, 191, 194, 196, 197, 209 Elm 141, 137 - piles, 141 -table top, 279 weight of, 147 E.M.F. defined, 513, 515 fall in, 520 supply of, 523 Employer, meaning of, 4 Employer's business to be carried on, 13 Empress slates, 384 Emptying out pipe to hot water, 430, 431 Enamel paint, 488, 477 and grain of woodwork, 476, 137 Charlton white, 477 Enamelled and embossed sheet glass, weight of, 468 bath, 417, 417, 418, 418 bricks, 62, 80, 81, 82 iron notice board, 298 slate chimney piece, 389 to urinal, 424 urinals, 388 Enamelling on timber, 137, 476 Encase pipes in concrete, 24 Encaustic tile paving, 52 tiles, 51 sizes, 51 Enderley granite paving to footpaths, 502 setts, 500, 507 Energy, electric, 513, 514, 514, 516, 516 English elm, 141 fluted sheet glass, weight of, 468 where suitable, 468, 470, 470, 470, 471 -* gold leaf, 482, 477, 476 oak, 140, 141 sills, 190, 193, 195, 204, 208, 212, 214 paper, size of, 489 Engine, gas, 463 Engraving on name plate, 300 Engravings, glass for, 468 Enriched moulded -cornice, 446, 447, 447, 448, 448, 448 moulded coves, 447 Entablature to shop, 295 Entrance doors, 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 250, 251 bell to, 466, 246, 249 built-up head to, 247 canopy to, 248 >. double margined, 248 T external linings to, 247 fanlight to, 246, 249, 250, 251 7 252 Entrance doors, fanlight opener and fasten- ings to, 246, 247 frame to, 246, 247, 248 sizes of, 247 furniture to, 246, 247 guard bead or moulding to, 246, 247" letter box to, 248 linings to, 246, 247, 248 marginal lights to, 249 mat space to, 246, 249 - night latch to, 246 partly glazed, 249 proper door frame, meaning of, 247 shop, 250, 251 tradesmen's, 250 transome to, 246, 251, 252, 263 water-bar to, 247 weather-stop to, 246, 247, 249, 250 - with sash, 249 hall screen, glass to, 471 side gate, 255 width, 255 -steps, 120, 119,132 Equilibrium high-pressure ball valve, 406 , 412 Escape of gas, 458 Escutcheon, 142, 239 Espagnolette bolt, 209 Esplanade, tar paving to, 503 Estimate in several amounts, 6 Ewart's geyser, 418 Excavate areas, 40 bank, 325 basement, 40 boiler house, 40 cellars, 40 for concrete, 40, 84 for drying ground, 303 - for fencing, 309, 311, 313, 314 for fire hydrants, 367 for footpaths, 498, 499, 500, 502, 502, 503, 509 for foundations, 40, 84 for roads, 498, 503, 503, 503, 504, 506, 507, 508, 509 for underpinning, 40 for well or cesspool, 40 quicksand, 40 to drains, 22 Excavations, keep free from water, 41 EXCAVATOR, 39 to 50 Exhaust flue to geyser, 418 pipe, draw-off from, 433 to heating, 362, 379 - to hot water, 430, 430, 379 tube to Sun burner, 463 ventilator to stables, 377 Exit passage, sizes of, 147 Expansion, allow for in iron girders, 331 in rolled iron joists, 331 in steel joists, 331 of glass, allow for, 467 tank to heating, 364 Expenses, travelling, 8 INDEX. 555 Explanatory Notes, 1 to 3 Exposed faces of timber, 138 External cement reveals and soffits, 457 sills, 457 doors, 246 to 254, 260 to 264 ; and see Entrance Doors facings, 78 in glazed brick, 82 linings, 247 or exterior painting, 487 to 488 season of year for, 476 stucco, bastard lime, 444 common lime, 444 cement, 444, 453 lime, 444, 453 pebble dash, 444, 454 plain lime, 444 rough cast cement, 444, 454 lime, 444, 454 trowelled lime, 444, 453 walls, ashlar cement to, 455 plain cement to, 455 rough cement to, 455 Extras, 17 Eye and plate, 266 plate, 239 Eyes, stair, 116 to clothes posts, 304 P. Facilities to contractor, 13 Facings, cellar, 80 external, 78 glazed brick, 80, 81 internal, 80 other, 78 Factory floor, weights on, 146 windows in iron, 347 Faggots to roads, 505 Faience, 102 Fair cuttings, 67, 51 Fall bar to range, 355 down stop, 255 of potential, 520, 51 5, 523 of voltage, 520, 515, 516, 517 in E.M.F., 520 Falling crow bar, 355 post, 315, 316, 318 Fanlight, 209, 210,211,212 catch, 246, 263 fastening, 247 gear, 247 opener, 247 segmental headed, 247 stay, 209, 246, 263 to doors, 243, 246, 219, 251, 252, 262, 263 to partition, 236 to shop, 295, 299 Fanlights as air inlets, 495 outlets, 495 over bedroom doors, glass to, 47 1 Farm building, windows to, 213, 214 Farm gates, 317 size of, 317 Farrar and Co., iron casements^ 348 Fascia, 165, 171, 174, 175, 175, 176. 179 r 180, 192, 321 printing on, 296 shop, 295, 296, 298 Fastenings, gate, 255, 256, 259 lantern, 182 Feather edged (weather) boarding, fencing: of, 311 to cottages, 306, 307 to roof, 306 pitch of, 306 -to sheds, 305, 305, 306 various forms of, 307 wrought, 307 . pales, 310 springers, 143 Feed cistern and supply to range, 411 sizes of, 411 tank to hot water circulation, 431 to range open boiler, 355, 355, 357, 354 Feeding passage, width of, 379 trough, 374 Fees, analysts', 10 and notices, 7, 20 quantity surveyors', 17 to gas company, 459 to water company, 404 Feet, bath, 418 Felt and canvas to cold water pipes, 144 to gas pipes, 144 to heating pipes, 364 to hot water pipes, 429, 144 to lead pipes, 404, 144 asphalted as a roof covering, 306 to roofs, 164, 386, 392, 306, weight of, 160 down paint work, 481 floated face, 453, 454, 455 hair, to cold store, 324 -vermin and, 364, 404,409 weight and thickness of, 189i where used, 404 inodorous, to floors, 148 to roofs, 386 limewhiting to, 386 Macilwraith's, to roofs, 386' nails, weight of, 386 painted, 306 pitch of, 30& sarking, to roofs,, 386 seating to iron girders, 331 to rolled iron joists, 331, 332, 335< to steel joists, 331, 332, 333 to tie beams, 162 silicate, 153 * tarred, 306 to cistern, 408, 412, 419, 427 to copper flat, 438 to flats, 179, 180 to floors, 148 556 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Felt to partitions, 189 to zinc flat, 435 Fence in site, 11 nibble walling, 129, 130 Fencing, 307 to 315 - arris rails, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 313 number required of, 309 sizes of, 310, 312, 313 - capping, 309, 309 -close, 307 to 311 counter rail to, 309, 309, 312 dwarf, 310, 312 - feather-edged, 311, 311, 312, 312, 312 Held, 314 gates in, 308. 308, 311, 311, 313, 313, 3M - gravel plank, 308, 309, 312 - sizes of, 310 - height of, 310, 312, 313 - larch, 312 oak post and pale, 307 to 311 open, 312, 313 - pales to, 307, 309 feather-edged, 310 - heights of, 309 in alternate heights, 309 - square, 310, 312, 313 palisade, 312 park, 309 - post and rail, 312, 314 with palisades, 312 and wire, 314 posts, 307, 309, 310, 310, 311, 311, 312, 313, 314 height of, 309 sizes of, 310, 311, 313 proper side of, 309 spurs, 308, 310, 311, 312, 314 - square rails to, 310, 312, 313 tenter hooks, 309, 312 tree nails, 308, 311, 313 weather boarded, 311, 312 height of, 312 Fender kerbs, 112 piles, 327, 328, 94 walls, 68 Ferrying, 18 Fibrous plaster, 449 Field fencing, 314 gates, 317, 318, 314, 260 iron, 383 tize of, 317 latch, 318 Figured leaded glass, 471 Fillet, angle tilting, 398, 399, 399 cement, 83 rolls for zinc, 434, 434, 436 distance apart of, 434, 434, 436 stop to gates, 313, 316, 317 Fillets generally, 142 tilting, 164, 179, 163, 163, 163, 164, 164, 171, 174, 175, 175, 175, 176, 179, 180 weather, 392 JFilleting as flashings, 392, 393 Filleting to slates, 386 where necessary, 386 Fill in and ram, 41 to bank, 325 - to fencing, 309, 311, 313, 314, around hydrants, 367 up in brick rubbish, 41, 42 Filling in piece, 191 out blocks, 217 piece, 178 - paper, 490, 490, 489, 489 Fillistered flooring 155 Filter, 98 size for, 99 Filtering bag, 292 medium, 293 Finche's bath, 415, 416 Fine ballast to roads, 498 gravel to paths, 503 Finely-axed granite, 130 Finger plates, 142, 233, 239 Finial pendant, 166, 171 stops to skylights, Ib3 Finials, 395, 402, 402, 391 Finishings to joinery, 142 Fir, American, 139 as constructional timber, 139, 140 Dantzic, 1 39 - laths, 441 double, 441, 445, 449 - lath and half, 441, 445, 446, 447, 449 - single, 441, 449, 449 lintelp, 145 Memel, 139 - red, 137, 139 - Riga, 139 - Scotch, 139 - Swedish, 139 timber, market sizes of, 137 weight of, 147 white (spruce), 137, 140 wood paving, 508 - yellow, 1 37, 139 Fire and sound proof ceiling, 445 floor, 153 bars, fish belly section, 360 - to grates, 352, 351 - to heating boiler, 362, 360 to ranges, 356, 354 size of, 354 bell, 466, 367 brick lining to heating boiler, 360 radiates heat, 350 to back and sides of stoves, 350 - to heating boiler, 360 to ranges, 74 clay baths, 415, 416 keep warm longest, 415 sizes of, 415 door to heating boiler, 362 - to hot plate, 357 Fire hydrants 365 to 368 - belted mains, 366, 367 bjudoir sets. to, 367 c , , . . ; . INDEX. 557 Fire hydrants, buckets, 367, 367 copper branch pipe to, 366, 367 riveted leather hose to, 366 stem stand pipe, 366 - cupboard to, 366 gratings to, 367 ground, 366 hatchet for, 366, 367 hose board for, 367 inside, 366, 367 jointing to, 366 labels to, 368 length of hose to, 368 - mains, 366, 367, 367, 367, 368 oak-bark tanned canvas hose to, 367 painting to, 366 piers or concrete to, 366 pump to, 367 reflux valve to, 368 screw-down valve to, 366 sluice valve to, 366 storage tanks to, 3^6, 368 at different levels to, 368 test, 367 wrenches to, 366, 367 lump to heating boiler, 360 opening to ranges, size of, 354, 354, 354 proof floors, 46, 47, 48 arched, 48 staging to, 46 tiled, 48* iron columns, 342 stanchions, 342 roofs and flats, 46, 48, 49 stairs, 46, 47 resisting materials, 46 Fireplace against internal walls, 350 arches, 74 openings, sizes of, 351 Firing tools, 360 First floor, cornice to, 446 doors and linings, 243 electric lights to, 525 gas to, 462 joists, 150 paper to, 490 skirting to, 216 windows, glass to, 470 Fish belly fire bars, 360 Fishplate, 172, 332 Fittings, gas, 464 store up, 19 take out old, 26 Five-barred field or farm gate, 317 sizes of, 317 Fixing bar to shutter, 301, 301 post to gates, 315, 316, 318 post to shutter, 301 style, 315, 316, 318 Fixings to joinery, 142 Flange girders, 332 Flanges to girder, 332, 332 width of, 332 Flap, back, hinges, 197, 19& 1 Flap, cellar, 266 glazed, 266 counter, 302 dinner, 234 for footmen, 290 height of, 290 - lift, 234 serving, 291 table, 260, 275, 286, 289 height of, 280 to air inlet, 293 to bath, 268 to fanlight, 299 to pipe, 409, 409, 409, 409 ,415, 416, 417, 419, 419, 419, 4LO, 421, 421, 423, 423 to sink, 273, 274, 274 to trap door, 265 -to w.c., 270, 271, 272 Flashed coloured sheet glass, weight of, 468 Flashing board, 163, 178 Flashing?, copper, 438 lead, 399, 399, 400, 401, 401, 398, 397^ 397 size of, 398 point, 492 stepped, 400, 400, 401, 398, 397, 397' wedge and point, 68 zinc, 434 Flat and varnish, 481, 485 joint point, 78 paintwork, finished a, 481,485,485, 4O- top roof, span, 176 truss, 173, 176 - white paintwork, 481, 485, 40 Flats, 178, 179, 180 boarding to, 179, 179, 180, 435, 438- bolts to, 180 - concrete, 46, 48, 49 weights on, 49 copper, 438 fireproof, 46, 48, 49 furring to, 178, 179, 180, 142' girders to, 180 joists to, 173, 178, 179, 180 lead to, 399, 397, 397 fall to, 399 least pitch of, 399 - weight suitable for, 397, 397- lean-to, 179 pressure of wind on, 178, 160^ weights on, 178 with lantern, 180 zinc, 434 Flatting, 476 bastard, 482, 476 Flax lines, 191 Fleche, 169, 171 Flexible glazed gas tubing, 459 sizes of, 459 where used, 459 Flint as macadam to roads, 497.' bottoming to roads-, 497 boundary walling, 8, 307- i masonry, weight of, 86 .558 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Flint pavins, 56 roads, 505 where found, 505 - wall, 86, 87, 87 Flitch bressummers, 334, 145 safe load on, 334 girder, 180 plates, 180, 334 thickness of, 334 Floated cement, face to roads, 508, 509 Flock paper, 491, 489 painting to, 491, 482 Floor above heating boiler, 361 in cement, 457 insulate, 324 joists, see under Joists plaster and cement ceiling to concrete, 446, 450 raised below counter, 303 rough deal to cold store, 324 socket, 525, 525 defined, 515 office of, 515 not always provided with a switch, 520 sockets to bolts, 261 timbers, size of, 147 to cow house, 381 to urinal, 388, 424 Flooring, asphalt, 54, 47 Archangel, 157 behind counter, 157 between openings, 154 boards, generally to, 154 broken jointed, 155 brown paper to, 158 counter, 158 deal, various, 155 to 159 - deals for, 140 - double, 158 dowelled, 157 - fillistered, 155 for dancinsr, 158 - Gefle, 140," 155, 156, 157, 158, 158 grooved and tongued, 155, 156, 157, 158 hard wood, various, 154, 157, 158 - heading joints to, 155, 156, 157, 157, 158 iron tongues to, sizes, 154 joints to, 155 to 158 opening of, 139 laid folding, 155 - nails for, 154, 155 - oak, 141, 158, 157 over hot water pipes, 429 roof ceilings, 156 parquet, 159 - pitch pine, 141, 158, 157 plain jointed, 155 ploughed and iron tongued, 156 and oak tongued, 156 polishing to, 158, 159 - protect, 139 public bar, 157 rebate for skirtings, 139 Flooring, rebated, 155 reception room, 157, 158 - relay, 139, 26 rough, 156 sawdust to, 139 scrape, 154, 158 - scrub, 17, 487 shop, 157 skew grooved, 157 skirting to doable, 215 smooth, 154, 158 solid parquetry, 159 straight jointed, 155, 157, 157, 158 - take up, 26 - teak, 158 to ground floor, 156 to ordinary positions, 155 to servants' offices, 155 to show board, 294 to upper floors, 156 - traverse, 154, 158 veneered parquet, 159 warehouse, 157 - wood block, 53, 158 on old floor, 1 58 Floors, arched fireproof, 48 clean out under, 17 dancing on, 158 - double, 147, 152 spans for, 147 - felt to, 148 fire and sound proof, 153 - fireproof, 46, 47, 48 staging to, 46 weights on, 46 - framed, 147, 153 spans for, 147 gas under, 458 iron joists to, 152 margins, paint, 482 old work, 483 over bell wires, 465 - pugging to, 147 - protect, 139 relay, 26 rise in, 149 - scrub, 17, 487 - single-joisted, 147, 149, 150, 151, 152 spans for, 147 sound boarding to, 153 staging to, 143 - take up, 26 - tie rods to, 334 - tiled fireproof, 48 timber, size of, 147 weights on, 146, 188 Flour, 490 Flow pipe, to heating, 362, 359 capacity of, 362 size of, 361 - to hot water, 430, 430 Flue pipe to gas stove, 353, 350 oven, 357 to portable range, 357 INDEX. 559 Flue pipe to portable stove, 353, 350 pipes, 72, 50 size of, 72 Flues against internal wall-', 350 air inlet, 75 ' to windows, 200. 204, 213, 212 arches to, 74, 72 as air outlets, 495 boiler, 73 heating surface of, 359 rise in, 359 outlet ventilating, 75 plaster against, 218, 219, 450 smoke, 72 sizes of, 72 sweep, 486 to heating boiler, 362, 359, 359, 360, 360, 361, 361 size of, 359, 360 to hot-water boilers, 430, 431, 429, 429, 429, 429 Flush bolts to window, 200, 200, 205 drains, 26 - pipe to pedestal closet, 421, 422 to slop sink, 423 to valve closet, 420 - rings, 200, 200 tank to urinal, 424 Flushing tank, 30 supply to, 410 Fluted draining board, 273, 274, 274, 277 sheet glass, weight of, 468 where suitable, 468, 470, 470, 470, 471 Flutes in columns, 220 in corrugated iron, 338 size of, to draining board, 277 Fly netting, 388 wire, 205 Flying shores, 12 Fodder, space for, 370 Fold, 435 Folding brackets, 374, 375 doors and linings, 245, 250, 250, 251, 260 floors laid, 155 - partition, 233 Foot board to sink, 277, 281 piece to bracket, 280, 291 to soil pipe, 406, 420 stays or spurs to railings, 344 Footings in cement, 69 Footman's flap, 290 . height of, 2bQ Footpaths, cinder, 499 edging tiles to, 504 garden, 503, 504, 499 , shells to, 504 - kerb to, 500, 498, 501, 503, 503, 505, 508, 509, 509 to, sizes of, 500 - metalled, 498, 497 bottoming to, 499, 497 fall to, 498, 497,498 Footpaths, metalled, London Building Act requirements and, 498 rolling to, 499, 497 - top. dressing to, 499, 499, 499 various materials for, 497 water to, 499 where suitable, 499 width of, 497, 498, 499 partly paved, 499 paved, 499, 499, 500, 501, 501, 501, 501, 501, 501, 501, 501, 502, 502, 503, 503, 504, 497 - bed for, 500, 500, 501, 502, 502, 503, 503, 510, 497 - fall to, 499, $00, 503, 503, 510, 49", 498 London Building Act requirements and, 498 various materials for, 497 width of, 497, 498, 499 with artificial stone, 501, 497 - asphalt, 509, 509, 499, 497 Bath stone, 501 - bricks, 502, 499 Caithness flagging, 501 concrete, 502, 499, 497 Roman's, 502 Ward's, 502 - granite, 501, 502, 499, 497 gravel concrete and tar paving combined, 504 Portland stone, 501 Purbeck stone, 501 silex stone, 501 - slate flagging, 501, 499, 497 tar paving, 499, 500, 503, 5C3, 499, 497 Constable's, 499 Hobman's, 500 - thickness of, 499 where used, 499 - Victoria stone, 501 York stone, 500, 501, 497 relay old paving to, 502, 110 paving to, 110 Force pump, 424, 424 Foreman and copies of plans, 8 Forest of Pean stone, 106 . , Forged ironwork, 330 Fork rack, 374 Forks, stable, 374 Form of contract, 2 FORM OF TENDER, 527 Forms or benches, 290 Foundation piles, 327 Foundations, concrete, 44, 45, 84, 85 excavate for, 40, 84 on chalk, 39 ! old, grub up, 14, 19 safe load on, 100 size and depth of, 39 to boilers, 45 to footpaths, concrete, 500, 501, 502, 502, 504, 510, 497 . 5 6 SPECIFICATIONS IX DETAIL. Foundations to footpaths, gravel hard core, 498, 499, 00, 500, 501, 503, 503, 503, 497 to roads, concrete, 507, 507, 508, 500, 497 chalk, burnt clay, ballast, gravel, hard core, slag, flints, or bricks, 498, 503, 504, 516, 497 thickness of, 497, 497 when not required, 497 when not required, 39 FOUNDER AND SMITH, 329 to 383 Fountains, 9.S Frame, bath, 418 shop, 295 Framed and braced door, 253 thickness of, 254 floor, 147, 153 span for, 147 grounds, 191, 216, 217, 241, 241, 246 meaning of word, 138 Frames, bases to door, 144 bed and point, 68 cellar flap, 266 door, build ID, 138 dowels to door, 144 paint, 189 repairs to, 206, 265 screed in, 68 shoes to door, 143 to coachhouse door, 260, 261 to doors, 246, 247, 248, 251, 252, 252, 253, 253, 260, 261, 262, 263, 264, 264 sizes of, 247 wall ties to door and window, 138 window, build in, 138 secure, 138 Framing, lift, 234, 235 lobby, 236 panelled partition, 232 spandril, 228, 232 together, 8 to vestibule, 235 Framings, oak for, 141 Francis & Co.'s shutters, 298 French casement door, 250 nails, 158, 159 oil varnish, 478, 481, 481, 485, 477 paper, size of, 489 polish bath, 267, 269 doors, 245 handrail, 225, 227 oak floors, 484, 158, 159 old oak floors, 484 woodwork, 483, 484, 484 woodwork, 483, 484, 487 w.c., 270, 271, 272 Fresco work, 477 Fresh water well, 94 pump to, 94 Fretwork, glass, 471 Frieze, brick, 79 i . marble, 133 moulding in plaster, 447 < . . , . Friez, ornamental cement, 456 paper, 490, 490, 489 rail to doors, 237, 2(>0 to gates, 254, 257 to shutter, 3JO stone, 125 wood, 219, 220 Front, shop, and London Building Act, 29& Frost, beneath attack of, 368 Fruit bench, 290 height of, 290 store, 290 Funnel stands, 303 Furnace front, 360, 359 Furniture, cover up and protect, 493 to casement, 209 to doors, 238, 239, 239, 239, 240, 241 r 244, 246, 250, 251, 252, 253, 260, 263^ 264 Furring, 142, 178, 179, 180 up of heating boiler, 360 to ceiling joints, 221 Fuse board, class of, 519, 519 definition of, 515 office of, 515 safety, definition of, 514 ; and see under Safety Fuse Fuses, fusing point of, 522, 514 Fusing point of fuses, 522, 514 G. Gallery, stone, 117, 120 to stairs, 229 Gallons of water required per day per car- riage, 403 - per cow, 382, 403 per horse, 403 per person, 403 Galvanised iron cisterns, 419, 428, 427 - qualities of, 403, 404 sizes and capacities of, 403, gas pipe, 458, 458 service pipe, 405 wire netting, 153 Game larder, 289, 388 window to, 205 store, 325 Gangway in concrete, 49 weight on, 146 Garden drains, 33 edging tiles, 501 path, 503, 504, 499 of gravel concrtte and tar paving combined, 504 steps, 118, 120 balusters to, 344 handrail to, 344 railings to, 344 walls, 41, 84 Gas as up draught, 463, 463 size of pipes for, 463 - brackets, 464, 464, 462, 463, 368 burner, consumption of gas by, 496- INDEX. Gas burner, consumption of oxygen by, 496 production of carbonic acid by, 496 - burners, 464, 464 - Sugg's, 464 - company, notice and fees to, 459 escape of, 458 engine, 453 GAS FITTER, 458 to 464 fittings, 464 bye pass tap and regulator, 463 give notice to gas company and pay fees, 459 labels to, 461, 461, 461, 462, 486 relacquer, 493 - Sun burner, 463, 463 syphon box to, 461, 462 sizes of, 462 where required, 461 test and repair, 493 to pass gas company's inspection, 459 glass bell consumer to, 462, 463 governor, 461, 462 sizes of, 462 Stott's, 461 use of, 462 hot plate, 357 flue to, 357 hood to, 357 jets, consumption of gas by, 460 moons to, 464 number of cubic feet per jet required for Argand burners, 460 number of cubic feet per jet required for external lights, 460 number of cubic feet per jet required for internal lights, 460 position of, 483 sizes of pipes required to supply, 460 lamps, various, 258, S68, 462, 462, 463, 463, 464 - Meteor, 463 consumption of gas by, 463 - Wenham, 463 consumption of gas by, 463 - meter, 462 capacity of, 462 casing to, 462 - dry, 462 sizes of, 462 wet, 462 not to be in loft, 368 - oven, 463, 357 flue pipe to, 357 - gas to, 463 pendants, 368, 464 air discharged by, 496, Gas pipes or tubing, access traps in floor to, 458 angles to, 458 bands to, 458 bends to, 458 > black iron, 458 block tin, sizes and weights of, 459 Gas pipes or tubing, block tin, where used, 459 brackets to, 458 branch main, 462, 463, 464 caps to, 458, 458 casings to, 458 composition, sizes and weights of, 459 where used, 459 conceal in plaster, 458 condensed liquids in, 462 ,462 connections for, 458 connect to gas company's main, 461 copper not suitable for, 459 crosses to, 458 cut away to make good for, 460 elbows to, 458 flexible glazed, 459 sizes of, 459 where used, 459 galvanised iron, 458, 458 in casings, 458 in ground, 461 india rubber, 459, 464 sizes of, 459 where used, 459 joints to, 458 on face of walls, 458, 458 painting to, 458, 458 patent clips for, 458, 458 use of, 458 pavements make good after, 459 reducing sockets to, 458 Russell's, 458 sizes required for number of jets, 460 test with hydraulic pressure, 460 timbers not to be cut for, 458 to falls, 438 to rain-water pipes as clearing, 343 trough for, 461 under floors, 458 various, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462,463 vertical main, 462 wrought-iron welded, 458, 461, 459 s i zes aT1( i weights of, 459 standards, 86, 226 stop cocks to, 461, 461, 461, 463, 463. 463,463,463,463 stoves, 353, 350, 350, 463 flue pipe to, 353, 350 - gas to, 463 supply to basement, 462 to bath room, 463 -to billiard room, 463, 150 to cleaning room, 368 to coach house, 368 to first floor, 462 2 562 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Gas supply to gas oven, 463 stove, 463 to gate lamps, 258, 463 - to geyser, 463, 418, 419 to ground floor, 462 to harness room, 368 to hall, 462 - to hot plate, 463 to lamp posts, 464 - to newels, 226, 462 to second floor, 462 to smoking room, 463 to stable passage, 368 _ _^ _ y ar d, 368 to stables, 368, 463 to staircase, 462 to Sun burner, 463 to washing box, 368 - to w.c., 463 tar in paving, 304 two ways of supplying a building with, 460 ventilation by, 463, 463 size of pipe for, 463 wire globes to, 368, 368 Gaskin, 363, 366 Gate bar head, 345 - stay, 256 bell to, 259 bolts, 255 - bridle, 318 size of, 318 capping, 255, 257 catch, 255, 257 cresting, 255, 257 entrance, paving to, 56 fastenings, 255, 256, 259 furniture, 255, 256, 259 gas to, 258 handles, 255 hinges, 255, 256, 258 size of, 256 length of, 256 in boundary wall, 85 - lamps, 258, 463 electric light to, 525 - gas to, 463 latch, 313, 315, 316, 318 lock, 313 piers, 254, 259 in stone, 114, 121 posts, 256 sizes of, 315, 318 sill to, 259 spurs, 255, 243, 257 stay, 255, 256 stop, 255, 256, 257, 259, 259 threshold to, 255, 259, 257 wicket, 255, 257, 259, 308, 313, 316 Gates, Bostwick,' 345 carriage, 255,* 256, 258, 258, 259, 260, 308, 311, 313 - cart, 254 to 258, 308, 311, 313 sizes of, 255 Gates, farm, 317 sizes of, 317 - field, 317, 314, 260 in iron, 383 - sizes of, 317 - five barred, 317 sizes of, 317 grille, 346 to shop, 295 - heave, 318 size of, 318 in iron, 86, 345, 345 open framed, 315, 318, 260 in halves, 316 park, 315 - side entrance, 308, 311, 313, 255, 258 in iron, 383 width of, 308, 255 stable, size of, 368 trellis, 304 Gauge of plain tiles, 390, 391 zinc, 435 Gauged arches, 80 lime mortar, 63, 105 plaster and paint, 445 composition of, 444 in cornices and coves, 444 to ceilings, 445 to partitions, 449 where used, 444 Gauze to air inlets, 293 Gear, blind, 296 to cranes, 349 to lantern, 182 to revolving shutter, 208 to shutters, 297 to sliding door, 243, 244 Gefle deals, 140 - flooring, 155, 156, 157, 158, 158 General conditions, 4 GENERAL KEPAIRS AND ALTERATIONS, 492 ; and see under Repairs and Alterations Geyser, 418, 419, 463 cold supply to, 411, 418, 419 Ewart's, 418 exhaust flue to, 419 - gas to, 418, 419, 463 Maughan's, 418 sizes of, 419 German silver taps, 303 Gilding, 482, 477 and varnish, 482 - burnished, 482, 477 gold size for, 477 dead, 482, 477 double, 482 mat, 477 oil gold size for, 477 size for, 482, 477 to mouldings, 482, 479, 481, 484, 484, 484,485 Girders, angle irons to, 332, 332, 332 camber to, 329 expansion of, 331 INDEX. 563 Girders, flanges to, 332, 332 flitch plate to flat, 180 gusset piece to, 332 in cast iron, 339 - sizes of, 339 safe stress on, 339 iron or steel, 331, 332 safe load on, 331 riveted, 332, 332 lattice, 332 packing pieces to, 332, 332 riveted plate iron or steel, 332 flange iron or steel, 332 iron or steel box, 332 to flats, 180 in rolled iron or steel, 180 to floors, wood, 153 span of, 153 to roofs, wood, 174 warren, 332 web to, 332, 332, 332 Glass, allow for expansion of, 467 back putty to, 467, 470 basin, 302 bed in putty, 467, 467, 470, 470, 470, 470,471,471,472,472 vulcanised india-rubber, 467, 470, 471 wash leather, 467, 470, 470, 471 bevelled, 472, 461 sizes of bevel, 469 where used, 469 British plate, qualities of, 468 rough cast, 468, 468 thickness of, 468 transparency of, 469 where suitable, 468 rough rolled diamond pattern, 469, 468 thickness of, 469 where suitable, 469 - rough rolled, Hartley's, 469, 468 quality of, 467 thickness of, 469 transparency of, 469 where suitable, 469 rough rolled, Quarry pattern, 469, 468 thickness of 469 where suitable, 469 - British polished plate, bed in vulcanised india-rubber, 467, 471 in W ash leather, 467, 470, 471 bevelled, 469 - quality of, 467, 469 silvering quality, 469, 472 thickness of, 469 to shop fronts, 470 to windows, 470 transparency of, 469 where suitable, 469 - Cathedral, colour of, 469 thickness of, 469 Glass, Cathedral, weight of, 469 where used, 469 ceiling light, 186 cellar floor lights, 475 sizes, 475 Chappuis reflector, 475 circular bent, 471 Clear sheet, see under Sheet Glass to skylight, 183 clean, 467 clips to, 182, 184 Crown, quality of, 468 superseded by sheet, 468 thickness of, 468 weight of, 468 where suitable, 468 eaves, 183, 470 - figured, 471 for pictures and engravings, 467, 4C8 fret work to, 471 generally to, 467 globes, absorption of light by, 512 - Hammered plate, 469 Hartley's, see under Hartley's to skylights, 182, 183, 184 icicles and, 470 interception of light by, 469 lap to, 470 shape of, 470 lead cames to, 471 leaded, 471, 470, 470 apt to bulge, 471 to lantern sashes, 182 looking-, 472, 469 louvres to windows, 212 Muflled plate, 469 Muranese plate, 469 Opal, interception of light by, 469 opaque, sign plate in, 298 painted, 472, 471 Patent plate for pictures and engravings, 468 quality of, 468 thickness of, 468 weight of, 468 where suitable, 468 pavement lights, 474, 468 repairs to, 474, 492 Rippled plate, 469 screens, 206 segmental shaped, 182, 184 Sheet (or British sheet), coloured or stained, weight of, 467 . enamelled or embossed, weight of, 468 flashed coloured, weight of, 468 fluted, weight of, 468 where used, 468 ground or obscured, intercep- tion of light by, 469 weight of, 468 where used, 468 2 o 2 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Glass, Sheet (or British sheet), interception of light by clear, 469 quality of clear, 467, 467 thickness of clear, 467 to windows, 470, 471 transparency of clear, 469 weight of clear, 467 where suitable, 467 shelves, 469 ground edges to, 469 silvered plate soffits, 295 slates, 885 fixing of, 469 sizes of, 469 - thickness of, 469 weight of, 469 - spriggs to, 467, 467, 470, 470, 470, 470, 471, 471 - stall boards, 299, 474 stipple, 484 subject to jars, 136, 469, 470, 471 templates for, 467 tiles, 390, 393, 394 - fixing of, 469 sizes of, 469 - thickness of, 469 weight of, 469 = to door panels, 228 to doors, 240, 246, 249, 250, 251, 262, 263, 264 to lantern sashes, 182 - to partition, 233, 234 to shop front, 295 - to skylight, 182, 183, 184 to spandril framing, 228, 232 - to stall board, 299 to vestibule framing, 236 transparency of various kinds of, 469 ventilators, 473 Cooper's, 473, 474 =*--* * sizes of, 474 - Moore's, 473, 474 sizes of, 474 Glazed brick arches, 81, 82 external, 82 facings, 80, 81 pointing to, 80 to 82 - sills, 82 brickwork, clean, 486 to stable, 373 ' to window reveals, 192 *- door, 249 GLAZIER, 467 to 475 Glazier's spriggs, size and weight of, 467 Glazing, double, 193, 209 in lead lights, 471, 470, 470 patent systems of, 473 suitable for pictures, 467, 468 for engravings, 468 to attic windows, 470 to basement windows, 470 to bath room windows, 470 to casements, 209, 211, 212 to dome light, 472, 473, 473 Glazing to doors, 470 to entrance hall screen, 471 to fanlights over bedroom doors, -47] to farm buildings, windows, 214 to first floor windows, 470 to greenhouses, 469 to ground floor windows, 470 to iron casements, 348 lights, 347, 472 preparation for, 347 - to sashes, 191, 196, 205, 194 to second floor windows, 470 to shop front, 471 to show cases, 468 - to skylights, 470, 472, 473, 473, 469 to w.c. windows, 470 to windows, 470, 470, 470 vertical, to be perpendicular, 467 with zinc or lead bars, 473 Glover's insulation resistance, 519 Glow lamps, 512 Glue, 142 Goat's hair, 441 Gold beading, 482 leaf, 477 knotting with, 479, 476 letters in, 487, 487 mat, 477 mouldings, 491 size, 482, 477 Governors, gas, 461, 462 sizes of, 462 - Stott's, 461 use of, 462 Gradient of drains, 21 to roads, 497, 498, 510 Grain and over grain, 481, 481, 481, 481 and varnish, 481, 481, 481, 482, 483, 484, 487, 479, 480, 480, 480 as Amboyna wood, 481 as bird's eye maple, 481 as mahogany, 481 as oak, 481 - comb, 481, 481 Grained and varnished work lasts longest, 477 Graining in oil, 481 in water, 481 number of coats required for, 481 Granite, 106, 130, 131, 132 Aberdeen, 131 arches, 131 - as macadam, Aberdeen, 497, 505 Cornish, 497, 505 Devonshire, 505 - Guernsey, 497, 505, 506, 500 Leicester, 497 chippings, 499 columns, 131 cornice, 131 crushed, 502 entrance steps, 132 faced ashlar, 131 finely axed, 130 INDEX. 565 Granite, generally to, 130 - grey, 130 macadam, 504, 505, 506, 506 metalling to roads, 504, 505, 506, 506, 497 paving, Aberdeen, 502 Cornish, 502 Enderley, 502 Mount Sorrell, 502 to footpaths, 501, 502, 499, 497, 132 pilasters, 131, 132 pitching, 132 plinth, 131 polished, 130 - red, 130 road kerbs, Aberdeen, 500 - Norway, 500 roughly axed, 130 sett paving to roads, 507 setts, 56, 507, 500, 497 Aberdeen, 500, 507, 507, 56 as road crossings, 500, 505 as channels, 504 Cornish, 500, 507 - Enderley, 500 - for roads, 507, 497 Guernsey, 507 Mount Sorrell, 500 to gates, 255, 257 sills, 131 sparrow picked, 130 spurs, 132 string, 131 Granito, 52 Grates, dog, 352, 350, 350, 351 plain bar, 352, 351 See under Stoves Gratings, area, 334 cobweb, 412, 416 hit and miss, 299, 382 paint, 483 to air inlets, size of, 213 to cellar flaps, 266 to fire hydrant, 367 to heating pipes, 346, 365 to rain-water heads, 343 ventilation to bath, 268 - to coil case, 293 to shutter, 301 Gravel bed to footpaths, 498, 500, 497 - binding, to footpaths, 499, 503, 303 - footpaths, 498, 503, 504 where suitable, 498 foundation to roads, 498, 497 metalling to footpaths, 498, 497 - to roads, 498, 506, 506, 497 path and grass, make good, 15 relay, 27 plank, 308, 309, 312 sizes, 310 roads, 498, 506, 506 on made up soil, 506 tar and cement paving combined, 504 Paving, 503 Gravel, weight of, 90 Grease trap, 29 Greenheart, 142 for piles, 142 weight of, 147 Greenhouse, glass suitable for, 469 Greenstones, macadam, 505, 497 Greenwood hurdles, 315, 383 Gregson's patent joints to rain- wafer pipes, 343 Grille door, 297 gates to shop, 346, 295 rack, 386 to doors or windows, 249, 345 to shop window, 345, 295 Grit, fine dressing, 304 Gritting to marble, 487 Groining, 71 centres to, 143 Grooved and tongued flooring, 155, 156, 157, 158 joint to slates shelves, 388 - to stone, 104, 107, 115 Ground edges to glass shelves, 469 floor cornice, 447, 447 doors and linings, 243 electric light to, 524, 525 flooring, 156 gas to, 462 joists, 149 sizes of, 149 skirtings, 217 window, glass to, 470 hydrant, 366 level, 41 Ground sheet glass, interception of light by, 469 weight of, 468 where used, 463 troughs to pipes in, 144 Grounds, framed, to doors, 241, 241, 246 - to skirtings, 216, 217 to windows, 191 generally, 142 splayed to doors, 236, 239, 240 to skirtings, 215, 216 to windows, 193, 191, 194, 196, 205 to windows, 194, 196 Grout to roads, cement or lime, 507, 508, 508, 509 creosote and pitch, 508 tar, pitch, or asphalt, 509 Grub up, 325 drain pipes, 26 old foundations, 14, 19 Guarantee for joinery timber, 136 Guard bars to windows, 345 bead or moulding, 196, 208, 246, 247, 295 box to stop cock, 408 railing, 326 Guards, skylight, 337, 185 snow, wood, and iron, 337 to cellar flaps, 266 5 66 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Guards to loft door, 264 Guernsey granite, 497 macadam to roads, 504, 505, 506, 506 metalling to roads, 504, 505, 506 pebble paving, 505 Guide, centre, 203 blocks to sliding gates, 259 Guides to sliding door, 243 Gudgeons, 345 Gulley and stench traps to stables, 375, 373, 374 stones, 113, 121 under pump, 424 Gullies, drain, 25, 29, 33, 35, 296, 324 road, 506 Gun-metal casements, 348 Gusset piece or plate to girder, 332 Gutta percha on damp walls, 489 to electric bell wire, 466 Gutters, boards and bearers, 163, 163, 178 box, 163, 171, 174, 176, 178, 180, 399 in zinc, 434 clean out, 393, 394, 402, 492, 384 condensation, 182, 183, 184 eaves, in iron, 342 in zinc, 436 fall of lead, 399,401 in copper, 438 iron box, 343 lead, 399, 400, 401, 402 pavement surface, 296 plate, 163, 176, 178, 180 - secret, 164, 171, 400, 392, 397, 397, 386 size of lead, 399, 401 to ice chamber, 324 wall, 163, 171 - weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397, 397, 397 to w.c. safe, 421 Hack off loose cement, 451, 456 old plaster, 451, 451 out old putty, 475, 492 over brickwork for key to plaster, 449, 450, 453, 455, 455 Haine's lead encased tin pipe, 405 Hair, bullock's, 441 felt and vermin, 404 to cold store floor, 324 to pipes, 144 to partitions, 189 - weight and thickness of, 189 where used, 404 goat's, 441 for plaster, 441, 442, 444, 444 mortar, 63 to tiles and slates, 390, 391, 392, 385 Half battens, 157 binding joist, 152, 153 brick ring arches, 80, 70 walls, 77 Half deals, 157 king post truss, 161, 163 planks, 157 queen post truss, 171 shutters, 301 space landing, 115, 119, 225, 227 tiles, 390 timber framing, 318 to 322 cement to, 318, 322 circular, 321 colouring to, 318 - painting to, 318, 322 sham, 322 thickness of, 318, 321 work, cement ashlar to, 456 stucco to, 454, 454 lime stucco to, 453, 453 - pebble dash to, 454, 454 plain cement to, 454 rough cast cement stucco to, 454, 454 lime stucco to, 454, 454 with brick back, 318 to 322 Hall, cornice to, 448 gas to, 462 lamp, 462 paper, 489 paving, 117 screen, glazing to, 471 Hall's hanging tiles, 82 Hammer dressed ashlar, 121, 122 Hammered plate glass, 469 Hand basin, 302 polishing, 481 power lift, 235 printed paper, 490, 490, 490, 489 pump, 424, 425 ; and see under Pumps sizes of, 424 - roller, weight of, 497, 499, 499, 503 Handles, door, 236, 239, 241, 244, 250, 251, 263, 264, 266, 275, 284, 285, 285, 286, 286, 295, 302, 233 drawer, 276, 279, 283 - gate, 255, 259 iron door, 348 Handrail, brackets to, 117, 227 continuous, 228 core to, 116, 229, 344 height of, 224, 225, 227 - iron, 117, 344 to garden steps, 344 joints, 229 mahogany, 116 mop stick, 227 screws, 182, 225, 227, 228, 247, 261, 321 scroll end to, 229 stays to, 344 stiffeners to, 116 when vary height of, 229 wood, 225, 225, 226, 227, 228, 229, 229 Hangers to meat rails, 289, 324 to sliding doors, 244 -= to trussed purlins, 176 Hanging bar to door> 243 INDEX. Hanging paper, 490 post, 315, 316, 318 rods to stairs, 230, 231, 332, 333 sizes of, 333 steps, 115, 119 r- style, 315, 316, 317 Hard core foundation to footpatlis, 499,500, 501 to roads, 498, 504, 506, 497 top metalling to roads, 498 water and lead cistern, 397 woods, 137 doors in, 245, 242 flooring in, 154, 157, 158 Harness room, bit case in, 375 - cleaning horse in, 375 cupboards, 375 fittings, 375 - gas to, 368 paving to, 368 saddle airer in, 375 telescopic cleaning liook in, 375 ventilating brackets for double har- ness, 375 for gent's saddle and bridle, 375 for lady's saddle and bridle, 375 for single harness, 375 whip rack in, 375 Hartley's rolled plate glass, 469, 468 quality of, 467 thickness of, 469 to doors, 470 to eaves, 470 - to skylights, 182, 183, 184, 470 transparency of, 469 where suitable, 469 Hasp, 256 Hassock, 129 Hatchet, 366, 367 Hatfield rollers, 244, 259 Hat hooks, 236 Hawksley's stairs, 232 Hay loft, 369 rack, 374 stack, 396 shoot, 377 space occupied by, 377 truss, size of, 146 weight of, 146 Hayward Bros, and Eckstein's pavement lights, 474 Hazel heatherings, 396 spikes, 396 Head, gate, 315, 318 lantern, 181 linings to doors, 238, 239, 240, 241, 241 to windows, 190, 193, 195, -198, 199, 204 of water and pipes, 405, 420 piece, half-timber work, 320, 321, 321 to dome, 177 to iron roofs, 336, 336 - plate, 371, 372 room to stairs^ 224 Head to partition, 187, 188, 188 to soil pipe, 420 Heading joints to floors, 155, 156, 157, 157, 158 to skirtings, 215 to. wall strings, 225, 226 Heads, stone, 126 Hearth kerbs, 53, 54, 112, 121 tie rods to, 334 trimmer, 148 bolts to, 148 Hearths, brick, 53 cement, 53, 457 marble, 53, 133 repair, 493 stone, 112, 121 tile, 53 Heather thatch, 396 Heatherings, 396 Heat conducted away by iron, 350 loss of, in stoves, 350 Heating boiler, bridge to, 361 cast-iron, 361 Chatsworth, 360, 362, 359 sizes of, 361 - cocks to, 360, 361, 362 core to, 361 dampers to, 362, 361 dead plate to, 362 drain to, 361 fire bars to, 362, 360 fish belly section, 360 . brick to, 360 lining to, 360 door to, 362 lumps to, 360 floor over, 361 flues to, 362, 359, 359, 360, 360, 361, 361 rise in, 359 sizes of, 359, 360 furnace front to, 360 furring up of, 360 man or mud hole to, 360 rise in, 359 saddle, 359, 362 sizes of, 360 sand on top of, 360 setting to, 359, 360, 361, 362 soot door to flues of, 360, 362 surface capacity of, 359 thermometer to, 362 thickness of metal in, 361 ties to, 360 Trentham, 361, 362, 359 sizes of, 361 working space in front of, 361 by high pressure system, 358 by hot air, 358 by low pressure system, 362 to 365, 358 to 361 by steam, 358 coils, 362, 363, 363, 363, 363, 365 361 sizes of, 363 568 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Heating, cold supply to, 364 connecting tank to, 362, 364 air cock to, 362, 363 Constantino's convoluted stoves for, 358 exhaust pipe to, 362 expansion tank to, 364 flow pipe to, 362, 359 capacity of, 362 sizes of, 361 flue surface, capacity for, 359 humidity of rooms, 358 least rise in pipes, 358 pipes, asbestos covering to, 364 canvas covering to, 364 channels for, 70 stone covering to, 107 kerbs to, 108 connections to, 363 felt covering to, 364 gratings to, 346, 365 jointing to, 363, 364 - labels to, 365 painting to, 365 piers to, 70 silicate cotton covering to, 364 to bath, 268 to linen closet, 365, 292 volume of water in, 358 wire netting over, 365 quantity of pipes required for drying stoves, 358 "for hot air chamber, 358 in domestic buildings, 358 in horticultural buildings, 358 in public halls, 358 in schools, 358 in warehouses, 358 when in ground, 358 radiators, 363 return mains or pipes to, 362, 361, 359 - capacity of, 362 sizes of, 361, 362 screw-down valves to coils, 362, 363 supply cistern to, 364 surface area of pipes, 358 temperature of horticultural buildings, 358 of hospitals, 358 of pipes, 358 rooms, 358, 365 - throttle valve to, 362, 363, 363, 365 to bath room, 432 to linen closet?, 365, 432, 292 - to stables, 379, 365 to Turkish baths, 358 - with hot water, 358 to 365 Heave gate, 318 sizes of, 318 Heel, gate,' 315, 318 post, 369 sizes of, 369 Height of butler's sink, 412 of dispenser's sink, 280 Height of housemaid's sink, 412 of scullery sink, 277 of stables, 368 of stoves, 351 of washing troughs, 281 HelliwelFs patent system of glazing, 473 Hellyer's Optimus valve closet, 420 wash-out closet, 421 Hemp line, 196, 200, 205 Herring bone strutting, 148, 151, 151 Hewn posts, 314 High fencing, 310, 312, 313 - pressure ball valve, 406, 412 boiler to close kitchen range, 430, 429 to open kitchen range, 431, 429 to hot-water supply, various, 429, 433 system, heating by, 358 tension mains, force of current in, 513 system of supplying electricity, 511, 511 Hinged carriage gates, 258 Hinge stones, 114, 121, 255, 345 Hinges, adjustable, 315 Archibald Smith and Stevens' spring, 233, 236, 251 back flap, 197, 198 Collinge's, 255, 256, 257, 260, 263, 264, 316 counter flap, 302 cross garnett, 252, 253, 408, 419 cup and ball, 255, 256, 257, 260, 2P3, 264, 323 flap, 197, 198 - gate, 255, 256, 258 Parliament, 201 - strap, 253, 258, 265, 266 and pivot, 313, 316, 318, 323 sympathetic, 251 to iron gates, 345 Hip, cut and mitred, 392, 386 lead, 400, 391, 394, 386 rafter, 162, 171 rolls, 164, 171, 398 slate, 386 slates, size of lead for, 398 weight of lead for, 397, 397 tiles, 391, 393, 394, 386 mitred, 392 - to skylight, 182, 183, 184 weight of lead suitable for lead, 397, 397 - width of lead for lead, 398 Hit and miss glass ventilators, 473, 474 - gratings, 299, 382, 495 Hoarding, 11, 19 Hobman's tar paving, 500 Hob register, 352, 351 sizes of, 351 Hoggin, 303, 499, 503, 505, 505 Holders, lamp, 522 Holdfasts, 206 Holding down irons to cornice, 125, 334 up valve, 424 Holes, access to heating pipes, 70 INDEX. 5^9 Holes, form all, 76 putlog, 84 Holland blinds, 207 Hollow rebated joint, 244, 252 walls and London Building Act, 64 asphalt to, 61 ~ brick and stone, 60, 61, 325 thickness of, 65 Homan's concrete paving, 502 Honduras mahogany, 141 Hood to lift, 235 Hood to hot plate, 357, 357, 357 Hooked and beaded joint, 209, 250 Hook lock, 244, 259 rebated, 262 Hooks and eyes, 265, 265, 65 dresser, 283, 286 Hoop iron bond, 77, 335 - plates, 149, 151, 151, 152, 152, 153 protection to loose boxes, 372 sizes of, 77 tongues to floors, sizes of, 154, 77 to stable buildings, 373 Hopper closet, 422 - head, 409, 413, 414, 415, 417, 417, 419 Horizontal bar to gate, 316 tie, 171 Horner's ball catch, 255, 256, 261 Horns, 139, 191, 196, 237, 261 Horse-power pump, 424 Horses, water required for, 403 weight of, 146 Horticultural buildings, quantity of pipes required in, 358 temperature of, 358 Hose board, 367 fire, 366, 367 india-rubber to stable, 374, 376 Hospitals, temperature of, 358 Hot-air chamber to range, 355, 357 quantity of pipes for heating, 358 heating by, 358 plate, charcoal, 357 - flue to, 357 - hood to, 357 coal, 357 tire door to, 357 flues to, 357 - hood to, 357 ovens to, 357 skirting to, 357 soot door to, 357 gas, 357 - flue to, 357 - hood to, 357 gas to, 463 Hot water circulation, description of, 430 heating by, 358 to 365 pipes, connections to, 429 felt and canvas to, 429 galvanised wrought-iron, 429 generally to, 428, 429 jointing to, 429 keep away from cold, 428 Hot water pipes, painting to, 428 sizes oif, 431 __ timber not to be cut for, 429 when under flooring, 429 supply and circulation, 428 to 433 branch pipes to, 430 circulating cylinder tD, 430 asbestos cement to, 430, 431 quality, size and capacity, 432 emptying out pipe to, 430, 431 exhaust to, 430, 430 - flow pipe to, 430, 430 - position of, 430, 430, 431 high-pressure boiler to, 430, 431, 429, 379 independent boiler to, 433 position of circulating tank for, 429 return pipe to, 430, 430 position of, 430, 430, 431 - safety valve to, 430, 431 syphon to, 431 to butler's sink, 430 to dispensing sink, 430 to draw-off on landing, 430 to housemaid's sink, 430 to lavatory, 430 to opposite ends of building, 432 to scullery sink, 430 to slop sink, 430 to small houses, 433 - to stables, 379 boiler to, 379 to washing trough, 430 various ways of, 429 when a great amount required, 432 House breaker, 18, 5 drainage, 21 Housemaid's cupboard, 273 - sink and fittings, 273 cold supply to, 410 - height of, 273, 412 hot supply to, 430 - lead to, 412 size of, 273 shelves, 273 Humidity of rooms, 358 Hungarian oak, 141 Hurdles, greenwood, 315, 383 sizes of, 315 iron, 382, 383, 315 - sizes of, 382, 383 Hyatt's pavement lights, 474 Hydrant?, fire, 365 to 368; and see Fire Hydrants air in, 367 ground, 366 inside, 366 Hydraulic lift, 235 - lime, 62, 42 and hair mortar, 391, 392 concrete, 44 for stucco, 444, 444 not used in plaster, 441 570 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Hydraulic pressure test for gas, 460 ram, 425 amount of water required for working, 425 fall required for working, 425 tests, 10 Ice chamber, 323,388 temperature of, 325 space occupied by, 325 tank, 325 Icicles, 183 and glass, 470 Imposts, 126 Improved Wood Paving Company, 509 Incandescent lamps, candle power of, 512, 512, 512, 513 class of, 522 class of globes to, 51 2 - denned, 512 Edison and Swan, 522 floor space lit by, 513 for candelabra, 512 for candle fittings, 512 - life of, 512, 513 number of amperes of current required by one 16 c.p., 513, 515, 516 number of hours made to burn, 512 one 16-c.p. lamp will burn at the expenditure of 1 Board of Trade unit, 514 . of volts pressure required by one 16-c.p., 513, 516, 516 of watts required by one 16-c.p., 513, 516 per one candle power per lamp, 514 sizes employed, 512 Sunbeam, 512 where used, 512 table of carrying capacity of wires for, 515, 516 usual voltage of, 513 where used, 512, 513 working pressure or voltage of, 512, 512, 513, 513 Independent boiler for hot water, 433 Index board, 293 India-rubber coated tape, insulation to elec- tric wires, 519 gas tubing, 459, 464 i sizes of, 459 where used, 459 tube for lamp, 464 - hose to stables, 374, 376 insulation to electric wires, 519 on damp walls, 489 seatings, 303 - stop, 323 vulcanised bedding to glass, 467, 470 insulation to electric wires, 519 Indicator bell pendulum, 466 Indicator box, 466 for speaking tubes, 425 tablet to w.c., 243 Injury to stones, 105 Inlets, air, drawer, 495 fanlights as, 495 flues, 75 position of, 495 size of, 495 Tobin tubes as, 495 to drains, 28, Inodorous felt to floors, 148 to roofs, 386 Inquiry window, 205 Inscription, 125 Inside bead, 190, 193, 195, 196, 199, 203 blinds, 207 hydrant, 366 linings to shutters, 199 to windows, 190, 191, 193, 195, - splayed, 191 Installation of electric light, 511 to 526 Insulation resistance of wires, 519 - defined, 514 measured in meg-ohms, 514 to ice chamber, 324 to wires, class of, 519 Insulators to casings, 521 Insurance, 7 Interception of light by glass, 469 Interiors, stove, size of, 351 Intermediate piles, 325 - posts, fencing, 307, 311, 312 gates, 315 - half-timber work, 320, 321 lanterns, 181 Internal arches, 83 doors, 237 to 245 ; and see under Doors facings, 80 - painted work, 480 to 487 plaster, composition of, 442 Intertie, 189, 321 Invalid's bath, 418 Inventory, 13 Inverts, 70 Iron and timber roof truss, 173 and wood columns, 220 attacked by rain water, 428 balusters to railing, 344 to stairs, 116, 228, 229, 344 - bath, 417 sizes of, 417 - Best Best South Staffordshire, 329 brackets to balcony, 113 butts, generally, 142 - carriages to stairs, 332, 230, 231 casements, 348 cast, quality of, 330 chimney-pieces, 349 cisterns, 419, 428, 427 capacities of, 403 qualities of, 403 sizes of, 403 columns, 340, 342 INDEX, 571 Iron columns, fireproof, 342 - tests for, 331 conducts heat away from stoves, 350 - corbels, 335 core to handrail, 344 to string, 344 corrugated, weight of, 160 domes, 177 domed skylights, 336, 337 doors, 348 sizes of, 348 drain pipes, 24 sizes of, 25 field gates, 383 furniture not to be used in stables, 263 gas pipes or tubing, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463 gates, 345, 86 girders, 331, 332 and joists, camber to, 329 grille gates, 346 grilles to doors and windows, 345 to shop windows, 345 handrail to garden steps, 344 to stairs, 117, 344 holding down, to cornice, 125 - hoop, 77 sizes of, 77 hurdles, 382, 383, 315 sizes of, 382, 383 joists to floors, 152 - lavatory, 414 lean-to skylights, 337 lightning conductor, 439 joints to, 439 - plate at foot of, 439 recommended by Professor Lodge, _439 sizes of, 439 weight of, 439 - lights, 126 glazing to, 472 - lintels, 333, 333, 331 Lowmoor, 329 newel, 116 nosings to stairs, 232 party wall doors, 348 sizes of, 348 - purlins, 336 - rafters, 336 sheet, weight of, 160 - side gates, 383 struts, 336 - tie bolts, 336 roofs, various, 335, 336 - spans of, 335 arched, corrugated, 336 spans, 336 - tiles, 391 - S. C. Crown, 329 service pipes, 405 pipe and rain water, 405 jointing to, 405 skylights, 187 Iron sliding doors, 348 - slips to stoves, 352, 352 soil pipe for slop sink, 423 revolving shutters as doors, 348 straining piece, 336 king and queen bolts, 336 staircase, outside, 349 - stanchions, 341, 342 - fireproof, 342 stays to handrail, 344 stiffeners to handrail, 229 straps and bolts, painting to, 483 tie rods to hearth and floor, 334 to walls, 334 ties to chimney stacks, 335 tongue to sills, 190, 193, 195, 204, 208, 212, 214 tubing to bell wires, 465 wall ties to door frames, 138 to window frames, 138 - washing troughs, 414 weights to sashes, 191, 196, 200, 205, 206 windows, 347 preparation for glazing for, 347 wine bins, 387 wrought, quality of, 329, 329 IRONMON4ER, CARPENTER, AND JOINER, 136 to 328 Ironmongery generally, 142 new, to old doors and sashes, 144 relacquer, 486 rejapan, 486 repairs to, 486, 492 to doors, 238 ; and see Door Furniture to sashes, 191, 196, 205, 194 to shutters, 197, 198, 200, 201 Ironwork, not exposed to view, painting to, 483 paint before leaving foundry, 477 scrape rust off, 477 - treatment of, 26 to fireproof floors, flats and terraces, 333 to partition, 188 - to stables, 368 to 379 Irregular coursed rubble, 122 Italian zinc roofing, 435, 436 rolls to, 436 distance apart of, 436 flashings to, 436 J. Jack crane, 356, 355, 355, 355, 356 rafter, 162, 171 Jacks, 318 Jamb linings, 238, 239, 240, 241, 241, 242, 246, 247 Jambs, stone, 126, 128 Japanned ironmongery, 142 zinc bath, 418 Japanning, 477 to old bath, 418 Japan stopping, 479, 479, 479, 476 572 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Jarrah paving blocks, 508 Jars, glass subject to, 469, 470, 471 Jennings' road gullies, 506 Jersey pebble paving, 505 Jets, consumption of gas by, 460 - pipe, 463 position of gas, 463 sizes of pipes required to supply gas, 460 Jet varnish, 383 Jewellers, show board to, 299 Jib cranes, 349 door, 245 Joggle joint, 104 Johore teak, 141 JOINEE, CARPENTER AND IRONMONGER, 136 to 328 Joinery, deals for, red, yellow and white, 139, 140 finishings to, 142 fixings for, 142 guarantee for, 136 joints to, 138 - knots in, 136 mahogany, 141 oak, 141 pitch pine, 141 - port for, 136 - quality of, 136 shrinkage of, 136 stacking, 138 teak, 141 timber generally, 136 walnut, 141 Jointing to iron drain pipes, 25 service pipes for rain water, 405, 428 to heating pipes, cement, 363, 364 to stoneware drain pipes, cement, 23 Stanford's 23 Joints, astragal band, 402, 406, 420, 421 bevelled, soldered, 437 burnt, 302 - butted to paper, 490 dowelled to stone, 104 grooved and tongued to slate shelves, 388 - to stone, 104, 107, 115 handrail, 229 heading to wall springs, 225, 226 - hollow rebated, 244, 252 hooked and beaded, 250 joinery, 138 joggled to stone, 104 -knuckle, 199, 266, 280, 286, 300 lapped to paper, 490 red-lead cement to gas pipes, 458 - screwed, 363, 429, 458 shrinkage of floor, 139 slip, 244 - thickness of, to stone, 103, 104, 123 of, to brickwork, 64 to fire mains, 366 - to flooring, 155, 156, 157, 157, 158 to hot-water pipes, 429 Joints to lightning conductors, 439, 439, 440, 440 universal, 464 vulcanised, 512, 519 - welted, 401, 402, 402 - wiped soldered, 404, 406, 420, 421 Joist bearer, 324 Joists, basement, 149 sizes of, 149 - bridging, 147, 149 to 153 span for, 147 - binding, 152, 152 distance apart, 152, 153 bore for ventilation, 143 ceiling, 151, 152, 153, 156, 162, 167, 171, 174, 174, 180 cut for pipes, 143 distance apart, 139, 148 - first floor, 150 - flat, 173, 178, 179, 180 ground floor, 149 - half binding, 152, 153 in party walls and London Building Act, 333 moulded, 221 not to be cut for gas, 458 - oak, 140, 149 on partitions, 187 projecting out, 318 - roof ceiling, 167, 171, 174, 179, 180 second floor, 150 spring in, 147 - strutting to, 148, 149, 151, 151, 152, 167 179, 180 - tar ends of, 143, 147 -- thickness and depth of, 148 to stone stairs, 116, 118 trimmer, 148 ventilation to, 151 wood, and London Building Act, 335 Jug hooks, 276, 289 Junction pieces, 395 tiles, 391 Karri paving blocks, 508 Keene's cement as plaster, 445 arrises in, 443 gauged plaster in, 444 make good in, 443 painting to, 476 polished face to, 445 setting coat in, 444 where used, 445 Keep in repair, 6 Kentish flint roads, 505 - rag, 106, 122 fence or boundary walling, 129, 130 rubble ashlar, 129 - setts, 507, 56 spurs, 132 tar paving, 499 Kerb, fender, 112 INDEX. 573 Kerb, hearth, 53, 54, 112, 121 lantern, 180, 172, 172, 184 marble, 134, 53 plate, 163, 176, 178 - to area walls, 111, 112, 121 to coal plates, 76, 108 to footpaths, see Kerb to Roads to gratings, 344 to pavement lights, 474 to pipe channels, 108, 120 to railings, 344 to roads, 500, 56, 498, 501, 503, 503, 505, 508, 509, 509 Aberdeen granite, 500 height above road channels, 497, 498 Norway granite, 500 sizes of, 500 Key for plastered partitions, 187, 189 stones, 126 Keys and wedges, 247, 261 to segmental heads, 209 to arches, 80 Kicking mats, 374 King and Smith's terra-cotta wine bin?, 387 King and queen post trass, 173 King bolt, 173, 336, 336 post, 162, 170 - half-truss, 161, 163 - roof, 161 to 170 span of, 160 to partitions, 188 - truss, 161, 173, 174, 175 unfratned, 170 to lantern, 183 Kirkaldy's works, 329 Kitchen boiler, cold supply to, 411, 430 chopping block, 286 cook's lavatory in, 288 - cupboard, 285, 286 dish cover rack, 286 dresser, 282 to 285 fittings, 282 to 288 - maid's table, 286 meat screen, 286 - office door and linings, 239, 240 offices, paintwork to, 481, 479 pendant, 464 pestle and mortar, 287 range, boilers to, 430, 431, 429 shelves, 286 skylight, electric lights to, 524 table flap, 286 tables, 279, 286 height of, 279 size of, 279 Kitcheners, 355, 355, 356, 354, 354, 354 sizes of, 354 Knapped boulder boundary walling, 89 Knees, 225, 226, 227 Knob, 246, 267, 269, 271, 274, 279, 283 Knocker, 246, 247 Knots, cut out and fill up, 479, 476 Knots in joinery, 136 in pine, 140 in timber, 136 Knotting:, 479, 479, 479, 476 - gold leaf, 479, 476 patent, 479, 476 - shellac, 476 silver leaf, 479, 476 - size, 479, 476 Knuckle joint, 199, 266, 280, 286, 300 L. Labels to arches, 80 to bells, 486 to gas fittings, 461, 461, 461, 462, 486 to pipes, 365, 368, 407, 408, 409, 410, 411, 411 to switch and other boards, 519 Labours, 8, 22 to roof tiling, 390 to stone, 104 Lace, 313, 315, 318 length of, 318 Ladders, roof, various, 167, 171 - step, 265 in iron, 265 Ladies slates, 384 Lairs, cow, 379 Lamp bench, 220 height of, 290 - cupboard, 290 oil, consumption of oxygen by, 496 production of carbonic acid by, 496 posts, 464 room, 290 Lamps, arc, see under Arc Lamps Edison and Swan's, 522 gate, electric light to, 525 gas, 258, 463 hall gas, 462 - holders, 522 incandescent, see under Incandescent Lamps portable, 517 Meteor gas, 463 consumption of gas by, 463 newel gas, 462 reading, 464 - stable yard, 368, 464 - Wenham gas, 463 consumption of gas by, 463 Landings, half space in stone, 115, 119 in concrete, 115 - paving to, 117, 120 quarter space in stone, 115, 119 stone, to bays, 107 - to stairs, 115, 119 where thinner than steps, 115 stones, thickness of, 115 Land piles, 326 ties, 92, 93 Lantern, 181, 180, 183 angle or corner posts to, 181, 182 574 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Lantern blinds, 207, 182 - condensation gutter to, 182, 183, 184 - electric light to, 525 fastenings, 182 final stop to, 183 gas to, 464 gear, 182 glass suitable for, 470, 472, 473, 473, 469 to side lights, 470 glazing to, 182, 183, 184 head to, 181 intermediate posts to, 181 kerb, 180, 172, 172, 184 linings, various, 181, 181, 184, 185 mullions to, 181 on flat, 180, 181, 183 over king and queen roof, 185 purlins to, 183 roof, 172, 185 sashes and side lights, 182, 183 sill, 182 skylights to, 182, 183, 184 soffit and linings in plaster, 448 staircase, 187 tie rods to, 183 to billiard room, 149, 150 to dome, 177 with king post, 183 Lap-jointed paper, 490 of glass, 470 shape of, 470 shingles, 395 spring roller, 296 to slates, 384, 385 to stone tiling, 394 to tiling, 392 Larbert range, 357 Larch fencing, 312 shingles, 395 Larder, aspect of, 289 - butter/289 division walls in, 388 - game, 289, 388 ice chamber in, 388 meat, 289, 388 milk, 289 pastry, 289 paving to, 54 position of, 205 skylight, with sash to, 185 zinc to, 185 slate shelves to butter, 388 to milk, 388 to pastry, 388 - windows, 205, 193 linings to, 194 louvres to, 205 wire netting to, 205 Latch, door, 263 field, 318 gate, 313, 315, 316, 318 loose box door, 371, 371 Lath and plaster one coat, where used, 445 Lath, plaster and set, where used, 445 float and set, where used, 445 to ceilings and soffits, 415 to coves, 447 Lathing, 441 counter, 442 - nails, 441, 442 painting to, 442 to half-timber work, 322 Laths between concrete paving, 502 wood block paving, 508 - blind, 207 double, 441, 445, 449,453,454,454, 454, 454 lath and half, 441, 445, 446, 446, 447, 448, 449 oak, 441 pantile, 392 single, 441, 445, 446, 449, 449 sizes of, 441 stone tile, 394 thatch, 396, 396 tile, 390 in oak, 391 to linen closet, 292 trellis, 304 various, 441 Latrines, 422, 273, 9 Lattice girders, 332 or trellis work, 304, 305 Lavatory, angle, 414 basin, Queensware, 414 bearers to, 389 brackets to, 414 casing or enclosure to, 269, 415 cocks, 414 cook's hand, 415 - cold supply to, 410, 410 fittings, 414, 415 - height of, 415 hot supply to, 430 iron, 414 marble skirting to, 414 top to, 414, 389, 134 porcelain, 414 safe to, 415 sizes of, 415 slate top to, 389 skirting to, 389 soap sinking to, 389 tip-up, 414 Lawn drainage, 33 level, 41 Lead aprons, 399, 401, 401, 398 sizes of, 398 weight of lead suitable fur, 397, #17 and tin pipes, Haines', 405 attacked by soft water, 397 - cast sheet, 397 sizes of sheets, 397 weight of sheets, 397 cesspools, 399, 401 weight suitable for, 397, 397 cheeks, 401 INDEX. 575 Lead cisterns, soft and hard water stored in, 397 weight of lead suitable for, 397 cleaning out pipe, 409 covered double-span roof, 402 dome, 402 credit old, 397 dormers, 401 draining board, 412, 413 skirting to, 412 dressings to skylights, 184 to tile or slate roof, 400 flashings, 399, 399, 400, 401, 401, 398 sizes for, 398, 398 stepped, 400, 400, 401, 398 to brick sill, 192 . weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397 fiats, 399 fall or pitch of, 399 weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397 gutters, 399, 401 fall of, 399, 401 weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397, 397, 397 width of, 399, 401 hips, 400, 398, 397, 397, 391, 394, 386 size of, 398, slates, 401, 398 labour and materials to, 406 lean-to roof, 401 liable to creep down, 402 lights in stone mullions, 126 lined cistern, 426, 427, 419 for rain water, 427 limewhite, tar, or cement wash to, 427 overflow to, 427 safe to, 427 solder angles to, 427 stiflfeners to, 426, 427 underlay to, 427 water trunks, 427 milled sheet, 397 sizes of sheets, 397 - weights of sheets, 397 where suitable to various position?, 397 overflow pipes, see Overflow Pipes sizes of, 405 weight of, 405 pipes, drawn, 404 felt and canvas to, 404 in ground, 405, 406 keep away from hot water, 404 light, 405 - middle, 405 painting to, 405 ' seamed, 406 strong, 405 to beer engines, 303 * to cesspool, 400 plugs, 104 rain-water head, 402 pipes, 402 Lead rain-water pipes, sizes of, 402 ridge, 400, 398, 397, 397, 391, 394, 386 ornamental, 400 sizes of, 398 rising main, 406 - rolls, 398, 399, 399, 401, 401 safe or tray to bath, 415, 416, 416, 416, 416, 417, 417 - to cistern, 409, 419 to lavatory, 415 - to sinks, 412, 413, 413 to slop sink, 423 to w.c., 421 safes, 409, 412, 413, 413, 415, 415, 416, 416, 416, 416 weight of lead suitable for, 397 seatings to columns, 127, 402, 402, 397, 397 to girders, 331, 332, 332, 332, 402, 397, 397 to rolled iron joists, 331, 332, 333 to steel joists, 331, 332, 333 to tie beams, 162 secret gutter in, 400, 401, 397, 397, 392 service pipes, sizes of, 405 weight of, 405 governed by head of water, 405 sheet, architect's test for, 397 weight on roofs, 160 sheets against damp walls, 489 sinks, 412, 412, 413, 413 weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397 slates, 409, 409, 409, 419, 419, 420, 398, 397 size of, 398 weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397, 397 soakers, 400, 400, 401, 398 - size of, 398 weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397, 397 soil pipe, 420, 406 foot piece to, 420 size of, 406, 420 - weight of, 406 S trap, 412, 413, 413, 414, 414, 415, 416, 416, 416, 416 supply to basement cistern, 412 to bath, 411 to butler's sink, 410 to copper, 410 to dispenser's sink, 410 'to draw -off in area, 410 on landing, 410 -= to feed cistern, 411 to flushing tank, 410 to geyser, 411 - = to housemaid's sink, 410 to kitchen range, 411 to lavatory, 410, 410 to lowest draw-off, 410 to scullery sink, 410 to servants' closet, 420 576 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Lead supply to slop sink, 410, 420 to urinal, 420 to valve closet, 420 to washing troughs, 410 to water-waste preventer, 420 - tacks, 406, 406, 420, 397, 397, 397 tingles, 397, 397, 397 to butler's sink, 412 to draw-off sink, 413 to housemaid's sink, 412 to scullery sink, 413 traps, class of, 406 valleys, 400, 398, 397, 397, 391, 397, 386 sizes of, 398 ventilating pipes, sizes of, 405 weight of, 405 waste pipe, sizes of, 405 weight of, 405 weatherings to sills and strings, 433 - weights, 191, 196, 200, 205, 206, Leaded bar glazing, 473 where used, 473 various patents for, 473 cames, 471, 471 sizes of, 471 > glass to lantern, 182 - to sashes, 471, 470, 470, 322 to w.c., 470 joints to pipes, 366 lights apt to bulge, 471 remedy for, 471 -in stone grooves, 471, 126 Lead work, repairs to, 492 Leaks, 15 Lean-to flat, 179 iron skylight, 337 - roof, 174, 175 span for, 174 lead, 401 Leather fire hose, 366 Leave premises water-tight, 15 roof water-tight, 394, 397, 390, 393 slating water-tight, 384 Lecture hall floor, weights on, 146 Ledged and braced doors, 253 doors, 252 where used, 238 Ledges, 252, 253, 265, 266 Leggot's, iron casement openers, 347 Legs, table and dresser, 279, 283 Letter box, 248, 250, 251, 251 plate, 246, 247, 250, 251 Letters, block, 486, 487 in gold leaf, 487, 487 Level for fencing, 309, 311, 313 ground, 41 lawn, 41 up, 41 Lever bath fittings, 417, 417 bell pull, 465,465, 465, 466 fastening, 323 Lewis bolt, 328, 340 Lift and force pump, 424, 424 Lift box, 235 size of, 235 - coal, 235 height from floor, 235 dinner, 234 height from floor, 234 sizes of, 234 doors, 235 - flap, 234 - framing, 234, 235 hand power, 235 sizes of, 235 hood over, 235 hydraulic, 235 luggage, 235 height from floor, 235 sizes of, 235 outside, 235 passenger, 235 pump, 424, 424 Lifting shutters, 199, 200 to shops, 300 Light, cellar, 475, 474 intercepted by glass, 469 lead pipe, 405 to billiard room, 149, 150 to coach-house doors, 262 to dark passages, 471 to stables, 368 to stairs, 224 Lightning conductors, alloy in copper, 440 copper, 440, 439 ribbon or tape, 439, 440 rods as, 439 sizes of, 439, 440 tubes as, 439 - weight of, 440 wire rope, 439 - iron, 439 size of, 439, 440 recommended by Professor Lodge, 439 - weight of, 439, 440 joints to, 439, 439, 440, 440 keep away from pipes and iron, 43!) metals suitable for, 439 number required, 440 plates at foot of, 440, 439 to tall chimney, 101 various forms of, 439 Lights and fires, 9 - lead, 471, 470, 470, 322, 126 Lignum vitee runners, 201, 276, 285, 286, Lime, 62, 22, 105 and hair mortar, torching, 385 - to tiled roof, 390, 391, 392 concrete, 44, 22 hydraulic, 44 selenitic, 44 for plaster, 441 for tar paint, 478 hydraulic, 62, 42 mortar, 63, 22, 105 selenitic, 62, 42 INDEX. 577 Lime to felt roofs, 306, 386 Limestone chippings, 303, 499, 499 not suitable for roads, 497 tar paving, 499, 500, 503, 503 Constable, 499 Hobman's, 500 Lime stucco, bastard, composition of, 444 common, composition of, 444 composition of, 444 externally, 453 pebble dash, 454, 444 plain, composition of, 444 rough cast, composition of, 444 externally, 454 where used, 444 to half-timber work, 453, 453 trowelled, composition of, 444 where used, 444 Limewhite, composition of, 443 lead cistern, 427 - to felt, 306, 386 where used, 443 Limewhiting, 83, 452 old walls, 83, 452 Limmer asphalt to roads, 510 Lincrusta- Walton paper, 490, 489 - painting to, 490, 482 Line borders, 490 copper cord, 440 Linen blinds, 207 - closet, 292 - heating to, 365, 292, 432 cupboard, 292 shelves, 292 table, 292 Lines, 191, 196, 200, 203, 205 cleats and pulleys to lanterns, 182 to windows, 247, 265, 265 clothes, 304 copper wire, 191, 196, 200 - flax, 191 - hemp, 200, 205 - twine, 191, 196, 200 Lining paper, 490, 490, 489 ceiling, 452 distempered, 490, 489 for distemper or paint, 485, 477 oil tinted, 489 size of, 489 - tinted, 489 Linings, apron, 225, 227 in plaster or boarding to stairs, 115 splayed, 225, 227 - door, 238, 239, 240, 240, 240, 241, 241, 246, 247 external, 247 external window, 307 - head, to doors, 238, 239, 240, 241, 241 -jamb, 238, 239, 240, 241, 241, 242, 246, 247 - lantern, various, 180, 181, 184, 185 shutiter, various, 199 -^ to framings, 236 to lanterns in plaster, 448 Linings to windows in plaster, 450 trap door, 265, 265 - window back, 190, 191, 192, 193, 195, 197, 198, 199 bead butt, 197 flush, 197 cement, 192 centre, 204, 213 elbow, 192, 193, 194; 195. 196, 197 head, 190, 193, 195, 198, 199, 204 in hard wood, 197 - panelled, 195, 196, 197, 198 - return, 197, 198 segmental, semicircular or elliptical, 194, 197 sill, 192 - splayed, 191, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198 - soffit, 194, 196, 197, 198, 199 various, 190 to 199, 203 to 205, 209, 211, 213 veneered, 245 Linseed oil, 479, 476 Lintels, concrete, 143 fir, 145 iron, 333, 333, 331 stone, 126, 128 Lion head ornament to gutters, 342 Liquidated damages, 6, 20 Litharge, 476 Lithography, 17 Live load, 136, 146 Loads, dead, 136, 146 live, 136, 146 moving, 146 on floors, 146 dwelling house, 146 factory, 146 lecture hall, 146 -mill, 146 offices, 146 public buildings, 146 schools, 146 warehouse, 146 stationary, 146 Loam, 498 Lobby cornice in plaster, 448 Lobby framing, 236 paving to shop, 295 Locality, 5 Lock, gate, 313 oak stock, 252, 253, 253 rail, 237, 253, 254, 255, 257, 260, 261 height of, 237 , stones, 114, 121 Locks, cupboard, see Cupboard Locks hook, 244, 259 mortise and rim, 236, 289, 239, 240, 241, 246, 248, 250, 255, 297, 302 oil, 486 to iron doors, 348 to iron gates, 345 Lodge, Professor, and lightning conductor 439 Lodgings, 8 2 p 578 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Loft door, 264 guard to, 264 - size of, 368 Log, 137 Long arm, 296, 297, 375 London Building Act, requirements for brick walls, 64 to 67 for concrete, 49, 50 for fireproof doors, 348 for hollow walls, 65 for party wall doors, 348 for roads and footpaths, 497, 498 for shop cornice, 296 front, 296 - for stone walls, 64 to 67 for tall chimneys, 100 for wood joists in party walls, 335 County Council requirements for cow houses, 382 staircases, 147 - University, 329 Looking-glasses, 472, 469 Loop-hole frames, 266 Loose box, boarding to, 373, 370, 223 description of, 371 - divisions, 371, 369 doors, 371, 370 sliding, 371 ~ dressing rings and chains to, 373 - fittings, 373", 374 gullcy or stench trap in, 373 hay rack in, 374 - head plate to, 371 latch to, 371, 371 - manger in, 373, 370 name plate in, 373 noiseless tieings to, 373 paving, 57 racking ring and chain to, 373 shuttering to, 371 size of, 57, 368 solid panelling to, 371 ventilating panelling to, 371, 371 - ventilator to, 373 water pot to, 373 Louvred door, 264 - shutters, 202, 205, 214 - ventilator, 169, 171 - window, 289, 388, 212 - to farm buildings, 213 Louvres, 202, 205, 212, 214, 264 angle of, 202, 205, 212, 264 - glass, 212 sliding, 213 Lowmoor iron, 329 Low-pressure ball cock, 412 system, heating by, 362 to 365, 358 to 361 tension mains, force of current in, 513 system of electricity, 511 L-shaped boilers, 429 Luggage lift, 235 Luggage lift, size of, 235 Lugs to coil cases, 364, 365 to iron columns, 340 doors, 348 windows, 347 M. Macadam, Aberdeen granite, 505 basalts as, 505 beach pebbles as, 505 channels, 505 Cornish granite, 505 Devonshire granite, 505 flints as, 505 greenstones a?, 505 Guernsey granite, 504, 505, 506, 506 repairs to, 506 road, 504, 506, 506 on made up ground, 506 syenites as, 505 thickness of, 504 to pass ring, 504, 505, 506, 506, 497 whinstones as, 505 Machine printed paper, 490, 489 Macilwraith's felt, 386 Made soils, 39 Mahogany for joiner}-, 141 graining as, 481 handrail, 116 Honduras, 141 Spanish, 141 veneer, 141 weight of, 147 Maid's table, 286, 279 size of, 279, 286 Main drain, 29 Main switch, 519, 518, 523, 514 definition of, 515 7 double-pole, single-break, 523, 514 double-break, 514 office of, 515 switch board, 523 class of, 519, 523 defined, 515 office of, 515 Main service pipe and branches, 410 Mains, belted fire, 366, 367 electric lighting, 523 - fire, 366, 367, 367, 367, 368 Majolica tiles, 51 Make good, 14, 26, 27 cut away for gas and, 460 gravel paths and grass, 15 paint, 27 - paper, 27 parish property, 15 pavement after gas, 459 plaster, 443 to adjoining owner's premises, 16 to hydrants, 367 Malleable cast iron, where employed, 329 Malvern Hill fence or boundary walling, 130 Mander's varnish, 478 INDEX. 579 Manger fittings for cows, size of, 381, 382, 379 height of, 382 - to stables, 373, 374, 378, 370, 370 height of, 370, 370 Manholes, brickwork to, 25 covers to, various, 28, 366 stones to, 113 to boiler, 430, 431, 429, 429, 360 - to drains, 25, 28, 29 Man or mud holes to heating boilers, 360 Mansfield stone, 106 Mansard roof, 174 contour of, 1 74 Mantel register, sizes of, 351 Manure guard, 376 sizes of, 376 pit, 376 Maple, bird's-eye, graining as, 481 Marble, 106, 132 to 135 bath, 416 black, 132 boxed chimney pieces, 134 chimney pieces, clean, 134, 487, 493 polish, 487 cleaning, 487 - coil case tops, 364, 135 columns, 133 counter, 303 dado, 133 dove, 132 frieze, 133 gritting to, 487 hearths, 53, 133 kerbs, 53, 134 - clean, 493 lined steps, 135 - lavatory top, 414, 389, 134 mosaic paving, 52, 132 paper, 491, 491, 489 distemper over, 491 lined out in blocks, 491, 489 - pastry slab, 289 - paving, 132, 133, 56 - polishing to, 132, 487 - Rouge Eoyal, 132 Sicilian, 132 Sienna, 132 skirting, 133 to lavatory top, 414 slabs, 133 - slips, 223, 352, 352 statuary, 132 staircase, 133 tesserae, 132, 51 tiles, 133 wall lining, 133 - weight of, 132 Marbling, 482, 483, 484 Marchioness slates, 384 Marginal light, 249 Margined door, 248 Margins, paint floor, 481 stain floor, 482, 483 Marine glue, 142 Market sizes of battens, 137 of deals, 137 of fir timber, 137 d of planks, 137 Martin's cement angles, 443 composition for, 445 where used, 445 Mash, stove for hot, 379 MASON, 103 to 135 Mason, slate, 387 to 389 Mason's patent treads, 231 Master switch, 525, 525 office of, 514 Mastic asphalt to roads, 510 for lead lights, 471 Mat, 52, 156 gold, 477 kicking, 374 space, 52, 156, 246, 249, 249, 250, 251 Matched and beaded boarding to ciuater front, 302 to cupboards, 285 - to door, 252, 253, 253 to dresser, 284 to roof, 165 to stable walls and ceilings, 223 Materials, credit old, 18 labour, cartage, and lodgings, 8 measure in boxes, 8 quality of, 8 re-use old, 14 storage of, 8 without full description, 8 Matheson's standard of pure copper, 519 Matting, cocoa, 159 Maughan's geyser, 418 Mean rainfall, 403 Measure materials in boxes, 8 Measurements on plans, 1 Meat hooks, 289, 324 larder, 289, 388 window, 205 rails, 289 screen, 286, 287 Medallions, 447 Medina cement for plaster, 441 for quick painting, 441 Meeting rails, 191, 196 styles to cupboards, 275, 276 - to doors, 243, 244, 260 to gates, 255, 257, 259 Meg-ohm defined, 513 insulation resistance of wires in, 519 Memel fir, 139 oak, 141 Mendip limestone tar paving, 503, 503 Metal weather stop, 250 Metalled footpaths, see under Footpath roads, see under Eoads drains to, 506 where suitable, 498, 504 with bad foundation, 506 2 P 2 580 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Metalling, Aberdeen granite as, 497 basalts as, 497 beach pebbles a?, 497 Cornish granite as, 497 flints as, 497 gravel as, 497 greenstones as, 497 Guernsey granite as, 497 - Leicester granite as, 497 limestone not suitable for, 497 sandstones as, 497 Silurian grits as, 497 to footpaths, gravel, 497 stone chippings, 497 to pass ring, 497 to roads, materials suitable for, 497 thickness of, 497 trap rocks as, 497 Meteor lamps, 463 consumption of gas by, 463 Meter, corn, 377 electric light, 523 defined, 515 gas, 462 capacity of, 462 casing to, 462 - dry, 462 sizes of, 462 - wet, 462 water, 408 capacity of, 408 - sizes of, 408 Middle rail to doors, 237, 253 - height of, 237 to gates, 315, 316 = -to stalls and loose boxes, 371, 371, 372, 372 lead pipes, 405 Milk larder 289 slate shelves to, 388 Milled sheet lead, 397 sizes of sheets, 397 where suitable, 397 Mill floor, weights on, 146 Mitred borders, 154, 156 to traps, 265 cap to handrail, 229 slated hips, 386, 401 valleys, 386 tile hips, 392 valleys, 386 Modelling to cement, 456 Monkey, 326 tail bolt, 260 ends to railings, 344 - weight of, 328, 326, 326, 327 Monk's Park stone, 106 Monmouthshire oak, 140 Montmorency brand, 140 Moons, 464, 464 Moore's glass ventilators, 473, 474, 4$5 sizes of, 474 Mop stick handrail, 227 Mordant's composition, 488 Mortar, blue or black, 63, 105 cement, 64, 22, 64, 105 guaged lime, 63, 105 hair, 63 hydraulic lime and hair, to tilos, 390, 391 392 lime, 63, 22, 105 and hair for torching, 385 selenitic, 63, 105 Mortise lock, see under Locks thresholds, 105 Mosaic marble, 52, 132 - Roman, 52, 132 Venetian, 52, 132 Moulded joists, 221 stone nosings to steps, 119, 120 Mouldings, bolection, 238, 239, 247, 250, 251 , 258 - gilt, 484, 484, 484, 485, 481, 4=iU in pine, 140 names of, 238, 239 on lock and frieze rails, 242 picked out in tints, 481, 481, 484, 484, 484, 485, 479, 480, 480 stock, 9 stone, 105 Moulds for plaster, 442 generally, 142 Moule's earth closet, 422 Moulmein teak, 141 Mount Sorrel granite paving, 502 setts, 500 Mountings to ranges, 355, 355, 355, 355, 357 to stoves, 352, 352 Movable bath, 418 weight of, 418 pilasters to shutters, 297 shutters to shops, 300 stairs, 266 Moving load, 146 Mud, weight of, 1)1 Muffled plate or sheet glass, 471, 471, 472, 473, 469 Mullions, 203, 203, 208, 210, 211, 214 brick, 203 - stone, 126, 128, 203 to lantern, 181 ' to shops, 295, 299, 300 Munting, 237, 248, 258 Muranese glass, 469 Musgrave & Go's, stable fittings, 369 Mushroom-headed screws, 435 jr. Nails, brass-headed, 244 composition, weight of, 885 copper, weight of, 384, 385 door, 322 felt, weight of, 386 fencing, 307, 311, 312 floor, weight of, 154, 155 - for plaster, 441, 442 INDEX. 58 Kails for plaster, painting to, 442 French, 158, 159 lathing, 441, 442 roof, weight of, 161 rose-headed, 402, 406, 420 " slating, weight of, 384, 385 tile pin, 391, 391, 392 to rain-water pipes, 343 to roof felt, 306 weight, 306 to weather boarding. 305, 305 zinc, weight of, 385 Name plate, brass, 300 engraving on, 300 plates, 19, 373, 374, 378 Naphtha, 478 Natural slope of soils, 90 Nature of work, 5 Neat cement for damp walling, 453 Neck bolt, 274, 275, 276, 284, 285, 285 Necking stone, 124, 128 to panelling, 219 to shop, 296 to window, 192 Neck tie, 382 Neat's foot oil, 208 Needle bath, 418 - points, 482 shoring, 13 Negative pole defined, 514, 519 Netting, fly, 388 galvanised iron wire, 153, 292 over heating pipes, 365 New building set back, 14 Newels, cap to, 226 central, 231 gas to, 462 - iron, 116 lamp to, 462 paint, 482 stone, 117, 118 - wood, 225, 226, 229, 230, 231 built up, 230, 231 Niche and trap, 374, 376 Niches, brick, 80 Nickel, ironmongery, 142 Night latch, 246 Nipples, 458 Nitrogen in air, 496 Nogging piece, 187, 188, 188, 321 Noiseless tieings, 375, 374, 378 Norfolk thumb latch, 252, 253, 253 North American pine, 137 Norway granite road kerbs, 500 Norwegian timber, 137, 139, 140 Nosing, brass or iron, 231, 232 moulded to stone steps, 119, 120 piece, slate, 295 renew old, 231 to stairs, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 230 - window, 191, 196, 198, 204, 209 Notice and fees, 7, 20 to electric supply compan 523 to gas company, 459 Notice and fees to water company, 403 as to number of coats of paint, 477 board, 298 North British Plumbing Company's bath valve, 415 manhole covers, 28 valve closet, 420 Nozzle, 342, 366, 368, 377, 464 Numbers on rooms, paint, 486 on shutters, paint, 300 O. Oak, 137, 140, 141 American, 141 - Austrian, 141 - bark tanned canvas hose, 367, 367 boarding to stables, 373 Dantzic, 141 door sill, 266 English, 140, 141 floor, French polish, 484 old, 484 wax polish, 484 - old, 484 flooring, 158 for flooring, 141 for joinery, 141 grain as, 481 Hungarian, 141 joists, 149, 140 Inths for plaster, 441 - Memel, 141 Monmouthshire, 140 - pales, cleft, 307, 309 post and pale fencing, 307 to 311 projecting window sill, 307 Kiga, 141 Kussian, 141 seating to columns, 127 shingles, 395 - sill to shed, 305 sleeper plates, 149 - stock lock, 252, 253, 253, 264 Suffolk, 140 timbers, 140, 141, 149 - tile and thatch laths in, 39 1, 394, 396 - tile pins, 391 tongued floor, 156 and jointed boarding, 255, 257, 260, 262 Trieste, 141 wainscot, 141 weight of, 147 - window sills, 190, 193, 195, 204, 208, 212, 214 bed, 190 Oaten straw, 396 Oats, space occupied by, 146 Obscured sheet glass, interception of light by, 469 weight of, 468 - where used, 468 Office door, 244 582 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Office floor, weights on, 146 Offsets, 343 Ohm defined, 513, 515 Oil and varnish counter, 302 boiled, 479, 476 where suitable, 476 cement, 386, 388, 388, 389 dip straps and bolts in, 330 lamp, consumption of oxygen by, 496 production of carbonic acid by, 496 linseed, 479, 476 where suitable, 476 - locks, 486 - neat's foot, 208 olive, 208 - paint, 479 - petroleum, 306, 311 - putty, 386 stains, 478 - stoves, 353, 350, 350 tinted lining paper, 489 ^varnish, French, 478, 477, 481, 481, 485 Oiling to gates, 315, 316, 317 to half-timber work, 318 to tiling, 391 Olive oil, 2~08 Old bricks, re-use, 14 building, case in with brick, 89 faced with ashlar, 127 buildings, take down, 13 cement, hack off and renew, 451 drains, grub up, 26 doors, re-use, 144 foundations, grub up, 14, 19 materials, re-use, 14 credit, 18 paving to paths relaid, 502 plaster, hack off and renew, 451, 451 sashes, re-use, 144 walls, colour, 452 distemper, 452 prepare surface of, 14 re-limewhite, 83, 452 re-point, 78 - tile, 82 windows, re-use, 144 work, painting to, 483, 485, 485, 485, 487 Omnibus bars, 519 Onega deal, 139, 140 Opaque glass, notice boards in, 298 moons, 464, 464 Opal glass, 469 Open channels to drain, 24 copper nailing, 398, 399, 399, 401, 402, 409,415,416,419,421,427 fencing, 312, 313 fire range, 355, 355, 356, 354, 354, 354 boilers, 431, 429 sizes of, 354 framed carriage gates, 260, 351 in halves, 316 hobjange, blower to, 352, 363, 351 Open hob range for bedrooms, 352, 350, 350, 351 ranges, blowers to, 356 slating, 387 Opening to rain-water head, 76 to soot door, 74 Oregon pine, 140 Ornamental lead ridge, 400 shaped roofs, 178 slating, 385 tile course, 391 tiling, 391, 392 Other arches, 80 facings, 78 Outer strings, 225, 225, 226, 230 . continuous, 227, 228, 231 Outlet flues, 75 Outlets, air, position of, 495 sizes of, 495 fanlights as air, 495 flues as air, 495 gratings to air, 495 Outside cement work, painted, 441 lift, 235 linings to ' windows, 190, 193, 195, 203 painting, 487 to 488 paintwork, season of year to do, 476 - shutters, 199 staircase in iron, 349 Ovens, gas, 357 flue to, 357 to gas, 463 to hot plate, 357 to ranges, 355, 355, 355, 355, 356, 354 Overdoor, 242 Overflow pipe to bath, 415, 416, 416, 416, 416 to cisterns, 409, 412 to lavatory, 414 - to sinks, 412, 413, 413 to washing trough, 414 - trumpet mouth, 409, 419 weight of lead, 405 to supply cistern, 364 Overflows, 417, 417, 418, 419, 421, 423, 427, 427 trumpet mouth, 419 Overgraining, 481, 481, 481, 481 Overhanging stories, 318 Overmantles, 223 Oversail, 68 Overtime, 10 Oxalic acid, 486 Oxide paint, 366 of iron paint, 488, 477 of zinc paint, 477 where suitable, 477 Oxygen, consumption by candles of, 496 by gas burner of, 496 by lamps of, 496 by people of, 496 in air, 4-96 INDEX. 583 P. Packing in cement to rivets, 332, 332, 332, 332 -T- pieces to girders, 332, 332 to cisterns, 408, 409, 404 Padlock, 251, 253, 256, 260, 266, 300, 301, 345, 346 Paint, analysis of, 479 and canvas window backs, 190, 196, 198 - boiled oil to, 479, 476 Charlton white enamel, 477 colouring pigment for, 476, 479 composition of, 479, 476 driers in, 479, 476 - linseed oil in, 479, 476 litharge in, 479 make good to, 27 silicate, to w.cs., 270, 271, 271 oil, 479 oxide of zinc, 477 of iron, 488, 477 smell of, 10 tar, 478 to lath nails, 422 turpentine in, 479, 476 varnish for, 478 white lead in, 478, 476, 477 Champion's old, 478 where suitable, 477 zinc white for, 477 Painted glass, 472, 471 PAINTER, 476 to 488 Painting, see Paintwork Paintwork, additional coats to old, 483 behind pictures, 477 burn off, 483 clean and touch up, 478, 483 clearcoling, 485, 476 colouring, 478, 485 distempering, 484, 485, 485, 478 enamel, 488, 477 and grain of woodwork, 476 felt down for, 481 finish comb grain as oak, 481 flat, 481, 485, 485, 480 and varnish, 481, 485 bastard, 482, 476 grain and overgrain as Amboyna wood, 481 bird's-eye maple, 481 mahogany, 481 - oak, 481 in separate tints, 477 white, 481, 485, 480 finished egg shell gloss, 485, 485, 476 finishing coats of, 478 flatting generally, 476 white, 481, 485, 480 fresco work, 477 gilding to, 482, 477 gilt moulding?, 484, 484, 485, 481, 479 gold leaf knotting for, 479, 476 Paintwork, grain and varnish, 481, 481, 481, 482, 483, 484, 487, 479, 480, 480, 480 lasts longest, 477 hand polishing to, 481 hard japan stopping to, 479, 479, 479, 476 how finished to various parts, 479, 480 to finish wood for, 477 imitation woods, 478 in party colours, 481, 481, 487, 479, 480 japanning, 477 knotting to, 479, 479, 479, 476 leave work to dry before, 477 lettering to, 486 marbling, 482, 483, 484 mouldings picked in tints, 481, 481, 484, 484, 484, 485, 479, 480, 480 name of house, 487 notice as to number of coats, 477 numbers and names of rooms, 486 number of coats required on wood and plaster, 476 to ironwork, 476 to old work, 483,. 476 oil stains, 478 on Parian and Keene's cement, 476 on plaster, 445, 445 patent knotting for, 479, 476 plain, 480, 487, 487, 479 plastering to be dry for, 476 priming for, 480, 487, 476 pumice stone down to, 479, 483 repairs to, 493 rub down for, 479 sanding, 477 sashes to be a different tint, 487 scrape rust off iron for, 477 shellac knotting for, 476 silver leaf knotting for, 479, 476 size knotting for, 479, 476 stain and varnish, 482, 482, 483, 479, 480 staining to, 478 stencilling to, 478, 484, 485 stipple glass in, 484 stopping to, 479, 479, 479, 476 tints for, 478 to back door, 487 to backs of shutters, 485 to balusters, 482 to best rooms, 481, 485, 485, 485, 479, 480 to blistered work, 483 to brickwork, 488 to blinds, 207 to cast iron, 330, 339, 340, 341 to chimney pieces, 482, 483 to cement reveals, 484 skirting, 484 to coil cases and gratings, 483 to cold store, 324 to dado, 484 to eaves gutters, 342, 492 to electric light casings, 487 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Paintwork to exterior, or outside wood and iron, 487 to 488 season of year to be done, 476 to felt roofing, 306 to fencing, 313 to fire mains, 366 to flock paper, 491, 484 to floor margins, 482, 483 - to front door, 487 lettering to, 487 to gas pipes, 458 to gates, 316, 316, 317, 318 to half-timber work, 318, 322 to heating pipes, 365 to hot-water pipes, 428 to internal wood and ironwork, 480 to 487 to iron and steel girders, 331, 332, 332, 332, 332, 339 cantilevers, 339 columns, 340 grille, 345 gates, 346 stanchions, 341 windows, 347 to ironwork not exposed, 483 to kitchen offices, 479 to lead pipes, 405 to Lincrusta Walton, 490, 482 to names on cisterns, 486 of bells, 486 to newels, 482 to old wood, iron and plaster, 483, 485, 485, 485 to pavement lights, 474 to pipes generally, 486 to plaster ceilings, cornices, coves, soffits, and centre flowers, 484, 485 walls, 484, 485 to revolving shutters, 297, 298 to rolled iron joists, 331 to servants' bedrooms, 479 - to stable fittings, 378 woodwork, 378 to stables, 480 to stairs, 481, 482, 480 to straps and bolts, 483 to steel joists, 331 to stucco and cement work, 488, 453, 453, 453, 454, 456, 457 to treads and risers, 481, 480 to unseasoned woodwork, 476 to water closet seats, 486 to weather boarding, 307 to window frames, 189 to wood skirtings, 482, 480 touch up, 478, 483, 483 unexposed to light, 477 water stains for, 478 where to start, 478 woodwork to be dry for, 476 to be specially prepared for enamel paint, 476 Pales, alternate heights of, 309 Pales, cleft, 307, 309 feather-edged, 310 heights of, 309 sawn, 310, 312, 313 square, 310 Palisades, 312 alternate heights of, 313 arras, 313 size of, 313 dwarf, 313 fencing, 312, 313 heights of, 313 high, 313 larch, 313 ornamental, 313 Pallets, 142, 143 distance apart, 142 Pan closet, 421 Panelled carriage gates, 258, 259 doors, 239 to 252 baize, 244 circular on plan, 241 jib, 245 number of panels to, 241 segmental, circular or elliptical headed, 241 sizes of, 238 - thickness of, 241 to basement, 239 to cellars, 240 to first floor, 243 to ground floor, 241 to kitchen offices, 239 to top floor, 243 - to w.c., 240, 243, 245 where used, 238 - linings, window, 195, 196, 197, 198 - partitions, 232, 233 glazing to, 233, 234 work, names of mouldings to, 238, 239 Panelling, pitch pine for, 141 soffit to half-timber work, 321 to ceilings, 221, 221 to walls, 219 Panels in pine, 237, 238, 140 in plaster, 449, 450, 448 in two thicknesses, 237 raised, 242 Pantiles, glass, 393 - hip, 393 - ridge, 393 size of, 393 valley, 393 weight of, 160 Pantiling, 392 to 393 filleting to, 393 labours to, 392 lap to, 392, 393 laths for, 392 - pitch of, 393 pointing to, 392 verges of, 393 where used, 393 Pantry, linings to, 194 INDEX. 585 Paper, Anaglypta, 490, 489 arsenical, 489 bath room, 491, 491, 489 - best, 489 bedroom, 489 border, 490, 490, 489, 489 - box, 271, 272, 272 brown, backing, 244 to floors, 158 - ceiling, 491, 491 common, 489 bedroom, 489 dado, 490, 490, 489, 489 dining room, 490, 490, 489 - discount off, 490 drawing room, 490, 489 English, size of, 489 - filling, 490, 490, 489, 489, 489 first floor bedroom, 490 - flock, 491, 489 paint, 482 French, size of, 489 . frieze, 490, 490, 489 - hand printed, 490, 490, 490, 489 hanging, 490 witli butt joints, 490 -, lap joints, 490 leave till work is dry, 489 - Lincrusta Walton, 490, 489 line border, 490 lining, brown, 490 distemper tinted, 489 - oil tinted, 489 paste for, 490 - plain white, 490, 489, 485, 477 plaster to receive, 449 - prepare walls for, 489 - size of, 489, 490 to damp walls with brown, 489 gutta-percha, 489 india-rubber, 489 sheet lead, 489 tin foil, 4.89 machine printed, 490, 489 make good, 27 marble, 491, 491, 489 lined out in blocks, 491, 489 paste for, 490 prepare walls for, 489 - roller, 271 sanitary, 490, 489 satin, 490, 489 with lining paper beneath, 490, 489 second floor bedroom, 490 size and varnish, 491, 491, 491 size lor, 489 staircase, hall and passage, 490, 491, 489 -strip off old, 491 tile, 491 various treatment of walls with, 489, 489, 489, 489 washable, 489 w.c., 491, 491, 489 o with varnished surface, 491; 489 PAPERHANGER, 489 to 49 L Parapet walls, render, 452, 492 Parapets in cement, 69 Parian cemept arrises, 443 composition of, 445 paint to, 476 polished face to, 445 to cracks, 443 where used, 445 Parish property, make good, 15 Park fencing, see Fencing, 309 gates, open-framed, 315 sizes of, 315 - roads, 498 Parliament hinges, 201 sizes of, 201 Parquet flooring, 159 solid, 159 veneered, 159 Parting beads, 190, 191, 193, 194, 195, 189 203, 204 slips, 190, 193, 195, 199, 198 - zinc, 190, 193, 195, 199 Partitions, brick nogged, 77, 189 dwarf, 233 - folding, 233 glazing to, 233, 234 - panelled framing, 232, 233 quartered, see Quartered Partitions sliding, 233 Party colours, 481, 481, 487, 479, 480 wall, iron doors in, 348 London Building Act and, 348 sizes of, 348 Passenger lift, 235 Paste, 490 alum to, 490 flour for, 490 Pastry larder, 289 - slate shelves to, 388 wood shelves to, 289 slab, 289 Patent clips, 458, 458 use of, 458 - knotting, 479, 476 Patent plate glass for pictures and engrav- ings, 468 show cases, 468 quality of, 468 thickness of, 468 - weight of, 468 where suitable, 468 Patent systems of glazing, Braby'?, 473 British Glazins: Co., 473 Helliwell's, 473 Pennycott's, 473 Rendle's, 473 Shelley's, 473 Paterse, 447 Paths, asphalt, 54 cinder, 499 garden, 503, 504 make good, 15 j paving to, 54 } 49 . . . - 586 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Paths, various, see Footpaths Paved footpaths, see under Footpaths roads, see under Eoads Pavement gutter, 296 lights, cast plate to, 474 class of glass for, 474 convex lens, 474 glass suitable for, 474, 468 Hayward Bros, and Eckstein's, 474 Hyatt's, 474 kerb to, 474 painting to, 474 St. Pancras Ironwork Co.'s, 474 semi-prismatic, 474 ventilation to, 474 make good after gas, 459 Paving, asphalt, 54, 49 Adamantine clinker, 57, 58 beach pebble, 505 where used, 505 brick, 55 bricks, various, 51, 502 sizes, 51 cement, 54, 55, 58, 47, 457 ceramic, 52 clean, 17 coach house, 58, 368 concrete, 58 Dutch clinker, 58 encaustic tile, 52 entrance gate, 56 flint boulder, 56 granite, 132 granito, 52 larder, 54 loose box, 57 marble, 132, 133, 56 mosaic, 52 pantry, 54 passages, various, 53, 54, 109, 117, 120 pebble, 505 where used, 505 Portland stone, 109, 120, 120, 120, 120 quarry, 54 relay old, 110, 121, 26 scullery, 109 setts, 56 sleeper walls to, 69, 110 stable yard, 56, 368 stall, 57 stone, areas, 109, 120 basement, 109 Bath, generally, 109 cellars, 109 footpath, 110, 120, 56 kitchen, 109, 110, on concrete, 47 Portland, generally, 109 terrace, 110, 120 Victoria, 109, 56 weight of various, 46 take up, 26 ,tar, to drying ground, 303 tiles, various, 51 Paving tiles, various, sizes, 51 to cleaning room, 368, 375 - to coach house, 58, 368 to corridors, 120 to cow house, 381 to footpaths, artificial stone, 501, 497 - asphalt, 509, 509, 499, 497 Bath stone, 501 - brick, 502, 499 Caithness nagging, 501 concrete, 502, 499, 497 Roman's, 502 Ward's, 502 gravel, concrete and tar combined, 504 - granite, 501, 502, 499, 497 old, relaid, 502 partly paved, 499 Portland stone, 501 Purbeck stone, 501 Silex stone, 501 . slate flagging, 501, 499, 497 - tar, 499, 500, 503, 503, 499, 497 Messrs. Constable's, 499 - Hobman's, 500 Victoria stone, 501 York stone, 500, 501, 497 - to hall, 117, 120 to harness room, 368 - to landings, 117, 120 to passages, 117, 120 - to roads, asphalt, 509, 510, 497 beach pebble, 505 granite setts, 507, 5CO, 497 pebble, 505 tar, 503, 497 - wood blocks, 508, 509, 497 to rooms, 120 to shop lobby, 295 to stables, 57, 368 - to stable yard, 56, 368 to streets, 120, 56 to urinal, 388 to vestibule, 52 to washing box, 368, 376 to wash-house, 54 wood, creosote, 142 yard, 55 York stone, generally, 55 PAVIOR, 51 to 59 Payment, 6 Pay window, 205 Peaty soils, 39 Pebble dash, 454, 444, 318, 322 to half-timber work, 454 paved roads, 505 where suitable, 505 Pedestal closet, 421, 422 flush pipe to, 421, 422 supply to, 420 Pendant, double-arm gas, 368 - finial, 166, 171, 322 gas, 464 kitchen, 4 INDEX. Pendant, sliding, 464 ~ stiff, 464 swing, 464 Pendulum indicators, 465 Pennycott's patent system of glazing, 473 Penvhyn slates, 385 People, production of carbonic acid by, 496 weight of, 146 Perforated window board, 293 wire gauze, 292 zinc to larder window, 205, 289, 289 Perpendicular glazing, 467 Person, water allowance required per, 403 Petroleum oil, 306, 311 Pewter basin, 302 counter, 437, 302, 303 funnel stands, 303 shelves, 413 sinks, 413 skirting, 413 weight of, 437 Philibert de 1'Orme, 177 Picket piece, 314, 314, 315 -- fir, 314 larch, 314 Picture rails, 222 rods, 222 relacquer, 486 Pictures against painted walls, 477 fillets for hanging, 187, 188 - glass for, 467, 468 Piers for heating pipes, 70 gate, 114, 121 sleeper, 69 to fire main, 366 walls, 84, 186 Pigment, colouring, 479, 476 Pig tub, arch to, 80 Pilasters, brick, 79 - cement, 456 granite, 131, 132 movable, 297 stone, 127 to doors, 242 to shops, 299 - wood, 220 Pile caps, 327 rings, 327 shoes, 326, 327 Piles, angle, 325 as land ties, 93 creosote, 142 elm, 141 fender, 94, 327, 328 foundation, 327 greenheart, 142 intermediate, 325 - land, 326 pitch pine, 141 sheet, 94 to chimney stacks, 327, 101 to quicksand, 40 Piling, 325 to 328 = capping piece to, 326 Piling, driving to, 326, 327, 327 sheet, 326, 326, 326, 327 walings to, 326 Pillar rings and chains, 374 Pillars, brick, safe load on, 62 size, 62 stable, 371, 372, 369, 370 . self-fixing base to, 371, 372 * size of, 369, 370 stone, safe load, 103 size, 103 timber, safe load on, 136 Pine, American, 140, 137 Canadian, 140 free from knots, 140 knots in, 140 mouldings, 140 Montmorency brand, 140 Oregon, 140 - panels, 237, 238 - pitch, to various positions, 139, 141, 158 - Quebec, 140 weight of, 147 white and yellow, 140 Pins, roller, 278 tile, 391 wood, 247, 261, 308, 311 Pipe brackets for gas, 458 - for hot water, 429 casing, 302 . channels, 70 - flue, 72, 50 sizes, 72 - jets, 463 lead, to beer engines, 303 .' tin, 303 Pipes, asbestos covering to heating, 364 canvas covering to heating, 364 - to, 144 casing to, 144 t- cut joists for, 143 drain, acid, 24 agricultural, 36 -arches to, 71, 22 bed feet in concrete, 24 branch, 29 dimensions of, 22, 25, 26 encase in concrete, 24 -excavating for, 22 - flush out, 26 garden path, 33 gradient to, 21 grub up, 26 - iron, 24 - joints, 23, 25 - lawn, 33 main, 29 open channel, 24 rain-water, 33, 31 shoes, 30, 33 stable, 35, 57 stoneware, 23 subsoil, 36 - testing, 21 588 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Pipes, drain, trench out for, 22 tunnel for, 22 ventilation, 30 - weeping, 91, 92, 93 exposed to draught, 144 felt ana canvas to, 404 covering to heating, 364 flaps to, 409, 409, 409, 409, 413, 415, 416, 416 gas, 458 ; and see under Gas Pipes - hair felt to, 144 in ground, trough to, 144 iron service, 405 jointing to heating, 363, 364 - joints to rain-water, 428 lead service, 405 when in ground, 405, 406 - weight of, 405, 405, 405 number of gallons of water held by 4 in., 403 painting to, 486, 405 silicate cotton covering to heating, 364 sizes for heating, 358, 358, 361, 362 zinc sparge, 436 Pitch grout to wood paving, 508, 509 in tar paint, 479, 479 in tar paving, 304, 499 of copper roofing, 438, 438, 439 of lead flats?, 399,402 of shingles, 395 of slates, 384,385 of thatch, 396, 396 of tiles, 390, 393, 394, 394 of zinc roofing, 434, 434, 436 Pitch pine flooring, 158, 141 in constructional timbers, 139, 141 joinery, 141 panelling, 141 piles, 141 to loose box, 373 to stalls, 373 weight of, 147 to pipes in ground, 405, 461 Pitching, 507 ; see Setts - granite, 132 Plain jointed flooring, 155 lime stucco, 444 Plain tiles, 390 colours of, 391 glass, 390 hip, 391, 392 ridges, 391 size of, 391 - valleys, 391, 392 - weight of, 160 - tiling, 390 to 392 - battens to, 390, 392, 392 bedding to, 390 filleting to, 392 - gauge of, 390, 391 labours and cutting to, 390 laths to, 390, 391, 391 oiling to, 391 ornamental, 391 Plain tiling, pitch of, 390 to dormers, 391 torching to, 391 verges, 392 - vertical, 392 Planceer, 453 Planing to columns and stanchions, 331, 310, 341 to wrought iron, 329 Planking to concrete walls, 143 to drains, 22 to excavation, 41 to foundation, 327 Planks, 137 half, 157 sizes of, 137 Plans and foreman, 8 and measurements, 1 copy of, 7 Plant for generating electricity, 511 for storing electricity, 511 Plaque rail, 222 Plaster and batten walls, 450, 453, 454 arrises in cement, 443 at back of dado, 218 of wood panelling, 219 of skirting, 215, 449, 449 bastard stucco, composition of, 444 - battens for, 442, 446, 450 behind pictures, 477 between roof timbers, 446 - brackets, 453 bracketing to cornices and coves, 442, 442, 446, 447, 447, 447, 448 ceiling ribs, 448 - roses, 448 to concrete floor and stairs, 446, 450 cement, cornices and coves in, 445 stucco, composition of, 444 where used, 453, 454 to ceilings, 445 - to external work, 455, 455, 455, 456 circular, 443 coarse stuff, pugging, 147 coil case backs, 451 colouring, composition of, 443 where used, 443, 452 common lime stucco, composition of, 444 cornices and coves, 442, 446, 446, 447, 447, 447, 448, 448, 448 basement, 448 enriched, 447, 447, 448 - first floor, 446 ground floor, 447, 447 hall, 448 lobby, 448 second floor, 446 vestibule, 448 cracks and blisters, cut out, 443 cove?, 447, 442 cut out stains in, 452 dentils in, 447 distemper, composition of, 443 where used, 443,453 INDEX. 589 Plaster, dub out, 451, 455, 455, 455 eaves soffit, 453 - fill up cracks in, 483, 485, 485 for cornices and coves, composition of, 442 for internal work, composition of, 442 frieze, 447 - gauged composition of, 444, 444 cornices and coves in, 444 to ceilings, 445 to partitions, 449 * where used, 444, 449 - hair ID, 441, 442, 444, 444 hydraulic lime in, 441 - in Parian cement, 445, 443, 433 _ where used, 445 Keene's cement, 445, 443, 443, 444 <- where used, 445 laths for, 441 oak, 441 size of, 441 thickness of, 442 lime for, 441 stucco, composition of, 443 where used, 453, 453 limewhite for, composition of, 443 where used, 443 lining to shutters, 451 make good, 443 Martin's cement, 445, 443, 443 where used, 445 medallions in, 447 Medina cement, 441 for quick painting, 441 mouldings to lantern, 448 to skylight and fascia, 448 moulds for cornices and coves in, 442 of Paris in gauged plaster, 444, 444 make good in, 443 to arrises, 443 to cornices and coves, 442 to cracks and blisters, 443 old, renewed, 451, 451 - painting on, 484, 485, 485, 483 - panels in, 449, 450, 448 paterae, 447 pebble dash, composition of, 444, 454 plain lime stucco, composition of, 444 polished face to cement, 445 - Portland cement for, 441, 444 putty in, 442 render and set in cement to external walls, 455, 455 - where used, 450 float and set to concrete ceilings, 446 . j n cement, 450, 446 in gauged stuff, 446 to walls, 449 in cement, 449, 450 in gauged stuff, 449 where used, 450 one coat, where used, 450 parapet walls, 452 rendering to damp walls, 453 Plaster, repairs to, 453, 453, 451, 451, 493 Kobinson's cement, 445 where used, 445 Roman cement for, 441 rough cast cement stucco, composition of, 444 where used, 454, 454 lime stucco, composition of, 444 where used, 454, 454 to roof, 449, 450 sand for, 441 Scotch bracketing to cornices, 442, 442 selenitic lime in, 441 setting coat to, 442, 444, 444, 445 will s hell off, 444 skirtings, moulded, 451 plain, 451 slabs, 457 staff bead in, 450 thickness of, 442 to be dry before papering, 489 for paintwork, 476 to ceilings, 445, 446 to cellar and boiler house ceilings, 446 to chimney breasts and flues in roof, 450 to eaves soffit, 453 to fire and sound proof ceilings, 445 - to half-timber work, 453, 454, 454, 454 to inside reveals and soffits, 450, 457 to internal walls in cement, 450 - to quartered partition, 449, 449, 449 to receive colour, 449 - paint, 445, 445, 449 paper, 449 whitening, 449 - to stables, 373 to under side of ground floor joists, 446 - to walls, 449, 450 in panels, 450 to window backs, 451 trowelled stucco, composition of, 444 weight of, 441 whitening, composition of, 443 where used, 443, 452 whitewash, composition of, 443 where used, 443, 452 PLASTEBEE, 441 to 457 Plate, angle, 180, 262 coal, 76 girders, 332 Plateau of concrete, 39 Plate glass, British polished, bed in vulcan- ised india-rubber, 467, 471 bed in wash leather, 467, 470, 471 - bevelled, 469 size of, 469 full or bare, 467, 469 - quality of, 467, 469 silvering quality, 469, 472 - thickness of, 469 to shop fronts, 470 to windows, 470 transparency of, 469 590 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Plate glass, British polished, where suitable, 469 Plate glass, hammered, 469 muffled, 469 Muranese, 469 Plate glass, patent, for pictures and engrav- ings, 468 for show cases, 468 quality of, 468 thickness of, 468 - weight of, 468 where used, 462 Plate glass, rippled, 469 rough cast, 468, 468 thickness of, 468 transparency of, 468 where suitable, 468 Plate glass, rough rolled diamond pattern, 469, 468 thickness of, 469 where suitable, 469 Hartley's, 468, 469 quality of, 467 thickness of, 469 transparency of, 469 where suitable, 469 Plate glass, rough rolled quarry pattern, 469, 468 thickness of, 469 where suitable, 469 silvered to soffit, 295 strength of, 469 to shop, 295 to vestibule, 236 Plate, hoop iron, 149, 151, 151, 152, 152, 153 kerb, 163, 176, 178, 180 pole, 162, 171, 149 rack, 278 range, 355, 355 rail, 222 shelves, 283 striking, 315, 316 tie, 162, 170, 171 to receive brickwork, 321 Plates, bed, 68 generally, 149 gutter, 163, 176, 178, 180 sleeper, 149 wall, 149, 149, 151, 151, 152, 152, 153, 162, 171, 174, 175, 175, 175, 175, 176, 176, 178, 179, 180 Plinth bend to rain-water pipe, 343 brick, 78, 84 cement, 455 granite, 131 stone, 124, 128 stops, 196, 197, 198, 199, 239, 240, 240, 241, 241, 246 Ploughed and tongued flooring, 156 Plug and chain, 412, 413, 413, 414, 414, 415 Plugs, gas, 458, 458, 462 lead, 104 pipe, 429 Plugs, skirting, 216 PLUMBER, 397 to 433 Plumber's brasswork, 406 Pneumatic bells, 466 Pocket piece, 190, 193, 195, 199, 204 Point and bed frames, 68 chimney stacks, 492 copings, 492 flashings, 68, 492 - old brickwork, 78, 492, 492, 492, 492 rake, wedge and, 402 Pointing brickwork, 78 to 82 flat joint, 78 - glazed brick, 80 to 82 to stone, 103, 104 - to tiling, 392, 392 - tuck, 78 weather joint, 78 Pole defined, 514 negative, 514, 519 positive, 514, 519 plates, 162, 171, 149 Polish granite, 130 marble, 132 Polished butts, 242 face to Parian or Keene's cement, 445 steel bath, 418 Polishing, hand, 481 to floors, 158, 159 to marble, 487 chimney pieces, 487 - to wood panelled work, 219, 219, 221, 221 Porcelain bath, 415, 416 insulators to casings, 521 lavatory, 414 Porch, trellis or lattice work, 304 Porous pots, 466 Portable lamp defined, 517 where used, 517 ranges, 356, 354, 354 fire opening to, 354 sizes of, 354 - stoves, 350, 350, 353 - flue pipes to, 353, 350 seating to, 353 washing copper, 347 sizes of, 347 Portiere rods, 222 Portland cement, 42, 22, 62, 105 backing for plaster, 444 to arrises, 443 to urinal, 424 for plaster, 441, 444 stains plaster, 445 stone and marble, 123, 132 - to half-timber work, 318, 322 wash, 456 Portland stone, 106, 119 to 121 area kerbs, 112, 121 ashlar, 121 -. balcony, 113, 121 bases to doors, 121 channels, 121, 113 chimney pieces, 121 INDEX. 591 Portland stone coping, 121, 111 - corbels, 120 covering to dry areas, 120 entrance steps, 120 gallery, 120 gate piers, 121 - hearth, 121, 112 kerbs, 121, 113 kerbs to pipe channels, 120 landings, 119 lock and hinge stones, 121 paving to areas, 109, 120 to colonnade, 120 to footpaths, 501 > to landings, 120 to passages, 120 to streets, 120 to terraces, 120 sills, 121 sinks, 121 -4 staircases, 119, 120 steps, 120 tablets, 120 thresholds, 121, 110 Positive pole, 514, 519 Post and pale fencing, 307 to 311 rail fencing, 312, 314 in fir, 314 in larch, 314 in oak, 314 with palisades, 312 wire fencing, 314 Posts, angle fencing, 307, 311, 312 to half-timber work, 320, 320, 320, 320, 320, 321 ash fencing, 310, 313 clothes, 304 fencing, 307, 309, 310, 310, 311, 811, 312, 313, 314 fir fencing, 310, 313 fixing, 315, 316, 318 gat^ 256, 315, 318 size of, 315, 318 hanging, 315, 316, 318 to doors, 262 heights of fencing, 309 hewn fencing, 314 - intermediate fencing, 307, 311, 312 to half-timber work, 320, 321 larch fencing, 812, 312, 313 oak, 140 fencing, 307, 310, 311, 311, 312, 313, 314, 314 semi-headed fencing, 309, 312 sizes of fencing, 310, 311, 313 stone bases to, 113 Pot board, 283,284, 284 cupboard, 271, 272, 272 Potential, difference of defined, 513 fall of, 515, 520, 523 Pots, chimney, 72 sizes of, 72 Poultry, 325 Powdered asphalt, 509, 510 PRELIMINARY ITEMS, 5 to 20 Premises, leave clean, 17 Prepare surface of old walls, 14, 61 Preservation of timber, 137, 142 Preservative compound to electric light wiring, 519 Press buttons, 466 Pressure of atmosphere, 404, 404 and column of water, 404 of column of water, 404 - of wind, 160, 178 Prevention against damp walls, 453 of damp, 387 Prime cost, 16 Priming, 480, 487, 476 Princess and queen post roof, 160, 172 spans of, 160, 172 _ truss, 172 posts, 172 slates, 384 Principal rafters, 162, 170, 171 in iron, 336 to partitions, 188 stairs in stone, 119, 117 j in wood, 226 to 231 Printing on fascia, 296 - on notice board, 298 Private carriage road,, 498 Projecting butts, 242 Promenade, tar paving to, 503 Proper door frame, meaning of, 247 Property, parish, 15 Protect and cover up furniture, 493 work, 10 Provisional amounts, 17 P trap, 421 Public bar fittings, 301 to 303 bar flooring, 157 hall floors, weights on, 146 quantity of pipes for heating to, 358 house doors, 251 Puddle, 45 Pugging, 147, 179, 179, 179, 180, 451 Pull down old buildings, 19 Pulley nxle, 191, 196, 200, 205 fastenings, 182, 209 - style, 190, 193, 195, 199, 204, 205 in hard wood, 195 Pumice stone, 479, 483 Pump, beer engine, 302 check valve to, 425 delivery pipe for, 424, 425 size^of, 424 depth of suction pipe to, 40i generally to, 404 - gully to, 425 - hand, 425 sizes of, 424 holding-up valve to, 424 horse power, 424 - lift, 424, 424 and force, 424, 424 retaining valve to, 424, 424, 425 steam power, 424 592 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Pump, suction pipe for, 424, 424, 425 - sizes of, 424, 425 rose to, 424, 425 to cesspool, 31 to fresh-water well, 94 to hydrant, 367 to rain-water well, 34 Puncheons, 187, 188 Purbeck paving to footpaths, 501 Purlin roof, 176 trussed, 176 size of, 176 Purlins, 161, 162, 170, 171, 173, 174, 175, 176 distance apart, 161 in iron, 336 to corrugated iron roof, distance apart, 338 to lanterns, 183 when extra strength is required, 161 Purnell's manhole cover, 28 water-waste preventer, 421, 423, 423 Putlog holes, 84 Putties, hack out, 475, 492 Putty, 64, 105 back, 467, 470 bed glass in, 467, 467, 470, 470, 470, 470, 471, 471, 472, 472 in plaster, 442 oil, 386 powder, 486 Q. Quadrant stay, 246, 295 Quality of materials, 8 workmanship, 8 Quantities, bill of, 15 Quantity of water held by pipes, 403 surveyor's fees, 17 Quarries, paving, 54 Quarry chippings, 499 pattern plate glass, rough rolled, 469, 468 thickness of, 469 where suitable, 469 Quarter space landing, stone, 115, 119 strengthening to, 227 wood, 225, 227 Quartered partitions, 187 to 189 - battens to, 189, 214, 215 - braces to, 187, 188 bridging pieces to, 187 cement plastering to, 449 - door posts to, 187, 188 felt to, 189 framing to sheds, 305 gauged plastering to, 449 heads to, 187, 188 interties to, 189 *== ironwork to, 188 key for plaster to, 187 kings to, 188, 188 nogging pieces to, 187, 188, 188 plastering to, 449, 449 Quartered partitions, principal rafters to, 188 puncheons to, 187, 188 quarters to, 187, 188 queens to, 188, 188, 189 scantlings for, 188 silicate cotton to, 189 - sill to, 187, 188 shrinkage in, 187 sound proof, 189 - studs to, 187, 188, 188, 189 tie beam to, 188 to sheds, 305 trussed, 188, 188, 189 - wall posts to, 187, 188 weights on, 188 i ' Otj JlOO ! Quarters, 187, 188 distance apart, 139 landing, strengthening to, 227 to half-timber work, 320 Quebec pine, 140 Queen and princess roof, 172, 160 spans of, 172, 160 bolts, 336 posts, 171 - post roof, 171, 160 span of, 160 truss, 171, 173, 175 Queens, slates, 384 to quartered partitions, 188, 188 Queensware lavatory basin, 414, 414 Quicksand, 327 excavate, 40 foundation, 39 Quirk bead, 136 Quoin stones, 124, 128, 129, 130 Quoins, brick, 79 cement, 455, 456 stone angle, 124, 128, 129, 130 R. Racking rings and chains, 373, 374, 376, 378 Racks, grille, 286 Radiators, 363 Rafter and ridge roof, 175 span for, 175 - with tie piece, 175 span for, 175 Rafters, common, 163, 170, 171, 173 extra strength to, 161 cut ends to, 332 distance apart of, 139 hip, 162, 171 iron, 336 - jack, 162, 171 principal, 162, 170, 171 to partitions, 188 to various roofs, 174, 175, 175, 175, 176, 177, 178 valley, 162, 171 Rag, Kentish, 106, 122, 56 Raglet, 125 Rags, slates, 384 INDEX. 593 flailing, guard, 326 to balcony, 344 to garden steps, 344 wall, 86, 343 vertical, to areas, 344 Kails, fencing arris, 308, 309, 310, 311, 312, 313 cleft, 314 counter, 309, 309, 312 - fir, 312, 314 larch, 314 sawn, 314 - square, 312, 313, 310 - meat, 286 liainfall, 35 available quantity of, 403 average, 403 available, 98 mean, 403 llain water and iron pipes, 405 attacks iron, 428 lead, 428 butt, 428 cistern, 428 - drains, 33, 31 - head, 343, 402 opening to, 76 iron grating to, 343 in lead cistern, 427 piping, branches to, 343 ears to, 343 elbows to, 343 gas tubing to, 343 Gregson's patent, 343 - iron, 343 lead, 402 sizes of, 402 nails to, 343 offsets to, 343 ornamental bands to, 343 - plinth bends to, 343 - shoes to, 343 sizes of, 343 Spence's metal to, 343 swan-necks to, 343 various, 343 zinc, 436 sizes of, 436 pump, 34, 12 separator, 428 - shoes, 30, 33, 14 supply pipe lor, 428 jointing to, 428 tanks, 35 - wells, 34 sizes of, 34 liaised floor to counter, 303 Hake out and point to flashings, 402 - 1 joints of brickwork for plastering, 449, 450, 451, 451, 453, 455, 455 Raking shores, 11 Ram and fill in, 41 to bank, 325 to fencing, 309, 311, 313, 314 Ram, hydraulic, 425 amount of water required to work, 425 fall required for, 425 lift, 235 Ramps, 225, 226, 227, 369, 372 Random ashlar, 121, 122 rubble, 122, 123 thickness of, 123 Ranges and firebrick, 74 and hot plates, 354 to 357 and ventilation, 354 arch plate to, 355 ash pan to, 355, 355 guard to, 355 bearing bar to, 346 blower to, 356 boiler to, 355, 355, 355, 356, 356, 354, 354, 430, 431, 429 - close fire, 355, 355, 354, 354 sizes of, 354 covings to, 355, 355, 355, 354 dampers to, 355, 355, 356, 357 sizes of, 355 dish rest to, 355, 355, 355, 355, 357 draw fret to, 355, 355, 355, 355, 357 out stand, 355 - fall bar to, 355 falling crow bar to, 355 feed cistern to, 411 cold supply to, 411 size of, 411 - feed tank to, 355, 355, 357, 354 - fire bars to, 356, 354 to, sizes of, 354 openings to, size of, 354, 354, 354 flue pipe to portable, 357 hot-air chamber to, 355, 357 -jack crane to, 356, 355, 355, 355, 356 - kitcheners, 355, 355, 356, 354, 354, 354 sizes of, 354 - Larbert, 357 mountings to, 355, 355, 355, 355, 357 of urinals, 389 - open fire, 355, 355, 356, 354, 354 sizes of, 354 hob, 352, 353, 350, 350, 351 , - ovens to, 355, 355, 355, 355, 356, 354 plate rack to, 355, 355 - portable, 356, 354, 354 sizes of, 354 registers to, 355, 355 roaster to, 355 seating to portable, 356 sham to, 355, 355 side plate to, 356 skirting to, 355, 355, 355, 355 smoke crane to, 355, 356, 356 - soot doors to, 355, 355, 357 - tap or cock to, 355, 355, 357 various, sizes of, 354, 354, 354, 354 winding cheek to, 355 Reading lamp, 464 Rebated flooring, 155 Reception room flooring, 157, 158 2 Q 594 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Recharge battery, 466 Red deal, 139, 140 fir, 137, 139 lead cement, 388, 389, 389, 389 joints to iron gutter, 34-2 ! to rain-water pipes, 343 to pipe joints, 429, 458 Reducing sockets, 429, 458 Reeds as thatch, 396 Reflectors, Chappuis', 474 Reflux valve, 368 Refrigerator, 322 to 325, 289, 289 position of, 322, 325 - size of, 325 temperature of, 325 Register plate to dog grate, 352, 351 stoves, 351, 352, 350, 350, 350, 350 sizes of, 351 with hobs, 352 to ranges, 355, 355 to stoves, 352, 353, 351, 352 Regrind cocks, 433 Regular coursed rubble, 122 Regulations of Board of Trade and electric lighting, 520 Rejapan bath, 418 ironmongery, 486 Rejoint stack pipes, 492 Relacquer brasswork, 486 curtain poles, 486 gas fittings, 493 ironmongery, 206 picture rods, 486 Relay floor, 26 old paving to footpaths, 502 pavings, 26, 110, 121 turf and gravel, 27 Relieving arches, 70 Re-limewhite walls, 83 Rendel's patent system of glazing, 473 Render against window backs and linings, 196, 200 and set in cement to external walls, 455, 455 where used, 450 float and set in cement to concrete ceilings, 450, 446 in gauged stuff to concrete ceilings, 446 to concrete ceilings, 446 to walls, 449 - in cement, 449, 450 in gauged stuff, 449 where used, 450 in cement to damp walls, 453 to parapet walls, 452, 492 one coat, where used, 450 Rendering to plain tiles, 391 to stone tiles, 394 Renew nosings, 231, 232 old plaster on ceiling, 451 on partitions, 451 on walls, 451 Repair, keep in, 6 REPAIRS AND ALTERATIONS, GENERAL, 492 to 494 copings reset, 492, 492 eaves gutters, paint, 492 painting, 493 point flashings, 492 pointing to brickwork of chimney slacks and copings, 492 render parapets, 492 stack pipes, rejoint, 492 to brickwork, 492 to cement work, 456, 492, 493 to chimney pieces, 493 to chimney pots, 492 to doors and frames, 265, 493 to electric bells, 466 to floors, 493 to gas, 493 to glass, 475, 492 to hearths, 493 to ironmongery, 486 to ironwork, 492 to leadwork, 492 to macadam or gravel roads, 506, 506 to old sett paving to roads, 508 to plaster, 443, 493 to putties, 492 to revolving shutters, 208 to roof, 492 to sash lines, 493 to sashes, frames and casements, 206, 493 to slates, 492 to speaking tubes, 493 to stone step, 114, 121 to stoves, 493 to tiles, 492 to Venetian blinds, 207 to w.cs., 433 to wire bells, 466 to woodwork, 493 to zincwork, 492 and alterations under Bricklayer, 493 Bellhanger, 494 Carpenter, 493 Drainage, 493 Electric lighting, 494 Excavator, 493 Glazier, 494 Mason, 493 Painter, 494 Paperhanger, 494 Pavior, 493 Plasterer, 494 Plumber, 494 Preliminary Items, 493 Road-maker, 494 Slater, 493 Smith, 493 Repoint old walls, 78 Report on drains, 38 sanitary, 37 Reservoirs, 95 Resin for tar paint, 479 Retaining valve?, 424, 424, 425 INDEX. 59$ Retaining walls, 90 to 94 batter to, 91 thickness of, 91, 92 Return linings, 197, 198 - pipe to hot water, 430, 430 pipes or mains to heating, 362, 361, 359 capacity of, 362 sizes of, 361 specification, 16 Reveals, brick, 79 in cement, 456, 457 paint, 488 plaster to, 450 stone, 128 Revolving shutters, 297, 298, 207, 208 as doors, 348 corrugated steel lath, 297 curvilinear lath, 297 gear to, 208 - iron lath, 297 size of, 298, 297 repairs to, 208 sizes of, 298, 297 - steel lath, 297, 298 sizes of, 298, 297 wicket in, 297 wood lath, 297, 298 sizes of, 298, 297 Ribbon lightning conductor, 439, 440 Ribs, circular, 176, 177 to ceilings, 221 Riga fir, 139 - oak, 141 Ridge capping in iron, 338 to shingles, 395 lead, 391, 394, 400, 401, 386 size of, 398, 400 weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397 piece, 306 roll in wood, 164, 171, 398 roll tile, 391 rolls, slate, 386 support, 171 tiles, plain, 391, 393, 386, 386 stone, 394 Ridges, 162, 170, 171, 175, 175, 175, 176 to skylights, 182, 183, 184 Rim locks, see Locks. Rings, flush, 265, 266, 268, 271 pile, 326, 327 size of, for footpath metalling, 498, 499, 503, 503, 503, 504 for road metalling, 498, 503, 504, 505, 505, 506, 506, 506, 497 Rinsing sink, 413 Rippled plate glass, 469 Rise in heating boiler, 359 flues, 359 pipes, 358 to stairs, 223' Riser to bath, 267 step, 267 to show board, 294, 295, 299 - to w.c., 270, 271, 272 I Risers, stone, 118 wood, 224, 226, 229 Rising butts, 242, 251 fire main, 366 main, lead, 406 River bank, 325 walling, brick or stone, 94, 325 in concrete, 93, 50, 60, 325 Rivet holes, 330 iron, quality of, 330 Riveted flange girder, 332 lattice girder, 332 plate girder, 332 Warren girder, 332 wrought-iron range boiler, 431, 429 Riveting, 330 Rivets, countersunk, 330 distance apart of, 332 - pack in cement, 332, 332, 332, 332 snap, 330 tensile stress of, 330 to corrugated iron, 338 Road kerbs, see under Kerbs ROAD-MAKING, 497 to 510 Roads, asphalt, 54 beach pebbles to, 505 binding materials for, 490, 504, 497 bottoming in concrete to, 507, 508, 509, 497 in other materials to, 498, 504, 505 505, 505, 497 brushwood to, 505 bushes to, 506 carriageway to, 498, 503, 504, 507, 508, 509 width of, 497, 498 contour of, 498, 504, 506, 507, 508, 509 country, 498 crossings to, 500, 505, 507, 498 drainage to, 506 drains, depth of, 506 distance apart of, 506 esplanade to, 503 faggots to, 505 fall from crown to, 498, 503, 504, 5C6, 507, 508, 509, 497, 497 flint, 505 footpath to, see under Footpaths for foot traffic, width of, 497, 498 foundations in concrete, 507, 507, 508, 509,497 in other materials, 498, 503, 504, 506, 497 gradient to, 497, 498, 510 gravel, 498 -on made up soil, 506 repairs to, 506 gullies, 506 London Building Act requirements for, 497, 498 macadam, 504 on made up soil, 506 repairs to, 506 metalled, 498, 504, 506, 506, 497 repairs to, 506 2 Q 2 596 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Roads, metalling to, 497 park, 498 - paved, 503, 507, 508, 509, 497 with asphalt, 509, 497 with granite setts, 507 where suitable, 507 - wood blocks, 508 where suitable, 508 pebble paved, 505 private carriage, 498 promenade to, 503 proper width for, 497, 498 - repairs to, 506, 508 to old granite setts, 508 rolling to, 498, 498, 498, 503, 504, 504, 506, 506, 506, 506, 497, 497 side channels to, 498, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507. 508, 509 ' space required to turn a carriage or van in, 497 tar paving to, 503 top dressing to, 508 - turnpike, width of, 497 - water, 498, 498, 504, 506, 506, 506 when foundation is bad, 504, 506 underground drains to, 505 Boaster, 355 Roasting, where done, 354 Roberts' rain water separator, 428 Robinson's cement, 445 Rods, tension to floor, 151, 151 tie to floor, 48 Rolled iron joist, camber to, 329 carriages to stairs, 332, 333 expansion of, 331 over openings, 331 quality of, 329 sizes of, 331 spacing pieces to, 331 - to coach house doors, 261, 261, 262 to fireproof floors, flats and terraces, 333 - distance apart of, 333 to landings, 333 to quarter space landings, 227 to timber floors, 333 Roll cap, copper, 438 zinc, 434, 434 Roller blind, space for, 194, 196, 197, 211 spring, 207 hand, 303, 304, 499, 499, 503, 497 lap spring, 296 - pins, 278 - steam, 498, 503, 504, 506, 497, 497 - to shop blind, 296 to sliding doors, 244, 259 to revolving shutters, 297 towel, see Towel Roller Rolling to footpaths, 499, 499, 503, 503, 497 to roads, 498, 498, 498, 503, 504, 504, 506, 506, 506, 506, 497, 497 Rolls, distance apart of wood, 398 for copper, 438 Rolls for copper, distance apart of, 438 - for zinc, 434, 434, 436 distance apart of, 434, 434 hip, 164, 171, 398 - lead to, 398, 399, 399, 401, 401, 402 - ridge, 164, 171, 398 sizes of wood, 398, 401 - to flats, 179, 179, 180 Roman bath, 418 cement and plaster, 441 Roof, access from, 167, 168, 168, 171 attics in, 174, 176 - battens, 164, 165, 214 - bays to, 169, 171 boarding, 164, 171, 174, 175, 175, 176, 179, 179, 180 wrought, 165 ceiling joists to, 167, 162, 171, 174, 179, 180 copper, 438 covering to stable yard, 376 coverings, weight of, 160 - dormer, 168, 171 electric light to, 525 felt to, 164 - ladder to, 167, 171 - lantern to, 172, 177, 185 - lights, glass suitable for, 468, 469 plaster to, 449, 450 - scantlings, 161, 163 spikes, sizes and weights of, 161 staging to concrete, 143 - straps, 160, 162, 171 timbers for plain tiles, strength of, 391 for stone tile?, strength of, 394 to sheds, 306 to bay windows, 192 - to cold store, 325 trusses, distance apart, 161, 163 flat top to, 173, 176 span of, 176 - forms of, 161, 170, 171, 172, 173, 173, 173, 174, 175, 176 iron and timber, 173 Mansard or curb, 174 contour of, 174 - turret, 169, 171 Roofing felt, various, 386 Roofs and flats in concrete, 48, 49, 44 weight on, 49 arched and straight corrugated iron, 336, 338 asphalt, 49, 54 collar beam, 175 span of, 175 composite, 173 span of, 173 - flats, 178, 179, 180 pressure of wind on, 178 - weight on, 178 - fleche, 169, 171 in iron, arched, 336 spans of, 336 spans of, 335 INDEX. 597 Koofs in iron, various forms of, 335, 336 - king post, 161 to 170, 160 - spans of, 160, 170 lean-to, 174 flat, 179 spans of, 174 ornamental shaped, 178 pitch of, 160 purlin, 176 queen post, 171, 160 spans of, 160 and princess, 160, 172 spans of, 160 rafter and ridge, 175 span of, 175 with tie piece, 175 span of, 175 repairs to, 422 tarpaulin, 60 valley, 176 spans of, 176 Boom in roof, 171 Rooms, paving to, 120 Rose handle in oak, 214 headed nails, 402, 406, 420 - to cesspools, 400, 401 to door locks, 142 sizes of, 142 - to fire hydrant, 366 - wire to eaves gutters, 342, 420, 421 Rot in timbers, 326, 328 Rouge Royal marble, 132 Rough arches, 70 cast cement stucco, composition of, 444 to half-timber, 454 where used, 444, 454 lime stucco, composition of, 444 to half-timber, 454 where used, 444, 454 cement to outbuildings, 455 cutting, 67 flooring to roof joists, 156 ;..- plaster in roof, 450, 449 Roughly axed granite, 130 Rowley Hall setts, 56 Rubbed stone, 103 Rubber cone, 421, 423, 424 Rubbish, brick, 41, 42 Rubble against walls, 91, 92 boundary walling, 307 fence or boundary walling, 129, 130 - Kentish rag ashlar facing, 129 walls, 121, 122, 123 irregular coursed, 122 random, 122 coursed, 122, 123 uncoursed, 122, 123 regular coursed, 122 square uncoursed, 122, 123 thickness of, 123 weight of, 90 Rub down paintwork, 479 Rufford's baths, 415, 416 Rule joint, 199 Rungs, 265 Runners, 200, 233, 244, 259 thatch, 396, 396 Russian glue, 142 oak, 141 tallow, 443 Russell's wrought-iron welded gas tubing, 458 Rusticated, 126 Rustic cement blocks, 455, 456 quoins, 455, 456 Rust, scrape off from ironwork, 477 Rye straw thatch, 396 S. Saddle airer, 375 and bridle bracket, 375, 375 back capping, 309 bars, 471 end, 438 boiler, 359, 362 size of, 360 piece, 434 ' Safe door, 349 gutter to w.c., 421 load on bressummers, 145 on brick pillars, 62 on brickwork, 62, 100 on cast-iron columns, 340 girders, 339 stanchions, 341 on flitch bressummers, 334 on foundations, 100 on soils, 100 on stone pillars, 103 on stones, various, 103 - on story posts, 136, 146 on timber pillars, 136 on wrought-iron girders, 331 to bath, 415, 416, 416, 416, 416, 417, 417, 417 to circulating tank, 433 - to cistern, 409, 419, 427 to lavatory, 415 - to sinks, 412, 413, 413 to slop sink, 423 - to w.c., 421 working current density of electric light wires, 515, 516 stress of cast-iron girders, 339 of steel girders, 331 of wrought-iron girders, 331 Safes, lead, weight of lead suitable for, 397 . Safety fuse, base to, 514 defined, 514 size of, 514 to switches, 514 valve, 430, 431, 431 Sail cloths, 11 Salt water and castings, 331 and piles, 142 or brine copper, 269, 268 598 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Samples of electric light fittings, 522 Sand, 43, 62, 22, 105 - bedding to stone footpaths, 500, 501 for plaster, 441 on tar paint, 478 over heating boiler, 360 - sea, 43 silver to roof, 306 weight of, 90 Sanding, 477 Sandstone not suitable for roads, 497 Sanitary paper, 490, 489 report, 37 work, plumber's, 403 to 433 Sarking felt, 386 Sash bars, 191, 193, 194, 196 - brass, 300 shop, 299 - door, 249 fasteners, 191, 196 - lifts, 191, 196, 205 line, copper, 440 weight of, 440 working loads on, 440 - lines, 191, 196, 200, 203, 205 repair, 493 pull-down handles, 191, 196 Sashes, 191, 196, 194, 197, 199, 201, 202, 204, 205, 205 centres to, 182 doubling glazing to, 193 ease and repair, 493 glass to, 191, 196, 205, 194 in hard woods, 195, 196 in small squares, 191, 194, 196 ironmongery to, 191, 196, 205, 194 old, re-used, 144 on centres, 209 paint separate tints, 487 repairs to, 206 to lantern, 182, 183 in small squares, 182 to stallboard, 299 weigh, 190 weights to, 191, 196, 205, 206 with casements, 193, 213 Satin paper, 490, 489 with lining paper beneath, 490, 489 Sawdust to floor, 139 Sawn oak pales, 310 rails, 314 stone, 103 Scaffolding, 136 Scantling lengths, 136 of roof timbers, 161, 163 Scarfing, 146, 172 dimensions for, 172 S. C. crown iron, 329 Schedule, 16 of electric light wiring, 523 to 526 School bell, 466 floor, weights on, 146 Schools, quantity of pipes required for heat- iug to, 358 Scotch bracketing, 442, 442 - fir, 139 Scraper, 347 Scraping to flooring, 154 Screed in frames, 68 Screen, counter, 302 glass to windows, 206 glazing to entrance hall, 471 meat, 286 Screw cap, 406, 406, 412, 413, 413, 414, 414, 420, 423 down bib cock, 406 valve, bath, 417, 417 hydrant, 366 valves to heating pipe, 362, 363 ferrule, 406, 461 lugs, 364, 365 Screwed joints to pipes, 429, 363, 458 Screws, brass, to leadwork, 401 coach-headed, 260, 263, 320, 323, 321, 321 handrail, 225, 227, 228, 247, 261 mushroom-headed, 435 to slate work, 385, 386, 388, 388, 389 Scroll end to stone step, 115, 119 ends to wood steps and handrail, 226, 229 Scrub floors, 17, 487 Scullery chopping block, 279 cupboard, 278 dresser, 278 footboard, 277 paving to, 54, 109 plate rack, 278 shelves, 278 - sink and fittings, 276 to 280 cold supply to, 410 - height of, 276 hot supply to, 430 lead to, 413 - in stone, 113, 121 in stoneware, 83 size of, 83, 276 table, 279 flap, 280 - towel roller, 278 Sculpture, 105 Sea air and zinc, 435 Sea sand, 43 and castings, 331 walling, 93 water and concrete, 44 weight of, 403 Seamed lead pipes, 406 Semi-prism pavement lights, 474 Seams, copper, 438 Seasoning timber, 136 Seats in billiard room, 150 Seat, w.c., 270, 271, 272 height of, 421 Seatings, india-rubber, 303 lead or felt to tie beam 162 - lead to columns, 127, 340, 402, 402 weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397 INDEX. 599 Beatings, lead, to girders, 402 weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397 to iron and steel girders, 331, 332, 332, 332 to columns, oak, 127 pine, 127 to portable range, 356 stoves, 353 - to rolled iron joists, 331, 332, 333 to steel joists, 331, 332, 332 Second floor cornices, 446 electric light to, 525 - gas to, 462 - joists, 150 paper, 490 skirtings, 216 windows, glass to, 470 Secret gutter, lead, 400, 401, 392, 164, 171, 386 weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397 Sediment in cistern, 410, 420 Segmental, semicircular or elliptical sashes and frames on plan, 191, 194, 197, 209 headed sashes and frames, 191, 194, 196, 197, 199, 209 Selenitic lime, 62, 42 concrete, 44 for plaster, 441 mortar, 63, 105 Servants' bedrooms, painting to, 479 offices, flooring to, 155 hall fittings, 289 - w.c., 272, 421 supply to, 420 Service pipe, branch, 410 in iron, 405 in lead, keep away from hot water, 404 painting to, 405 size of, 405 - weight of, 405 governed by head of water, 405 main, 410 Serving bar, 301 to 303 flap, 291 stairs, 231 Set stoves, 74 Setting coat to plaster, 442, 444, 444, 445 will peel off, 444 - to heating boiler, 359, 360, 361, 362 Setts, granite channel, 507 to crossings, 500, 507 sizes of, 500, 507 - to roads, 507, 497 repairs to, 507 sizes of, 507 Kentish rag, 507 - paving, 56, 255, 257 Several cisterns connected together, 410 Sewer, connect, 28 disconnect, 26 Seyssel's asphalt to roads, 510 Shaft, boiler, 73 Shafts, stone, 127, 131 tall chimney, 99 to 101 thickness of, 100 to wood columns, 220, 221 Sham half-timber work, 322 to range, 355, 355 Shearing stress of cast-iron girders, 331 - of steel girders, 331 of wrought-iron girders, 331 Sheds, temporary, 9 Sheet copper, gauge of, 438 sizes of, 438 - weight of, 438 gauze, 293 Sheet glass, British, interception of light by, 469 quality of, 467, 467 - thickness of, 467 to windows, 470, 471 transparency of, 469 - weight of, 467 where suitable, 467 coloured, weight of, 467 enamelled and embossed, weight of, 468 flashed coloured, weight of, 468 fluted, weight of, 468 where suitable, 468 ground or obscured, interception of light by, 469 weight of, 468 where suitable, 468 stained, weight of, 467 Sheet iron roofing, 339 to meat screen, 286 weight of, 160 lead against damp walls, 489 architect's test for, 397 cast, sizes of, 397 weight of, 397 milled, 397 positions where suitable, 397 sizes, 397 weight of, 397, 160 piling, 326, 326, 326, 327, 94 zinc, 434 gauges of, 435 size of, 435 weight of 435 Sheeting, camp, 325, 326 Shellac knotting, 476 Shelley's patent system of glazing, 473 Shells to paths, 504 Shelter, roof to, 178 Shelves, bonnet, 291 counter, 302 glass, 469 ground edge to, 469 in pewter, 413 in spruce, 140 pastry, 289 slate, in larder, 289 in wine cellar, 290 6oo SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Shelves to butler's pantry, 275 to dispensary, 280 to dresser, 283 to housemaid's sink, 273 - to kitchen, 286 to larder, 289 to linen closet, 292 to scullery, 278 to slop sink, 282 to washing troughs, 281 Shields to iron flue pipe, 353 - to skylight, 337 Shingle dressing to roads, 508 for concrete paving, 502 weight of, 90 SHINGLEB, 395 Shingles, 395 cedar, 395 hips to, 395 junction piece to, 325 lap to, 395 larch, 395 oak, 395 pitch of, 395 ridge to, 395 Shoes, door, 143, 237, 246, 251, 252, 252, 253, 253, 260, 261, 263, 264, 264, 346, 347 weight of, 347 pile, 326, 327 weight of, 326, 327 stub, 297 to bressummers, 145 to joists, 152 to partitions, 188 to rain-water drain, 33 pipe, 343, 30, 33 to roof timbers, 173, 176, 336 to tie beams, 162 Shoot, coal, 76 Shop blind, 296, 207 cornice, projection allowed by London Building Act, 296 counter, 303 door, 250 to 252 folding, 250, 251 ; least width of, 251 to swing, 251 fanlight, 295 flooring, 157 - front, 294 glass to, 471 projection allowed by London Building Act, 296 lobby paving, 295 show board, 294, 299, 299 shutters, lifting, 300, 301 - movable, 300, 301 - revolving, 297, 298 - stall board, 294 - ventilation to, 299 window, 295 glass to, 295 (Shores, flying 12 Shores, needle, 13 raking, 11 sizes of, 12, 13 Shoring, 11, 19 Short description of cased frames, 195 Shouldering to slates, 385 to stone tiles, 394 Show board, 294, 299, 299 - sloped, 299 cases, glass to, 468 Shrinkage of joinery, 136 of partitions, 187 Shutter, angle, 300, 301 bar, 197, 198, 300, 300 - bolts, 201 fastenings, 300 flap, 200 French polish, 298 half shop, 301 handles, 198 knob, 197, 198 lifts, 300 - pay, 206 slide to corn shoot, 376, 377 to doors, 249, 249, 250 turns, 201 Shutters, boxing, 197, 199 in separate heights, 198 lifting, 199, 200 shop, 300, 301 louvred, 202, 205 movable shop, 300, 301 numbers on, 300 outside, 201, 202 paint, 297 - revolving, 207, 208 repairs to, 208 size of, 297, 298 shop, half, 301 lifting, 300, 301 movable, 300, 301 - revolving, 297, 298 gear to, 297 size of, 297, 298 three-quarter, 301 - sliding, 200, 201 three-quarter shop, 301 to elliptical or segmental headed windows, 199 Venetian, 202 ventilator in, 301 - weights to, 200 Shuttering to loose box, 371 Sicilian marble, 132 Sick box, 377 ceiling of, 378 dressing rino; and chain in, 378 - fittings to, 377, 378 gully or stench trap in, 378 manger in, 378 name plate to, 378 noiseless tyings to, 378 racking ring and chain in, 378 slinging apparatus to, 378 INDEX. 60 1 Sick box, ventilator to, 378 water pot in, 378 window guard to, 378 Side blind pieces, 296 entrance gate in iron, 383 v- gates, 255, 258, 308, 311, 313 sizes of, 255, 308, 313 - lights to lantern, 182, 183 - to vestibule, 236 plate to range, 356 Sienna marble, 132 Silex stone, 106 paving to footpaths, 501 Silicate cotton or felt, 147, 153, 189 - packing to cold store, 323, 323, 324 -to cistern, 408, 409, 419, 427 to heating pipe, 364 paint to w.c., 270, 271, 271 Sill, door, 266 linings, 192, 198 piece to gates, 256, 258, 259 to half-timber work, 319, 320, 321 lantern, 182 to loose boxes and stalls, 371, 372 to partitions, 187, 188 Sills, bed, 68, 105, 190 brick, 192 cement, 457, 455 core to cement, 457 glazed brick, 82 granite, 131 height from floor of, 190 lead weathering to, 433 - moulded oak, 192, 322 oak, 190, 193, 195, 204, 208, 212, 214 ior, 140 to sheds, 305 Portland, 121 projecting, 307 shop, 295, 300 stone, 126, 128, 111, 121, 131 straining, 171, 172 York, 111 Silt well, 31 Silurian grits as metalling to roads, 497 (Silvered plate glass, 472, 469 soffit, 295 Silver leaf knotting, 479, 476 - sand, 306 Silvertown insulation resistance to con- ductors, 519 Singeing, 368 gas tubing for, 464 Single-break switch, 514 - dinner lift, 234 harness brackets, 375 joisted floor, 147, 149, 150, 151, 152 cracks in ceiling of, 151 span for, 147 with iron joists, 152 - laths, 441, 445, 446, 449, 449 pole single-break switch, 514 switch, 514 swing gas bracket, 464 Single swing gas bracket, size of arms, 464 Sink, butler's pantry, 274, 412 ; and see Butler's Pantry Sink dispenser's, 280, 413 ; and see Dispenser's Sink - draw-off, 280 - flap, 273, 274, 274 housemaid's, 273, 412 ; and see House- maid's Sink - lead, 412, 412, 413, 422 pewter, 413 scullery, 276, 413 ; and see Scullery Sink sizes of, 83 slate, 289 sleeper walls to, 69 slop, 281, 422 ; and see Slop Sink - stone, 113, 121 stoneware, 83, 413 vegetable, 413 weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397 wrinsing, 413 Site, fence in, 11 visit, 5 Size, 443 ceilings, 452 double, 443, 489 for paper, 489 gold, 482, 477 knotting, 479, 476 walls, 452, 452 Sizes of baths, 417, 417, 418, 418 of battens, 137 of bells, 465 of bolts for ironwork, 330 of cesspools, 32 of circulating cylinders, 432 tanks, 433 of close fire range, 354 of coach houses, 58 of coal plates, 347 of copper sheets, 438 of cow houses, 380 of deals, 137 of eaves gutters, 343 of fir market timbers, 137 of fire opening to range, 354, 354, 354 of fireplace openings, 351 . of galvanised iron cisterns, 403 of gas brackets, 464 governors, 462 meters, 464 syphon boxes, 462 tubing or pipes, block tin, 459 composition, 459 flexible glazed, 459 india-rubber, 459 iron, 459 required to supply num- ber of jets, 460 various, 459 of hand pumps, 424 of heating pipes, 361, 362, 358, 358 of hot- water pipes, 431 602 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Sizes of incandescent lamps usually em- ployed, 512 of lead pipes, 405, 405, 405 rain-water pipes, 402 sheets, 397 soil pipes, 406 of loose boxes, 57, 368 of open fire ranges, 354 of pantiles, 393 of plain tiles, 391 of planks, 137 of portable ranges, 354 washing copper, 347 of rain-water pipes, 343 we ll Sj 34 of ranges, 354, 354, 354, 354 of shores, 12, 13 of slates, various, 384 of speaking tubes, 425 of stable passages, 368 yards, 368 of stalls, 57, 368 of storage tanks, 97 of stove interiors, 351 of stoves, various, 351, 351, 351, 351 of Sunbeam lamps, 512 of tin pipes, 436 of unwrought timber, 137 of wheeled carriages, 368 of white fir (American pine), 137 of wrought-iron doors, 348 party wall doors, 348 timbers, 137 of zinc sheets, 435 Sizing for staining, 482, 482, 482, 483 Skeleton-framed dovetailed backings to win- dows, 196 - door, 245, 249, 264, 264 Sketches not to scale, 1 Skew grooved for plaster, 318, 320, 320, 320, 320, 320, 321, 321 joints to flooring, 157 Skirting and double flooring, 215 angle, 217 fillet, to w.c., 272 basement, 217 bath, 267 cement, 218 moulded, 451 plain, 451 - fillet, 217 first floor, 216 flush, 216 generally to, 215 ground floor, 217 - hard wood, 217 lead-lined, 412 marble, 133 - moulded, 216, 216, 216, 217, 451 - paint, 482, 484, 480 pewter-lined, 413 - plain, 216, 451 - plaster at back of, 215, 449, 449 rebate floor for, 139 Skirting, second floor, 216 - slate, 388, 389 to attics, 216 - to dado, 218, 219 to ranges and hot plates, 355, 355, 355, 355, 357 to sinks, 273, 274, 274, 277, 281 to warehouse, 217 - to w.c., 270, 272 to washing troughs, 281 - to windows, 196, 197, 198, 200 to wood block floors, 217 Skylights against walls, 186 - bars to, 182, 183, 186 capping to, 182 domes in iron, 336, 337 ventilator to, 336 double, 187 electric light to, 524 - elliptical, 186 framing to, 184 glazing to, 182, 183, 184, 470, 472, 473, 469 to domed, 472, 473, 473 guards to, 185, 337 hinged, 185 hips to, 182, 183, 184 - in roof planes, 185, 186, 172 - iron, 186, 187 kerbs to, 184, 180, 184, 172 king post truss to, 183 lead dressings to, 184 lean-to, iron, 337 over staircase, 187, 229 plaster mouldings to, 448 purlins to, 183 - ridges to, 182, 183, 184 shields to, 337 - ties to, 183 to cowhouse, 382 - to lantern, 182, 183, 184 - to larder, 185 to w.c., 185 ventilator to, 185, 185 with ceiling lights, 186 Slabs, marble, 133 - pastry, 289 plaster, 457 work, 322 Slag bottoming to roads, 498, 504, 497 wool to cold chamber, 323 Slate bath, 416 battens, 164, 214, 214, 384, 384, 385, 385, 387, 387 size of, 384, 385, 387, 387 bearers to shelves and lavatory top, 388, 389 - brackets, 113 chimney pieces, 389 cisterns, 389 - creasing, 111, 344, 389 divisions to urinals, 424 enamelled, 388, 389 flagging to footpath, 501, 497 INDEX. 603 Slate, hip and ridge rolls, 386 - lavatory top, 389 mason, 387 to 389 nosing piece, 295 pastry slab, 289 raising piece, 294 shelves, 289, 290 - sinks, 389 skirting, 388, 389 slabs or shelves to wine cellar, 387 - to larder, 388, 388 strength of, 387 - to switch and other boards, 519 urinal, 388 weathering, 102, 111, 389 weight of, 387 SLATER, 384 to 389 Slates, Bangor, 384, 385, 387 Countess, 384, 385, 387 double course at eaves, 384 Doubles, 384 Duchess, 384, 385 - Empress, 384 generally to, 384 - glass, 385, 469 fixings for, 469 sizes of, 469 thickness and weight of, 469 Imperials, 384 - Ladies, 384, 385 - lead, 397, 409, 409, 409 Marchioness, 384 Penrhyn, 385 - pitch to, 384, 385 Princess, 384 Queens, 384 - Rags, 384 repairs to, 492 size of various, 384 - Smalls, 384 - Viscountess, 384 - weight of, 160 - suitable for lead, 397, 397, 397, 397 Westmoreland, 385 Slating, battens to, 164, 214, 214, 384, 384, 385, 385, 387, 387 size of, 384, 385, 387, 387 - bond to, 384, 384 circular, 385 clean out gutters and stack pipes, 384 - felt to, 386 - filleting to, 386 hip and ridge rolls to, 386 wings to, 386 in diminished courses, 385 in promiscuous sizes, 385 - lap of, 384, 385 leave water-tight, 384 mitred hips and valleys to, 386 - nails, 384, 385, 387 weight of, 384, 385 open, 387 ornamental, 385 pitch of, 384, 385 Slating, screws to, 385 shouldering to, 385 to cheek of dormer, 385 to roofs, 384, 385, 387 torching to, 385 vertical, 387 Sleeper plates, oak, 149 walls, 68, 69, 110 to sink, 389 Sliding carriage gates, 259 cupboard fronts and doors, 276 doors, 238, 243 in iron, 348 to loose boxes, 371 gas pendant, 464 louvres, 213, 214 partition, 233 shutters, 200 Slinging apparatus, 378 Slip joints, 222, 244 - marble, 223 to stoves, iron or marble, 352, 352 Slips for joinery, generally, 142 Slits, 318 Slop sink, 422 and fittings, 281, 282 broom rack, 282 cold supply to, 410, 420 cupboard, 282 - draw-off to, 423 flushing pipe to, 423 - height of, 281 hot supply to, 430 iron soil pipe to, 423 safe to, 423 shelves, 282 - towel roller, 282 top to valve closet, 423 Slow combustion stoves, 351, 350, 350, 350, 351, 351 sizes of, 351 Sludge, weight of, 91 Sluice valve, 366 ' Smalls, 384 Smell of paint, 10 SMITH AND FOUNDER, 329 to 383 Smoke crane, 355, 355, 356 flues, 72 sizes of, 72 Smoking room, gas to, 463 pipe jet in, 463 Smoothing to flooring, 154 Snap rivets, 330 Snow boards, 166, 171 guards in iron or wood, 337 weight of, 160 Soaker slates, 398, 400, 400, 401, 401 Soakers, lead, weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397, 397 zinc, 435 Soap, 487 sinking, 389 Socket plates, 257, 260, 263 screws, 195 604 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Socket to clothes posts, 304 , to roof timbers, 173 Soffit, eaves, 165, 171, 174, 175, 175, 176, 322 in plaster, 453 linings, 194, 196, 197, 198, 199 splayed, 198 lobby, 237, 295 panelling to half-timber work, 321 plaster, 450, 445, 457 to stairs, 227, 228, 231 Soft soap, 443 water attacks lead-lined cistern, 397 woods, 137 Soil pipe, foot piece to, 40.6, 420 - head to, 420, 423 in iron to slop sink, 423 - in lead, 406, 420 - weight of, 406, 420 test for, 406 ventilation to, 420 Soils, clay, 39 foundation, 39 made, 39 natural, slope of, 90 peaty, 39 safe load on, 100 vegetable, 39 water-logged, 139 weight of, 90 Solder, 398 and zinc, 434 Soldered angles to cistern, 427 to sinks, 412 dots, 401, 406 joint, wiped, 404, 406, 420, 421 Sole piece, 177, 178, 256, 258, 258, 310 Solid bridging, 149, 151, 151, 152 casement frames, see Casement Frames and cased frames combined, 213 door frame, see Door Frames panelling to stalls, 371 parquetry, 159 stone steps, 115 to 120 Soot door opening, 74 to heating boiler flues, 360, 362 to hot plate, 357 - to range, 355, 355, 357 Sound boarding, 153 proof floors, 153 partitions, 189 Space required to turn carnage in, 497 Spacing pieces to rolled iron joists, 331 Spandril ends to steps, 230 ornamental, 230 framing, 228, 232 - glass to, 228, 232 piece to windows, 194 - steps, 119 Spanish mahogany, 141 Spanner, 407, 461 Sparge pipe, 436, 440, 424 Sparrow picked granite, 130 Spans for girders, 332 of iron roofs, 335, 336 Speaking tubes, 425 fittings to, 425 indicator to, 425 materials for, 425 repair, 493 sizes of, 425 - to stable, 425 Special work, 5 Specification, general heading for, 4 of electric lighting, 517 to 520 for house breaker, 18 return, 16 Spence's metal, 343 Spikes, 161, 326 hazel, 396 roof, sizes and weight of, 161 Spirit drainer, 303 - store, 303 taps, 303 distance apart of, 303 Spirits of salt, 439 of turpentine, 479, 476 Splayed boxings, 197 fillets or rolls for copper, 438 distance apart, 438 - for zinc, 434, 434 distance apart of, 434 grounds to doors, see Grounds, Splayed to windows, 191, 193, 194, 196, 205 - linings to windows, 191, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198 Splocket, 162, 174, 175, 175, 175,176 Sponge and brush drainer, 375, 375 Spouts, beer engine, 303 Sprigged glass, 467, 467, 470, 470, 470, 470, 471,471 Sprigs, glaziers', size and weight of, 467 Springers, feather edged, 143 Spring hinges, Archibald Smith and Steven?, 233, 236, 251 in joists, 147 -roller, 207 Springs, bell, 465,465 check, 465 door, 240, 241, 243, 253 sizes of, 241 fresh water, 94, 95 Spruce, 140, 137 - sizes of, 137 Spur stones to area kerbs, 111, 112 Spurs, fencing, 308, 310, 311, 312, 314 to doors and gates, 132, 243, 255, 257 to railings, 344 Square pales, 310 - rails, 312, 313, 310 - sizes of, 312, 313 Squared uncoursed rubble, 122, 123 Stable, air inlets to, 369 air-tight ceiling to, 369 and fittingp, 368 to 379 - boarding to, 373, 373, 370 - brackets, 374 brooms, 374 coach house doors, size of, 368 IKDEX. 605 Stable doors, 262 size of, 263, 368 drainage to, 35, 57, 378, 368, 370 - fittings, 374 brooms, 374 brush and sponge drainer, 375 buckets, 374 -forks, 374 form and broom racks, 374 folding brackets, 374 long arm, 375 niche and trap, 374 rubber hose to, 374 straw plait holder, 375 forks, 374 gas to, 368, 463 gates, size of, 368 Blazed brickwork to, 373 hayloft to, 369 - heating to, 379, 365 height of, 368 hot water to, 379 - ironwork, 368 to 379 and urine, 369 Musgrave and Company, 369 St. Pancras Company, 369 lamp in yard, 368 - lighting to, 368 living rooms to, 369 loft doors, size of. 368 loose box divisions to, 371, 369 doors, 371, 370 size of, 368 manger fittings to, 370, 370 men's rooms, 369 - painting to, 480 -to ironwork of, 378 passages, size of, 368 paving to, 57, 58, 368 cleaning room, 375, 368 coach house, 368 harness room, 368 yard, 368 space for fodder in, 370 - stall division to, 372, 369 -size of, 368, stonework, 114 surface gutters to, 378 sun not to be in horses' eyes, 368 - ventilation to, 377, 368 w.c. to, 369 wheeled carriages, size of, 368 windows, 375 yard fittings, 376 manure guard, 376 paving, 56 rings, 376 size of, 368 Stack doors, 237 pipes, clean out, 384, 390, 393, 394, 402 rejoint, 492 Stacks, chimney, brick, 72, 73, 100 stone, 126, 128 Staff bead, 136 Staff bead in plaster, 450 ] Staging and strutting to drains, 22 -to excavations, 41 to concrete floor, 46, 143 roof, 46, 143 Stain and varnish, 482, 482, 482, 483, 478, 480 floor margins, 482 old work, 483 down brickwork, 492, 492 Stained sheet glass, weight of, 467 Staining, 478 Stains, cement, 445 in plaster, cut out, 452 oil, 478 on tiles, 51 water, 478 Staircase, apron linings to, 225, 227 and London County Council, 147 Back, 115, 116 balusters to, 225, 227, 228, 229 ' borrowed light to, 224 brackets to, 230, 231, 227 carriages in iron, 230, 231 in wood, 225, 226 circular, 231 stone, 117, 117, 118, 120 consoles to, 225, 226 continuous outer strings to, 228, 228 crippled handrail, 228 curtail steps, 226 Dog-legged, 224, 224 gallery, 229 gas brackets to, 462 . standards, 226 to, 462 half-space, 225, 227 - hanging rods for, 230, 231 - handrails, 224, 225, 225, 225, 226, 226, 227, 227, 228, 228, 229, 229, 229 crippled, 228 mopstick, 227 Hawkesley, 232 head room to, 224 - in hard woods, 230, 228 - iron, 349 landing, 224 - lantern, 187 - light to, 224 - borrowed, 224 marble, 133 - newels to, 225, 226, 229, 230, 231 1 nosing, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 230 outer strings to, 225, 225, 226, 230 painting to, 480 - paper to, 490, 489 passage, 223 - Portland stone, 119 Principal, 226 to 231 in stone, 117, 119 quarter space, 225, 227 rise of, 223 risers, 224, 226, 229 scroll ends to, 226, 229 6o6 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Staircase, semicircular, 231 Serving, 231 skylight over, 229 soffits to, 227, 228, 231 spandril ends to, 230 - framing to, 228, 232 v stiffeners, 229 stone, 115 to 120, 133 treads and risers, 118 temporary, 232 treads, 223, 224, 226, 229, 205 veneered riser to, 226 wall strings, 225, 226, 230 warehouse, 232 Well, 224, 226 width of, 147, 223, 224, 226 winders to, 223, 224, 226 wood, 223 to 232 York stone, 115 to 119 Stair eyes, 116, 225, 227 Stairs, cantilevers to, 339 cornice to, 448 fireproof concrete, 47, 48 iron carriages to, 332 iron joists to carry, 116, 118 movable, 266 stone landings to, 115, 119 to basement, 118 Stall board, 294 glass, 299, 474 movable, 298 name plate to, 300 reflecting, 299 sashes to, 299 Stall, boarding to, 373, 373, 370, 223 cow, sizes of, 380, 380 division, barrier rod to, 372, 369 divisions, boarding to, 373, 373, 370 description of, 372 for cows, 380, 381 height of, 369 - length of, 369, 372, 372 lengthening piece to, 372 various, 369 width between, 369 dressing rings and chains to, 374 feeding trough to, 374 fittings, 374 gully or stench trap in, 374 hay rack to, 374 horse, size of, 380 kicking mats to, 374 mangers to, 374, 370 name plate to, 374 noiseless tyings in, 374 paving to, 57 pillar rings and chains, 374 racking rings and chains to, 374 sizes of, 57, 368 ventilator to, 374 water pot to, 374 Stamford patent joints, 23 Stanchions as door posts, 262 cast-iron, safe load on, 341 Stanchions, cast-iron, thickness and height 341 various, 341, 342 fireproof, 342 - steel, 342 strength of various sections, 341 wrought-iron, various sections, 342 Stand pipe, 366 Standards, gas, 86 shop bar, 300, 300 to blinds, 296 to iron columns, 340 railings, 344 stanchions, 341 Standing space for cows, 380 Staples, 251, 256, 256 Stationary load, 146 Statuary marble, 132 Stay iron hooks to tiles, 391, 392, 393, 394 - rail to tables, 275, 279 Stays, handrail, 344 to grille gates, 346 Steam, heating by, 358 pump, 424 rollers, 498, 503, 504, 506, 497, 497 tubing, 429 Steel bath, 418 sizes of, 418 box girders, 332 carbon in, 329 casements, 348 columns, 342 flange girders, 332 flitch plates, 334 girders, safe stress on, 331 joists, expansion of, 331 sizes of, 331 to fireproof floors, flats and terraces, 333 distance apart of, 333 to openings, 331 . to timber floors, 333 - plate boiler, 362 girders, 332 quality of, 330 stanchions, 342 tensile stress of, 330 weight of, 329 where employed, 329 Stench or gully trap in stable, IJ73, 374, 1375 378 Stencilling, 478, 484, 486 Stepped flashings, lead, 400, 400, 401, ;JJ)8 zinc, 434 Step, bath, 267, 415 ladder, 265 iron, 265 w.c., 270, 421 Steps, arches to, 120 area, 118 carpet, 159 curtail, 115, 119 entrance stone, 119, 120, 132 garden, 118, 120 granite, 132 INDEX. 607 Steps, hanging stone, 115, 119 marble-lined, 135 Portland stone, 119 scroll end to, 115, 119 solid stone, 115, 120 spandril, 119 stone, 118, 119, 120, 132 repairs to, 114, 121 terrace, 118, 120 tiled, 53 to cellar flaps, 266 winders, stone, 115, 117, 117, 118, 119 York, 115 to 119 Stiffeners, fence, 308, 310, 312, 314 handrail, 116, 229 shop bar, 300, 300 to girders, 332, 332, 332 to lead-lined cistern, 426, 427 to stanchions, 341 Stiff gas bracket, 464 - size of arms, 464 pendant, 464 Stipple glass, 484 painted work, 485 Stock articles, 9 locks, 252, 253, 253, 264 Stockholm deal, 140 tar, 479 to piles, 326 Stoking tools, 362, 360, 361 Stone arches, 126, 128 ashlar, 121, 122, 123 casing to old building, 127 balcony, 113, 121 balusters, 125 balustrade, 125, 120 bases to columns, 109, 127, 131 to door frames, 113, 121, 144 posts, 113 Bath, 106, 121 to 129 boasted, 103 bonders, 124, 126, 128 boundary wall, 307 brackets, 113 build and bed in, 105 Caen, 106 caps to columns, 127, 131 case up, 105 channel, 113, 121 chimney piece, 112, 121, 134 stack, 126, 128 chippings as me tailing to footpath, 497 columns, 127, 131, 133 connections to, 104 coping, 111, 85, 121 corbels, 106, 107, 120 core to cornice, 107 cornice, 125, 128, 131 Corsham Down, 106 cover to bressummer, 145 to girder, 108, 261 -to pipe channels, 107 covering to dry area, 73, 107, 120 * * to heating channels, 107 Stone, Dove, marble, 132 drafted, 103 dragged, 103 dressings to brick building, 128 to chimney stack, 126, 128 to doors, 126, 128 windows, 126, 128 dust dressing to tar paving, 301, 499 flag paving to footpath, 497 Forest of Dean, 106 frieze, 125 gallery, 117, 120 gate pier?, 114, 121 generally to, 103 gullies, 113, 121 hard York, 105 heads, 126 hearths, 112, 121, 133, 53 hinge, 114, 121, 255 hollow walls, 60, 61 injury to, 105 jambs, 126, 128 joints, thickness of, 103, 104, 123 key, 126 kerbs to areas, 111, 112, 121 to channels, 108, 120 to hearth, 112, 134 labours to, 104 landings to stairs, 115, 119 thickness of, 115 lintels, 126, 128 lock, 114, 121 Mansfield, 106 Monk's Park, 106 mouldings, 105 mullions, 126, 128 necking, 124, 128 newels^ 117, 118 paving, 47, 109 ; and see under Paving to footpaths, artificial, 497 Bath, 501 Caithness, 501 granite, 501, 502 Portland, 501 Purbeck, 501 Silex, 501 slate, 501 Victoria, 501 York, 500 pillars, safe load on, 103 size of, 103 pilasters, 127, 131, 132 plinth, 124, 128, 131 pointing to, 103, 104, 123 Portland, 106, 119 to 121 quoins, 124, 128, 129, 130 red and grey granite, 130 red Corsehill, 106 reveals, 121 Kobin Hood, 105 Rouge Royal, 132 rubbed, 103 safe load on, 103 sawn, 103 6o8 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Stone, Scotgate Ash, 105 shafts, 127, 131, 133 Sicilian marble, 132 Sienna marble, 132 Silex, 106 - sills, 126, 128, 121, 131 - sinks, 113, 121 - spurs, 111, 112, 132 staircases, 115 to 120, 133 - circular, 117, 117, 118, 120 statuary, marble, 132 steps, 118, 119, 120, 132 repairs to, 114, 121 strings, 124, 128, 131 tablets, 30, 32, 85, 120 thresholds, 110, 121 tile hips, 394 laths, 394 - ridge, 394 rooting, 394 - valleys, 394 STONE TILER, 394 Stone tiles, 394 - battens for, 394, 214, 165 bonding to, 394 cuttings to, 394 dormer cheeks to, 394 lap to, 394 pitch to, 394 rendering to, 394 shouldering to, 394 Tetbury, 394 timbers for, 394 weight of, 160 tooled, 103 treads and risers, 118 Victoria, 106 voussoirs, 126 walls, 121 to 123 thickness of, required by London Building Act, 123, 64 to 67 hollow, 60, 61 thickness of, 65 withes, 126 - York, various, 105 Stones, weights of various, 103 Stonework to stables, 114 Stoneware drain pipes, 23 - sink, 413 washing trough, 414 sizes of, 414 Stools, 126, 128, 131 Stop chamfered, 254, 254, 257, 260, 315 Stop cock, 364, 407, 408, 408, 409, 410, 410, 411, 411, 411, 412, 420, 420, 420, 421, 430, 461, 461, 462, 463, 463, 463, 463, 463, 463 guard box, 408 - valve, 415, 415, 416, 416, 416, 416 Stopping, hard japan, 479, 479, 479, 476 Storage cisterns done away with, 409 of materials, 8 tanks, 95 at different levels, 368 sizes for, 97, 34 Storage tanks to hydrants, 366, 368 Store, cold, 322 to 325, 289, 289 - fruit, 290 spirit, 303 up fittings, 19 Story post, 146 safe load on, 136, 146 Stott's gas governor, 461 Stove; interiors, size of, 351 Stoves, 350 to 353 air to, 350 Berlin or Brunswick black, 493 blower to open hob grates, 352, 353, 351 - brickwork to, 351, 352 build round solid in brickwork, 352, 351 charcoal, 353, 350, 350 - cheeks to, 350, 351, 351, 351, 352 concrete filling round old fireplace open- ing, 352, 351 Constantino's convoluted, 358 dog grates, 352, 351, 350, 350 finish of ironwork to, 352 - fire bars, 352, 351 - firebrick, back to, 350 flue pipe to portable and gas, 353, 353, 350 gas, 353, 350, 350, 463 to gas, 463 height of, 351 hob register, 352 sizes, 351 loss of heat by, 350 mantel registers, size of, 351 marble or iron slips to, 352, 352 mountings to, 352, 352 - oil, 353, 350, 350 old chimney piece refixed to old, 352 - open hob range, 352, 351, 350, 350 plain bars grates with brick sides, 352, 351 portable, 353, 350, 350 - register, 351, 352, 350, 350, 350 sizes of, 351 - to dog grate, 352, 351 to open hob range, 352, 353 repairs to, 493 seatings to portable, 353 - set, 74 shields to flue pipe of, 353 size of fireplace openings to, 351 - to make, 350 - slow combustion, 351, 350, 350, 350 sizes, 351 - Teale's, 352, 350 to old fireplace openings, 352, 351 -with boilers, 352 St. Pancras Ironworks Company's pavement lights, 474 - stable fittings, 369 Petersburg deal, 139, 140 Straight-jointed flooring, 155, 157, 157, 158 Straining beam, 171 piece in iron, 336 sill, 171, 172 INDEX. 609 S traps, 412, 414, 414, 415, 416, 417, 417, 421, 423 Straps, dip in oil, 330 hinges, 253, 258, 265,266, 313,316, 318, 323 iron to roofs and partitions, 334 sizes of, 334 - pile shoe, 326, 327 roof, 160, 162, 171 to barges, 165 Stratum, 39 Straw, oaten, thatch, 396 plait holder, 375 - rye, thatch, 396 thatch, weight of, 160 truss, size of, 146 - weight of, 146 wheaten, thatch, 396 Street kerbs, 56 paving, 56, 120 Strength of brick pillars, 62 of cement, 42 of concrete, 47 walls, 49 of stone pillars, 103 of various sections of cast-iron columns, 340 of cast-iron stanchions, 341 - of steel, 330 of wrought iron, 329 Stress, tensile, of rivet iron, 330 of steel, 330 of wrought iron, 329 Stresses, safe, on cast-iron girders, 339 on steel girders, 331 on wrought-iron girders, 331 Striking plate, 255, 315, 316 Strings, brick, 79 cement, 455 continuous outer, 228, 228 core to cement, 456 to wood, 344 granite, 131 lead weatherings to, 433 outer, 225, 225, 226, 230 stone, 124, 128, 131 to step ladder, 265, 265 wall, 225, 226, 230 Strip off old paper, 491 Strong lead service pipe, 405 room door, 349 Stroud Valley, tiles from, 394 Structure, report on, 37 Struts, 310 iron, 336 roof, 162, 170, 171, 172, 174 to gates, 256, 258, 258 Strutting and staging to drains, 22 to excavations, 41 herring bone, to flats, 179, 180 to joists, 148, 151, 151 Stubs to grilles, 345 sash, 249 shoes, 297 Stucco, bastard lime, composition of, 444 cement, composition of, 444 externally, 453 to half-timber work, 454 where used, 444 colouring to, 453, 453, 453, 454, 454, 454, 488 common lime, composition of, 444 lime, composition of, 444 externally, 453 to half-timber work, 453 where used, 444 - painting to, 453, 453, 453, 454, 456, 488 pebble dash, composition o r , 444 externally, 454 plain lime, composition of, 444 rough cast cement, composition of, 444 externally, 454 to half-timber work, 454 where used, 444 lime, composition of, 444 externally, 454 to half-timber work, 454 , where used, 444 to half-timber work, 318, 322, 322 trowelled lime, 444 number of coats of pairt required to, 488 Stud framing to cold store, 323 Studs, 187, 188, 188, 189 to half-timber work, 320 Study door, 244 Stuffing box, 406 Stump, 314 Styles, fixing, 315, 316, 318 "hanging, 315, 316, 317 shutter, 300 to doors, 237, 243, 244, 244, 250, 250, 251, 253, 260, 262, 264, 264 to gates, 255, 257 Sub-counter, 302 Sub-distributing switch board, 518, 519, 519, 524 class of, 519 Subsoil drains, 36 Suction pipe, 404, 424, 424, 425 height of, 404 rose, 424 Suffolk oak, 140 Sugg's burners, 464, 464 Summer house, 178 Sunbeam lamps, 512 Sun blind, 296 Sun burner, 463, 336 access door to, 463 exhaust tube to, 463 gas to, 463 sizes of, 463 where used, 463 in horse's eyes, 368 Sunk bath, 416 Supply cistern, heating, 364 cold, to bath, 411 - to butler's sink, 410 2 ft 6io SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Supply cold to circulating tank, 431 to cistern, 406 to copper, 410 to dispenser's sink, 410 to draw-off in area, 410 - . on landing, 410 to feed cistern of range, 411 - to flushing tank, 410 - to geyser, 411, 418, 419 to housemaid's sink, 410 to kitchen range circulating boiler, 411, 430 to lavatory, 410, 410 to scullery, 410 to slop sink draw-off, 410 to washing trough, 410 water, 403 to 428 hot water, 428 to 433 tank, 379, 379 to pedestal closet, 420 to servants' closet, 420 to slop sink flush cistern, 420 to urinal, 420 to valve closet, 420 to w.cs., 420 to water-waste preventers, 420 Support to ridge, 171 Surbase moulding, 218, 219 Surface concrete, 45 earth, 39 gutter in stables, 378 sizes of, 378 pavement, 296 of walls, prepare, 14, 68 turf, 39 Swan-neck to handrail, 226 necks to pipes, 343 Swedish deal, 140 white, 140 fir, 139 Sweep flues, 486 Swing brackets, 524 doors, 251, 252 gas pendant, 464 Swinton telephone, 426 Switch boards, class of, 519 defined, 515 distributing, 518, 519, 519, 523 defined, 515 labels to, 519 - main, 519, 519, 523 defined, 515 office of, 515 office of, 515 spare ways on, 519 sub-distributing, 518, 519, 519, 524 Switch, class of, 521 definition of, 514 double-break, 514 pole, 514 double-break, 514 - single-break, 523, 523, 523, 514 fuse to, 514 main, 523, 514 Switch, main, definition of, 515 office of, 515 master, office of, 525, 525, 514 office of, 514 position of, 526 separate to each point, 520 single-break, 514 pole, 514 single-break, 514 sizes of, 514 Swivel bar, 260 Syenites as macadam, 505 Sympathetic hinges, 251 Syphon box, 461 sizes of, 462 where required, 462 in hot-water work, 431 - The, 404 height above water, 404 - trap, anti-D, 420, 421 T. Table, 275, 279, 286, 286, 289 billiard, size of, 150 butler's pantry, 275 - flap, 280, 291, 275, 286, 286, 289 height of, 280 height of, 279, 286 - kitchen, 286, 279, 286 height of, 279 size of, 279 legs, 279, 286/275 distance apart, 279 maids', 286, 279 height of, 286 size of, 279, 286 scullery, 279 size of, 279, 275, 286 top, 275, 279, 286 spruce for, 140 working, 279, 286 Tablets, stone, 30, 32, 85, 120 Tacks, lead, 397, 397, 397, 398, 401, 406, 406, 420, 421 Take down old buildings, 1 3 up paving, 26 Tall. chimneys, 99 to 101 thickness of walls to, 100 required by London Building Act, 100 Tallow, Russian, 443 Tanks, asphalt to, 97 circulating, 379, 433 capacities of, 433 qualities of, 433 sizes of, 433 connecting, 362 expansion, 364 feed, to open boilers, 355, 355, 357, 354 - flushing, 30 fountain, 98 rain-water, 35 storage, 95, 366, 368 INDEX. Tanks, storage, sizes for, 97, 34 supply, 379, 379 Tap rail, 303 spirit, 303 - to range, 355, 355, 357 Tape as lightning conductor, 439, 440 Tapping cock, 303 Tar and pitch grout, 509 coal, 478, -478 ends of posts, 305 - for footpaths, 499, 499, 503, 503, 503 to be doubly distilled, 499, 500 for roofs, 478 for timber and iron, 479 - paint, 478 sand to, 478 - paving, gravel, 500, 503 limestone, 499, 499, 500, 503, 503 method of mixing, 499, 500 to carriageway, 503 to drying ground, 303 to esplanade, 503 - to footpaths, 499, 500, 503, 503, 497 - Constable's, 499 Hobman's, 500 - thickness of, 499, 500 where used, 499 to promenades, 503 - to roads, 503, 500, 497 Hobman's, 500 thickness of, 499 Stockholm, 479 - timber, 142, 143, 147 to cisterns, 427 to felt roof, 306 to fencing, 311, 314, 307, 308, 308, 311, 311, 312, 312, 314 to gate posts, 315, 316, 318 to half-timber work, 318, 322 to iron hurdles, 383 to joists, 143, 147 to piling, 326 to rain-water pipe, 488 to sheds, 306 Tare, 397 Tarpaulin roofs, 10 Tarred line, 386 Task work, 7 Tassels, bell, 465, 465, 466 blind, 207 Teak, 137, 141 boarding to stables, 373 constructional work in, 141 flooring, 158 Johore, 141 joinery, 141 Moulmein, 141 weight of, 147 Teale's stoves, 352, 350 Tee irons to concrete floors, 333 to girders, 332, 332 Tees to pipes, 429, 458 Telephone, 426 Swinton, 426 Telescopic cleaning hook, 375, 375 Tell-tale front, 466 Temperature of cold store, 325 of heating pipes, 358 of horticultural buildings, 358 of hospitals, 358 of rooms, 358, 365 Templates for glass, 467 generally, 142 to bearing bars, 346 to bressummers, 145 to cantilevers, 339, 340 to coach house door, 261, 261 to iron and steel girders, 331, 332, 332, 332, 332 - to lintels, 333 to partitions, 188 - to purlins, 162 to rolled iron joists, 331, 332, 333, 333 - to steel joists, 331, 332, 333, 333 to tie beams, 162 to wood girders, 153, 180 to wood joists, 152, 152, 153 various, 108 Temporary sheds, 9 - stairs, 232 TENDER, FORM OF, 527 Tensile stress of cast-iron girders, 339 of rivet iron, 330 of steel, 330 girders, 331 of wrought iron, 329 girders, 331 Tension rods to floors, 151, 151 Tenter hooks, 309, 312, 391 Terminals, definition of, 514 Terms used in electric lighting, 511 to 515 Terra cotta, 102 wine bin, 387 Terrace, concrete, 49 steps, 118, 120 stone paving to, 110, 120 Tesserse, 51, 132 Test, architect's, of wrought iron, 329 of iron columns, 331 bell wires, 466 drains, 21 electric light fittings, 522 for lead soil pipe, 406 for sheet lead, 397 gas, 460, 493 holes, 3 hydrants, 367 Tests, architect's, 10 hydraulic, 10 Tetbury stone tiles, 394 Thatch, 396 as a non-conductor, 396 battens, 165, 214 - buckles for, 396 ceiling under, 396 chimney stacks and, 396 for dairies, 396 - hazel spikes to, 396 2 R 2, 6l2 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Thatch, heather as, 396 *- heatherings to, 396, 396 interlacing on, 396 laths for, 396, 396 oaten straw as, 396 pitch for, 396, 396 reeds as, 396 - runners to, 396, 396 rye straw as, 396 tarred lime for, 396 thickness of, 396, 396 weight of, 160 wheaten straw as, 396 where used, 396 THATCHER, 396 Thermometer to heating pipe, 362 Thickness of brick walls, 64 to 67 of concrete walls, 49 of cross walls, 65 of hollow walls, 65 of retaining walls, 91, 92 of rubble walls, 123 boundary walls, 130 of stone landings, 115 of stone walls, 64 to 67, 123 of tall chimney shafts, 100 Three-quarter shutters, 301 Thresholds, bed and built in, 105 door, 261, 261 gate, 255, 257, 259 mortise, 105 stone, 110, 121 Throttle valve, 362, 363, 363, 365 Thumb moulded rim to lavatory, 389 moulding, 267, 269, 270, 271, 272, 414 screw, 249 Tick material, 296 Tie beams, 162, 170, 171 as girder, 171 extra strength to, 171 support to, 161 to partitions, 188 bolts, 336 horizontal, 171 irons to iron and steel girders, 331, 331, 332, 332, 332, 332 -to rolled iron joist, 331, 331 -to steel joist, 331, 331 piece, 175 plate, 162, 170, 171 rods to floors, 48 to gates, 257 -to hearths and floors, 334 -to piles, 326 -to roof, 336 to walls, 334 Ties to door frames, 138, 260, 261, 263, 264 land, 92, 93 to heating boiler, 360 to lantern skylights, 183 to window frames, 138 wall, 60, 61, 85, 90 Tile and half tiles, 390 Tile battens, 390, 392, 392, 394, 214, 214, 165 cheek to stoves, 351, 352, 352, 352, 350, 351, 351 creasing, 85, 112 edging, 503 fireproof floors, 48 - hearths, 53 hips, 391, 393, 386 paper, 491, 491 paving, 52 - pegs, 394 - pin nails, 391, 391, 392 ridging, 391, 393, 386, 386 Tiled walls to stables, 373 TILEB, 390 to 394 TILEB, STONE, 394 Tiles, encaustic, 51 - glass, 469, 390 fixing for, 469 sizes of, 469 thickness and weight of, 469 - glazed, 81, 82, 83 sizes of, 81, 83 - Hall's, 82, 83 sizes of, 83 majolica, 51 marble, 133 - pan, 392, 393 concave, 393 convex, 393 corrugated, 393 double roll, 393 size of, 393 weight of, 160 paving, various, 51 - plain, 390 to 392 absorption of moisture by, 391 angle, 392 brindled, 391 Broseley, 290, 391 colours of, 391 cresting, 391 dowels to ridging, 391 finials to, 391 glass, 469, 390 fixing for, 469 sizes of, 469 thickness and weight of, 469 half tiles, 390 hip, 391 junction, 391 ornamental, 391, 392 ridge, 391 roll, 391 ridging, 391 size of, 391 stay iron to, 391 valley, 391 weight of, 160 wings to, 391 sizes of paving and wall, 51 stains on, 51 INDEX. 6I 3 Tiles, stone, 394 - battens for, 394, 165 cheeks to dormers, 394 - glass, 394 - hip, 394 laj) of, 394 - laths for, 394 - pitch of, 394 rendering to, 394 - ridge, 394 shouldering to, 394 - Tetbury, 394 - valley, 394 weight of, 1GO Tiling done by plasterer, 457 - pan, 392 corrugated, 393 double roll, 393 - filleting to, 393 hips, 393 - lap of, 392 laths for, 392, 393 - pitch of, 393 pointing to, 392 - ridges, 393 stay iron hooks to, 393 valleys, 393 verges to, 393 plain, 390 - bedded dry, 391, 392 on straw, 391 - felt to, 392 filleting to, 392 gauge of, 390, 391 - labours to, 390 - laths for, 390, 391 - leave watertight, 390 lime and hair mortar or cement bcd- ;ding to, 390, 391 oiling to, 391 on walls, 392 ornamental courses in, 391, 392 - pitch of, 390 rendering to, 391 - ridge, 391 - roll, 391 ridging, 391 size of timbers for, 391 to dormer cheeks, 391 - torching to, 391 - verges to, 392 - vertical, 392 - repair, 492 to steps, 53 to walls, external, 83 glazed, 81 - Hall's hanging, 82, 83, on old walls, glazed, 82 to walls, plain, 392 - vertical, plain, 392 - . wall, 81, 82, 83 Till drawer, 302 Tilting angle fillet, 398, 399 -. ^ s i z es of, 398 Tilting fillet, 164, 179, 163, 163, 163, 164, 164, 171, 174, 175, 175, 175, 176, 179, 180 Timber, air around, 147 Archangel, 139, 140, 140, 157 Baltic, 137 - balk, 137 - charring, 142, 147, 149 - Christiania, 139, 140, 140 - constructional, 139, 140, 141, 141 creosoting, 137, 142 Dantzic fir, 139 oak, 141 deal, 139, 140 - decay of, 137 distance apart of joists, rafters, quarters; 139 dry rot in, 137 elm, 141, 137 enamelling on, 137 exposed faces to be wrought, 138 - fir, 139, 137 - market sizes of, 137 red or yellow, or white, 139, 140, 137 for joinery, 136 - Gene, 140, 155, 156, 157, 158 generally to, 136 greenheart, 142 - hard, 137 Hungarian oak, 141 - knots in, 136 lignum vitse, 201 mahogany, 141 market sizes of, 137 Memel fir, 139 oak, 140, 141, 137 - Onega, 139, 140 pillars, safe load on, 136 - pine, 140, 137 - pitch pine, 139, 141 preservation of, 142 - Prussian, 139 - Riga fir, 139 - Russian, 139, 140 - St. Petersburg, 139, 140 scantling, lengths of, 136 - Scotch fir, 139 seasoned, 136 - soft, 137 spruce, American, 140, 137 Norwegian, 140, 137 Stockholm, 140 - Swedish, 139, 140 - tarring to, 142, 143, 147 - teak, 141, 137 unwrought, 137 sizes of, 137 varnishing on, 137 weights of various, 147 wrought, 137 - sizes of, 137 Timbers for tiles, size of, 391, 394 Tinned copper, 412, 413 Tin foil on damp Avails, 489 614 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Tin lining to vegetable bins, 278 - pipe, 303, 436 pipes for gas, size of, 459 weight of, 436 Tip-up lavatory, 414 . T iron stiflfener to transome, 211 Tingles, lead, 397, 397, 397, 398 to glass, 470 Tobin's tubes, air inlet, 292, 293, 75 size of, 495 position of, 293 zinc lining to, 293 Tongue and groove joint to meeting style, 259 water, see Water Tongue Tongues, copper, to slate shelves, 388 hoop iron, sizes of, 154 iron, to floor, 156 - to landing, 104, 107, 115 - to window sills, 190, 192, 193, 195, 204, 208, 212, 214 wood, 138 Tooled stone, 103 Tooth and bond, 14, 68 Top capping to loose boxes and stalls, 371 372 dressing to footpath, 499 floor doors and linings, 243 - rail to doors, 237, 253, 260, 262, 264 to gates, 254, 257, 315, 316, 317 shaped, 258 to shutter, 300 to washing troughs, 414 Torching to slates, 385 to tiles, 391 Touch up and paint, 478, 483, 483 Towel roller, 268, 278, 269, 271, 272, 272, 273, 275, 280, 281, 282 size of, 278 Tower bolts, 236, 247, 250, 251 T piece with plug for gas, 462 Trades, attend upon, 9, 143 Tradesmen's entrance door, 250 Transformer, 523 definition of, 514 Transome, 208, 209, 210, 211, 214, 246, 251, 252, 263 Transparency of glass, 469 Trap, access to gas pipes, 458 anti D, 420, 421 D, 421 door, covering to, 167, 168 glazed, 168 in ceiling, 265 in floor, 265 in roof, 167, 168, 171 on flat, 179, 180 grease, 29, 30 gully, 25, 29, 33, 35 lead, class of, 406 P, 421 rocks as metalling to roads, 505, 497 S, 412, 414, 414, 415, 416, 417, 417, 421, Trap, stench or gully, to stables, 373, 374, 375 to baths, 417, 417 to w.cs., 420, 421 Travelling expenses, 8 Traversing floors, 154, 158 Travises, 380 Tray or safe to cistern, 408, 419 rack, 275 Trays to coils, 364 Treads, 223, 224, 226, 229, 265 and risers, paint, 481, 480 stone, 118 Mason's patent, 231 Treatment of ironwork, 26 Tree nails, 3C8, 316, 311, 315, 317, 319, 322 sizes of, 310, 322 Trees, 325 Tree system of electric lighting, 511 Trellis or lattice work, 304, 305 to gates, 304 to porches, 304 Trenching out for drains, 22 Trentham boiler, 361, 362, 359 sizes of, 361 Trieste oak, 141 Trimmer, 148 arches, 71, 148 bolts to, 148 centres to, 143 hearth, 148 joists, 148 springer to, 143 Trimmers to traps, 265, 265 Trough closet, 422, 273 cow, 381, 382 feeding, 374 for bell wires, 466 for pipes in ground, 144, 405, 406, 46 L washing, 281 Trowelled face, 453, 453, 455 stucco, 444 Trumpet mouth overflow^ 409, 409 waste, 419 Trunk or box, size of, 235 Truss, iron and timber, 173 king post, 161, 160 and queen, 173 of hay, cubical contents of, 146 size of, 146 of straw, cubical contents of, 146 size of, 146 queen, 171, 160 and princess, 172, 160 uuframed king post, 170 Trussed partition, 188, 188, 189 purlin, 176 sizes for, 176 Trusses, half, 163, 161, 171 roof, distance apart of, 161 where extra strength required, 163 when not required, 163 Tubes, Tobin's, air inlet, 75 size of, 495 INDEX. 615 Tubing, electric bell, 466 gas, 458 ; and see under Gas Tubing wire bell, 465 Tuck pointing, 78 Tumbling in, 73, 86 Tunnelling to drains, 22 Turf, make good, 15 relay, 15, 27 remove surface, 39 Turnbuckle, 267, 269, 271, 295, 462 Turnpike road, width of, 497 Turkish baths and heating, 358 Turning pieces to arches, 143 Turpentine, spirits of, 479, 476 Turret, 169, 171 copper to, 439 - shingles to, 395 Twined straw bands, 396 Twine lines, 191, 195, 200 Tyings, noiseless, 373, 374, 378 Tylor's ball valve, 406, 412 column closet, 421 U. Uncoursed random rubble, 123, 123 rubble, 122, 123 Under counter, 302 Underlay, 427 Underpinning, brickwork in, 70 concrete in, 45 excavation to, 40 Union blinds, 207 ceiling, 303 sockets, 405 Unions, 409, 409, 409, 410, 411, 411, 414, 415, 416, 417, 419, 419, 419, 420, 429, 458, 464 Unit, Board of Trade, defined, 514 number of hours one lamp will burn at the expenditure of one, 514 of lamps supplied per hour from one, 514 Universal joint, 464 Up draught, assisted by gas, 463 size of gas pipes for, 463 Upper floors, flooring to, 156 Uprights, gate, 317 Urinal, automatic flush tank to, 424 basin, 423 cement sides to, 424 enamelled slate to, 424 - floor to, 388 inside house, 423 iron, 424 range of, 424, 424, 389 ' distance of divisions apart, 424 slate, 388 sparge pipe to, 424 supply to, 420 walls and floor to, 424 Urine and ironwork, 369 V. Vaccination, 18 Val de Traver's asphalt to roads, 509, 510 Valley boards, 164, 171 lead, 386, 400, 398, 391, 394 size of, 398 mitred, 386 rafter, 162, 171 - roof, 176 span of, 176 - tiles, 391, 393, 394 mitred, 392 weight of lead suitable for, 397, 397 Valleys, zinc, 435, 391 Valve box, 420 check, 425 closet, 420 Hellyer's Optimus, 420 - North British Plumbing Co.'s, 420 supply to, 420 with slop top, 423 holding-up, 424 - hydrant, 366 reflux, 368 retaining, 424, 424, 424 - safety, 430, 431, 431 screw-down to bath, 417, 417 to heating, 362, 363 throttle, 362, 363, 363, 365 Vane, 395, 402 Varnish and gilding, 482 black to hurdles, 383 bleaching out, 477 copal, 478, 481, 481, 482, 482, 477 - Coburg, 478, 477 counter, 302 - French oil, 478, 481, 485, 478 jet, to hurdles, 383 marble paper, 491 - Mander's, 478 on white paint, 477 tile paper, 491 to stable woodwork, 378 white enamel Coburg, 478, 477 Varnished tile paper, 491 Varnishing on timbers, 137 to blind laths, 207 to wood panelling, 219, 219, 221 Vaults, 71 centres to, 143 Vegetable bins, 278 sink, 413 soil, 39 Vein marble coil tops, 364 Veneer, mahogany, 141 walnut, 141 Veneered doors and linings, 245 old doors, 245 parquet floor, 159 riser, 226 Venetian blinds, 207, 201, 211, 213 box to, 2C6 6i6 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL Venetian blinds, boxing to, 211 - laths to, 207 - outside box to, 206 repairs to, 207 space required for, 211, 206 cased frames, 202, 203 with brick or stone mullion, 203 shutters, 202 Ventilating bead, 190, 191, 193, 195, 204 flues, 75 brackets for double harness, 375 gent's bridle and saddle, 375 - lady's ditto, 375 single harness, 375 - panelling, 371, 371, 372 pipe to drains, 30 to soil pipe, 420 -to w.c. valve box, 420 pipes in lead, weight of, 405 VENTILATION, 495 to 496 Ventilation, air inlets, position of, 495 size of, 495 - outlet flues, 495 outlets, position of, 495 size of, 495 and ranges, 354 - assisted by gas, 463, 463 between meeting rails, 495 - bore joists for, 143 by gas pendants, 496 Cooper's glass louvres as, 473, 474, 495 cow house, 382 drawers as air inlets, 495 fire grate as, 495 louvres for, 169, 171 - Moore's glass louvres as, 473, 474, 495 of rooms, 495 Tobin's tubes as air inlets for, 495 to joists, 151 - to skylights, 185, 185 - to stables, 377, 368 Ventilators, Cooper's glass, 473, 474, 495 sizes of, 474 hit-and-miss glass, 473 - Moore's glass, 473, 474, 495 sizes of, 474 - to bath, 268 - to dome skylight, 336 - to door, 249 to loose boxes, 373 to pavement lights, 474 - to shops, 297, 299, 299, 301 - to shutters, 301 to sick box, 378 - to stalls, 374 - Tobin tubes as, 292, 293 Verandah capping, 439 size of, 439 Verdigris, 439 Verge board, 174 tiles, 390 Verges, bed and point, 386, 392, 393, 394 Vermiculated blocks, 456 Vertical angle piece, 305, 305, 306 Vertical bars, 315, 316 glazing, 467 - rods, 316 slate damp course, 387 - slating, 387 struts to gates, 258 - ties, 315 - tiling, 392 timbers, 171 Vestibule cornice, 448 framing, 235 paving, 52 Victoria stone, 106 paving to footpaths, 501, 56 Vieille Montagne zinc, 434 Viscountess slates, 384 Visit site, 5 V-jointed boarding to doors, 252, 253, 253, 254, 260, 262, 265 - to cold store, 323 - to counter, 302 - to gates, 255, 257 to loose boxes, 223 - to roof, 165 - to stables, 223 - to stalls, 223 Voids, arches over, 74 Voltage and Board of Trade Regulations, 520 fall of, 520, 515, 516, 517 of incandescent lamps, 512, 513, 513, 513, 514, 515, 516, 522 in mains to private dwellings, 520 in street main, 520 of Sunbeam lamps, 512 Volt defined, 513, 515 Volume of water in pipes, 358, 359 Voussoirs in cement, 455 stone, 126 Vulcanised india-rubber bedding to glass, 467, 470, 471 joints to electric light wires, 519, 512 W. Wainscot, oak, 141 Walings, 326 Wall battens, 214, 214, 215 bracket defined, 517 where used, 517 gutters, 163 - hooks, 304, 406, 429, 458, 458 - sizes, 406 weight, 406 lining, marble, 133 plate, 149, 149, 151, 151, 152, 152, 163, 162, 171, 174, 175, 175, 175, 170, 176, 178, 179, 180 corbels to, 107 - posts, 187, 188 socket defined, 515 switch to, 520 where used, 515 - strings, 225, 226, 230 - tie rods to, 334 INDEX. 6l 7 , Wall ties, GO, 61, 90 . . to door and window frames* 131, 85, 260, 261, 263, 264 tiling, 81, 82, 83, 392 - wood panelling to, 218, 219, 220 in hard woods to, 219 with pilasters to, 220 Walls, battens to, 60 and plaster to, 450, 453, 454 - boulder flint, 86 to 89 brick, thickness of, required by London Building Act, 64 to 67 boundary, 84, 307 colouring to, 452, 485 concrete, 49, 60, 44 planking to, 143 requirements in London for, 49, 53 - river and sea, 93, 50, 60, 44 strength of, 49 - thickness of, 49 cover up, 10, 61 distempering to, 452, 485 division, to larder, 388 to wine cellar, 387 dwarf brick boundary, 86 - fender, 68 - flint, 86 to 89 and boulder boundary, 88, 89, 307 masonry, weight of, 86 garden, 41 - half brick, 77 hollow brick and stone, 60, 61 to cold store, 325 knapped boulder, 88 limewhiting to, 452 old, case in, 89, 127 plaster to, 449, 450 prepare surface of old, 14, 68 relimewhite, 83 repoint, 78 retaining, 90 to 94 thickness of, 91, 92 river and sea, 92, 93, 94, 50, 60, 325 - rubble stone boundary, 129, 130, 3J7 - sleeper, 68, 69, 110 to paving, 110 - to sink, 69, 389 atone, various, 121, 123 - thickness of, 123 required by London Building Act, 64 to 67 Walling, brick boundary, 84, 86, 307 - flint and boulder boundary, 88, 89, 307 - Kentish rag ashlar, 129 rubble fence and boundary, 129, 130 river, 92, 93, 94, 50, 60, 325 rubble in Malvern Hill, 130 stone boundary, 129, 130, 307 thickness of, 130 Walnut, American, 141 joinery, 141 =- veneer, 141 Ward's concrete paving to footpaths, 502 Warehouse floor, weight on, 146 Warehouse flooring, 157 j quantity of pipes for heating, 358 skirting to, 217 stairs, 232 Warm air, 324 Warming to buildings, see Heating, 358 (o 365 to rooms by stoves, 350 Warning pipe, 428 Warren girder, 332 Washable paper, 489 Wash, cement, 488 Wash-house paving, 54 Washing box, ceiling to, 376 fittings in, 376 - gas to, 368 - paving to, 363, 376 racking ring in, 376 - walls of, 376 - trough, 281 cold supply to, 410 - height of, 381 - hot supply to, 430 in iron, 414 in stoneware, 414 in wood, 414 - sizes of, 281, 414 - top to, 281, 414 Wash-leather bedding to glass, 196, 205, 228, 232, 236, 249, 250, 251, 295, 467, 470, 470, 471 Wash-out closet, 421, 422 - Hellyer's, 421 Wash, stop and whiten ceiling, 452 Waste pipe, 412, 413, 414, 414, 415, 416, 416, 416, 416, 417, 417 lead, weight of, 405 pewter, 413 Watchman, 9 Water, 43 amount required per cow, 382, 403 four-wheeled carriage, 403 horse, 403 person, 403 two- wheeled carriage, 403 and pressure of atmosphere, 40 i - bar, 182, 209, 211 - to door, 247 to pavement light, 474 - butt, 428 Water closet, angle, 270 back, 271 - bell to, 465 casings and fittings, 270, 271, 272 - children's, 270 height of, 270 cistern to, 419 clean out, 433 - door and linings, 240, 243, 245, 253, 254 - elbows, 271 - flap, 270, 271, 272 - French polish, 270, 271, 272 - gas to, 463 - Belly er's hygienic pedestal, 421 6i8 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Water closet, Hellyer's Optimus, 420 hopper, 422 in brickwork, 272 latrine, 422 North British Plumbing Co.'s, 420 - paint seats of, 270, 272, 272, 486 pan, 421 - paper to, 491, 491, 489 - pedestal, 421, 422 repairs to, 433 riser, 270, 271, 272 safe to, 421 seat, 270, 271, 272 height of, 270, 421 paint, 270, 272, 272, 486 size of, 270 - servants', 272, 421 - skylight to, 185 skirting to, 270, 272 slop top to, 423 soil pipe to, 420 - step to, 270, 270, 421 supply to, 420 - to stable, 369 - trap, 420, 421 - trough, 422 Tylor's Column, 421 valve, 420 wash-out, 421, 422 - window to, 193, 205, 212, 212, 84 glass to, 470 workmen's, 272 Water company, fees and notice to, 404 concrete under, 44 head of, 405, 420 hollowed frame, 208 meter, 408 sizes of, 408 number of gallons per cubic foot, 403 held by a 4 in. pipe, 403 - pot, 373, 374, 378 pressure per foot of column of, 404 salt, and piles, 142 sea, 44 stain, 478 supply in accordance with water com- pany's regulations, 404 to various positions, 403 to 433 ; and see under Supply - to footpath, 499 to roads, 498, 498, 504, 506, 506, 506 tongue to sills, 190, 192, 193, 195, 204, 208, 212, 214 - trunk, 427 lead lining to, 427 - waste preventer, 421, 423, 423 casing to, 421, 423, 423 height above closet of, 421 supply to, 420, 421 weight of distilled, 403 of sea, 403 per gallon of, 403 Waterlogged soils, 39 Water-tight, leave, 15 Watt defined, 513 Watts, number required per one 16-c.p. lamp, 513 per candle-power of lamp, 514 Wax polish door, 245 - fl-x>r, 158, 159, 484 old, 484 Weather boarding as fencing, 311,311, 312, 312 height of, 312, 312 in alternate heights, 312 - to cottages, 306 wrought, 307 - to roofs, 306 pitch of, 306 - to sheds, 305, 305, 306 various sections of, 307 - fillet, 392 joint pointing, 78 - stop to doors, 246, 247, 249, 250 Weathering, lead, to sills and string?, 433 piece to window, 307 - slate, 102, 111, 389 to half-timber-work, 321 Web, 332, 332, 332 depth of, 332 Webbing, 297 Wedge, rake and point to flashings, 68, 402, 434, 438 oak, to scarfing, 172 Weeping drain, 91, 92, 93 Weigh sashes, 190 Weight of asphalted felt, 160 - of barley, 146 of bells, 465 of boarding, 160 - of brickwork, 46, 62 of cast iron, 329 - lead, 329 - sheet lead, 397 of cement, 42 - of chalk, 90 - of clay, 90 -of coal, 146 of concrete, 46 of copper, 160 baths, 417, 418 of corrugated iron, 160 - of distilled water, 403 of door shoes, 347 of earth, 90 - of elm, 147 - of fir, 147 of flint masonry, 86 of gas pipes, block tin, 459 composition, 459 iron, 459 various, 459 of gravel, 90 of greenheart, 147 of hair felt, 189 of hay, 146 of horses, 146 INDEX. 619 Weight of lead roofing, 160 overflow pipe, 405 service pipe, 405 governed by head of water, 405 - soil pipe, 406, 420 ventilating pipe, 405 waste pipe, 405 of mahogany, 147 of marble, 132 of milled sheet lead, 397 of mud, 91 of nails, various, 154, 155, 161, 385 of oak, 147 of oats, 146 of partitions, 188 of pavings, various, 46 of people, 146 of pine, 147 of pitch pine, 147 of plaster, 441 of roof coverings, various, 160 of rubble, 90 of sand, 90 of sea water, 303 of sheet copper, 438 iron, 160 - lead, 397 zinc, 435 of shingle, 90 of slate, 387 of slates, 160 of sludge, 91 of snow, 160 of soil pipe, 406, 420 of soils, various, 90 - of steel, 329 of stones, various, 103 of straw, 146 of teak, 147 of thatch, 160 of tin pipe, 438 of water per cubic foot, 403 per gallon, 403 of wheat, 146 of wood block flooring, 46 of wrought iron, 329 of zinc, 160 on concrete roofs and flats, 49 - on flats, 178 - on floors, 146, 148 fireproof, 46 of dwelling houses, 146 of factories, 146 of lecture halls, 146 of mills, 146 of offices, 146 of public buildings, 146 - of schools, 146 of warehouses, 146 partitions, 188 Weights, balance, 265 sash, 191, 196, 205, 206 to shutters, 200 Welded wrought-iron range boiler, 430, 429, 429 Well, excavate for, 40 fresh water, 94 pump to, 94 rain water, 34 ' pump to, 34 sizes, 34 - silt, 31 staircases, 224, 226 Welted joint, 401, 402, 402, 435, 438, 438, 438, 438, 438, 439, 439 double, 438 Wenham lamp, 463 consumption of gas by, 463 sizes of, 463 Westmoreland slates, 385 Wet gas meters, 462 Wheat, space occupied by, 146 stack, 396 Wheaten straw, 396 Wheels, bushed, 243, 259 small, 201, 202, 276, 285, 286 Whinstones as macadam to roads, 505 Whip rack, 375 White deal, 140, 140, 155 enamel paint, 477 varnish, 477 fir, 137, 140 - lead, 478, 479, 476, 477 Champion's old, 478 - paint, 478, 476, 477 where suitable, 477 pine, 140 Whitening, composition of, 443, 478 leave work to dry before, 477 to ceilings, soffits, coves, cornices and centre flowers, 452, 484 to old ceiling, 452 where used, 443 Whitewash, composition of, 443, 443, 478 where used, 443 Whitewashing to old work, 452 - walls, 452, 485 Whitworth threads, 330 Wicket gate, 255, 257, 259, 297, 313, 316, 316, 308 sizes of, 316, 313 Width of footpaths, 497, 498, 499 of roads, 497, 498 - of stairs, 223, 224, 226 Wind, pressure of, 160, 178 resistance of, 99 Winders, stone, 116, 117, 119 wood, 223, 224, 226 Winding cheek, 355 Window backs, 196, 197, 198, 200, 209 - canvas and paint, 190, 196, 198 cement to, 451 render against, 196, 200 bay, 192 board, 192, 194, 197, 204, 205, 209 perforated, 293 dressings in stone, 126, 128 620 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Window frames, bed, 138 build in, 138 - paint, 189 secure, 138 guard in stables and sick box, 375, 378 inquiry, 205 linings, various, see Linings to Windows and Shutters nosing, 191, 196, 198, 204, 209 shop, 295 frame to, 295 sills, height of, 190 Windows, basement, 190, 195 cast-iron, 347 preparation for glazing to, 347 circular sweep on plan, 191, 194, 197, 209 clean, 17, 487 - cow house, 382 - dormer, 169, 171, 205 double sets of, 204, 211 of, with Venetian blinds between, 204,211 elliptical, semicircular or segmental headed, 191, 194, 196, 197, 199, 209 - first and second floor, 206, 208 - glazing to, 470, 470, 470 to bath room, 470 to w.c., 470 - in 9 in. waUs, 190, 191, 192, 193 - in 14 in. walls, 193 to 201 ironmongery to, 142 larder, 205, 289, 289, 388, 193 - louvred, 212, 213, 289, 289, 388, 205 old, reused, 144 shutters and blinds to, 189 to 214 - stable, 375 to billiard room, 149 to cottages, 307 to farm buildings, 213 to half-timber work, 332 - to servants' offices, 190 to 195 to sheds, 305 various, see under Cased Frames and Sashes, and Casement Frames and Casements w.c., 193, 205, 212, 212, 84 - with boxing shutter?, 197, 209 -- wrought-iron, 347, 348 Wind, pressure of, 160, 178 resistance of, 99 Wine bins, iron, 387, 290 terra-cotta, 387, 290 - cellar, 290 division wall in, 387 - slate slabs to, 387, 290 Wings, slate, 386 to tile ridges, 391 Wiped solder joint, 404, 406, 420, 421 Wire bells, 465 ; and see under Bells blinds, 207 fly netting, 205, 292, 388 gauze, 292 globes, 368, 368 Wire gratings to rain-water heads, 343 netting protection to heating pipes, 365 netting to floors, 153 rope lightning conductor, 439, 440 - roses, 342, 400, 401, 420, 421, 423 Wires or cables for electric light, bunching of, 520 carrying capacity of, 520 casings to, 521 to, position of, 518 to, size of, 521 class of, 519 conductivity of, 519 current density of, 520 different colours to, 520 distance to take, 515, 516, 517 fall of potential in, 515, 516, 517 of voltage in, 515, 516 in ground, 518 in separate circuits, 523 in small circuits, 520, 515 insulation resistance o f ', 519 - to, 519 joints to, 512, 519 to be dispensed with in, 512 - least size of, 520 mains, 522 - metal for, 515 overheating of, 514 position of, 520 safe working current den- sity of, 515, 516 sizes of, 516, 515 ; specify large, 517 table of working sizes of, 515, 516 through walls, 518 to a great distance, 516, 517 under floors, 518 Wiring for electric light, distributing board system of, 522, 511, 512 - denned, 512 - schedule of, 523 to 526 - tree system of, 511, 511 defined, 511 two methods of, 511 Withes, brick, 72 stone, 126 Wood, bass, 140 bath, 416 - block flooring, 53, 158 on old floor, 158 weight of, 46 - paving, 53, 158 - to road?, 508, 508, 497 - fir, 508 - grout to, 508, 509 Jarrnh, 508 INDEX. 621 Wood block paving to roads, Karri, 508 sizes of, 508 where suitable, 508 bricks, 142, 143 distance apart of, 142 - columns, 220, 221 lignum vitae, 201 - blocks, 276, 285, 286 paving, creosote to, 142 pilasters, 220 stairs, see Staircase in Wood walnut, 141 washing troughs, 414 Woods, various, see under Timber weight of various, 147 Woodwork, how to finish for paint, 477 repairs to, 493 to be dry for painting, 476 to be specially prepared for enamel paint- ing, 476 Work executed in two materials, 18 Working load of copper wire cord, 440 - table, 279, 286 Workmanship, quality of, 8 Workmen not to wander about premises, 13 Workmen's w.c., 272 Wreaths, 228 Wrenches, 366, 367 Wrought iron, architect's tests for, 329 -- Best Best South Staffordshire, 329 -- box girders, 332 carbon in, 329 casements, 348 columns, various, 342 doors, 348 party wall, 348 sizes of, 348 ange - flitch flitch plates, 334 girders, safe load on, 331 stress of, 332 hot- water pipes, 429 boilers, 430, 431, 429, 429 -- in plates, bars, tees and angles, 329 -- lattice girders, 332 Lowmoor, 329 -- party wall doors, 348 -- sizes of, 348 planing to, 329 plate girders, 332 quality of, 329 rivets, bolts, nuts and straps, 329 S. C. Crown, 329 stanchions, various, 342 tensile stress of, 329 -- of rivets in, 330 -- Warren girder, 332 - weight of, 329 welded gas tubing, 458, 459, 461 sizes of, 459 weight of, 459 where employed, 329 windows, 347, 348 Y. Yard lamp, 464 stable, draw-off in, 376 covering to, 376 gas to, 368 lamp to, 368 paving to, 368 rings in, 376 size of, 368 Yellow deal, 139, 140 - fir, 137, 139 pine, 140 York core to cement cornice, 456, 456 gully stones, 113 York stone area kerbs, 111, 112 steps, 118 balcony, 113 bases to door and posts, 113 channels, 113 chimney pieces, plain, 112 circular staircases in, 117, 117, 118 coping, 111, 85 entrance steps, 119 gallery, 117 gate piers, 114 -r generally, 105 to 119 hard, 105 hearths, 112 hinge and lock stones in, 114 paving generally, 55 relay old, 110 to areas, 109 to basement, 109 to cellars, 109 to footpaths, 500, 501, 497, 110 thickness of, 501 - to kitchen, 109, 110 to passages, 109 to scullery, 109 to stables, 114 to terrace, 110 Robin Hood, 105 Scotgate Ash, 105 sills, 111 sinks, 113, 83 staircases, 115 to 119 step, repairs to, 114 various kinds of, 105, 106 . - terrace and garden steps, 118 thresholds, 110 - to stables, 114 Yorkshire stone generally, 105 to 119 Zinc, acids and, 435 and acids, 435 and sea air, 435 and solder, 434 aprons, 435 bars to glazing, 473 various patents for, 473 - where used, 473 622 SPECIFICATIONS IN DETAIL. Zinc bath, 418 japanned, 418 quality of, 418 size of, 418 box gutter, 434 cesspool, 434 eaves gutter, 436 sizes of, 436 flashings, 434, 434, 435 flat, 434 boarding under, 435 felt to, 435 - fold to, 435 Italian, roofing in, 435, 436 lined cistern, 436 tray to ice chamber, 325 lining to corn bins, 376, 377 to ice chamber, 324, 324 to Tobin's tubes, 293 to vegetable bins, 278 nails, 306 weight of, 385 oxide of, 477 parting slips, 190, 193, 195, 199 perforated, to larders, 205, 289, 289, 185 Zinc rain-water pipe, 436 - roll cap, 434, 434 roofing, drip to, 434 generally, 434 pitch to, 434, 434 tray to ice chamber, 325 ridge rolls to, 435 - rolls or fillets for, 434, 434, 435, 430 distance apart, 434, 434 Vieille Montagne, 434 where suitable, 435 saddle piece, 434 sheet, 434 sheets, gauge of, 435 size of, 435 weight of, 435 soakers, 435 sparge pipe, 436 tubing to bells, 465, 466 - valley, 435, 391 weight of, 160 - welt to, 435 - white, 477, 477 where suitable, 477 ZINCWORKER, 434 to 437 Zincwork, repairs to, 492 LONDON : PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, STAMFORD 8TRF.KT AND CHARING CROSS. W. H. HARLING'S Drawing Instruments ARE ACKNOWLEDGED BY ALL WHO USE THEM TO BE THE BEST IN THE MARKET, VERY GREAT CARE is taken in their manufacture, and EVERY PIECE is examined by a competent workman before leaving the factory. SPECIAL POCKET CASES, containing good sound instruments of my own manufacture, but not extra finish (recommended) : 72 1 A MOROCCO CASE, containing the following electrum instruments : 6-inch double-jointed, needle- pointed compass, ink and pencil points, and lengthening bar ink and pencil double-jointed, needle- pointed bows set of three spring bows hair divider two drawing pens, and ivory scale, 3 3s. 72 IB Ditto, ditto, but without set of three spring bows, 2 10s. No. 72 1 A. 717 MAHOGANY CASE, 7|x5Jxi|, con- taining : 6-inch electrum pencil compass, with double knee-joints and needle point, ink point and lengthening bar 5-inch sector joint divider one each ink and pencil needle-pointed bows one each ink and pencil needle-pointed spring bows two drawing pens 6-inch ivory protractor 6-inch ivory scale two transparent set squares and two pearwood curves, 3. \ No. 717. 7I7A MAHOGANY CASE, as above, but fitted with plain steel points to compass, bows, and spring bows, and boxwood, instead of ivory, rules, 2 8s. 6d. W. H. HARLING, 47 Finsbury Pavement, London, E.G. Contractor to H.M. War Department, Admiralty, Council of India, &c. ESTABLISHED 1851. Regd. Telegr, Address, CLINOQRAPH, LONDON. ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE of Drawing Instruments, Boards, Set Squares, Tee Squares, Drawing Papers, &c., Post Free on application. RETURN CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT TO ^ 202 Main Library LOAN PERIOD 1 HOME USE 2 3 4 5 6 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS Renewals and Recharges may be made 4 days prior to the due date. Books may be Renewed by calling 642-3405. DUE AS STAMPED BELOW MAY 29R0 FORM NO. DD6, UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY BERKELEY, CA 94720